This report describes research done at the Artificial Intelligence Laboratory of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Support for the laboratory’s artificial intelligence research is provided in part by the Advanced Research Projects Agency of the Department of Defense under Office of Naval Research Contract number N00014-80-C-0505.
The Lisp Machine manual describes both the language and the operating system of the Lisp Machine. The language, a dialect of Lisp called Zetalisp, is completely documented by this manual. The software environment and operating-system-like parts of the system contain many things which are still in a state of flux. This manual confines itself primarily to the stabler parts of the system. It describes how to program, but not for the most part how to operate the machine. The window system is documented separately in the Lisp Machine Window System manual.
Any comments, suggestions, or criticisms will be welcomed. Please send to BUG-LISPM..
Portions of this manual were written by Mike McMahon and Alan Bawden. The chapter on the LOOP iteration macro is mostly a reprint of Laboratory for Computer Science memo TM-169, by Glenn Burke. Sarah Smith, Meryl Cohen and Richard Ingria of LMI, and Richard Mlynarik of MIT, helped to correct the manual.
The Lisp Machine is a product of the efforts of many people too numerous to list here and of the former unique unbureaucratic, free-wheeling and cooperative environment of the M.I.T Artificial Intelligence Laboratory. I believe that the commercialization of computer software has harmed the spirit which enabled such systems to be developed. Now I am attempting to build a software-sharing movement to revive that spirit from near oblivion.
Since January 1984 I have been working primarily on the development of GNU, a complete Unix-compatible software system for standard hardware architectures, to be shared freely with everyone just like EMACS. This will enable people to use computers and be good neighbors legally (a good neighbor allows his neighbors to copy any generally useful software he has a copy of). This project has inspired a growing movement of enthusiastic supporters. Just recently the first free portable C compiler compiled itself. If you would like to contribute to GNU, write to me at the address above. Restrain social decay–help get programmers sharing again.
The Lisp Machine is a new computer system designed to provide a high-performance and economical implementation of the Lisp language. It is a personal computation system, which means that processors and main memories are not time-multiplexed: when using a Lisp Machine, you get your own processor and memory system for the duration of the session. It is designed this way to relieve the problems of running large Lisp programs on time-sharing systems. Everything on the Lisp Machine is written in Lisp, including all system programs; there is never any need to program in machine language. The system is highly interactive.
The Lisp Machine executes a new dialect of Lisp called Zetalisp, developed at the M.I.T Artificial Intelligence Laboratory for use in artificial intelligence research and related fields. It was originally based on the Maclisp dialect, and attempts to maintain a good degree of compatibility with Maclisp, while also providing many improvements and new features. Maclisp, in turn, was based on Lisp 1.5.
Common Lisp is a Lisp dialect designed to standardize all the various Lisp systems derived from Maclisp. Zetalisp today is nearly a superset of Common Lisp, but there are a few important incompatibilities between them, in places where Common Lisp involves an incompatible change which is deemed to severe to impose on traditional Zetalisp users. There is a special mode which provides strict Common Lisp compatibility. See common-lisp for more information.
This document is the reference manual for the Zetalisp language. This document is not a tutorial, and it sometimes refers to functions and concepts that are not explained until later in the manual. It is assumed that you have a basic working knowledge of some Lisp dialect; you will be able to figure out the rest of the language from this manual.
There are also facilities explained in this manual that are not really part of the Lisp language. Some of these are subroutine packages of general use, and others are tools used in writing programs. The Lisp Machine window system and the major utility programs are, or ought to be, documented in other manuals.
The manual starts out with an explanation of the language. Chapter object-chapter explains the different primitive types of Lisp object and presents some basic predicate functions for testing types. Chapter evaluator-chapter explains the process of evaluation, which is the heart of the Lisp language. Chapter flow-chapter introduces the basic Lisp control structures.
The next several chapters explain the details of the various primitive data-types of the language and the functions that deal with them. Chapter cons-chapter deals with conses and the higher-level structures that can be built out of them, such as trees, lists, association lists, and property lists. Chapter symbol-chapter deals with symbols, chapter number-chapter with the various kinds of numbers, and chapter array-chapter with arrays. Chapter string-chapter explains character strings, which are a special kind of array.
After this there are some chapters that explain more about functions, function-calling, and related matters. Chapter function-chapter presents all the kinds of functions in the language, explains function-specs, and tells how to manipulate definitions of functions. Chapters closure-chapter and stack-group-chapter discuss closures and stack-groups, two facilities useful for creating coroutines and other advanced control and access structures.
Next, a few lower-level issues are dealt with. Chapter locative-chapter explains locatives, which are a kind of pointer to memory cells. Chapter subprimitive-chapter explains the “subprimitive” functions, which are primarily useful for implementation of the Lisp language itself and the Lisp Machine’s operating system. Chapter area-chapter discusses areas, which give you control over storage allocation and locality of reference.
Chapter compiler-chapter discusses the Lisp compiler, which converts Lisp programs into “machine language” or “macrocode”. Chapter macros-chapter explains the Lisp macro facility, which allows users to write their own extensions to Lisp, extending both the interpreter and the compiler. The next two chapters go into detail about two such extensions, one that provides a powerful iteration control structure (chapter loop-chapter), and one that provides a powerful data structure facility (chapter defstruct-chapter).
Chapter flavor-chapter documents flavors, a language facility to provide generic functions using the paradigm used in Smalltalk and related languages, called “object-oriented programming” or “message passing”. Flavors are widely used by the system programs of the Lisp Machine, as well as being available to the user as a language feature.
The next few chapters discuss I/O: chapter io-chapter explains I/O streams and character and line level operations; chapter expression-io-chapter explains reading and printing symbolic expressions; chapter pathname-chapter explains naming of files; chapter file-io-chapter explains input and output to files. Chapter chaos-chapter describes the use of the Chaosnet.
Chapter package-chapter describes the package system, which allows many name spaces within a single Lisp environment. Chapter system-chapter documents the “system” facility that helps you create and maintain systems, which are programs that reside in many files.
Chapter process-chapter discusses the facilities for multiple processes and how to write programs that use concurrent computation. Chapter error-chapter explains how exceptional conditions (errors) can be handled by programs, handled by users, and debugged. Chapter code-chapter explains the instruction set of the Lisp Machine and tells you how to examine the output of the compiler. Chapter query-chapter documents some functions for querying the user, chapter time-chapter explains some functions for manipulating dates and times, and chapter misc-chapter contains other miscellaneous functions and facilities.
There are several conventions of notation and various points that should be understood before reading the manual. This section explains those conventions.
The symbol ‘=>’ is used to indicate evaluation in
examples. Thus, when you see ‘foo
=> nil
’, this means that
“the result of evaluating foo
is (or would have
been) nil
”.
The symbol ‘==>’ is used to indicate macro expansion
in examples. This, when you see ‘(foo bar)
==> (aref bar 0)
’,
this means that “the result of macro-expanding (foo bar)
is (or would have been) (aref bar 0)
”.
A typical description of a Lisp function looks like this:
The function-name
function adds together arg1 and arg2,
and then multiplies the result by arg3. If arg3 is not provided,
the multiplication isn’t done. function-name
then returns a list
whose first element is this result and whose second element is arg4.
Examples:
(function-name 3 4) => (7 4) (function-name 1 2 2 'bar) => (6 bar)
Note the use of fonts (typefaces). The name of the function is
in bold-face in the first line of the description, and the arguments are
in italics. Within the text, printed representations of Lisp objects
are in a different bold-face font, as in (+ foo 56)
, and argument
references are italicized, as in arg1 and arg2. A different,
fixed-width font, as in function-name
, is used for Lisp examples
that are set off from the text. Other font conventions are that
filenames are in bold-face, all upper case (as in SYS: SYS; SYSDCL
LISP
) while keys on the keyboard are in bold-face and capitalized
(as in Help
, Return
and Meta
).
‘Car’, ‘cdr’ and ‘cons’ are in bold-face when the actual Lisp objects are being mentioned, but in the normal text font when used as words.
The word ‘&optional’ in the list of arguments tells you that all
of the arguments past this point are optional. The default value can be
specified explicitly, as with arg4 whose default value is the result
of evaluating the form (foo 3)
. If no default value is specified,
it is the symbol nil
. This syntax is used in lambda-lists in the
language, which are explained in lambda-list. Argument lists may
also contain ‘&rest’ and ‘&key’ to indicate rest and keyword arguments.
The descriptions of special forms and macros look like this:
This evaluates form three times and returns the result of the third evaluation.
This evaluates the forms with the symbol foo
bound to nil
.
It expands as follows:
(with-foo-bound-to-nil form1 form2 ...) ==> (let ((foo nil)) form1 form2 ...)
Since special forms and macros are the mechanism by which the syntax of Lisp
is extended, their descriptions must describe both their syntax and their
semantics; functions follow a simple consistent set of rules, but each
special form is idiosyncratic. The syntax is displayed on the first line
of the description using the following conventions. Italicized words are
names of parts of the form which are referred to in the descriptive text.
They are not arguments, even though they resemble the italicized words in
the first line of a function description. Parentheses (‘(
’ and ‘)
’) stand for themselves.
Square brackets (‘[
’ and `]
’) indicate that what they enclose is optional.
Ellipses (‘...
’) indicate that the subform (italicized word or parenthesized
list) that precedes them may be repeated any number of times (possibly no times at all).
Curly brackets followed by ellipses (‘{
’ and ‘}...
’) indicate that what they
enclose may be repeated any number of times. Thus the first line of the
description of a special form is a “template” for what an instance of that
special form would look like, with the surrounding parentheses removed.
The syntax of some special forms is sufficiently complicated
that it does not fit comfortably into this style; the first line of the
description of such a special form contains only the name, and the syntax is
given by example in the body of the description.
The semantics of a special form includes not only what it “does for a living”, but also which subforms are evaluated and what the returned value is. Usually this will be clarified with one or more examples.
A convention used by many special forms is that all of their subforms after
the first few are described as ‘body...
’. This means that the remaining
subforms constitute the “body” of this special form; they are Lisp forms that
are evaluated one after another in some environment established by the special
form.
This ridiculous special form exhibits all of the syntactic features:
This twiddles the parameters of frob, which defaults to default-frob
if not specified. Each parameter is the name of one of the adjustable parameters of
a frob; each value is what value to set that parameter to. Any number
of parameter/value pairs may be specified. If any options are specified,
they are keywords that select which safety checks to override while twiddling
the parameters. If neither frob nor any options are specified, the
list of them may be omitted and the form may begin directly with the first
parameter name.
frob and the values are evaluated; the parameters and options are syntactic keywords and not evaluated. The returned value is the frob whose parameters were adjusted. An error is signaled if any safety checks are violated.
Operations, the message-passing equivalent of ordinary Lisp’s functions, are described in this style:
flavor-name
: :operation-name arg1 arg2 &optional arg3 ¶This is the documentation of the effect of performing operation
:operation-name
(or, sending a message named :operation-name
),
with arguments arg1, arg2, and arg3, on an instance of
flavor flavor-name
.
Descriptions of variables (“globally special” variables) look like this:
The variable typical-variable
has a typical value....
If the description says ‘Constant’ rather than ‘Variable’, it means that the value is never set by the system and should not be set by you. In some cases the value is an array or other structure whose contents may be changed by the system or by you.
Most numbers in this manual are decimal; octal numbers are
labelled as such, using #o
if they appear in examples. Currently
the default radix for the Lisp Machine system is eight, but this will be
changed in the near future. If you wish to change to base ten now, see
the documentation on the variables *read-base*
and *print-base*
(*read-base*-var).
All uses of the phrase ‘Lisp reader’, unless further qualified,
refer to the part of Lisp that reads characters from I/O streams
(the read
function), and not the person reading this manual.
There are several terms that are used widely in other references on Lisp, but are not used much in this document since they have become largely obsolete and misleading. For the benefit of those who may have seen them before, they are: ‘s-expression’, which means a Lisp object; ‘dotted pair’, which means a cons; and ‘atom’, which means, roughly, symbols and numbers and sometimes other things, but not conses. The terms ‘list’ and ‘tree’ are defined in list-and-tree.
The characters acute accent ('
) (also called "single quote") and
semicolon (‘;
’) have special meanings when typed to Lisp; they are
examples of what are called macro characters. Though the
mechanism of macro characters is not of immediate interest to the new
user, it is important to understand the effect of these two, which are
used in the examples.
When the Lisp reader encounters a "'
", it reads in the next
Lisp object and encloses it in a quote
special form. That
is, 'foo-symbol
turns into (quote foo-symbol)
, and '(cons 'a 'b)
turns into (quote (cons (quote a) (quote b)))
. The reason
for this is that quote
would otherwise have to be typed in very
frequently, and would look ugly.
The semicolon is used as a commenting character. When the
Lisp reader sees one, the remainder of the line is
discarded.
The character ‘/
’ is used for quoting strange characters so
that they are not interpreted in their usual way by the Lisp reader,
but rather are treated the way normal alphabetic characters are treated.
So, for example, in order to give a ‘/
’ to the reader, you must type ‘//
’,
the first ‘/
’ quoting the second one. When a character
is preceded by a ‘/
’ it is said to be escaped. Escaping
also turns off the effects of macro characters such as "'
" and ‘;
’.
If you select Common Lisp syntax, escaping is done with ‘\
’ instead,
and ‘/
’ has no special syntactic significance.
The manual uses traditional syntax throughout, however.
The following characters also have special meanings
and may not be used in symbols without escaping. These characters
are explained in detail in the section on printed representation
(reader).
"
Double-quote delimits character strings.
#
Sharp-sign introduces miscellaneous reader macros.
`
Backquote is used to construct list structure.
,
Comma is used in conjunction with backquote.
:
Colon is the package prefix.
|
Characters between pairs of vertical-bars are escaped.
circleX
Circle-cross lets you type in characters using their octal codes.
All Lisp code in this manual is written in lower case. In fact, the reader turns all symbols into upper case, and consequently everything prints out in upper case. You may write programs in whichever case you prefer.
You will see various symbols that have the colon (:
)
character in their names. The colon and the characters preceding it
are not actually part of the symbol name, but in early stages of
learning the system you can pretend that they are. Actually they
are a package prefix. See chapter package-chapter for an explanation
of packages and what package prefixes really do.
Symbols whose names start with si:
are internal to the
system. These functions and variables are documented here because they
are things you sometimes need to know about. However, they are subject
to change with little concern for compatibility for users.
Zetalisp is descended from Maclisp, and a good deal of effort was expended to try to allow Maclisp programs to run in Zetalisp. Throughout the manual, there are notes about differences between the dialects. For the new user, it is important to note that many functions herein exist solely for Maclisp compatibility; they should not be used in new programs. Such functions are clearly marked in the text.
The Lisp Machine character set is not quite the same as that
used on I.T.S nor on Multics; it is described in full detail in
character-set. The important thing to note for now is that the
character “newline” is the same as Return
, and is represented by the
number 215 octal. (This number should not be built into any
programs.)
When the text speaks of “typing Control-Q
” (for example),
this means to hold down the Control
key on the keyboard (either of
the two keys labeled ‘CTRL’), and, while holding it down, to strike the
Q
key. Similarly, to type Meta-P
, hold down either of the
Meta
keys and strike P
. To type Control-Meta-T
hold down
both Control
and Meta
. Unlike ASCII, the Lisp machine character
set does not simply label a few of the characters as “control
characters”; Control
and Meta
(and Super
and Hyper
) are
modifiers that can be attached to any character and are represented as
separate bits. These
modifier bits are not present in characters in strings or files.
Many of the functions refer to “areas”. The area feature is of interest only to writers of large systems and can be safely disregarded by the casual user. It is described in chapter area-chapter.
Common Lisp is the name of a standardization project whose goal was to establish a compatible subset for Lisp systems descended from Maclisp.
Originally it was hoped that Zetalisp and the Lisp Machine system could be changed to become a superset of Common Lisp; but this proved impossible because the final Common Lisp design includes several incompatible changes to widely used functions, which, while of no fundamental importance, would make most user programs fail to work. Therefore it was necessary to make Common Lisp a separate mode of operation. The incompatibilities fall into two classes:
*
Read syntax: Common Lisp specifies ‘\
’ as the single-character escape
character rather than the traditional ‘/
’. A few other constructs,
such as character objects and complex numbers, are also written incompatibly.
*
Specific functions: many Lisp functions of ancient pedigree, including
member
, assoc
, subst
, union
, terpri
, close
and //
are specified to be incompatible with their traditional behavior.
The read syntax incompatibilities have been dealt with by having separate
readtables for traditional and Common Lisp syntax. The
incompatibilities in functions have been dealt with by means of reader
symbol substitutions. For each function changed incompatibly, such as
member
, a new, distinct symbol exists in a package called cli
(“Common Lisp Incompatible”); for example, cli:member
. The function
definition of the symbol member
is the traditional definition, while
that of cli:member
is the Common Lisp definition. In Common Lisp
programs, the reader is directed to replace member
with
cli:member
wherever it is seen. So traditional and Common Lisp
programs both get the member
functions they expect. Programs
written in traditional syntax can refer to the new cli
functions
with explicit cli:
package prefixes. Programs written in Common Lisp
syntax can refer to the traditional symbols with explicit global:
package prefixes, but this is not expected to be necessary in code.
The symbol replacements are under control of the current readtable,
so that the Common Lisp readtable is responsible for causing
cli:close
to replace close
and so on.
In this manual, the incompatible Common Lisp functions are documented
under names starting with cli:
, the names by which a traditional
program could refer to them. Keep in mind that, in Common Lisp programs,
the cli:
would be omitted. A list of symbols which
have incompatible Common Lisp substitutes can be found by looking up
cli:
in the function and variable indices.
Traditional read syntax is used nearly everywhere in the manual.
This includes the use of ‘/
’ as an escape character, the escaping of
‘/
’ itself, and not escaping the character ‘\
’, which in traditional
syntax is not special. It is up to the user to make appropriate
modifications to express the same Lisp object in Common Lisp syntax when
necessary.
The majority of Common Lisp changes, those that are upward compatible, have been incorporated directly into Zetalisp and are documented in this manual with no special notice.
Common Lisp read syntax and function definitions may be used either in files or interactively.
For listen loops, including Lisp Listener windows, break loops and the
debugger, the choice of syntax and function semantics is made by setting the
variable readtable
to the appropriate readtable (see si:common-lisp-readtable-var)
or most simply by calling the function common-lisp
.
If flag is t
, selects Common Lisp syntax and function definitions.
If flag is nil
, selects traditional syntax and function definitions.
In either case, this controls the reading of the following expressions that
you type in the same process. It works by setting readtable
.
In a file, Common Lisp is requested by writing the attribute
Readtable: Common-Lisp;
in the -*-
file’s line. This controls
both loading or compiling the file and evaluation or compilation in the
editor while visiting the file. Readtable: Traditional;
specifies
the use of traditional syntax and function definitions. If neither
attribute is present, the file is processed using whatever syntax is
selected in the process that loads it. See file-attribute-list.
Reading and printing done by programs are controlled by the same things
that control reading of programs. They can also be controlled explicitly
by binding the variable readtable
.
This section enumerates some of the various different primitive types of objects in Zetalisp. The types explained below include symbols, conses, various types of numbers, two kinds of compiled code objects, locatives, arrays, stack groups, and closures.
A symbol (these are sometimes called “atoms” or “atomic symbols” by other texts) has a print name, a value, a definition, a property list, and a package.
The print name is a string, which may be obtained by the
function symbol-name
(symbol-name-fun). This string serves as the
printed representation (see printer) of the symbol.
Each symbol
has a value, which may be any
Lisp object. This is the value of the symbol when regarded as a dynamic variable.
It is also referred to sometimes as the “contents of the
value cell”, since internally every symbol has a cell called the value
cell, which holds the value. It is accessed by the symeval
function (symeval-fun), and updated by the set
function
(set-fun). (That is, given a symbol, you use symeval
to find out
what its value is, and use set
to change its value.)
Each
symbol has a definition, which may also be any Lisp object. It is
also referred to as the “contents of the function cell”, since
internally every symbol has a cell called the function cell, which
holds the definition. The definition can be accessed by the
fsymeval
function (fsymeval-fun), and updated with fset
(fset-fun), although usually the functions fdefinition
and
fdefine
are employed (fdefine-fun).
The property list is a list of an even number of
elements; it can be accessed directly by plist
(plist-fun), and
updated directly by setplist
(setplist-fun), although usually the
functions get
, putprop
, and remprop
(get-fun) are used.
The property list is used to associate any number of additional
attributes with a symbol–attributes not used frequently enough to
deserve their own cells as the value and definition do.
Symbols also have a package cell, which indicates which package of names the symbol belongs to. This is explained further in the section on packages (chapter package-chapter) and can be disregarded by the casual user.
The primitive function for creating symbols is
make-symbol
(make-symbol-fun), although most symbols
are created by read
, intern
, or
fasload
(which call make-symbol
themselves.)
A cons is an object that cares about two
other objects, arbitrarily named the car and the cdr.
These objects can be accessed with car
and cdr
(car-fun), and updated
with rplaca
and rplacd
(rplaca-fun). The primitive function for creating
conses is cons
(cons-fun).
There are several kinds of numbers in Zetalisp. Fixnums represent integers in the range of -2^24 to 2^24-1. Bignums represent integers of arbitrary size, but they are more expensive to use than fixnums because they occupy storage and are slower. The system automatically converts between fixnums and bignums as required. Floats are floating-point numbers. Short floats are another kind of floating-point numbers, with less range and precision, but less computational overhead. Ratios are exact rational numbers that are represented with a numerator and a denominator, which are integers. Complexnums are numbers that have explicitly represented real and imaginary parts, which can be any real numbers of the same type. See number for full details of these types and the conversions between them.
A character object is much like a fixnum except that its type is distinguishable. Common Lisp programs use character objects to represent characters. Traditional programs usually use fixnums to represent characters, although they can create an manipulate character objects when they desire. Character objects behave like fixnums when used in arithmetic; only a few operations make any distinction. They do, however, print distinctively. See characters for more information.
The usual form of compiled, executable code is a Lisp object, called a “Function Entry Frame” or “FEF” for historical reasons. A FEF contains the code for one function. This is analogous to what Maclisp calls a “subr pointer”. FEFs are produced by the Lisp Compiler (compiler), and are usually found as the definitions of symbols. The printed representation of a FEF includes its name so that it can be identified. Another kind of Lisp object that represents executable code is a “microcode entry”. These are the microcoded primitive functions of the Lisp system, and any user functions compiled into microcode.
About the only useful thing to do with any of these compiled code objects
is to apply it to arguments. However, some functions are
provided for examining such objects, for user convenience. See
arglist
(arglist-fun),
args-info
(args-info-fun),
describe
(describe-fun),
and disassemble
(disassemble-fun).
A locative (see locative) is a kind of a pointer to a single memory cell
anywhere in the system. The contents of this cell can be accessed by cdr
(see cdr-fun) and updated by rplacd
(see rplacd-fun).
An array (see array) is a set of cells indexed by a tuple of integer subscripts. The contents of the cells may be accessed and changed individually. There are several types of arrays. Some have cells that may contain any object, while others (numeric arrays) may only contain small positive numbers. Strings are a type of array; the elements are character objects.
A list is not a primitive data type, but rather a data structure
made up out of conses and the symbol nil
. See list-and-tree.
A predicate is a function that tests for some condition involving
its arguments and returns the symbol t
if the condition is true, or
the symbol nil
if it is not true. The following predicates are for
testing what data type an object has.
By convention, the names of predicates usually end in the letter ‘p’ (which stands for ‘predicate’).
The following predicates are for testing data types. These predicates
return t
if the argument is of the type indicated by the name of the function,
nil
if it is of some other type.
t
if object is a symbol, otherwise nil
.
nil
if object is a symbol, otherwise t
.
t
if object is a cons, otherwise nil
.
Note that this means (listp nil)
is nil
even though nil
is the empty list.
[This may be changed in the future to work like cli:listp
.
Since the current definition of listp
is identical to that of consp
,
all uses of listp
should be changed to consp
unless the
treatment of nil
is not of concern.]
The Common Lisp version of listp
returns t
if object
is nil
or a cons.
t
if object is anything besides a cons,
otherwise nil
. (nlistp nil)
returns t
.
[This may be changed in the future, if and when listp
is changed.
Since the current definition of nlistp
is identical to that of atom
,
all uses of nlistp
should be changed to atom
unless the
treatment of nil
is not of concern.]
t
if object is not a cons,
otherwise nil
. This is the same as (not (consp object))
.
t
if object is a cons, otherwise nil
. At the
moment, this is the same as listp
; but while listp
may be
changed, consp
will never be true of nil
.
t
if object is any kind of number,
otherwise nil
.
Return t
if object is a representation of an integer, i.e a
fixnum or a bignum, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a floating-point number,
i.e a full-size or short float, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a fixnum, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a bignum, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a full-size float, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a short float, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is an exact representation of a rational number;
that is, if it is a fixnum, a bignum or a ratio. Otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a complexnum, a number explicitly
represented as complex. Otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a number whose value is real,
otherwise nil
. Any fixnum, bignum, float (of either format) or
ratio satisfies this predicate. So does a complexnum whose imaginary
part is zero.
t
if object is a character object, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is a string, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is an array, otherwise nil
.
Note that strings are arrays.
t
if object is an array of rank 1.
t
if object is an array of rank 1 that allows only 0 and 1 as elements.
t
if object is an array of rank 1, with no fill pointer and not displaced,
that can have any Lisp object as an element.
t
if object is an array of rank 1, with no fill pointer and not displaced,
that allows only 0 and 1 as elements.
t
if object is a string with no fill pointer and not displaced.
t
if object is a function (essentially, something
that is acceptable as the first argument to apply
), otherwise nil
.
In addition to interpreted, compiled, and microcoded functions, functionp
is true of closures, select-methods (see select-method), and symbols whose function
definition is functionp
.
functionp
is not true of objects that can be called as functions but
are not normally thought of as functions: arrays, stack groups,
entities, and instances. As a special case, functionp
of a symbol
whose function definition is an array returns t
, because in this
case the array is being used as a function rather than as an object.
If allow-special-forms is specified and non-nil
, then
functionp
will be true of macros and special-form functions (those
with quoted arguments). Normally functionp
returns nil
for
these since they do not behave like functions.
t
if object is any compiled code object, otherwise nil
.
The name subrp
is for Maclisp compatibility.
t
if symbol is defined as a function that takes some
unevaluated args. Macros do not count as special forms.
macro-function
can be used to test whether a symbol is defined as a
macro, but you must be careful because it also returns a non-nil
value
for certain special forms. See the definition macro-function
(macro-function-fun) to find out how to do this properly.
t
if object is a closure, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is an entity, otherwise nil
.
See entity for information about entities.
t
if object is a locative, otherwise nil
.
t
if object is of a type that Common Lisp defines operations on.
See the type specifier common
(common-type-spec).
Other standard type predicates include packagep
(see packagep-fun),
random-state-p
(see random-state-p-fun), hash-table-p
(hash-table-p-fun), pathnamep
(pathnamep-fun),
streamp
(streamp-fun) and readtablep
(readtablep-fun).
defstruct
can define additional type predicates automatically
(defstruct-predicates).
Data types can be represented symbolically by Lisp objects called type
specifiers. A type specifier describes a class of possible Lisp
objects; the function typep
tells whether a given object matches a
given type specifier.
Built-in type specifiers exist for the actual Lisp Machine data types. The user can define additional type specifiers to represent arbitrary classifications of data. Type specifiers can also be combined into specifiers for more complex types.
Some type specifiers are symbols: for example, number
, cons
,
symbol
, integer
, character
, compiled-function
,
array
, vector
. Their meanings are mostly obvious, but a table
follows below. Type specifiers that are symbols are called simple
type specifiers.
Lists can also be type specifiers. They are usually combinations or
restrictions of other type specifiers. The car of the list is the key
to understanding what it means. An example of a combination is (or
array symbol)
, which matches any array or any symbol. An example of a
restriction type is (integer 0 6)
, which matches only integers
between 0 and 6 (inclusive).
Basic Data Types
cons
non-nil
lists.
symbol
symbols.
array
all arrays, including strings.
number
numbers of all kinds.
instance
all instances of any flavor.
structure
named structures of any structure type.
locative
locatives.
closure
closures.
entity
entities.
stack-group
stack groups.
compiled-function
macrocode functions such as the compiler makes.
microcode-function
built-in functions implemented by the microcode.
select
select-method functions (defined by defselect
or defselect-incremental
).
character
character objects.
Other Useful Simple Types
t
all Lisp objects belongs to this type.
nil
nothing belongs to this type.
string-char
characters that can go in strings.
standard-char
characters defined by Common Lisp.
These are the 95 ASCII printing characters (including Space
),
together with Return
.
null
nil
is
the only object that belongs to type null
.
list
lists, including nil
. This type is the union of the types null
and cons
.
sequence
lists and vectors. Many Common Lisp functions accept either a list or a vector as a way of describing a sequence of elements.
keyword
keywords (symbols belonging to package keyword
).
atom
anything but conses.
Simple Number Types
integer
fixnums and bignums.
ratio
explicit rational numbers, such as 1\2
(1/2
in Common Lisp syntax).
rational
integers and ratios.
fixnum
small integers, whose %data-type
is dtp-fix
and which occupy no storage.
bignum
larger integers, which occupy storage.
bit
very small integers–only 0
and 1
belong to this type.
float
any floating point number regardless of format.
short-float
short floats
single-float
full-size floats
double-float
long-float
defined by Common Lisp, but on the Lisp Machine synonymous with single-float
.
real
any number whose value is real.
complex
a number explicitly stored as complex. It is possible for such a number to have zero as an imaginary part but only if it is a floating point zero.
noncomplex
a number which is not explicitly stored as complex.
This is a subtype of real
.
Restriction Types for Numbers
(complex type-spec)
complex numbers whose components match type-spec.
Thus, (complex rational)
is the type of complex numbers with
rational components. (complex t)
is equivalent to complex
.
(integer low high)
integers between low and high. low can be:
integer
integer is an inclusive lower limit
(integer)
integer is an exclusive lower limit.
*
There is no lower limit.
high has the same sorts of possibilities.
If high is omitted, it defaults to *
. If both low and high are omitted,
you have (integer)
, which is equivalent to plain integer
. Examples:
(integer 0 *) matches any nonnegative integer. (integer 0) matches any nonnegative integer. (integer -4 3) matches any integer between -4 and 3, inclusive. (integer -4 (4)) matches any integer between -4 and 3, inclusive.
bit
is equivalent to (integer 0 1)
.
(rational low high)
(float low high)
(short-float low high)
(single-float low high)
(double-float low high)
(long-float low high)
(noncomplex low high)
These specify restrictive bounds for the types rational
, float
and so on.
The bounds work on these types just the way they do on integer
.
Exclusive and inclusive bounds make a useful difference here:
(float (-4) (3)) matches any float between -4 and 3, exclusive.
No possible inclusive bounds could provide the same effect.
(mod high)
nonnegative integers less than high. high should be an integer.
(mod)
, (mod *)
and plain mod
are allowed, but are equivalent
to (integer 0)
.
(signed-byte size)
integers that fit into a byte of size bits, of which one bit is the sign bit.
(signed-byte 4)
is equivalent to (integer -8 7)
.
(signed-byte *)
and plain signed-byte
are equivalent to integer
.
(unsigned-byte size)
nonnegative integers that fit into a byte of size bits, with no sign bit.
(unsigned-byte 3)
is equivalent to (integer 0 7)
.
(unsigned-byte *)
and plain unsigned-byte
are equivalent to (integer 0)
.
Simple Types for Arrays
array
all arrays.
simple-array
arrays that are not displaced and have no fill pointers. (Displaced arrays are defined in displaced-array and fill pointers on fill-pointer).
vector
arrays of rank one.
bit-vector
art-1b
arrays of rank one.
string
strings; art-string
and art-fat-string
arrays of rank one.
simple-bit-vector
bit vectors that are simple arrays.
simple-string
strings that are simple arrays.
simple-vector
simple-arrays of rank one, whose elements’ types are unrestricted.
This is not the same as (and vector simple-array)
!
Restriction Types for Arrays
(array element-type dimensions)
arrays whose rank and dimensions fit the restrictions described by dimensions and whose nature restricts possible elements to match element-type.
The array elements condition has nothing to do with the actual values of the elements. Rather, it is a question of whether the array’s own type permits exactly such elements as would match element-type. If anything could be stored in the array that would not match element-type, then the array does not match. If anything that would match element-type could not be stored in the array, then the array does not match.
For example, if element-type is (signed-byte 4)
, the array must
be an art-4b
array. An art-1b
array will not do, even though
its elements all do match (signed-byte 4)
, because some objects such
as the number 12 match (signed-byte 4)
but could not be stored in an
art-1b
array. Likewise an art-q
array whose elements all happen
to match (signed-byte 4)
will not do, since new elements such as
nil
or 231 which fail to match could potentially be stored in the
array.
If element-type is t
, the type to which all objects belong,
then the array must be one in which any object can be stored:
art-q
or art-q-list
.
*
as element-type means “no restriction”. Any type of
array is then allowed, whether it restricts its elements or not.
dimensions can be *
, an integer or a list.
If it is *
, the rank and dimensions are not restricted.
If it is an integer, it specifies the rank of the array.
Then any array of that rank matches.
If dimensions is a list, its length specifies the rank, and each element of dimensions restricts one dimension. If the element is an integer, that dimension’s length must equal it. If the element is *, that dimension’s length is not restricted.
(simple-array element-type dimensions)
the restrictions work as in (array element-type dimensions)
,
but in addition the array must be a simple array.
(vector element-type size)
element-type works as above. The array must be a vector. size must be an integer or *; if it is an integer, the array’s length must equal size.
(bit-vector size)
(simple-vector size)
(simple-bit-vector size)
(string size)
(simple-string size)
These require the array to match type bit-vector
, simple-vector
, etc.
This implicitly restricts the element type, so there is no point
in allowing an element-type to be given in the type specifier.
size works as in vector
.
More Obscure Types
package
packages, such as find-package
might return.
readtable
structures such as can be the value of readtable
.
pathname
pathnames (instances of the flavor pathname
).
hash-table
hash-tables (instances of the flavor hash-table
).
flavor-name
instances of that flavor, or of any flavor that contains it.
defstruct-name
named structures of that type, or of any structure that includes
that one using :include
.
Common Lisp Compatibility Types
random-state
random-states. See random
(random-fun).
This is actually a special case of using a defstruct name
as a type specifier, but it is mentioned specifically because
Common Lisp defines this type.
common
All objects of types defined by Common Lisp. This is all Lisp objects
except closures, entities, stack groups, locatives, instances,
select-methods, and compiled and microcode functions. (A few kinds
of instances, such as pathnames, are common
, because Common Lisp does
define how to manipulate pathnames, and it is considered irrelevant that
the Lisp Machine happens to implement pathnames using instances.)
stream
Anything that looks like it might be a valid I/O stream. It is impossible to tell for certain whether an object is a stream, since any function with proper behavior may be used as a stream. Therefore, use of this type specifier is discouraged. It exists for the sake of Common Lisp.
Combination Type Specifiers
(member objects)
any one of objects, as compared with eql
.
Thus, (member t nil x)
is matched only by
t
, nil
or x
.
(satisfies predicate)
objects on which the function predicate returns a non-nil
value.
Thus, (satisfies numberp)
is equivalent
as a type specifier to number
(though the system could not tell that this is so).
predicate must be a symbol, not a lambda
-expression.
(and type-specs...)
objecs that match all of the type-specs individually. Thus, (and
integer (satisfies oddp))
is the type of odd integers.
(or type-specs...)
objects that match at least one of the type-specs individually.
Thus, (or number array)
includes all numbers and all arrays.
(not type-spec)
objects that do not match type-spec.
Defines type-name as a type specifier by providing code to expand it into another type specifier–a sort of type specifier macro.
When a list starting with type-name is encountered as a type
specifier, the lambda-list is matched against the cdr of the type
specifier just as the lambda-list of an ordinary defmacro
-defined
macro is matched against the cdr of a form. Then the body is
executed and should return a new type specifier to be used instead of
the original one.
If there are optional arguments in lambda-list for which no default value
is specified, they get *
as a default value.
If type-name by itself is encountered as a type specifier, it is
treated as if it were (type-name)
; that is to say, the
lambda-list is matched against no arguments and then the body
is executed. So each argument in the lambda-list gets its
default value, and there is an error if they are not all optional.
Example:
(deftype vector (element-type size)
`(array ,element-type (,size)))
could have been used to define vector
.
(deftype odd-natural-number-below (n)
`(and (integer 0 (,n)) (satisfies oddp)))
(typep 5 '(odd-natural-number-below 6)) => t
(typep 7 '(odd-natural-number-below 6)) => nil
Returns a type specifier which object matches.
Any given object matches many different type specifiers,
including t
, so you should not attempt to rely on knowing
which type specifier would be returned for any particular object.
The one actually returned is chosen so as to be informative
for a human. Programs should generally use typep
rather than type-of
.
See also data-type
, data-type-fun.
t
if object matches type-spec. The fundamental
purpose of type specifiers is to be used in typep
or other
functions and constructs that use typep
. Examples:
(typep 5 'number) => t (typep 5 '(integer 0 7)) => t (typep 5 'bit) => nil (typep 5 'array) => nil (typep "foo" 'array) => t (typep nil 'list) => t (typep '(a b) 'list) => t (typep 'lose 'list) => nil (typep 'x '(or symbol number)) => t (typep 5 '(or symbol number)) => t
If the value of type-spec is known at compile time, the compiler
optimizes typep
so that it does not decode the argument at run
time.
In Maclisp, typep
is used with one argument. It returns a symbol
describing the type of the object it is given. This is somewhat like
what type-of
does, except in Maclisp the intention was to compare
the result with eq
to test the type of an object. The Lisp Machine
supports this usage of typep
for compatibility, but the returned
symbol is a keyword (such as :list
, for conses) which makes it
actually incompatible. This usage is considered obsolete and should
be removed from programs.
Computes the value of key-form and then executes one (or none) of the clauses according to the type of the value (call it key).
Each clause starts with a type specifier, not evaluated, which
could be the second argument to typep
. In fact, that is how it is used.
The rest of the clause is composed of forms. The type specifiers of the
clauses are matched sequentially against key. If there is a match,
the rest of that clause is executed and the values of the last form in it
are returned from the typecase
form. If no clause matches,
the typecase
form returns nil
.
typecase
, like typep
is optimized carefully by the compiler.
Note that t
, the type specifier that matches all objects, is useful
in the last clause of a typecase
. otherwise
is also permitted
instead of t
by special dispensation, with the same meaning.
Example:
(typecase foo (symbol (get-pname foo)) (string foo) (list (apply 'string-append (mapcar 'hack foo))) ((integer 0) (hack-positive-integer foo)) (t (princ-to-string foo)))
Like typecase
except that an uncorrectable error is signaled if every clause fails.
t
or otherwise
clauses are not allowed.
Like etypecase
except that the error is correctable. The first
argument is called place because it must be setf
’able (see
setf-fun). If the user proceeds from the error, a new value is read
and stored into place; then the clauses are tested again using the
new value. Errors repeat until a value is specified that makes some
clause succeed.
Converts object to an “equivalent” object that matches type-spec. Common Lisp specifies exactly which types can be converted to which other types. In general, a conversion that would lose information, such as turning a float into an integer, is not allowed as a coercion. Here is a complete list of types you can coerce to.
complex
(complex type)
Real numbers can be coerced to complex. If a rational is coerced to
type complex
, the result equals the rational, and is not complex at
all. This is because complex numbers with rational components are
canonicalized to real if possible. However, if a rational is coerced to
(complex float)
or (complex single-float)
then an actual complex
number does result.
It is permissible of course to coerce a complex number to a complex type. The real and imaginary parts are coerced individually to type if type is specified.
short-float
single-float
Rational numbers can be coerced to floating point numbers and any kind of floating point number can be coerced to any other floating point format.
float
Rational numbers are converted to single-float
’s;
floats of all kinds are left alone.
character
Strings of length one can be coerced to characters. Symbols whose print-names have length one can also be. An integer can be coerced to a character; this results in a character whose character code is the specified integer.
list
Any vector can be coerced to type list
.
The resulting list has the same elements as the vector.
vector
or array
or any restricted array type.
Any sequence (list or vector) can be coerced to any array or vector type. The new array has rank one and the same elements as the original sequence.
If you specify a type of array with restricted element type, you may
actually get an array which can hold other kinds of things as well. For
example, the Lisp Machine does not provide anything of type (array
symbol)
, but if you specify that, you will get an array which at least
can hold symbols (but can hold other things as well). If an element of
the original sequence does not fit in the new array, an error is
signaled.
t
Any object can be coerced to type t
, without change
to the object.
If the value of type-spec is known at compile time, the compiler
optimizes coerce
so that it does not decode the argument at run
time.
Since a type describes a set of possible objects, it is possible to ask whether one type is contained in another type. Another way to say this is, is one type a subtype of another?
t
if type1 is a subtype of type2.
The system cannot always tell whether type1 is a subtype of
type2. When satisfies
type specifiers are in use, this question
is mathematically undecidable. Because of this, it has not been
considered worthwhile to make the system able to answer obscure subtype
questions even when that is theoretically possible. If the answer is
not known, subtypep
returns nil
.
Thus, nil
could mean that type1 is certainly not a subtype of
type2, or it could mean that there is no way to tell whether it is a
subtype. subtypep
returns a second value to distinguish these two
situations: the second value is t
if subtypep
’s first value is
definitive, nil
if the system does not know the answer.
Examples:
(subtypep 'cons 'list) => t t (subtypep 'null 'list) => t t (subtypep 'symbol 'list) => nil t (subtypep 'list 'number) => nil t because not all lists are numbers (in fact, no lists are numbers). (subtypep 'number 'rational) => nil t because not all numbers are rational. (subtypep '(satisfies foo) '(satisfies bar)) => nil nil because the system does not attempt to figure out your code.
The following is a complete description of the actions taken by the evaluator, given a form to evaluate.
If form is a number, the result is form.
If form is a string, the result is form.
If form is a self-evaluating symbol (nil
, t
or a keyword
such as :foo
), then form itself is the result.
If form is any other symbol, the result is the value of form, considered as a variable. If form’s value is void, an error is signaled. The way symbols are bound to values is explained in variable-section below.
If form is not any of the above types, and is not a list, form itself is the result.
In all remaining cases, form is a list. The evaluator
examines the car of the list to figure out what to do next. There are
three possibilities: this form may be a special form, a macro
form, or a plain old function form. If the car is an explicit
function such as a list starting with lambda
, the form is a function
form. If it is a symbol, things depend on the symbol’s function
definition, which may be a special form definition (see
special-function), a macro definition, or an ordinary function.
If form is a special form, then it is handled accordingly; each special form works differently. All of them are documented in this manual. The internal workings of special forms are explained in more detail on special-function, but this hardly ever affects you.
If form is a macro form, then the macro is expanded as explained in chapter macros-chapter.
If form is a function form, it calls for the application of a function to arguments. The car of form is a function or the name of a function. The cdr of form is a list of subforms. The subforms are evaluated, sequentially, and each produces one argument for the function. The function is then applied to those arguments. Whatever results the function returns are the values of the original form.
There is a lot more to be said about evaluation. The way variables
work and the ways in which they are manipulated, including the binding of
arguments, is explained in variable-section. A basic explanation of
functions is in function-section. The way functions can return more
than one value is explained in multiple-value. The description of all
of the kinds of functions, and the means by which they are manipulated, is
in chapter function-chapter. Macros are explained in chapter
macros-chapter. The evalhook
facility, which lets you do something
arbitrary whenever the evaluator is invoked, is explained in
evalhook-section. Special forms are described all over the manual; each
special form is in the section on the facility it is part of.
In Zetalisp, variables are implemented using symbols. Symbols are used for many things in the language, such as naming functions, naming special forms, and being keywords; they are also useful to programs written in Lisp, as parts of data structures. But when a symbol is evaluated, its value as a variable is taken.
There are two different ways of changing the value of a variable. One
is to set the variable. Setting a variable changes its value to a
new Lisp object, and the previous value of the variable is forgotten.
Setting of variables is usually done with the setq
special form.
The other way to change the value of a variable is with binding (also called lambda-binding). We say that a variable is bound (past participle of active verb) by the action of binding; we also say that the variable is bound (state of being) after a binding has been made. When a binding is made, the variable’s old binding and value are hidden or shadowed by a new binding, which holds a new value. Setting a variable places a new value into the current binding; it does not change which binding is current. In addition, shadowed bindings’ values are not affected by setting the variable. Binding a variable does not affect the value in the old current binding but that binding ceases to be current so the value no longer applies.
The action of binding is always followed eventually by the action of unbinding. This discards the current binding of the variable, with its value. The previous binding becomes current again, and the value in it–unchanged since the newer binding was made, in normal operation–is visible again.
Binding is normally done on entry to a function and by certain special forms
(let
, do
, prog
and others). The bindings are unbound
on exit from the function or the special form, even nonlocal exit such
as go
, return
or throw
. The function or special form
is said to be the scope of the bindings made therein.
Here is a simple example of making a binding, shadowing it, unshadowing it, examining it, and unbinding it. The inner, shadowing binding is made, examined, set, examined and unbound.
(let ((a 5)) (print a) ;prints5
(let ((a "foo")) (print a) ;prints"foo"
(setq a "bar") (print a)) ;prints"bar"
(print a)) ;prints5
Every symbol has one binding which was never made and is never unbound.
This is the global binding. This binding is current whenever
no other binding has been established that would shadow it.
If you type (setq x 5)
in the Lisp listen loop, you set
the global binding of x
. Programs often set global bindings
permanently using defvar
or one of its cousins (defvar-fun).
setq-globally
and related functions can be used to set or
refer to the global binding even when it is shadowed (setq-globally-fun).
(defvar a 5) ;sets the global binding
(let ((a t))
(print a)) ;prints t
a => 5 ;the global binding is visible again
A binding does not need to have an actual value. It can be void
instead. The variable is also called void. Actually, a void binding
contains a weird internal value, which the system interprets as meaning
“there is no value here”. (This is the data type code dtp-null
,
dtp-null-var). Reference to a variable whose current binding is void
signals an error. In fact, nearly all variables’ global bindings are
void; only those that you or the system have set are not void.
variable-makunbound
makes the current binding of a variable void
again (variable-makunbound-fun).
‘Void’ used to be called ‘unbound’, and most function names, error messages and documentation still use the term ‘unbound’. The variable is also called ‘unbound’. The term ‘void’ is being adopted because it is less ambiguous. ‘Unbound’ can mean ‘void’, or ‘not bound’ (no binding established), or the past participle of ‘unbind’.
All bindings except global binding have a limited scope: one function or special form. This does not fully specify the scope, however: it may be lexical or dynamic. When a binding has lexical scope, it is visible only from code written within the function or special form that established it. Subroutines called from within the scope, but which are written elsewhere, never see the lexical binding. By contrast, a dynamic binding is visible the whole time it exists (except when it is shadowed, of course), which includes time spent in subroutines called from within the binding construct. The global binding of a symbol can be regarded as a dynamic binding that lasts from the beginning of the session to the end of the session.
Lexical and dynamic bindings are made by the same kinds of function
definitions and special forms. By default, the bindings are lexical.
You request a dynamic binding instead using a special-declaration at
the beginning of the body of the function definition or special form.
Also, some symbols are marked globally special; every binding of
such a symbol is dynamic. This is what defvar
, etc, do to a
symbol. Dynamic bindings are also called special bindings, and the
variable bound is called a special variable. Each use of a symbol
as a variable (this includes setting as well as examining) is also
marked as lexical or dynamic by the same declarations. A dynamic use
sees only dynamic bindings, and a lexical use sees only lexical
bindings.
In the examples above it makes no difference whether the bindings of
a
are lexical or dynamic, because all the code executed between the
binding and unbinding is also written lexically within the let
which made the binding. Here is an example where it makes a difference:
(defun foo () (print a)) (let ((a 5)) (foo)) >>Error: the variable A is used free but not special.
If the intention is that 5 be printed, a dynamic binding is required.
A dynamic binding would remain visible for all the execution from the
entry to the let
to the exit from the let
, including the execution
of the definition of foo
. Actually, the default is to do lexical binding.
Since the binding of a
is lexical, it is visible only for the evaluation
of expressions written inside the let
, which does not include the body
of foo
. In fact, an error happens when foo
evaluates a
,
since a
there is supposed to be lexical and no lexical binding is
visible. If you compile foo
, you get a compiler warning about a
.
The use of a
inside foo
, not lexically within any binding of a
,
is called free, and a
is called a free variable of foo
.
Free variables are erroneous unless they are special. Strictly speaking,
it is erroneous to type (setq x 5)
at top level in the Lisp listener
if x
has not been made globally special, but this is permitted
as an exception because it is so often useful.
One way to make the example work is to make a
globally special:
(defvar a) (defun foo () (print a)) (let ((a 5)) (foo))
prints 5. The global specialness of a
tells let
to make a dynamic
binding and tells the evaluation of a
in foo
to look for one.
Another way is with declarations at the point of binding and the point of use:
(defun foo () (declare (special a)) (print a)) (let ((a 5)) (declare (special a)) (foo))
A declaration at the point of binding affects only that binding, not other bindings made within it to shadow it. Another way of stating this is that a binding is affected only by a declaration in the construct that makes the binding, not by declarations in surrounding constructs. Thus,
(let ((a 5)) ;this binding is dynamic
(declare (special a))
(let ((a "foo")) ;this binding is lexical
no declaration here
... a ... ;this reference is lexical since
... ; the innermost binding is lexical
(let ()
(declare (special a))
... a ... ;this reference is dynamic, and sees value 5
...))
[Currently, for historical compatibility, bindings are affected by surrounding declarations. However, whenever this makes a difference, the compiler prints a warning to inform the programmer that the declaration should be moved.]
The classical case where dynamic binding is useful is for
parameter variables like *read-base*
:
(let ((*read-base* 16.)) (read))
reads an expression using hexadecimal numbers by default.
*read-base*
is globally special, and the subroutine of read
that reads integers uses *read-base*
free.
Here is an example where lexical bindings are desirable:
(let ((a nil)) (mapatoms (function (lambda (symbol) (push symbol a)))) a)
Because the reference to a
from within the internal function
is lexical, the only binding it can see is the one made by this let
.
mapatoms
cannot interfere by binding a
itself.
Consider: if mapatoms
makes a lexical binding of a
,
it is not visible here because this code is not written inside
the definition of mapatoms
. If mapatoms
makes a dynamic binding
of a
, it is not visible here because the reference to a
is not declared special and therefore sees only lexical bindings.
The fact that function
is used to mark the internal function
is crucial. It causes the lexical environment appropriate for
the function to be combined with the code for the function
in a lexical closure, which is passed to mapatoms
.
The last example shows downward use of lexical closures. Upward use is also possible, in which a function is closed inside a lexical environment and then preserved after the binding construct has been exited.
(defun mycons (a d) (function (lambda (x) (cond ((eq x 'car) a) ((eq x 'cdr) d))))) (defun mycar (x) (funcall x 'car)) (defun mycdr (x) (funcall x 'cdr)) (setq mc (mycons 4 t)) (mycar mc) => 4 (mycdr mc) => t
mycons
returns an object that can be called as a function
with one argument. This object retains a pointer to a lexical
environment that has a binding for a
and a binding for d
.
The function mycons
that made those bindings
has been exited, but this is irrelevant because the bindings were
not dynamic. Since the code of the lambda-expression is lexically
within the body of mycons
, that function can see the lexical bindings
made by mycons
no matter when it is called.
The function returned by mycons
records two values and
can deliver either of them when asked, and is therefore analogous
to a cons cell.
Only lexical bindings are transferred automatically downward and upward,
but dynamic bindings can be used in the same ways if explicitly requested
through the use of the function closure
. See closure for more
information.
Dynamic bindings, including the global binding, are stored (unless
shadowed) in a particular place: the symbol’s value cell.
This is a word at a fixed offset in the symbol itself. When a new
dynamic binding is made, the value in the value cell is saved away
on a stack called the special pdl. The new binding’s value
is placed in the value cell. When the new binding is unbound, the
old binding’s value is copied off of the special pdl, into the
value cell again. The function symeval
examines the
value cell of a symbol chosen at run time; therefore, it sees
the current dynamic binding of the symbol.
Lexical bindings are never stored in the symbol’s value cell. The compiler stores them in fixed slots in stack frames. The interpreter stores them in alists that live in the stack. It should be noted that if the lexical binding is made by compiled code, then all code that ought to see the binding is necessarily also compiled; if the binding is made by interpreted code, then all code that ought to see the binding is necessarily interpreted. Therefore, it is safe for the compiler and interpreter to use completely different techniques for recording lexical bindings.
Lexical binding is the default because the compiler can find with certainty all the places where a lexical binding is used, and usually can use short cuts based on this certainty. For dynamic bindings slow but general code must always be generated.
Here are the constructs used for setting variables.
The setq
special form is used to set the value of a variable or of
many variables. The first value is evaluated, and the first
variable is set to the result. Then the second value is
evaluated, the second variable is set to the result, and so on for
all the variable/value pairs. setq
returns the last value, i.e
the result of the evaluation of its last subform.
Example:
(setq x (+ 3 2 1) y (cons x nil))
x
is set to 6
, y
is set to (6)
, and the setq
form
returns (6)
. Note that the first variable was set before
the second value form was evaluated, allowing that form to use the new value of x
.
A psetq
form is just like a setq
form, except
that the variables are set “in parallel”; first all of the value forms
are evaluated, and then the variables are set to the resulting
values.
Example:
(setq a 1) (setq b 2) (psetq a b b a) a => 2 b => 1
Returns a locative to the cell in which the value of symbol is stored. symbol is an unevaluated argument, so the name of the symbol must appear explicitly in the code.
For a special variable, this is equivalent to
(value-cell-location 'symbol)
For a lexical variable, the place where the value is stored is
a matter decided by the interpreter or the compiler, but in any case
variable-location
nevertheless returns a pointer to it.
In addition, if symbol is a special variable that is closed over,
the value returned is an external value cell, the same as the value of
locate-in-closure
applied to the proper closure and symbol.
This cell always contains the closure binding’s value, which is
current only inside the closure. See external-value-cell.
t
if variable symbol is not void.
It is equivalent to
(location-boundp (variable-location symbol))
symbol is not evaluated.
Makes symbol’s current binding void. It is equivalent to
(location-makunbound (variable-location symbol))
symbol is not evaluated.
Here are the constructs used for binding variables.
Is used to bind some variables to some objects, and evaluate some forms
(the body) in the context of those bindings.
A let
form looks like
(let ((var1 vform1) (var2 vform2) ...) bform1 bform2 ...)
When this form is evaluated, first the vforms (the values) are evaluated. Then the vars are bound to the values returned by the corresponding vforms. Thus the bindings happen in parallel; all the vforms are evaluated before any of the vars are bound. Finally, the bforms (the body) are evaluated sequentially, the old values of the variables are restored, and the result of the last bform is returned.
You may omit the vform from a let
clause, in which case it is as
if the vform were nil
: the variable is bound to nil
.
Furthermore, you may replace the entire clause (the list of the variable
and form) with just the variable, which also means that the variable
gets bound to nil
. Example:
(let ((a (+ 3 3)) (b 'foo) (c) d) ...)
Within the body, a
is bound to 6
, b
is bound to foo
, c
is
bound to nil
, and d
is bound to nil
.
let*
is the same as let
except that the binding is sequential. Each
var is bound to the value of its vform before the next vform
is evaluated. This is useful when the computation of a vform depends on
the value of a variable bound in an earlier vform. Example:
(let* ((a (+ 1 2)) (b (+ a a))) ...)
Within the body, a
is bound to 3
and b
is bound to 6
.
let-if
is a variant of let
in which the binding of variables is conditional.
The let-if
special form, typically written as
(let-if cond ((var-1 val-1) (var-2 val-2)...) body...)
first evaluates the predicate form cond. If the result is non-nil
, the value forms
val-1, val-2, etc are evaluated and then the variables var-1, var-2,
etc are bound to them. If the result is nil
, the
vars and vals are ignored. Finally the body forms are evaluated.
The bindings are always dynamic, and it is the user’s responsibility to put in appropriate declarations so that the body forms consider the variables dynamic.
let-globally
is similar in form to let
(see let-fun). The
difference is that let-globally
does not bind the variables;
instead, it saves the old values and sets the variables, and sets up
an unwind-protect
(see unwind-protect-fun) to set them back. The
important consequence is that, with
let-globally
, when the current stack group (see stack-group)
co-calls some other stack group, the old values of the variables are
not restored. Thus let-globally
makes the new values visible in
all stack groups and processes that don’t bind the variables themselves,
not just in the current stack group. Therefore, let-globally
can be used for communication between stack groups and between processes.
let-globally-if
modifies and restores the variables only if the
value of condition is non-nil
. The body is executed in any case.
Since let-globally
is based on setq
, it makes sense for both
lexical and dynamic variables. But its main application exists
only for dynamic variables.
The globally
in let-globally
does not mean the same thing
as the globally
in setq-globally
and related functions.
progv
is a special form to provide the user with extra control
over binding. It binds a list of variables dynamically to a list of values,
and then evaluates some forms. The lists of variables and values
are computed quantities; this is what makes progv
different from
let
, prog
, and do
.
progv
first evaluates symbol-list and value-list, and then binds each
symbol to the corresponding value. If too few values are supplied, the
remaining symbols’ bindings are made empty. If too many values are
supplied, the excess values are ignored.
After the symbols have been bound to the values, the body forms are
evaluated, and finally the symbols’ bindings are undone.
The result returned is the value of the last form in the body.
Assuming that the variables a
, b
, foo
and bar
are globally special, we can do:
(setq a 'foo b 'bar) (progv (list a b 'b) (list b) (list a b foo bar)) => (foo nil bar nil)
During the evaluation of the body of this progv
, foo
is bound to bar
, bar
is bound to nil
, b
is
bound to nil
, and a
retains its top-level value foo
.
progw
is like progv
except that it has a different way of
deciding which variables to bind and what values to give them. Like
progv
, it always makes dynamic bindings.
First, vars-and-val-forms-form is evaluated. Its value should be a list
that looks like the first subform of a let
:
((var1 val-form-1) (var2 val-form-2) ...)
Each element of this list is processed in turn, by evaluating the val-form and binding the var dynamically to the resulting value. Finally, the body forms are evaluated sequentially, the bindings are undone, and the result of the last form is returned. Note that the bindings are sequential, not parallel.
This is a very unusual special form because of the way the evaluator is
called on the result of an evaluation. progw
is useful mainly for
implementing special forms and for functions part of whose contract is
that they call the interpreter. For an example of the latter, see
sys:*break-bindings*
(sys:*break-bindings*-var); break
implements this by using progw
.
See also %bind
(%bind-fun), which is a
subprimitive that gives you maximal control over binding.
Here are the constructs for defining global variables. Each makes the variable globally special, provides a value, records documentation, and allows the editor to find where all this was done.
defvar
is the recommended way to declare the use of a global variable in a
program. Placed at top level in a file,
(defvar variable initial-value "documentation")
declares variable globally special and records its location in the
file for the sake of the editor so that you can ask to see where the
variable is defined. The documentation string is remembered and
returned if you do (documentation 'variable 'variable)
.
If variable is void, it is initialized to the result of evaluating the form initial-value. initial-value is evaluated only if it is to be used.
If you do not wish to give variable any initial value, use the
symbol :unbound
as the initial-value form. This is treated
specially; no attempt is made to evaluate :unbound
.
Using a documentation string is better than using a comment to describe
the use of the variable, because the documentation string is accessible
to system programs that can show the documentation to you while you are
using the machine. While it is still permissible to omit
initial-value and the documentation string, it is recommended that
you put a documentation string in every defvar
.
defvar
should be used only at top level, never in function
definitions, and only for global variables (those used by more than one
function). (defvar foo 'bar)
is roughly equivalent to
(declare (special foo)) (if (not (boundp 'foo)) (setq foo 'bar))
If defvar
is used in a patch file (see patch-facility)
or is a single form (not a region) evaluated with the editor’s
compile/evaluate from buffer commands,
if there is an initial-value the variable is always set to it
regardless of whether it is void.
defconst
is the same as defvar
except that if an initial value
is given the variable is always set to it regardless of whether it is
already bound. The rationale for this is that defvar
declares a
global variable, whose value is initialized to something but will then
be changed by the functions that use it to maintain some state. On the
other hand, defconst
declares a constant, whose value will be
changed only by changes to the program, never by the operation of
the program as written. defconst
always sets the variable to the
specified value so that if, while developing or debugging the program,
you change your mind about what the constant value should be, and then
you evaluate the defconst
form again, the variable gets the new
value. It is not the intent of defconst
to declare that the
value of variable will never change; for example, defconst
is
not a license to the compiler to build assumptions about the value of
variable into programs being compiled.
As with defvar
, you should include a documentation string in every defconst
.
Defines a true constant. The compiler is permitted to assume it will never change. Therefore, if a function that refers to symbol’s value is compiled, the compiled function may contain value merged into it and may not actually refer to symbol at run time.
You should not change the value of symbol except by
reexecuting the defconstant
with a new value. If you do this,
it is necessary to recompile any compiled functions that refer
to symbol’s value.
This section describes functions which examine or set the global binding of a variable even when it is shadowed and cannot be accessed simply by evaluating the variable or setting it.
The primary use of these functions is for init files to set
variables which are bound by the load
function, such as package
or base
. (setq package (find-package 'foo))
executed from a
file being loaded has no effect beyond the end of loading that file,
since it sets the binding of package
made by load
. However, if
you use setq-globally
instead, the current binding in effect during
loading is actually not changed, but when the load
exits and the
global binding is in effect again, foo
will become the current package.
Sets each symbol’s global binding to the value that follows. The value’s are evaluated but the symbol’s are not.
Sets the global binding of symbol to value.
Makes the global binding of symbol be void.
Returns t
if the global binding of symbol is not void.
Return the value of the global binding of symbol. An error is signaled if the global binding is void.
See also pkg-goto-globally
(pkg-goto-globally-fun), a “globally”
version of pkg-goto
. Note that let-globally
is not analogous
to these functions, as it modifies the current bindings of symbols rather
than their global bindings. This is an unfortunate collision of naming
conventions.
In Lisp, a variable is something that can remember one piece of data. The primary conceptual operations on a variable are to recover that piece of data and to change it. These might be called access and update. The concept of variables named by symbols, explained above, can be generalized to any storage location that can remember one piece of data, no matter how that location is named.
For each kind of generalized variable, there are typically three
functions which implement the conceptual access, update and
locate operations. For example, symeval
accesses a symbol’s
value cell, set
updates it, and value-cell-location
returns the
value cell’s location. array-leader
accesses the contents of an
array leader element, store-array-leader
updates it, and
ap-leader
returns the location of the leader element. car
accesses the car of a cons, rplaca
updates it, and car-location
returns the location of the car.
Rather than thinking of this as two functions, which operate on a storage
location somehow deduced from their arguments, we can shift our point of
view and think of the access function as a name for the storage
location. Thus (symeval 'foo)
is a name for the value of foo
, and
(aref a 105)
is a name for the 105th element of the array a
.
Rather than having to remember the update function associated with each
access function, we adopt a uniform way of updating storage locations named
in this way, using the setf
special form. This is analogous to the
way we use the setq
special form to convert the name of a variable
(which is also a form which accesses it) into a form that updates it.
In fact, setf
is an upward compatible generalization of setq
.
Similarly, the location of the generalized variable can be obtained
using the locf
construct.
setf
is the construct for storing a new value into a generalized variable
which is identified by the form which would obtain the current value of the
variable. For example,
(setf (car x) y)
stores the value of y
into the car of the value of x
.
setf
is particularly useful in combination with structure-accessing
macros, such as those created with defstruct
, because the knowledge of the
representation of the structure is embedded inside the macro, and the programmer
shouldn’t have to know what it is in order to alter an element of the structure.
setf
is actually a macro which expands into the appropriate update
code. It has a database, explained in setf-extension, that
associates from access functions to update functions.
Takes a form called place that accesses something and “inverts” the form to produce a corresponding form to update the thing.
A setf
expands into an update form, which stores the result of evaluating
the form value into the place referenced by the place.
If multiple place‘s and value‘s are specified,
each one specifies an update, and each update is done before
the following updates’ arguments are computed.
Examples:
(setf (array-leader foo 3) 'bar) ==> (store-array-leader 'bar foo 3) (setf a 3) ==> (setq a 3) (setf (plist 'a) '(foo bar)) ==> (setplist 'a '(foo bar)) (setf (aref q 2) 56) ==> (sys:set-aref q 2 56) (setf (cadr w) x) ==> (sys:setcdr (cdr w) x)
The value of a setf
form is always the value stored by
the last update it performs. Thus, (setf (cadr w) x)
is not really the same as (rplaca (cdr w) x)
, because
the setf
returns x
and the rplaca
returns
w
. In fact, the expansion of setf
of cdr
uses
an internal function si:setcdr
which exists specifically
for this purpose.
If place invokes a macro or a substitutable function, then
setf
expands the place and starts over again. This lets you
use setf
together with defstruct
accessor macros.
sys:unknown-setf-reference
: (error
) ¶sys:unknown-locf-reference
: (error
) ¶These are signaled when setf
or locf
does not know how to expand
the place. The :form
operation on the condition instance
returns the access-form.
Stores each value into the corresponding place, with the changes taking effect in parallel. Thus,
(psetf (car x) (cdr x) (cdr x) (car x))
interchanges the car and cdr of x
.
The subforms of the places, and the values, are evaluated in order; thus, in
(psetf (aref a (tyi)) (tyi) (aref b (tyi)) (aref a (tyi)))
the first input character indexes a
, the second is stored, the third
indexes b
, and the fourth indexes a
. The parallel nature of
psetf
implies that, should the first and fourth characters be equal,
the old value of that element of a
is what is stored into the array
b
, rather than the new value which comes from the second character
read.
Sets the first place from the second, the second from the third, and
so on. The last place is not set, so it doesn’t really need to be a
setf
’able place; it can be any form. The value of the shiftf
form is the old value of the first place. Thus,
(shiftf x (car (foo)) b)
evaluates (foo)
, copies the car of that value into x
,
copies b
into the car of that value, then returns the
former value of x
.
Sets the first place from the second, the second from the third, and so on, and sets the last place from the old value of the first place. Thus, the values of the place’s are permuted among the place’s in a cyclic fashion.
With only two place’s, their values are exchanged:
(rotatef (car x) (cdr x))
is equivalent to the psetf
example above.
Exchanges the contents of place1 and place2.
This is a special case of rotatef
.
Increments the value of a generalized variable. (incf ref)
increments
the value of ref by 1. (incf ref amount)
adds amount
to ref and stores the sum back into ref.
The incf
form returns the value after incrementation.
incf
expands into a setf
form, so ref can be anything that
setf
understands as its place.
incf
is defined using define-modify-macro
, define-modify-macro-fun.
Decrements the value of a generalized variable. Just like incf
except that amount (or 1) is subtracted rather than added.
See also push
(push-fun), pop
(pop-fun), pushnew
(pushnew-fun), getf
(getf-fun) and remf
(remf-fun).
Besides the access and update conceptual operations on
generalized variables, there is a third basic operation, which we might call
locate. Given the name of a storage cell, the locate operation
returns the address of that cell as a locative pointer (see
locative). This locative pointer is a first-class Lisp data object
which is a kind of reference to the cell. It can be passed as an
argument to a function which operates on any cell,
regardless of where the cell is found. It can be used to bind the contents
of the cell, just as special variables are bound,
using the %bind
subprimitive (see %bind-fun).
Of course, this can work only on generalized variables whose implementation is really to store their value in a memory cell. A generalized variable with an update operation that encrypts the value and an access operation that decrypts it could not have the locate operation, since the value per se is not actually stored anywhere.
locf
takes a form that accesses some cell, and produces
a corresponding form to create a locative pointer to that cell.
Examples:
(locf (array-leader foo 3)) ==> (ap-leader foo 3) (locf a) ==> (value-cell-location 'a) (locf (plist 'a)) ==> (property-cell-location 'a) (locf (aref q 2)) ==> (aloc q 2)
If place invokes a macro or a substitutable function, then
locf
expands the place and starts over again. This lets you
use locf
together with defstruct
accessor macros.
In the description of evaluation on description-of-evaluation, we said that evaluation of a function form works by applying the function to the results of evaluating the argument subforms. What is a function, and what does it mean to apply it? In Zetalisp there are many kinds of functions, and applying them may do many different kinds of things. For full details, see function-functions. Here we explain the most basic kinds of functions and how they work. In particular, this section explains lambda lists and all their important features.
The simplest kind of user-defined function is the lambda-expression, which is a list that looks like:
(lambda lambda-list body1 body2...)
The first element of the lambda-expression is the symbol lambda
; the
second element is a list called the lambda list, and the rest of the
elements are called the body. The lambda list, in its simplest
form, is just a list of variables. Assuming that this simple form
is being used, here is what happens when a lambda expression is applied
to some arguments. First, the number of arguments and the number of
variables in the lambda list must be the same, or else an error is signaled.
Each variable is bound to the corresponding argument value. Then
the forms of the body are evaluated sequentially. After this, the
bindings are all undone, and the value of the last form in the body is
returned.
This may sound something like the description of let
, above. The
most important difference is that the lambda-expression is not a form at
all; if you try to evaluate a lambda-expression, you get an error because
lambda
is not a defined function. The lambda-expression is a
function, not a form. A let
form gets evaluated, and the
values to which the variables are bound come from the evaluation of some
subforms inside the let
form; a lambda-expression gets applied, and
the values are the arguments to which it is applied.
The variables in the lambda list are sometimes called parameters, by analogy with other languages. Some other terminologies would refer to these as formal parameters, and to arguments as actual parameters.
Lambda lists can have more complex structure than simply being a list of
variables. There are additional features accessible by using certain
keywords (which start with &
) and/or lists as elements of the
lambda list.
The principal weakness of simple lambda lists is that any
function written with one must only take a certain, fixed number of
arguments. As we know, many very useful functions, such as list
,
append
, +
, and so on, accept a varying number of arguments.
Maclisp solved this problem by the use of lexprs and lsubrs,
which were somewhat inelegant since the parameters had to be referred to
by numbers instead of names (e.g (arg 3)
). (For compatibility
reasons, Zetalisp supports lexprs, but they should not be
used in new programs.) Simple lambda lists also require that
arguments be matched with parameters by their position in the
sequence. This makes calls hard to read when there are a great many
arguments. Keyword parameters enable the use of other, more readable styles of call.
In general, a function in Zetalisp has zero or more positional parameters, followed if desired by a single rest parameter, followed by zero or more keyword parameters. The positional parameters may be required or optional, but all the optional parameters must follow all the required ones. The required/optional distinction does not apply to the rest parameter; all keyword parameters are optional.
The caller must provide enough arguments so that each of the required parameters gets bound, but he may provide extra arguments for some of the optional parameters. Also, if there is a rest parameter, he can provide as many extra arguments as he wants, and the rest parameter is bound to a list of all these extras. Optional parameters may have a default-form, which is a form to be evaluated to produce the default value for the parameter if no argument is supplied.
Positional parameters are matched with arguments by the position of the arguments in the argument list. Keyword parameters are matched with their arguments by matching the keyword name; the arguments need not appear in the same order as the parameters. If an optional positional argument is omitted, then no further arguments can be present. Keyword parameters allow the caller to decide independently for each one whether to specify it.
Here is the exact algorithm used to match up the arguments with the parameters:
The first required positional parameter is bound to the first
argument. apply
continues to bind successive required
positional parameters
to the successive arguments. If, during this process, there are no
arguments left but there are still some required parameters which have
not been bound yet, it is an error (“too few arguments”).
After all required parameters are handled, apply
continues with the
optional positional parameters, if any. It binds each successive
parameter to the next argument. If, during this process, there are no
arguments left, each remaining optional parameter’s default-form is
evaluated, and the parameter is bound to it. This is done one parameter
at a time; that is, first one default-form is evaluated, and then the
parameter is bound to it, then the next default-form is evaluated, and
so on. This allows the default for an argument to depend on the
previous argument.
Now, if there are no remaining parameters (rest or keyword), and there are no remaining arguments, we are finished. If there are no more parameters but there are still some arguments remaining, an error is signaled (“too many arguments”). If parameters remain, all the remaining arguments are used for both the rest parameter, if any, and the keyword parameters.
If there is a rest parameter, it is bound to a list of all
the remaining arguments. If there are no
remaining arguments, it is bound to nil
.
If there are keyword parameters, the same remaining arguments are
used to bind them, as follows.
The arguments for the keyword parameters are treated as a list
of alternating keyword symbols and associated values. Each symbol is
matched with eq
against the allowed parameter keywords, which have
by default the same names as the parameters but in the keyword
package. (You can specify the keyword symbol explicitly in the lambda
list if you must; see below.) Often the symbol arguments are constants
in the program, and it is convenient for this usage that keywords all
evaluate to themselves, but it is permissible for them to be computed by
expressions.
If any keyword parameter has not received a value when all the
arguments have been processed, the default-form for the parameter is
evaluated and the parameter is bound to its value. All keyword
parameters are optional.
There may be a keyword symbol among the arguments which does not
match any keyword parameter name. By default this is an error, but the
lambda list can specify that there should be no error using
&allow-other-keys
. Also, if one of the keyword symbols among the
arguments is :allow-other-keys
and the value that follows it is
non-nil
then there is no error. When there is no error, for either
reason, the non-matching symbols and their associated values are simply
ignored. The function can access these symbols and values through the
rest parameter, if there is one. It is common for a function to check
only for certain keywords, and pass its rest parameter to another
function using apply
; that function will check for the keywords that
concern it.
The way you express which parameters are required, optional, rest and keyword
is by means of specially recognized symbols, which are called
&-keywords
, in the lambda list. All such symbols’ print names
begin with the character ‘&
’. A list of all such symbols is the value of
the symbol lambda-list-keywords
.
The keywords used here are &key
, &optional
and &rest
.
The way they are used is best explained by means of examples;
the following are typical lambda lists, followed by descriptions
of which parameters are positional, rest or keyword; and required or optional.
(a b c)
a
, b
, and c
are all required and positional. The function must be
passed three arguments.
(a b &optional c)
a
and b
are required, c
is optional. All three are
positional. The function may be passed either two or three arguments.
(&optional a b c)
a
, b
, and c
are all optional and positional. The function may
be passed zero, one, two or three arguments.
(&rest a)
a
is a rest parameter. The function may be passed any number of arguments.
(a b &optional c d &rest e)
a
and b
are required positional, c
and d
are optional
positional, and e
is rest. The function may be passed two or more
arguments.
(&key a b)
a
and b
are both keyword parameters. A typical
call would look like
(foo :b 69 :a '(some elements))
or
(foo :a '(some elements) :b 69)
or
(foo :a '(some elements))
This illustrates that the parameters can be matched in either order, or omitted. If a keyword is specified twice, the first value is used.
(x &optional y &rest z &key a b)
x
is required positional, y
is optional positional,
z
is rest, and a
and b
are keyword.
One or more arguments are allowed. One or two arguments specify only
the positional parameters. Arguments beyond the second specify both
the rest parameter and the keyword parameters, so that
(foo 1 2 :b '(a list))
specifies 1
for x
, 2
for y
, (:b (a
list))
for z
, and (a list)
for b
. It does not
specify a
.
(&rest z &key a b c &allow-other-keys)
z
is rest, and a
, b
and c
are keyword
parameters. &allow-other-keys
says that absolutely any keyword
symbols may appear among the arguments; these symbols and the values
that follow them have no effect on the keyword parameters, but do
become part of the value of z
.
(&rest z &key &allow-other-keys)
This is equivalent to (&rest z)
. So, for that matter, is the
previous example, if the function does not use the values of a
,
b
and c
.
In all of the cases above, the default-form for each
optional parameter is nil
. To specify your own default forms,
instead of putting a symbol as the element of a lambda list, put in a
list whose first element is the symbol (the parameter itself) and whose
second element is the default-form. Only optional parameters may have
default forms; required parameters are never defaulted, and rest
parameters always default to nil
. For example:
(a &optional (b 3))
The default-form for b
is 3
. a
is a required parameter, and
so it doesn’t have a default form.
(&optional (a 'foo) &rest d &key b (c (symeval a)))
a
’s default-form is 'foo
, b
’s is nil
, and c
’s is
(symeval a)
. Note that if
the function were called on no arguments,
a
would be bound to the symbol foo
, and c
would be bound
to the value of the symbol foo
; this illustrates the fact
that each variable is bound immediately after its default-form is evaluated,
and so later default-forms may take advantage of earlier parameters
in the lambda list. b
and d
would be bound to nil
.
Occasionally it is important to know whether a certain optional
parameter was defaulted or not. Just by looking at the value one cannot
distinguish between omitting it and passing the default value
explicitly as an argument. The way to tell for sure is to put a third
element into the list: the third element should be a variable (a
symbol), and that variable is bound to nil
if the parameter was not
passed by the caller (and so was defaulted), or t
if the parameter
was passed. The new variable is called a “supplied-p” variable; it is
bound to t
if the parameter is supplied. For example:
(a &optional (b 3 c))
The default-form for b
is 3
, and the supplied-p variable for b
is c
. If the function is called with one argument, b
is bound
to 3
and c
is bound to nil
. If the function is called
with two arguments, b
is bound to the value that was passed
by the caller (which might be 3
), and c
is bound to t
.
It is possible to specify a keyword parameter’s symbol independently of its parameter name. To do this, use two nested lists to specify the parameter. The outer list is the one which can contain the default-form and supplied-p variable, if the parameter is optional. The first element of this list, instead of a symbol, is again a list, whose elements are the keyword symbol and the parameter variable name. For example:
(&key ((:a a)) ((:b b) t))
This is equivalent to (&key a (b t))
.
(&key ((:base base-value)))
This defines an argument which callers specify with the keyword
:base
, but which within the function is referred to as the
variable base-value
so as to avoid binding the value of
base
, which is a synonym for *print-base*
and controls
how numbers are printed.
It is also possible to include, in the lambda list, some other
symbols, which are bound to the values of their default-forms upon
entry to the function. These are not parameters, and they are
never bound to arguments; they just get bound, as if they appeared
in a let*
form. (Whether you use aux-variables or bind the
variables with let*
is a stylistic decision.)
To include such symbols, put them after any parameters, preceeded
by the &
-keyword &aux
. Examples:
(a &optional b &rest c &aux d (e 5) (f (cons a e)))
d
, e
, and f
are bound, when the function is
called, to nil
, 5
, and a cons of the first argument and 5.
You could, equivalently, use (a &optional b &rest c)
as
the lamda list and write (let* (d (e 5) (f (cons a e))) ...)
around the body of the function.
It is important to realize that the list of arguments to which a
rest-parameter is bound is set up in whatever way is most efficiently
implemented, rather than in the way that is most convenient for the
function receiving the arguments. It is not guaranteed to be a “real”
list. Sometimes the rest-args list is a stack list (see stack-list)
stored in the function-calling stack, and loses its validity when the
function returns. If a rest-argument is to be returned or made part of
permanent list-structure, it must first be copied (see copylist
,
copylist-fun), as you must always assume that it is one of these
special lists. The system does not detect the error of omitting to copy
a rest-argument; you will simply find that you have a value which seems
to change behind your back.
At other times the rest-args list may be an argument that was given to
apply
; therefore it is not safe to rplaca
this list as you may
modify permanent data structure. An attempt to rplacd
a rest-args
list is unsafe in this case, while in the first case it would cause
an error, since lists in the stack are impossible to rplacd
.
Has as its value the limit on the number of parameters that a lambda list may have. The implementation limit on the number of parameters allowed is at least this many. There is no promise that this many is forbidden, but it is a promise that any number less than this many is permitted.
This section documents all the keywords that may appear in the
lambda list or argument list (see lambda-list) of a function, a
macro, or a special form. Some of them are allowed everywhere, while
others are only allowed in one of these contexts; those are so
indicated. You need only know about &optional
, &key
, and
&rest
in order to understand the documentation of system functions
in this manual.
The value of this variable is a list of all of the allowed ‘&
’ keywords.
A list of them follows.
&optional
Separates the required arguments of a function from the optional arguments. See lambda-list.
&rest
Separates the required and optional arguments of a function from the rest argument. There may be only one rest argument. See &rest for full information about rest arguments. See lambda-list.
&key
Separates the positional arguments and rest argument of a function from the keyword arguments. See lambda-list.
&allow-other-keys
In a function that accepts keyword arguments, says that keywords that are not recognized are allowed. They and the corresponding values are ignored, as far as keyword arguments are concerned, but they do become part of the rest argument, if there is one.
&aux
Separates the arguments of a function from the auxiliary variables.
Following &aux
you can put entries of the form
(variable initial-value-form)
or just variable if you want it initialized to nil
or don’t care what the initial
value is.
&special
Declares the following arguments and/or auxiliary variables to be special within the scope of this function.
&local
Turns off a preceding &special
for the variables that follow.
"e
Declares that the following arguments are not to be evaluated. This is how you create a special function. See the caveats about special forms on special-form-caveat.
&eval
Turns off a preceding "e
for the arguments which follow.
&list-of
This is for macros defined by defmacro
only. Refer to &list-of.
&body
This is for macros defined by defmacro
only. It is similar to &rest
,
but declares to grindef
and the code-formatting module of the editor that
the body forms of a special form follow and should be indented accordingly.
Refer to &body.
&whole
This is for macros defined by defmacro
only. It means that the following
argument is bound to the entire macro call form being expanded. Refer to
&whole.
&environment
This is for macros defined by defmacro
only. It means that the following
argument is bound to an environment structure which records the local
macrolet
macro definitions in effect for subforms of the macro call form.
Refer to &environment.
The constructs flet
and labels
permit you to define
a function name in a lexical context only. If the same name
has a global function definition, it is shadowed temporarily.
Function definitions established by flet
(or labels
)
are to global definitions made with defun
as lexical variable bindings
made with let
are to global bindings made with defvar
.
They always have lexical scope.
Executes body with local function definitions in effect according to local-functions.
local-functions should be a list of elements which look like
(name lambda-list function-body...)
just like the cdr of a defun
form. The meaning of this element
of local-functions is to define name locally with the
indicated definition.
Within the lexical scope of body, using name as a function name accesses
the local definition.
Example:
(flet ((triple (x) (* x 3))) (print (triple -1)) (mapcar (function triple) '(1 2 1.2)))
prints the number -3 and returns a list (3 6 3.6)
.
Each local function is closed in the environment outside the flet
.
As a result, the local functions cannot call each other.
(flet ((foo (x) (bar x t)) (bar (y z) (list y z))) (foo t))
calls the local definition of foo
, which calls the global definition
of bar
, because the body of foo
is not within the scope of the
local definition of bar
.
Functions defined with flet
inside of a compiled function
can be referred to by name in a function spec of the form
(:internal outer-function-name flet-name)
.
See flet-function-spec.
Is like flet except that the local functions can call each other.
They are closed in the environment inside the labels
, so all
the local function names are accessible inside the bodies of the
local functions. labels
is one of the most ancient Lisp constructs,
but was typically not implemented in second generation Lisp systems
in which no efficient form of closure existed.
(labels ((walk (x) (typecase x (cons (walk (car x)) (walk (cdr x))) (t (if (eq x 'haha) (print 'found-it)))))) (walk foo))
allows walk
to call itself recursively because walk
’s body
is inside the scope of the definition of walk
.
See also macrolet
, an analogous construct for defining macros locally
(macrolet-fun).
This section describes some functions and special forms. Some are parts of the evaluator, or closely related to it. Some have to do specifically with issues discussed above such as keyword arguments. Some are just fundamental Lisp forms that are very important.
(eval form)
evaluates form, and returns the result.
Example:
(defvar x 43) (defvar foo 'bar) (eval (list 'cons x 'foo)) => (43 . bar)
The dynamic bindings available at the time eval
is called
are visible for dynamic variables within the expression x.
No lexical bindings are available for the evaluation of x.
It is unusual to call eval
explicitly, since usually
evaluation is done implicitly. If you are writing a simple Lisp program and
explicitly calling eval
, you are probably doing something wrong.
eval
is primarily useful in programs which deal with Lisp itself,
rather than programs about knowledge, mathematics or games.
Also, if you are only interested in getting at the dynamic value of a
symbol (that is, the contents of the symbol’s value cell), then you
should use the primitive function symeval
(see symeval-fun).
If the argument nohook is non-nil
, execution of the
evalhook is inhibited for form, but not for
evaluation of the subforms of form. See evalhook
, evalhook-fun.
evalhook
is also the way to evaluate in a specified lexical environment
if you happen to have got your hands on one.
Note: in Maclisp, the second argument to eval
is a
“binding context pointer”. There is no such thing in Zetalisp;
closures are used instead (see closure).
Within the definition of a special form, evaluates form in the current lexical environment.
(funcall f a1 a2 ... an)
applies the
function f to the arguments a1, a2, ..., an.
f may not
be a special form nor a macro; this would not be meaningful.
Example:
(cons 1 2) => (1 . 2) (setq cons 'plus) (funcall cons 1 2) => 3
This shows that the use of the symbol cons
as the name of a function
and the use of that symbol as the name of a variable do not interact.
The cons
form invokes the function named cons
.
The funcall
form evaluates the variable and gets the symbol plus
,
which is the name of a different function.
Note: the Maclisp functions subrcall
, lsubrcall
, and arraycall
are not needed on the Lisp Machine; funcall
is just as efficient.
arraycall
is provided for compatibility; it ignores its first
subform (the Maclisp array type) and is otherwise identical to aref
.
subrcall
and lsubrcall
are not provided.
apply
is like funcall
except that the last of args is
really a list of arguments to give to f rather than a single argument.
lexpr-funcall
is a synonym for apply
; formerly, apply
was
limited to the two argument case.
(apply f arglist)
applies the function f to the list of
arguments arglist. arglist should be a list; f can be any function.
Examples:
(setq fred '+) (apply fred '(1 2)) => 3 (setq fred '-) (apply fred '(1 2)) => -1 (apply 'cons '((+ 2 3) 4)) => ((+ 2 3) . 4) not (5 . 4)
Of course, arglist may be nil
.
If there is more than one element of args, then all but the last of them are individual arguments to pass to f, while the last one is a list of arguments as above.
Examples:
(apply 'plus 1 1 1 '(1 1 1)) => 6 (defun report-error (&rest args) (apply 'format *error-output* args))
apply
can also be used with a single argument. Then this argument
is a list of a function and some arguments to pass it.
Example:
(apply '(car (a))) => a
;Not the same as (eval '(car (a)))
Note: in Maclisp, apply
takes two or three arguments, and the third
argument, when passed, is interpreted as a “binding context pointer”.
So the second argument always provides all the args to pass to the function.
There are no binding context pointers in Zetalisp; true lexical scoping
exists and is interfaced in other ways.
Has as its value the limit on the number of arguments that can be dealt with in a function call. There is no promise that this many is forbidden, but it is a promise that any smaller number is acceptable.
Note that if apply
is used with exactly two arguments, the first
one being a function that takes a rest argument, there is no limit
except the size of memory on the number of elements in the second
argument to apply
.
Offers a very general way of controlling what arguments you
pass to a function. You can provide either individual arguments as in
funcall
or lists of arguments as in apply
, in any order. In
addition, you can make some of the arguments optional. If the
function is not prepared to accept all the arguments you specify, no
error occurs if the excess arguments are optional ones. Instead, the
excess arguments are simply not passed to the function.
The argument-specs are alternating keywords (or lists of keywords)
and values. Each keyword or list of keywords says what to do with the
value that follows. If a value happens to require no keywords,
provide ()
as a list of keywords for it.
Two keywords are presently defined: :optional
and :spread
.
:spread
says that the following value is a list of arguments.
Otherwise it is a single argument. :optional
says that all the
following arguments are optional. It is not necessary to specify
:optional
with all the following argument-specs, because it is
sticky.
Example:
(call #'foo () x :spread y '(:optional :spread) z () w)
The arguments passed to foo
are the value of x
, the
elements of the value of y
, the elements of the value of
z
, and the value of w
. The function foo
must be
prepared to accept all the arguments which come from x
and
y
, but if it does not want the rest, they are ignored.
(quote object)
simply returns object. quote
is used to
include constants in a form. It is useful specifically because
object is not evaluated; the quote
is how you make a form that
returns an arbitrary Lisp object.
Examples:
(quote x) => x (setq x (quote (some list))) x => (some list)
Since quote
is so useful but somewhat cumbersome to type, the reader normally
converts any form preceded by a single quote ('
) character into a quote
form.
For example,
(setq x '(some list))
is converted by read
into
(setq x (quote (some list)))
function
has two distinct, though related, meanings.
If f is a symbol or any other function spec (see function-spec),
(function f)
refers to the function definition of f.
For example, in (mapcar (function car) x)
, the function
definition of car
is passed as the first argument to mapcar
.
function
used this way is like fdefinition
except that its argument is unevaluated, and so
(function fred) is like (fdefinition 'fred)
f can also be an explicit function, or lambda-expression, a list such
as (lambda (x) (* x x))
such as could be the function definition of a
symbol. Then (function f)
represents that function, suitably
interfaced to execute in the lexical environment where it appears. To
explain:
(let (a) (mapcar (lambda (x) (push x a)) l))
attempts to call the function lambda
and evaluate (x)
for its first argument. That is no way to refer to the function
expressed by (lambda (x) (push x a))
.
(let (a) (mapcar (quote (lambda (x) (push x a))) l))
passes to mapcar
the list (lambda (x) (push x a))
.
This list does not in any way record the lexical environment
where the quote
form appeared, so it is impossible to make
this environment, with its binding of a
, available
for the execution of (push x a)
. Therefore, the reference
to a
does not work properly.
(let (a) (mapcar (function (lambda (x) (push x a))) l))
passes mapcar
a specially designed closure made from the
function represented by (lambda (x) (push x a))
. When mapcar
calls this closure, the lexical environment of the function
form
is put again into effect, and the a
in (push x a)
refers
properly to the binding made by this let
.
In addition, the compiler knows that the argument to function
should be compiled. The argument of quote
cannot be compiled
since it may be intended for other uses.
To ease typing, the reader converts #'thing
into (function thing)
.
So #'
is similar to '
except that it produces a
function
form instead of a quote
form. The last example
could be written as
(let (a) (mapcar #'(lambda (x) (push x a)) l))
Another way of explaining function
is that it causes f to be
treated the same way as it would as the car of a form. Evaluating
the form (f arg1 arg2...)
uses the function definition
of f if it is a symbol, and otherwise expects f to be a list
which is a lambda-expression. Note that the car of a form may not be
a non-symbol function spec, as that would be difficult to make sense of.
Instead, write
(funcall (function spec) args...)
You should be careful about whether you use #'
or '
. Suppose
you have a program with a variable x
whose value is assumed to
contain a function that gets called on some arguments. If you want that
variable to be the test
function, there are two things you could say:
(setq x 'test)
or
(setq x #'test)
The former causes the value of x
to be the symbol test
, whereas
the latter causes the value of x
to be the function object found in
the function cell of test
. When the time comes to call the function
(the program does (funcall x ...)
), either expression works
because calling a symbol as a function uses its function definition instead.
Using 'test
is insignificantly slower, because the function
call has to indirect through the symbol, but it allows the function
to be redefined, traced (see trace-fun), or advised (see advise-fun).
Use of #'
picks up the function definition out of
the symbol test
when the setq
is done and does not see any later changes to it.
#'
should be used only if you wish specifically to prevent redefinition
of the function from affecting this closure.
Takes no arguments and returns nil
.
Takes no arguments and returns t
.
Takes any number of arguments and returns nil
. This is often useful
as a “dummy” function; if you are calling a function that takes a function
as an argument, and you want to pass one that doesn’t do anything and
won’t mind being called with any argument pattern, use this.
comment
ignores its form and returns the symbol comment
.
It is most useful for commenting out function definitions
that are not needed or correct but worth preserving in the source.
The #|...|#
syntactic construct is an alternative method.
For comments within code about the code, it is better to use semicolons.
Example:
(comment
;; This is brain-damaged. Can someone figure out
;; how to do this right?
(defun foo (x)
...)
) ;End comment
;; prevents this definition of foo
from being used.
Declarations provide auxiliary information on how to execute a function
or expression properly. The most important declarations are special
declarations, which control the scope of variable names. Some
declarations do not affect execution at all and only provide information
about a function, for the sake of arglist
, for example.
Declarations may apply to an entire function or to any expression within
it. Declarations can be made around any subexpression by writing a
local-declare
around the subexpression or by writing a declare
at the front of the body of certain constructs. Declarations can be
made on an entire function by writing a declare
at the front of the
function’s body.
A local-declare
form looks like
(local-declare (decl1 decl2 ...) form1 form2 ...)
Each decl is in effect for the forms in the body of the
local-declare
form.
The special form declare
is used for writing local declarations
within the construct they apply to.
A declare inside a function definition, just after the argument
list, is equivalent to putting a local-declare
around the function
definition. More specifically,
(defun foo (a b) (declare (special a b)) (bar))
is equivalent to
(local-declare ((special a b)) (defun foo (a b) (bar)))
Note that
(defun foo (a b) (local-declare ((special a b)) (bar)))
does not do the job, because the declaration is not in effect for
the binding of the arguments of foo
.
declare
is preferable to local-declare
in this sort of
situation, because it allows the defun
s themselves to be the
top-level lists in the file. While local-declare
might appear to
have an advantage in that one local-declare
may go around several
defun
s, it tends to cause trouble to use local-declare
in that
fashion.
declare
has a similar meaning at the front of the body of a
progn
, prog
, let
, prog*
, let*
, or internal lambda
. For
example,
(prog (x) (declare (special x)) ...)
is equivalent to
(local-declare ((special x)) (prog (x) ...))
At top level in the file, (declare forms...)
is equivalent to
(eval-when (compile) forms...)
. This use of declare
is nearly obsolete, and should be avoided. In Common Lisp, proclaim
(below) is used for such purposes, with a different calling convention.
Elsewhere, declare
’s are ignored.
Here is a list of declarations that have system-defined meanings:
(special var1 var2 ...)
The variables var1, var2, etc will be treated as special variables in the scope of the declaration.
(unspecial var1 var2 ...)
The variables var1, var2, etc will be treated as lexical variables in the scope of the declaration, even if they are globally special.
(notinline fun1 fun2 ...)
The functions fun1, fun2 and so on will not be open coded or optimized by the compiler within the scope of the declaration.
(inline fun1 fun2 ...)
The functions fun1, fun2 and so on will be open coded or optimized by the compiler (to whatever extent it knows how) within the scope of the declaration. Merely issuing this declaration does not tell the compiler how to do any useful optimization or open coding of a function.
(ignore var1 var2 ...)
Says that the variables var1, var2, etc, which are bound in the construct in which this declaration is found, are going to be ignored. This is currently significant only in a function being compiled; the compiler issues a warning if the variables are used, and refrains from its usual warning if the variables are ignored.
(declaration decl1 decl2 ...)
Says that declarations decl1, decl2, etc are going to be used, and prevents any warning about an unrecognized type of declaration. For example:
(defun hack () (declare (declaration lose-method) (lose-method foo bar)) ... (lose foo) ...)
might be useful if (lose foo)
is a macro whose expander function
does (getdecl 'foo 'lose-method)
to see what to do.
See getdecl-fun for more information on getdecl
and declarations.
(proclaim '(declaration lose-method))
might also be advisable if you expect widespread use of lose-method
declarations.
The next two are used by the compiler and generally should not be written by users.
(def name . definition)
name will be defined for the compiler in the scope of the declaration.
The compiler uses this automatically to keep track of macros and
open-codable functions (defsubst
s) defined in the file being compiled.
Note that the cddr of this item is a function.
(propname symbol value)
(getdecl symbol propname)
will return value
in the scope of the declaration. This is how the compiler keeps track of
defdecl
s.
These declarations are significant only when they apply to an entire defun
.
(arglist . arglist)
Records arglist as the argument list of the function, to be used instead of its lambda list if anyone asks what its arguments are. This is purely documentation.
(values . values) or (:return-list . values)
Records values as the return values list of the function, to be used if anyone asks what values it returns. This is purely documentation.
(sys:function-parent parent-function-spec)
Records parent-function-spec as the parent of this function. If, in the editor, you ask to see the source of this function, and the editor doesn’t know where it is, the editor will show you the source code for the parent function instead.
For example, the accessor functions generated by defstruct
have no defuns of their own in the text of the source file.
So defstruct
generates them with sys:function-parent
declarations giving the defstruct
’s name as the parent function spec.
Visiting the accessor function with Meta-
sees the declaration
and therefore visits the text of the defstruct
.
(:self-flavor flavorname)
Instance variables of the flavor flavorname, in self
, will be
accessible in the function.
Executes the body, recognizing declarations at the front of it.
locally
is synonymous with progn
except that in Common Lisp
a declare
is allowed at the beginning of a locally
and not
at the beginning of a progn
.
locally
does differ from progn
in one context: at top level
in a file being compiled, progn
causes each of its elements
(including declarations, therefore) to be treated as if at top level.
locally
does not receive this treatment. The locally
form
is simply evaluated when the QFASL file is loaded.
Each of declarations is put into effect globally. Currently only
special
and unspecial
declarations mean anything in this way.
proclaim
’s arguments are evaluated, and the values are expected
to be declarations such as you could write in a declare
.
Thus, you would say (proclaim '(special x))
to make a special
declaration globally.
Top-level special
declarations are not the recommended way to make a
variable special. Use defvar
, defconstant
or defparameter
,
so that you can give the variable documentation. Proclaiming the
variable special should be done only when the variable is used in a file
other than the one which defines it, to enable the file to be compiled
without having to load the defining file first.
proclaim
is fairly new. Until recently, top-level declare
was
the preferred way to make global special declarations when defvar
,
etc, could not be used. Such top-level declare
’s are still
quite common. In them, the declaration would not be quoted;
for example, (declare (special x))
.
Equivalent to (proclaim (special variables...))
, this
declares each of the variables to be globally special.
This function is obsolete.
Removes any global special declarations of the variables. This function is obsolete.
Is a Common Lisp construct effectively the same as value-form. It declares that the value of value-form is an object which of type type-specifier. This is to assist compilers in generating better code for conventional machine architectures. The Lisp Machine does not make use of type declarations so this is the same as writing just value-form. type-specifier is not evaluated.
If you want the type of an object to be checked at run time, with an
error if it is not what it is supposed to be, use check-type
(check-type-fun).
When one function ends by calling another function (possibly itself), as in
(defun last (x) (cond ((atom x) x) ((atom (cdr x)) x) (t (last (cdr x)))))
it is called tail recursion. In general, if X is a form, and Y is a sub-form of X, then if the value of Y is unconditionally returned as the value of X, with no intervening computation, then we say that X tail-recursively evaluates Y.
In a tail recursive situation,
it is not strictly necessary to remember anything about the first call
to last
when the second one is activated. The stack frame for the
first call can be discarded completely, allowing last
to use a
bounded amount of stack space independent of the length of its argument.
A system which does this is called tail recursive.
The Lisp machine system works tail recursively if the variable
tail-recursion-flag
is non-nil
. This is often faster, because
it reduces the amount of time spent in refilling the hardware’s pdl
buffer. However, you forfeit a certain amount of useful debugging
information: once the outer call to last
has been removed from the
stack, you can no longer see its frame in the debugger.
If this variable is non-nil
, the calling stack frame is
discarded when a tail-recursive call is made in compiled code.
There are many things which a function can do that can make it dangerous
to discard its stack frame. For example, it may have done a *catch
;
it may have bound special variables; it may have a &rest
argument on
the stack; it may have asked for the location of an argument or local
variable. The system detects all of these conditions automatically and
retains the stack frame to ensure proper execution. Some of these
conditions occur in eval
; as a result, interpreted code is never
completely tail recursive.
The Lisp Machine includes a facility by which the evaluation of a form
can produce more than one value. When a function needs to return more
than one result to its caller, multiple values are a cleaner way of
doing this than returning a list of the values or setq
’ing special
variables to the extra values. In most Lisp function calls, multiple
values are not used. Special syntax is required both to produce
multiple values and to receive them.
The primitive for producing multiple values is values
, which takes
any number of arguments and returns that many values. If the last form
in the body of a function is a values
with three arguments, then
a call to that function returns three values. Many system functions
produce multiple values, but they all do it via values
.
Returns multiple values, its arguments. This is the primitive
function for producing multiple values. It is legal to call values
with
no arguments; it returns no values in that case.
Returns multiple values, the elements of the list. (values-list '(a b c))
is the same as (values 'a 'b 'c)
.
list may be nil
, the empty list, which causes no values to be returned.
Equivalent to (apply 'values list)
.
return
and its variants can also be used, within a block
, do
or
prog
special form, to return multiple values. They are explained on
return-fun.
Here are the special forms for receiving multiple values.
multiple-value
is a special
form used for calling a function which
is expected to return more than one value.
form is evaluated, and the variables
are set (not lambda-bound) to the values returned by form. If more values
are returned than there are variables, the extra values
are ignored. If there are more variables than values returned,
extra values of nil
are supplied. If nil
appears in the var-list,
then the corresponding value is ignored (setting nil
is not allowed anyway).
Example:
(multiple-value (symbol already-there-p) (intern "goo"))
In addition to its first value (the symbol), intern
returns a second
value, which is non-nil
if an existing symbol was found,
or else nil
if intern
had to create one. So if
the symbol goo
was already known, the variable already-there-p
is set non-nil
, otherwise it is set to nil
. The third value
returned by intern
is ignored by this form of call since there
is no third variable in the multiple-value
.
multiple-value
is usually used for effect rather than for value; however,
its value is defined to be the first of the values returned by form.
multiple-value-setq
is the Common Lisp name for this construct.
The two names are equivalent.
This is similar to multiple-value
, but locally binds the variables which
receive the values, rather than setting them, and has a body–a set of forms
which are evaluated with these local bindings in effect.
First form is evaluated. Then the variables are
bound to the values returned by form. Then the body forms
are evaluated sequentially, the bindings are undone, and the result
of the last body form is returned.
Example:
(multiple-value-bind (sym already-there) (intern string) ;; If an existing symbol was found, deallocate the string. (if already-there (return-storage (prog1 string (setq string nil)))) sym)
Evaluates the argforms, saving all of their values, and then calls function with all those values as arguments. This differs from
(funcall function argforms...)
because that would get only one argument for function from each
argform, whereas multiple-value-call
gets as many args from each
argform as the argform cares to return. This works by consing a
list of all the values returned, and applying function to it. Example:
(multiple-value-call 'append (values '(a b) '(c d)) '(e f)) => (a b c d e f)
Evaluates form, saves its values, evaluates the forms, discards their values, then returns whatever values form produced. This does not cons. Example:
(multiple-value-prog1 (values 1 2) (print 'foo)) => 1 2
multiple-value-list
evaluates form, and returns a list of
the values it returned. This is useful for when you don’t know how many values
to expect.
Example:
(setq a (multiple-value-list (intern "goo"))) a => (goo nil #<Package USER 10112147>)
This is similar to the example of multiple-value
above; a
is set
to a list of three elements, the three values returned by intern
.
Evaluates form and returns its value number n, n = 0 meaning
the first value. For example, (nth-value 1 (foo))
returns
the second of foo
’s values. nth-value
operates without consing
in compiled code if the first argument’s value is known at compile time.
When one form finished by tail recursively evaluating a subform (see
tail-recursion), all of the subform’s multiple values are passed back
by the outer form. For example, the value of a cond
is the value of
the last form in the selected clause. If the last form in that clause
produces multiple values, so does the cond
. This passing-back
of multiple values of course has no effect unless eventually one of the
special forms for receiving multiple values is reached.
If the outer form returns a value computed by a subform, but not in a
tail recursive fashion (for example, if the value of the subform is
examined first), multiple values or only single values may be returned
at the discretion of the implementation; users should not depend on
whatever way it happens to work, as it may change in the future or in
other implementations. The reason we don’t guarantee non-transmission
of multiple values is because such a guarantee would not be very useful
and the efficiency cost of enforcing it would be high. Even
setq
’ing a variable to the result of a form, then returning the
value of that variable, might pass multiple values if an
optimizing compiler realized that the setq
’ing of the variable
was unnecessary. Since extra returned values are generally ignored,
it is not vital to eliminate them.
Note that use of a form as an argument to a function never receives
multiple values from that form. That is, if the form (foo (bar))
is evaluated and the call to bar
returns many values, foo
is
still called on only one argument (namely, the first value returned),
rather than being called on all the values returned. We choose not to
generate several separate arguments from the several values, because
this would make the source code obscure; it would not be syntactically
obvious that a single form does not correspond to a single argument.
To pass all returned values to another function, use multiple-value-call
, above.
For clarity, descriptions of the interaction of several common special forms with multiple values follow. This can all be deduced from the rule given above. Note well that when it says that multiple values are not returned, it really means that they may or may not be returned, and you should not write any programs that depend on which way it actually works.
The body of a defun
or a lambda
, and variations such as the
body of a function, the body of a let
, etc., pass back multiple
values from the last form in the body.
eval
, apply
and funcall
,
pass back multiple values from the function called.
progn
passes back multiple values from its last form. progv
and
progw
do so also. prog1
and prog2
, however, do not pass
back multiple values.
Multiple values are passed back only from the last subform of an and
or an or
form,
not from previous subforms since the return is conditional. Remember
that multiple values are only passed back when the value of a subform
is unconditionally returned from the containing form. For example,
consider the form (or (foo) (bar))
. If foo
returns a non-nil
first value, then only that value is returned as the value of the
form. But if it returns nil
(as its first value), then or
returns whatever values the call to bar
returns.
cond
passes back multiple values from the last form in the selected
clause, provided that that last form’s value is returned
unconditionally. This is true if the clause has two or more forms in
it, and is always true for the last clause.
The variants of cond
such as if
, select
, selectq
, and
dispatch
pass back multiple values from the last form in the
selected clause.
If a block
form falls through the end, it returns all the values
returned by the last expression in it. If return-from
or return
is used to exit a block
form, then the values returned by the
block
form depend on the kind of return
. If return
is given
two or more subforms, then block
returns as many values as the
return
has subforms. However, if the return
has only one
subform, then the block
returns all of the values returned by that
one subform.
prog
behaves like block
if it is exited with return
(or
return-from
). If control falls through the end of a prog
, it
returns the single value nil
. do
also behaves like block
with respect to return
, but if it is exited through the exit test,
all the values of the last exit-form are returned.
unwind-protect
passes back multiple values from its protected form.
In a sense, this is an exception to the rule; but it is useful, and it
makes sense to consider the execution of the unwind forms as a byproduct of
unwinding the stack and not as part of sequential execution.
catch
passes back multiple values from the last form in its
body, if it exits normally. If a throw is done, multiple values are
passed back from the value form in the throw
.
The smallest number of values that might possibly fail to work. Returning a number of values less than this many cannot possibly run into trouble with an implementation limit on number of values returned.
Here is a description of the error conditions that the evaluator can signal. Some can be signaled by calls to compiled functions also. This is for use by those who are writing condition handlers (condition-handlers). The novice should skip this section.
sys:invalid-function
: (error
) ¶This is signaled when an object that is
supposed to be applied to arguments is not a valid Lisp function.
The condition instance supports the
operation :function
, which returns the supposed function to be called.
The :new-function
proceed type is provided; it expects one argument,
a function to call instead.
sys:invalid-lambda-list
: (sys:invalid-function
error
) ¶This condition name is present in addition to sys:invalid-function
when the function to be called looks like an interpreted function, and
the only problem is the syntax of its lambda list.
sys:too-few-arguments
: (error
) ¶This condition is signaled when a function is applied to too few arguments.
The condition instance supports the operations :function
and
:arguments
which return the function and the list of the arguments
provided.
The proceed types :additional-arguments
and :new-argument-list
are provided. Both take one argument. In the first case, the argument
is a list of arguments to pass in addition to the ones supplied. In the
second, it is a list of arguments to replace the ones actually supplied.
sys:too-many-arguments
: (error
) ¶This is similar to sys:too-few-arguments
. Instead of the
:additional-arguments
proceed type, :fewer-arguments
is
provided. Its argument is a number, which is how many of the originally
supplied arguments to use in calling the function again.
sys:undefined-keyword-argument
: (error
) ¶This is signaled when a function that takes keyword arguments is given a
keyword that it does not accept, if &allow-other-keys
was not used
in the function’s definition and :allow-other-keys
was not specified
by the caller (see allow-other-keys-kwd). The :keyword
operation
on the condition instance returns the extraneous keyword, and the
:value
operation returns the value supplied with it.
The proceed type :new-keyword
is provided. It expects one
argument, which is a keyword to use instead of the one supplied.
sys:cell-contents-error
: (error
) ¶This condition name categorizes all the errors signaled because of references to void memory locations. It includes “unbound” variables, “undefined” functions, and other things.
:address
A locative pointer to the referenced cell.
:current-address
A locative pointer to the cell which currently contains the contents that were found in the referenced cell when the error happened. This can be different from the original address in the case of dynamic variable bindings, which move between special PDLs and symbol value cells.
:cell-type
A keyword saying what type of cell was referred to: :function
,
:value
, :closure
, or nil
for a cell that is not one of
those.
:containing-structure
The object (list, array, symbol) inside which the referenced memory cell is found.
:data-type
:pointer
The data type and pointer fields of the contents of the memory cell, at the time of the error. Both are fixnums.
The proceed type :no-action
takes no argument. If the cell’s
contents are now valid, the program proceeds, using them. Otherwise
the error happens again.
The proceed type :package-dwim
looks for symbols with the same name
in other packages; but only if the containing structure is a symbol.
Two other proceed types take one argument: :new-value
and :store-new-value
.
The argument is used as the contents of the memory cell.
:store-new-value
also permanently stores the argument into the cell.
sys:unbound-variable
: (sys:cell-contents-error
error
) ¶This condition name categorizes all errors of variables whose values are void.
: sys:unbound-special-variable ¶
: sys:unbound-closure-variable ¶
: sys:unbound-instance-variable ¶These condition names appear in addition to sys:unbound-variable
to subcategorize
the kind of variable reference that the error happened in.
sys:undefined-function
: (sys:cell-contents-error
error
) ¶This condition name categorizes errors of function specs that are undefined.
sys:wrong-type-argument
: (error
) ¶This is signaled when a function checks the type of its argument and
rejects it; for example, if you do (car 1)
.
The condition instance supports these extra operations:
:arg-name
The name of the erroneous argument. This may be nil
if there is no
name, or if the system no longer remembers which argument it was.
:old-value
The value that was supplied for the argument.
:function
The function which received and rejected the argument.
:description
A type specifier which says what sort of object was expected for this argument.
The proceed type :argument-value
is provided; it expects one argument,
which is a value to use instead of the erroneous value.
Lisp provides a variety of structures for flow of control.
Function application is the basic method for construction of programs. Operations are written as the application of a function to its arguments. Usually, Lisp programs are written as a large collection of small functions, each of which implements a simple operation. These functions operate by calling one another, and so larger operations are defined in terms of smaller ones.
A function may always call itself in Lisp. The calling of a function by itself is known as recursion; it is analogous to mathematical induction.
The performing of an action repeatedly (usually with some
changes between repetitions) is called iteration, and is provided as
a basic control structure in most languages. The do statement of
PL/I, the for statement of ALGOL/60, and so on are examples of
iteration primitives. Lisp provides two general iteration facilities:
do
and loop
, as well as a variety of special-purpose iteration
facilities. (loop
is sufficiently complex that it is explained
in its own chapter later in the manual; see loop-fun.)
A conditional construct is one which allows a program
to make a decision, and do one thing or another based on some logical
condition. Lisp provides the simple one-way conditionals and
and or
,
the simple two-way conditional if
, and more general multi-way
conditionals such as cond
and selectq
.
The choice of which form to use in any particular situation is a matter
of personal taste and style.
There are some non-local exit control structures, analogous
to the leave, exit, and escape constructs in many modern
languages.
Zetalisp provides for both static (lexical) non-local exits with
block
and return-from
and dynamic non-local exits with catch
and throw
. Another kind of non-local exit is the goto, provided
by the tagbody
and go
constructs.
Zetalisp also provides a coroutine capability, explained in the section on stack-groups (stack-group), and a multiple-process facility (see process). There is also a facility for generic function calling using message passing; see flavor.
The body forms are evaluated in order from left to right and the value
of the last one is returned.
progn
is the primitive control structure construct for "compound
statements".
Example:
(foo (cdr a) (progn (setq b (extract frob)) (car b)) (cadr b))
Lambda-expressions, cond
forms, do
forms, and
many other control structure forms use progn
implicitly, that is,
they allow multiple forms in their bodies.
prog1
is similar to progn
, but it returns the value of its first form rather
than its last.
It is most commonly used to evaluate an expression with side effects, and return
a value which must be computed before the side effects happen.
Example:
(setq x (prog1 y (setq y x)))
interchanges the values of the variables x and y. prog1
never
returns multiple values.
prog2
is similar to progn
and prog1
, but it returns its
second form. It is included largely for compatibility with old programs.
if
is the simplest conditional form. The “if-then” form looks like:
(if predicate-form then-form)
predicate-form is evaluated, and if the result is non-nil
, the
then-form is evaluated and its result is returned. Otherwise, nil
is returned.
In the “if-then-else” form, it looks like
(if predicate-form then-form else-form)
predicate-form is evaluated, and if the result is non-nil
, the
then-form is evaluated and its result is returned. Otherwise, the
else-form is evaluated and its result is returned.
If there are more than three subforms, if
assumes you want more than
one else-form; if the predicate returns nil
, they are evaluated
sequentially and the result of the last one is returned.
If condition evaluates to something non-nil
, the body is
executed and its value(s) returned. Otherwise, the value of the when
is nil
and the body is not executed.
If condition evaluates to nil
, the body is
executed and its value(s) returned. Otherwise, the value of the unless
is nil
and the body is not executed.
The cond
special form consists of the symbol cond
followed by
several clauses. Each clause consists of a predicate form, called
the condition, followed by zero or more body forms.
(cond (condition body body...) (condition) (condition body ...) ... )
The idea is that each clause represents a case which is selected if its condition is satisfied and the conditions of all preceding clauses were not satisfied. When a clause is selected, its body forms are evaluated.
cond
processes its clauses in order from left to right. First,
the condition of the current clause is evaluated. If the result is
nil
, cond
advances to the next clause. Otherwise, the cdr of
the clause is treated as a list of body forms which are
evaluated in order from left to right. After evaluating the
body forms, cond
returns without inspecting any remaining
clauses. The value of the cond
form is the value of the
last body form evaluated, or the value of the condition if there
were no body forms in the clause. If cond
runs out of clauses,
that is, if every condition evaluates to nil
, and thus no case is
selected, the value of the cond
is nil
.
Example:
(cond ((zerop x) ;First clause: (+ y 3)) ; (zerop x) is the condition. ; (+ y 3) is the body. ((null y) ;A clause with 2 body forms: (setq y 4) ; this (cons x z)) ; and this. (z) ;A clause with no body forms: the condition is ; justz
. Ifz
is non-nil
, it is returned. (t ;A condition of t 105) ; is always satisfied. ) ;This is the end of the cond.
cond-every
has the same syntax as cond
, but executes every clause whose
condition is satisfied, not just the first. If a condition is the symbol
otherwise
, it is satisfied if and only if no preceding condition is
satisfied. The value returned
is the value of the last body form in the last clause whose condition
is satisfied. Multiple values are not returned.
and
evaluates the forms one at a time,
from left to right. If any form evaluates to nil
, and
immediately returns nil
without evaluating the remaining
forms. If all the forms evaluate to non-nil
values, and
returns
the value of the last form.
and
can be used in two different ways. You can use it as a logical
and
function, because it returns a true value only if all of its
arguments are true:
(if (and socrates-is-a-person all-people-are-mortal) (setq socrates-is-mortal t))
Because the order of evaluation is well-defined, you can do
(if (and (boundp 'x) (eq x 'foo)) (setq y 'bar))
knowing that the x
in the eq
form will not be evaluated if x
is found to be void.
You can also use and
as a simple conditional form:
(and (setq temp (assq x y)) (rplacd temp z))
(and bright-day glorious-day (princ "It is a bright and glorious day."))
but when
is usually preferable.
Note: (and) => t
, which is the identity for the and
operation.
or
evaluates the forms one by one from left to right.
If a form evaluates to nil
, or
proceeds to evaluate the
next form. If there are no more forms, or
returns nil
.
But if a form evaluates to a non-nil
value, or
immediately returns
that value without evaluating any remaining forms.
As with and
, or
can be used either as a logical or
function,
or as a conditional:
(or it-is-fish it-is-fowl) (or it-is-fish it-is-fowl (print "It is neither fish nor fowl.")
but it is often possible and cleaner to use unless
in the latter case.
Note: (or) => nil
, the identity for this operation.
selectq
is a conditional which chooses one of its clauses to execute
by comparing the value of a form against various constants using eql
.
Its form is as follows:
(selectq key-form (test body...) (test body...) (test body...) ...)
The first thing selectq
does is to evaluate key-form; call the resulting
value key. Then selectq
considers
each of the clauses in turn. If key matches the clause’s
test, the body of the clause
is evaluated, and selectq
returns the value of the last
body form. If there are no matches, selectq
returns nil
.
A test may be any of:
If the key is eql
to the symbol, it matches.
If the key is eql
to the number, it matches.
key must have the same type and the same value
as the number.
If the key is eql
to one of the elements of the list,
then it matches. The elements of the list should be symbols
or numbers.
t
or otherwise
The symbols t
and otherwise
are special tests which match anything.
Either symbol may be used, it makes no difference;
t
is mainly for compatibility with Maclisp’s caseq
construct.
To be useful, this should be the last clause in the selectq
.
Example:
(selectq x (foo (do-this)) (bar (do-that)) ((baz quux mum) (do-the-other-thing)) (otherwise (ferror nil "Never heard of ~S" x)))
is equivalent to
(cond ((eq x 'foo) (do-this)) ((eq x 'bar) (do-that)) ((memq x '(baz quux mum)) (do-the-other-thing)) (t (ferror nil "Never heard of ~S" x)))
Note that the tests are not evaluated; if you want them to
be evaluated use select
rather than selectq
.
case
is the Common Lisp name for this construct.
caseq
is the Maclisp name; it identical
to selectq
, which is not totally compatible with Maclisp,
because selectq
accepts otherwise
as well as t
where caseq
would not accept otherwise
, and because Maclisp
does some error-checking that selectq
does not. Maclisp programs
that use caseq
work correctly so long as they don’t use the
symbol otherwise
as a key.
Like case
except that an uncorrectable error is signaled if
every clause fails. t
or otherwise
clauses are not allowed.
Like ecase
except that the error is correctable. The first argument
is called place because it must be setf
’able.
If the user proceeds from the error, a new value is read and stored into
place; then the clauses are tested again using the new value.
Errors repeat until a value is specified which makes some clause succeed.
Also see defselect
(defselect-fun), a special form for defining a function
whose body is like a selectq
.
select
is like selectq
, except that the elements of the
tests are evaluated before they are used.
This creates a syntactic ambiguity: if (bar baz)
is seen the
first element of a clause, is it a list of two forms, or is it one
form? select
interprets it as a list of two forms. If you
want to have a clause whose test is a single form, and that form
is a list, you have to write it as a list of one form.
Example:
(select (frob x) (foo 1) ((bar baz) 2) (((current-frob)) 4) (otherwise 3))
is equivalent to
(let ((var (frob x))) (cond ((eq var foo) 1) ((or (eq var bar) (eq var baz)) 2) ((eq var (current-frob)) 4) (t 3)))
selector
is like select
, except that you get to specify the function
used for the comparison instead of eq
. For example,
(selector (frob x) equal (('(one . two)) (frob-one x)) (('(three . four)) (frob-three x)) (otherwise (frob-any x)))
is equivalent to
(let ((var (frob x))) (cond ((equal var '(one . two)) (frob-one x)) ((equal var '(three . four)) (frob-three x)) (t (frob-any x))))
select-match
is like select
but each clause can specify a pattern
to match the key against. The general form of use looks like
(select-match key-form (pattern condition body...) (pattern condition body...) ... (otherwise body...))
The value of key-form is matched against the patterns one at a
time until a match succeeds and the accompanying condition evaluates
to something non-nil
. At this point the body of that clause is
executed and its value(s) returned. If all the patterns/conditions
fail, the body of the otherwise
clause (if any) is executed. A
pattern can test the shape of the key object, and set variables
which the condition form can refer to. All the variables set by the
patterns are bound locally to the select-match
form.
The patterns are matched using list-match-p
(list-match-p-fun).
Example:
(select-match '(a b c) (`(,x b ,x) t (vector x)) (`((,x ,y) b . ,ignore) t (list x y)) (`(,x b ,y) (symbolp x) (cons x y)) (otherwise 'lose-big))
returns (a . c)
, having checked (symbolp 'a)
. The first clause
matches only if the there are three elements, the first and third
elements are equal
and the second element is b
. The second
matches only if the first element is a list of length two and the second
element is b
. The third clause accepts any list of length three
whose second element is b
. The fourth clause accepts anything that did
not match the previous clauses.
select-match
generates highly optimized code using special
instructions.
(dispatch byte-specifier number clauses...)
is the same
as select
(not selectq
), but the key is obtained by evaluating
(ldb byte-specifier number)
.
byte-specifier and number are both evaluated. Byte specifiers
and ldb
are explained on ldb-fun.
Example:
(princ (dispatch (byte 2 13) cat-type (0 "Siamese.") (1 "Persian.") (2 "Alley.") (3 (ferror nil "~S is not a known cat type." cat-type))))
It is not necessary to include all possible values of the byte which is dispatched on.
selectq-every
has the same syntax as selectq
, but, like
cond-every
, executes every selected clause instead of just the first
one. If an otherwise
clause is present, it is selected if and only
if no preceding clause is selected. The value returned is the value of
the last form in the last selected clause. Multiple values are not
returned. Example:
(selectq-every animal ((cat dog) (setq legs 4)) ((bird man) (setq legs 2)) ((cat bird) (put-in-oven animal)) ((cat dog man) (beware-of animal)))
(eq x y) => t
if and only if x and y are the same object.
It should be noted that things that print the same are not necessarily eq
to each other.
In particular, numbers with the same value
need not be eq
, and two similar lists are usually not eq
.
Examples:
(eq 'a 'b) => nil (eq 'a 'a) => t (eq (cons 'a 'b) (cons 'a 'b)) => nil (setq x (cons 'a 'b)) (eq x x) => t
Note that in Zetalisp equal fixnums are eq
; this is not true in Maclisp.
Equality does not imply eq
-ness for other types of numbers. To compare numbers,
use =
; see =-fun.
(neq x y)
= (not (eq x y))
. This is provided
simply as an abbreviation for typing convenience.
eql
is the same as eq
except that if x and y are numbers
of the same type they are eql
if they are =
.
The equal
predicate returns t
if its arguments are similar
(isomorphic) objects.
Two numbers are equal
if they have the same value and type (for
example, a float is never equal
to a fixnum, even if =
is true of them).
For conses, equal
is defined
recursively as the two cars being equal
and the two cdrs
being equal. Two strings are equal
if they have the same length,
and the characters composing them are the same; see string=
,
string=-fun. Alphabetic case is significant. All other objects
are equal
if and only if they are eq
. Thus equal
could have
been defined by:
(defun equal (x y) (cond ((eq x y) t) ((and (numberp x) (numberp y)) (= x y)) ((and (stringp x) (stringp y)) (string-equal x y)) ((and (consp x) (consp y)) (and (equal (car x) (car y)) (equal (cdr x) (cdr y))))))
As a consequence of the above definition, it can be seen that
equal
may compute forever when applied to looped list structure.
In addition, eq
always implies equal
; that is, if (eq a b)
then (equal a b)
. An intuitive definition of equal
(which is
not quite correct) is that two objects are equal
if they look the
same when printed out. For example:
(setq a '(1 2 3)) (setq b '(1 2 3)) (eq a b) => nil (equal a b) => t (equal "Foo" "foo") => nil
equalp
is a broader kind of equality than equal
. Two objects that
are equal
are always equalp
. In addition,
numbers of different types are equalp
if they are =
. Two character
objects are equalp
if they are char-equal
(that is, they are compared
ignoring font, case and meta bits).
Two arrays of any sort are equalp
if they have the same dimensions
and corresponding elements are equalp
. In particular, this means
that two strings are equalp
if they match ignoring case and font information.
(equalp "Foo" "foo") => t (equalp '1 '1.0) => t (equalp '(1 "Foo") '(1.0 "foo")) => t
Because equalp
is a Common Lisp function, it regards a string as having
character objects as its elements:
(equalp "Foo" #(#/F #/o #/o)) => t (equalp "Foo" #(#/F #/o #/o)) => nil
not
returns t
if x is nil
, else nil
.
null
is the same as not
; both functions are included for the sake
of clarity. Use null
to check whether something is nil
; use not
to invert the sense of a logical value. Some people prefer to distinguish
between nil
as falsehood and nil
as the empty list by writing:
(cond ((not (null lst)) ... )
( ... ))
rather than
(cond (lst ... )
( ... ))
There is no loss of efficiency, since these compile into exactly the same instructions.
The do
special form provides a simple generalized iteration facility,
with an arbitrary number of “index variables” whose values are saved
when the do
is entered and restored when it is left, ie they are
bound by the do
. The index variables are used in the iteration
performed by do
. At the beginning, they are initialized to
specified values, and then at the end of each trip around the loop the
values of the index variables are changed according to specified
rules. do
allows the programmer to specify a predicate which
determines when the iteration will terminate. The value to be
returned as the result of the form may, optionally, be specified.
do
comes in two varieties, new-style and old-style. The old-style
do
is obsolete and exists for Maclisp compatibility only.
The more general, “new-style” do
looks like:
(do ((var init repeat) ...) (end-test exit-form ...) body...)
The first item in the form is a list of zero or more index variable
specifiers. Each index variable specifier is a list of the name of a
variable var, an initial value form init, which defaults to nil
if it is omitted, and a repeat value form repeat. If repeat is
omitted, the var is not changed between repetitions. If init is
omitted, the var is initialized to nil
.
An index variable specifier can also be just the name of a variable,
rather than a list. In this case, the variable has an initial value of
nil
, and is not changed between repetitions.
All assignment to the index variables is done in parallel. At the
beginning of the first iteration, all the init forms are evaluated,
then the vars are bound to the values of the init forms, their
old values being saved in the usual way. Note that the init forms
are evaluated before the vars are bound, ie lexically
outside of the do
. At the beginning of each succeeding
iteration those vars that have repeat forms get set to the
values of their respective repeat forms. Note that all the
repeat forms are evaluated before any of the vars is set.
The second element of the do
-form is a list of an end-testing
predicate form end-test, and zero or more forms, called the
exit-forms. This resembles a cond
clause. At the beginning of
each iteration, after processing of the variable specifiers, the
end-test is evaluated. If the result is nil
, execution proceeds
with the body of the do
. If the result is not nil
, the
exit-forms are evaluated from left to right and then do
returns.
The value of the do
is the value of the last exit-form, or
nil
if there were no exit-forms (not the value of the
end-test, as you might expect by analogy with cond
).
Note that the end-test gets evaluated before the first time the body
is evaluated. do
first initializes the variables from the init
forms, then it checks the end-test, then it processes the body, then
it deals with the repeat forms, then it tests the end-test
again, and so on. If the end-test
returns a non-nil
value the
first time, then the body is not executed.
If the second element of the form is nil
, there is no end-test
nor exit-forms, and the body of the do
is executed only
once. In this type of do
it is an error to have repeats. This
type of do
is no more powerful than let
; it is obsolete
and provided only for Maclisp compatibility.
If the second element of the form is (nil)
, the end-test is
never true and there are no exit-forms. The body of the do
is executed over and over. The resulting infinite loop can be terminated by use
of return
or throw
.
do
implicitly creates a block
with name nil
, so return
can be used lexically within a do
to exit it immediately. This
unbinds the do
variables and the do
form returns whatever values
were specified in the return
form. See block-and-return-section
for more information on these matters. The body of the do
is
actually treated as a tagbody
, so that it may contain go
tags
(see go-to), but this usage is discouraged as it is often unclear.
Examples of the new form of do
:
(do ((i 0 (1+ i)) ; This is just the same as the above example, (n (array-length foo-array))) ((= i n)) ; but written as a new-styledo
. (aset 0 foo-array i)) ; Note how thesetq
is avoided.
(do ((z list (cdr z)) ; z starts aslist
and is cdr’d each time. (y other-list) ; y starts asother-list
, and is unchanged by the do. (x) ; x starts asnil
and is not changed by thedo
. w) ; w starts asnil
and is not changed by thedo
. (nil) ; The end-test isnil
, so this is an infinite loop. body) ; Presumably the body usesreturn
somewhere.
The construction
(do ((x e (cdr x)) (oldx x x)) ((null x)) body)
exploits parallel assignment to index variables. On the first
iteration, the value of oldx
is whatever value x
had before
the do
was entered. On succeeding iterations, oldx
contains
the value that x
had on the previous iteration.
The body of a do
may contains no forms at all. Very often an
iterative algorithm can be most clearly expressed entirely in the
repeats and exit-forms of a new-style do
, and the body
is empty. For example,
(do ((x x (cdr x)) (y y (cdr y)) (z nil (cons (f x y) z))) ;exploits parallel assignment. ((or (null x) (null y)) (nreverse z)) ;typical use ofnreverse
. ) ;nodo
-body required. is like(maplist 'f x y)
(see maplist-fun).
The old-style do
exists only for Maclisp
compatibility. It looks like:
(do var init repeat end-test body...)
The first time through the loop var gets the value of the init form;
the remaining times through the loop it gets the value of the repeat form,
which is re-evaluated each time. Note that the init form is evaluated
before var is bound, ie lexically outside of the do
.
Each time around the loop, after var is set,
end-test is evaluated. If it is non-nil
, the do
finishes
and returns nil
. If the end-test evaluated to nil
, the body of
the loop is executed. As with the new-style do, return
and go
may be used in the body, and they have the same meaning.
Also see loop
(loop-fun), a general iteration facility based on a keyword
syntax rather than a list-structure syntax.
In a word, do*
is to do
as let*
is to let
.
do*
works like do
but binds and steps the variables sequentially
instead of in parallel. This means that the init form for one
variable can use the values of previous variables. The repeat forms
refer to the new values of previous variables instead of their old
values. Here is an example:
(do* ((x xlist (cdr x)) (y (car x) (car x))) (print (list x y)))
On each iteration, y’s value is the car of x. The same
construction with do
might get an error on entry since x
might not be bound yet.
do-named
is like do
but defines a block
with a name
explicitly specified by the programmer in addition to the block
named nil
which every do
defines. This makes it possible to
use return-from
to return from this do-named
even from within
an inner do
. An ordinary return
there would return from the
inner do
instead. do-named
is obsolete now that block
,
which is more general and more coherent, exists. See
block-and-return-section for more information on block
and
return-from
.
The syntax of do-named
is like do
except that the symbol do-named
is
immediately followed by the block
name, which should be a symbol.
Example:
(do-named george ((a 1 (1+ a)) (d 'foo)) ((> a 4) 7) (do ((c b (cdr c))) ((null c)) ... (return-from george (cons b d)) ...))
is equivalent to
(block george (do ((a 1 (1+ a)) (d 'foo)) ((> a 4) 7) (do ((c b (cdr c))) ((null c)) ... (return-from george (cons b d)) ...)))
t
as the name of a do-named
behaves somewhat peculiarly, and
therefore should be avoided.
This special form offers a combination of the features of do*
and
those of do-named
. It is obsolete, as is do-named
,
since it is cleaner to use block
.
dotimes
is a convenient abbreviation for the most common integer
iteration. dotimes
performs body the number of times given by
the value of count, with index bound to 0
, 1
, etc. on
successive iterations. When the count is exhausted, the value of
value-expression is returned; or nil
, if value-expression
is missing.
Example:
(dotimes (i (truncate m n)) (frob i))
is equivalent to:
(do ((i 0 (1+ i)) (count (truncate m n))) (( i count)) (frob i))
except that the name count
is not used. Note that i
takes on
values starting at zero rather than one, and that it stops before taking
the value (truncate m n)
rather than after. You can use return
and
go
and tagbody
-tags inside the body, as with do
.
dotimes
forms return the value of value-expression, or nil
,
unless returned from explicitly with return
. For example:
(dotimes (i 5) (if (eq (aref a i) 'foo) (return i)))
This form searches the array that is the value of a
, looking for
the symbol foo
. It returns the fixnum index of the first element
of a
that is foo
, or else nil
if none of the elements
are foo
.
dolist
is a convenient abbreviation for the most common list
iteration. dolist
performs body once for each element in the
list which is the value of list, with item bound to the
successive elements. If the list is exhausted, the value of
value-expression is returned; or nil
, if
value-expression is missing.
Example:
(dolist (item (frobs foo)) (mung item))
is equivalent to:
(do ((lst (frobs foo) (cdr lst)) (item)) ((null lst)) (setq item (car lst)) (mung item))
except that the name lst
is not used.
You can use return
and go
and tagbody
-tags inside the body, as with do
.
Executes the forms in the body over and over, or until a non-local exit
(such as return
).
The static non-local exit allows code deep within a construct to jump
to the end of that construct instantly, not executing anything except
unwind-protect
’s on the way. The construct which defines a static level
that can be exited non-locally is called block
and the construct which
exits it is called return-from
. The block
being exited must be lexically
visible from the return-from
which says to exit it; this is what ‘static’ means. By contrast, catch
and throw
provide for dynamic non-local
exits; refer to the following section.
Here is an example of using a static non-local exit:
(block top (let ((v1 (do-1))) (when (all-done v1) (return-from top v1)) (do-2)) (do-3) ... (do-last))
If (all-done v1)
returns non-nil
, the entire block
immediately returns the value of v1
. Otherwise, the rest of the
body of the block is executed sequentially, and ultimately the value or
values of (do-last)
are returned.
Note that the return-from
form is very unusual: it does not ever
return a value itself, in the conventional sense. It isn’t useful to
write (setq a (return-from foo 3))
, because when the
return-from
form is evaluated, the containing block
is
immediately exited, and the setq
never happens.
The fact that block
’s and return-from
’s are matched up lexically
means you cannot do this:
(defun foo (a) (block foo1 (bar a))) (defun bar (x) (return-from foo1 x))
The (return-from foo1 x)
gets an error because there is no lexically
visible block
named foo1
. The suitable block
in the caller, foo
,
is not even noticed.
Static handling allows the compiler to produce good code for return-from
.
It is also useful with functional arguments:
(defun first-symbol (list) (block done (mapc #'(lambda (elt) (if (symbolp elt) (return-from done elt))) list)))
The return-from done
sees the block done
lexically.
Even if mapc
had a block
in it named done
it would
have no effect on the execution of first-symbol
.
When a function is defined with defun
with a name which is a symbol,
a block
whose name is the function name is automatically placed around
the body of the function definition. For example,
(defun foo (a) (if (evenp a) (return-from foo (list a))) (1+ a)) (foo 4) => (4) (foo 5) => 6
A function written explicitly with lambda
does not have a block
unless you write one yourself.
A named prog
, or a do-named
, implicitly defines a block
with
the specified name. So you can exit those constructs with return-from
.
In fact, the ability to name prog
’s was the original way to define
a place for return-from
to exit, before block
was invented.
Every prog
, do
or loop
, whether named or not, implicitly
defines a block
named nil
. Thus, named prog
’s define two
block
’s, one named nil
and one named whatever name you specify.
As a result, you can use return
(an abbreviation for return-from nil
)
to return from the innermost lexically containing prog
, do
or
loop
(or from a block nil
if you happen to write one).
This function is like assq
, but it returns an additional value
which is the index in the table of the entry it found. For example,
(defun assqn (x table) (do ((l table (cdr l)) (n 0 (1+ n))) ((null l) nil) (if (eq (caar l) x) (return (values (car l) n)))))
There is one exception to this: a prog
, do
or loop
with
name t
defines only the block named t
, no block named nil
.
The compiler used to make use of this feature in expanding certain built-in
constructs into others.
Executes body, returning the values of the last form in body,
but permitting non-local exit using return-from
forms present
lexically within body. name is not evaluated, and is used
to match up return-from
forms with their block
’ss.
(block foo (return-from foo 24) t) => 24 (block foo t) => t
Performs a non-local exit from the innermost lexically containing
block
whose name is name. name is not evaluated.
When the compiler is used, return-from
’s are matched up with
block
’s at compile time.
values is evaluated and its values
become the values of the exited block
form.
A return-from
form may appear as or inside an argument to a regular
function, but if the return-from
is executed then the function will never
actually be called. For example,
(block done (foo (if a (return-from done t) nil)))
foo
is actually called only if a
’s value is nil
.
This style of coding is not recommended when foo
is actually a function.
return-from
can also be used with zero value forms, or with several
value forms. Then one value is returned from each value form.
Originally return-from
always returned only one value from each
value form, even when there was only one value form. Passing
back all the values when there is a single values form is a later
change, which is also the Common Lisp standard. In fact, the single
value form case is much more powerful and subsumes all the others.
For example,
(return-from foo 1 2)
is equivalent to
(return-from foo (values 1 2))
and
(return-from foo)
is equivalent to
(return-from foo (values))
It is unfortunate that the case of one value form is treated differently from all other cases, but the power of being able to propagate any number of values from a single form is worth it.
To return precisely one value, use (return-from foo (values form))
.
It is legal to write simply (return-from foo)
, which returns no
values from the block
.
See multiple-value for more information.
Is equivalent to (return-from nil values)
.
It returns from a block
whose name is nil
.
In addition, break
(see break-fun) recognizes the typed-in form
(return value)
specially. break
evaluates value
and returns it.
This function is like return
except that each element of list
is returned as a separate value from the block
that is exited.
return-list
is obsolete, since (return (values-list list))
does the same thing.
Jumping to a label or tag is another kind of static non-local exit. Compared with
return-from
, it allows more flexibility in choosing where to send
control to, but does not allow values to be sent along. This is because
the tag does not have any way of saying what to do with any
values.
To define a tag, the tagbody
special form is used.
In the body of a tagbody
, all lists are treated as forms to be
evaluated (called statements when they occur in this context).
If no goto happens, all the forms are evaluated in sequence
and then the tagbody
form returns nil
. Thus, the statements
are evaluated only for effect.
An element of the tagbody
’s body which is a symbol is not a statement
but a tag instead. It identifies a place in the sequence of statements
which you can go to. Going to a tag is accomplished by the form
(go tag)
, executed at any point lexically within the tagbody
.
go
transfers control immediately to the first statement following
tag in its tagbody
, pausing only to deal with any
unwind-protect
s that are being exited as a result. If there are
no more statements after tag in its tagbody
, then that tagbody
returns nil
immediately.
All lexically containing tagbody
’s are eligible to contain the
specified tag, with the innermost tagbody
taking priority. If no
suitable tag is found, an error is signaled. The compiler matches
go
’s with tags at compile time and issues a compiler warning if no
tag is found. Example:
(block nil (tagbody (setq x some frob) loop do something (if some predicate (go endtag)) do something more (if (minusp x) (go loop)) endtag (return z)))
is a kind of iteration made out of go-to’s. This
tagbody
can never exit normally because the return
in the last
statement takes control away from it. This use of a return
and block
is how one encapsulates a tagbody
to produce a non-nil
value.
It works to go
from an internal lambda
function to a tag
in a lexically containing function, as in
(defun foo (a) (tagbody t1 (bar #'(lambda () (go t1)))))
If bar
ever invokes its argument, control goes to t1
and
bar
is invoked anew. Not very useful, but it illustrates the technique.
Executes all the elements of statements-and-tags which are lists (the statements),
and then returns nil
. But meanwhile, all elements of statements-and-tags
which are symbols (the tags) are available for use with go
in any of the
statements. Atoms other than symbols are meaningless in a tagbody
.
The reason that tagbody
returns nil
rather than the value of the last
statement is that the designers of Common Lisp decided that one could not
reliably return a value from the tagbody
by writing it as the last statement
since some of the time the expression for the desired value would be a symbol
rather than a list, and then it would be taken as a tag rather than the last statement
and it would not work.
The go
special form is used to “go-to” a tag defined
in a lexically containing tagbody
form (or other form which
implicitly expands into a tagbody
, such as prog
, do
or loop
).
tag must be a symbol. It is not evaluated.
prog
is an archaic special form which provides temporary variables,
static non-local exits, and tags for go
. These aspects of prog
were individually abstracted out to inspire let
, block
and
tagbody
. Now prog
is obsolete, as it is much cleaner to use
let
, block
, tagbody
or all three of them, or do
or
loop
. But prog
appears in so many programs that it cannot be
eliminated.
A typical prog
looks like (prog (variables...) body...)
,
which is equivalent to
(block nil (let (variables...) (tagbody body...)))
If the first subform of a prog
is a non-nil
symbol (rather than
a list of variables), it is the name of the prog
, and return-from
(see return-from-fun) can be used to return from it. A named prog
looks like
(prog name (variables...) body...)
and is equivalent to
(block name (block nil (let (variables...) (tagbody body...))))
The prog*
special form is almost the same as prog
. The only
difference is that the binding and initialization of the temporary
variables is done sequentially, so each one can depend on the
previous ones. Thus, the equivalent code would use let*
rather
than let
.
catch
is a special form used with the throw
function to do
non-local exits. First tag is evaluated; the result is called the tag
of the catch
. Then the body forms are evaluated sequentially,
and the values of the last form are returned. However, if,
during the evaluation of the body, the
function throw
is called with the same tag as the tag of the
catch
, then the evaluation of the body is aborted, and the
catch
form immediately returns the values of the second
argument to throw
without further evaluating the current body form or
the rest of the body.
The tag’s are used to match up throw
’s with catch
’s.
(catch 'foo form)
catches a (throw 'foo form)
but
not a (throw 'bar form)
. It is an error if throw
is done
when there is no suitable catch
(or catch-all
; see below).
Any Lisp object may be used as a catch
tag.
The values t
and nil
for tag are special: a catch
whose
tag is one of these values catches throws regardless of tag. These are only
for internal use by unwind-protect
and catch-all
respectively.
The only difference between t
and nil
is in the error checking;
t
implies that after a “cleanup handler” is executed control will be
thrown again to the same tag, therefore it is an error if a specific
catch for this tag does not exist higher up in the stack. With nil
,
the error check isn’t done. Example:
(catch 'negative (values (mapcar #'(lambda (x) (cond ((minusp x) (throw 'negative (values x :negative))) (t (f x)) ))) y) :positive))
returns a list of f
of each element of y
, and :positive
, if they are all
positive, otherwise the first negative member of y
, and :negative
.
The catch-continuation
special form makes it convenient to
discriminate whether exit is normal or due to a throw.
The body is executed inside a catch
on tag (which is
evaluated). If body returns normally, the function
non-throw-cont is called, passing all the values returned by the
last form in body as arguments. This function’s values are returned
from the catch-continuation
.
If on the other hand a throw to tag occurs, the values thrown are passed to the function throw-cont, and its values are returned.
If a continuation is explicitly written as nil
, it is
not called at all. The arguments that would have been passed to it are
returned instead. This is equivalent to using values
as the
function; but explicit nil
is optimized, so use that.
catch-continuation-if
differs only in that the catch is not done if
the value of the cond-form is nil
. In this case, the non-throw
continuation if any is always called.
In the general case, consing is necessary to record the multiple values,
but if a continuation is an explicit #'(lambda ...)
with a
fixed number of arguments, or if a continuation is nil
, it is open
coded and the consing is avoided.
throw
is the primitive for exiting from a surrounding catch
.
tag is evaluated, and the result is matched (with eq
) against
the tags of all active catch
’es; the innermost matching one is exited.
If no matching catch
is dynamically active, an error is signaled.
All the values of values-form are returned from the exited catch
.
catch
’es with tag nil
always match any throw
. They are
really catch-all
’s. So do catch
’es with tag t
, which are
unwind-protect
’s, but if the only matching catch
’es are these
then an error is signaled anyway. This is because an unwind-protect
always throws again after its cleanup forms are finished; if there
is nothing to catch after the last unwind-protect
, an error will
happen then, and it is better to detect the error sooner.
The values t
, nil
, and 0
for tag are reserved and used
for internal purposes. nil
may not be used, because it would cause
confusion in handling of unwind-protect
’s. t
may only be
used with *unwind-stack
. 0
and nil
are used internally when
returning out of an unwind-protect
.
sys:throw-tag-not-seen
: (error
) ¶This is signaled when throw
(or *unwind-stack
) is used and
there is no catch
for the specified tag. The condition instance
supports these extra operations:
:tag
The tag being thrown to.
:value
The value being thrown (the second argument to throw
).
:count
:action
The additional two arguments given to *unwind-stack
, if that was used.
The error occurs in the environment of the throw
; no unwinding has yet taken place.
The proceed type :new-tag
expects one argument, a tag to throw to instead.
This is a generalization of throw
provided for program-manipulating
programs such as the debugger.
tag and value are the same as the corresponding arguments to
throw
.
A tag of t
invokes a special feature whereby the entire stack is
unwound, and then the function action is called (see below). During
this process unwind-protect
’s receive control, but catch-all
’s do
not. This feature is provided for the benefit of system programs which
want to unwind a stack completely.
active-frame-count, if non-nil
, is the number of frames
to be unwound. The definition of a frame is implementation-dependent.
If this counts down to zero before a suitable catch
is found, the *unwind-stack
terminates and
that frame returns value to whoever called it.
This is similar to Maclisp’s freturn
function.
If action is non-nil
, whenever the *unwind-stack
would be
ready to terminate (either due to active-frame-count or due to
tag being caught as in throw
), instead action is called
with one argument, value. If tag is t
, meaning throw out
the whole way, then the function action is not allowed to return.
Otherwise the function action may return and its value will be
returned instead of value from the catch
–or from an arbitrary
function if active-frame-count is in use. In this case the
catch
does not return multiple values as it normally does when
thrown to. Note that it is often useful for action to be a
stack-group.
Note that if both active-frame-count and action are nil
,
*unwind-stack
is identical to throw
.
Sometimes it is necessary to evaluate a form and make sure that certain side-effects take place after the form is evaluated; a typical example is:
(progn (turn-on-water-faucet) (hairy-function 3 nil 'foo) (turn-off-water-faucet))
The non-local exit facilities of Lisp create situations in which the
above code won’t work, however: if hairy-function
should use
throw
, return
or go
to transfer control outside of the
progn
form, then (turn-off-water-faucet)
will never be evaluated
(and the faucet will presumably be left running). This is particularly
likely if hairy-function
gets an error and the user tells the
debugger to give up and flush the computation.
In order to allow the above program to work, it can
be rewritten using unwind-protect
as follows:
(unwind-protect (progn (turn-on-water-faucet) (hairy-function 3 nil 'foo)) (turn-off-water-faucet))
If hairy-function
transfers control out of the
evaluation of the unwind-protect
, the
(turn-off-water-faucet)
form is evaluated during the
transfer of control, before control arrives at the
catch
, block
or go
tag to which it is being transferred.
If the progn
returns normally, then the (turn-off-water-faucet)
is evaluated, and the unwind-protect
returns the result of the progn
.
The general form of unwind-protect
looks like
(unwind-protect protected-form cleanup-form1 cleanup-form2 ...)
protected-form is evaluated, and when it returns or when it attempts
to transfer control out of the unwind-protect
, the cleanup-forms
are evaluated. The value of the unwind-protect
is the value of
protected-form. Multiple values returned by the protected-form
are propagated back through the unwind-protect
.
The cleanup forms are run in the variable-binding environment that you
would expect: that is, variables bound outside the scope of the
unwind-protect
special form can be accessed, but variables bound
inside the protected-form can’t be. In other words, the stack is
unwound to the point just outside the protected-form, then the
cleanup handler is run, and then the stack is unwound some more.
(catch-all form)
is like (catch some-tag form)
except that it catches a
throw
to any tag at all. Since the tag thrown to
is one of the returned values, the caller of catch-all
may continue
throwing to that tag if he wants. The one thing that catch-all
does not catch is a *unwind-stack
with a tag of t
.
catch-all
is a macro which expands into catch
with a tag of nil
.
catch-all
returns all the values thrown to it, or returned by the
body, plus three additional values: the tag thrown to, the
active-frame-count, and the action. The tag value is nil
if the
body returned normally. The last two values are the third and fourth
arguments to *unwind-stack
(see *unwind-stack-fun) if that was
used, or nil
if an ordinary throw
was done or if the body
returned normally.
If you think you want this, most likely you are mistaken and you really
want unwind-protect
.
Mapping is a type of iteration in which a function is successively applied to pieces of a list. There are several options for the way in which the pieces of the list are chosen and for what is done with the results returned by the applications of the function.
For example, mapcar
operates on successive elements of the list.
As it goes down the list, it calls the function giving it an element
of the list as its one argument: first the car, then the
cadr, then the caddr, etc., continuing until the end of the
list is reached. The value returned by mapcar
is a list of the
results of the successive calls to the function. An example of the
use of mapcar
would be mapcar
’ing the function abs
over
the list (1 -2 -4.5 6.0e15 -4.2)
, which would be written as
(mapcar (function abs) '(1 -2 -4.5 6.0e15 -4.2))
.
The result is (1 2 4.5 6.0e15
4.2)
.
In general, the mapping functions take any number of arguments. For example,
(mapcar f x1 x2 ... xn)
In this case f must be a function of n arguments.
mapcar
proceeds
down the lists x1, x2, ..., xn in parallel.
The first argument to f
comes from x1, the second from x2, etc.
The iteration stops as soon as any of the lists is exhausted.
(If there are no lists at all, then there are no lists to be exhausted,
so f is called repeatedly without end. This is an
obscure way to write an infinite loop. It is supported for
consistency.) If you want to call a function of many arguments
where one of the arguments successively takes on the values of the elements
of a list and the other arguments are constant, you can use a circular
list for the other arguments to mapcar
. The function circular-list
is useful for creating such lists; see circular-list-fun.
There are five other mapping functions besides mapcar
. maplist
is like mapcar
except that the function is applied to the list and
successive cdrs of that list rather than to successive elements of the
list. map
(or mapl
) and mapc
are like maplist
and mapcar
respectively, except that they don’t return any useful value. These
functions are used when the function is being called merely for its
side-effects, rather than its returned values. mapcan
and
mapcon
are like mapcar
and maplist
respectively, except
that they combine the results of the function using nconc
instead
of list
. That is, mapcon
could have been defined by
(defun mapcon (f x y) (apply 'nconc (maplist f x y)))
Of course, this definition is less general than the real one.
Sometimes a do
or a straightforward recursion is preferable to a
map; however, the mapping functions should be used wherever they
naturally apply because this increases the clarity of the code.
Often f is a lambda-expression, rather than a symbol; for example,
(mapcar (function (lambda (x) (cons x something))) some-list)
The functional argument to a mapping function must be a function, acceptable
to apply
–it cannot be a macro or the name of a special form.
Here is a table showing the relations between the six map functions.
applies function to | successive | successive | | sublists | elements | ---------------+--------------+---------------+ its own | | | second | map(l) | mapc | argument | | | ---------------+--------------+---------------+ list of the | | | returns function | maplist | mapcar | results | | | ---------------+--------------+---------------+ nconc of the | | | function | mapcon | mapcan | results | | | ---------------+--------------+---------------+
Note that map
and mapl
are synonymous. map
is the
traditional name of this function. mapl
is the Common Lisp name.
In Common Lisp, the function map
does something different and
incompatible; see cli:map
, cli:map-fun. mapl
works the same
in traditional Zetalisp and Common Lisp.
There are also functions (mapatoms
and mapatoms-all
)
for mapping over all symbols in certain
packages. See the explanation of packages (package).
You can also do what the mapping functions do in a different way by using
loop
. See loop-fun.
This chapter discusses functions that manipulate conses, and higher-level structures made up of conses such as lists and trees. It also discusses hash tables and resources, which are related facilities.
A cons is a primitive Lisp data object that is extremely simple: it knows about two other objects, called its car and its cdr.
A list is recursively defined to be the symbol nil
, or a cons whose
cdr is a list. A typical list is a chain of conses: the cdr of each is
the next cons in the chain, and the cdr of the last one is the symbol
nil
. The cars of each of these conses are called the elements
of the list. A list has one element for each cons; the empty list,
nil
, has no elements at all. Here are the printed representations
of some typical lists:
(foo bar) ;This list has two elements. (a (b c d) e) ;This list has three elements.
Note that the second list has three elements: a
, (b c d)
, and e
.
The symbols b
, c
, and d
are not elements of the list itself.
(They are elements of the list which is the second element of the original
list.)
A dotted list is like a list except that the cdr of the last cons does
not have to be nil
. This name comes from the printed
representation, which includes a “dot” character (period). Here is an example:
(a b . c)
This dotted list is made of two conses. The car of the first cons is the
symbol a
, and the cdr of the first cons is the second cons. The car of
the second cons is the symbol b
, and the cdr of the second cons is
the symbol c
.
A tree is any data structure made up of conses whose cars and cdrs are other conses. The following are all printed representations of trees:
(foo . bar) ((a . b) (c . d)) ((a . b) (c d e f (g . 5) s) (7 . 4))
These definitions are not mutually exclusive. Consider a cons whose
car is a
and whose cdr is (b (c d) e)
. Its printed
representation is
(a b (c d) e)
It can be thought of and treated as a cons, or as a list of four
elements, or as a tree containing six conses. You can even think of it
as a dotted list whose last cons just happens to have nil
as a
cdr. Thus, lists and dotted lists and trees are not fundamental data
types; they are just ways of thinking about structures of conses.
A circular list is like a list except that the cdr of the last cons,
instead of being nil
, is the first cons of the list. This means that
the conses are all hooked together in a ring, with the cdr of each cons
being the next cons in the ring. These are legitimate Lisp objects,
but dealing with them requires special techniques; straightforward
tree-walking recursive functions often loop infinitely when given a
circular list. The printer is is an example of both aspects of the
handling of circular lists: if *print-circle*
is non-nil
the
printer uses special techniques to detect circular structure and print
it with a special encoding, but if *print-circle*
is nil
the
printer does not check for circularity and loops infinitely unless
*print-level*
or *print-length*
imposes a “time limit”.
See *print-circle*-var for more information on *print-circle*
and related matters.
The Lisp Machine internally uses a storage scheme called cdr-coding to represent conses. This scheme is intended to reduce the amount of storage used in lists. The use of cdr-coding is invisible to programs except in terms of storage efficiency; programs work the same way whether or not lists are cdr-coded or not. Several of the functions below mention how they deal with cdr-coding. You can completely ignore all this if you want. However, if you are writing a program that allocates a lot of conses and you are concerned with storage efficiency, you may want to learn about the cdr-coded representation and how to control it. The cdr-coding scheme is discussed in cdr-code.
Returns the car of x.
Example:
(car '(a b c)) => a
Returns the cdr of x.
Example:
(cdr '(a b c)) => (b c)
Officially car
and cdr
are only applicable to conses and locatives.
However, as a matter of convenience, car
and cdr
of nil
return nil
.
car
or cdr
of anything else is an error.
All of the compositions of up to four car
’s and cdr
’s are
defined as functions in their own right. The names of these functions
begin with c
and end with r
, and in between is a sequence of
a
’s and d
’s corresponding to the composition performed by the
function.
Example:
(cddadr x) is the same as (cdr (cdr (car (cdr x))))
The error checking for these functions is exactly the same as for car
and cdr
above.
cons
is the primitive function to create a new cons, whose
car is x and whose cdr is y.
Examples:
(cons 'a 'b) => (a . b) (cons 'a (cons 'b (cons 'c nil))) => (a b c) (cons 'a '(b c d)) => (a b c d)
(ncons x)
is the same as (cons x nil)
.
The name of the function is from “nil-cons”.
xcons
(“exchanged cons”) is like cons
except that the order of
the arguments is reversed.
Example:
(xcons 'a 'b) => (b . a)
Creates a cons in a specific area. (Areas are
an advanced feature of storage management, explained in chapter
area-chapter; if you aren’t interested in them, you can safely skip
all this stuff). The first two arguments are the same as the two
arguments to cons
, and the third is the number of the area in which
to create the cons.
Example:
(cons-in-area 'a 'b my-area) => (a . b)
(ncons-in-area x area-number)
= (cons-in-area x nil area-number)
(xcons-in-area x y area-number) = (cons-in-area y x area-number)
Adds an element item to the front of a list that is stored in place. A new cons is allocated whose car is item and whose cdr is the old contents of place. This cons is stored into place.
The form
(push (hairy-function x y z) variable)
replaces the commonly-used construct
(setq variable (cons (hairy-function x y z) variable))
and is intended to be more explicit and esthetic.
place can be any form that setf
can store into.
For example,
(push x (get y z)) ==> (putprop y (cons x (get y z)) z)
The returned value of push
is not defined.
Removes an element from the front of the list that is stored in
place. It finds the cons in place, stores the cdr of the cons
back into place, and returns the car of that cons. place
can be any form that setf
can store into.
Example:
(setq x '(a b c)) (pop x) => a x => (b c)
The backquote reader macro facility is also generally useful for creating list structure, especially mostly-constant list structure, or forms constructed by plugging variables into a template. It is documented in the chapter on macros; see macro.
car-location
returns a locative pointer to the cell containing
the car of cons.
Note: there is no cdr-location
function; it is difficult because of
the cdr-coding scheme (see cdr-code). Instead, the cons itself
serves as a kind of locative to its cdr (see contents-fun).
The functions rplaca
and rplacd
are used to make alterations
in already-existing list structure; that is, to change the cars and
cdrs of existing conses. The structure is altered rather than copied.
Exercise caution when using these functions, as strange side-effects
can occur if they are used to modify portions of list structure which
have become shared unbeknownst to the programmer. The nconc
,
nreverse
, nreconc
, nbutlast
and delq
functions and
others, described below, have the same property, because they call
rplaca
or rplacd
.
Changes the car of x to y and returns (the modified) x. x must be a cons or a locative. y may be any Lisp object.
Example:
(setq g '(a b c))
(rplaca (cdr g) 'd) => (d c)
Now g => (a d c)
Changes the cdr of x to y and returns (the modified) x. x must be a cons or a locative. y may be any Lisp object.
Example:
(setq x '(a b c))
(rplacd x 'd) => (a . d)
Now x => (a . d)
(setf (car x) y)
and (setf (car x) y)
are much like rplaca
and rplacd
,
but they return y rather than x.
Constructs and returns a list of its arguments.
Example:
(list 3 4 'a (car '(b . c)) (+ 6 -2)) => (3 4 a b 4)
list
could have been defined by:
(defun list (&rest args) (let ((list (make-list (length args)))) (do ((l list (cdr l)) (a args (cdr a))) ((null a) list) (rplaca l (car a)))))
list*
is like list
except that the last cons
of the constructed list is dotted. It must be given at least
one argument.
Example:
(list* 'a 'b 'c 'd) => (a b c . d)
This is like
(cons 'a (cons 'b (cons 'c 'd)))
More examples:
(list* 'a 'b) => (a . b) (list* 'a) => a
Returns the length of list-or-array. The length of a list is the number of elements in it; the number of times you can cdr it before you get a non-cons.
Examples:
(length nil) => 0 (length '(a b c d)) => 4 (length '(a (b c) d)) => 3 (length "foobar") => 6
length
could have been defined by:
(defun length (x) (if (arrayp x) (array-active-length x) (do ((n 0 (1+ n)) (y x (cdr y))) ((null y) n))))
Returns the length of list, or nil
if list is circular.
(The function length
would loop forever if given a circular list.)
These functions take a list as an argument, and return the first,
second, etc. element of the list. first
is identical to car
,
second
is identical to cadr
, and so on. The reason these names
are provided is that they make more sense when you are thinking of the
argument as a list rather than just as a cons.
restn
returns the rest of the elements of a list, starting with
element n (counting the first element as the zeroth). Thus
rest
or rest1
is identical to cdr
, rest2
is identical to cddr
,
and so on. The reason these names are provided is that they make more
sense when you are thinking of the argument as a list rather than just
as a cons.
Returns t
if list is nil
, nil
if list is a cons
cell. Signals an error if list is not a list. This is the way
Common Lisp recommends for terminating a loop which cdr
’s down a list.
However, Lisp Machine system functions generally prefer to test for the
end of the list with atom
; it is regarded as a feature that these
functions do something useful for dotted lists.
(nth n list)
returns the n’th element of list, where
the zeroth element is the car of the list.
If n is greater than the length of the list, nil
is returned.
Examples:
(nth 1 '(foo bar gack)) => bar (nth 3 '(foo bar gack)) => nil
Note: this is not the same as the InterLisp function called nth
,
which is similar to but not exactly the same as the Lisp Machine function
nthcdr
.
Also, some people have used macros and functions called nth
of their own in
their Maclisp programs, which may not work the same way; be careful.
nth
could have been defined by:
(defun nth (n list) (do ((i n (1- i)) (l list (cdr l))) ((zerop i) (car l))))
(nthcdr n list)
cdrs list n times,
and returns the result.
Examples:
(nthcdr 0 '(a b c)) => (a b c) (nthcdr 2 '(a b c)) => (c)
In other words, it returns the n’th cdr of the list.
If n is greater than the length of the list, nil
is returned.
This is similar to InterLisp’s function nth
, except that the
InterLisp function is one-based instead of zero-based; see the
InterLisp manual for details.
nthcdr
could have been defined by:
(defun nthcdr (n list) (do ((i 0 (1+ i)) (list list (cdr list))) ((= i n) list)))
last
returns the last cons of list. If list is nil
, it
returns nil
. Note that last
is unfortunately not analogous
to first
(first
returns the first element of a list, but
last
doesn’t return the last element of a list); this is a
historical artifact.
Examples:
(setq x '(a b c d)) (last x) => (d) (rplacd (last x) '(e f)) x => '(a b c d e f)
last
could have been defined by:
(defun last (x) (cond ((atom x) x) ((atom (cdr x)) x) ((last (cdr x)))))
object is evaluated and matched against pattern;
the value is t
if it matches, nil
otherwise.
pattern is made with backquotes (backquote); whereas
normally a backquote expression says how to construct list structure out
of constant and variable parts, in this context it says how to match
list structure against constants and variables. Constant parts of the
backquote expression must match exactly; variables preceded by commas
can match anything but set the variable to what was matched. (Some of
the variables may be set even if there is no match.) If a variable
appears more than once, it must match the same thing (equal
list
structures) each time. ,ignore
can be used to match anything and
ignore it.
For example, `(x (,y) . ,z)
is a pattern that matches a list of
length at least two whose first element is x
and whose second
element is a list of length one; if a list matches, the caadr
of the
list is stored into the value of y and the cddr
of the list is
stored into z.
Variables set during the matching remain set after the list-match-p
returns; in effect, list-match-p
expands into code which can
setq
the variables. If the match fails, some or all of the
variables may already have been set.
Example:
(list-match-p foo `((a ,x) ,ignore . ,c))
is t
if foo
’s value is a list of two or more elements,
the first of which is a list of two elements;
and in that case it sets x
to (cadar foo)
and
c
to (cddr foo)
. An equivalent expression would be
(let ((tem foo)) (and (consp tem) (consp (car tem)) (eq (caar tem) 'a) (consp (cdar tem)) (progn (setq x (cadar tem)) t) (null (cddar tem)) (consp (cdr tem)) (setq c (cddr tem))))
but list-match-p
is faster.
list-match-p
generates highly optimized code using special
instructions.
list-in-area
is exactly the same as list
except that it takes
an extra argument, an area number, and creates the list in that area.
list*-in-area
is exactly the same as list*
except that it takes
an extra argument, an area number, and creates the list in that area.
Creates and returns a list containing length elements.
length should be a fixnum. area, if specified, is the area in
which to create the list (see area). If it is nil
, the area used
is the value of working-storage-area
.
initial-element is stored in each element of the new list.
make-list
always creates a cdr-coded list (see cdr-code).
Examples:
(make-list 3) => (nil nil nil) (make-list 4 :initial-element 7) => (7 7 7 7)
The keyword :initial-value
may be used in place of
:initial-element
.
When make-list
was originally implemented, it took exactly two
arguments: the area and the length. This obsolete form is still
supported so that old programs can continue to work, but the new
keyword-argument form is preferred.
Constructs a circular list whose elements are args
, repeated
infinitely. circular-list
is the same as list
except that the list itself
is used as the last cdr, instead of nil
.
circular-list
is especially useful with mapcar
, as in the expression
(mapcar (function +) foo (circular-list 5))
which adds each element of foo
to 5.
circular-list
could have been defined by:
(defun circular-list (&rest elements) (setq elements (copylist* elements)) (rplacd (last elements) elements) elements)
Returns a list which is equal
to list, but not eq
.
copylist
does not copy any elements of the list, only the conses of the list itself.
The returned list is fully cdr-coded (see cdr-code) to minimize storage.
If list is dotted, that is, if (cdr (last list))
is a non-nil
atom, then the copy also has this property.
You may optionally specify the area in which to create the new copy.
This is the same as copylist
except that the last cons of the
resulting list is never cdr-coded (see cdr-code). This makes for
increased efficiency if you nconc
something onto the list later.
copyalist
is for copying association lists (see
assoc-lists-section). The list is copied, as in copylist
.
In addition, each element of list which is a cons is replaced in the
copy by a new cons with the same car and cdr. You may optionally
specify the area in which to create the new copy.
The arguments to append
are lists. The result is a list which is the
concatenation of the arguments.
The arguments are not changed (cf nconc
).
Example:
(append '(a b c) '(d e f) nil '(g)) => (a b c d e f g)
append
makes copies of the conses of all the lists it is given,
except for the last one. So the new list shares the conses
of the last argument to append, but all of the other conses are newly
created. Only the lists are copied, not the elements of the lists.
A version of append
which only accepts two arguments could have been defined by:
(defun append2 (x y) (cond ((null x) y) ((cons (car x) (append2 (cdr x) y)) )))
The generalization to any number of arguments could then be made (relying on
car of nil
being nil
):
(defun append (&rest args) (if (< (length args) 2) (car args) (append2 (car args) (apply (function append) (cdr args)))))
These definitions do not express the full functionality of append
;
the real definition minimizes storage utilization by turning all the
arguments that are copied into one cdr-coded list.
To copy a list, use copylist
(see copylist-fun); the old practice
of using append
to copy lists is unclear and obsolete.
nconc
takes lists as arguments. It returns a list which is the arguments
concatenated together. The arguments are changed, rather than copied
(cf append
, append-fun).
Example:
(setq x '(a b c)) (setq y '(d e f)) (nconc x y) => (a b c d e f) x => (a b c d e f)
Note that the value of x
is now different, since its last cons has
been rplacd
’d to the value of y
. If the nconc
form were
evaluated again, it would yield a piece of circular list structure,
whose printed representation would be (a b c d e f d e f d e f ...)
, repeating forever.
nconc
could have been defined by:
(defun nconc (x y) ;for simplicity, this definition (cond ((null x) y) ;only works for 2 arguments. (t (rplacd (last x) y) ;hooky
onto x x))) ;and return the modifiedx
.
(revappend x y)
is exactly the same as
(nconc (reverse x) y)
except that it is more
efficient. Both x and y should be lists.
revappend
could have been defined by:
(defun revappend (x y) (cond ((null x) y) (t (revappend (cdr x) (cons (car x) y)))))
(nreconc x y)
is exactly the same as
(nconc (nreverse x) y)
except that it is more
efficient. Both x and y should be lists.
nreconc
could have been defined by:
(defun nreconc (x y) (cond ((null x) y) ((nreverse1 x y)) ))
using the same nreverse1
as above.
1
) ¶This creates and returns a list with the same elements as list, excepting the last n elements.
Examples:
(butlast '(a b c d)) => (a b c) (butlast '(a b c d) 3) => (a) (butlast '(a b c d) 4) => nil (butlast nil) => nil
The name is from the phrase “all elements but the last”.
1
) ¶This is the destructive version of butlast
; it changes the cdr of
the last cons but n of the list to nil
. The value is list,
as modified. If list does not have more than n elements then it
is not really changed and the value is nil
.
Examples:
(setq foo '(a b c d)) (nbutlast foo) => (a b c) foo => (a b c) (nbutlast foo 2) => (a) foo => (a) (nbutlast foo) => nil foo => (a)
Returns a list of length n, whose elements are the
first n elements of list
. If list is fewer than
n elements long, the remaining elements of the returned list
are nil
.
Examples:
(firstn 2 '(a b c d)) => (a b) (firstn 0 '(a b c d)) => nil (firstn 6 '(a b c d)) => (a b c d nil nil)
Returns a “tail” of list, i.e one of the conses that makes up list, or nil
.
(nleft n list)
returns the last n elements of list.
If n is too large, nleft
returns list.
(nleft n list tail)
takes cdr of list enough times
that taking n more cdrs would yield tail, and returns that.
You can see that when tail is nil
this is the same as the two-argument case.
If tail is not eq
to any tail of list, nleft
returns nil
.
Examples:
(setq x '(a b c d e f)) (nleft 2 x) => (e f) (nleft 2 x (cddddr x)) => (c d e f)
list should be a list, and tail should be one of the conses
that make up list. ldiff
(meaning ‘list difference’) returns
a new list, whose elements are those elements of list that appear
before tail.
Examples:
(setq x '(a b c d e)) (setq y (cdddr x)) => (d e) (ldiff x y) => (a b c) (ldiff x nil) => (a b c d e) (ldiff x x) => nil
but
(ldiff '(a b c d) '(c d)) => (a b c d)
since the tail was not eq
to any part of the list.
Return the same things as the corresponding non-safe
functions,
except nil
if the non-safe
function would get an error.
These functions are about as fast as the non-safe
functions.
The same effect could be had by handling the sys:wrong-type-argument
error, but that would be slower.
Examples:
(car-safe '(a . b)) => a (car-safe nil) => nil (car-safe 'a) => nil (car-safe "foo") => nil (cadr-safe '(a . b)) => nil (cadr-safe 3) => nil
copytree
copies all the conses of a tree and makes a new maximally
cdr-coded tree with the same fringe. If area is specified, the new
tree is constructed in that area.
Compares two trees recursively to all levels. Atoms must match under the
function test (which defaults to eql
). Conses must match recursively in
both the car and the cdr.
If test-not is specified instead of test, two atoms match if
test-not returns nil
.
(subst new old tree)
substitutes new for all occurrences of old
in tree, and returns the modified copy of tree. The original tree
is unchanged, as subst
recursively copies all of tree replacing
elements equal
to old as it goes.
Example:
(subst 'Tempest 'Hurricane '(Shakespeare wrote (The Hurricane))) => (Shakespeare wrote (The Tempest))
subst
could have been defined by:
(defun subst (new old tree) (cond ((equal tree old) new) ;if item equal to old, replace. ((atom tree) tree) ;if no substructure, return arg. ((cons (subst new old (car tree)) ;otherwise recurse. (subst new old (cdr tree))))))
Note that this function is not destructive; that is, it does not change the car or cdr of any already-existing list structure.
To copy a tree, use copytree
(see copytree-fun); the old practice
of using subst
to copy trees is unclear and obsolete.
The Common Lisp version of subst
replaces with new every atom or
subtree in tree which matches old, returning a new tree. List
structure is copied as necessary to avoid clobbering parts of tree.
This differs from the traditional subst
function, which always
copies the entire tree.
test or test-not is used to do the matching. If test is
specified, a match happens when test returns non-nil
; otherwise,
if test-not is specified, a match happens when it returns nil
.
If neither is specified, then eql
is used for test.
The first argument to the test or test-not function is always
old. The second argument is normally a leaf or subtree of
tree. However, if key is non-nil
, then it is called with
the subtree as argument, and the result of this becomes the second
argument to the test or test-not function.
Because (subst nil nil tree)
is a widely used idiom for copying
a tree, even though it is obsolete, there is no practical possibility of
installing this function as the standard subst
for a long time.
nsubst
is a destructive version of subst
. The list structure of
tree is altered by replacing each occurrence of old with
new. No new list structure is created. The keyword arguments are
as in cli:subst
.
A simplified version of nsubst
, handling only the three required
arguments, could be defined as
(defun nsubst (new old tree) (cond ((eql tree old) new) ;If item matches old, replace. ((atom tree) tree) ;If no substructure, return arg. (t ;Otherwise, recurse. (rplaca tree (nsubst new old (car tree))) (rplacd tree (nsubst new old (cdr tree))) tree)))
Replaces with new every atom or subtree in tree which satisfies
predicate. List structure is copied as necessary so that the
original tree is not modified. key, if non-nil
, is a function
applied to each tree node to get the object to match against. If key
is nil
or omitted, the tree node itself is used.
Similar, but replaces tree nodes which do not satisfy predicate.
Like subst-if
and subst-if-not
except that they destructively
modify tree itself and return it, creating no new list structure.
Performs multiple parallel replacements on tree, returning a new tree. tree itself is not modified because list structure is copied as necessary. If no substitutions are made, the result is tree. alist is an association list (see assoc-lists-section). Each element of alist specifies one replacement; the car is what to look for, and the cdr is what to replace it with.
test, test-not and key control how matching is done between
nodes of the tree (cons cells or atoms) and objects to be replaced. See
cli:subst
, above, for the details of how they work. The first
argument to test or test-not is the car of an element of
alist.
Example:
(sublis '((x . 100) (z . zprime)) '(plus x (minus g z x p) 4)) => (plus 100 (minus g zprime 100 p) 4)
A simplified sublis
could be defined by:
(defun sublis (alist tree) (let ((tem (assq tree alist))) (cond (tem (cdr tem)) ((atom tree) tree) (t (let ((car (sublis alist (car tree))) (cdr (sublis alist (cdr tree)))) (if (and (eq (car tree) car) (eq (cdr tree) cdr)) tree (cons car cdr)))))))
nsublis
is like sublis
but changes the original tree
instead of allocating new structure.
A simplified nsublis
could be defined by:
(defun nsublis (alist tree) (let ((tem (assq tree alist))) (cond (tem (cdr tem)) ((atom tree) tree) (t (rplaca tree (nsublis alist (car tree))) (rplacd tree (nsublis alist (cdr tree))) tree))))
This section explains the internal data format used to store conses inside the Lisp Machine. Casual users don’t have to worry about this; you can skip this section if you want. It is only important to read this section if you require extra storage efficiency in your program.
The usual and obvious internal representation of conses in any implementation of Lisp is as a pair of pointers, contiguous in memory. If we call the amount of storage that it takes to store a Lisp pointer a ‘word’, then conses normally occupy two words. One word (say it’s the first) holds the car, and the other word (say it’s the second) holds the cdr. To get the car or cdr of a list, you just reference this memory location, and to change the car or cdr, you just store into this memory location.
Very often, conses are used to store lists. If the above representation
is used, a list of n elements requires two times n words of
memory: n to hold the pointers to the elements of the list, and
n to point to the next cons or to nil
. To optimize this
particular case of using conses, the Lisp Machine uses a storage
representation called cdr-coding to store lists. The basic goal is to
allow a list of n elements to be stored in only n locations,
while allowing conses that are not parts of lists to be stored in the
usual way.
The way it works is that there is an extra two-bit field in every word
of memory, called the cdr-code field. There are three meaningful
values that this field can have, which are called cdr-normal
, cdr-next
,
and cdr-nil
. The regular, non-compact way to store a cons is by two
contiguous words, the first of which holds the car and the second of
which holds the cdr. In this case, the cdr-code of the first word is
cdr-normal
. (The cdr-code of the second word doesn’t matter; as we will
see, it is never looked at.) The cons is represented by a pointer to
the first of the two words. When a list of n elements is stored in
the most compact way, pointers to the n elements occupy n
contiguous memory locations. The cdr-codes of all these locations are
cdr-next
, except the last location whose cdr-code is cdr-nil
. The
list is represented as a pointer to the first of the n words.
Now, how are the basic operations on conses defined to work based on
this data structure? Finding the car is easy: you just read the
contents of the location addressed by the pointer. Finding the cdr is
more complex. First you must read the contents of the location
addressed by the pointer, and inspect the cdr-code you find there. If
the code is cdr-normal
, then you add one to the pointer, read the
location it addresses, and return the contents of that location; that
is, you read the second of the two words. If the code is cdr-next
, you
add one to the pointer, and simply return that pointer without doing any
more reading; that is, you return a pointer to the next word in the
n-word block. If the code is cdr-nil
, you simply return nil
.
If you examine these rules, you will find that they work fine even if you mix the two kinds of storage representation within the same list.
How about changing the structure? Like car
, rplaca
is very easy; you
just store into the location addressed by the pointer. To do rplacd
you must read the location addressed by the pointer and examine the cdr-code. If the code is cdr-normal
, you just store into the location one
greater than that addressed by the pointer; that is, you store into the
second word of the two words. But if the cdr-code is cdr-next
or
cdr-nil
, there is a problem: there is no memory cell that is storing the
cdr of the cons. That is the cell that has been optimized out; it just
doesn’t exist.
This problem is dealt with by the use of invisible pointers. An invisible pointer is a special kind of pointer, recognized by its data type (Lisp Machine pointers include a data type field as well as an address field). The way they work is that when the Lisp Machine reads a word from memory, if that word is an invisible pointer then it proceeds to read the word pointed to by the invisible pointer and use that word instead of the invisible pointer itself. Similarly, when it writes to a location, it first reads the location, and if it contains an invisible pointer then it writes to the location addressed by the invisible pointer instead. (This is a somewhat simplified explanation; actually there are several kinds of invisible pointer that are interpreted in different ways at different times, used for things other than the cdr-coding scheme.)
Here’s how to do rplacd
when the cdr-code is cdr-next
or cdr-nil
. Call
the location addressed by the first argument to rplacd
l. First,
you allocate two contiguous words in the same area that l points to.
Then you store the old contents of l (the car of the cons) and
the second argument to rplacd
(the new cdr of the cons) into these two
words. You set the cdr-code of the first of the two words to cdr-normal
.
Then you write an invisible pointer, pointing at the first of the two
words, into location l. (It doesn’t matter what the cdr-code of
this word is, since the invisible pointer data type is checked first,
as we will see.)
Now, whenever any operation is done to the cons (car
, cdr
, rplaca
, or
rplacd
), the initial reading of the word pointed to by the Lisp pointer
that represents the cons finds an invisible pointer in the addressed
cell. When the invisible pointer is seen, the address it contains is
used in place of the original address. So the newly-allocated two-word
cons is used for any operation done on the original object.
Why is any of this important to users? In fact, it is all invisible to
you; everything works the same way whether or not compact representation
is used, from the point of view of the semantics of the language. That
is, the only difference that any of this makes is a difference in
efficiency. The compact representation is more efficient in most cases.
However, if the conses are going to get rplacd
’ed, then invisible
pointers will be created, extra memory will be allocated, and the
compact representation will degrade storage efficiency rather
than improve it. Also, accesses that go through invisible pointers are
somewhat slower, since more memory references are needed. So if you
care a lot about storage efficiency, you should be careful about which
lists get stored in which representations.
You should try to use the normal representation for those data
structures that will be subject to rplacd
operations, including
nconc
and nreverse
, and the compact representation for other
structures. The functions cons
, xcons
, ncons
, and their
area variants make conses in the normal representation. The functions
list
, list*
, list-in-area
, make-list
, and append
use
the compact representation. The other list-creating functions,
including read
, currently make normal lists, although this might get
changed. Some functions, such as sort
, take special care to operate
efficiently on compact lists (sort
effectively treats them as
arrays). nreverse
is rather slow on compact lists, currently, since
it simple-mindedly uses rplacd
, but this may be changed.
(copylist x)
is a suitable way to copy a
list, converting it into compact form (see copylist-fun).
Zetalisp includes functions which simplify the maintenance
of tabular data structures of several varieties. The simplest is
a plain list of items
There are functions to add (cons
), remove (delete
, delq
,
del
, del-if
, del-if-not
, remove
, remq
, rem
,
rem-if
, rem-if-not
),
and search for (member
, memq
, mem
) items in a list.
Association lists are very commonly used. An association list
is a list of conses. The car of each cons is a “key” and the cdr
is a “datum”, or a list of associated data. The functions
assoc
, assq
, ass
, memass
, and rassoc
may be used to retrieve the data, given the key. For example,
((tweety . bird) (sylvester . cat))
is an association list with two elements. Given a symbol representing the name of an animal, it can retrieve what kind of animal this is.
Structured records can be stored as association lists or as stereotyped cons-structures where each element of the structure has a certain car-cdr path associated with it. However, these are better implemented using structure macros (see defstruct) or as flavors (flavor).
Simple list-structure is very convenient, but may not be efficient enough
for large data bases because it takes a long time to search a long list.
Zetalisp includes hash table facilities for more efficient
but more complex tables (see hash-table), and
a hashing function (sxhash
) to aid users in constructing their own facilities.
Returns nil
if item is not one of the
elements of list. Otherwise, it returns the sublist of list
beginning with the first occurrence of item; that is, it returns the
first cons of the list whose car is item. The comparison is made by
eq
. Because memq
returns nil
if it doesn’t find anything,
and something non-nil
if it finds something, it is often used as a
predicate.
Examples:
(memq 'a '(1 2 3 4)) => nil (memq 'a '(g (x a y) c a d e a f)) => (a d e a f)
Note that the value returned by memq
is eq
to the portion of the list
beginning with a
.
Thus rplaca
on the result of memq
may be used,
if you first check to make sure memq
did not return nil
.
Example:
(let ((sublist (memq x z))) ;Search forx
in the listz
. (if (not (null sublist)) ;If it is found, (rplaca sublist y))) ;Replace it withy
.
memq
could have been defined by:
(defun memq (item list) (cond ((null list) nil) ((eq item (car list)) list) (t (memq item (cdr list)))))
memq
is hand-coded in microcode and therefore especially fast.
It is equivalent to cli:member
with eq
specified as
the test argument.
member
is like memq
, except equal
is used for the comparison,
instead of eq
. Note that the member
function of Common Lisp,
which is cli:member
, is similar but thoroughly incompatible (see below).
member
could have been defined by:
(defun member (item list) (cond ((null list) nil) ((equal item (car list)) list) (t (member item (cdr list)))))
The Common Lisp member
function. It is
like memq
or member
except that there is more generality
in how elements of list are matched against item–and
the default is incompatible.
test, test-not and key are used in matching the elements,
just as described under cli:subst
(see cli:subst-fun). If
neither test nor test-not is specified, the default is to
compare with eql
, whereas member
compares with equal
.
Usually test is a commutative predicate such as
eq
, equal
, =
, char-equal
or string-equal
.
It can also be a non-commutative predicate. The predicate
is called with item as its first argument and the element of list
as its second argument. Example:
(cli:member 4 '(1.5 2.5 2 3.5 4.5 8) :test '<) => (4.5 8)
Searches the elements of list for one which satisfies predicate.
If one is found, the value is the tail of list whose car is that element.
Otherwise the value is nil
.
If key is non-nil
, then predicate is applied to (funcall
key element)
rather than to the element itself.
Searches for an element which does not satisfy predicate.
Otherwise like member-if
.
Is equivalent to
(cli:member item list :test predicate)
The function mem
antedates cli:member
.
Searches list for an element which
is eq
to item, like memq.
However, it returns the numeric index
in the list at which it found the first occurence of item, or
nil
if it did not find it at all. This function is sort of
the complement of nth
(see nth-fun); like nth
, it is zero-based.
Examples:
(find-position-in-list 'a '(a b c)) => 0 (find-position-in-list 'c '(a b c)) => 2 (find-position-in-list 'e '(a b c)) => nil
See also the generic sequence function position
(position-fun).
Is like find-position-in-list
, except that the comparison is done
with equal
instead of eq
.
Returns t
if sublist is a sublist of list (i.e
one of the conses that makes up list). Otherwise returns nil
.
Another way to look at this is that tailp
returns t
if
(nthcdr n list)
is sublist, for some value of n.
tailp
could have been defined by:
(defun tailp (sublist list) (do list list (cdr list) (null list) (if (eq sublist list) (return t))))
(delq item list)
returns the list with all
occurrences of item removed. eq
is used for the comparison.
The argument list is actually modified (rplacd
’ed) when instances
of item are spliced out. delq
should be used for value, not
for effect. That is, use
(setq a (delq 'b a))
rather than
(delq 'b a)
These two are not equivalent when the first element
of the value of a
is b
.
(delq item list n)
is like (delq item list)
except only the first
n instances of item are deleted. n is allowed to be zero.
If n is greater than or equal to the number of occurrences of item in the
list, all occurrences of item in the list are deleted.
Example:
(delq 'a '(b a c (a b) d a e)) => (b c (a b) d e)
delq
could have been defined by:
(defun delq (item list &optional (n -1)) (cond ((or (atom list) (zerop n)) list) ((eq item (car list)) (delq item (cdr list) (1- n))) (t (rplacd list (delq item (cdr list) n)))))
If the third argument (n) is not supplied, it defaults to -1
which
is effectively infinity since it can be decremented any number of times without
reaching zero.
delete
is the same as delq
except that equal
is used for the comparison
instead of eq
.
Common Lisp programs have a different, incompatible function called
delete
; see cli:delete-fun. This function may be useful in
non-Common-Lisp programs as well, where it can be referred to as
cli:delete
.
del
is the same as delq
except that it takes an extra argument
which should be a predicate of two arguments, which is used for the
comparison instead of eq
. (del 'eq a b)
is the same as
(delq a b)
. See also mem
, mem-fun.
Use of del
is equivalent to
(cli:delete item list :test predicate)
remq
is similar to delq
, except that the list is not altered;
rather, a new list is returned.
Examples:
(setq x '(a b c d e f)) (remq 'b x) => (a c d e f) x => (a b c d e f) (remq 'b '(a b c b a b) 2) => (a c a b)
remove
is the same as remq
except that equal
is used for the
comparison instead of eq
. Common Lisp programs have a different,
incompatible function called remove
; see cli:remove-fun. This function
may be useful in non-Common-Lisp programs as well, where it can be
referred to as cli:remove
.
rem
is the same as remq
except that it takes an extra argument
which should be a predicate of two arguments, which is used for the
comparison instead of eq
. (rem 'eq a b)
is the same as
(remq a b)
. See also mem
, mem-fun.
The function rem
in Common Lisp programs is actually cli:rem
,
a remainder function. See cli:rem-fun.
predicate should be a function of one argument.
A new list is made by applying predicate to
all of the elements of list and removing the ones for which the predicate
returns nil
. One of this function’s names (rem-if-not
)
means “remove if this condition is not true”; i.e it keeps the elements
for which predicate is true. The other name (subset
) refers to
the function’s action if list is considered to represent a mathematical set.
Example:
(subset #'minusp '(1 2 -4 2 -3)) => (-4 -3)
predicate should be a function of one argument.
A new list is made by applying predicate to
all of the elements of list and removing the ones for which the predicate
returns non-nil
. One of this function’s names (rem-if
)
means “remove if this condition is true”. The other name (subset-not
)
refers to the function’s action if list is considered to represent
a mathematical set.
del-if
is just like rem-if
except that it modifies list
rather than creating a new list.
del-if-not
is just like rem-if-not
except that it modifies list
rather than creating a new list.
See also the generic sequence functions delete-if
, delete-if-not
,
remove-if
and remove-if-not
(remove-if-fun).
Returns t
if predicate returns
non-nil
when applied to every element of list,
or nil
if predicate returns nil
for some element.
If step-function is present, it replaces cdr
as the function used to get to the next element of the list;
cddr
is a typical function to use here.
In Common Lisp programs, the name every
refers to a different,
incompatible function which serves a similar purpose. It is documented
in the manual under the name cli:every
. See cli:every-fun.
Returns a tail of list such that the car
of the tail is the first element that the predicate returns
non-nil
when applied to,
or nil
if predicate returns nil
for every element.
If step-function is present, it replaces cdr
as the function used to get to the next element of the list;
cddr
is a typical function to use here.
In Common Lisp programs, the name some
refers to a different,
incompatible function which serves a similar purpose. It is documented
in the manual under the name cli:some
. See cli:some-fun.
A list can be used to represent an unordered set of objects, simply by
using it in a way that ignores the order of the elements. Membership in
the set can be tested with memq
or member
, and some other
functions in the previous section also make sense on lists representing
sets. This section describes several functions specifically intended
for lists that represent sets.
It is often desirable to avoid adding duplicate elements in the list.
The set functions attempt to introduce no duplications, but do not
attempt to eliminate duplications present in their arguments. If you
need to make absolutely certain that a list contains no duplicates, use
remove-duplicates
or delete-duplicates
(see
remove-duplicates-fun).
t
if every element of list1 matches some element of list2.
The keyword arguments control how matching is done.
Either test or test-not should be a function of two arguments.
Normally it is called with an element of list1 as the first argument
and an element of list2 as the second argument.
If test is
specified, a match happens when test returns non-nil
; otherwise,
if test-not is specified, a match happens when it returns nil
.
If neither is specified, then eql
is used for test.
If key is non-nil
, it should be a function of one argument.
key is applied to each list element to get a key to be passed
to test or test-not instead of the element.
Returns a list like list but with item as an additional element if no existing element matches item. It is done like this:
(if (cli:member (if key (funcall key item) item) list other-args...) list (cons item list))
The keyword arguments work as in subsetp
.
Pushes item onto list-place unless item matches an existing element of the value stored in that place. Equivalent to
(setf list-place (adjoin item list-place keyword-args...))
except for order of evaluation. Compare with push
, push-fun.
Returns a list representing the set which is the union of the sets represented by the arguments. Anything which is an element of at least one of the arguments is also an element of the result.
Each element of each list is compared, using eq
, with all elements
of the other lists, to make sure that no duplications are introduced
into the result. As long as no individual argument list contains
duplications, the result does not either.
It is best to use union
with only two arguments so that
your code will not be sensitive to the difference between the
traditional version of union
and the Common Lisp version
cli:union
, below.
If lists are regarded as sets of their elements, intersection
returns a list which is the intersection of the lists which are
supplied as arguments. If list contains no duplicate elements,
neither does the value returned by intersection
. Elements are
compared using eq
.
It is best to use intersection
with only two arguments so that
your code will not be sensitive to the difference between the
traditional version of intersection
and the Common Lisp version
cli:intersection
, below.
If lists are regarded as sets of their elements, nunion
modifies
list to become the union of the lists which are supplied as
arguments. This is done by adding on, at the end, any elements of the
other lists that were not already in list. If none of the arguments
contains any duplicate elements, neither does the value returned by
nunion
. Elements are compared using eq
.
It is not safe to assume that list has been modified properly in place,
as this will not be so if list is nil
. Rather, you
must store the value returned by nunion
in place of list.
It is best to use nunion
with only two arguments so that
your code will not be sensitive to the difference between the
traditional version of nunion
and the Common Lisp version
cli:nunion
, below.
Like intersection
but produces the value by deleting elements from list
until the desired result is reached, and then returning list as modified.
It is not safe to assume that list has been modified properly in place,
as this will not be so if the first element was deleted. Rather, you
must store the value returned by nintersection
in place of list.
It is best to use nintersection
with only two arguments so that
your code will not be sensitive to the difference between the
traditional version of nintersection
and the Common Lisp version
cli:nintersection
, below.
The Common Lisp versions of the above functions, which accept only two sets to
operate on, but permit additional arguments to control how elements are
matched. These keyword arguments work the same as in subsetp
.
Returns a list which has all the elements of list1 which do not match any
element of list2. The keyword arguments control comparison of elements
just as in subsetp
.
The result contains no duplicate elements as long as list1 contains none.
Returns a list which has all the elements of list1 which do not match any
element of list2, and also all the elements of list2 which do not match
any element of list1. The keyword arguments control comparison of elements
just as in subsetp
.
The result contains no duplicate elements as long as neither list1 nor list2 contains any.
Like set-difference
but destructively modifies list1 to produce the value.
See the caveat in nintersection
, above.
Like set-exclusive-or
but may destructively modify both list1 and list2
to produce the value. See the caveat in nintersection
, above.
In all the alist-searching functions, alist elements which are nil
are ignored; they do not count as equivalent to (nil . nil)
. Elements
which are not lists cause errors.
pairlis
takes two lists and makes an association list which associates
elements of the first list with corresponding elements of the second
list.
Example:
(pairlis '(beef clams kitty) '(roast fried yu-shiang)) => ((beef . roast) (clams . fried) (kitty . yu-shiang))
If tail is non-nil
, it should be another alist. The new
alist continues with tail following the newly constructed mappings.
pairlis
is defined as:
(defun pairlis (cars cdrs &optional tail) (nconc (mapcar 'cons cars cdrs) tail))
Returns (cons (cons acar acdr) tail)
.
This adds one additional mapping from acar to acdr onto
the alist tail.
(assq item alist)
looks up item in the association list
(list of conses) alist. The value is the first cons whose car
is eq
to x, or nil
if there is none such.
Examples:
(assq 'r '((a . b) (c . d) (r . x) (s . y) (r . z))) => (r . x) (assq 'fooo '((foo . bar) (zoo . goo))) => nil (assq 'b '((a b c) (b c d) (x y z))) => (b c d)
It is okay to rplacd
the result of assq
as long as it is not nil
,
if your intention is to “update” the “table” that was assq
’s second argument.
Example:
(setq values '((x . 100) (y . 200) (z . 50))) (assq 'y values) => (y . 200) (rplacd (assq 'y values) 201) (assq 'y values) => (y . 201)
A common trick is to say
(cdr (assq x y))
.
Since the cdr of nil
is guaranteed to be nil
,
this yields nil
if no pair is found (or if a pair is
found whose cdr is nil
.)
assq
could have been defined by:
(defun assq (item list) (cond ((null list) nil) ((eq item (caar list)) (car list)) ((assq item (cdr list))) ))
assoc
is like assq
except that the comparison uses equal
instead of eq
.
Example:
(assoc '(a b) '((x . y) ((a b) . 7) ((c . d) .e))) => ((a b) . 7)
assoc
could have been defined by:
(defun assoc (item list) (cond ((null list) nil) ((equal item (caar list)) (car list)) ((assoc item (cdr list))) ))
The Common Lisp version of assoc
, this function returns the first
element of alist which is a cons whose car matches item, or
nil
if there is no such element.
test and test-not are used in comparing elements, as in
cli:subst
(cli:subst-fun), but note that there is no
key argument in cli:assoc
.
cli:assoc
is incompatible with the traditional function assoc
in that, like most Common Lisp functions, it uses eql
by default
rather than equal
for the comparison.
ass
is the same as assq
except that it takes an extra argument
which should be a predicate of two arguments, which is used for the
comparison instead of eq
. (ass 'eq a b)
is the same as
(assq a b)
. See also mem
, mem-fun.
This function is part of The mem
, rem
, del
series, whose
names were chosed partly because they created a situation in which
this function simply had to be called ass
. It’s too bad that
cli:assoc
is so general and subsumes ass
, which is equivalent
to
(cli:assoc item alist :test predicate)
Returns the first element of alist which is a cons whose car
satisfies predicate, or nil
if there is no such element.
Returns the first element of alist which is a cons whose car does
not satisfy predicate, or nil
if there is no such element.
memass
searches alist just like ass
, but returns the
portion of the list beginning with the pair containing item,
rather than the pair itself. (car (memass x y z)) = (ass x y
z)
. See also mem
, mem-fun.
The reverse-association functions are like assq
, assoc
, etc
but match or test the cdrs of the alist elements instead of the cars.
For example, rassq
could have been defined by:
(defun rassq (item in-list) (do l in-list (cdr l) (null l) (and (eq item (cdar l)) (return (car l)))))
(sassq item alist fcn)
is like (assq item alist)
except
that if item is not found in alist, instead of returning nil
,
sassq
calls the function fcn with no arguments. sassq
could
have been defined by:
(defun sassq (item alist fcn) (or (assq item alist) (apply fcn nil)))
sassq
and sassoc
(see below) are of limited use.
These are primarily leftovers from Lisp 1.5.
(sassoc item alist fcn)
is like (assoc item alist)
except that if
item is not found in alist, instead of returning nil
, sassoc
calls
the function fcn with no arguments. sassoc
could have been
defined by:
(defun sassoc (item alist fcn) (or (assoc item alist) (apply fcn nil)))
When you are creating a list that will not be needed any more once the function that creates it is finished, it is possible to create the list on the stack instead of by consing it. This avoids any permanent storage allocation, as the space is reclaimed as part of exiting the function. By the same token, it is a little risky; if any pointers to the list remain after the function exits, they will become meaningless.
These lists are called temporary lists or stack lists.
You can create them explicitly using the special forms
with-stack-list
and with-stack-list*
. &rest
arguments also
sometimes create stack lists.
If a stack list, or a list which might be a stack list, is to be
returned or made part of permanent list-structure, it must first be
copied (see copylist
, copylist-fun). The system cannot
detect the error of omitting to copy a stack list; you will simply find
that you have a value that seems to change behind your back.
These special forms create stack lists that live inside the stack frame of the function that they are used in. You should assume that the stack lists are only valid until the special form is exited.
(with-stack-list (foo x y) (mumblify foo))
is equivalent to
(let ((foo (list x y))) (mumblify foo))
except for the fact that foo
’s value in the first example is a stack
list.
The list created by with-stack-list*
looks like the one created by
list*
. tail’s value becomes the ultimate cdr rather than an
element of the list.
Here is a practical example. condition-resume
(see
condition-resume-fun) might have been defined as follows:
(defmacro condition-resume (handler &body body) `(with-stack-list* (eh:condition-resume-handlers ,handler eh:condition-resume-handlers) . ,body))
It is an error to do rplacd
on a stack list (except for the
tail of one made using with-stack-list*
). rplaca
works
normally.
sys:rplacd-wrong-representation-type
: (error
) ¶This is signaled if you rplacd
a stack list (or a list overlayed
with an array or other structure).
From time immemorial, Lisp has had a kind of tabular data structure called a property list (plist for short). A property list contains zero or more entries; each entry associates from a keyword symbol (called the property name, or sometimes the indicator) to a Lisp object (called the value or, sometimes, the property). There are no duplications among the property names; a property-list can have only one property at a time with a given name.
This is very similar to an association list. The important difference is that a
property list is an object with a unique identity; the operations for
adding and removing property-list entries are side-effecting operations
which alter the property-list rather than making a new one. An
association list with no entries would be the empty list ()
, i.e
the symbol nil
. There is only one empty list, so all empty
association lists are the same object. Each empty property-list is a
separate and distinct object.
The implementation of a property list is a memory cell containing a list with an even number (possibly zero) of elements. Each pair of elements constitutes a property; the first of the pair is the name and the second is the value. (It would have been possible to use an alist to hold the pairs; this format was chosen when Lisp was young.) The memory cell is there to give the property list a unique identity and to provide for side-effecting operations.
The term ‘property list’ is sometimes incorrectly used to refer to the list of entries inside the property list, rather than the property list itself. This is regrettable and confusing.
How do we deal with “memory cells” in Lisp? That is, what kind of Lisp object is a property list? Rather than being a distinct primitive data type, a property list can exist in one of three forms:
1. Any cons can be used as a property list. The cdr of the cons holds the list of entries (property names and values). Using the cons as a property list does not use the car of the cons; you can use that for anything else.
2. The system associates a property list with every symbol (see symbol-plist-section). A symbol can be used where a property list is expected; the property-list primitives automatically find the symbol’s property list and use it.
3. A flavor instance may have a property list. The property list functions operate on instances by sending messages to them, so the flavor can store the property list any way it likes. See si:property-list-mixin-flavor.
4. A named structure may have a property list. The property list
functions automatically call named-structure-invoke
when
a named structure is supplied as the property list. See named-structure.
5. A property list can be a memory cell in the middle of some data structure,
such as a list, an array, an instance, or a defstruct. An arbitrary memory
cell of this kind is named by a locative (see locative). Such locatives
are typically created with the locf
special form (see locf-fun).
Property lists of the first kind
are called disembodied property lists because they are not associated with
a symbol or other data structure.
The way to create a disembodied property list is (ncons nil)
,
or (ncons data)
to store data in the car of the property list.
Suppose that, inside a program which deals with blocks, the property
list of the symbol b1
contains this list (which would be the
value of (symbol-plist 'b1)
):
(color blue on b6 associated-with (b2 b3 b4))
The list has six elements, so there are three properties.
The first property’s name is the symbol color
, and its value
is the symbol blue
. One says that “the value of b1
’s color
property is blue
”, or, informally, that “b1
’s color
property
is blue
.” The program is probably representing the information that
the block represented by b1
is painted blue. Similarly, it is probably
representing in the rest of the property list that block b1
is on
top of block b6
, and that b1
is associated with blocks
b2
, b3
, and b4
.
get
looks up plist’s property-name property. If it finds such a property,
it returns the value; otherwise, it returns default-value. If plist is a symbol,
the symbol’s associated property list is used. For example, if the property
list of foo
is (baz 3)
, then
(get 'foo 'baz) => 3 (get 'foo 'zoo) => nil (get 'foo 'baz t) => 3 (get 'foo 'zoo t) => t
getl
is like get
, except that the second argument is a list
of property names. getl
searches down plist for any
of the names in property-name-list, until it finds a property whose
name is one of them.
If plist is a symbol, the symbol’s associated property list is used.
getl
returns the portion of the list inside plist beginning
with the first such property that it found. So the car of the returned
list is a property name, and the cadr
is the property value. If none
of the property names on property-name-list are on the property list, getl
returns nil
. For example, if the property list of foo
were
(bar (1 2 3) baz (3 2 1) color blue height six-two)
then
(getl 'foo '(baz height)) => (baz (3 2 1) color blue height six-two)
When more than one of the names in property-name-list is present in
plist, which one getl
returns depends on the order of the properties.
This is the only thing that depends on that order. The order maintained
by putprop
and defprop
is not defined (their behavior with respect
to order is not guaranteed and may be changed without notice).
This gives plist an property-name-property of x.
After this is done, (get plist property-name)
returns x.
If plist is a symbol, the symbol’s associated property list is used.
Example:
(putprop 'nixon t 'crook)
It is more modern to write
(setf (get plist property-name) x)
which avoids the counterintuitive order in which putprop
takes its arguments.
defprop
is a form of putprop
with unevaluated arguments,
which is sometimes more convenient for typing. Normally only a symbol
makes sense as the first argument.
Example:
(defprop foo bar next-to)
is the same as
(putprop 'foo 'bar 'next-to)
This removes plist’s property-name property, by splicing it out of the property
list. It returns that portion of the list inside plist of which the
former property-name-property was the car. car
of what remprop
returns is what get
would have returned with the same arguments.
If plist is a symbol, the symbol’s associated property list is used.
For example, if the property list of foo
was
(color blue height six-three near-to bar)
then
(remprop 'foo 'height) => (six-three near-to bar)
and foo
’s property list would be
(color blue near-to bar)
If plist has no property-name-property, then remprop
has no side-effect
and returns nil
.
Equivalent to (get (locf place) property default)
, except that getf
is
defined in Common Lisp, which does not have locf
or locatives of any kind.
(setf (getf place property) value)
can be used to store
properties into the property list at place.
Equivalent to (remprop (locf place) property)
, except that remf
is
defined in Common Lisp.
Like
(getl (locf place) list-of-properties)
but returns
slightly different values. Specifically, it searches the property list for a property
name which is memq
in list-of-properties, then returns three values:
the property name found
the value of that property
the property list cell found, whose car is propname and whose cadr is value.
If nothing is found, all three values are nil
.
It is possible to continue searching down the property list by using
cddr
of the third value as the argument to another call to
get-properties
.
A hash table is a Lisp object that works something like a property list. Each hash table has a set of entries, each of which associates a particular key with a particular value (or sequence of values). The basic functions that deal with hash tables can create entries, delete entries, and find the value that is associated with a given key. Finding the value is very fast even if there are many entries, because hashing is used; this is an important advantage of hash tables over property lists. Hashing is explained in hash-section.
A given hash table stores a fixed number of values for each key; by default, there is only one value. Each time you specify a new value or sequence of values, the old one(s) are lost.
There are three standard kinds of hash tables, which differ in how
they compare keys: with eq
, with eql
or with equal
. In
other words, there are hash tables which hash on Lisp objects
(using eq
or eql
) and there are hash tables which hash on
trees (using equal
).
You can also create a nonstandard hash table with any comparison
function you like, as long as you also provide a suitable hash
function. Any two objects which would be regarded as the same by the
comparison function should produce the same hash code under the hash
function. See the :compare-function
and :hash-function
keywords under make-hash-table
, below.
The following discussion refers to the eq
kind of hash table; the
other kinds are described later, and work analogously.
eq
hash tables are created with the function make-hash-table
, which
takes various options. New entries are added to hash tables with the
puthash
function. To look up a key and find the associated value(s),
the gethash
function is used. To remove an entry, use remhash
.
Here is a simple example.
(setq a (make-hash-table)) (puthash 'color 'brown a) (puthash 'name 'fred a) (gethash 'color a) => brown (gethash 'name a) => fred
In this example, the symbols color
and name
are being used as
keys, and the symbols brown
and fred
are being used as the
associated values. The hash table remembers one value for each key,
since we did not specify otherwise, and has two items in it, one of
which associates from color
to brown
, and the other of which
associates from name
to fred
.
Keys do not have to be symbols; they can be any Lisp object. Likewise
values can be any Lisp object. Since eq
does not work reliably on
numbers (except for fixnums), they should not be used as keys in an
eq
hash table. Use an eql
hash table if you want to hash on
numeric values.
When a hash table is first created, it has a size, which is the number of entries it has room for. But hash tables which are nearly full become slow to search, so if more than a certain fraction of the entries become in use, the hash table is automatically made larger, and the entries are rehashed (new hash values are recomputed, and everything is rearranged so that the fast hash lookup still works). This is transparent to the caller; it all happens automatically.
The describe
function (see describe-fun) prints a variety of
useful information when applied to a hash table.
This hash table facility is similar to the hasharray facility of Interlisp,
and some of the function names are the same. However, it is not compatible.
The exact details and the order of arguments are designed to be consistent
with the rest of Zetalisp rather than with Interlisp. For instance,
the order of arguments to maphash
is different, we do not have the Interlisp
“system hash table”, and we do not have the
Interlisp restriction that keys and values may not be nil
.
Note, however, that the order of arguments to gethash
, puthash
, and remhash
is not consistent with the Zetalisp’s get
, putprop
, and remprop
,
either. This is an unfortunate result of the haphazard historical development of Lisp.
Hash tables are implemented as instances of the flavor hash-table
.
The internals of a hash table are subject to change without notice.
Hash tables should be manipulated only with the functions and operations described below.
These functions create new hash tables. make-equal-hash-table
creates an equal
hash table. make-hash-table
normally creates
an eq
hash table, but this can be overridden by keywords as
described below. Valid option keywords are:
:size
Sets the initial size of the hash table, in entries, as a fixnum. The default is 64. The actual size is rounded up from the size you specify to the next size that is good for the hashing algorithm. The number of entries you can actually store in the hash table before it is rehashed is at least the actual size times the rehash threshold (see below).
:test
This keyword is the Common Lisp way to specify the kind of hashing
desired. The value must be eq
, eql
or equal
. The one
specified is used as the compare function and an appropriate hash
function is chosen automatically to go with it.
:compare-function
Specifies a function of two arguments which compares two keys to see if
they count as the same for retrieval from this table. For reasonable
results, this function should be an equivalence relation. The default is
eq
. For make-equal-hash-table
the default is equal
; that is
the only difference between that function and make-hash-table
.
:hash-function
Specifies a function of one argument which, given a key, computes its hash code.
The hash code may be any Lisp object. The purpose of the hash function
is to map equivalent keys into identical objects: if two keys would
cause the compare function to return non-nil
, the hash function must
produce identical (eq
) hash codes for them.
For an eq
hash table, the key itself is a suitable hash code, so
no hash function is needed. Then this option’s value should be
nil
(identity
would also work, but slower). nil
is the
default in make-hash-table
. make-equal-hash-table
specifies an appropriate function which uses sxhash
.
:number-of-values
A positive integer which specifies how many values to associate with each key. The default is one.
:area
Specifies the area in which the hash table should be created. This is
just like the :area
option to make-array
(see make-array-fun).
Defaults to nil
(i.e default-cons-area
).
:rehash-function
Specifies the function to be used for rehashing when the table becomes full. Defaults to the internal rehashing function that does the usual thing. If you want to write your own rehashing function, you must know all the internals of how hash tables work. These internals are not documented here, as the best way to learn them is to read the source code.
:rehash-size
Specifies how much to increase the size of the hash table when it becomes
full. This can be a fixnum which is the number of entries to add, or
it can be a float which is the ratio of the new size to the old size.
The default is 1.3
, which causes the table to be made 30% bigger
each time it has to grow.
:rehash-threshold
Sets a maximum fraction of the entries which can be in use before the
hash table is made larger and rehashed. The default is 0.7s0
.
Alternately, an integer may be specified. It is the exact number of
filled entries at which a rehash should be done. When the rehash
happens, if the threshold is an integer it is increased in the same
proportion as the table has grown.
:rehash-before-cold
If non-nil
, this hash table should be rehashed (if that is necessary
due to garbage collection) by disk-save
. This avoids a delay
for rehashing the hash table the first time it is referenced after
booting the saved band.
:actual-size
Specifies exactly the size for the hash table. Hash tables used by
the microcode for flavor method lookup must be a power of two in size.
This differs from :size
in that :size
is rounded up to a
nearly prime number, but :actual-size
is used exactly as
specified. :actual-size
overrides :size.
t
if object is a hash table.
(hash-table-p object)
is equivalent to
(typep object 'hash-table)
The following functions are equivalent to sending appropriate messages to the hash table.
Finds the entry in hash-table whose key is key, and return the
associated value. If there is no such entry, returns default-value.
Returns also a second value, which is t
if an entry was found or
nil
if there is no entry for key in this table.
Returns also a third value, a list which overlays the hash table entry. Its car is the key; the remaining elements are the values in the entry. This is how you can access values other than the first, if the hash table contains more than one value per entry.
Creates an entry associating key to value; if there is already an entry for key, then replace the value of that entry with value. Returns value. The hash table automatically grows if necessary.
If the hash table associates more than one value with each key, the remaining values in the entry are taken from extra-values.
Removes any entry for key in hash-table. Returns t
if there was an
entry or nil
if there was not.
This specifies new value(s) for key like puthash
, but returns
values describing the previous state of the entry, just like
gethash
. It returns the previous (replaced)
associated value as the first value, and returns t
as the second value
if the entry existed previously.
For each occupied entry in hash-table, call function. The arguments passed to function are the key of the entry, the value(s) of the entry (however many there are), and the extra-args (however many there are).
If the hash table has more than one value per key, all the values, in order, are supplied as successive arguments.
Like maphash
, but accumulates and returns a list of all the
values returned by function when it is applied to the items in
the hash table.
Removes all the entries from hash-table. Returns the hash table itself.
Returns the number of filled entries in hash-table.
Hash tables are instances, and support the following operations:
hash-table
: :size ¶Returns the number of entries in the hash table. Note that the hash table is rehashed when only a fraction of this many (the rehash threshold) are full.
hash-table
: :filled-entries ¶Returns the number of entries that are currently occupied.
hash-table
: :get-hash key ¶hash-table
: :put-hash key &rest values ¶hash-table
: :swap-hash key &rest values ¶hash-table
: :rem-hash key ¶hash-table
: :map-hash function &rest extra-args ¶hash-table
: :map-hash-return function ¶hash-table
: :clear-hash ¶hash-table
: :filled-entries ¶Are equivalent to the functions gethash
, puthash
, swaphash
,
remhash
, maphash
, maphash-return
, clrhash
and
hash-table-count
except that the hash table need not be specified as
an argument because it is the object that receives the message. Those
functions (documented in the previous section) actually work by invoking
these operations.
hash-table
: :modify-hash key function &rest additional-args ¶Passes the value associated with key in the table to function; whatever function returns is stored in the table as the new value for key. Thus, the hash association for key is both examined and updated according to function.
The arguments passed to function are key, the value associated with key,
a flag (t
if key is actually found in the hash table), and the
additional-args that you specify.
If the hash table stores more than one value per key, only the first value is examined and updated.
The eq
type hash tables actually hash on the address of the
representation of the object. equal
hash tables do so too, if given
keys containing unusual objects (other than symbols, numbers, strings
and lists of the above). When the copying garbage collector changes the
addresses of objects, it lets the hash facility know so that the next gethash
will rehash the table based on the new object addresses.
There may eventually be an option to make-hash-table
which tells it
to make a “non-GC-protecting” hash table. This is a special kind of hash table
with the property that if one of its keys becomes garbage, i.e is an object
not known about by anything other than the hash table, then the entry for that
key will be removed silently from the table. When this option exists it will be
documented in this section.
Hashing is a technique used in algorithms to provide fast retrieval of data in large tables. A function, known as the hash function, takes an object that might be used as a key, and produces a number associated with that key. This number, or some function of it, can be used to specify where in a table to look for the datum associated with the key. It is always possible for two different objects to hash to the same value; that is, for the hash function to return the same number for two distinct objects. Good hash functions are designed to minimize this by evenly distributing their results over the range of possible numbers. However, hash table algorithms must still deal with this problem by providing a secondary search, sometimes known as a rehash. For more information, consult a textbook on computer algorithms.
sxhash
computes a hash code of a tree, and returns it as a fixnum.
A property of sxhash
is that (equal x y)
always implies
(= (sxhash x) (sxhash y))
. The number returned by sxhash
is
always a non-negative fixnu. sxhash
tries to
compute its hash code in such a way that common permutations of an object,
such as interchanging two elements of a list or changing one character in
a string, always change the hash code.
Here is an example of how to use sxhash
in maintaining
hash tables of trees:
(defun knownp (x &aux i bkt) ;look up x
in the table
(setq i (abs (remainder (sxhash x) 176)))
;The remainder should be reasonably randomized.
(setq bkt (aref table i))
;bkt is thus a list of all those expressions that
;hash into the same number as does x.
(memq x bkt))
For an “intern” for trees, one could write:
(defun sintern (x &aux bkt i tem) (setq i (abs (remainder (sxhash x) 2n-1))) ;2n-1 stands for a power of 2 minus one. ;This is a good choice to randomize the ;result of the remainder operation. (setq bkt (aref table i)) (cond ((setq tem (memq x bkt)) (car tem)) (t (aset (cons x bkt) table i) x)))
If sxhash
is given a named structure or a flavor instance, or if
such an object
is part of a tree that is sxhash
’ed, it asks the object to supply
its own hash code by performing the :sxhash
operation if the object
supports it. This should return a suitable nonnegative hash code. The
easiest way to compute one is usually by applying sxhash
to one or
more of the components of the structure or the instance variables of the
instance.
For named structures and flavor instances that do not handle the
:sxhash
operation, and other unusual kinds of objects,
sxhash
can optionally use the object’s address as its hash code,
if you specify a non-nil
second argument. If you use this
option, you must be prepared to deal with hash codes changing due to
garbage collection.
sxhash
provides what is called “hashing on equal
”; that is, two
objects that are equal
are considered to be “the same” by
sxhash
. If two strings differ only in alphabetic case,
sxhash
returns the same thing for both of them, making it
suitable for equalp
hashing as well in some cases.
Therefore, sxhash
is useful for retrieving data when
two keys that are not the same object but are equal
are considered
the same. If you consider two such keys to be different, then you need
“hashing on eq
”, where two different objects are always considered
different. In some Lisp implementations, there is an easy way to create
a hash function that hashes on eq
, namely, by returning the virtual
address of the storage associated with the object. But in other
implementations, of which Zetalisp is one, this doesn’t work,
because the address associated with an object can be changed by the
relocating garbage collector. The hash tables created by make-hash-table
deal with this problem by using the appropriate subprimitives so that they
interface correctly with the garbage collector. If you need a hash table
that hashes on eq
, it is already provided; if you need an
eq
hash function for some other reason, you must build it yourself,
either using the provided eq
hash table facility or carefully using
subprimitives.
Storage allocation is handled differently by different computer systems. In many languages, the programmer must spend a lot of time thinking about when variables and storage units are allocated and deallocated. In Lisp, freeing of allocated storage is normally done automatically by the Lisp system; when an object is no longer accessible to the Lisp environment, the garbage collector reuses its storage for some other object. This relieves the programmer of a great burden, and makes writing programs much easier.
However, automatic freeing of storage incurs an expense: more computer resources must be devoted to the garbage collector. If a program is designed to allocate temporary storage, which is then left as garbage, more of the computer must be devoted to the collection of garbage; this expense can be high. In some cases, the programmer may decide that it is worth putting up with the inconvenience of having to free storage under program control, rather than letting the system do it automatically, in order to prevent a great deal of overhead from the garbage collector.
It usually is not worth worrying about freeing of storage when the units of storage are very small things such as conses or small arrays. Numbers are not a problem, either; fixnums and short floats do not occupy storage, and the system has a special way of garbage-collecting the other kinds of numbers with low overhead. But when a program allocates and then gives up very large objects at a high rate (or large objects at a very high rate), it can be worthwhile to keep track of that one kind of object manually. Within the Lisp Machine system, there are several programs that are in this position. The Chaosnet software allocates and frees “packets”, which are moderately large, at a very high rate. The window system allocates and frees certain kinds of windows, which are very large, moderately often. Both of these programs manage their objects manually, keeping track of when they are no longer used.
When we say that a program “manually frees” storage, it does not really mean that the storage is freed in the same sense that the garbage collector frees storage. Instead, a list of unused objects is kept. When a new object is desired, the program first looks on the list to see if there is one around already, and if there is it uses it. Only if the list is empty does it actually allocate a new one. When the program is finished with the object, it returns it to this list.
The functions and special forms in this section perform the above
function. The set of objects forming each such list is called a
resource; for example, there might be a Chaosnet packet resource.
defresource
defines a new resource; allocate-resource
allocates
one of the objects; deallocate-resource
frees one of the objects
(putting it back on the list); and using-resource
temporarily
allocates an object and then frees it.
The defresource
special form is used to define a new resource. The
form looks like this:
(defresource name parameters doc-string keyword value keyword value ...)
name should be a symbol; it is the name of the resource and gets a
defresource
property of the internal data structure representing the resource.
parameters is a lambda-list giving names and default values (if &optional
is used) of parameters to an object of this type. For example, if one had a resource
of two-dimensional arrays to be used as temporary storage in a calculation, the
resource would typically have two parameters, the number of rows and the number of
columns. In the simplest case parameters is ()
.
The documentation string is recorded for (documentation name 'resource)
to access. It may be omitted.
The keyword options control how the objects of the resource are made and kept track of. The following keywords are allowed:
:constructor
The value is either a form or the name of a function. It is responsible for making an object, and will be used when someone tries to allocate an object from the resource and no suitable free objects exist. If the value is a form, it may access the parameters as variables. If it is a function, it is given the internal data structure for the resource and any supplied parameters as its arguments; it will need to default any unsupplied optional parameters. This keyword is required.
:free-list-size
The value is the number of objects which the resource data structure should have room, initially, to remember. This is not a hard limit, since the data structure will be made bigger if necessary.
:initial-copies
The value is a number (or nil
which means 0). This many objects will
be made as part of the evaluation of the defresource
; thus is useful to
set up a pool of free objects during loading of a program. The default is
to make no initial copies.
If initial copies are made and there are parameters, all the parameters must
be &optional
and the initial copies will have the default values of the
parameters.
:initializer
The value is a form or a function as with :constructor
. In
addition to the parameters, a form here may access the variable
object
(in the current package). A function gets the object as
its second argument, after the data structure and before the
parameters. The purpose of the initializer function or form is to
clean up the contents of the object before each use. It is called or
evaluated each time an object is allocated, whether just constructed
or being reused.
:finder
The value is a form or a function as with :constructor
and sees the
same arguments. If this option is specified, the resource system does not keep
track of the objects. Instead, the finder must do so. It will be called
inside a without-interrupts
and must find a usable object somehow and return it.
:matcher
The value is a form or a function as with :constructor
. In addition to
the parameters, a form here may access the variable object
(in the current package).
A function gets the object as its second argument, after the data structure and
before the parameters. The job of the matcher is to make sure that the object
matches the specified parameters. If no matcher is supplied, the system will remember
the values of the parameters (including optional ones that defaulted) that were used
to construct the object, and will assume that it matches those particular values for
all time. The comparison is done with equal
(not eq
). The matcher is
called inside a without-interrupts
.
:checker
The job of the checker is to determine whether the object is safe to allocate.
The value is a form or a function, as above. In addition to the
parameters, a form here may access the variables object
and in-use-p
(in the current package). A function receives these as its second and third
arguments, after the data structure and before the parameters. If no checker
is supplied, the default checker looks only at in-use-p
; if the object has
been allocated and not freed it is not safe to allocate, otherwise it is. The
checker is called inside a without-interrupts
.
If these options are used with forms (rather than functions), the forms
get compiled into functions as part of the expansion of defresource
.
The functions, whether user-provided or generated from forms, are given
names like (:property resource-name si:resource-constructor)
;
these names are not guaranteed not to change in the future.
Most of the options are not used in typical cases. Here is an example:
(defresource two-dimensional-array (rows columns) :constructor (make-array (list rows columns)))
Suppose the array was usually going to be 100 by 100, and you wanted to preallocate one during loading of the program so that the first time you needed an array you wouldn’t have to spend the time to create one. You might simply put
(using-resource (foo two-dimensional-array 100 100) )
after your defresource
, which would allocate a 100 by 100 array and then
immediately free it. Alternatively you could write:
(defresource two-dimensional-array (&optional (rows 100) (columns 100)) :constructor (make-array (list rows columns)) :initial-copies 1)
Here is an example of how you might use the :matcher
option. Suppose you wanted
to have a resource of two-dimensional arrays, as above, except that when you allocate
one you don’t care about the exact size, as long as it is big enough. Furthermore
you realize that you are going to have a lot of different sizes and if you always
allocated one of exactly the right size, you would allocate a lot of different arrays
and would not reuse a pre-existing array very often. So you might write:
(defresource sloppy-two-dimensional-array (rows columns) :constructor (make-array (list rows columns)) :matcher (and ( (array-dimension-n 1 object) rows) ( (array-dimension-n 2 object) columns)))
Allocates an object from the resource specified by resource-name. The various forms
and/or functions given as options to defresource
, together with any
parameters given to allocate-resource
, control how a suitable object
is found and whether a new one has to be constructed or an old one can be reused.
Note that the using-resource
special form is usually what you want to
use, rather than allocate-resource
itself; see below.
Frees the object resource-object, returning it to the free-object list of the resource specified by resource-name.
The body forms are evaluated sequentially with variable bound to an object allocated from the resource named resource, using the given parameters. The parameters (if any) are evaluated, but resource is not.
using-resource
is often more convenient than calling
allocate-resource
and deallocate-resource
.
Furthermore it is careful to free the object when the body is exited,
whether it returns normally or via throw
. This is done by using
unwind-protect
; see unwind-protect-fun.
Here is an example of the use of resources:
(defresource huge-16b-array (&optional (size 1000)) :constructor (make-array size :type 'art-16b)) (defun do-complex-computation (x y) (using-resource (temp-array huge-16b-array) ... ;Within the body, the array can be used. (aset 5 temp-array i) ...)) ;The array is deallocated at the end.
Frees all objects in resource-name. This is like doing
deallocate-resource
on each one individually. This function is
often useful in warm-boot initializations.
Calls function on each object created in resource-name. Each time
function is called, it receives three fixed arguments, plus whatever
extra-args were specified. The three fixed arguments are an object
of the resource; t
if the object is currently allocated (“in use”);
and the resource data structure itself.
Forgets all of the objects being remembered by the resource specified by resource-name.
Future calls to allocate-resource
will create new objects. This function is
useful if something about the resource has been changed incompatibly, such that the
old objects are no longer usable. If an object of the resource is in use when
clear-resource
is called, an error will be signaled when that object is
deallocated.
The constructor, initializer, matcher and checker functions receive the internal resource data structure as an argument. This is a named structure array whose elements record the objects both free and allocated, and whose array leader contains sundry other information. This structure should be accessed using the following primitives:
Returns the index’th object remembered by the resource. Both free and allocated objects are remembered.
Returns t
if the index’th object remembered by the
resource has been allocated and not deallocated.
Simply defined resources will not reallocate an object in this state.
Returns the list of parameters from which the index’th object was originally created.
Returns the number of objects currently remembered by the resource.
This will include all objects ever constructed, unless
clear-resource
has been used.
Returns a function, created by defresource
, which accepts the
supplied parameters as arguments, and returns a complete list of
parameter values, including defaults for the optional ones.
When small temporary data structures are allocated so often that they
amount to a considerable drain of storage space, an ordinary resource
may be unacceptably slow. Here is a simple technique that
provides in such cases nearly all the benefit of a resource while
costing nearly nothing. The function read
uses it to allocate a
buffer for reading tokens of input.
(defvar buffer-for-reuse nil) (defsubst get-buffer () (or (do (old) ((%store-conditional (locf buffer-for-reuse) (setq old buffer-for-reuse) nil) old)) (construct-new-buffer)))) (defsubst free-buffer (buffer) (setq buffer-for-reuse buffer))
To allocate a buffer for use, do (get-buffer)
.
To free it when you are done with it, call free-buffer
.
It is assumed that construct-new-buffer
is the function
which can create a new buffer when there is none available for
reuse.
This technique keeps track of at most one buffer which has been freed
and may be reused. It is not effective in this simple form when more
than one buffer is needed at any given time by one application.
In the case of read
, only one token is being read in at any time.
It is safe for more than one process to call read
because
get-buffer
is designed to guarantee that a request cannot get a
buffer already handed out and not freed. Likewise, nothing terrible
happens if there is an error inside read
and read
is called
recursively within the debugger. The only problem is that multiple
buffers will be allocated, which means that some of them will be lost.
But the cost of this is minor in the cases where this technique
is applicable. For example, if two processes are reading files,
process switching will probably happen a few times a second, each time
costing one buffer not reused. This is insignificant compared to the
storage used up for other purposes by reading large amounts of data.
This chapter discusses the symbol as a Lisp data type. The Lisp system uses symbols as variables and function names, but these applications of symbols are discussed in chapter evaluator-chapter.
Each symbol has associated with it a value cell, which refers to
one Lisp object. This object is called the symbol’s value, since it is
what you get when you evaluate the symbol as a dynamic variable in a program.
Variables and how they work are described in variable-section. We also say
the the symbol is bound to the object which is its value. The symbols
nil
and t
are always bound to themselves; they may not be assigned,
bound, or otherwise used as variables. The same is true of symbols in the
keyword package.
The value cell can also be void, referring to no Lisp object, in which case the symbol is said to be void or unbound. This is the initial state of a symbol when it is created. An attempt to evaluate a void symbol causes an error.
Lexical variable bindings are not stored in symbol value cells. The functions in this section have no interaction with lexical bindings.
symeval
is the basic primitive for retrieving a symbol’s value.
(symeval symbol)
returns symbol’s current binding.
This is the function called by eval
when it is given a symbol to
evaluate. If the symbol is unbound, then symeval
signals an
error. symbol-value
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
set
is the primitive for assignment of symbols. The symbol’s value
is changed to value; value may be any Lisp object. set
returns
value.
Example:
(set (cond ((eq a b) 'c) (t 'd)) 'foo)
either sets c
to foo
or sets d
to foo
.
(setf (symeval symbol) value)
is a more modern
way to do this.
t
if symbol’s value cell is not void.
Makes symbol’s value cell void.
Example:
(setq a 1)
a => 1
(makunbound 'a)
a => causes an error.
makunbound
returns its argument.
Returns a locative pointer to symbol’s value cell. See the section on locatives (locative). It is preferable to write
(locf (symeval symbol))
which is equivalent, instead of calling this function explicitly.
This is actually the internal value cell; there can also be an external value cell. For details, see the section on closures (closure).
For historical compatibility, value-cell-location
of a quoted symbol is
recognized specially by the compiler and treated like variable-location
(variable-location-fun). However, such usage results in a compiler warning,
and eventually this compatibility feature will be removed.
Every symbol also has associated with it a function cell. The function
cell is similar to the value cell; it refers to a Lisp object.
When a function is referred to by name, that is, when a symbol is passed to apply
or appears as the car of a form to be evaluated, that symbol’s function cell
is used to find its definition, the functional object which is to be applied.
For example, when evaluating (+ 5 6)
,
the evaluator looks in +
’s function cell to find the definition of +
,
in this case a compiled function object, to apply to 5 and 6.
Maclisp does not have function cells; instead, it looks for special
properties on the property list. This is one of the major incompatibilities
between the two dialects.
Like the value cell, a function cell can be void, and it can be bound
or assigned. (However, to bind a function cell you must use the
%bind
subprimitive; see %bind-fun.)
The following functions are analogous to the value-cell-related
functions in the previous section.
Returns symbol’s definition, the contents of its
function cell. If the function cell is void, fsymeval
signals an error. symbol-function
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
Stores definition, which may be any Lisp object, into symbol’s function cell. It returns definition.
(setf (fsymeval symbol) definition)
is a more modern
way to do this.
nil
if symbol’s function cell is void,
i.e if symbol is undefined.
Otherwise it returns t
.
Causes symbol to be undefined, i.e its function cell to be void. It returns symbol.
Returns a locative pointer to symbol’s function cell. See the section on locatives (locative). It is preferable to write
(locf (fsymeval symbol))
rather than calling this function explicitly.
Since functions are the basic building block of Lisp programs, the system provides a variety of facilities for dealing with functions. Refer to chapter function-chapter for details.
Every symbol has an associated property list. See plist for documentation of property lists. When a symbol is created, its property list is initially empty.
The Lisp language itself does not use a symbol’s property list for anything. (This was not true in older Lisp implementations, where the print-name, value-cell, and function-cell of a symbol were kept on its property list.) However, various system programs use the property list to associate information with the symbol. For instance, the editor uses the property list of a symbol which is the name of a function to remember where it has the source code for that function, and the compiler uses the property list of a symbol which is the name of a special form to remember how to compile that special form.
Because of the existence of print-name, value, function, and package cells,
none of the Maclisp system property names (expr
, fexpr
, macro
, array
,
subr
, lsubr
, fsubr
, and in former times value
and
pname
) exist in Zetalisp.
Returns the list which represents the property list of symbol.
Note that this is not actually a property list; you cannot do get
on it. This value is like what would be the cdr of a property list.
symbol-plist
is the Common Lisp name.
Sets the list which represents the property list of symbol to list.
setplist
is to be used with caution (or not at all),
since property lists sometimes contain internal system properties, which
are used by many useful system functions. Also it is inadvisable to have the property
lists of two different symbols be eq
, since the shared list structure will
cause unexpected effects on one symbol if putprop
or remprop
is done to the other.
setplist
is equivalent to
(setf (plist symbol) list)
Returns a locative pointer to the location of symbol’s
property-list cell. This locative pointer may be passed to get
or
putprop
with the same results as if as symbol itself had been
passed. It is preferable to write
(locf (plist symbol))
rather than using this function.
Every symbol has an associated string called the print-name, or pname
for short. This string is used as the external representation of the symbol:
if the string is typed in to read
, it is read as a reference to that symbol
(if it is interned), and if the symbol is printed, print
types out the
print-name.
If a symbol is uninterned, #:
is normally printed as a prefix
before the symbol’s print-name. If the symbol is interned, a package
prefix may be printed, depending on the current package and how it relates
to the symbol’s home package.
For more information, see the sections on the reader (see reader), printer (see printer), and packages (see package).
Every symbol has a package cell which, for interned
symbols, is used to point to the package which the symbol belongs to. For an
uninterned symbol, the package cell contains nil
. For
information about packages in general, see the chapter on packages, package.
For information about package cells, see symbol-package-cell-discussion.
The functions in this section are primitives for creating symbols.
However, before discussing them, it is important to point out that most
symbols are created by a higher-level mechanism, namely the reader and
the intern
function. Nearly all symbols in Lisp are created
by virtue of the reader’s having seen a sequence of input characters that
looked like the printed representation (p.r) of a symbol. When the
reader sees such a p.r, it calls intern
(see intern-fun),
which looks up the sequence of characters in a big table and sees whether any symbol
with this print-name already exists. If it does, read
uses the
already-existing symbol. If it does not, then intern
creates a new
symbol and puts it into the table; read
uses that new symbol.
A symbol that has been put into such a table is called an interned symbol. Interned symbols are normally created automatically; the first time that someone (such as the reader) asks for a symbol with a given print-name, that symbol is automatically created.
These tables are called packages. For more information, turn to the chapter on packages (package).
An uninterned symbol is a symbol that has not been recorded
or looked up in a package. It is used simply as a data object,
with no special cataloging. An uninterned symbol prints with a
prefix #:
when escaping is in use, unless *print-gensym*
is nil
.
This allows uninterned symbols to be distinguishable and to read back in as
uninterned symbols. See *print-gensym*-var.
The following functions can be used to create uninterned symbols explicitly.
Creates a new uninterned symbol, whose print-name is the string
pname. The value and function cells are void and the
property list is empty. If permanent-p is specified, it is
assumed that the symbol is going to be interned and probably kept around
forever; in this case it and its pname are put in the proper areas.
If permanent-p is nil
(the default), the symbol goes in the
default area and the pname is not copied. permanent-p is mostly
for the use of intern
itself.
Examples:
(setq a (make-symbol "foo")) => foo (symeval a) => ERROR!
Note that the symbol is not interned; it is simply created and returned.
Returns a new uninterned symbol with the same print-name
as symbol. If copy-props is non-nil
, then the
value and function-definition of the new symbol are
the same as those of symbol, and the property list of
the new symbol is a copy of symbol’s. If copy-props
is nil
, then the new symbol’s function and value are void, and
its property list is empty.
Invents a print-name and creates a new symbol with that print-name. It returns the new, uninterned symbol.
The invented print-name is a prefix (the value of si:*gensym-prefix
)
followed by the decimal representation of a number (the value of si:*gensym-counter
),
e.g g0001
. The number is increased by one every time gensym
is called.
If the argument x is present and is a fixnum, then si:*gensym-counter
is
set to x. If x is a string or a symbol, then si:*gensym-prefix
is set to it,
so it becomes the prefix for this and successive calls to gensym
.
After handling the argument, gensym
creates a symbol as it would with no argument.
Examples:
if (gensym) => #:g0007 then (gensym 'foo) => #:foo0008 (gensym 32.) => #:foo0032 (gensym) => #:foo0033
Note that the number is in decimal and always has four digits.
#:
is the prefix normally printed before uninterned symbols.
gensym
is usually used to create a symbol which should not normally
be seen by the user, and whose print-name is unimportant, except to
allow easy distinction by eye between two such symbols.
The optional argument is rarely supplied.
The name comes from ‘generate symbol’, and the symbols produced by it
are often called “gensyms”.
"t"
) (a-package package
) ¶Creates and returns a new symbol whose name starts with prefix, interned in a-package, and distinct from any symbol already present there. This is done by trying names one by one until a name not already in use is found, which may be very slow.
Zetalisp includes several types of numbers, with different
characteristics. Most numeric functions accept any type of numbers as
arguments and do the right thing. That is to say, they are generic.
In Maclisp, there are generic numeric functions (like plus
) and there
are specific numeric functions (like +
) which only operate on a certain
type of number, but are much more efficient.
In Zetalisp, this distinction does not exist; both function
names exist for compatibility but they are identical. The microprogrammed
structure of the machine makes it possible to have only the generic
functions without loss of efficiency.
The types of numbers in Zetalisp are:
Fixnums are 25-bit twos-complement binary integers. These are the preferred, most efficient type of number.
Bignums are arbitrary-precision binary integers.
Ratios represent rational numbers exactly as the quotient of two integers, each of which can be a fixnum or a bignum. Ratios with a denominator of one are not normally created, as an integer is returned instead.
Full size floats are floating-point numbers. They have a mantissa of 31 bits and an exponent of 11 bits, providing a precision of about 9 digits and a range of about 10^300. Stable rounding is employed.
Short floats are another form of floating-point number, with a mantissa of 17 bits and an exponent of 8 bits, providing a precision of about 5 digits and a range of about 10^38. Stable rounding is employed. Short floats are useful because, like fixnums, and unlike full-size floats, they don’t require any storage. Computing with short floats is more efficient than with full-size floats because the operations are faster and consing overhead is eliminated.
Complexnums represent complex numbers with a real part and an imaginary
part, which can be any type of number except complexnums. (They must be
both rational or both floats of the same type). It is impossible to
make a complexnum whose real part is rational and whose imaginary part
is the intreger zero; it is always changed into a real number. However, it is
possible to create complexnums with an imaginary part of 0.0, and such numbers may result from
calculations involving complexnums. In fact, 5.0 and 5.0+0.0i are always distinct;
they are not eql
, and arithmetic operations will never canonicalize a complexnum
with floating-point zero imaginary part into a real number.
Generally, Lisp objects have a unique identity; each exists, independent
of any other, and you can use the eq
predicate to determine whether
two references are to the same object or not. Numbers are the exception
to this rule; they don’t work this way. The following function may return
either t
or nil
. Its behavior is considered undefined;
as this manual is written, it returns t
when interpreted but nil
when compiled.
(defun foo () (let ((x (float 5))) (eq x (car (cons x nil)))))
This is very strange from the point of view of Lisp’s usual object
semantics, but the implementation works this way, in order to gain
efficiency, and on the grounds that identity testing of numbers is not
really an interesting thing to do. So the rule is that the result
of applying eq
to numbers is undefined, and may return either
t
or nil
on what appear to be two pointers to the same
numeric object. The only reasonable ways to compare numbers are
=
(see =-fun) and eql
(eql-fun), and other
things (equal
or equalp
) based on them.
Conversely, fixnums and short floats have the unusual property that
they are always eq
if they are equal in value. This is because
they do not point to storage; the “pointer” field of a fixnum is actually
its numeric value, and likewise for short floats. Stylisticly it is
better to avoid depending on this, by using eql
rather than
eq
. Also, comparing floats of any sort for exact equality, even
with =
which is guaranteed to consider only the numeric values, is
usually unwise since round-off error can make the answer unpredictable
and meaningless.
The distinction between fixnums and bignums is largely transparent to
the user. The user simply computes with integers, and the system
represents some as fixnums and the rest (less efficiently) as bignums.
The system automatically converts back and forth between fixnums and
bignums based solely on the size of the integer. There are a few low
level functions which only work on fixnums; this fact is noted in
their documentation. Also, when using eq
on numbers the user
needs to be aware of the fixnum/bignum distinction.
Integer computations cannot overflow, except for division by zero,
since bignums can be of arbitrary size. Floating-point computations
can get exponent overflow or underflow, if the result is too large or small
to be represented. Exponent overflow always signals an error.
Exponent underflow normally signals an error, and assumes 0.0
as the answer
if the user says to proceed from the error. However, if the value of the
variable zunderflow
is non-nil
, the error is skipped
and computation proceeds with 0.0
in place of the result that was too small.
When an arithmetic function of more than one argument is given arguments of different numeric types, uniform coercion rules are followed to convert the arguments to a common type, which is also the type of the result (for functions which return a number). When an integer meets a ratio, the result is a ratio. When an integer or ratio meets a float, the result is a float of the same sort. When a short-float meets a full-size float, the result is a full-size float.
If any argument of the arithmetic function is complex, the other arguments are converted to complex. The components of a complex result must be both full-size floats, both small-floats, or both rational; if they differ, the one whose type comes last in that list is converted to match the other. Finally, if the components of the result are rational and the imaginary part is zero, the result is simply the real part. If, however, the components are floats, the value is always complex even if the imaginary part is zero.
Thus if the constants in a numerical algorithm are written as short floats (assuming this provides adequate precision), and if the input is a short float, the computation is done with short floats and the result is a short float, while if the input is a full-size float the computation is done in full precision and the result is a full-size float.
Zetalisp never automatically converts between full-size floats and short floats in the same way as it automatically converts between fixnums and bignums since this would lead either to inefficiency or to unexpected numerical inaccuracies. (When a short float meets a full-size float, the result is a full-size float, but if you use only one type, all the results are of the same type too.) This means that a short float computation can get an exponent overflow error even when the result could have been represented as a full-size float.
Floating-point numbers retain only a certain number of bits of precision; therefore, the results of computations are only approximate. Full-size floats have 31 bits and short floats have 17 bits, not counting the sign. The method of approximation is “stable rounding”. The result of an arithmetic operation is the float which is closest to the exact value. If the exact result falls precisely halfway between two representable floats, the result is rounded down if the least-significant bit is 0, or up if the least-significant bit is 1. This choice is arbitrary but insures that no systematic bias is introduced.
Unlike Maclisp, Zetalisp does not have number declarations in the compiler. Note that because fixnums and short floats require no associated storage they are as efficient as declared numbers in Maclisp. Bignums and full-size floats are less efficient; however, bignum and float intermediate results are garbage-collected in a special way that avoids the overhead of the full garbage collector.
The different types of numbers can be distinguished by their printed
representations. If a number has an exponent separated by ‘s
’, it
is a short float. If a number has an exponent separated by ‘f
’, it
is a full-size float. A leading or embedded (but not trailing)
decimal point, and/or an exponent separated by ‘e
’, indicates a
float; which kind is controlled by the variable
*read-default-float-format*
, which is usually set to specify
full-size floats. Short floats require a special indicator so that
naive users will not accidentally compute with the lesser precision.
Fixnums and bignums have similar printed representations since there is
no numerical value that has a choice of whether to be a fixnum or a
bignum; an integer is a bignum if and only if its magnitude is too big
for a fixnum. See the examples on flonum-examples, in the
description of what the reader understands.
When this is nil
, floating point exponent underflow is an error.
When this is t
, exponent underflow proceeds, returning zero as the value.
The same thing could be accomplished with a condition handler.
However, zunderflow
is useful for Maclisp compatibility, and is also faster.
sys:floating-exponent-overflow
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶sys:floating-exponent-underflow
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶sys:floating-exponent-overflow
is signaled when the result of an
arithmetic operation should be a floating point number, but the exponent
is too large to be represented in the format to be used for the value.
sys:floating-exponent-underflow
is signaled when the exponent is too
small.
The condition instance provides two additional operations:
:function
, which returns the arithmetic function that was called,
and :small-float-p
, which is t
if the result was supposed to be
a short float.
sys:floating-exponent-overflow
provides the :new-value
proceed
type. It expects one argument, a new value.
sys:floating-exponent-underflow
provides the :use-zero
proceed
type, which expects no argument.
Unfortunately, it is not possible to make the arguments to the operation available. Perhaps someday they will be.
Returns t
if x is zero. Otherwise it returns nil
.
If x is not a number, zerop
causes an error. For floats,
this only returns t
for exactly 0.0
or 0.0s0
.
For complex numbers, it returns t
if both real and imaginary
parts are zero.
Returns t
if its argument is a positive number, strictly greater
than zero. Otherwise it returns nil
.
If x is not a number, plusp
causes an error.
Returns t
if its argument is a negative number, strictly
less than zero. Otherwise it returns nil
.
If x is not a number, minusp
causes an error.
Returns t
if number is odd, otherwise nil
.
If number is not a fixnum or a bignum, oddp
causes an error.
Returns t
if number is even, otherwise nil
.
If number is not a fixnum or a bignum, evenp
causes an error.
Tests the sign of a number. signp
is present only for
Maclisp compatibility and is not recommended for use in new programs.
signp
returns t
if x is a number which
satisfies the test, nil
if it is not a number or does not meet
the test. test is not evaluated, but x is. test can be
one of the following:
l
x < 0
le
x lessOrEqual
0
e
x = 0
n
x notEquals
0
ge
x greaterOrEqual
0
g
x > 0
Examples:
(signp ge 12) => t (signp le 12) => nil (signp n 0) => nil (signp g 'foo) => nil
See also the data-type predicates integerp
, rationalp
,
realp
, complexp
,
floatp
, bigp
, small-floatp
, and numberp
(fixp-fun).
All of these functions require that their arguments be numbers; they signal an error if given a non-number. Equality tests work on all types of numbers, automatically performing any required coercions (as opposed to Maclisp in which generally only the spelled-out names work for all kinds of numbers). Ordering comparisons allow only real numbers, since they are meaningless on complex numbers.
Returns t
if all the arguments are numerically equal. They need not
be of the same type; 1 and 1.0 are considered equal. Character objects
are also allowed, and in effect coerced to integers for comparison.
See also eql
, eql-fun, which insists that both the type and the value
match when its arguments are numbers.
>
compares each pair of successive arguments. If any argument
is not greater than the next, >
returns nil
. But if the
arguments are monotonically strictly decreasing, the result is t
.
Zero arguments are always monotonically decreasing, and so is
a single argument.
Examples:
(>) => t (> 3) => t (> 4 3) => t (> 4 3 2 1 0) => t (> 4 3 1 2 0) => nil
greaterp
is the Maclisp name for this function.
greaterOrEqual
compares each pair of successive arguments. If any argument
is less than the next, greaterOrEqual
returns nil
. But if the
arguments are monotonically decreasing or equal, the result is t
.
>=
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
<
compares each pair of successive arguments. If any argument
is not less than the next, <
returns nil
. But if the
arguments are monotonically strictly increasing, the result is t
.
Examples:
(<) => t (< 3) => t (< 3 4) => t (< 1 1) => nil (< 0 1 2 3 4) => t (< 0 1 3 2 4) => nil
lessp
is the Maclisp name for this function.
lessOrEqual
compares its arguments from left to right. If any argument
is greater than the next, lessOrEqual
returns nil
. But if the
arguments are monotonically increasing or equal, the result is t
.
<=
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
t
if no two arguments are numerically equal.
This is the same as (not (= ...))
when there are two arguments,
but not when there are more than two.
With zero or one argument, the value is always t
, since
there is no pair of arguments that fail to be equal.
//=
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
In Common Lisp syntax, it would be written /=
.
Returns the largest of its arguments, which must not be complex.
Example:
(max 1 3 2) => 3
max
requires at least one argument.
Returns the smallest of its arguments, which must not be complex.
Example:
(min 1 3 2) => 1
min
requires at least one argument.
All of these functions require that their arguments be numbers, and signal
an error if given a non-number. They work on all types of numbers,
automatically performing any required coercions (as opposed to Maclisp,
in which generally only the spelled-out versions work for all kinds
of numbers, and the ‘$
’ versions are needed for floats).
Returns the sum of its arguments. If there are no arguments, it returns
0
, which is the identity for this operation.
plus
and $+
are Maclisp names, supported for
compatibility.
With only one argument, -
returns the negative of its argument.
With more than one argument, -
returns its first argument minus
all of the rest of its arguments.
Examples:
(- 1) => -1 (- -3.0) => 3.0 (- 3 1) => 2 (- 9 2 1) => 6
-$
is a Maclisp name, supported for compatibility.
Returns the negative of x, just like -
with one argument.
Returns its first argument minus all of the rest of its arguments.
If there are at least two arguments, difference
is equivalent to
-
.
Returns |x|
, the absolute value of the number x.
abs
for real numbers could have been defined as
(defun abs (x) (cond ((minusp x) (minus x)) (t x)))
abs
of a complex number could be computed, though imprecisely, as
(sqrt (^ (realpart x) 2) (^ (imagpart x) 2))
Returns the product of its arguments. If there are no arguments, it
returns 1
, which is the identity for this operation.
times
and *$
are Maclisp names, supported for compatibility.
With more than one argument, //
it returns the first argument divided by all of the rest of its arguments.
With only one argument, (// x)
is the same as (// 1 x)
.
The name of this function is written //
rather than /
because
/
is the escape character in traditional Lisp syntax and must be
escaped in order to suppress that significance. //$
is a Maclisp
name, supported for compatibility.
//
of two integers returns an integer even if the mathematically
correct value is not an integer. More precisely, the value is the
same as the first value returned by truncate
(see below). This
will eventually be changed, and then the value will be a ratio if
necessary so that the it is mathematically correct. All code that
relies on //
to return an integer value rather than a ratio should
be converted to use truncate
(or floor
or ceiling
, which
may simplify the code further). In the mean time, use the function
cli://
if you want a rational result.
Examples:
(// 3 2) => 1 ;Fixnum division truncates.
(// 3 -2) => -1
(// -3 2) => -1
(// -3 -2) => 1
(// 3 2.0) => 1.5
(// 3 2.0s0) => 1.5s0
(// 4 2) => 2
(// 12. 2. 3.) => 2
(// 4.0) => .25
Returns the first argument divided by all of the rest of its arguments.
When there are two or more arguments, quotient
is equivalent to
//
.
This is the Common Lisp division function. It is like //
except
that it uses exact rational division when the arguments are integers.
//
will someday be changed to divide integers exactly. Then there
will no longer be a distinct function cli://
; that name will become
equivalent to //
.
Note that in Common Lisp syntax you would write just /
rather than
cli://
.
There are four functions for “integer division”, the sort which produces a quotient and a remainder. They differ in how they round the quotient to an integer, and therefore also in the sign of the remainder. The arguments must be real, since ordering is needed to compute the value. The quotient is always an integer, but the arguments and remainder need not be.
1
) ¶floor
’s first value is the largest integer less than or equal to the
quotient of x divided by y.
The second value is the remainder, x minus y times the first value. This has the same sign as y (or may be zero), regardless of the sign of x.
With one argument, floor
’s first value is the largest integer less than
or equal to the argument.
1
) ¶ceiling
’s first value is the smallest integer greater than or equal
to the quotient of x divided by y.
The second value is the remainder, x minus y times the first value. This has the opposite sign from y (or may be zero), regardless of the sign of x.
With one argument, ceiling
’s first value is the smallest integer greater than
or equal to the argument.
1
) ¶truncate
is the same as floor
if the arguments have the same
sign, ceiling
if they have opposite signs. truncate
is the
function that the divide instruction on most computers implements.
truncate
’s first value is the nearest integer, in the direction of
zero, to the quotient of x divided by y.
The second value is the remainder, x minus y times the first value. This has the same sign as x (or may be zero).
1
) ¶round
’s first value is the nearest integer
to the quotient of x divided by y. If the quotient is midway
between two integers, the even integer of the two is used.
The second value is the remainder, x minus y times the first value. The sign of this remainder cannot be predicted from the signs of the arguments alone.
With one argument, round
’s first value is the integer nearest to the
argument.
Here is a table which clarifies the meaning of floor
, ceiling
,
truncate
and round
with one argument:
floor ceiling truncate round 2.6 2 3 2 3 2.5 2 3 2 2 2.4 2 3 2 2 0.7 0 1 0 1 0.3 0 1 0 0 -0.3 -1 0 0 0 -0.7 -1 0 0 -1 -2.4 -3 -2 -2 -2 -2.5 -3 -2 -2 -2 -2.5 -3 -2 -2 -2 -2.6 -3 -2 -2 -3
There are two kinds of remainder function, which differ in the treatment of negative numbers. The remainder can also be obtained as the second value of one of the integer division functions above, but if only the remaineder is desired it is simpler to use these functions.
Returns the remainder of x divided by y.
x and y must be integers (fixnums or bignums).
This is the same as the second value of (truncate x y)
.
Only the absolute value of the divisor is relevant.
(\ 3 2) => 1 (\ -3 2) => -1 (\ 3 -2) => 1 (\ -3 -2) => -1
Common Lisp gives this function the name rem
, but since rem
in
traditional Zetalisp is a function to remove elements from lists (see
rem-fun), the name rem
is defined to mean remainder only in Common
Lisp programs. Note that the name \
would have to be written as
\\
in Common Lisp syntax; but the function \
is not standard
Common Lisp.
Returns the root of number modulo divisor. This is a number
between 0 and divisor, or possibly 0, whose difference from
number is a multiple of divisor. It is the same as the second
value of (floor number divisor)
. Examples:
(mod 2 5) => 2 (mod -2 5) => 3 (mod -2 -5) => -2 (mod 2 -5) => -3
There are four “floating point integer division” functions. These produce a result which is a floating point number whose value is exactly integral.
1
) ¶1
) ¶1
) ¶1
) ¶Like floor
, ceiling
, truncate
and round
except
that the first value is converted from an integer to a float.
If x is a float, then the result is the same type of float as x.
sys:divide-by-zero
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶Dividing by zero, using any of the above division functions, signals this
condition. The :function
operation on the condition instance
returns the name of the division function. The :dividend
operation
may be available to return the number that was divided.
(1+ x)
is the same as (+ x 1)
. The other two names
are for Maclisp compatibility.
(1- x)
is the same as (- x 1)
. Note that the
short name may be confusing: (1- x)
does not mean 1-x;
rather, it means x-1. The names sub1
and 1-$
are
for Maclisp compatibility.
Returns the greatest common divisor of all its arguments, which must be integers. With one argument, the value is that argument. With no arguments, the value is zero.
In Common Lisp syntax \\
would be written as \\\\
,
but only the name gcd
is valid in strict Common Lisp.
Returns the least common multiple of the specified integers.
Returns x raised to the y’th power. The result is rational (and
possibly an integer) if x is rational and y an integer. If the exponent is
an integer a repeated-squaring algorithm is used; otherwise the result
is (exp (* y (log x)))
.
If y is zero, the result is (+ 1 (* x y))
;
this is equal to one, but its type depends on those of x and y.
sys:zero-to-negative-power
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶This condition is signaled when expt
’s first argument is zero
and the second argument is negative.
Returns the square root of x. A mathematically unavoidable
discontinuity occurs for negative real arguments, for which the value
returned is a positive real times i
.
(sqrt 4) => 2 (sqrt -4) => 0+2i (sqrt -4+.0001i) => .00005+2i (approximately) (sqrt -4-.0001i) => .00005-2i (approximately)
Integer square-root. x must be an integer; the result is the greatest integer less than or equal to the exact square root of x.
These are the internal microcoded arithmetic functions. There is no
reason why anyone should need to write code with these explicitly, since the
compiler knows how to generate the appropriate code for plus
,
+
, etc. These names are only here for Maclisp compatibility.
The internal division function used by cli://
,
it was available before cli://
was and may therefore
be used in some programs. It takes exactly two arguments.
Uses of %div
should be changed to use cli://
.
See also the predicates realp
and complexp
(complexp-fun).
Returns the complex number whose real part is x and whose imaginary part is y.
If x is rational and y is zero or omitted, the value is x, and not a complex number at all. If x is a float and y is zero or omitted, of if y is a floating zero, the result is a complexnum whose imaginary part is zero.
Returns the real part of the number z. If z is real, this is the same as z.
Returns the imaginary part of the number z. If z is real, this is zero.
Returns the complex conjugate of the number z. If z is real, this is the same as z.
Returns the phase angle of the complex number z in its polar form.
This is the angle from the positive x axis to the ray from the
origin through z. The value is always in the interval (-pi, pi]
.
(phase -4) => pi
(phase -4-.0001i) is just over -pi
.
(phase 0) => 0 (an arbitrary choice)
Returns the complex number of unit magnitude whose phase is angle.
This is equal to (complex (cos angle) (sin angle))
.
angle must be real.
Returns a number with unit magnitude and the same type and phase as z. If z is zero, the value is zero.
If z is real, the value is =
to 1
or -1
;
it may be a float, however.
These functions are only for floating-point arguments; if given an integer they convert it to a float. If given a short float, they return a short float.
The value of pi
, as a full-size float.
Returns e raised to the x’th power, where e is the base of natural logarithms.
Returns the logarithm of x to base base. base
defaults to e. When base is e, the imaginary
part of the value is in the interval (-pi, pi]
; for
negative real x, the value has imaginary part pi
.
If base is specified, the result is
(// (log x) (log base))
sys:zero-log
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶This is signaled when the argument to log
is zero.
Return, respectively, the sine, cosine and tangent of x, where x is expressed in radians. x may be complex.
Return, respectively, the sine, cosine and tangent of x, where x is expressed in degrees.
Returns the angle (in radians) whose sine (respectively, cosine)
is x. The real part of the result of asin
is
between -pi/2
and pi/2
; acos
and asin
of any given argument always add up to pi/2
.
If only y is given, the value is the angle, in radians, whose
tangent is y. The real part of the result is between zero and -pi
.
If x is also given, both arguments must be real, and the value is
an angle, in radians, whose tangent is y/x. However, the signs
of the two arguments are used to choose between two angles which
differ by pi
and have the same tangent. The one chosen is the
angle from the x-axis counterclockwise to the line from the origin
to the point (x, y).
atan
always returns a non-negative number between zero and
2pi
.
Like atan
but always returns a value whose real part is between
-pi/2
and pi/2
. The value is either the same as
the value of atan
or differs from it by pi
.
atan2
is the traditional name of this function.
In Common Lisp it is called atan
; it is documented as
cli:atan
since the name atan
has a different meaning
in traditional syntax.
These functions are provided to allow specific conversions of data types to be forced, when desired.
Converts number to a floating point number and returns it.
If float is specified, the result is of the same floating point format as float. If number is a float of a different format then it is converted.
If float is omitted, then number is converted to a single-float unless it is already a floating point number.
A complex number is converted to one whose real and imaginary parts are full-size floats unless they are already both floats.
Converts any kind of real number to a short-float. A complex number is converted to one whose real and imaginary parts are short floats. The two names are synonymous.
Returns the numerator of the rational number x. If x is an integer, the value equals x. If x is not an integer or ratio, an error is signaled.
Returns the denominator of the rational number x. If x is an
integer, the value is 1
. If x is not an integer or
ratio, an error is signaled.
Converts x to a rational number. If x is an integer or a ratio, it is returned unchanged. If it is a floating point number, it is regarded as an exact fraction whose numerator is the mantissa and whose denominator is a power of two. For any other argument, an error is signaled.
Returns a rational approximation to x.
If there is only one argument, and it is an integer or a ratio, it is returned unchanged. If the argument is a floating point number, a rational number is returned which, if converted to a floating point number, would produce the original argument. Of all such rational numbers, the one chosen has the smallest numerator and denominator.
If there are two arguments, the second one specifies how much precision of the first argument should be considered significant. precision can be a positive integer (the number of bits to use), a negative integer (the number of bits to drop at the end), or a floating point number (minus its exponent is the number of bits to use).
If there are two arguments and the first is rational, the value is a “simpler” rational which approximates it.
Converts x from a float or ratio to an integer, truncating towards negative infinity. The result is a fixnum or a bignum as appropriate. If x is already a fixnum or a bignum, it is returned unchanged.
fix
is the same as floor
except that floor
returns an
additional value. fix
is semi-obsolete, since the functions floor
,
ceiling
, truncate
and round
provide four different ways of
converting numbers to integers with different kinds of rounding.
fixr
is the same as round
except that round
returns an
additional value. fixr
is considered obsolete.
Returns three values which describe the value of float.
The first value is a positive float of the same format having the same mantissa, but with an exponent chosen to make it between 1/2 and 1, less than 1.
The second value is the exponent of float: the power of 2 by which the first value needs to be scaled in order to get float back.
The third value expresses the sign of float. It is a float of the same format as float, whose value is either 1 or -1. Example:
(decode-float 38.2) => 0.596875 6 1.0
Like decode-float
except that the first value is scaled so as to
make it an integer, and the second value is modified by addition of a
constant to compensate.
(integer-decode-float 38.2) => #o11431463146 -25. 1.0
Multiplies float by 2 raised to the integer power. float can actually be an integer also; it is converted to a float and then scaled.
(scale-float 0.596875 6) => 38.2 (scale-float #o11431463146 -25.) => 38.2
Returns a float whose sign matches that of float1 and whose magnitude and format are those of float2. If float2 is omitted, 1.0 is used as the magnitude and float1’s format is used.
(float-sign -1.0s0 35.3) => -35.3 (float-sign -1.0s0 35.3s0) => -35.3s0
Defined by Common Lisp to return the radix used for the exponent in the
format used for float. On the Lisp Machine, floating point
exponents are always powers of 2, so float-radix
ignores its
argument and always returns 2.
Returns the number of bits of mantissa in the floating point format which float is an example of. It is 17 for short floats and 31 for full size ones.
Returns the number of significant figures present in in the mantissa of float.
This is always the same as (float-digits float)
for normalized numbers,
and on the Lisp Machine all floats are normalized, so the two functions are the same.
Except for lsh
and rot
, these functions operate on both
fixnums and bignums. lsh
and rot
have an inherent word-length
limitation and hence only operate on 25-bit fixnums. Negative numbers
are operated on in their 2’s-complement representation.
Returns the bit-wise logical inclusive or of its arguments. With no arguments, the value is zero, which is the identity for this operation.
Example (in octal):
(logior #o4002 #o67) => #o4067
Returns the bit-wise logical and of its arguments. With no arguments, the value is -1, which is the identity for this operation.
Examples (in octal):
(logand #o3456 #o707) => #o406 (logand #o3456 #o-100) => #o3400
Returns the bit-wise logical exclusive or of its arguments. With no arguments, the value is zero, which is the identity for this operation.
Example (in octal):
(logxor #o2531 #o7777) => #o5246
Combines the integers together bitwise using the equivalence operation, which, for two arguments, is defined to result in 1 if the two argument bits are equal. This operation is asociative. With no args, the value is -1, which is an identity for the equivalence operation.
Example (in octal):
(logeqv #o2531 #o7707) => #o-5237 = ...77772541
Non-associative bitwise operations take only two arguments:
Returns the bitwise-nand of the two arguments. A bit of the result is 1 if at least one of the corresponding argument bits is 0.
Returns the bitwise-nor of the two arguments. A bit of the result is 1 if both of the corresponding argument bits are 0.
Returns the bitwise-or of integer2 with the complement of integer1.
Returns the bitwise-or of integer1 with the complement of integer2.
Returns the bitwise-and of integer2 with the complement of integer1.
Returns the bitwise-and of integer1 with the complement of integer2.
Returns the logical complement of number. This is the same as
logxor
’ing number with -1.
Example:
(lognot #o3456) => #o-3457
boole
is the generalization of logand
, logior
, and logxor
.
fn should be a fixnum between 0 and 17 octal inclusive;
it controls the function which is computed. If the binary representation
of fn is abcd (a is the most significant bit, d the least)
then the truth table for the Boolean operation is as follows:
y | 0 1 --------- 0| a c x | 1| b d
If boole
has more than three arguments, it is associated left
to right; thus,
(boole fn x y z) = (boole fn (boole fn x y) z)
With two arguments, the result of boole
is simply its second argument.
At least two arguments are required.
Examples:
(boole 1 x y) = (logand x y) (boole 6 x y) = (logxor x y) (boole 2 x y) = (logand (lognot x) y)
logand
, logior
, and so on are usually preferred over the equivalent
forms of boole
. boole
is useful when the operation to be performed
is not constant.
The boole
opcodes that correspond to the functions logior
, logand
, etc.
The boole
opcodes for the four trivial operations. Respectively, they
are those which always return zero, always return one, always return the
first argument, and always return the second argument.
bit-test
is a predicate which returns t
if any of
the bits designated by the 1’s in x are 1’s in y.
bit-test
is implemented as a macro which expands as follows:
(bit-test x y) ==> (not (zerop (logand x y)))
logtest
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
Returns x shifted left y bits if y is positive or zero,
or x shifted right |y|
bits if y is negative.
Zero bits are shifted in (at either end) to fill unused positions.
x and y must be fixnums. (In some applications you may
find ash
useful for shifting bignums; see below.)
Examples:
(lsh 4 1) => #o10 (lsh #o14 -2) => 3 (lsh -1 1) => -2
Shifts x arithmetically left y bits if y is positive,
or right -y bits if y is negative.
Unused positions are filled by zeroes from the right, and
by copies of the sign bit from the left. Thus, unlike lsh
,
the sign of the result is always the same as the sign of x.
If x is a fixnum or a bignum, this is a shifting operation.
If x is a float, this does scaling (multiplication by a power of two),
rather than actually shifting any bits.
Returns x rotated left y bits if y is positive or zero,
or x rotated right |y|
bits if y is negative.
The rotation considers x as a 25-bit number (unlike Maclisp,
which considers x to be a 36-bit number in both the pdp-10
and Multics implementations).
x and y must be fixnums. (There is no function for
rotating bignums.)
Examples:
(rot 1 2) => 4 (rot 1 -2) => #o20000000 (rot -1 7) => -1 (rot #o15 25.) => #o15
Returns the number of 1 bits in integer, if it is positive. Returns the number of 0 bits in integer, if it is negative. (There are infinitely many 1 bits in a negative integer.)
(logcount #o15) => 3 (logcount #o-15) => 2
The minimum number of bits (aside from sign) needed to represent
integer in two’s complement. This is the same as haulong
for positive numbers.
(integer-length 0) => 0 (integer-length 7) => 3 (integer-length 8) => 4 (integer-length -7) => 3 (integer-length -8) => 3 (integer-length -9) => 4
The same as integer-length
of the absolute value of integer
.
This name exists for Maclisp compatibility only.
Returns the high n bits of the binary representation of |x|
,
or the low -n
bits if n is negative.
x may be a fixnum or a bignum; its sign is ignored.
haipart
could have been defined by:
(defun haipart (x n) (setq x (abs x)) (if (minusp n) (logand x (1- (ash 1 (- n)))) (ash x (min (- n (haulong x)) 0))))
Several functions are provided for dealing with an arbitrary-width field of contiguous bits appearing anywhere in an integer (a fixnum or a bignum). Such a contiguous set of bits is called a byte. Note that we are not using the term byte to mean eight bits, but rather any number of bits within a number. These functions use numbers called byte specifiers to designate a specific byte position within any word. A byte specifier contains two pieces of information: the size of the byte, and the position of the byte. The position is expressed as the number of least significant bits which are not included in the byte. A position of zero means that the byte is at the right (least significant) end of the number.
The maximum value of the size is 24, since a byte must fit in a fixnum although bytes can be loaded from and deposited into bignums. (Bytes are always positive numbers.)
Byte specifiers are represented as fixnums whose two lowest octal digits represent the size of the byte, and whose higher (usually two, but sometimes more) octal digits represent the position of the byte within a number. For example, the byte-specifier #o0010 (i.e 10 octal) refers to the lowest eight bits of a word, and the byte-specifier #o1010 refers to the next eight bits. The format of byte-specifiers is taken from the pdp-10 byte instructions.
Much old code contains byte specifiers written explicitly as octal numbers.
It is cleaner to construct byte specifiers using byte
instead.
Decomposition of byte specifiers should always be done with
byte-position
and byte-size
, as at some time in the future
other kinds of byte specifiers may be created to refer to fields
whose size is greater than #o77.
Returns a byte specifier for the byte of size bits, positioned to
exclude the position least significant bits. This byte specifier
can be passed as the first argument to ldb
, dpb
, %logldb
,
%logdpb
, mask-field
, %p-ldb
, %p-ldb-offset
, and so on.
Return, respectively, the size and the position of byte-spec. It is always true that
(byte (byte-size byte-spec) (byte-position byte-spec))
equals byte-spec.
Extracts a byte from integer according to byte-soec. The
contents of this byte are returned right-justified in a fixnum. The
name of the function, ldb
, means ‘load byte’. integer may be a
fixnum or a bignum. The returned value is always a fixnum.
Example:
(ldb (byte 6 3) #o4567) => #o56
This is like ldb
except that instead of using a byte specifier,
the position and size are passed as separate arguments.
The argument order is not analogous to that of ldb
so that
load-byte
can be compatible with Maclisp.
ldb-test
is a predicate which returns t
if any of
the bits designated by the byte specifier byte-spec are 1’s in integer.
That is, it returns t
if the designated field is non-zero.
ldb-test
is implemented as a macro which expands as follows:
(ldb-test byte-spec integer) ==> (not (zerop (ldb byte-spec integer)))
t
if the bit index up from the least significant in integer is a 1.
This is equivalent to (ldb-test (byte index 1) integer)
.
This is similar to ldb
; however, the specified byte of fixnum is
positioned in the same byte of the returned value. The returned value
is zero outside of that byte. fixnum must be a fixnum.
Example:
(mask-field (byte 6 3) #o4567) => #o560
Returns a number which is the same as integer except in the bits
specified by byte-spec. The low bits of byte, appropriately
many, are placed in those bits. byte is interpreted as being
right-justified, as if it were the result of ldb
. integer may
be a fixnum or a bignum. The name means ‘deposit byte’.
Example:
(dpb #o23 (byte 6 3) #o4567) => #o4237
This is like dpb
except that instead of using a byte specifier,
the position and size are passed as separate arguments.
The argument order is not analogous to that of dpb
so that
deposit-byte
can be compatible with Maclisp.
This is like dpb
, except that byte is not taken to
be left-justified; the byte-spec bits of byte are used
for the byte-spec bits of the result, with the rest of the
bits taken from fixnum. fixnum must be a fixnum.
Example:
(deposit-field #o230 (byte 6 3) #o4567) => #o4237
The behavior of the following two functions depends on the size of
fixnums, and so functions using them may not work the same way
on future implementations of Zetalisp. Their names start
with %
because they are more like machine-level subprimitives
than the previous functions.
%logldb
is like ldb
except that it only loads out of fixnums and
allows a byte size of 25, i.e all 25 bits of the fixnum
including the sign bit.
%logdpb
is like dpb
except that it only deposits into fixnums.
Using this to change the sign-bit leaves the result as a fixnum,
while dpb
would produce a bignum result for arithmetic correctness.
%logdpb
is good for manipulating fixnum bit-masks such as are used
in some internal system tables and data-structures.
The functions in this section provide a pseudo-random number generator
facility. The basic function you use is random
, which returns a new
pseudo-random number each time it is called.
Returns a randomly generated number. If number is specified, the random number is of the same type as number (floating if number is floating, etc), nonnegative, and less than number.
If number is omitted, the result is a randomly chosen fixnum, with all fixnums being equally likely.
If random-state is present, it is used and updated in generating
the random number. Otherwise, the default random-state (the value of
*random-state*
) is used (and is created if it doesn’t already
exist). The algorithm is executed inside a without-interrupts
(see without-interrupts-fun) so two processes can use the same
random-state without colliding.
Returns a random float in the interval [low, high). The default random-state is used.
A random-state is a named structure of type random-state
whose
contents control the future actions of the random number generator.
Each time you call the function random
, it uses (and updates) one
random-state. One random-state exists standardly and is used by
default. To have several different controllable, resettable sources of
random numbers, you can create your own random-states. Random-states
print as
#s(random-state ...more data...)
so that they can be read back in.
t
if object is a random-state.
This random-state is used by default when random
is called
and the random-state is not explicitly specified.
Creates and returns a new random-state object.
If random-state is nil
, the new random-state is a copy of *random-state*
.
If random-state is a random-state, the new one is a copy of that one.
If random-state is t
, the new random-state is initialized truly randomly
(based on the value of (time)
).
A random-state actually consists of an array of numbers and two pointers into the array. The pointers circulate around the array; each time a random number is requested, both pointers are advanced by one, wrapping around at the end of the array. Thus, the distance forward from the first pointer to the second pointer stays the same, allowing for wraparound. Let the length of the array be length and the distance between the pointers be offset. To generate a new random number, each pointer is set to its old value plus one, modulo length. Then the two elements of the array addressed by the pointers are added together; the sum is stored back into the array at the location where the second pointer points, and is returned as the random number after being normalized into the right range.
This algorithm produces well-distributed random numbers if length
and offset are chosen carefully, so that the polynomial
x ^
length + x ^
offset + 1 is irreducible over the mod-2 integers. The
system uses 71 and 35.
The contents of the array of numbers should be initialized to anything moderately random, to make the algorithm work. The contents get initialized by a simple random number generator, based on a number called the seed. The initial value of the seed is set when the random-state is created, and it can be changed.
nil
) ¶Creates and returns a new random-state according to precise
specifications. length is the length of the array. offset is
the distance between the pointers and should be an integer less than
length. seed is the initial value of the seed, and should be a
fixnum. This calls si:random-initialize
on the random state before
returning it.
random-state must be a random-state, such as is created by
si:random-create-array
. If new-seed is provided, it should be a
fixnum, and the seed is set to it. si:random-initialize
reinitializes the
contents of the array from the seed (calling random
changes the
contents of the array and the pointers, but not the seed).
Common Lisp defines some constants whose values give information in a standard way about the ranges of numbers representable in the individual Lisp implementation.
Any integer smaller than this must be a bignum.
Any integer larger than this must be a bignum.
No short float can be greater than this number.
No positive short float can be closer to zero than this number.
No negative short float can be closer to zero than this number.
No short float can be less than this (negative) number.
Similar to the above, but for full-size floats rather than for short floats.
These are defined by Common Lisp to be similar to the above,
but for double-floats and long-floats. On the Lisp Machine,
there are no distinct double and long floating formats; they are
synonyms for single-floats. So these constants exist but their values
are the same as those of most-positive-single-float
and so on.
Smallest positive short float which can be added to 1.0s0 and make a difference.
That is, for any short float x less than this, (+ 1.0s0 x)
equals 1.0s0.
Smallest positive float which can be added to 1.0 and make a difference. The three names are synonyms on the Lisp Machine, for reasons explained above.
Smallest positive short float which can be subtracted from 1.0s0 and make a difference.
Sometimes it is desirable to have a form of arithmetic which has no overflow checking (that would produce bignums), and truncates results to the word size of the machine.
Returns a fixnum which is pointer-1 plus pointer-2, modulo what could be stored in the size of the pointer field (currently 25 bits). Arguments other than fixnums are rarely useful, but no type checks are made.
Returns a fixnum which is pointer-1 minus pointer-2. If the arguments are fixnums, rather than true pointers, this provides subtraction modulo what can be stored in the pointer field.
Returns a fixnum which is pointer-1 times pointer-2. Arguments other than fixnums are rarely useful, but no type checks are made. The two pointer fields are regarded as signed numbers.
Sometimes it is useful to have a form of truncating arithmetic with a strictly specified field width which is independent of the range of fixnums permissible on a particular machine. In Zetalisp, this is provided by the following set of functions. Their answers are correct only modulo 2^24.
These functions should not be used for efficiency; they are probably less efficient than the functions which do check for overflow. They are intended for algorithms which require this sort of arithmetic, such as hash functions and pseudo-random number generation.
Returns the sum of x and y modulo 2^24. Both arguments must be fixnums.
Returns the difference of x and y modulo 2^24. Both arguments must be fixnums.
Returns the product of x and y modulo 2^24. Both arguments must be fixnums.
These peculiar functions are useful in programs that don’t want to use bignums for one reason or another. They should usually be avoided, as they are difficult to use and understand, and they depend on special numbers of bits and on the use of twos-complement notation.
A double-precision number has 50 bits, of which one is the sign bit. It
is represented as two fixnums. The less signficant fixnum conveys 25
signficant bits and is regarded as unsigned (that is, what is normally
the sign bit is treated as an ordinary data bit); the more significant
fixnum has the same sign as the double-precision number. Only
%float-double
handles negative double-precision numbers; for the
other functions, the more signficant fixnum is always positive and
contains only 24 bits of actual data.
Returns bits 25 through 48 (the most significant half) of the product of
num1 and num2, regarded as unsigned integers. If you call this
and %pointer-times
on the same arguments num1 and num2, you
can combine the results into a double-precision product. If num1
and num2 are regarded as two’s-complement fractions, -1
num
< 1, %multiply-fractions
returns 1/2 of their correct
product as a fraction.
[The name of this function isn’t too great.]
Divides the double-precision number given by the first two arguments by the third argument, and returns the single-precision quotient. Causes an error if divisor is zero or if the quotient won’t fit in single precision.
There are only 24 bits in each half of the number, as neither sign bit is used to convey information.
Divides the double-precision number given by the first two arguments by the third argument, and returns the remainder. Causes an error if divisor is zero.
high25 and low25, which must be fixnums, are concatenated
to produce a 50-bit unsigned positive integer. A full-size float containing the
same value is constructed and returned. Note that only the 31 most significant
bits are retained (after removal of leading zeroes.) This function is
mainly for the benefit of read
.
An array is a Lisp object that consists of a group of cells,
each of which may contain an object. The individual cells are
selected by numerical subscripts. The type predicate arrayp
(arrayp-fun) can be used to test whether an object is an array.
The rank of an array (the number of dimensions which the
array has) is the number of subscripts used to refer to one of the
elements of the array. The rank may be any integer from zero to seven,
inclusively. An array of rank zero has a single element which is
addressed using no subscripts. An array of rank one is called a
vector; the predicate vectorp
(see vectorp-fun) tests whether an
object is a vector. A series of functions called the generic sequence
functions accept either a vector or a list as argument indiscriminantly
(see generic-sequence-functions).
A constant giving the upper limit on the rank of an array. It is 8, indicating that 7 is the highest possible rank.
The lowest value for any subscript is zero; the highest value is a property of the array. Each dimension has a size, which is the lowest number which is too great to be used as a subscript. For example, in a one-dimensional array of five elements, the size of the one and only dimension is five, and the acceptable values of the subscript are zero, one, two, three, and four.
Any one dimension of an array must be smaller than this constant.
The total size of an array is the number of elements in it. It is the product of the sizes of the dimensions of the array.
The total number of elements of any array must be smaller than this constant.
A vector can have a fill pointer which is a number saying how many elements of the vector are active. For many purposes, only that many elements (starting with element zero) are used.
The most basic primitive functions for handling arrays are:
make-array
, which is used for the creation of arrays, aref
,
which is used for examining the
contents of arrays, and aset
, which
is used for storing into arrays.
An array is a regular Lisp object, and it is common for an array to be the binding of a symbol, or the car or cdr of a cons, or, in fact, an element of an array. There are many functions, described in this chapter, which take arrays as arguments and perform useful operations on them.
Another way of handling arrays, inherited from Maclisp, is to treat them
as functions. In this case each array has a name, which is a symbol
whose function definition is the array. Zetalisp supports this
style by allowing an array to be applied to arguments, as if it were
a function. The arguments are treated as subscripts and the array is
referenced appropriately. The store
special form (see store-fun)
is also supported. This kind of array referencing is considered to be
obsolete and is slower than the usual kind. It should not be used in
new programs.
There are several types of arrays, which differ primarily in
which kinds of elements they are allowed to hold. Some types of arrays
can hold Lisp objects of any type; such arrays are called general
arrays. The other types of array restrict the possible elements to a
certain type, usually a numeric type. Arrays of these types are called
specialized arrays, or numeric arrays if the elements must be
numbers. For example, one array type permits only complex numbers with
floating components to be stored in the array. Another permits only the
numbers zero and one; Common Lisp calls these bit arrays. The
contents of a black-and-white screen are stored in a bit array. Several
predicates exist for finding out which of these classifications an array
belongs to: simple-vector-p
(simple-vector-p-fun),
bit-vector-p
, simple-bit-vector-p
, stringp
(stringp-fun),
and simple-string-p
.
The array types are known by a set of symbols whose names
begin with art-
(for ‘ARray Type’).
The most commonly used type is called art-q
. An art-q
array simply holds Lisp objects of any type.
Similar to the art-q
type is the art-q-list
. Like the
art-q
, its elements may be any Lisp object. The difference is that
the art-q-list
array doubles as a list; the function g-l-p
takes an art-q-list
array and returns a list whose elements are
those of the array, and whose actual substance is that of the array. If
you rplaca
elements of the list, the corresponding element of the
array is changed, and if you store into the array, the corresponding
element of the list changes the same way. An attempt to rplacd
the list causes a sys:rplacd-wrong-representation-type
error,
since arrays cannot implement that operation.
The most important type of specialized array is the string, which is
a vector of character objects. Character strings are implemented by the
art-string
array type. Many important system functions, including
read
, print
, and eval
, treat art-string
arrays very
differently from the other kinds of arrays. There are also many
functions specifically for operating on strings, described in chapter
string-chapter.
As viewed by Common Lisp programs, the elements of a string are character objects. As viewed by traditional programs, the elements are integers in the range 0 to 255. While most code still accesses strings in the traditional manner and gets integers out, the Common Lisp viewpoint is considered the correct one. See string-element-type for a discussion of this conflict of conventions and its effect on programs.
An art-fat-string
array is a character string with wider
characters, containing 16 bits rather than 8 bits. The extra bits are
ignored by many string operations, such as comparison, on these strings;
typically they are used to hold font information.
There is a set of types called art-1b, art-2b, art-4b, art-8b
,
and art-16b
;
these names are short for ‘1 bit’, ‘2 bits’, and so on. Each element
of an art-nb
array is a non-negative fixnum, and only the
least significant n bits are remembered in the array; all of the others are discarded. Thus art-1b
arrays store only 0 and 1, and
if you store a 5 into an art-2b
array and look at it
later, you will find a 1 rather than a 5.
These arrays are used when it is known beforehand that the
fixnums which will be stored are non-negative and limited in size to a
certain number of bits. Their advantage over the art-q
array is
that they occupy less storage, because more than one element of the
array is kept in a single machine word. (For example, 32 elements
of an art-1b
array or 2 elements of an art-16b
array
fit into one word).
There are also art-32b
arrays which have 32 bits per element.
Since fixnums only have 24 bits anyway, these are the same as art-q
arrays except that they only hold fixnums. They are not compatible
with the other “bit” array types and generally should not be used.
An art-half-fix
array contains half-size fixnums. Each element
of the array is a signed 16-bit integer; the range is from -32768 to 32767
inclusive.
The art-float
array type is a special-purpose type whose
elements are floats. When storing into such an array the value (any
kind of number) is converted to a float, using the float
function (see float-fun). The advantage of
storing floats in an art-float
array rather than an art-q
array is that the numbers in an art-float
array are not true Lisp
objects. Instead the array remembers the numerical value, and when it
is aref
’ed creates a Lisp object (a float) to hold the value.
Because the system does special storage management for bignums and
floats that are intermediate results, the use of art-float
arrays
can save a lot of work for the garbage collector and hence greatly
increase performance. An intermediate result is a Lisp object passed
as an argument, stored in a local variable, or returned as the value of
a function, but not stored into a special variable, a non-art-float
array, or list structure. art-float
arrays also provide a locality
of reference advantage over art-q
arrays containing floats, since
the floats are contained in the array rather than being separate objects
probably on different pages of memory.
The art-fps-float
array type is another special-purpose type
whose elements are floats. The internal format of this array is compatible
with the PDP-11/VAX single-precision floating-point format. The primary purpose
of this array type is to interface with the FPS array processor, which can
transfer data directly in and out of such an array.
Any type of number may be stored into an art-fps-float
array, but it is, in effect, converted to a float, and then rounded
off to the 24-bit precision of the PDP-11. If the magnitude of the
number is too large, the largest valid floating-point number is
stored. If the magnitude is too small, zero is stored.
When an element of an art-fps-float
array is read, a new
float is created containing the value, just as with an art-float
array.
The art-complex
array type is a special purpose type whose
elements are arbitrary numbers, which may be complex numbers. (Most of
the numeric array types can only hold real numbers.) As compared with
an ordinary art-q
array, art-complex
provides an advantage in
garbage collection similar to what art-float
provides for floating
point numbers.
The art-complex-float
array type is a special purpose type whose
elements are numbers (real or complex) whose real and imaginary parts
are both floating point numbers. (If you store a non-floating-point
number into the array, its real and imaginary parts are converted to
floating point.) This provides maximum advantage in garbage collection
if all the elements you wish to store in the array are numbers with
floating point real and imaginary parts.
The art-complex-fps-float
array type is similar to
art-complex-float
but each real or imaginary part is stored in the
form used by the FPS array processor. Each element occupies two words,
the first being the real part and the second being the imaginary part.
There are three types of arrays which exist only for the
implementation of stack groups; these types are called
art-stack-group-head, art-special-pdl
, and art-reg-pdl
. Their elements
may be any Lisp object; their use is explained in the section on
stack groups (see stack-group).
The value of array-types
is a list of all of the array type symbols
such as art-q
, art-4b
, art-string
and so on. The values
of these symbols are internal array type code numbers for the corresponding
type.
Given an internal numeric array-type code, returns the symbolic name of that type.
array-elements-per-q
is an association list (see alist) which
associates each array type symbol with the number of array elements
stored in one word, for an array of that type. If the value is negative,
it is instead the number of words per array element, for arrays whose
elements are more than one word long.
Given the internal array-type code number, returns the number of array elements stored in one word, for an array of that type. If the value is negative, it is instead the number of words per array element, for arrays whose elements are more than one word long.
The value of array-bits-per-element
is an association list (see alist)
which associates each array type symbol with the number of
bits of unsigned number it can hold, or nil
if it can
hold Lisp objects. This can be used to tell whether an array
can hold Lisp objects or not.
Given the internal array-type code numbers, returns the number of bits
per cell for unsigned numeric arrays, or nil
for a type of array
that can contain Lisp objects.
Given an array, returns the number of bits that fit in an element of that array. For arrays that can hold general Lisp objects, the result is 25, based on the assumption that you will be storing fixnums in the array.
Any array may have an array leader. An array leader is
like a one-dimensional art-q
array which is attached to the main
array. So an array which has a leader acts like two arrays joined
together. The leader can be stored into and examined by a special set
of functions, different from those used for the main array:
array-leader
and store-array-leader
. The leader is always
one-dimensional, and always can hold any kind of Lisp object,
regardless of the type or rank of the main part of the array.
Very often the main part of an array is used as a homogeneous set of objects,
while the leader is used to remember a few associated non-homogeneous pieces of data.
In this case the leader is not used like an array; each slot is used
differently from the others. Explicit numeric subscripts should not be
used for the leader elements of such an array; instead the leader should be described
by a defstruct
(see defstruct-fun).
By convention, element 0 of the array leader of an array is used
to hold the number of elements in the array that are “active”. When the
zeroth element is used this way, it is called a fill pointer.
Many array-processing functions recognize the fill pointer.
For instance, if a string (an array of type art-string
) has
seven elements, but its fill pointer contains the value five, then only elements
zero through four of the string are considered to be active; the string’s
printed representation is five characters long, string-searching
functions stop after the fifth element, etc. Fill pointers are
a Common Lisp standard, but the array leader which is the Lisp Machine’s
way of implementing them is not standard.
Returns the fill pointer of array, or nil
if it does
not have one. This function can be used with setf
to set the
array’s fill pointer.
The system does not provide a way to turn off the fill-pointer convention; any array that has a leader must reserve element 0 for the fill pointer or avoid using many of the array functions.
Leader element 1 is used in conjunction with the “named structure” feature to associate a user-defined data type with the array; see named-structure. Element 1 is treated specially only if the array is flagged as a named structure.
The following explanation of displaced arrays is probably not of interest to a beginner; the section may be passed over without losing the continuity of the manual.
Normally, an array is represented as a small amount of header information, followed by the contents of the array. However, sometimes it is desirable to have the header information removed from the actual contents. One such occasion is when the contents of the array must be located in a special part of the Lisp Machine’s address space, such as the area used for the control of input/output devices, or the bitmap memory which generates the TV image. Displaced arrays are also used to reference certain special system tables, which are at fixed addresses so the microcode can access them easily.
If you give make-array
a fixnum or a locative
as the value of the :displaced-to
option,
it creates a displaced array referring to that location of virtual memory
and its successors.
References to elements of the displaced array will access that part
of storage, and return the contents; the regular aref
and
aset
functions are used. If the array is one whose elements
are Lisp objects, caution should be used: if the region of address
space does not contain typed Lisp objects, the integrity of the storage
system and the garbage collector could be damaged. If the array is one
whose elements are bytes (such as an art-4b
type), then there
is no problem. It is important to know, in this case, that the elements
of such arrays are allocated from the right to the left within the 32-bit
words.
It is also possible to have an array whose contents, instead
of being located at a fixed place in virtual memory, are defined
to be those of another array. Such an array is called an indirect array,
and is created by giving make-array
an array as
the value of the :displaced-to
option.
The effects of this are simple if both arrays have the same type; the two
arrays share all elements. An object stored in a certain element
of one can be retrieved from the corresponding element of the other.
This, by itself, is not very useful. However, if the arrays have
different rank, the manner of accessing the elements differs.
Thus, creating a one-dimensional array of nine elements,
indirected to a second, two-dimensional array of three elements by three,
allows access to the elements in either a one-dimensional or
a two-dimensional manner. Weird effects can be produced if
the new array is of a different type than the old array; this is not
generally recommended. Indirecting an art-mb
array to
an art-nb
array does the obvious thing. For instance,
if m is 4 and n is 1, each element of the first array
contains four bits from the second array, in right-to-left order.
It is also possible to create an indirect array in such a way
that when an attempt is made to reference it or store into it, a
constant number is added to the subscript given. This number is called
the index-offset. It is specified at the time the indirect array
is created, by giving a fixnum to make-array
as the value of the :displaced-index-offset
option.
The length of the indirect array need not be the full length of
the array it indirects to; it can be smaller. Thus the indirect array can
cover just a subrange of the original array.
The nsubstring
function (see nsubstring-fun) creates such
arrays. When using index offsets with multi-dimensional arrays, there
is only one index offset; it is added in to the linearized subscript
which is the result of multiplying each subscript by an appropriate
coefficient and adding them together.
Constructs and returns a vector (one-dimensional array) whose elements are the arguments given.
This is the primitive function for making arrays. dimensions should be a list of fixnums which are the dimensions of the array; the length of the list is the rank of the array. For convenience you can specify a single fixnum rather than a list of one fixnum, when making a one-dimensional array.
options are alternating keywords and values. The keywords may be any of the following:
:area
The value specifies in which area (see area) the array should be created.
It should be either an area number (a fixnum), or nil
to mean the
default area.
:type
The value should be a symbolic name of an array type; the most
common of these is art-q
, which is the default. The elements of the array are
initialized according to the type: if the array is of a type whose
elements may only be fixnums or floats, then every element of the array is
initially 0 or 0.0; otherwise, every element is initially
nil
. See the description of array types on array-type.
The value of the option may also be the value of a symbol which is an array type name
(that is, an internal numeric array type code).
:element-type
element-type is the Common Lisp way to control the type of array made.
Its value is a Common Lisp type specifier (see type-specifiers).
The array type used is the most specialized which can allow as an element
anything which fits the type specifier. For example,
if element-type is (mod 4)
, you get an art-2b
array.
If element-type is (mod 3)
, you still get an art-2b
array,
that being the most restrictive which can store the numbers 0, 1 and 2.
If element-type
is string-char
, you get a string.
:initial-value
:initial-element make-array
Specifies the value to be stored in each element of the new
array. If it is not specified, it is nil
for arrays that can
hold arbitrary objects, or 0 or 0.0 for numeric arrays.
:initial-value
is obsolete.
:initial-contents
Specifies the entire contents for the new array, as a sequence of
sequences of sequences... Array element 1 3 4 of a three-dimensional
array would be (elt (elt (elt initial-contents 1) 3) 4)
. Recall
that a sequence is either a list or a vector, and vectors include
strings.
:displaced-to
If this is not nil
, a displaced array is constructed.
If the value is a fixnum or a locative, make-array
creates a
regular displaced array which refers to the specified section of virtual
address space.
If the value is an array, make-array
creates
an indirect array (see indirect-array).
:leader-length
The value should be a fixnum. The array is made with a leader
containing that many elements. The elements of the leader are
initialized to nil
unless the :leader-list
option is given (see
below).
:leader-list
The value should be a list. Call the number of elements in the list n.
The first n elements of the leader are initialized from successive
elements of this list. If the :leader-length
option is not specified,
then the length of the leader is n. If the :leader-length
option is given, and its value is greater than n, then the nth
and following leader elements are initialized to nil
. If its value
is less than n, an error is signaled. The leader elements are
filled in forward order; that is, the car of the list is stored
in leader element 0, the cadr in element 1, and so on.
:fill-pointer
The value should be a fixnum. The array is made with a leader containing at least one element, and this fixnum is used to initialize that first element.
Using the :fill-pointer
option is equivalent to using
:leader-list
with a list one element long. It avoids consing the list,
and is also compatible with Common Lisp.
:displaced-index-offset
If this is present, the value of the :displaced-to
option should be an
array, and the value should be a non-negative fixnum; it is made to be the
index-offset of the created indirect array. (See index-offset.)
:named-structure-symbol
If this is not nil
, it is a symbol to
be stored in the named-structure cell of the array. The array
made is tagged as a named structure (see named-structure.) If
the array has a leader, then this symbol is stored in leader element
1 regardless of the value of the :leader-list
option. If the array
does not have a leader, then this symbol is stored in array element zero.
Array leader slot 1, or array element 0, cannot be used for anything
else in a named structure.
:adjustable-p
In strict Common Lisp, a non-nil
value for this keyword makes the
array adjustable, which means that it is permissible to change the
array’s size with adjust-array
(adjust-array-fun). This is
because other Lisp systems have multiple representations for arrays, one
which is simple and fast to access, and another which can be adjusted.
The Lisp Machine does not require two representations: any array’s size
may be changed, and this keyword is ignored.
Examples:
;; Create a one-dimensional array of five elements.
(make-array 5)
;; Create a two-dimensional array,
;; three by four, with four-bit elements.
(make-array '(3 4) :type 'art-4b)
;; Create an array with a three-element leader.
(make-array 5 :leader-length 3)
;; Create an array containing 5 t
’s,
;; and a fill pointer saying the array is full.
(make-array 5 :initial-value t :fill-pointer 5)
;; Create a named-structure with five leader
;; elements, initializing some of them.
(setq b (make-array 20 :leader-length 5
:leader-list '(0 nil foo)
:named-structure-symbol 'bar))
(array-leader b 0) => 0
(array-leader b 1) => bar
(array-leader b 2) => foo
(array-leader b 3) => nil
(array-leader b 4) => nil
make-array
returns the newly-created array, and also
returns, as a second value, the number of words allocated in the process
of creating the array, i.e the %structure-total-size
of the array.
When make-array
was originally implemented, it took its arguments
in the following fixed pattern:
(make-array area type dimensions &optional displaced-to leader displaced-index-offset named-structure-symbol)
leader was a combination of the :leader-length
and :leader-list
options, and the list was in reverse order.
This obsolete form is still supported so that old programs will continue
to work, but the new keyword-argument form is preferred.
Returns the element of array selected by the subscripts. The subscripts must be fixnums and their number must match the rank of array.
The Common Lisp version of aref
differs from the traditional one in
that it returns a character object rather than an integer when array
is a string. See chapter string-chapter for a discussion of the data
type of string elements.
Stores x into the element of array selected by the subscripts. The subscripts must be fixnums and their number must match the rank of array. The returned value is x.
aset
is equivalent to
(setf (aref array subscripts...) x)
Returns a locative pointer to the element-cell of array selected by the subscripts. The subscripts must be fixnums and their number must match the rank of array. The array must not be a numeric array, since locatives to the middle of a numeric array are not allowed. See the explanation of locatives in locative.
It is equivalent, and preferable, to write
(locf (aref array subscripts...))
These functions access an array with a single subscript regardless of
how many dimensions the array has. They may be useful for manipulating
arrays of varying rank, as an alternative to maintaining and updating
lists of subscripts or to creating one-dimensional indirect arrays.
ar-1-force
refers to an element,
as-1-force
sets an element, and ap-1-force
returns a locative
to the element’s cell.
In using these functions, you must pay attention to the order in which the array elements are actually stored. See array-element-order-section.
Calculates the cumulative index in array of the element at indices indices.
(ar-1-force array (array-row-major-index array indices...))
is equivalent to (aref array indices...)
.
array should be an array with a leader, and i should be a
fixnum. This returns the ith element of array’s leader.
This is analogous to aref
.
array should be an array with a leader, and i should be a
fixnum. x may be any object. x is stored in the ith element
of array’s leader. store-array-leader
returns x.
This is analogous to aset
.
It is equivalent, and preferable, to write
(setf (array-leader array i) x)
Is equivalent to
(locf (array-leader array i))
The following array accessing functions generally need not be used by users.
These are obsolete versions of aref
, aset
and aloc
that
only work for one-, two-, or three-dimensional arrays, respectively.
The compiler turns aref
into ar-1
, ar-2
, etc according to
the number of subscripts specified, turns aset
into as-1
,
as-2
, etc., and turns aloc
into ap-1
, ap-2
, etc. For
arrays with more than three dimensions the compiler uses the slightly
less efficient form since the special routines only exist for one, two
and three dimensions. There is no reason for any program to call
ar-1
, as-1
, ar-2
, etc explicitly; they are documented
because there used to be such a reason, and many old programs use these
functions. New programs should use aref
, aset
, and aloc
.
A related function, provided only for Maclisp compatibility, is
arraycall
(arraycall-fun).
A special accessing function defined by Common Lisp to work only on
simple general vectors: vectors with no fill pointer, not displaced, and
not adjustable (see adjustable-array). Some other Lisp systems open
code svref
so that it is faster than aref
, but on the Lisp
Machine svref
is a synonym for cli:aref
.
Special accessing functions defined to work only on bit vectors, only on
simple bit vectors, only on strings, and only on simple strings, respectively.
On the Lisp Machine they are all synonyms for cli:aref
.
Here are the conditions signaled for various errors in accessing arrays.
sys:array-has-no-leader
: (sys:bad-array-mixin
error
) ¶This is signaled on a reference to the leader of an array that doesn’t
have one. The condition instance supports the :array
operation,
which returns the array that was used.
The :new-array
proceed-type is provided.
: sys:bad-array-mixin ¶This mixin is used in the conditions signaled by several kinds of
problems pertaining to arrays. It defines prompting for the
:new-array
proceed type.
sys:array-wrong-number-of-dimensions
: (sys:bad-array-mixin
error
) ¶This is signaled when an array is referenced (either reading or writing)
with the wrong number of subscripts; for example, (aref "foo" 1 2)
.
The :array
operation on the condition instance returns the array
that was used. The :subscripts-used
operation returns the
list of subscripts used.
The :new-array
proceed type is provided. It expects one argument,
an array to use instead of the original one.
sys:subscript-out-of-bounds
: (error
) ¶This is signaled when there are the right number of subscripts but their
values specify an element that falls outside the bounds of the array.
The same condition is used by sys:%instance-ref
, etc., when the
index is out of bounds in the instance.
The condition instance supports the operations :object
and
:subscripts-used
, which return the array or instance and the list of
subscripts.
The :new-subscript
proceed type is provided. It takes an
appropriate number of subscripts as arguments. You should provide as
many subscripts as there originally were.
sys:number-array-not-allowed
: (sys:bad-array-mixin
error
) ¶This is signaled by an attempt to use aloc
on a numeric array
such as an art-1b
array or a string.
The :array
operation and the :new-array
proceed type are available.
Returns the symbolic type of array.
Example:
(setq a (make-array '(3 5))) (array-type a) => art-q
Returns a type specifier which describes what elements could be stored in
array (see type-specifiers for more about type specifiers). Thus, if
array is a string, the value is string-char
. If array is an
art-1b
array, the value is bit
. If array is an art-2b
array, the value is (mod 4)
. If array is an art-q
array,
the value is t
(the type which all objects belong to).
array may be any array. This returns the total number
of elements in array. For a one-dimensional array,
this is one greater than the maximum allowable subscript.
(But if fill pointers are being used, you may want to use
array-active-length
.)
Example:
(array-length (make-array 3)) => 3 (array-length (make-array '(3 5))) => 15
array-total-size
is the Common Lisp name of this function.
If array does not have a fill pointer, then this returns whatever
(array-length array)
would have. If array does have a
fill pointer, array-active-length
returns it. See the general
explanation of the use of fill pointers on fill-pointer.
Returns the number of dimensions of array.
Example:
(array-rank (make-array '(3 5))) => 2
Returns the length of dimension n of array. Examples:
(setq a (make-array '(2 3))) (array-dimension a 0) => 2 (array-dimension a 1) => 3
array may be any kind of array, and n should be a fixnum.
If n is between 1 and the rank of array,
this returns the nth dimension of array. If n is 0,
this returns the length of the leader of array; if array has no
leader it returns nil
. If n is any other value, this
returns nil
.
This function is obsolete; use array-dimension-n
,
whose calling sequence is cleaner.
Examples:
(setq a (make-array '(3 5) :leader-length 7)) (array-dimension-n 1 a) => 3 (array-dimension-n 2 a) => 5 (array-dimension-n 3 a) => nil (array-dimension-n 0 a) => 7
Returns a list whose elements are the dimensions of array.
Example:
(setq a (make-array '(3 5))) (array-dimensions a) => (3 5)
Note: the list returned by (array-dimensions x)
is
equal to the cdr of the list returned by (arraydims x)
.
Returns a list whose first element is the symbolic name of the type of array, and whose remaining elements are its dimensions. array may be any array; it also may be a symbol whose function cell contains an array, for Maclisp compatibility (see maclisp-array).
Example:
(setq a (make-array '(3 5))) (arraydims a) => (art-q 3 5)
arraydims
is for Maclisp compatibility only.
t
if subscripts is a legal
set of subscripts for array, otherwise nil
.
t
if array is any kind of displaced array
(including an indirect array), otherwise nil
.
array may be any kind of array.
t
if array is an indirect array, otherwise nil
.
array may be any kind of array.
t
if array is an indirect array with an index-offset,
otherwise nil
.
array may be any kind of array.
Returns the index offset of array if it is an indirect
array which has an index offset. Otherwise it returns nil
.
array may be any kind of array.
t
if array has a fill pointer. It must have a leader and leader
element 0 must be an integer. While array leaders are not standard
Common Lisp, fill pointers are, and so is this function.
t
if array has a leader, otherwise nil
.
Returns the length of array’s leader if it has one, or nil
if it
does not.
According to Common Lisp, returns t
if array’s size may be
adjusted with adjust-array
(see below). On the Lisp Machine,
this function always returns t
.
Modifies various aspects of an array. array is modified in place if that is possible;
otherwise, a new array is created and array is forwarded to it. In either case,
array is returned. The arguments have the same names as arguments
to make-array
, and signify approximately the same thing. However:
element-type is just an error check. adjust-array
cannot change
the array type. If the array type of array is not what
element-type would imply, you get an error.
If displaced-to is specified, the new array is displaced as specified by displaced-to and displaced-index-offset. If array itself was already displaced, it is modified in place provided that either array used to have an index offset and is supposed to continue to have one, or array had no index offset and is not supposed to have one.
Otherwise, if initial-contents was specified, it is used to set all the contents of the array. The old contents of array are irrelevant.
Otherwise, each element of array is copied forward into the new array
to the slot with the same indices, if there is one. Any new slots whose
indices were out of range in array are initialized to
initial-element, or to nil
or 0 if initial-element was not
specified.
fill-pointer, if specified, is used to set the fill pointer of the array. Aside from this, the result has a leader with the same contents as the original array.
adjust-array
is the only function in this section which is standard
Common Lisp. According to Common Lisp, an array’s dimensions can be
adjusted only if the :adjustable
option was specified to
make-array
with a non-nil
value when the array was created
(see adjustable-array). The Lisp Machine does not distinguish
adjustable and nonadjustable arrays; any array may be adjusted.
If array is a one-dimensional array, its size is
changed to be new-size. If array has more than one
dimension, its size (array-length
) is changed to new-size
by changing only the last dimension.
If array is made smaller, the extra elements are lost; if array
is made bigger, the new elements are initialized in the same fashion as
make-array
(see make-array-fun) would initialize them: either to nil
or 0,
depending on the type of array.
Example:
(setq a (make-array 5))
(aset 'foo a 4)
(aref a 4) => foo
(adjust-array-size a 2)
(aref a 4) => an error occurs
If the size of the array is being increased,
adjust-array-size
may have to allocate a new array somewhere. In
that case, it alters array so that references to it will be made to
the new array instead, by means of invisible pointers (see
structure-forward
, structure-forward-fun).
adjust-array-size
returns the new array if it creates one, and
otherwise it returns array. Be careful to be consistent about
using the returned result of adjust-array-size
, because you may end
up holding two arrays which are not the same (i.e not eq
), but
which share the same contents.
Equivalent to (adjust-array array dimensions)
.
This name is obsolete.
Changes an indirect array array’s type, size, or target pointed at. type specifies the new array type, dimlist its new dimensions, displaced-p the target it should point to (an array, locative or fixnum), and index-offset the new offset in the new target.
array is returned.
These functions manipulate art-q-list
arrays, which were
introduced on art-q-list-var.
array should be an art-q-list
array. This returns
a list which shares the storage of array.
Example:
(setq a (make-array 4 :type 'art-q-list)) (aref a 0) => nil (setq b (g-l-p a)) => (nil nil nil nil) (rplaca b t) b => (t nil nil nil) (aref a 0) => t (aset 30 a 2) b => (t nil 30 nil)
g-l-p
stands for ‘get list pointer’.
The following two functions work strangely, in the same way that store
does, and should not be used in new programs.
The argument array-ref is ignored, but should be a reference
to an art-q-list
array by applying the array to subscripts (rather
than by aref
). This returns a list object which
is a portion of the “list” of the array, beginning with the last
element of the last array which has been called as a function.
get-locative-pointer-into-array
is
similar to get-list-pointer-into-array
, except that it returns a
locative, and doesn’t require the array to be art-q-list
.
Use locf
of aref
in new programs.
array must be a one-dimensional array which has a fill pointer and x may
be any object. vector-push
attempts to store x in the element
of the array designated by the fill pointer, and increase the fill pointer
by one. If the fill pointer does not designate an element of the array (specifically,
when it gets too big), it is unaffected and vector-push
returns nil
;
otherwise, the two actions (storing and incrementing) happen uninterruptibly,
and vector-push
returns the former value of the fill pointer,
i.e the array index in which it stored x. If the array is of type
art-q-list
, an operation similar to nconc
has taken place,
in that the element has been added to the list by changing the cdr of
the formerly last element. The cdr-coding is updated to ensure this.
array-push
is an old name for this function. vector-push
is
preferable because it takes arguments in an order like push
.
vector-push-extend
is just like vector-push
except
that if the fill pointer gets too large, the array grows
to fit the new element; it never “fails” the way vector-push
does,
and so never returns nil
. extension is the number of
elements to be added to the array if it needs to grow. It defaults
to something reasonable, based on the size of the array.
array-push-extend
differs only in the order of arguments,
array must be a one-dimensional array which has a fill pointer.
The fill pointer is decreased by one and the array element
designated by the new value of the fill pointer is returned.
If the new value does not designate any element of the array
(specifically, if it had already reached zero), an error is caused.
The two operations (decrementing and array referencing) happen
uninterruptibly. If the array is of type art-q-list
, an operation
similar to nbutlast
has taken place. The cdr-coding is
updated to ensure this.
The two names are synonymous.
sys:fill-pointer-not-fixnum
: (sys:bad-array-mixin
error
) ¶This is signaled when one of the functions in this section is used with an array whose leader element zero is not a fixnum. Most other array accessing operations simply assume that the array has no fill pointer in such a case, but these cannot be performed without a fill pointer.
The :array
operation on the condition instance returns the array
that was used. The :new-array
proceed type is supported, with one
argument, an array.
The new functions replace
(replace-fun)
and fill
(fill-fun) are useful ways to
copy parts of arrays.
Stores value into all or part of array. start and end are optional indices which delimit the part of array to be initialized. They default to the beginning and end of the array.
This function is by far the fastest way to do the job.
array may be any type of array, or, for Maclisp
compatibility, a symbol whose function cell contains an array. It can
also be nil
, in which case an array of type art-q
is created.
There are two forms of this function, depending on the type of x.
If x is a list, then fillarray
fills up array with
the elements of list. If x is too short to fill up all of
array, then the last element of x is used to fill the
remaining elements of array. If x is too long, the extra
elements are ignored. If x is nil
(the empty list), array
is filled with the default initial value for its array type (nil
or 0).
If x is an array (or, for Maclisp compatibility, a symbol
whose function cell contains an array), then the elements of array are
filled up from the elements of x. If x is too small, then
the extra elements of array are not affected.
If array is multi-dimensional, the elements are accessed
in row-major order: the last subscript varies the most quickly.
The same is true of x if it is an array.
fillarray
returns array; or, if array was
nil
, the newly created array.
array may be any type of array, or, for Maclisp
compatibility, a symbol whose function cell contains an array.
listarray
creates and returns a list whose elements are those of
array. If limit is present, it should be a fixnum, and only
the first limit (if there are more than that many) elements of
array are used, and so the maximum length of the returned list is
limit.
If array is multi-dimensional, the elements are accessed
in row-major order: the last subscript varies the most quickly.
array may be any type of array, or, for Maclisp
compatibility, a symbol whose function cell contains an array.
list-array-leader
creates and returns a list whose elements are those of
array’s leader. If limit is present, it should be a fixnum, and only
the first limit (if there are more than that many) elements of
array’s leader are used, and so the maximum length of the returned list is
limit. If array has no leader, nil
is returned.
from and to must be arrays. The contents of from
is copied into the contents of to, element by element.
If to is shorter than from,
the rest of from is ignored. If from is shorter than
to, the rest of to is filled with nil
, 0 or 0.0
according to the type of array.
This function always returns t
.
The entire length of from or to is used, ignoring the fill pointers if any. The leader itself is not copied.
copy-array-contents
works on multi-dimensional arrays. from and
to are linearized subscripts, and elements are taken in row-major
order.
Like copy-array-contents
, but also copies the leader of from
(if any) into to.
The portion of the array from-array with indices greater than or
equal to from-start and less than from-end is copied into
the portion of the array to-array with indices greater than or
equal to to-start and less than to-end, element by element.
If there are more elements in the selected portion of to-array
than in the selected portion of from-array, the extra elements
are filled with the default value as by copy-array-contents
.
If there are more elements in the selected portion of from-array,
the extra ones are ignored. Multi-dimensional arrays are treated
the same way as copy-array-contents
treats them.
This function always returns t
.
%blt
and %blt-typed
(%blt-fun) are often useful for copying
parts of arrays. They can be used to shift a part of an array either up
or down.
These functions perform bitwise boolean operations on the elements of arrays.
Perform boolean operations element by element on bit arrays. The
arguments must match in their size and shape, and all of their elements
must be integers. Corresponding elements of bit-array-1 and
bit-array-2 are taken and passed to one of logand
, logior
,
etc to get an element of the result array.
If the third argument is non-nil
, the result bits are stored into it,
modifying it destructively. If it is t
, the results are stored in
bit-array-1. Otherwise a new array of the same type as
bit-array-1 is created and used for the result. In any case, the
value returned is the array where the results are stored.
These functions were introduced for the sake of Common Lisp, which
defines them only when all arguments are specialized arrays that hold
only zero or one. In the Lisp machine, they accept not only such arrays
(art-1b
arrays) but any arrays whose elements are integers.
Performs lognot
on each element of bit-array to get an element of
the result. If result-bit-array is non-nil
, the result elements
are stored in that; it must match bit-array in size and shape.
Otherwise, a new array of the same type as bit-array is created and
used to hold the result. The value of bit-not
is the array where the
results are stored.
from-array and to-array must be two-dimensional arrays
of bits or bytes (art-1b
, art-2b
, art-4b
, art-8b
,
art-16b
, or art-32b
). bitblt
copies a rectangular portion of from-array
into a rectangular portion of to-array. The value stored
can be a Boolean function of the new value and the value already there,
under the control of alu (see below). This function is most commonly used
in connection with raster images for TV displays.
The top-left corner of the source rectangle is (ar-2-reverse
from-array from-x from-y)
. The top-left corner of the
destination rectangle is (ar-2-reverse to-array to-x
to-y)
. width and height are the dimensions of both
rectangles. If width or height is zero, bitblt
does
nothing. The x coordinates and width are used as the second
dimension of the array, since the horizontal index is the one which
varies fastest in the screen buffer memory and the array’s last index
varies fastest in row-major order.
from-array and to-array are allowed to be the same array.
bitblt
normally traverses the arrays in increasing order of x
and y subscripts. If width is negative, then (abs width)
is used as the width, but the processing of the x direction is done
backwards, starting with the highest value of x and working down.
If height is negative it is treated analogously. When
bitblt
’ing an array to itself, when the two rectangles overlap, it
may be necessary to work backwards to achieve effects such
as shifting the entire array downwards by a certain number of rows. Note
that negativity of width or height does not affect the
(x, y) coordinates specified by the arguments, which are still the
top-left corner even if bitblt
starts at some other corner.
If the two arrays are of different types, bitblt
works bit-wise
and not element-wise. That is, if you bitblt
from an art-2b
array into an art-4b
array, then two elements of the from-array
correspond to one element of the to-array.
If bitblt
goes outside the bounds of the source array, it wraps
around. This allows such operations as the replication of a small
stipple pattern through a large array. If bitblt
goes outside
the bounds of the destination array, it signals an error.
If src is an element of the source rectangle, and dst
is the corresponding element of the destination rectangle, then
bitblt
changes the value of dst to
(boole alu src dst)
. See the boole
function (boole-fun). There are symbolic names for some of the
most useful alu functions; they are tv:alu-seta
(plain
copy), tv:alu-ior
(inclusive or), tv:alu-xor
(exclusive
or), and tv:alu-andca
(and with complement of source).
bitblt
is written in highly-optimized microcode and goes very much
faster than the same thing written with ordinary aref
and aset
operations would. Unfortunately this causes bitblt
to have a couple
of strange restrictions. Wrap-around does not work correctly if
from-array is an indirect array with an index-offset. bitblt
signals an error if the second dimensions of from-array
and to-array are not both integral multiples of the machine word
length. For art-1b
arrays, the second dimension must be a multiple
of 32., for art-2b
arrays it must be a multiple of 16, etc.
Currently, multi-dimensional arrays are stored in row-major order, as in Maclisp., and as specified by Common Lisp. This means that successive memory locations differ in the last subscript. In older versions of the system, arrays were stored in column-major order.
Most user code has no need to know about which order array elements are
stored in. There are three known reasons to care: use of
multidimensional indirect arrays; paging efficiency
(if you want to reference every element in a
multi-dimensional array and move linearly through memory to improve
locality of reference, you must vary the last subscript fastest
in row-major order);
and access to the TV screen or to arrays of pixels copied to or from the
screen with bitblt
. The latter is the most important one.
The bits on the screen are actually stored in rows, which means that the dimension that varies fastest has to be the horizontal position. As a result, if arrays are stored in row-major order, the horizontal position must be the second subscript, but if arrays are stored in column-major order, the horizontal position must be the first subscript. To ease the conversion of code that uses arrays of pixels, several bridging functions are provided:
This is like make-array
except that the dimensions of the array are
width and height, in whichever order is correct. width is
used as the dimension in the subscript that varies fastest in memory,
and height as the other dimension. options are passed along to
make-array
to specify everything but the size of the array.
Returns the extent of array, a two-dimensional array, in the dimension that varies faster through memory. For a screen array, this is always the width.
Returns the extent of array, a two-dimensional array, in the dimension that varies slower through memory. For a screen array, this is always the height.
Returns the element of array at horizontal-index and vertical-index. horizontal-index is used as the subscript in whichever dimension varies faster through memory.
Stores newvalue into the element of array at horizontal-index and vertical-index. horizontal-index is used as the subscript in whichever dimension varies faster through memory.
Code that was written before the change in order of array indices can be
converted by replacing calls to make-array
, array-dimension
,
aref
and aset
with these functions. It can then work either in
old systems or in new ones. In more complicated circumstances, you can
facilitate conversion by writing code which tests this variable.
This is t
in more recent system versions which store arrays in
row-major order (last subscript varies fastest). It is nil
in older
system versions which store arrays in column-major order.
The functions in this section perform some useful matrix operations.
The matrices are represented as two-dimensional Lisp arrays. These
functions are part of the mathematics package rather than the kernel
array system, hence the ‘math:
’ in the names.
Multiplies matrix-1 by matrix-2. If matrix-3 is supplied,
multiply-matrices
stores the results into matrix-3 and returns
matrix-3, which should be of exactly the right dimensions for
containing the result of the multiplication; otherwise it creates an
array to contain the answer and returns that. All matrices must be
either one- or two-dimensional arrays, and the first dimension of
matrix-2 must equal the second dimension of matrix-1.
Computes the inverse of matrix. If into-matrix is supplied,
stores the result into it and returns it; otherwise it creates an array
to hold the result and returns that. matrix must be two-dimensional
and square. The Gauss-Jordan algorithm with partial pivoting is used.
Note: if you want to solve a set of simultaneous equations, you should
not use this function; use math:decompose
and math:solve
(see
below).
Transposes matrix. If into-matrix is supplied, stores the result into it and returns it; otherwise it creates an array to hold the result and returns that. matrix must be a two-dimensional array. into-matrix, if provided, must be two-dimensional and have exactly the right dimensions to hold the transpose of matrix.
Returns the determinant of matrix. matrix must be a two-dimensional square matrix.
The next two functions are used to solve sets of simultaneous linear
equations. math:decompose
takes a matrix holding the coefficients of the
equations and produces the LU decomposition; this decomposition can then
be passed to math:solve
along with a vector of right-hand sides
to get the values of the variables. If you want to solve the same
equations for many different sets of right-hand side values, you only need to call
math:decompose
once. In terms of the argument names used below, these
two functions exist to solve the vector equation A x = b
for x. A is a matrix. b and x are vectors.
Computes the LU decomposition of matrix a. If lu is non-nil
,
stores the result into it and returns it; otherwise it creates an array
to hold the result, and returns that. The lower triangle of lu, with
ones added along the diagonal, is L, and the upper triangle of lu is
U, such that the product of L and U is a. Gaussian elimination with
partial pivoting is used. The lu array is permuted by rows according
to the permutation array ps, which is also produced by this function;
if the argument ps is supplied, the permutation array is stored into it;
otherwise, an array is created to hold it. This function returns two values,
the LU decomposition and the permutation array.
This function takes the LU decomposition and associated permutation
array produced by math:decompose
and solves the set of simultaneous
equations defined by the original matrix a given to math:decompose
and the right-hand sides in the vector b. If x is supplied, the solutions
are stored into it and it is returned; otherwise an array is
created to hold the solutions and that is returned. b must
be a one-dimensional array.
Returns a list of lists containing the values in array, which must be a two-dimensional array. There is one element for each row; each element is a list of the values in that row.
This is the opposite of math:list-2d-array
. list should be a
list of lists, with each element being a list corresponding to a row.
array’s elements are stored from the list. Unlike fillarray
(see fillarray-fun), if list is not long enough,
math:fill-2d-array
“wraps around”, starting over at the beginning.
The lists which are elements of list also work this way.
math:singular-matrix
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶This is signaled when any of the matrix manipulation functions in this
section has trouble because of a singular matrix. (In some functions,
such as math:determinant
, a singular matrix is not a problem.)
The :matrix
operation on the condition instance returns the matrix
which is singular.
A plane is effectively an array whose bounds, in each dimension, are plus-infinity and minus-infinity; all integers are legal as indices. Planes may be of any rank. When you create a plane, you do not need to specify any size, just the rank. You also specify a default value. At that moment, every component of the plane has that value. As you can’t ever change more than a finite number of components, only a finite region of the plane need actually be stored. When you refer to an element for which space has not actually been allocated, you just get the default value.
The regular array accessing functions don’t work on planes.
You can use make-plane
to create a plane,
plane-aref
or plane-ref
to get the value of a component, and
plane-aset
or plane-store
to store into a component.
array-rank
works on planes.
A plane is actually stored as an array with a leader.
The array corresponds to a rectangular, aligned region of the plane,
containing all the components in which a plane-store
has been done
(and, usually, others which have never been altered).
The lowest-coordinate corner of that rectangular region is
given by the plane-origin
in the array leader.
The highest-coordinate corner can be found by adding the plane-origin
to the array-dimensions
of the array.
The plane-default
is the contents of all the
elements of the plane that are not actually stored in the array.
The plane-extension
is the amount to extend a plane by in any direction
when the plane needs to be extended. The default is 32.
If you never use any negative indices, then the plane-origin
remains
all zeroes and you can use regular array functions, such as aref
and aset
,
to access the portion of the plane that is actually stored. This can be
useful to speed up certain algorithms. In this case you can even use the
bitblt
function on a two-dimensional plane of bits or bytes,
provided you don’t change the plane-extension
to a number that is not
a multiple of 32.
Creates and returns a plane. rank is the number of dimensions. The keyword arguments are
The array type symbol (e.g art-1b
) specifying the type of the array
out of which the plane is made.
The default component value as explained above.
The amount by which to extend the plane, as explained above.
nil
or a list of integers whose length is rank. If not nil
,
each element corresponds to one dimension, specifying the width to
allocate the array initially in that dimension.
nil
or a list of integers whose length is rank. If not nil
,
each element corresponds to one dimension, specifying the smallest index
in that dimension for which storage should initially be allocated.
Example:
(make-plane 2 :type 'art-4b :default-value 3)
creates a two-dimensional plane of type art-4b
, with default value 3
.
A list of numbers, giving the lowest coordinate values actually stored.
This is the contents of the infinite number of plane elements that are not actually stored.
The amount to extend the plane by, in any direction, when plane-store
is done
outside of the currently-stored portion.
These two functions return the contents of a specified element of a plane.
They differ only in the way they take their arguments; plane-aref
wants
the subscripts as arguments, while plane-ref
wants a list of subscripts.
These two functions store datum into the specified element of a plane,
extending it if necessary, and return datum.
They differ only in the way they take their arguments; plane-aset
wants
the subscripts as arguments, while plane-store
wants a list of subscripts.
The functions in this section are provided only for Maclisp compatibility and should not be used in new programs.
Fixnum arrays do not exist (however, see Zetalisp’s
small-positive-integer arrays). Float arrays exist but you do not use
them in the same way; no declarations are required or allowed.
Un-garbage-collected arrays do not exist.
Readtables and obarrays are represented as arrays, but Zetalisp does not
use special array types for them. See the descriptions of read
(read-fun) and intern
(intern-fun) for information about
readtables and obarrays (packages). There are no ‘dead” arrays, nor are
Multics “external” arrays provided.
The arraycall
function exists for compatibility
but should not be used (see aref
, aref-fun.)
Subscripts are always checked for validity, regardless of the value
of *rset
and whether the code is compiled or not.
However, in a multi-dimensional array, an error is caused only
if the subscripts would have resulted in a reference to storage
outside of the array. For example, if you have a 2 by 7 array and refer
to an element with subscripts 3 and 1, no error occurs
despite the fact that the reference is invalid;
but if you refer to element 1 by 100, an error occurs.
In other words, subscript errors are caught if and only if
they refer to storage outside the array; some errors are undetected,
but they can only clobber (alter randomly) some other element of the same array,
not something completely unpredictable.
loadarrays
and dumparrays
are not provided. However,
arrays can be put into QFASL files; see fasdump.
The *rearray
function is not provided, since not all
of its functionality is available in Zetalisp.
Its most common uses are implemented by adjust-array-size
.
In Maclisp, arrays are usually kept on the array
property
of symbols, and the symbols are used instead of the arrays. In order
to provide some degree of compatibility for this manner of using
arrays, the array
, *array
, and store
functions are
provided, and when arrays are applied to arguments, the arguments are
treated as subscripts and apply
returns the corresponding element
of the array.
Creates an art-q
type array in default-array-area
with the given dimensions. (That is, dims is given
to make-array
as its first argument.) type is ignored.
If symbol is nil
, the array is returned; otherwise,
the array is put in the function cell of symbol, and symbol
is returned.
Is like array
, except that all of the arguments
are evaluated.
Stores x into the
specified array element. array-ref should be a form which
references an array by calling it as a function (aref
forms are not
acceptable). First x is evaluated, then array-ref is
evaluated, and then the value of x is stored into the array cell
last referenced by a function call, presumably the one in array-ref.
This is just like store
, but it is not
a special form; this is because the arguments are in the other
order. This function only exists for the compiler to compile the
store
special form into, and should never be used by programs.
(arraycall t array sub1 sub2...)
is the same
as (aref array sub1 sub2...)
. It exists for
Maclisp compatibility.
The type specifier sequence
is defined to include lists and vectors
(arrays of rank one).
Lists and vectors are similar in that both can
be regarded as sequences of elements: there is a first element, a second
element, and so on. Element n of a list is (nth n
list)
, and element n of a vector is (aref vector
n)
. Many useful operations which apply in principle to a sequence
of objects can work equally well on lists and vectors. These are the
generic sequence functions.
All the generic sequence functions accept nil
as a sequence of length zero.
Creates a sequence of type type, size elements long.
size must be an integer and type must be either list
or some kind of array type. type could be just array
or vector
to make
a general vector, it could be (vector (byte 8))
to make an art-8b
vector, and so on.
If initial-element is specified, each element of the new sequence
contains initial-element. Otherwise, the new sequence is initialized
to contain nil
if that is possible, zero otherwise (for numeric array types).
(make-sequence 'list 3) => (nil nil nil) (make-sequence 'array 5 :initial-element t) => #(t t t t t) (make-sequence '(vector bit) 5) => #*00000
Returns the element at index index in sequence.
If sequence is a list, this is (nth index sequence)
.
If sequence is a vector, this is (aref index sequence)
.
Being microcoded, elt
is as fast as either nth
or aref
.
(setf (elt sequence index) value)
is the way to set
an element of a sequence.
Returns the length of sequence, as an integer. For a vector with a fill
pointer, this is the fill pointer value. For a list, it is the traditional
Lisp function; note that lists ending with atoms other than nil
are
accepted, so that the length of (a b . c)
is 2.
Returns a new sequence of the same type, length and contents as sequence.
Returns a new sequence, of type result-type, whose contents
are made from the contents of all the sequences.
result-type can be list
or any array type,
just as in make-sequence
above. Examples:
(concatenate 'list '(1 2) '#(A 3)) => (1 2 A 3) (concatenate 'vector '(1 2) '#(A 3) => #(1 2 A 3)
Returns a new sequence whose elements are a subsequence of sequence. The new sequence is of the same type as sequence.
start is the index of the first element of sequence to take.
end is the index of where to stop–the first element not to take.
end can also be nil
, meaning take everything from start up
to the end of sequence.
Examples:
(subseq "Foobar" 3 5) => "ba" (subseq '(a b c) 1) => (b c)
It is also possible to setf
a call to subseq
. This means
to store into part of the sequence passed to subseq
. Thus,
(setf (subseq "Foobar" 3 5) "le")
modifies the string "Foobar"
so that it contains "Fooler"
instead.
0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶Copies part of from-sequence-2 into part of to-sequence-1. start2 and end2 are the indices of the part of from-sequence-2 to copy from, and start1 and end1 are the indices of the part of to-sequence-1 to copy into.
If the number of elements to copy out of from-sequence-2 is less than the number of elements of to-sequence-1 to be copied into, the extra elements of to-sequence-1 are not changed. If the number of elements to copy out is more than there is room for, the last extra elements are ignored.
If the two sequence arguments are the same sequence, then the elements to be copied are copied first into a temporary sequence (if necessary) to make sure that no element is overwritten before it is copied. Example:
(setq str "Elbow") (replace str str :start1 2 :end1 5 :start2 1 :end2 4)
modifies str
to contain "Ellbo"
.
into-sequence-1 is returned as the value of replace
.
0
) end ¶Modifies the contents of sequence by setting all the
elements to item. start and end may be specified
to limit the operation to some contiguous portion of sequence;
then the elements before start or after end are unchanged.
If end is nil
, the filling goes to the end of sequence.
The value returned by fill
is sequence. Example:
(setq l '(a b c d e)) (fill l 'lose :start 2) l => (a b lose lose lose)
Returns a new sequence containing the same elements as sequence but
in reverse order. The new sequence is of the same type and length as
sequence.
reverse
does not modify its argument, unlike nreverse
which is faster
but does modify its argument. The list created by reverse
is not cdr-coded.
(reverse "foo") => "oof" (reverse '(a b (c d) e)) => (e (c d) b a)
Modifies sequence destructively to have its elements in reverse
order, and returns sequence as modified. For a vector, this is done
by copying the elements to different positions. For a list, this is
done by modifying cdr pointers. This has two important consequences: it
is most efficient when the list is not cdr-coded, and the rearranged
list starts with the cell that used to be at the end. Although the
altered list as a whole contains the same cells as the original, the
actual value of the altered list is not eq
to the original list.
For this reason, one must always store the value of nreverse
into
the place where the list will be used. Do not just use nreverse
for effect
on a list.
(setq a '#(1 2 3 4 5)) (nreverse a) (concatenate 'list a) => (5 4 3 2 1) (setq b '(1 2 3 4 5) c b d (last b)) (setq b (nreverse b)) b => (5 4 3 2 1) c => (1) (eq b d) => t
nreverse
is most frequently used after a loop which computes
elements for a new list one by one. These elements can be put on the
new list with push
, but this produces a list which has the elements
in reverse order (first one generated at the end of the list).
(let (accumulate) (dolist (x input) (push (car x) accumulate) (push (cdr x) accumulate)) (nreverse accumulate))
Currently, nreverse
is inefficient with cdr-coded lists (see
cdr-code), because it just uses rplacd
in the
straightforward way. This may be fixed someday. In the meantime
reverse
might be preferable in some cases.
The Common Lisp map
function
maps function over successive elements of each sequence,
constructing and returning a sequence of the results that function returns.
The constructed sequence is of type result-type (see make-sequence
,
make-sequence-fun).
function is called first on the first elements of all the sequences, then on the second elements of all, and so on until some argument sequence is exhausted.
(map 'list 'list '(1 2 3) '#(A B C D)) => ((1 A) (2 B) (3 C)) (setq vect (map '(vector (mod 16.)) '+ '(3 4 5 6 7) (circular-list 1))) (concatenate 'list vect) => (2 3 4 5 6) (array-element-type vect) => (mod 16.)
result-type can also be nil
. Then the values returned by function
are thrown away, no sequence is constructed, and map
returns nil
.
This function is available under the name map
in Common Lisp programs.
In traditional Zetalisp programs, map
is another function which
does something related but different; see map-fun.
Traditional programs can call this function as cli:map
.
Applies predicate to successive elements of each sequence.
If predicate ever returns a non-nil
value, cli:some
immediately
returns the same value. If one of the argument sequences is exhausted,
cli:some
returns nil
.
Each time predicate is called, it receives one argument from each sequence. The first time, it gets the first element of each sequence, then the second element of each, and so on until a sequence is exhausted. Examples:
(cli:some 'plusp '(-4 0 5 6)) => 5 (cli:some '> '(-4 0 5 6) '(0 12 12 12)) => nil (cli:some '> '(-4 0 5 6) '(3 3 3 3)) => 5 (cli:some '> '(-4 0 5 6) '(3 3)) => nil
This function is available under the name some
in Common Lisp programs.
In traditional Zetalisp programs, some
is another function which
does something related but different; see some-fun.
Traditional programs can call this function as cli:some
.
Applies predicate to successive elements of each sequence.
If predicate ever returns nil
, cli:every
immediately
returns nil
. If one of the argument sequences is exhausted,
cli:every
returns t
.
Each time predicate is called, it receives one argument from each sequence. The first time, it gets the first element of each sequence, then the second element of each, and so on until a sequence is exhausted. Examples:
(cli:every 'plusp '(-4 0 5 6)) => nil (cli:every 'plusp '(5 6)) => t
This function is available under the name every
in Common Lisp programs.
In traditional Zetalisp programs, every
is another function which
does something related but different; see every-fun.
Traditional programs can call this function as cli:every
.
These are the opposites of cli:some
and cli:every
.
(notany ...)
is equivalent to (not (cli:some ...))
.
(notevery ...)
is equivalent to (not (cli:every ...))
.
0
) end initial-value ¶Combines the elements of sequence using function, a function of two args. function is applied to the first two elements; then to that result and the third element; then to that result and the fourth element; and so on.
start and end are indices that restrict the action to a part of sequence,
as if the rest of sequence were not there. They default to 0 and nil
(nil
for end means go all the way to the end of sequence).
If from-end is non-nil
, processing starts with the last of the
elements. function is first applied to the last two elements; then
to the previous element and that result; then to the previous element
and that result; and so on until element number start has been used.
If initial-value is specified, it acts like an extra element of
sequence, used in addition to the actual elements of the specified part
of sequence. It comes, in effect, at the beginning if from-end is
nil
, but at the end if from-end is non-nil
, so that in any
case it is the first element to be processed.
If there is only one element to be processed, that element is returned and function is not called.
If there are no elements (sequence is of length zero and no initial-value), function is called with no arguments and its value is returned.
Examples:
(reduce '+ '(1 2 3)) => 6
(reduce '- '(1 2 3)) => -4
(reduce '- '(1 2 3) :from-end t) => 2 ;; 1 -
(2 -
3)
(reduce 'cons '(1 2 3) :from-end t) => (1 2 . 3)
(reduce 'cons '(1 2 3)) => ((1 . 2) . 3)
The generic sequence functions for searching, substituting and removing elements from sequences take similar arguments whose meanings are standard. This is because they all look at each element of the sequence to decide whether it should be processed.
Functions which conceptually modify the sequence come in pairs. One
function in the pair copies the sequence if necessary and never modifies
the argument. The copy is a list if the original sequence is a list;
otherwise, the copy is an art-q
array. If the sequence is a list,
it may be copied only partially, sharing any unchanged tail with the
original argument. If no elements match, the result sequence may be
eq
to the argument sequence.
The other function in the pair may alter the original sequence and return it, or may make a copy and return that.
There are two ways the function can decide which elements to operate on.
The functions whose names end in -if
or -if-not
have an
argument named predicate which should be a function of one argument.
This function is applied to each element and the value determines
whether the element is processed.
The other functions have an argument named item or something similar
which is an object to compare each element with. The elements that
match item are processed. By default, the comparison is done with
eql
. You can specify any function of two arguments to be used
instead, as the test keyword argument. item is always the first
argument, and an element of the sequence is the second argument. The
element matches item if test returns non-nil
.
Alternatively, you can specify the test-not keyword argument; then
the element matches if test-not returns nil
.
The elements may be tested in any order, and may be tested more than once. For predictable results, your predicate, test and test-not functions should be side-effect free.
The five keyword arguments start, end, key, count and from-end have the same meanings for all of the functions, except that count is not relevant for some kinds of operations. Here is what they do:
start and end are indices in the sequence; they restrict the processing to the portion between those indices. Only elements in this portion are tested, replaced or removed. For the search functions, only this portion is searched. For element removal functions, elements outside the portion are unchanged.
start is the index of the first element to be processed, and end
is the index of the element after the last element to be processed.
end can also be nil
, meaning that processing should continue to
the end of the sequence.
start always defaults to 0, and end always defaults to nil
.
key, if not nil
, is a function of one argument which is applied
to each element of the sequence to get a value which is passed to the
test, test-not or predicate function in place of the
element. For example, if key is car
, the car of each element is
compared or tested. The default for key is nil
, which means to
compare or test the element itself.
If from-end is non-nil
, elements are (conceptually) processed in
the reverse of the sequence order, from the later elements to the
earlier ones. In some functions this argument makes no difference,
or matters only when count is non-nil
.
Note: the actual testing of elements may happen in any order.
count, if not nil
, should be an integer specifying the number of
matching elements to be processed. For example, if count is 2,
only the first two elements that match are removed, replaced, etc.
If from-end is non-nil
, the last two matching elements
are the ones removed or replaced.
The default for count is nil
, which means all elements are tested
and all matching ones are processed.
These functions remove certain elements of a sequence. The remove
series functions copy the argument; the delete
series functions
can modify it destructively (currently they always copy anyway if the
argument is a vector).
0
) end count key from-end ¶0
) end count key from-end ¶Returns a sequence like sequence but missing any elements that
satisfy predicate. predicate is a function of one argument
which is applied to one element at a time; if predicate returns
non-nil
, that element is removed. remove-if
copies structure as
necessary to avoid modifying sequence, while delete-if
can
either modify the original sequence and return it or make a copy and
return that. (Currently, a list is always modified, and a vector is
always copied, but don’t depend on this.)
The start, end, key count and from-end arguments are handled in the standard way.
(remove-if 'plusp '(1 -1 2 -2 3 -3)) => (-1 -2 -3) (remove-if 'plusp '(1 -1 2 -2 3 -3) :count 2) => (-1 -2 3 -3) (remove-if 'plusp '(1 -1 2 -2 3 -3) :count 2 :from-end t) => (1 -1 -2 -3) (remove-if 'plusp '(1 -1 2 -2 3 -3) :start 4) => (1 -1 2 -2 -3) (remove-if 'zerop '(1 -1 2 -2 3 -3) :key '1-) => (-1 2 -2 3 -3)
0
) end count key from-end ¶0
) end count key from-end ¶Like remove-if
and delete-if
except that the elements removed
are those for which predicate returns nil
.
'eql
) test-not (start 0
) end count key from-end ¶'eql
) test-not (start 0
) end count key from-end ¶The Common Lisp functions for eliminating elements from a sequence
test the elements of sequence one by one by comparison with item,
using the test or test-not function, and eliminate the elements
that match. cli:remove
copies structure as necessary to avoid modifying
sequence, while cli:delete
can either modify the original sequence
and return it or make a copy and return that. (Currently, a list is always
modified, and a vector is always copied.)
The start, end, key count and from-end arguments are handled in the standard way.
(cli:remove 'x '(x (a) (x) (a x))) => ((a) (x) (a x)) (cli:remove 'x '((a) (x) (a x)) :test 'memq) => ((a)) (cli:remove 'x '((a) (x) (a x)) :test-not 'memq) => ((x) (a x)) (cli:remove 'x '((a) (x) (a x)) :test 'memq :count 1) => ((a) (a x)) (cli:remove 'x '((a) (x) (a x)) :key 'car) => ((a) (a x))
These functions are available under the names remove
and delete
in Common Lisp programs. Traditional Zetalisp provides functions
remove
and delete
which serve similar functions, on lists only,
and with different calling sequences; see remove-fun and
delete-fun. Traditional programs can call these functions as
cli:remove
and cli:delete
.
'eql
) test-not (start 0
) end key from-end ¶'eql
) test-not (start 0
) end key from-end ¶remove-duplicates
returns a new sequence like sequence except
that all but one of any set of matching elements have been removed.
delete-duplicates
is the same except that it may destructively modify
and then return sequence itself.
Elements are compared using test, a function of two arguments.
Two elements match if test returns non-nil
. Each element
is compared with all the following elements and slated for removal if
it matches any of them.
If test-not is specified, it is used instead of test, but then
elements match if test-not returns nil
. If neither test nor test-not
is specified, eql
is used for test.
If key is non-nil
, it should be a function of one argument. key is
applied to each element, and the value key returns is passed to test
or test-not.
If from-end is non-nil
, then elements are processed
(conceptually) from the end of sequence forward. Each element is
compared with all the preceding ones and slated for removal if it
matches any of them. For a well-behaved comparison function, the only
difference from-end makes is which elements of a matching set
are removed. Normally the last one is kept; with from-end, it is
the first one that is kept.
If start or end is used to restrict processing to a portion of sequence, both removal and comparison are restricted. An element is removed only if it is itself within the specified portion, and matches another element within the specified portion.
The functions in this section substitute a new value for certain of the
elements in a sequence–those that match a specified object or satisfy a
predicate. For example, you could replace every t
in the sequence with
nil
, leaving all elements other than t
unchanged. The substitute
series functions make a copy and return it, leaving the original
sequence unmodified. The nsubstitute
series functions always alter
the original sequence destructively and return it. They do not use up
any storage.
Note the difference between these functions and the function
cli:subst
. subst
operates only on lists, and it searches all
levels of list structure in both car and cdr positions.
substitute
, when given a list, considers for replacement only the
elements of the list.
substitute-if
returns a new sequence like sequence but with
newitem substituted for each element of sequence that satisfies
predicate. sequence itself is unchanged. If it is a list, only
enough of it is copied to avoid changing sequence.
nsubstitute-if
replaces elements in sequence itself, modifying it
destructively, and returns sequence.
start, end, key, count and from-end are handled in the standard fashion as described above.
(substitute-if 0 'plusp '(1 -1 2 -2 3) :from-end t :count 2) => (1 -1 0 -2 0)
Like substitute-if
and nsubstitute-if
except that the elements
replaced are those for which predicate returns nil
.
'eql
) test-not start end count key from-end ¶'eql
) test-not start end count key from-end ¶Like substitute-if
and nsubstitute-if
except that elements are
tested by comparison with olditem, using test or test-not as
a comparison function.
start, end, key, count and from-end are handled in the standard fashion as described above.
(substitute 'a 'b '(a b (a b))) => (a a (a b))
The functions in this section find an element or elements of a sequence
which satisfy a predicate or match a specified object. The position
series functions find one element and return the index of the element
found in the specified sequence. The find
series functions return
the element itself. The count
series functions find all the
elements that match and returns the number of them that were found.
All of the functions accept the keyword arguments start, end, count and from-end, and handle them in the standard way described in generic-sequence-arguments.
0
) end key from-end ¶0
) end key from-end ¶Find the first element of sequence (last element, if from-end is
non-nil
) which satisfies predicate. position-if
returns the
index in sequence of the element found; find-if
returns the element
itself. If no element is found, the value is nil
for either
function.
See generic-sequence-arguments for a description of the standard arguments start, end and key. If start or end is used to restrict operation to a portion of sequence, elements outside the portion are not tested, but the index returned is still the index in the entire sequence.
(position-if 'plusp '(-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3)) => 4 (find-if 'plusp '(-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3)) => 1 (position-if 'plusp '(-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3) :start 5) => 5 (position-if 'plusp '(-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3) :from-end t) => 6 (find-if 'plusp '(-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3) :from-end t) => 3
0
) end key from-end ¶0
) end key from-end ¶Like position-if
and find-if
but search for an element for which predicate
returns nil
.
0
) end key from-end ¶0
) end key from-end ¶Like position-if
and find-if
but search for an element which matches item,
using test or test-not for comparison.
(position #\A "BabA" :test 'char-equal) => 1 (position #/A "BabA" :test 'equalp) => 1 (position #\A "BabA" :test 'char=) => 3 (position #/A "BabA" :test 'eq) => 3
find-position-in-list
is equivalent to position
with
eq
as the value of test.
Tests each element of sequence with predicate and counts how many
times predicate returns non-nil
. This number is returned.
start, end and key are used in the standard way, as described in generic-sequence-arguments. The from-end keyword argument is accepted without error, but it has no effect.
(count-if 'symbolp #(a b "foo" 3)) => 2
Like count-if
but returns the number of elements for which
predicate returns nil
.
Like count
but returns the number of elements which match item.
test or test-not is the function used for the comparison.
(count 4 '(1 2 3 4 5) :test '>) => 3
'eql
) test-not (start1 0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 key from-end ¶Compares successive elements of sequence1 with successive elements
of sequence2, returning nil
if they all match, or else the index
in sequence1 of the first mismatch. If the sequences differ in length
but match as far as they go, the value is the index in sequence1 of
the place where one sequence ran out. If sequence1 is the one which
ran out, this value equals the length of sequence1, so it isn’t the
index of an actual element, but it still describes the place where
comparison stopped.
Elements are compared using the function test, which should accept two arguments.
If it returns non-nil
, the elements are considered to match.
If you specify test-not instead of test, it is used similarly as a function, but the elements match if test-not returns nil
.
If key is non-nil
, it should be a function of one argument. It is applied
to each element to get an object to pass to test or test-not in place of
the element. Thus, if car
is supplied as key, the cars of the elements
are compared using test or test-not.
start1 and end1 can be used to specify a portion of
sequence1 to use in the comparison, and start2 and end2 can
be used to specify a portion of sequence2. The comparison uses
the first element of each sequence portion, then the second element of
each sequence portion, and so on. If the two specified portions differ
in length, comparison stops where the first one runs out. In any case,
the index returned by mismatch
is still relative to the
whole of sequence1.
If from-end is non-nil
, the comparison proceeds conceptually
from the end of each sequence or portion. The first comparison uses
the last element of each sequence portion, the second comparison
uses the next-to-the-last element of each sequence portion, and so on.
When a mismatch is encountered, the value returned is one greater
than the index of the first mismatch encountered in order of
processing (closest to the ends of the sequences).
(mismatch "Foo" "Fox") => 2 (mismatch "Foo" "FOO" :test 'char-equal) => nil (mismatch "Foo" "FOO" :key 'char-upcase) => nil (mismatch '(a b) #(a b c)) => 2 (mismatch "Win" "The Winner" :start2 4 :end2 7) => nil (mismatch "Foo" "Boo" :from-end t) => 1
0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶Searches in-sequence-2 (or portion of it) for a subsequence that
matches for-sequence-1 (or portion of it) element by element, and
returns the index in in-sequence-2 of the beginning of the matching subsequence.
If no matching subsequence is found, the value is nil
,
The comparison of each subsequence of in-sequence-2 is done with
mismatch
, and the test, test-not and key arguments
are used only to pass along to mismatch
.
Normally, subsequences are considered starting with the beginning of
the specified portion of in-sequence-2 and proceeding toward the end.
The value is therefore the index of the earliest subsequence that matches.
If from-end is non-nil
, the subsequences are tried in the reverse
order, and the value identifies the latest subsequence that matches.
In either case, the value identifies the beginning of the subsequence found.
(search '(#\A #\B) "cabbage" :test 'char-equal) => 1
Several functions are provided for sorting vectors and lists. These functions use algorithms which always terminate no matter what sorting predicate is used, provided only that the predicate always terminates. The main sorting functions are not stable; that is, equal items may not stay in their original order. If you want a stable sort, use the stable versions. But if you don’t care about stability, don’t use them since stable algorithms are significantly slower.
After sorting, the argument (be it list or vector) has been rearranged
internally so as to be completely ordered. In the case of a vector
argument, this is accomplished by permuting the elements of the vector,
while in the list case, the list is reordered by rplacd
’s in the
same manner as nreverse
. Thus if the argument should not be
clobbered, the user must sort a copy of the argument, obtainable by
fillarray
or copylist
, as appropriate. Furthermore, sort
of a list is like delq
in that it should not be used for effect;
the result is conceptually the same as the argument but in fact is a
different Lisp object.
Should the comparison predicate cause an error, such as a wrong type argument error, the state of the list or vector being sorted is undefined. However, if the error is corrected the sort proceeds correctly.
The sorting package is smart about compact lists; it sorts compact sublists as if they were vectors. See cdr-code for an explanation of compact lists, and MIT A I Lab Memo 587 by Guy L Steele Jr. for an explanation of the sorting algorithm.
The first argument to sort
is a vector or a list whose elements are
to be sorted. The second is a predicate, which must be applicable to
all the objects in the sequence. The predicate should take two
arguments, and return non-nil
if and only if the first argument is
strictly less than the second (in some appropriate sense).
The sort
function proceeds to reorder the elements of the sequence
according to the predicate, and returns a modified sequence. Note that
since sorting requires many comparisons, and thus many calls to the
predicate, sorting is much faster if the predicate is a compiled
function rather than interpreted.
Example: Sort a list alphabetically by the first symbol found at any level
in each element.
(defun mostcar (x) (cond ((symbolp x) x) ((mostcar (car x))))) (sort 'fooarray #'(lambda (x y) (string-lessp (mostcar x) (mostcar y))))
If fooarray
contained these items before the sort:
(Tokens (The alien lurks tonight)) (Carpenters (Close to you)) ((Rolling Stones) (Brown sugar)) ((Beach Boys) (I get around)) (Beatles (I want to hold you up))
then after the sort fooarray
would contain:
((Beach Boys) (I get around)) (Beatles (I want to hold you up)) (Carpenters (Close to you)) ((Rolling Stones) (Brown sugar)) (Tokens (The alien lurks tonight))
When sort
is given a list, it may change the order of the conses of
the list (using rplacd
), and so it cannot be used merely for
side-effect; only the returned value of sort
is the sorted
list. The original list may have some of its elements missing when
sort
returns. If you need both the original list and the sorted
list, you must copy the original and sort the copy (see copylist
,
copylist-fun).
Sorting a vector just moves the elements of the vector into different places, and so sorting a vector for side-effect only is all right.
If the argument to sort
is a vector with a fill pointer, note that,
like most functions, sort
considers the active length of the vector
to be the length, and so only the active part of the vector is
sorted (see array-active-length
, array-active-length-fun).
sortcar
is the same as sort
except that the predicate is applied
to the cars of the elements of sequence, instead of directly to the
elements of sequence. Example:
(sortcar '((3 . dog) (1 . cat) (2 . bird)) #'<) => ((1 . cat) (2 . bird) (3 . dog))
Remember that sortcar
, when given a list, may change the order of the
conses of the list (using rplacd
), and so it cannot be used merely
for side-effect; only the returned value of sortcar
is the
sorted list. The original list is destroyed by sorting.
stable-sort
is like sort
, but if two elements of sequence are equal,
i.e predicate returns nil
when applied to them in either order,
then they remain in their original order.
stable-sortcar
is like sortcar
, but if two elements of sequence are equal,
i.e predicate returns nil
when applied to their cars in either order,
then they remain in their original order.
sort-grouped-array
considers its array argument to
be composed of records of group-size elements each.
These records are considered as units, and are sorted with respect
to one another. The predicate is applied to the first element
of each record; so the first elements act as the keys on which
the records are sorted.
This is like sort-grouped-array
except that the
predicate is applied to four arguments: an array,
an index into that array, a second array, and an index into
the second array. predicate should consider each index
as the subscript of the first element of a record in the corresponding
array, and compare the two records. This is more general
than sort-grouped-array
since the function can get at
all of the elements of the relevant records, instead of only the first element.
Returns a single sequence containing the elements of sequence1 and
sequence2 interleaved in order according to predicate. The
length of the result sequence is the sum of the lengths of sequence1
and sequence2. result-type specifies the type of sequence to
create, as in make-sequence
.
The interleaving is done by taking the next element of sequence1 unless
the next element of sequence2 is “less” than it according to predicate.
Therefore, if each of the argument sequences is sorted, the result of
merge
is also sorted.
key, if non-nil
, is applied to each element to get the object to
pass to predicate, rather than the element itself. Thus, if key is
car
, the cars of the elements are compared rather than the entire elements.
(merge 'list '(1 2 5 6) '(3 5.0 5.1) '<) => (1 2 3 5 5.0 5.1 6)
A string is a one-dimensional array representing a sequence of
characters. The printed representation of a string is its characters
enclosed in quotation marks, for example "foo bar"
. Strings are
constants, that is, evaluating a string returns that string. Strings
are the right data type to use for text-processing.
Individual characters can be represented by character objects or by
fixnums. A character object is actually the same as a fixnum except
that it has a recognizably different data type and prints differently.
Without escaping, a character object is printed by outputting the
character it represents. With escaping, a character object prints as
#\char
in Common Lisp syntax or as #/char
in
traditional syntax; see character-set and sharp-slash. By
contrast, a fixnum would in all cases print as a sequence of digits.
Character objects are accepted by most numeric functions in place of
fixnums, and may be used as array indices. When evaluated, they are
constants.
The character object data type was introduced recently for Common Lisp
support. Traditionally characters were always represented as fixnums,
and nearly all system and user code still does so. Character objects
are interchangeable with fixnums in most contexts, but not in eq
,
which is often used to compare the result of the stream input operations
such as :tyi
, since that might be nil
. Therefore, the
stream input operations still return fixnums that represent characters.
Aside from this, Common Lisp functions that return a character return a
character object, while traditional functions return a fixnum. The
fixnum which is the character code representing char can be written
as #/char
in traditional syntax. This is equivalent to writing
the fixnum using digits, but does not require you to know the character
code.
Most strings are arrays of type art-string
, where each element is
stored in eight bits. Only characters with character code less than 256
can be stored in an ordinary string; these characters form the type
string-char
. A string can also be an array of type
art-fat-string
, where each element holds a sixteen-bit unsigned
fixnum. The extra bits allow for multiple fonts or an expanded character
set.
Since strings are arrays, the usual array-referencing function
aref
is used to extract characters from strings. For example,
(aref "frob" 1)
returns the representation of lower case r
.
The first character is at index zero.
Conceptually, the elements of a string are character objects.
This is what Common Lisp programs expect to see when they do
aref
(or char
, which on the Lisp
Machine is synonymous with aref
) on a string. But nearly all
Lisp Machine programs are traditional, and expect elements of strings
to be fixnums. Therefore, aref
of a string actually returns
a fixnum. A distinct version of aref
exists for Common Lisp
programs. It is cli:aref
and it does return character objects
if given a string. For all other kinds of arrays, aref
and cli:aref
are equivalent.
(aref "Foo" 1) => #o157 (cli:aref "Foo" 1) => #/o
It is also legal to store into strings, for example using setf
of
aref
. As with rplaca
on lists, this changes the actual object;
you must be careful to understand where side-effects will propagate. It
makes no difference whether a character object or a fixnum is stored.
When you are making strings that you intend to change later, you
probably want to create an array with a fill-pointer (see
fill-pointer) so that you can change the length of the string as well
as the contents. The length of a string is always computed using
array-active-length
, so that if a string has a fill-pointer, its
value is used as the length.
The functions described in this section provide a variety of useful
operations on strings. In place of a string, most of these functions
accept a symbol or a fixnum as an argument, coercing it into a
string. Given a symbol, its print name, which is a string, is used.
Given a fixnum, a one-character string containing the character designated
by that fixnum is used. Several of the functions actually work on any
type of one-dimensional array and may be useful for other than string
processing; these are the functions such as substring
and string-length
which do not depend on the elements of the string being characters.
The generic sequence functions in chapter sequence-chapter may also be used on strings.
The Lisp Machine data type for character objects is a recent addition to the system. Most programs still use fixnums to represent characters.
Common Lisp programs typically work with actual character objects but programs traditionally use fixnums to represent characters. The new Common Lisp functions for operating with characters have been implemented to accept fixnums as well, so that they can be used equally well from traditional programs.
t
if object is a character object; nil
otherwise.
In particular, it is nil
if object is a fixnum such as
traditional programs use to represent characters.
Coerces object
to a single character,
represented as a fixnum. If object
is a number, it is returned. If
object
is a string or an array, its first element is returned. If
object
is a symbol, the first character of its pname is returned.
Otherwise an error occurs. The way characters are represented as fixnums
is explained in character-set.
Coerces object into a character and returns the character as a character object for Common Lisp programs.
Converts fixnum, regarded as representing a character, to a
character object. This is a special case of cli:character
.
(int-char #o101)
is the character object for A
. If a character
object is given as an argument, it is returned unchanged.
Converts char, a character object, to the fixnum which represents
the same character. This is the inverse of int-char
. It may also
be given a fixnum as argument, in which case the value is the same
fixnum.
A character object, or a fixnum which is interpreted as a character,
contains three separate pieces of information: the character code,
the font number, and the modifier bits. Each of these things
is an integer from a fixed range. The character code ranges from 0 to
377 (octal), the font number from 0 to 377 (octal), and the modifier
bits from 0 to 17 (octal). These numeric constants should not appear
in programs; instead, use the constant symbols char-code-limit
,
and so on, described below.
Ordinary strings can hold only characters whose font number and modifier bits are zero. Fat strings can hold characters with any font number, but the modifier bits must still be zero.
Character codes less than 200 octal are printing graphics; when output to a device they are assumed to print a character and move the cursor one character position to the right. (All software provides for variable-width fonts, so the term “character position” shouldn’t be taken too literally.)
Character codes 200 through 236 octal are used for special characters.
Character 200 is a “null character”, which does not correspond to any
key on the keyboard. The null character is not used for anything much;
fasload
uses it internally. Characters 201 through 236 correspond
to the special function keys on the keyboard such as Return
and
Call
. The remaining character codes 237 through 377 octal are reserved
for future expansion.
Most of the special characters do not normally appear in files (although it is not forbidden for files to contain them). These characters exist mainly to be used as “commands” from the keyboard. A few special characters, however, are “format effectors” which are just as legitimate as printing characters in text files. The names and meanings of these characters are:
Return
The “newline” character, which separates lines of text. We do not use the PDP-10 convention which separates lines by a pair of characters, a “carriage return” and a “linefeed”.
Page
The “page separator” character, which separates pages of text.
Tab
The “tabulation” character, which spaces to the right until the next “tab stop”. Tab stops are normally every 8 character positions.
The space character is considered to be a printing character whose printed image happens to be blank, rather than a format effector.
When a letter is typed with any of the modifier bit keys
(Control
, Meta
, Super
, or Hyper
), the letter is normally
upper-case. If the Shift
key is pressed as well, then the letter
becomes lower-case. This is exactly the reverse of what the Shift
key does to letters without control bits. (The Shift-lock
key has
no effect on letters with control bits.)
Return the character code of char, the font number of char, and the modifier bits value of char. char may be a fixnum or a character object; the value is always a fixnum.
These used to be written as
(ldb %%ch-char char) (ldb %%ch-font char) (ldb %%ch-control-meta char)
Such use of ldb
is frequent but obsolete.
A constant whose value is a bound on the maximum code of any character. In the Lisp Machine, currently, it is 400 (octal).
A constant whose value is a bound on the maximum font number value of any character. In the Lisp Machine, currently, it is 400 (octal).
A constant whose value is a bound on the maximum modifier bits value of any character. In the Lisp Machine, currently, it is 20 (octal). Thus, there are four modifier bits. These are just the familiar Control, Meta, Super and Hyper bits.
Constants with values 1, 2, 4 and 8.
These give the meanings of the bits within the bits-field of a character object.
Thus, (bit-test char-meta-bit (char-bits char))
would be non-nil
if char is a meta-character. (This can also be tested with char-bit
.)
t
if char has the modifier bit named by name. name is
one of the following four symbols: :control
, :meta
,
:super
, and :hyper
.
(char-bit #\meta-x :meta) => t.
Returns a character like char except that the bit specified by name
is present if newvalue is non-nil
, absent otherwise. Thus,
(set-char-bit #\x :meta t) => #\meta-x.
The value is a fixnum if char is one; a character object if char is one.
Until recently the only way to access
the character code, font and modifier bits was with ldb
,
using the byte field names listed below.
Most code still uses that method, but it is obsolete; char-bit
should be used instead.
%%kbd-char
¶%%ch-char
Specifies the byte containing the character code.
%%ch-font
¶Specifies the byte containing the font number.
%%kbd-control
¶Specifies the byte containing the Control bit.
%%kbd-meta
¶Specifies the byte containing the Meta bit.
%%kbd-super
¶Specifies the byte containing the Super bit.
%%kbd-hyper
¶Specifies the byte containing the Hyper bit.
%%kbd-control-meta
¶Specifies the byte containing all the modifier bits.
Characters are sometimes used to represent mouse clicks. The character says which button was pressed and how many times. Refer to the Window System manual for an explanation of how these characters are generated.
t
if char is a character used to represent a mouse click.
Such characters are always distinguishable from characters that represent
keyboard input.
The value of %%kbd-mouse-button
is a byte specifier for the field in
a mouse signal that says which button was clicked. The byte contains
0
, 1
, or 2
for the left, middle, or right button,
respectively.
The value of %%kbd-mouse-n-clicks
is a byte specifier for the field in a mouse signal
that says how many times the button was clicked.
The byte contains one less than the number of times the button was clicked.
0
) (font 0
) ¶0
) (font 0
) ¶Returns a character object made from code, bits and font.
Common Lisp says that not all combinations may be valid, and that nil
is returned for an invalid combination. On the Lisp Machine, any combination
is valid if the arguments are valid individually.
According to Common Lisp, code-char
requires a number as a first
argument, whereas make-char
requires a character object, whose character
code is used. On the Lisp Machine, either function may be used in either way.
10.
) (font 0
) ¶Returns a character object which is the digit with the specified weight,
and with font as specified. However, if there is no suitable character
which has weight weight in the specified radix, the value is nil
.
If the “digit” is a letter (which happens if weight is greater than
9), it is returned in upper case.
Returns the fixnum character code that represents a mouse click in the
standard way. tv:mouse-char-p
of this value is t
.
button is 0 for the leftbutton, 1 for the middle button,
or 2 for the right button. n-clicks is one less than the
number of clicks (1 for a double click, 0 normally).
Here are the numerical values of the characters in the Zetalisp character set. It should never be necessary for a user or a source program to know these values. Indeed, they are likely to be changed in the future. There are symbolic names for all characters; see the section on character names, below.
It is worth pointing out that the Zetalisp character set is different from the ASCII character set. File servers operating on hosts that use ASCII for storing text files automatically perform character set conversion when text files are read or written. The details of the mapping are explained in character-set-differences.
000 · center-dot 040 space 100 @ 140 ` 001 ↓ down arrow 041 ! 101 A 141 a 002 α alpha 042 " 102 B 142 b 003 β beta 043 # 103 C 143 c 004 ∧ and-sign 044 $ 104 D 144 d 005 ¬ not-sign 045 % 105 E 145 e 006 ε epsilon 046 & 106 F 146 f 007 π pi 047 ' 107 G 147 g 010 λ lambda 050 ( 110 H 150 h 011 γ gamma 051 ) 111 I 151 i 012 δ delta 052 * 112 J 152 j 013 ↑ uparrow 053 + 113 K 153 k 014 ± plus-minus 054 , 114 L 154 l 015 ⊕ circle-plus 055 - 115 M 155 m 016 ∞ infinity 056 . 116 N 156 n 017 ∂ partial delta 057 / 117 O 157 o 020 ⊂ left horseshoe 060 0 120 P 160 p 021 ⊃ right horseshoe 061 1 121 Q 161 q 022 ∩ up horseshoe 062 2 122 R 162 r 023 ∪ down horseshoe 063 3 123 S 163 s 024 ∀ universal quantifier 064 4 124 T 164 t 025 ∃ existential quantifier 065 5 125 U 165 u 026 ⮾ circle-X 066 6 126 V 166 v 027 ⇄ double-arrow 067 7 127 W 167 w 030 ← left arrow 070 8 130 X 170 x 031 → right arrow 071 9 131 Y 171 y 032 ≠ not-equals 072 : 132 Z 172 z 033 ⋄ diamond (altmode) 073 ; 133 [ 173 { 034 ≤ less-or-equal 074 < 134 \ 174 | 035 ≥ greater-or-equal 075 = 135 ] 175 } 036 ≡ equivalence 076 > 136 ^ 176 ~ 037 ∨ or 077 ? 137 _ 177 ∫ integral 200 Null character 210 Overstrike 220 Stop-output 230 Roman-iv 201 Break 211 Tab 221 Abort 231 Hand-up 202 Clear 212 Line 222 Resume 232 Hand-down 203 Call 213 Delete 223 Status 233 Hand-left 204 Terminal escape 214 Page 224 End 234 Hand-right 205 Macro/backnext 215 Return 225 Roman-i 235 System 206 Help 216 Quote 226 Roman-ii 236 Network 207 Rubout 217 Hold-output 227 Roman-iii 237-377 reserved for the future The Lisp Machine Character Set (all numbers in octal)
000 center-dot 040 space 100 @ 140 ` 001 down arrow 041 ! 101 A 141 a 002 alpha 042 " 102 B 142 b 003 beta 043 # 103 C 143 c 004 and-sign 044 $ 104 D 144 d 005 not-sign 045 % 105 E 145 e 006 epsilon 046 & 106 F 146 f 007 pi 047 ' 107 G 147 g 210 lambda 050 ( 110 H 150 h 211 gamma 051 ) 111 I 151 i 212 delta 052 * 112 J 152 j 213 uparrow 053 + 113 K 153 k 214 plus-minus 054 , 114 L 154 l 215 circle-plus 055 - 115 M 155 m 016 infinity 056 . 116 N 156 n 017 partial delta 057 / 117 O 157 o 020 left horseshoe 060 0 120 P 160 p 021 right horseshoe 061 1 121 Q 161 q 022 up horseshoe 062 2 122 R 162 r 023 down horseshoe 063 3 123 S 163 s 024 universal quantifier 064 4 124 T 164 t 025 existential quantifier 065 5 125 U 165 u 026 circle-X 066 6 126 V 166 v 027 double-arrow 067 7 127 W 167 w 030 left arrow 070 8 130 X 170 x 031 right arrow 071 9 131 Y 171 y 032 not-equals 072 : 132 Z 172 z 033 diamond (altmode) 073 ; 133 [ 173 { 034 less-or-equal 074 < 134 \ 174 | 035 greater-or-equal 075 = 135 ] 175 } 036 equivalence 076 > 136 ^ 176 ~ 037 or 077 ? 137 _ 177 @ref{ctl-qm} 200 Null character 10 Overstrike 220 Stop-output 230 Roman-iv 201 Break 11 Tab 221 Abort 231 Hand-up 202 Clear 15 Line 222 Resume 232 Hand-down 203 Call 13 Delete 223 Status 233 Hand-left 204 Terminal escape 14 Page 224 End 234 Hand-right 205 Macro/backnext 12 Return 225 Roman-i 235 System 206 Help 216 Quote 226 Roman-ii 236 Network 207 Rubout 217 Hold-output 227 Roman-iii 237-377 reserved for the future The Lisp Machine Character Set as stored on UNIX (all numbers in octal)
t
if char is a character that can be stored in a string. On the
Lisp Machine, this is true if the font and modifier bits of char are zero.
t
if char is a standard Common Lisp character: any of the 95
ASCII printing characters (including Space
), and the Return
character.
Thus (standard-char-p #\end)
is nil
.
t
if char is a graphic character; one which has a printed shape.
A
, -
, Space
and epsilon
are all graphic characters; Return
,
End
and Abort
are not. A character whose modifier bits are
nonzero is never graphic.
Ordinary output to windows prints graphic characters using the current font.
Nongraphic characters are printed using lozenges unless they have special
formatting meanings (as Return
does).
t
if char is a letter with zero modifier bits.
10.
) ¶If char is a digit available in the specified radix, returns the
weight of that digit. Otherwise, it returns nil
. If the modifier
bits of char are nonzero, the value is always nil
. (It would be
more useful to ignore the modifier bits, but this decision provides
Common Lisp with a foolish consistency.) Examples:
(digit-char-p #\8 8) => nil (digit-char-p #\8 9) => 8 (digit-char-p #\F 16.) => 15. (digit-char-p #\c-8 anything) => nil
t
if char is a letter or a digit 0 through 9, with zero modifier bits.
This is the primitive for comparing characters for equality; many of the
string functions call it. The arguments may be fixnums or character
objects indiscriminately. The result is t
if the characters are
equal ignoring case, font and modifier bits, otherwise nil
.
t
if the arguments are all different as characters, ignoring
case, font and modifier bits.
Ordered comparison of characters, ignoring case, font and modifier bits.
These are the primitives for comparing characters for order; many of the
string functions call it. The arguments may be fixnums or character
objects. The result is t
if the arguments are in strictly increasing
(strictly decreasing, nonincreasing, nondecreasing) order. Details of the
ordering of characters are in character-set.
These are the Common Lisp functions for comparing characters and
including the case, font and bits in the comparison. On the Lisp Machine
they are synonyms for the numeric comparison functions =
, >
, etc.
Note that in Common Lisp syntax you would write char/=
, not char//=
.
Characters can sometimes be referred to by long names; as, for
example, in the #\
construct in Lisp programs. Every basic
character (zero modifier bits) which is not a graphic character has
one or more standard names. Some graphic characters have standard
names too. When a non-graphic character is output to a window, it
appears as a lozenge containing the character’s standard name.
Returns the standard name (or one of the standard names) of char, or
nil
if there is none. The name is returned as a string.
(char-name #\space)
is the string "SPACE"
.
If char has nonzero modifier bits, the value
is nil
. Compound names such as Control-X
are not constructed by
this function.
Returns (as a character object) the character for which name is a name,
or returns nil
if name is not a recognized character name.
name may be a symbol or a string.
Compound names such as Control-X
are not recognized.
read
uses this function to process the #\
construct when
a character name is encountered.
The following are the recognized special character names, in alphabetical order except
with synonyms together. Character names are encoded and decoded by the functions
char-name
and name-char
(char-name-fun).
First a list of the special function keys.
abort break call clear-input, clear
delete end hand-down hand-left
hand-right hand-up help hold-output
line, lf macro, back-next network
overstrike, backspace, bs page, form, clear-screen
quote resume return, cr
roman-i roman-ii roman-iii roman-iv
rubout space, sp status stop-output
system tab terminal, esc
These are printing characters that also have special names because they may be hard to type on the hosts that are used as file servers.
altmode circle-plus delta gamma
integral lambda plus-minus uparrow
center-dot down-arrow alpha beta
and-sign not-sign epsilon pi
lambda gamma delta up-arrow
plus-minus circle-plus infinity partial-delta
left-horseshoe right-horseshoe up-horseshoe down-horseshoe
universal-quantifier existential-quantifier
circle-x double-arrow left-arrow right-arrow
not-equal altmode less-or-equal greater-or-equal
equivalence or-sign
The following names are for special characters sometimes used to
represent single and double mouse clicks. The buttons can be called
either l
, m
, r
or 1
, 2
, 3
depending on stylistic
preference.
mouse-l-1 or mouse-1-1 mouse-l-2 or mouse-1-2
mouse-m-1 or mouse-2-1 mouse-m-2 or mouse-2-2
mouse-r-1 or mouse-3-1 mouse-r-2 or mouse-3-2
t
if char is an upper case letter with zero modifier bits.
t
if char is an lower case letter with zero modifier bits.
This Common Lisp function is defined to return
t
if char is a character which has distinct upper and lower case forms.
On the Lisp Machine it returns t
if char is a letter with zero
modifier bits.
If char, is a lower-case alphabetic character its upper-case form is returned; otherwise, char itself is returned. If font information or modifier bits are present, they are preserved. If char is a fixnum, the value is a fixnum. If char is a character object, the value is a character object.
Similar, but converts to lower case.
0
) end ¶Returns a string like string, with all lower-case alphabetic characters replaced by the corresponding upper-case characters. If start or end is specified, only the specified portion of the string is converted, but in any case the entire string is returned.
The result is a copy of string unless no change is necessary. string itself is never modified.
0
) end ¶Similar, but converts to lower case.
0
) end ¶Returns a string like string in which all, or the specified portion, has been processed by capitalizing each word. For this function, a word is any maximal sequence of letters or digits. It is capitalized by putting the first character (if it is a letter) in upper case and any letters in the rest of the word in lower case.
The result is a copy of string unless no change is necessary. string itself is never modified.
0
) end ¶0
) end ¶0
) end ¶Like the previous functions except that they modify string itself and return it.
t
) (spaces t
) ¶Puts each word in string into lower-case with an upper case initial,
and if spaces is non-nil
replaces each hyphen character with a space.
If copy-p is t
, the value is a copy of string, and
string itself is unchanged. Otherwise, string itself is
returned, with its contents changed.
This function is somewhat obsolete. One can use string-capitalize
followed optionally by string-subst-char
.
See also the format
operation ~(
...~)
on format-case-convert.
0
) ¶Creates and returns a string of length size, with each element initialized to initial-element, which may be a fixnum or a character.
Coerces x into a string. Most of the string functions apply this to
their string arguments. If x is a string (or any array), it is
returned. If x is a symbol, its pname is returned. If x is a
non-negative fixnum less than 400 octal, a one-character-long string
containing it is created and returned. If x is an instance that
supports the :string-for-printing
operation (such as, a pathname)
then the result of that operation is returned. Otherwise, an error is
signaled.
If you want to get the printed representation of an object into the
form of a string, this function is not what you should use.
You can use format
, passing a first argument of nil
(see format-fun).
You might also want to use with-output-to-string
(see
with-output-to-string-fun).
Returns the number of characters in string. This is 1
if string is a number or character object, the array-active-length
(see array-active-length-fun)
if string
is an array, or the array-active-length
of the pname if string is a symbol.
0
) (start2 0
) end1 end2 ¶Compares two strings, returning t
if
they are equal and nil
if they are not. The comparison ignores
the font and case of the characters. equal
calls string-equal
if
applied to two strings.
The keyword arguments start1 and start2 are the starting
indices into the strings. end1 and end2
are the final indices; the comparison stops just before the final index.
nil
for end1 or end2 means stop at the end of the string.
Examples:
(string-equal "Foo" "foo") => t (string-equal "foo" "bar") => nil (string-equal "element" "select" 0 1 3 4) => t
An older calling sequence in which the start and end arguments are positional rather than keyword is still supported. The arguments come in the order start1 start2 end1 end2. This calling sequence is obsolete and should be changed whenever found.
0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶(not (string-equal ...))
0
) (start2 0
) end1 end2 ¶is like string-equal
except that case is significant.
(string= "A" "a") => nil
0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶(not (string= ...))
. Note that in Common Lisp syntax you would
write string/=
, not string//=
.
0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶Compare all or the specified portions of string1 and string2
using dictionary order. Characters are compared using char-lessp
and char-equal
so that font and alphabetic case are ignored.
You can use these functions as predicates, but they do more.
If the strings fit the condition (e.g string1 is strictly less in
string-lessp
) then the value is a number, the index in string1
of the first point of difference between the strings. This equals
the length of string1 if the strings match. If the condition is
not met, the value is nil
.
(string-lessp "aa" "Ab") => 1 (string-lessp "aa" "Ab" :end1 1 :end2 1) => nil (string-not-greaterp "Aa" "Ab" :end1 1 :end2 1) => 1
0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶0
) end1 (start2 0
) end2 ¶Like string-lessp
, etc, but treat case and font as significant
when comparing characters.
(string< "AA" "aa") => 0 (string-lessp "AA" "aa") => nil
0
) (start2 0
) end1 end2 ¶Compares two strings using dictionary order (as defined
by char-lessp
). The arguments are interpreted as in string-equal
.
The result is 0
if the strings are equal, a negative number if string1
is less than string2, or a positive number if string1 is greater than
string2. If the strings are not equal, the absolute value of the
number returned is one greater than the index (in string1) where the first
difference occurred.
Extracts a substring of string, starting at the character specified by start and going up to but not including the character specified by end. start and end are 0-origin indices. The length of the returned string is end minus start. If end is not specified it defaults to the length of string. The area in which the result is to be consed may be optionally specified.
Example:
(substring "Nebuchadnezzar" 4 8) => "chad"
Is like substring
except that the substring
is not copied; instead an indirect array (see indirect-array) is created which shares part
of the argument string. Modifying one string will modify the other.
Note that nsubstring
does not necessarily use less storage than
substring
; an nsubstring
of any length uses at least as much
storage as a substring
12 characters long. So you shouldn’t use
this for efficiency; it is intended for uses in which it is important
to have a substring which, if modified, will cause the original string
to be modified too.
Copies and concatenates any number of strings into a single string.
With a single argument, string-append
simply copies it. If there
are no arguments, the value is an empty string. In fact, vectors of any
type may be used as arguments, and the value is a vector capable of
holding all the elements of all the arguments. Thus string-append
can be used to copy and concatenate any type of vector. If the first
argument is not an array (for example, if it is a character), the value
is a string.
Example:
(string-append #\! "foo" #\!) => "!foo!"
Is like string-append
except that instead
of making a new string containing the concatenation of its arguments,
string-nconc
modifies its first argument. modified-string
must have a fill-pointer so that additional characters can be tacked
onto it. Compare this with array-push-extend
(array-push-extend-fun). The value of string-nconc
is
modified-string or a new, longer copy of it; in the latter case
the original copy is forwarded to the new copy (see adjust-array-size
,
adjust-array-size-fun). Unlike nconc
, string-nconc
with more than two arguments modifies only its first argument, not
every argument but the last.
Returns a substring
of string, with all characters
in char-set stripped off the beginning and end.
char-set is a set of characters, which can be represented as a list
of characters, a string of characters or a single character.
Example:
(string-trim '(#\sp) " Dr. No ") => "Dr. No" (string-trim "ab" "abbafooabb") => "foo"
Returns a substring
of string, with all characters
in char-set stripped off the beginning.
char-set is a set of characters, which can be represented as a list
of characters, a string of characters or a single character.
Returns a substring
of string, with all characters
in char-set stripped off the end.
char-set is a set of characters, which can be represented as a list
of characters, a string of characters or a single character.
Returns a copy of string with each character truncated to 8 bits; that is, changed to font zero.
If string is an ordinary string of array type art-string
, this
does not change anything, but it makes a difference if string is an
art-fat-string
.
Like reverse
and nreverse
, but on strings only (see reverse-fun).
There is no longer any reason to use these functions except
that they coerce numbers
and symbols into strings like the other string functions.
Returns a string containing the plural of the word in the argument string. Any added characters go in the same case as the last character of string.
Example:
(string-pluralize "event") => "events" (string-pluralize "trufan") => "trufen" (string-pluralize "Can") => "Cans" (string-pluralize "key") => "keys" (string-pluralize "TRY") => "TRIES"
For words with multiple plural forms depending on the
meaning, string-pluralize
cannot always do the right thing.
Returns "a"
or "an"
according to the string word;
whichever one appears to be correct to use before word in English.
Returns the result of appending "a "
or "an "
, whichever is
appropriate, to the front of word.
%string-equal
is the microcode primitive used by string-equal
.
It returns t
if the count characters of string1 starting
at start1 are char-equal
to the count characters of string2
starting at start2, or nil
if the characters are not equal or
if count runs off the length of either array.
Instead of a fixnum, count may also be nil
. In this case,
%string-equal
compares
the substring from start1 to (string-length string1)
against the substring from start2 to (string-length string2)
.
If the lengths of these substrings differ, then they are not equal and
nil
is returned.
Note that string1 and string2 must really be strings; the
usual coercion of symbols and fixnums to strings is not performed.
This function is documented because certain programs which require
high efficiency and are willing to pay the price of less generality
may want to use %string-equal
in place of string-equal
.
Examples:
To compare the two strings foo and bar:
(%string-equal foo 0 bar 0 nil)
To see if the string foo starts with the characters "bar"
:
(%string-equal foo 0 "bar" 0 3)
If this variable is t
, the functions %string-equal
and %string-search
consider case (and font) significant in comparing characters.
Normally this variable is nil
and those primitives ignore differences of case.
This variable may be bound by user programs around calls to
%string-equal
and %string-search-char
, but do not set it globally,
for that may cause system malfunctions.
0
) to consider-case ¶Searches through string starting at the index from,
which defaults to the beginning, and returns the index of the first
character that is char-equal
to char, or nil
if none is found.
If to is non-nil
, it is used in place of (string-length string)
to limit the extent of the search.
Example:
(string-search-char #\a "banana") => 1
Case (and font) is significant in comparison of characters if consider-case
is non-nil
. In other words, characters are compared using char=
rather
than char-equal
.
(string-search-char #\a "BAnana" 0 nil t) => 3
%string-search-char
is the microcode primitive called by string-search-char
and other functions. string must be an array and char, from,
and to must be fixnums. The arguments are all required.
Case-sensitivity is controlled by the value of the variable
alphabetic-case-affects-string-comparison
rather than by an argument.
Except for these these differences, %string-search-char
is the same as
string-search-char
. This function is documented for the benefit of
those who require the maximum possible efficiency in string searching.
0
) to consider-case ¶Like string-search-char
but searches string for a character different
from char.
Example:
(string-search-not-char #\B "banana") => 1 (string-search-not-char #\B "banana" 0 nil t) => 0
0
) to (key-from 0
) key-to consider-case ¶Searches for the string key in the string
string.
The search begins at from, which defaults to the beginning of
string. The value returned is the index of the first character of
the first instance of key, or nil
if none is found. If
to is non-nil
, it is used in place of (string-length
string)
to limit the extent of the search.
The arguments key-from and key-to can be used to specify the portion of key to be searched for, rather than all of key.
Case and font are significant in character
comparison if consider-case is non-nil
.
Example:
(string-search "an" "banana") => 1 (string-search "an" "banana" 2) => 3 (string-search "tank" "banana" 2 nil 1 3) => 3 (string-search "an" "BAnaNA" 0 nil 0 nil t) => nil
0
) to consider-case ¶Searches through string looking for a character that is in char-set. char-set is a set of characters, which can be represented as a sequence of characters or a single character.
The search begins at the index from, which defaults to the
beginning. It returns the index of the first character that is
char-equal
to some element of char-set, or nil
if none is
found. If to is non-nil
, it is used in place of
(string-length string)
to limit the extent of the search.
Case and font are significant in character
comparison if consider-case is non-nil
.
Example:
(string-search-set '(#\n #\o) "banana") => 2 (string-search-set "no" "banana") => 2
0
) to consider-case ¶Like string-search-set
but searches for a character that is not
in char-set.
Example:
(string-search-not-set '(#\a #\b) "banana") => 2
0
) consider-case ¶Searches through string in reverse
order, starting from the index one less than from (nil
for
from starts at the end of string), and returns the index of the
first character which is char-equal
to char, or nil
if none
is found. Note that the index returned is from the beginning of the
string, although the search starts from the end.
The last (leftmost) character of string examined is the one at index to.
Case and font are significant in character
comparison if consider-case is non-nil
. In this case,
char=
is used for the comparison rather than char-equal
.
Example:
(string-reverse-search-char #\n "banana") => 4
0
) consider-case ¶Like string-reverse-search-char
but searches for a character in string
that is different from char.
Example:
(string-reverse-search-not-char #\a "banana") => 4
;4 is the index of the second "n"
0
) (key-from 0
) key-to consider-case ¶Searches for the string key in the string string.
The search proceeds in reverse order, starting
from the index one less than from,
and returns the index of the first (leftmost) character of the first instance found,
or nil
if none is found. Note that the index returned
is from the beginning of the string, although the search starts from the end.
The from condition, restated, is that the instance of key found
is the rightmost one whose rightmost character is before the from’th character
of string. nil
for from means the search starts at the end of string.
The last (leftmost) character of string examined is the one at index to.
Example:
(string-reverse-search "na" "banana") => 4
The arguments key-from and key-to can be used to specify the
portion of key to be searched for, rather than all of key.
Case and font are significant in character
comparison if consider-case is non-nil
.
0
) consider-case ¶Searches through string in reverse order for a character
which is char-equal
to some element of char-set.
char-set is a set of characters, which can be represented as a list
of characters, a string of characters or a single character.
The search starts from an index one less than from, and returns the
index of the first suitable character found, or nil
if none is
found. nil
for from means the search starts at the end of
string. Note that the index returned is from the beginning of the
string, although the search starts from the end. The last (leftmost)
character of string examined is the one at index to.
Case and font are significant in character
comparison if consider-case is non-nil
. In this case,
char=
is used for the comparison rather than char-equal
.
(string-reverse-search-set "ab" "banana") => 5
0
) consider-case ¶Like string-reverse-search-set
but searches for a character which
is not in char-set.
(string-reverse-search-not-set '(#\a #\n) "banana") => 0
t
) (retain-font-p t
) ¶Returns a copy of string in which all occurrences of old-char have been replaced by new-char.
Case and font are ignored in comparing old-char against characters of string.
Normally the font information of the character replaced is preserved, so that an old-char
in font 3 is replaced by a new-char in font 3. If retain-font-p is nil
,
the font specified in new-char is stored whenever a character is replaced.
If copy-p is nil
, string is modified destructively and returned.
No copy is made.
Returns a copy of the portion of string that follows the next occurrence of char after index start. The portion copied ends at index end. If char is not found before end, a null string is returned.
The value is consed in area area, or in default-cons-area
,
unless it is a null string.
start defaults to zero, and end to the length of string.
See also make-symbol
(make-symbol-fun), which given a string makes
a new uninterned symbol with that print name, and intern
(intern-fun), which given a string returns the one and only symbol
(in the current package) with that print name.
The following functions are provided primarily for Maclisp compatibility.
(alphalessp string1 string2)
is equivalent to
(string-lessp string1 string2)
.
This predicate is equivalent to string=
.
Returns the index’th character of string
as a symbol. Note that 1-origin indexing is used. This function
is mainly for Maclisp compatibility; aref
should be used
to index into strings (but aref
does not coerce symbols
or numbers into strings).
Returns the index’th character of string
as a fixnum. Note that 1-origin indexing is used. This function
is mainly for Maclisp compatibility; aref
should be used
to index into strings (but aref
does not coerce symbols
or numbers into strings).
Like character
, but returns a symbol
whose printname is the character instead of returning a fixnum.
Examples:
(ascii #o101) => A (ascii #o56) => /.
The symbol returned is interned in the current package (see package).
Returns an uninterned symbol whose print-name is a string made up of the characters in char-list.
Example:
(maknam '(a b #\0 d)) => ab0d
implode
is like maknam
except that the returned symbol
is interned in the current package.
Functions are the basic building blocks of Lisp programs. This chapter describes the functions in Zetalisp that are used to manipulate functions. It also explains how to manipulate special forms and macros.
This chapter contains internal details intended for those writing programs to manipulate programs as well as material suitable for the beginner. Feel free to skip sections that look complicated or uninteresting when reading this for the first time.
There are many different kinds of functions in Zetalisp. Here are the printed representations of examples of some of them:
foo (lambda (x) (car (last x))) (named-lambda foo (x) (car (last (x)))) (subst (x) (car (last x))) #<dtp-fef-pointer append 1424771> #<dtp-u-entry last 270> #<dtp-closure 1477464>
We will examine these and other types of functions in detail later in this chapter. There is one thing they all have in common: a function is a Lisp object that can be applied to arguments. All of the above objects may be applied to some arguments and will return a value. Functions are Lisp objects and so can be manipulated in all the usual ways; you can pass them as arguments, return them as values, and make other Lisp objects refer to them.
The name of a function does not have to be a symbol. Various kinds of lists describe other places where a function can be found. A Lisp object that describes a place to find a function is called a function spec. (‘Spec’ is short for ‘specification’.) Here are the printed representations of some typical function specs:
foo (:property foo bar) (:method tv:graphics-mixin :draw-line) (:internal foo 1) (:within foo bar) (:location #<dtp-locative 7435216>)
Function specs have two purposes: they specify a place to remember a function, and they serve to name functions. The most common kind of function spec is a symbol, which specifies that the function cell of the symbol is the place to remember the function. We will see all the different types of function spec, and what they mean, shortly. Function specs are not the same thing as functions. You cannot, in general, apply a function spec to arguments. The time to use a function spec is when you want to do something to the function, such as define it, look at its definition, or compile it.
Some kinds of functions remember their own names, and some don’t. The
“name” remembered by a function can be any kind of function spec,
although it is usually a symbol. In the examples of functions in the
previous section, the one starting with the symbol named-lambda
, the
one whose printed representation included dtp-fef-pointer
, and the
dtp-u-entry
remembered names (the function specs foo
,
append
, and last
respectively). The others didn’t remember
their names.
To define a function spec means to make that function spec remember
a given function. Programs do this by calling fdefine
; you give
fdefine
a function spec and a function, and fdefine
remembers
the function in the place specified by the function spec. The function
associated with a function spec is called the definition of the
function spec. A single function can be
the definition of more than one function spec at the same time, or of no
function specs.
The definition of a function spec can be obtained with fdefinition
.
(function function-spec)
does so too, but here function-spec
is not evaluated. For example, (function foo)
evaluates to the
function definition of foo
. fdefinition
is used by programs
whose purpose is to examine function definitions, whereas function
is used in this way by programs of all sorts to obtain a specific
definition and use it. See function-fun.
To define a function means to create a new function and define a
given function spec as that new function. This is what the defun
special form does. Several other special forms, such as defmethod
(defmethod-fun) and defselect
(defselect-fun), do this too.
These special forms that define functions usually take a function spec,
create a function whose name is that function spec, and then define that
function spec to be the newly-created function. Most function
definitions are done this way, and so usually if you go to a function
spec and see what function is there, the function’s name is the
same as the function spec. However, if you define a function named
foo
with defun
, and then define the symbol bar
to be this
same function, the name of the function is unaffected; both foo
and
bar
are defined to be the same function, and the name of that
function is foo
, not bar
.
A function spec’s definition in general consists of a basic
definition surrounded by encapsulations. Both the basic
definition and the encapsulations are functions, but of recognizably
different kinds. What defun
creates is a basic definition, and
usually that is all there is. Encapsulations are made by
function-altering functions such as trace
, breakon
and advise
. When the
function is called, the entire definition, which includes the tracing
and advice, is used. If the function is redefined with defun
,
only the basic definition is changed; the encapsulations are left in
place. See the section on encapsulations, encapsulate.
A function spec is a Lisp object of one of the following types:
a symbol
The function is remembered in the function cell of the symbol. See fsymeval-fun for an explanation of function cells and the primitive functions to manipulate them.
(:property symbol property)
The function is remembered on the property list of the symbol; doing
(get symbol property)
returns the function. Storing
functions on property lists is a frequently-used technique for
dispatching (that is, deciding at run-time which function to call, on
the basis of input data).
(:method flavor-name operation)
(:method flavor-name method-type operation)
(:method flavor-name method-type operation suboperation)
The function is remembered inside internal data structures of the flavor system and is called automatically as part of handling the operation operation on instances of flavor-name. See the chapter on flavors (flavor) for details.
(:handler flavor-name operation)
This is a name for the function actually called when an operation message
is sent to an instance of the flavor flavor-name. The difference
between :handler
and :method
is that the handler may be a method
inherited from some other flavor or a combined method automatically
written by the flavor system. Methods are what you define in source files;
handlers are not. Note that redefining or encapsulating a handler affects
only the named flavor, not any other flavors built out of it. Thus
:handler
function specs are often used with trace
(see trace-fun), breakon
(breakon-fun), and advise
(advise-fun).
(:select-method function-spec operation)
This function spec assumes that the definition of function-spec is a select-method object (see select-method) containing an alist of operation names and functions to handle them, and refers to one particular element of that alist: the one for operation operation.
The function is remembered in that alist element and is called when function-spec’s definition is called with first argument operation.
:select-method
function specs are most often used implicitly
through defselect
. One of the things done by
(defselect foo (:win (x) (cons 'win x)) ...)
is to define the function spec (:select-method foo :win)
.
:select-method
function specs are explicitly given
function definitions when you use defselect-incremental
instead of defselect
, as in
(defselect-incremental foo) (defun (:select-method foo :win) (ignore x) (cons 'win x))
(:lambda-macro name)
This is a name for the function that expands the lambda macro name.
(:location pointer)
The function is stored in the cdr of pointer, which may be a locative
or a list. This is for pointing at an arbitrary place
that there is no other way to describe. This form of function spec
isn’t useful in defun
(and related special forms) because the
reader has no printed representation for locative pointers and always
creates new lists; these function specs are intended for programs
that manipulate functions (see programs-that-manipulate-functions).
(:within within-function function-to-affect)
This refers to the meaning of the symbol function-to-affect, but
only where it occurs in the text of the definition of
within-function. If you define this function spec as anything
but the symbol function-to-affect itself, then that symbol is
replaced throughout the definition of within-function by a new
symbol, which is then defined as you specify. See the section on
si:rename-within
encapsulations (rename-within-section) for more
information.
It is rarely useful to define a :within
function spec by hand, but
often useful to trace or advise one. For example,
(breakon '(:within myfunction eval))
allows you to break when eval
is called from myfunction
.
Simply doing (breakon 'eval)
will probably blow away your machine.
(:internal function-spec number)
Some Lisp functions contain internal functions, created by
(function (lambda ...))
forms. These internal functions need names when
compiled, but they do not have symbols as names; instead they are named
by :internal
function-specs. function-spec is the name of the
containing function. number is a sequence number; the first
internal function the compiler comes across in a given function is
numbered 0, the next 1, etc. Internal functions are remembered inside
the compiled function object of their containing function.
(:internal function-spec symbol)
If a Lisp function uses flet
to name an internal function,
you can use the local name defined with flet
in the
:internal
function spec instead of a number. Here is an
example of such a function:
(defun foo (a) (flet ((square (x) (* x x))) (+ a (square a))))
After compiling foo
, you could use the function spec (:internal foo square)
to refer to the internal function locally named square
.
You could also use (:internal foo 0)
. If there are multiple flet
’s
defining local functions with the same name, only the first can be
referred to by name this way.
Here is an example defining a function whose name is not a symbol:
(defun (:property foo bar-maker) (thing &optional kind) (set-the 'bar thing (make-bar 'foo thing kind)))
This puts a function on foo
’s bar-maker
property. Now you can
say
(funcall (get 'foo 'bar-maker) 'baz)
or
(funcall #'(:property foo bar-maker) 'bax)
Unlike the other kinds of function spec, a symbol can be used as a function. If you apply a symbol to arguments, the symbol’s function definition is used instead. If the definition of the first symbol is another symbol, the definition of the second symbol is used, and so on, any number of times. But this is an exception; in general, you can’t apply function specs to arguments.
A keyword symbol that identifies function specs (i.e, that may appear
in the car of a list which is a function spec) is identified by a
sys:function-spec-handler
property whose value is a function that
implements the various manipulations on function specs of that type.
The interface to this function is internal and not documented in this
manual.
For compatibility with Maclisp, the function-defining special forms
defun
, macro
, and defselect
(and other defining
forms built out of them, such as defmacro
)
also accept a list
(symbol property)
as a function name. This is translated into
(:property symbol property)
symbol must not be one of the keyword symbols that identify a function spec, since that would be ambiguous.
The usual way of defining a function that is part of a
program. A defun
form looks like:
(defun name lambda-list body...)
name is the function spec you wish to define as a function.
The lambda-list is a list of the names to give to the arguments of
the function. Actually, it is a little more general than that; it can
contain lambda-list keywords such as &optional
and &rest
.
(These keywords are explained in lambda-list and other
keywords are explained in lambda-list-keywords.)
See additional-defun-explanation for some additional syntactic features of defun
.
defun
creates a list that looks like
(named-lambda name lambda-list body...)
and puts it in the function cell of name. name is now defined as a function and can be called by other forms.
Examples:
(defun addone (x) (1+ x)) (defun foo (a &optional (b 5) c &rest e &aux j) (setq j (+ (addone a) b)) (cond ((not (null c)) (cons j e)) (t j)))
addone
is a function which expects a number as an argument, and
returns a number one larger. foo
is a complicated function that
takes one required argument, two optional arguments, and any number of
additional arguments that are given to the function as a list named
e
.
A declaration (a list starting with declare
) can appear as the first
element of the body. It applies to the entire function definition;
if it is a special
declaration, it applies to bindings made in
the lambda list and to free references anywhere in the function. For
example,
(defun foo (x)
(declare (special x))
(bar)) ;bar uses x
free.
causes the binding of x
to be a dynamic binding, and
(defun foo (&rest args) (declare (arglist a b c)) (apply 'bar args))
causes (arglist 'foo)
to return (a b c)
rather than
(&rest args)
, presumably because the former is more informative
in the particular application.
A documentation string can also appear at the beginning of the body;
it may precede or follow a declaration. This documentation string becomes part of the
function’s debugging info and can be obtained with the function
documentation
(see documentation-fun). The first line of the
string should be a complete sentence that makes sense read by itself,
since there are two editor commands to get at the documentation, one of
which is “brief” and prints only the first line. Example:
(defun my-append (&rest lists) "Like append but copies all the lists. This is like the Lisp function append, except that append copies all lists except the last, whereas this function copies all of its arguments including the last one." ...)
A documentation string may not be the last element of the body; a string in that position is interpreted as a form to evaluate and return and is not considered to be a documentation string.
For more information on defining functions, and other ways of doing so, see function-defining.
Here is a list of the various things a user (as opposed to a program) is likely to want to do to a function. In all cases, you specify a function spec to say where to find the function.
To print out the definition of the function spec with indentation to
make it legible, use grindef
(see grindef-fun). This works only
for interpreted functions. If the definition is a compiled function, it
can’t be printed out as Lisp code, but its compiled code can be printed
by the disassemble
function (see disassemble-fun).
To find out about how to call the function, you can ask to see its
documentation or its argument names. (The argument names are usually
chosen to have mnemonic significance for the caller). Use arglist
(arglist-fun) to see the argument names and documentation
(documentation-fun) to see the documentation string. There are also
editor commands for doing these things: the Control-Shift-D
and
Meta-Shift-D
commands are for looking at a function’s documentation,
and Control-Shift-A
is for looking at an argument list.
Control-Shift-A
and Control-Shift-D
do not ask for the function
name; they act on the function that is called by the innermost
expression which the cursor is inside. Usually this is the function
that will be called by the form you are in the process of writing.
They are available in the rubout handler as well.
You can see the function’s debugging info alist by means of the function
debugging-info
(see debugging-info-fun).
When you are debugging, you can use trace
(see trace-fun) to
obtain a printout or a break loop whenever the function is called. You
can use breakon
(see breakon-fun) to cause the error handler to
be entered whenever the function is called; from there, you can step
through further function calls and returns. You can customize the
definition of the function, either temporarily or permanently, using
advise
(see advise-fun).
There are many kinds of functions in Zetalisp. This section briefly describes each kind of function. Note that a function is also a piece of data and can be passed as an argument, returned, put in a list, and so forth.
There are four kinds of functions, classified by how they work.
First, there are interpreted functions: you define them with
defun
, they are represented as list structure, and they are
interpreted by the Lisp evaluator.
Secondly, there are compiled functions: they are defined
by compile
or by loading a QFASL file, they are represented by a
special Lisp data type, and they are executed directly by the microcode.
Similar to compiled functions are microcode functions, which are written
in microcode (either by hand or by the micro-compiler) and executed directly
by the hardware.
Thirdly, there are various types of Lisp object that can be applied to arguments, but when they are applied they dig up another function somewhere and apply it instead. These include select-methods, closures, instances, and entities.
Finally, there are various types of Lisp object that, when called as functions, do something special related to the specific data type. These include arrays and stack-groups.
An interpreted function is a piece of list structure that represents a program according to the rules of the Lisp interpreter. Unlike other kinds of functions, interpreted functions can be printed out and read back in (they have a printed representation that the reader understands), can be pretty-printed (see grindef-fun), and can be examined with the usual functions for list-structure manipulation.
There are four kinds of interpreted functions: lambda
s,
named-lambda
s, subst
s, and named-subst
s. A lambda
function is the
simplest kind. It is a list that looks like this:
(lambda lambda-list form1 form2...)
The symbol lambda
identifies this list as a lambda
function. lambda-list is a description of what arguments the
function takes; see lambda-list for details. The forms
make up the body of the function. When the function is called,
the argument variables are bound to the values of the arguments
as described by lambda-list, and then the forms in the body are
evaluated, one by one. The values of the function are the values of its
last form.
A named-lambda
is like a lambda
but contains an extra element in
which the system remembers the function’s name, documentation, and other
information. Having the function’s name there allows the error handler
and other tools to give the user more information. You would not
normally write a named-lambda
yourself; named-lambda
exists so
that defun
can use it. A named-lambda
function looks like this:
(named-lambda name lambda-list body forms...)
If the name slot contains a symbol, it is the function’s name.
Otherwise it is a list whose car is the name and whose cdr is the
function’s debugging information alist. (See debugging-info
,
debugging-info-fun.) Note that the name need not be a symbol;
it can be any function spec. For example,
(defun (foo bar) (x) (car (reverse x)))
gives foo
a bar
property whose value is
(named-lambda ((:property foo bar)) (x) (car (reverse x)))
A subst
is a function which is open-coded by the compiler.
A subst
is just like a lambda
as far as the interpreter is concerned.
It is a list that looks like this:
(subst lambda-list form1 form2...)
The difference between a subst
and a lambda
is the way they are
handled by the compiler. A call to a normal function is compiled as a
closed subroutine; the compiler generates code to compute the values
of the arguments and then apply the function to those values. A call to
a subst
is compiled as an open subroutine; the compiler
incorporates the body forms of the subst
into the function being
compiled, substituting the argument forms for references to the
variables in the subst
’s lambda-list. subst
’s are described
more fully on defsubst-fun, with the explanation of defsubst
.
A named-subst
is the same as a subst
except that it has a name
just as a named-lambda
does. It looks like
(named-subst name lambda-list form1 form2 ...)
where name is interpreted the same way as in a named-lambda
.
Lambda macros may appear in functions where lambda
would have
previously appeared. When the compiler or interpreter detects a
function whose car is a lambda macro, they expand the macro in much
the same way that ordinary Lisp macros are expanded–the lambda
macro is called with the function as its argument and is expected to
return another function as its value. The definition of a lambda macro
(that is, the function which expands it) may be accessed with the
(:lambda-macro
name) function spec.
The value returned by the lambda macro expander function may be any
valid function. Usually it is a list starting with lambda
,
subst
, named-lambda
or named-subst
, but it could
also be another use of a lambda macro, or even a compiled function.
By analogy with macro
, defines a lambda macro to be called
name. lambda-list should consist of one variable, which
is bound to the function that caused the lambda macro to be called. The
lambda macro must return a function. For example:
(lambda-macro ilisp (x) `(lambda (&optional ,@(second x) &rest ignore) . ,(cddr x)))
defines a lambda macro called ilisp
which can be used to define functions
that accept arguments like a standard Interlisp function: all
arguments are optional and extra arguments are ignored. A typical use
would be:
(fun-with-functional-arg #'(ilisp (x y z) (list x y z)))
This passes to fun-with-functional-arg
a function which will ignore
extra arguments beyond the third, and will default x
, y
and
z
to nil
.
deflambda-macro
is like defmacro
, but defines a lambda macro
instead of a normal macro. Here is how ilisp
could be defined
using deflambda-macro
:
(deflambda-macro ilisp (argument-list &body body) `(lambda (&optional ,@argument-list &rest ignore) . ,body))
Defines a function with a definition that uses an
arbitrary lambda macro instead of lambda
. It takes arguments like
defun
, expect that the argument immediatly following the function
specifier is the name of the lambda macro to be used. deffunction
expands the lambda macro immediatly, so the lambda macro must have
been previously defined.
Example:
(deffunction some-interlisp-like-function ilisp (x y z) (list x y z))
would define a function called some-interlisp-like-function
with the definition (ilisp (x y z) (list x y z))
.
(defun foo ...)
could be considered an abbreviation for
(deffunction foo lambda ...)
There are two kinds of compiled functions: macrocoded functions
and microcoded functions. The Lisp compiler converts lambda
and named-lambda
functions into macrocoded functions. A
macrocoded function’s printed representation looks like:
#<dtp-fef-pointer append 1424771>
This type of Lisp object is also called a ‘Function Entry Frame’, or ‘FEF’ for short. Like ‘car’ and ‘cdr’, the name is historical in origin and doesn’t really mean anything. The object contains Lisp Machine machine code that does the computation expressed by the function; it also contains a description of the arguments accepted, any constants required, the name, documentation, and other things. Unlike Maclisp “subr-objects”, macrocoded functions are full-fledged objects and can be passed as arguments, stored in data structure, and applied to arguments.
The printed representation of a microcoded function looks like:
#<dtp-u-entry last 270>
Most microcompiled functions are basic Lisp primitives or subprimitives written in Lisp Machine microcode. You can also convert your own macrocode functions into microcode functions in some circumstances, using the micro-compiler.
A closure is a kind of function that contains another function and a
set of special variable bindings. When the closure is applied, it
puts the bindings into effect and then applies the other function. When
that returns, the closure bindings are removed. Closures are made with
the function closure
. See closure for more information.
Entities are slightly different from closures; see entity.
A select-method (internal type code dtp-select-method
) contains an alist of symbols and
functions. When one is called, the first argument is looked up in the
alist to find the particular function to be called. This function is
applied to the rest of the arguments. The alist may have a list of
symbols in place of a symbol, in which case the associated function is
called if the first argument is any of the symbols on the list. If
cdr
of last
of the alist is non-nil
, it is a default
handler function, which gets called if the message key is not found
in the alist. Select-methods can be created with the defselect
special form (see defselect-fun). If the select-method is the
definition of a function-spec, the individual functions in the alist
can be referred to or defined using :select-method
function specs (see
select-method-function-spec).
An instance is a message-receiving object that has both a state and a table of message-handling functions (called methods). Refer to the chapter on flavors (flavor) for further information.
An array can be used as a function. The arguments to the array are
the indices and the value is the contents of the element of the
array. This is for Maclisp compatibility and is not recommended usage.
Use aref
(aref-fun) instead.
A stack group can be called as a function. This is one way to pass control to another stack group. See stack-group.
The special forms of Zetalisp, such as quote
, let
and
cond
, are actually implemented with an unusual sort of function.
First, let’s restate the outline of how the evaluator works. When the
evaluator is given a list whose first element is a symbol, the form may
be a function form, a special form, or a macro form (see
description-of-evaluation). If the definition of the symbol is a
function, then the function is just applied to the result of evaluating
the rest of the subforms. If the definition is a cons whose car is
macro
, then it is a macro form; these are explained in macro.
What about special forms?
A special form is implemented by a function that is flagged to tell
the evaluator to refrain from evaluating some or all of the arguments
to the function. Such functions make use of the lambda-list
keyword "e
.
The evaluator, on seeing the "e
in the lambda list of an
interpreted function (or something equivalent in a compiled function)
skips the evaluation of the arguments to which the "e
applies. Aside from that, it calls the function normally.
For example, quote
could be defined as
(defun quote ("e arg) arg)
Evaluation of (quote x)
would see the "e
in the
definition, implying that the argument arg should not be
evaluated. Therefore, the argument passed to the definition
of quote
would be the symbol x
rather than the value of x
.
From then on, the definition of quote
would execute in the normal
fashion, so x
would be the value of arg
and x
would
be returned.
"e
applies to all the following arguments, but it can be
cancelled with &eval
. A simple setq
that accepted only one
variable and one value could be defined as follows:
(defun setq ("e variable &eval value) (set variable value))
The actual definition of setq
is more complicated and uses
a lambda list ("e &rest variables-and-values)
. Then it must
go through the rest-argument, evaluating every other element.
The definitions of special forms are designed with the assumption that
they will be called by eval
. It does not usually make much sense to
call one with funcall
or apply
. funcall
and apply
do
not evaluate any arguments; they receive values of arguments, rather
than expressions for them, and pass these values directly to the
function to be called. There is no evaluation for funcall
or
apply
to refrain from performing. Most special forms explicitly
call eval
on some of their arguments, or parts of them, and if
called with apply
or funcall
they will still do so. This
behavior is rarely useful, so calling special forms with apply
or
funcall
should be avoided. Encapsulations can do this successfully,
because they can arrange that quoted arguments are quoted also on entry
to the encapsulation.
It is possible to define your own special form using "e
. Macros
can also be used to accomplish the same thing. It is preferable to
implement language extensions as macros rather than special forms,
because macros directly define a Lisp-to-Lisp translation and therefore
can be understood by both the interpreter and the compiler. Special
forms, on the other hand, only extend the interpreter. The compiler has
to be modified in an ad hoc way to understand each new special form
so that code using it can be compiled. For example, it would not work
for a compiled function to call the interpreted definition of setq
;
the set
in that definition would not be able to act on local
variables of the compiled function.
Since all real programs are eventually compiled,
writing your own special functions is strongly discouraged.
The purpose of "e
is to be used in the system’s own
standard special forms.
New Lisp constructs in the system are also implemented as macros most of the time; macros are less work for us, too.
defun
is a special form that is put in a program to define a
function; defsubst
and macro
are others.
This section explains how these special forms work, how
they relate to the different kinds of functions, and how they interface to the
rest of the function-manipulation system.
Function-defining special forms typically take as arguments a function
spec and a description of the function to be made, usually in the form
of a list of argument names and some forms that constitute the body of
the function. They construct a function, give it the function spec as
its name, and define the function spec to be the new function.
Different special forms make different kinds of functions. defun
makes a named-lambda
function, and defsubst
makes a named-subst
function. macro
makes a macro; though the macro definition is not
really a function, it is like a function as far as definition handling
is concerned.
These special forms are used in writing programs because the function
names and bodies are constants. Programs that define functions usually
want to compute the functions and their names, so they use fdefine
.
See fdefine-fun.
All of these function-defining special forms alter only the basic definition of the function spec. Encapsulations are preserved. See encapsulate.
The special forms only create interpreted functions. There is no special way of defining a compiled function. Compiled functions are made by compiling interpreted ones. The same special form that defines the interpreted function, when processed by the compiler, yields the compiled function. See compiler for details.
Note that the editor understands these and other “defining” special forms
(e.g defmethod
, defvar
, defmacro
, defstruct
, etc.)
to some extent, so that when you ask for the definition of something, the editor
can find it in its source file and show it to you. The general convention
is that anything that is used at top level (not inside a function)
and starts with def
should be a special form for defining things
and should be understood by the editor. defprop
is an exception.
The defun
special form (and the defunp
macro which expands into a
defun
) are used for creating ordinary interpreted functions (see defun-fun).
For Maclisp compatibility, a type symbol may be inserted between
name and lambda-list in the defun
form. The following types
are understood:
expr
The same as no type.
fexpr
"e
and &rest
are prefixed to the lambda list.
macro
A macro is defined instead of a normal function.
If lambda-list is a non-nil
symbol instead of a list,
the function is recognized as a Maclisp lexpr and it is converted
in such a way that the arg
, setarg
, and listify
functions
can be used to access its arguments (see arg-fun).
The defsubst
special form is used to create substitutible functions. It
is used just like defun
but produces a list starting with named-subst
instead of one starting with named-lambda
. The named-subst
function
acts just like the corresponding named-lambda
function when applied,
but it can also be open-coded (incorporated into its callers) by the compiler.
See defsubst-fun for full information.
The macro
special form is the primitive means of creating a macro.
It gives a function spec a definition that is a macro definition rather
than a actual function. A macro is not a function because it cannot be
applied, but it can appear as the car of a form to be evaluated.
Most macros are created with the more powerful defmacro
special form.
See macro.
The defselect
special form defines a select-method function. See defselect-fun.
Unlike the above special forms, the next two (deff
and def
)
do not create new functions. They simply serve as hints to the editor
that a function is being stored into a function spec here, and therefore
if someone asks for the source code of the definition of that function spec,
this is the place to look for it.
If a function is created in some strange way, wrapping a def
special
form around the code that creates it informs the editor of the connection.
The form
(def function-spec form1 form2...)
simply evaluates the forms form1, form2, etc. It is assumed that these forms will create or obtain a function somehow, and make it the definition of function-spec.
Alternatively, you could put (def function-spec)
in
front of or anywhere near the forms which define the function. The
editor only uses it to tell which line to put the cursor on.
deff
is a simplified version of def
. It
evaluates the form definition-creator, which should produce a function,
and makes that function the definition of function-spec, which is not
evaluated. deff
is used for giving a function spec a definition which is not obtainable
with the specific defining forms such as defun
.
For example,
(deff foo 'bar)
makes foo
equivalent to bar
, with an indirection so that if
bar
changes foo
will likewise change; conversely,
(deff foo (function bar))
copies the definition of bar
into foo
with no indirection, so that
further changes to bar
will have no effect on foo
.
Is like deff
(see deff-fun) but for defining macros.
definition-creator is evaluated to produce a suitable
definition-as-a-macro and then function-spec is defined that way.
The definition-as-a-macro should be a cons whose car is macro
and whose cdr is an expander function. Alternatively, a definition
as a subst function can be used; either a list starting with
subst
or named-subst
or a FEF which records it was compiled
from such a list.
The difference between deff
and deff-macro
is that compile-file
assumes that deff-macro
is defining something which should be expanded
during compilation. For the rest of the file, the macro defined here
is available for expansion. When the file is ultimately loaded,
or if compilation is done in-core, deff
and deff-macro
are
equivalent.
This macro turns into nil
, doing nothing. It exists for the sake of the
listing generation program, which uses it to declare names of special forms
that define objects (such as functions) that should cross-reference.
This function is used by defun
and the compiler to convert
Maclisp-style lexpr, fexpr, and macro defun
s to Zetalisp
definitions. x should be the cdr of a (defun ...)
form.
defun-compatibility
returns a corresponding (defun ...)
or
(macro ...)
form, in the usual Zetalisp format. You shouldn’t
ever need to call this yourself.
defselect
defines a function which is a select-method. This
function contains a table of subfunctions; when it is called, the first
argument, a symbol on the keyword package called the operation,
is looked up in the table to determine which subfunction to call. Each
subfunction can take a different number of arguments and have a
different pattern of arguments.
defselect
is useful for a variety of “dispatching” jobs. By analogy
with the more general message-passing facilities described in flavor,
the subfunctions are called methods and the list of arguments
is sometimes called a message.
The special form looks like
(defselect (function-spec default-handler no-which-operations) (operation (args...) body...) (operation (args...) body...) ...)
function-spec is the name of the function to be defined.
default-handler is optional; it must be a symbol and is a function
which gets called if the select-method is called with an unknown
operation. If default-handler is unsupplied or nil
, then an
unknown operation causes an error with condition name
sys:unclaimed-message
(see sys:unclaimed-message-condition).
Normally, methods for the operations :which-operations
,
:operation-handled-p
and :send-if-handles
are generated
automatically based on the set of existing methods. These operations
have the same meaning as they do on flavor instances; see vanilla-flavor
for their definitions. If no-which-operations is
non-nil
, these methods are not created automatically; however, you
can supply them yourself.
If function-spec is a symbol, and default-handler and no-which-operations
are not supplied, then the first subform of the defselect
may be just function-spec
by itself, not enclosed in a list.
The remaining subforms in a defselect
are the clauses, each
defining one method. operation is the operation to be handled by
this clause or a list of several operations to be handled by the same
clause. args is a lambda-list; it should not include the first
argument, which is the operation. body is the body of the
function.
A clause can instead look like:
(operation . symbol)
In this case, symbol is the name of a function that is to be called when the operation operation is performed. It will be called with the same arguments as the select-method, including the operation symbol itself.
The individual methods of the defselect
can be examined,
redefined, traced, etc using :select-method
function specs
(see select-method-function-spec).
defselect
defines a select-method function all at once. By
contrast, defselect-incremental
defines an empty select-method
to which methods can be added with defun
.
Specifically, defselect-incremental
function-spec, with just a
default handler and the standard methods :which-operations
,
:operation-handled-p
and :send-if-handles
.
Individual methods are defined by using defun
on a function spec
of the form (:select-method function-spec operation)
.
function-spec specifies where to find the select-method, and
operation is the operation for which a method should be defined.
The argument list of the defun
must include a first argument
which receives the operation name.
Example:
(defselect-incremental foo ignore)
;The function ignore
is the default handler
(defun (:select-method foo :lose) (ignore a)
(1+ a))
defines the same function foo
as
(defselect (foo ignore) (:lose (a) (1+ a)))
These two examples are not completely equivalent, however. Reevaluating
the defselect
gets rid of any methods that used to exist but have
been deleted from the defselect
itself. Reevaluating the
defselect-incremental
has no such effect, and reevaluating an
individual defun
redefines only that method. Methods can be removed
only with fundefine
.
Lexprs are the way Maclisp functions can accept variable numbers of arguments.
They are supported for compatibility only; &optional
and &rest
are much preferable. A lexpr definition looks like
(defun foo nargs body...)
where a symbol (nargs
, here) appears in place of a lambda-list.
When the function is called, nargs
is bound to the number of arguments
it was given. The arguments themselves are accessed using the functions
arg
, setarg
, and listify
.
(arg nil)
, when evaluated during the application of
a lexpr, gives the number of arguments supplied to that
lexpr.
This is primarily a debugging aid, since lexprs also receive their number of arguments
as the value of their lambda
-variable.
(arg i)
, when evaluated during the application of a lexpr, gives the value of the
i’th argument to the lexpr. i must be a fixnum in this case. It is an error if i is less than 1 or greater than the number
of arguments supplied to the lexpr. Example:
(defun foo nargs ;define a lexpr foo. (print (arg 2)) ;print the second argument. (+ (arg 1) ;return the sum of the first (arg (- nargs 1)))) ;and next to last arguments.
setarg
is used only during the application of a lexpr.
(setarg i x)
sets the
lexpr’s i’th argument to x.
i must be greater than zero
and not greater than the number of arguments passed to the lexpr.
After (setarg i x)
has been done, (arg i)
returns x.
(listify n)
manufactures a list of n of the
arguments of a lexpr. With a positive argument n, it returns a
list of the first n arguments of the lexpr. With a negative
argument n, it returns a list of the last (abs n)
arguments of the lexpr. Basically, it works as if defined as follows:
(defun listify (n)
(cond ((minusp n)
(listify1 (arg nil) (+ (arg nil) n 1)))
(t
(listify1 n 1))))
(defun listify1 (n m) ; auxiliary function.
(do ((i n (1- i))
(result nil (cons (arg i) result)))
((< i m) result)))
nil
) (no-query nil
) ¶This is the primitive used by defun
and everything else in the system
to change the definition of a function spec. If carefully is
non-nil
, which it usually should be, then only the basic definition
is changed; the previous basic definition is saved if possible (see
undefun
, undefun-fun), and any encapsulations of the function such
as tracing and advice are carried over from the old definition to the
new definition. carefully also causes the user to be queried if the
function spec is being redefined by a file different from the one that
defined it originally. However, this warning is suppressed if either the
argument no-query is non-nil
, or if the global variable
inhibit-fdefine-warnings
is t
.
If fdefine
is called while a file is being loaded, it records what
file the function definition came from so that the editor can find the
source code.
If function-spec was already defined as a function, and
carefully is non-nil
, the function-spec’s
:previous-definition
property is used to save the previous
definition. This property is used by the undefun
function
(undefun-fun), which restores the previous definition. The
properties for different kinds of function specs are stored in different
places; when a function spec is a symbol its properties are stored on
the symbol’s property list.
defun
and the other function-defining special forms all supply t
for carefully and nil
or nothing for no-query. Operations
that construct encapsulations, such as trace
, are the only ones
which use nil
for carefully.
defun
) no-query ¶Records a definition of name, of type type. type should be
defun
to record a function definition; then name is a function
spec. type can also be defvar
, defflavor
, defresource
,
defsignal
or anything else you want to use.
The value of sys:fdefine-file-pathname
is assumed to be the generic
pathname of the file the definition is coming from, or nil
if the
definition is not from a file. If a definition of the same name and
type has already been seen but not in the same file, and
no-query is nil
, a condition is signaled and then the user is
queried.
If si:record-source-file-name
returns nil
, it means that the
user or a condition handler said the redefinition should not be
performed.
While the system is loading a file, this is the generic pathname for the file.
The rest of the time it is nil
. fdefine
uses this to
remember what file defines each function.
Returns the generic pathname for the file in which function-spec
received a definition of type type. If type is nil
, the most
recent definition is used, regardless of its type.
function-spec really is a function spec only if type is defun
;
for example, if type is defvar
, function-spec is a variable
name. Other types that are used by the system are defflavor
and
defstruct
.
This function returns the generic pathname of the source file.
To obtain the actual source file pathname, use the
:source-pathname
operation (see pathname-source-pathname-method).
A second value is returned, which is the type of the definition that was reported.
Returns a list describing the generic pathnames of all the definitions this function-spec has received, of all types. The list is an alist whose elements look like
(type pathname...)
sys:redefinition
: (sys:warning
) ¶This condition, which is not an error, is signaled by
si:record-source-file-name
when something is redefined by a different
file. The handler for this condition can control what is done about the redefinition.
The condition instance provides the operations :name
,
:definition-type
, :old-pathname
and :new-pathname
.
:name
and :definition-type
return the name and type
arguments to si:record-source-file-name
. :old-pathname
and
:new-pathname
return two generic pathnames saying where the old
definition was and where this one is. The new pathname may be nil
,
meaning that the redefinition is being done by the user, not in any
file.
Two proceed types are available, :proceed
and
:inhibit-definition
. The first tells si:record-source-file-name
to return t
, the second tells it to return nil
. If the
condition is not handled at all, the user is queried or warned according
to the value of inhibit-fdefine-warnings
.
This variable is normally nil
. Setting it to t
prevents
si:record-source-file-name
from warning you and asking about
questionable redefinitions such as a function being redefined by a
different file than defined it originally, or a symbol that belongs to
one package being defined by a file that belongs to a different package.
Setting it to :just-warn
allows the warnings to be printed out, but
prevents the queries from happening; it assumes that your answer is
‘yes’, i.e that it is all right to redefine the function.
This function is obsolete. It is equivalent to
(fdefine symbol definition t force-flag)
This returns t
if function-spec has a definition, nil
if
it does not.
This returns function-spec’s definition. If it has none, an error occurs.
Equivalent to (locf (fdefinition function-spec))
. For some
kinds of function specs, though not for symbols, this (whichever way you
write it) can cause data structure to be created to hold a definition.
For example, if function-spec is of the :property
kind, then an
entry may have to be added to the property list if it isn’t already
there.
Makes function-spec undefined; the cell where its definition is
stored becomes void. For symbols this is equivalent to fmakunbound
.
If the function is encapsulated, fundefine
removes both the basic
definition and the encapsulations. Some types of function specs
(:location
for example) do not implement fundefine
.
fundefine
on a :within
function spec removes the replacement of
function-to-affect, putting the definition of within-function
back to its normal state. fundefine
on a :method
function spec
removes the method completely, so that future messages will be handled
by some other method (see the flavor chapter).
If function-spec has a saved previous basic definition, this
interchanges the current and previous basic definitions, leaving the
encapsulations alone. If function-spec has no saved previous
definition, undefun
asks the user whether to make it undefined.
This undoes the effect of redefining a function.
See also uncompile
(uncompile-fun).
Returns the value of the indicator property of function-spec,
or nil
if it doesn’t have such a property.
Gives function-spec an indicator property whose value is value.
Compares the two function specs with an ordering that is useful in sorting lists of function specs for presentation to the user.
If function-spec does not have its own definition, textually speaking,
but is defined as part of the definition of something else, this function
returns the function spec for that something else. For example, if
function-spec is an accessor function for a defstruct
, the value
returned is the name of the defstruct
.
The intent is that if the caller has not been able to find the definition
of function-spec in a more direct fashion, it can try looking for the
definition of the function-parent of function-spec.
This is used by the editor’s Meta-
command.
sys:invalid-function-spec
: (error
) ¶This condition name belongs to the error signaled when you refer to a function spec that is syntactically invalid; such as, if it is a list whose car is not a recognized type of function spec.
The condition object supports the operation :function-spec
,
which returns the function spec which was invalid.
Note that in a few cases the condition :wrong-type-argument
is
signaled instead. These are the cases in which the error is
correctable.
These functions take a function as argument and return information about that function. Some also accept a function spec and operate on its definition. The others do not accept function specs in general but do accept a symbol as standing for its definition. (Note that a symbol is a function as well as a function spec).
The function documentation
can be used to examine a function’s
documentation string. See documentation-fun.
This returns the debugging info alist of function, or nil
if it has none.
arglist
is given a function or a function spec, and returns its best
guess at the nature of the function’s lambda-list. It can also
return a second value which is a list of descriptive names for the
values returned by the function.
If function is a symbol, arglist
of its function definition is used.
If the function is an actual lambda
-expression,
its cadr, the lambda-list, is returned. But if function
is compiled, arglist
attempts to reconstruct the lambda-list of the original
definition, using whatever debugging information was saved by the compiler.
Some functions’ real argument lists are not what would be most
descriptive to a user. A function may take a rest argument for
technical reasons even though there are standard meanings for the first
elements of that argument. For such cases, the definition of the
function can specify, with a local declaration, a value to be returned
when the user asks about the argument list. Example:
(defun foo (&rest rest-arg) (declare (arglist x y &rest z)) .....)
real-flag has one of three values:
nil
Return the arglist declared by the user in preference to the actual one.
t
Return the actual arglist as computed from the function definition’s
handling of arguments, ignoring any arglist
declaration.
For a compiled function, this omits all keyword arguments (replacing
them with a rest argument) and may replace initial values of optional
arguments with si:*hairy*
if the actual expressions are too complicated.
compile
Like nil
, but in the case of a compiled function it returns
the actual arglist of the lambda-expression that was originally compiled.
The compiler uses this as a basis for checking for incorrect calls
to the function.
Programs interested in how many and what kind (evaluated or quoted) of
arguments to pass should use args-info
instead.
When a function returns multiple values, it is useful to give
the values names so that the caller can be reminded which value is
which. By means of a return-list
declaration in the function’s
definition, entirely analogous to the arglist
declaration above,
you can specify a list of mnemonic names for the returned values. This
list is then returned by arglist
as the second value.
(arglist 'arglist)
=> (function &optional real-flag) and (arglist return-list)
Returns the name of the function function, if that can be determined. If function does not describe what its name is, function itself is returned.
If try-flavor-name is non-nil
, then if function is a flavor
instance (which can, after all, be used as a function), then the flavor
name is returned. If the optional argument is nil
, flavor instances
are treated as anonymous.
Returns the name of argument number arg-number in function function.
Returns nil
if the function doesn’t have such an argument,
or if the name is not recorded.
&rest
arguments are not obtained with arg-number
;
use rest-arg-name
to obtain the name of function’s
&rest
argument, if any.
Returns the name of the rest argument of function function, or
nil
if function does not have one.
Returns the name of local variable number local-number in function function.
If local-number is zero, this gets the name of the rest arg
in any function that accepts a rest arg.
Returns nil
if the function doesn’t have such a local.
Returns a fixnum called the “numeric argument descriptor” of the function, which describes the way the function takes arguments. This descriptor is used internally by the microcode, the evaluator, and the compiler. function can be a function or a function spec.
The information is stored in various bits and byte fields in the
fixnum, which are referenced by the symbolic names shown below.
By the usual Lisp Machine convention, those starting with a single ‘%
’
are bit-masks (meant to be logand
’ed or bit-test
’ed with the number), and those
starting with ‘%%
’ are byte specifiers, meant to be used with ldb
or ldb-test
.
Here are the fields:
%%arg-desc-min-args
¶This is the minimum number of arguments that may be passed to this function, i.e the number of required parameters.
%%arg-desc-max-args
¶This is the maximum number of arguments that may be passed to this function, i.e the sum of the number of required parameters and the number of optional parameters. If there is a rest argument, this is not really the maximum number of arguments that may be passed; an arbitrarily-large number of arguments is permitted, subject to limitations on the maximum size of a stack frame (about 200 words).
%arg-desc-evaled-rest
¶If this bit is set, the function has a rest argument, and it is not quoted.
%arg-desc-quoted-rest
¶If this bit is set, the function has a rest argument, and it is quoted. Most special forms have this bit.
%arg-desc-fef-quote-hair
¶If this bit is set, there are some quoted arguments other than the rest argument (if any), and the pattern of quoting is too complicated to describe here. The ADL (Argument Description List) in the FEF should be consulted. This is only for special forms.
%arg-desc-interpreted
¶This function is not a compiled-code object, and a numeric argument descriptor
cannot be computed.
Usually args-info
does not return this bit, although %args-info
does.
%arg-desc-fef-bind-hair
¶There is argument initialization, or something else too complicated to describe here. The ADL (Argument Description List) in the FEF should be consulted.
Note that %arg-desc-quoted-rest
and %arg-desc-evaled-rest
cannot both be set.
This is an internal function; it is like args-info
but does not work for interpreted functions. Also, function
must be a function, not a function spec. It exists because it has
to be in the microcode anyway, for apply
and the basic
function-calling mechanism.
The definition of a function spec actually has two parts: the basic
definition, and encapsulations. The basic definition is what
is created by functions like defun
, and encapsulations are additions made by
trace
or advise
to the basic definition. The purpose of making
the encapsulation a separate object is to keep track of what was made by
defun
and what was made by trace
. If defun
is done a second
time, it replaces the old basic definition with a new one while leaving
the encapsulations alone.
Only advanced users should ever need to use encapsulations directly via
the primitives explained in this section. The most common things to do
with encapsulations are provided as higher-level, easier-to-use
features: trace
(see trace-fun), breakon
(see breakon-fun)
and advise
(see advise-fun).
The actual definition of the function spec is the outermost encapsulation; this contains the next encapsulation, and so on. The innermost encapsulation contains the basic definition. The way this containing is done is as follows. An encapsulation is actually a function whose debugging info alist contains an element of the form
(si:encapsulated-definition uninterned-symbol encapsulation-type)
The presence of such an element in the debugging info alist
is how you recognize a function to be an encapsulation. An encapsulation
is usually an interpreted function (a list starting with named-lambda
) but
it can be a compiled function also, if the application which created it
wants to compile it.
uninterned-symbol’s function definition is the thing that the encapsulation contains, usually the basic definition of the function spec. Or it can be another encapsulation, which has in it another debugging info item containing another uninterned symbol. Eventually you get to a function which is not an encapsulation; it does not have the sort of debugging info item which encapsulations all have. That function is the basic definition of the function spec.
Literally speaking, the definition of the function spec is the
outermost encapsulation, period. The basic definition is not the
definition. If you are asking for the definition of the function spec
because you want to apply it, the outermost encapsulation is exactly
what you want. But the basic definition can be found mechanically
from the definition, by following the debugging info alists. So it
makes sense to think of it as a part of the definition. In regard to
the function-defining special forms such as defun
, it is
convenient to think of the encapsulations as connecting between the
function spec and its basic definition.
An encapsulation is created with the macro si:encapsulate
.
A call to si:encapsulate
looks like
(si:encapsulate function-spec outer-function type body-form extra-debugging-info)
All the subforms of this macro are evaluated. In fact, the macro could almost be replaced with an ordinary function, except for the way body-form is handled.
function-spec evaluates to the function spec whose definition the
new encapsulation should become. outer-function is another function
spec, which should often be the same one. Its only purpose is to be
used in any error messages from si:encapsulate
.
type evaluates to a symbol which identifies the purpose of the
encapsulation and says what the application is. For example, that could
be advise
or trace
. The list of possible types is defined by
the system because encapsulations are supposed to be kept in an order
according to their type (see si:encapsulation-standard-order
,
si:encapsulation-standard-order-var). type should have an
si:encapsulation-grind-function
property which tells grindef
what to
do with an encapsulation of this type.
body-form evaluates to the body of the
encapsulation-definition, the code to be executed when it is called.
Backquote is typically used for this expression; see backquote.
si:encapsulate
is a macro because, while body is
being evaluated, the variable si:encapsulated-function
is bound to a
list of the form (function uninterned-symbol)
, referring to the
uninterned symbol used to hold the prior definition of
function-spec. If si:encapsulate
were a function, body-form
would just get evaluated normally by the evaluator before si:encapsulate
ever got invoked, and so there would be no opportunity to bind si:encapsulated-function
.
The form body-form should contain `(apply ,si:encapsulated-function arglist)
somewhere if the encapsulation is
to live up to its name and truly serve to encapsulate the original
definition. (The variable arglist
is bound by some of the code
which the si:encapsulate
macro produces automatically. When the
body of the encapsulation is run arglist
’s value will be the list of
the arguments which the encapsulation received.)
extra-debugging-info evaluates to a list of extra items to put into
the debugging info alist of the encapsulation function (besides the one
starting with si:encapsulated-definition
, which every encapsulation
must have). Some applications find this useful for recording
information about the encapsulation for their own later use.
If compile-encapsulations-flag
is non-nil
, the encapsulation is
compiled before it is installed. The encapsulations on a particular
function spec can be compiled by calling compile-encapsulations
.
See compile-encapsulations-fun.
Compiled encapsulations can still be unencapsulated since the
information needed to do so is stored in the debugging info alist, which
is preserved by compilation. However, applications which wish to modify
the code of the encapsulations they previously created must check for
encapsulations that have been compiled and uncompile them. This can be
done by finding the sys:interpreted-definition
entry in the debugging
info alist, which is present in all compiled functions except those made by
file-to-file compilation.
When a special function is encapsulated, the encapsulation is itself a
special function with the same argument quoting pattern. Therefore,
when the outermost encapsulation is started, each argument has been
evaluated or not as appropriate. Because each encapsulation calls the
prior definition with apply
, no further evaluation takes place, and the
basic definition of the special form also finds the arguments evaluated
or not as appropriate. The basic definition may call eval
on some
of these arguments or parts of them; the encapsulations should not.
Macros cannot be encapsulated, but their expander functions can be; if
the definition of function-spec is a macro, then si:encapsulate
automatically encapsulates the expander function instead. In this case,
the definition of the uninterned symbol is the original macro
definition, not just the original expander function.
It would not work for the encapsulation to apply the macro definition.
So during the evaluation of body-form, si:encapsulated-function
is bound
to the form (cdr (function uninterned-symbol))
, which extracts the
expander function from the prior definition of the macro.
Because only the expander function is actually encapsulated, the encapsulation does not see the evaluation or execution of the expansion itself. The value returned by the encapsulation is the expansion of the macro call, not the value computed by the expansion.
A program which creates encapsulations often needs to examine an encapsulation
it created and find the body. For example, adding a second piece of advice
to one function requires doing this. The proper way to do it is to use
si:encapsulation-body
.
Returns a list whose car is the body-form of encapsulation.
It is the form that was the fourth argument of
si:encapsulate
when encapsulation was created.
To illustrate this relationship,
(si:encapsulate 'foo 'foo 'trace 'body)) (si:encapsulation-body (fdefinition 'foo)) => (body)
It is possible for one function to have multiple encapsulations, created by different subsystems. In this case, the order of encapsulations is independent of the order in which they were made. It depends instead on their types. All possible encapsulation types have a total order and a new encapsulation is put in the right place among the existing encapsulations according to its type and their types.
The value of this variable is a list of the allowed encapsulation types, in the order in which the encapsulations are supposed to be kept (innermost encapsulations first). If you want to add new kinds of encapsulations, you should add another symbol to this list. Initially its value is
(advise breakon trace si:rename-within)
advise
encapsulations are used to hold advice (see advise-fun).
breakon
encapsulations are used for implementing breakon
(see breakon-fun).
trace
encapsulations are used for implementing tracing (see trace-fun).
si:rename-within
encapsulations are used to record the fact that
function specs of the form (:within within-function
altered-function)
have been defined. The encapsulation goes on
within-function (see rename-within-section for more information).
Every symbol used as an encapsulation type must be on the list
si:encapsulation-standard-order
. In addition, it should have an
si:encapsulation-grind-function
property whose value is a function that
grindef
will call to process encapsulations of that type. This
function need not take care of printing the encapsulated function
because grindef
will do that itself. But it should print any
information about the encapsulation itself which the user ought to see.
Refer to the code for the grind function for advise
to see how to
write one.
To find the right place in the ordering to insert a new encapsulation,
it is necessary to parse existing ones. This is done with the function
si:unencapsulate-function-spec
.
This takes one function spec and returns another. If the original function spec is undefined, or has only a basic definition (that is, its definition is not an encapsulation), then the original function spec is returned unchanged.
If the definition of function-spec is an encapsulation, then its debugging info is examined to find the uninterned symbol that holds the encapsulated definition and the encapsulation type. If the encapsulation is of a type that is to be skipped over, the uninterned symbol replaces the original function spec and the process repeats.
The value returned is the uninterned symbol from inside the last encapsulation skipped. This uninterned symbol is the first one that does not have a definition that is an encapsulation that should be skipped. Or the value can be function-spec if function-spec’s definition is not an encapsulation that should be skipped.
The types of encapsulations to be skipped over are specified by
encapsulation-types. This can be a list of the types to be
skipped, or nil
meaning skip all encapsulations (this is the default). Skipping all
encapsulations means returning the uninterned symbol that holds the basic
definition of function-spec. That is, the definition of
the function spec returned is the basic definition of the function spec
supplied. Thus,
(fdefinition (si:unencapsulate-function-spec 'foo))
returns the basic definition of foo
, and
(fdefine (si:unencapsulate-function-spec 'foo) 'bar)
sets the basic definition (just like using fdefine
with
carefully supplied as t
).
encapsulation-types can also be a symbol, which should be an
encapsulation type; then we skip all types that are supposed to come
outside of the specified type. For example, if
encapsulation-types is trace
, then we skip all types of
encapsulations that come outside of trace
encapsulations, but we
do not skip trace
encapsulations themselves. The result is a
function spec that is where the trace
encapsulation ought to
be, if there is one. Either the definition of this function spec is a
trace
encapsulation, or there is no trace
encapsulation
anywhere in the definition of function-spec, and this function
spec is where it would belong if there were one. For example,
(let ((tem (si:unencapsulate-function-spec spec 'trace))) (and (eq tem (si:unencapsulate-function-spec tem '(trace))) (si:encapsulate tem spec 'trace `(...body...))))
finds the place where a trace
encapsulation ought to go and
makes one unless there is already one there.
(let ((tem (si:unencapsulate-function-spec spec 'trace))) (fdefine tem (fdefinition (si:unencapsulate-function-spec tem '(trace)))))
eliminates any trace
encapsulation by replacing it by whatever it
encapsulates. (If there is no trace
encapsulation, this code
changes nothing.)
These examples show how a subsystem can insert its own type of
encapsulation in the proper sequence without knowing the names of any
other types of encapsulations. Only the variable
si:encapsulation-standard-order
, which is used by
si:unencapsulate-function-spec
, knows the order.
One special kind of encapsulation is the type si:rename-within
. This
encapsulation goes around a definition in which renamings of functions
have been done.
How is this used?
If you define, advise, or trace (:within foo bar)
, then bar
gets renamed to #:altered-bar-within-foo
wherever it is called from
foo
, and foo
gets a si:rename-within
encapsulation to
record the fact. The purpose of the encapsulation is to enable
various parts of the system to do what seems natural to the user.
For example, grindef
(see grindef-fun) notices the
encapsulation, and so knows to print bar
instead of
#:altered-bar-within-foo
when grinding the definition of foo
.
Also, if you redefine foo
, or trace or advise it, the new
definition gets the same renaming done (bar
replaced by
#:altered-bar-within-foo
). To make this work, everyone who alters
part of a function definition should pass the new part of the
definition through the function si:rename-within-new-definition-maybe
.
Given new-structure, which is going to become a part of the
definition of function-spec, perform on it the replacements
described by the si:rename-within
encapsulation in the
definition of function-spec, if there is one. The altered
(copied) list structure is returned.
It is not necessary to call this function yourself when you replace
the basic definition because fdefine
with carefully
supplied as t
does it for you. si:encapsulate
does this
to the body of the new encapsulation. So you only need to call
si:rename-within-new-definition-maybe
yourself if you are rplac’ing
part of the definition.
For proper results, function-spec must be the outer-level function
spec. That is, the value returned by si:unencapsulate-function-spec
is not the right thing to use. It will have had one or more
encapsulations stripped off, including the si:rename-within
encapsulation if any, and so no renamings will be done.
A closure is a type of Lisp functional object useful
for implementing certain advanced access and control structures.
Closures give you more explicit control over the
environment by allowing you to save the dynamic bindings of specified
variables and then to refer to those bindings later, even after
the construct (let
, etc.) which made the bindings has been exited.
There is a view of dynamic variable binding that we use in this
section because it makes it easier to explain what closures do. In this
view, when a variable is bound dynamically, a new binding is created for
it. The old binding is saved away somewhere and is inaccessible. Any
references to the variable then get the contents of the new
binding, and any setq
’s change the contents of the new value
cell. Evantually the new binding goes away, and the old binding, along
with its contents, becomes current again.
For example, consider the following sequence of Lisp forms:
(defvar a 3) ;a
becomes 3. (let ((a 10)) ;a
rebound to 10. (print (+ a 6))) ; 16 is printed. (print a) ; 3 is printed.
Initially there is a binding for a
, and the setq
form makes the
contents of that binding be 3
. Then the lambda
-combination is
evaluated. a
is bound to 10
: the old binding, which still
contains 3
, is saved away, and a new binding is created with
10
as its contents. The reference to a
inside the lambda
expression evaluates to the current binding of a
, which is the
contents of its current binding, namely 10
. So 16
is printed.
Then the newer binding is discarded and the old binding, which still
contains a 3
, is restored. The final print
prints 3
.
The form (closure var-list function)
, where
var-list is a list of variables and function is any function,
creates and returns a closure. When this closure is applied to some
arguments, all of the bindings of the variables on var-list are
saved away, and the bindings that those variables had at the time
closure
was called (that is, at the time the closure was created)
are made to be the bindings of the symbols. Then function is
applied to the arguments. (This paragraph is somewhat complex, but it
completely describes the operation of closures; if you don’t understand
it, come back and read it again after reading the next two paragraphs.)
Here is another, lower-level explanation. The closure object stores several things inside it. First, it saves the function. Secondly, for each variable in var-list, it remembers what that variable’s binding was when the closure was created. Then when the closure is called as a function, it first temporarily restores the bindings it has remembered inside the closure, and then applies function to the same arguments to which the closure itself was applied. When the function returns, the bindings are restored to be as they were before the closure was called.
Now, if we evaluate the form
(setq a (let ((x 3)) (declare (special x)) (closure '(x) 'frob)))
what happens is that a new binding is created for x
, containing
a fixnum 3
. Then a closure is created, which remembers
the function frob
, the symbol x
, and that binding.
Finally the old binding of x
is restored, and the closure is
returned. Notice that the new binding is still around, because
it is still known about by the closure. When the closure is applied,
say by doing (funcall a 7)
,
this binding is temporarily restored and the value of x
is 3
again. If frob
uses x
as a free variable, it sees 3
as the value.
A closure can be made around any function, using any form that
evaluates to a function. The form could evaluate to a compiled
function, as would (function (lambda () x))
. In the example above,
the form is 'frob
and it evaluates to the symbol frob
. A symbol
is also a good function. It is usually better to close around a symbol
that is the name of the desired function, so that the closure points to
the symbol. Then, if the symbol is redefined, the closure will use the
new definition. If you actually prefer that the closure continue to use
the old definition that was current when the closure was made,
use function
, as in:
(closure '(x) (function frob))
Explicit closures made with closure
record only the dynamic
bindings of the specified variables. Another closure mechanism is
activated automatically to record lexical bindings whenever function
is used around an explicit lambda expression, but closure
itself has
no interaction with lexical bindings.
It is the user’s responsibility to make sure that the bindings that the
closure is intended to record are dynamic bindings, either by means of
special declarations (see declare-fun) as shown above or by making the variables
globally special with defvar
or equivalent. If the function closed over is an
explicit lambda expression, it is occasionally necessary to use declarations
within it to make sure that the variables are considered special there.
But this is not needed if the variables are globally special or if
a special declaration is lexically visible where closure
is called.
Usually the compiler can tell when a special declaration is missing, but when making a closure the compiler detects this only after acting on the assumption that the variable is lexical, by which time it is too late to fix things. The compiler warns you if this happens.
In Zetalisp’s implementation of closures, lambda-binding never
really allocates any storage to create new bindings. Bindings receive
separate storage only when the closure
function itself finds they
need it. Thus, there is no cost associated with closures when they
are not in use.
Zetalisp closures differ from the closures of Lisp 1.5 (which were
made with function
)
in that they save specific variables rather than the entire
variable-binding environment. For their intended applications, this is
an advantage. The explicit declaration of the variables in closure
permits higher efficiency and more flexibility. In addition the program
is clearer because the intended effect of the closure is made manifest
by listing the variables to be affected. Lisp 1.5 closures are more similar
to Zetalisp’s automatic handling of lexical variables.
Closure implementation (which it not usually necessary for you to
understand) involves two kinds of value cells. Every symbol has an
internal value cell, part of the symbol itself, which is where its
dynamic value is normally stored. When a variable is closed over, it
gets an external value cell to hold its value. The external value
cells behave according to the lambda-binding model used earlier in this
section. The value in the external value cell is found through the
usual access mechanisms (such as evaluating the symbol, calling
symeval
, etc.), because the internal value cell is made to contain a
forwarding pointer to the external value cell that is current. Such a
forwarding pointer is present in a symbol’s value cell whenever its
current binding is being remembered by some closure; at other times,
there won’t be an invisible pointer, and the value resides directly in
the symbol’s internal value cell.
One thing we can do with closures is to implement a generator, which
is a kind of function which is called successively to obtain successive elements
of a sequence.
We implement a function make-list-generator
, which takes a list
and returns a generator that returns successive
elements of the list. When it gets to the end it should return nil
.
The problem is that in between calls to the generator, the generator must somehow remember where it is up to in the list. Since all of its bindings are undone when it is exited, it cannot save this information in a bound variable. It could save it in a global variable, but the problem is that if we want to have more than one list generator at a time, they will all try to use the same global variable and get in each other’s way.
Here is how to solve this problem using closures:
(defun make-list-generator (l) (declare (special l)) (closure '(l) #'(lambda () (prog1 (car l) (setq l (cdr l))))))
(make-list-generator '(1 2 3))
returns a generator which, on successive
calls, returns 1, 2, 3, and nil
.
Now we can make as many list generators as we like; they won’t get
in each other’s way because each has its own binding for l
.
Each of these bindings was created when the make-list-generator
function was entered, and the bindings are remembered by the closures.
The following example uses closures which share bindings:
(defvar a) (defvar b) (defun foo () (setq a 5)) (defun bar () (cons a b)) (let ((a 1) (b 1)) (setq x (closure '(a b) 'foo)) (setq y (closure '(a b) 'bar)))
When the let
is entered, new bindings are created for the symbols
a
and b
, and two closures are created that both point to those
bindings. If we do (funcall x)
, the function foo
is
be run, and it changes the contents of the remembered binding
of a
to 5
. If we then do (funcall y)
, the function bar
returns (5 . 1)
. This shows that the binding of a
seen
by the closure y
is the same binding seen by the closure x
. The
top-level binding of a
is unaffected.
Here is how we can create a function that prints always using base 16:
(deff print-in-base-16 (let ((*print-base* 16.)) (closure '(*print-base*) 'print)))
Creates and returns a closure of function over the variables in var-list. Note that all variables on var-list must be declared special if the function is to compile correctly.
To test whether an object is a closure, use the closurep
predicate
(see closurep-fun) or (typep object 'closure)
.
Returns the binding of symbol in the environment of closure;
that is, it returns what you would get if you restored the bindings
known about by closure and then evaluated symbol.
This allows you to “look around inside” a closure.
If symbol is not closed over by closure, this is just like symeval
.
symbol may be a locative pointing to a value cell instead of a symbol (this goes for all the whatever-in-closure functions).
Sets the binding of symbol in the environment of closure
to x; that is, it does what would happen if you restored the bindings
known about by closure and then set symbol to x.
This allows you to change the contents of the bindings known about
by a closure.
If symbol is not closed over by closure, this is just like set
.
Returns the location of the place in closure where the saved
value of symbol is stored. An equivalent form is
(locf (symeval-in-closure closure symbol))
.
Returns t
if symbol’s binding in closure is not void.
This is what (boundp symbol)
would return if executed in
closure’s saved environment.
Makes symbol’s binding in closure be void.
This is what (makunbound symbol)
would do if executed in
closure’s saved environment.
Returns an alist of (symbol . value)
pairs describing the
bindings that the closure performs when it is called. This list is not
the same one that is actually stored in the closure; that one contains
pointers to value cells rather than symbols, and closure-alist
translates them back to symbols so you can understand them. As a result,
clobbering part of this list does not change the closure.
The list that is returned may contain void cells if some of the closed-over variables were void in the closure’s environment. In this case, printing the value will get an error (accessing a cell that contains a void marker is always an error unless done in a special, careful way) but the value can still be passed around.
Returns a list of variables closed over in closure. This is
equal
to the first argument specified to the function closure
when this closure was created.
Returns the closed function from closure. This is the function
that was the second argument to closure
when the closure was
created.
Returns the actual list of bindings to be performed when closure is entered.
This list can be passed to sys:%using-binding-instances
to enter the closure’s environment without calling the closure.
See sys:%using-binding-instances-fun.
Returns a new closure that has the same function and variable values as closure. The bindings are not shared between the old closure and the new one, so that if the old closure changes some closed variable’s values, the values in the new closure do not change.
When using closures, it is very common to bind a set of variables with
initial values only in order to make a closure over those variables.
Furthermore, the variables must be declared special. let-closed
is
a special form which does all of this. It is best described by example:
(let-closed ((a 5) b (c 'x))
(function (lambda () ...)))
macro-expands into
(let ((a 5) b (c 'x))
(declare (special a b c))
(closure '(a b c)
(function (lambda () ...))))
Note that the following code, which would often be useful, does not work
as intended if x
is not special outside the let-closed
:
(let-closed ((x x)) (function ...))
This is because the reference to x
as an initialization for the new
binding of x
is affected by the special declaration that the
let-closed
produces. It therefore does not see any lexical binding
of x
. This behavior is unfortunate, but it is required by the
Common Lisp specifications. To avoid the problem, write
(let ((y x)) (let-closed ((x y)) (function ...)))
or simply change the name of the variable outside the let-closed
to something other than x
.
An entity is almost the same thing as a closure; an entity behaves just
like a closure when applied, but it has a recognizably different data
type which allows certain parts of the system such as the printer and
describe
to treat it differently. A closure is simply a kind of
function, but an entity is assumed to be a message-receiving object.
Thus, when the Lisp printer (see printer) is given a closure, it
prints a simple textual representation, but when it is handed an entity,
it sends the entity a :print-self
message, which the entity is
expected to handle. The describe
function (see describe-fun)
also sends entities messages when it is handed them. So when you want
to make a message-receiving object out of a closure, as described on
entity-usage, you should use an entity instead.
To a large degree, entities are made obsolete by flavors (see flavor). Flavors have had considerably more attention paid to their efficiency and to good tools for using them. If what you are doing is flavor-like, it is better to use flavors.
Returns a newly constructed entity. This function is just like the
function closure
except that it returns an entity instead of a
closure.
The function argument should be a symbol which has a function
definition and a value. When typep
is applied to this entity, it
returns the value of that symbol.
To test whether an object is an entity, use the entityp
predicate
(see entityp-fun). The functions symeval-in-closure
,
closure-alist
, closure-function
, etc also operate on entities.
A stack group (usually abbreviated ‘SG’) is a type of Lisp object useful for implementation of certain advanced control structures such as coroutines and generators. Processes, which are a kind of coroutine, are built on top of stack groups (see process). A stack group represents a computation and its internal state, including the Lisp stack.
At any time, the computation being performed by the Lisp Machine is associated with one stack group, called the current or running stack group. The operation of making some stack group be the current stack group is called a resumption or a stack group switch; the previously running stack group is said to have resumed the new stack group. The resume operation has two parts: first, the state of the running computation is saved away inside the current stack group, and secondly the state saved in the new stack group is restored, and the new stack group is made current. Then the computation of the new stack group resumes its course.
The stack group itself holds a great deal of state information.
It contains the control stack, or regular PDL. The control stack is
what you are shown by the backtracing commands of the error handler
(Control-B
, Meta-B
, and Control-Meta-B
); it remembers the
function which is running, its caller, its caller’s caller, etc, and
the point of execution of each function (the return address of each
function). A stack group also contains the dynamic environment stack,
or special PDL. The name ‘stack group’ derives from the existence
of these two stacks. Finally, the stack group contains various internal
state information (contents of machine registers and so on).
When the stack group is running, the special PDL contains all the
dynamic bindings that are shadowed by other bindings in this stack
group; bindings that are current reside in the symbols’ value cells.
When the stack group is not running, all of the dynamic bindings it has
made reside in its special PDL. Switching to a stack group moves the
current bindings from the special PDL to the symbol value cells,
exchanging them with the global or other shadowed bindings. Switching
out of a stack group does the reverse process. Note that
unwind-protect
handlers are not run by a stack-group switch (see
let-globally
, let-globally-fun).
Each stack group is a separate environment for purposes of function calling, throwing, dynamic variable binding, and condition signalling. All stack groups run in the same address space; thus they share the same Lisp data and the same global (not lambda-bound) variables.
When a new stack group is created, it is empty: it doesn’t contain the state of any computation, so it can’t be resumed. In order to get things going, the stack group must be set to an initial state. This is done by presetting the stack group. To preset a stack group, you supply a function and a set of arguments. The stack group is placed in such a state that when it is first resumed it will apply this function to those arguments. The function is called the initial function of the stack group.
The interesting thing that happens to stack groups is that they resume each other. When one stack group resumes a second stack group, the current state of Lisp execution is saved away in the first stack group and is restored from the second stack group. Resuming is also called switching stack groups.
At any time, there is one stack group associated with the current computation; it is called the current stack group. The computations associated with other stack groups have their states saved away in memory and are not computing. So the only stack group that can do anything at all, in particular resuming other stack groups, is the current one.
You can look at things from the point of view of one computation. Suppose it is running along, and it resumes some stack group. The state of the computation state is saved away into its own stack group, and the computation associated with the called stack group starts up. The original computation lies dormant in the original stack group, while other computations go around resuming each other, until finally the original stack group is resumed by someone. Then the computation is restored from the stack group and gets to run again.
There are several ways that the current stack group can resume other stack groups. This section describes all of them.
Each stack group records a resumer which is nil
or another stack group. Some forms of resuming examine and alter the
resumer of some stack groups.
Resuming has another ability: it can transmit a Lisp object from the old stack group to the new stack group. Each stack group specifies a value to transmit whenever it resumes another stack group; whenever a stack group is resumed, it receives a value.
In the descriptions below, let c stand for the current stack group, s stand for some other stack group, and x stand for any arbitrary Lisp object.
Stack groups can be used as functions. They accept one argument. If c calls s as a function with one argument x, then s is resumed, and the object transmitted is x. When c is resumed (usually–but not necessarily–by s), the object transmitted by that resumption is returned as the value of the call to s. This is one of the simple ways to resume a stack group: call it as a function. The value you transmit is the argument to the function, and the value you receive is the value returned from the function. Furthermore, this form of resuming sets s’s resumer to be c.
Another way to resume a stack group is to use stack-group-return
.
Rather than allowing you to specify which stack group to resume, this
function always resumes the resumer of the current stack group. Thus,
this is a good way to go back to the stack group which called the
current one, assuming that this was done through a function call.
stack-group-return
takes one argument which is the object to
transmit. It returns when something resumes the current stack group, and
returns one value, the object that was transmitted by that resumption.
stack-group-return
does not change the resumer of any stack group.
The most fundamental way to do resuming is with stack-group-resume
,
which takes two arguments: the stack group, and a value to transmit.
It returns when someone resumes the current stack group, returning
the value that was transmitted by that resumption,
and does not affect any stack group’s resumer.
If the initial function of c attempts to return a value x, the regular kind of Lisp function return cannot take place, since the function did not have any caller (it got there when the stack group was initialized). So instead of normal function returning, a “stack group return” happens. c’s resumer is resumed, and the value transmitted is x. c is left in a state (“exhausted”) from which it cannot be resumed again; any attempt to resume it signals an error. Presetting it will make it work again.
Those are the “voluntary” forms of stack group switch; a resumption happens because the computation said it should. There are also two “involuntary” forms, in which another stack group is resumed without the explicit request of the running program.
If an error occurs, the current stack group resumes the error handler stack group. The value transmitted is partially descriptive of the error, and the error handler looks inside the saved state of the erring stack group to get the rest of the information. The error handler recovers from the error by changing the saved state of the erring stack group and then resuming it.
When certain events occur, typically a 1-second clock tick, a sequence break occurs. This forces the current stack group to resume a special stack group called the scheduler (see scheduler). The scheduler implements processes by resuming, one after another, the stack group of each process that is ready to run.
Is the resumer of the current stack group.
Is the stack group which is currently running. A program can use this variable to get its hands on its own stack group.
A stack group has a state, which controls what it will do when it
is resumed. The code number for the state is returned by the function
sys:sg-current-state
. This number is the value of one of
the following symbols. Only the states actually used by the current
system are documented here; some other codes are defined but not used.
sys:sg-state-active
The stack group is the current one.
sys:sg-state-resumable
The stack group is waiting to be resumed, at which time it will pick up its saved machine state and continue doing what it was doing before.
sys:sg-state-awaiting-return
The stack group called some other stack group as a function. When it is resumed, it will return from that function call.
sys:sg-state-awaiting-initial-call
The stack group has been preset (see below) but has never been called. When it is resumed, it will call its initial function with the preset arguments.
sys:sg-state-exhausted
The stack group’s initial function has returned. It cannot be resumed.
sys:sg-state-awaiting-error-recovery
When a stack group gets an error it goes into this state, which prevents anything from happening to it until the error handler has looked at it. In the meantime it cannot be resumed.
sys:sg-state-invoke-call-on-return
When the stack group is resumed, it will call a function. The function and arguments are already set up on the stack. The debugger uses this to force the stack group being debugged to do things.
Creates and returns a new stack group. name may be any symbol
or string; it is used in the stack group’s printed representation.
options is a list of alternating keywords and values. The options
are not too useful; most calls to make-stack-group
don’t need any
options at all. The options are:
:sg-area
The area in which to create the stack group structure itself.
Defaults to the default area (the value of default-cons-area
).
:regular-pdl-area
The area in which to create the regular PDL. Only certain areas
specially designated when they were created may be used for regular
PDLs, because regular PDLs are cached in a hardware device called the
pdl buffer. The default is sys:pdl-area
.
:special-pdl-area
The area in which to create the special PDL.
Defaults to the default area (the value of default-cons-area
).
:regular-pdl-size
Length of the regular PDL to be created. Defaults to 3000 octal.
:special-pdl-size
Length of the special PDL to be created. Defaults to 2000 octal.
:swap-sv-on-call-out
¶:swap-sv-of-sg-that-calls-me
These flags default to 1. If these are 0, the system does not maintain separate binding environments for each stack group. You do not want to use this feature.
:trap-enable
This determines what to do if a microcode error occurs. If it is 1 the system tries to handle the error; if it is 0 the machine halts. Defaults to 1. It is 0 only in the error handler stack group, a trap in which would not work anyway.
:safe
If this flag is 1 (the default), a strict call-return discipline among stack-groups is enforced. If 0, no restriction on stack-group switching is imposed.
sys:pdl-overflow
: (error
) ¶This condition is signaled when there is overflow on either the regular
pdl or the special pdl. The :pdl-name
operation on the condition
instance returns either :special
or :regular
, to tell handlers
which one.
The :grow-pdl
proceed type is provided. It takes no arguments.
Proceeding from the error automatically makes the affected pdl bigger.
This is the factor by which to increase the size of a pdl after an overflow.
It is initially 1.5
.
Makes the current stack group larger if necessary, to make sure that there are at least regpdl-space free words in the regular pdl, and at least specpdl-space free words in the special pdl, not counting the words currently in use.
This sets up stack-group so that when it is resumed,
function will be applied to arguments within the stack group.
Both stacks are made empty; all saved state in the stack group is destroyed.
stack-group-preset
is typically used to initialize a stack group just after it is made,
but it may be done to any stack group at any time. Doing this to a stack
group which is not exhausted destroys its present state without
properly cleaning up by running unwind-protect
s.
Resumes s, transmitting the value x. No stack group’s resumer is affected.
t
if s’s state permits it to be resumed.
sys:wrong-stack-group-state
: (error
) ¶This is signaled if, for example, you try to resume a stack group which is in the exhausted state.
Resumes the current stack group’s resumer, transmitting the value x. No stack group’s resumer is affected.
Evaluates the variable symbol as a special variable in the binding
environment of sg. If frame is not nil
, it evaluates
symbol in the binding environment of execution in that frame. (A
frame is an index in the stack group’s regular pdl).
Two values are returned: the symbol’s value, and a locative to where
the value is stored. If as-if-current is not nil
, the
locative points to where the value would be stored if sg were
running. This may be different from where the value is stored now;
for example, the current binding in stack group sg is stored in
symbol’s value cell when sg is running, but is probably
stored in sg’s special pdl when sg is not running.
as-if-current makes no difference if sg actually is
the current stack group.
If symbol’s current dynamic binding in the specified stack group and
frame is void, this signals a sys:unbound-variable
error.
A stack frame is represented by an index in the regular pdl array of the stack group. The word at this index is the function executing, or to be called, in the frame. The following words in the pdl contain the arguments.
Returns the regular pdl of sg. This is an array of type
art-reg-pdl
. Stack frames are represented as indices into this array.
Returns the index in sg’s regular pdl of the last word pushed.
Returns the special pdl of sg. This is an array of type
art-special-pdl
, used to hold special bindings made by functions
executing in that stack group.
Returns the index in sg’s special pdl of the last word pushed.
The following functions are used to move from one stack frame to another.
Returns (the regular pdl index of) the innermost frame in sg, the one that would be executing if sg were current. If sg is current, the value is the frame of the caller of this function.
Returns the next active frame out from frame in sg. This is the one that called frame. If frame is the outermost frame, the value is nil.
Returns the previous active frame in from frame in sg.
This is the one called by frame. If frame is the currently
executing frame, the value is nil
. If frame is nil
,
the value is the outermost or initial frame.
Returns the innermost open frame in sg, which may be the same as the
innermost active one or it may be within that. In other respects, this is
like eh:sg-innermost-active
.
Like eh:sg-next-active
but includes frames which are open, that is,
still accumulating arguments prior to calling the function.
Like eh:sg-previous-active
but includes frames which are open, that is,
still accumulating arguments prior to calling the function.
Returns t
if frame is active; that is, if the function has been
entered.
Running interpreted code involves calls to eval
, cond
, etc.
which would not be there in compiled code. The following three
functions can be used to skip over the stack frames of such functions,
showing only the frames for the functions the user would know about.
Like eh:sg-next-active
but skips over uninteresting frames.
Like eh:sg-previous-active
but skips over uninteresting frames.
If frame is interesting, returns frame. Otherwise, it returns the next interesting active frame.
Functions to analyze the data in a particular stack frame:
Returns the function executing in frame. regpdl should be
the sg-regular-pdl
of the stack group.
Returns the number of arguments received by frame, which should be an active frame. The rest argument (if any) and arguments received by it, do not count.
Returns the value of argument number n of stack frame frame in sg. An error is signaled if n is out of range, if the frame is active. (For an open frame, the number of arguments is not yet known, so there is no error check.)
The second value is the location in which the argument is stored when sg is running. The location may not actually be in the stack, if the argument is special. The location may then contain other contents when the stack group is not running.
Returns the value of the rest argument in frame, or nil
if there
is none.
The second value is t
if the function called in frame expects an
explicitly passed rest argument.
The third value is t
if the rest argument was passed explicitly.
If this is nil
, the rest arg is a stack list that overlaps the
arguments of stack frame frame. If it was passed explicitly, it may still
be a stack list, but not in this frame. See stack-list for
more information on stack lists.
Returns the number of local variables in stack frame frame.
Returns the value of local variable number n of stack frame frame in sg. An error is signaled if n is out of range.
The second value is the location in which the local is stored when sg is running. The location may not actually be in the stack; if not, it may have other contents when the stack group is not running.
Returns the value and location of the n’th multiple value frame
has returned. If frame has not begun to return values, the first
value returned is nil
but the location still validly shows where
value number n will be stored.
If frame was called with multiple-value-list
, it can return any
number of values, but they do not have cells to receive them until
frame returns them. In this case, a non-nil
create-slot
means that this function should allocate cells as necessary so that a
valid location can be returned. Otherwise, the location as well as the
value is nil
.
Returns three values that describe whether frame’s caller wants multiple values, and any values frame has returned already.
The first value is a list in which live the values being, or to be, returned by frame.
The second value is nil
if this frame has not been invoked to return multiple values,
a number which is the number of values it has been asked for,
or a locative, meaning the frame was called with multiple-value-list
.
In the last case, the first value includes only the values frame
has returned already, and the locative points to a cell that points
to the cons whose cdr should receive the next link of the list.
The third value is how many values frame has returned so far.
If new-number-of-values is non-nil
, it is used to alter the
“number of values already returned” as recorded in the stack group.
This may alter the length of the list that is the first value.
The value you get is the altered one, in that case.
Returns two values delimiting the range of sg’s special pdl that belongs to the specified stack frame. The first value is the index of the first special pdl word that belongs to the frame, and the second value is the index of the next word that does not belong to it.
If the specified frame has no special bindings, both values are nil
.
Otherwise, the indicated special pdl words describe bindings made on
entry to or during execution in this frame. The words come in pairs.
The first word of each pair contains the saved value; the second points to the location that was bound. When the stack group is not current, the saved value is the value for the binding made in this frame. When the stack group is current, the saved value is the shadowed value, and the value for this binding is either in the cell that was bound, or is the saved value of another binding, at a higher index, of the same cell.
The bit sys:%%specpdl-closure-binding
is nonzero in the first word
of the pair if the binding was made before entry to the function itself.
This includes bindings made by closures, and by instances (including
self
). Otherwise, the binding was made by the function itself.
This includes arguments that are declared special.
symeval-in-stack-group
can be used to find the value of a special
variable at a certain stack frame (symeval-in-stack-group-fun).
Because each stack group has its own set of dynamic bindings, a
stack group does not inherit its creator’s value of *terminal-io*
(see terminal-io-var), nor its caller’s, unless you make special
provision for this. The *terminal-io*
a stack group gets by default
is a “background” stream that does not normally expect to be used. If
it is used, it turns into a “background window” that will request
the user’s attention. Often this happens when an error invokes the
debugger.
If you write a program that uses multiple stack groups, and you want
them all to do input and output to the terminal, you should pass the
value of *terminal-io*
to the top-level function of each stack group
as part of the stack-group-preset
, and that function should bind
the variable *terminal-io*
.
Another technique is to use a closure as the top-level function
of a stack group. This closure can bind *terminal-io*
and any other
variables that should be shared between the stack group and its
creator.
The canonical coroutine example is the so-called samefringe problem:
Given two trees, determine whether they contain the same
atoms in the same order, ignoring parenthesis structure. A better
way of saying this is, given two binary trees built out of conses,
determine whether the sequence of atoms on the fringes of the trees
is the same, ignoring differences in the arrangement of the
internal skeletons of the two trees. Following the usual rule
for trees, nil
in the cdr of a cons is to be ignored.
One way of solving this problem is to use generator coroutines. We make a generator for each tree. Each time the generator is called it returns the next element of the fringe of its tree. After the generator has examined the entire tree, it returns a special “exhausted” flag. The generator is most naturally written as a recursive function. The use of coroutines, i.e stack groups, allows the two generators to recurse separately on two different control stacks without having to coordinate with each other.
The program is very simple. Constructing it in the usual bottom-up style,
we first write a recursive function that takes a tree and stack-group-return
s
each element of its fringe. The stack-group-return
is how the generator
coroutine delivers its output. We could easily test this function by changing
stack-group-return
to print
and trying it on some examples.
(defun fringe (tree) (cond ((atom tree) (stack-group-return tree)) (t (fringe (car tree)) (if (not (null (cdr tree))) (fringe (cdr tree))))))
Now we package this function inside another, which takes care of returning the special “exhausted” flag.
(defun fringe1 (tree exhausted) (fringe tree) exhausted)
The samefringe
function takes the two trees as arguments and returns
t
or nil
. It creates two stack groups to act as the two
generator coroutines, presets them to run the fringe1
function, then
goes into a loop comparing the two fringes. The value is nil
if a difference
is discovered, or t
if they are still the same when the end is reached.
(defun samefringe (tree1 tree2) (let ((sg1 (make-stack-group "samefringe1")) (sg2 (make-stack-group "samefringe2")) (exhausted (ncons nil))) (stack-group-preset sg1 #'fringe1 tree1 exhausted) (stack-group-preset sg2 #'fringe1 tree2 exhausted) (do ((v1) (v2)) (nil) (setq v1 (funcall sg1 nil) v2 (funcall sg2 nil)) (cond ((neq v1 v2) (return nil)) ((eq v1 exhausted) (return t))))))
Now we test it on a couple of examples:
(samefringe '(a b c) '(a (b c))) => t (samefringe '(a b c) '(a b c d)) => nil
As stack groups are large, and slow to create, it is desirable to avoid the overhead of creating one each time two fringes are compared. It can easily be eliminated with a modest amount of explicit storage allocation, using the resource facility (see defresource-fun). While we’re at it, we can avoid making the exhausted flag fresh each time; its only important property is that it not be an atom.
(defresource samefringe-coroutine () :constructor (make-stack-group "for-samefringe")) (defvar exhausted-flag (ncons nil)) (defun samefringe (tree1 tree2) (using-resource (sg1 samefringe-coroutine) (using-resource (sg2 samefringe-coroutine) (stack-group-preset sg1 #'fringe1 tree1 exhausted-flag) (stack-group-preset sg2 #'fringe1 tree2 exhausted-flag) (do ((v1) (v2)) (nil) (setq v1 (funcall sg1 nil) v2 (funcall sg2 nil)) (cond ((neq v1 v2) (return nil)) ((eq v1 exhausted-flag) (return t)))))))
Now we can compare the fringes of two trees with no allocation of memory whatsoever.
A locative is a type of Lisp object used as a pointer to a cell. Locatives are inherently a more low level construct than most Lisp objects; they require some knowledge of the nature of the Lisp implementation.
A cell is a machine word that can hold a (pointer to a)
Lisp object. For example, a symbol has five cells: the print name cell,
the value cell, the function cell, the property list cell, and the
package cell. The value cell holds (a pointer to) the binding of the
symbol, and so on. Also, an array leader of length n has n
cells, and an art-q
array of n elements has n cells.
(Numeric arrays do not have cells in this sense.) A locative is
an object that points to a cell; it lets you refer to a cell so that
you can examine or alter its contents.
Returns the contents of the cell which the locative points to.
This is actually the same as cdr
, for reasons explained below,
but it is clearer to use contents
when the argument is normally
a locative.
To modify the contents of the cell, use setf
on contents
:
(setf (contents loc) newvalue)
The macro locf
(see locf-fun) can be used to convert a form
that accesses a cell to one that creates a locative pointer to that
cell: for example,
(locf (fsymeval x))
evaluates to a locative that points to the function cell of the value of
x
; that is to say, it points to the place where (fsymeval x)
is
stored.
locf
is very convenient because it saves the writer and reader of
a program from having to remember the names of many functions that would
create locatives to cells found in different fashions.
One thing you should know is that it is not possible to make a locative to an element of a numeric array. For example,
(setq foo (make-array 10 :type art-1b)) (locf (aref foo 0))
signals an error. Locatives may only point at entire words of memory, which contain standard Lisp data.
Because of cdr-coding (see cdr-code), a cons does not always
contain an explicit cell which points to its cdr. Therefore, it is
impossible to obtain a locative which points to such a cell. However,
this is such a useful thing to do that the cons itself is usually
treated as if it were a locative pointing to a cell which holds the
cons’s cdr. (locf (cdr x))
returns the value of x
, and
(contents x)
returns the cdr when x is a cons, so
(contents (locf (cdr x)))
is the same as (cdr x)
, as it should
be. Most functions that are normally given locatives also accept a cons
and treat it as if it were a magic locative to the (nonexistent)
cell containing the cdr of the cons.
A cons always does contain a cell which points to the car, and
(locf (car x))
returns a locative whose pointer field is the
same as that of x
’s value.
Returns t
if the cell to which locative points contains
anything except a void marker.
The void marker is a special data type, dtp-null
, which is stored
in cells to say that their value is missing. For example, an unbound
variable actually has a void marker in its value cell, and
(location-boundp (locf x))
is equivalent to (variable-boundp x)
.
Stores a void marker into the cell to which locative points.
This consists of data type field dtp-null
and a pointer copied
from pointer.
The pointer field of the void marker is used to tell the error handler what variable was unbound. In the case of a symbol’s value cell or function cell, it should point to the symbol header. In the case of a flavor method, it should point to the beginning of the block of data that holds the definition, which is a word containing the method’s function spec.
If the second arg is not specified, then where the void marker points is not defined.
Other functions with which locatives are expected or useful include
get
(the locative points to the cell in which the plist is stored),
store-conditional
(the locative points to the cell to be tested and
modified), and %bind
(the locative points to the cell to be bound).
Either of the functions car
and cdr
(see car-fun) may
be given a locative, and will return the contents of the cell at which
the locative points. They are both equivalent to contents
when the
argument is a locative.
Similarly, either of the functions rplaca
and rplacd
may
be used to store an object into the cell at which a locative
points.
For example,
(rplaca locative y)
or
(rplaca locative y)
is the same as
(setf (contents locative) y)
If you are just using locatives, you should use contents
rather than car
or cdr
. But you can also mix locatives and
conses. For example, the same variable may usefully sometimes have a
locative as its value and sometimes a cons. Then it is useful that
car
and cdr
work on locatives, and it also matters which one you
use. Pick the one that is right for the case of a cons.
For example, the following function conses up a list in the forward
order by adding onto the end. It needs to know where to put the pointer
to the next cell. Usually it goes in the previous cell’s cdr, but
the first cell gets put in the cell where the list is supposed to end
up. A locative is used as the pointer to this cell. The first time
through the loop, the rplacd
is equivalent to (setq res ...)
; on
later times through the loop the rplacd
tacks an additional cons
onto the end of the list.
(defun simplified-version-of-mapcar (fcn lst) (do ((lst lst (cdr lst)) (res nil) (loc (locf res))) ((null lst) res) (setf (cdr loc) (setq loc (ncons (funcall fcn (car lst)))))))
cdr
is used here rather than contents
because the normal
case is that the argument is a list.
Subprimitives are functions which are not intended to be used by
the average program, only by system programs. They allow one to
manipulate the environment at a level lower than normal Lisp.
They are described in this chapter.
Subprimitives usually have names starting with a %
character.
The primitives described in other sections of the manual typically
use subprimitives to accomplish their work. To some extent the subprimitives take
the place of what in other systems would be individual machine instructions.
Subprimitives are normally hand-coded in microcode.
There is plenty of stuff in this chapter that is not fully
explained; there are terms that are undefined, there are forward references,
and so on. Furthermore, most of what is in here is considered subject
to change without notice. In fact, this chapter does not exactly belong
in this manual, but in some other more low-level manual. Since the latter
manual does not exist, it is here for the interim.
Subprimitives by their very nature cannot do full checking.
Improper use of subprimitives can destroy the environment.
Subprimitives come in varying degrees of dangerousness.
Generally, those without
a %
sign in their name are not directly dangerous, whereas those
whose names begin with %
can ruin the Lisp world just as readily
as they can do something useful. The subprimitives are documented here
since they need to be documented somewhere, but this manual does not
document all the things you need to know in order to use them. Still other
subprimitives are not documented here because they are very specialized.
Most of these are never used explicitly by a programmer; the compiler
inserts them into the program to perform operations which are expressed
differently in the source code.
The most common problem you can cause using subprimitives, though
by no means the only one, is to create illegal pointers: pointers
that are, for one reason or another, according to storage conventions,
not allowed to exist. The storage conventions are not documented;
as we said, you have to be an expert to use a lot of the functions
in this chapter correctly. If you create such an illegal pointer, it probably will
not be detected immediately, but later on parts of the system may see it,
notice that it is illegal, and (probably) halt the Lisp Machine.
In a certain sense car
, cdr
, rplaca
, and rplacd
are
subprimitives. If these are given a locative instead of a list, they
access or modify the cell addressed by the locative without regard to what
object the cell is inside. Subprimitives can be used to create locatives
to strange places.
data-type
returns a symbol that is the name for the internal
data-type of arg. The type-of
function (type-of-fun) is a
higher-level primitive that is more useful in most cases; normal
programs should always use type-of
(or, when appropriate, typep
)
rather than data-type
.
Note that some types as seen by the user are not
distinguished from each other at this level, and some user types may be
represented by more than one internal type. For example,
dtp-extended-number
is the symbol that data-type
would return
for either a single-float or a bignum, even though those two types are
quite different.
Some of these type codes occur in memory words but cannot be the type of
an actual Lisp object. These include header types such as
dtp-symbol-header
, which identify the first word of a structure, and
forwarding or “invisible” pointer types such as dtp-one-q-forward
.
dtp-symbol
¶The object is a symbol.
dtp-fix
¶The object is a fixnum; the numeric value is contained in the address field of the pointer.
dtp-small-flonum
¶The object is a short float; the numeric value is contained in the address field of the pointer.
dtp-extended-number
¶The object is a single-float, ratio, bignum or complexnum. This value will also be used for future numeric types.
dtp-character
¶The object is a character object; the value is contained in the address field of the pointer.
dtp-list
¶The object is a cons.
dtp-locative
¶The object is a locative pointer.
dtp-array-pointer
¶The object is an array.
dtp-fef-pointer
¶The object is a compiled function.
dtp-u-entry
¶The object is a microcode entry.
dtp-closure
¶The object is a closure; see closure.
dtp-stack-closure
¶The object is a closure which lives inside a stack, and which must be copied if it is stored anywhere but farther down in the same stack. Lexical scoping is implemented using these.
dtp-instance
¶The object is an instance of a flavor; see flavor.
dtp-entity
¶The object is an entity; see entity.
dtp-select-method
¶The object is a select-method; see select-method.
dtp-stack-group
¶The object is a stack-group; see stack-group.
The remaining types are internal only.
dtp-header
¶An internal type used to mark the first word of several kinds of multi-word structure, including single-floats, ratios, bignums and FEFs.
dtp-array-header
¶An internal type used to mark the first word of an array.
dtp-symbol-header
¶An internal type used to mark the first word of a symbol. The pointer field points to the symbol’s print-name, which is a string.
dtp-instance-header
¶An internal type used to mark the first word of an instance. The pointer field points to the structure that describes the instance’s flavor.
dtp-null
¶Nothing to do with nil
. This type code identifies a void marker.
An attempt to refer to the contents of a cell that contains a
dtp-null
signals an error. This is how “unbound variable” and
“undefined function” errors are detected.
dtp-trap
¶The zero data-type, which is not used. This hopes to detect microcode bugs.
dtp-free
¶This type is used to fill free storage, to catch wild references.
dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
¶An “invisible pointer” used for external value cells, which are part of the closure mechanism (see closure), and used by compiled code to address value and function cells.
dtp-self-ref-pointer
¶An “invisible pointer” used to refer to an instance variable of self
.
This data type appears in FEFs of flavor methods.
dtp-header-forward
¶An “invisible pointer” used to indicate that the structure containing
it has been moved elsewhere. The “header word” of the structure is
replaced by one of these invisible pointers. See the function structure-forward
(structure-forward-fun).
dtp-body-forward
¶An “invisible pointer” used to indicate that the structure containing it has been moved elsewhere. This points to the word containing the header-forward, which points to the new copy of the structure.
dtp-one-q-forward
¶An “invisible pointer” used to indicate that the single cell containing it has been moved elsewhere.
dtp-gc-forward
¶This is used by the copying garbage collector to flag the obsolete copy of an object; it points to the new copy.
The value of q-data-types
is a list of all of the symbolic
names for data types described above under data-type
.
These are the symbols whose print names begin
with ‘dtp-
’. The values of these symbols are the internal numeric data-type codes
for the various types.
Given the internal numeric data-type code, returns the corresponding symbolic name. This “function” is actually an array.
An invisible pointer or forwarding pointer is a kind of pointer that does not represent a Lisp object, but just resides in memory. There are several kinds of invisible pointer, and there are various rules about where they may or may not appear. The basic property of an invisible pointer is that if the Lisp Machine reads a word of memory and finds an invisible pointer there, instead of seeing the invisible pointer as the result of the read, it does a second read, at the location addressed by the invisible pointer, and returns that as the result instead. Writing behaves in a similar fashion. When the Lisp Machine writes a word of memory it first checks to see if that word contains an invisible pointer; if so it goes to the location pointed to by the invisible pointer and tries to write there instead. Many subprimitives that read and write memory do not do this checking.
The simplest kind of invisible pointer has the data type code
dtp-one-q-forward
. It is used to forward a single word of memory to
someplace else. The invisible pointers with data types
dtp-header-forward
and dtp-body-forward
are used for moving
whole Lisp objects (such as cons cells or arrays) somewhere else. The
dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
is very similar to the
dtp-one-q-forward
; the difference is that it is not “invisible” to
the operation of binding. If the (internal) value cell of a symbol
contains a dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
that points to some other
word (the external value cell), then symeval
or set
operations on
the symbol consider the pointer to be invisible and use the
external value cell, but binding the symbol saves away the
dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
itself, and stores the new value into
the internal value cell of the symbol. This is how closures are implemented.
dtp-gc-forward
is not an invisible pointer at all; it only appears in
“old spaced” and can never be seen by any program other than the garbage
collector. When an object is found not to be garbage, and the garbage collector
moves it from “old space” to “new space”, a dtp-gc-forward
is left behind
to point to the new copy of the object. This ensures that other references
to the same object get the same new copy.
This causes references to old-object actually to reference new-object, by storing invisible pointers in old-object. It returns old-object.
An example of the use of structure-forward
is adjust-array
.
If the array is being made bigger and cannot be expanded in place, a new
array is allocated, the contents are copied, and the old array is
structure-forwarded to the new one. This forwarding ensures that pointers
to the old array, or to cells within it, continue to work. When the garbage
collector goes to copy the old array, it notices the forwarding and uses
the new array as the copy; thus the overhead of forwarding disappears
eventually if garbage collection is in use.
Normally returns object, but if object has been structure-forward
’ed,
returns the object at the end of the chain of forwardings. If object
is not exactly an object, but a locative to a cell in the middle of an object,
a locative to the corresponding cell in the latest copy of the object is
returned.
This alters from-symbol so that it always has the same value
as to-symbol, by sharing its value cell. A dtp-one-q-forward
invisible pointer is stored into from-symbol’s value cell.
Do not do this while from-symbol’s current dynamic binding
is not global, as
the microcode does not bother to check for that case and something
bad will happen when from-symbol’s binding is unbound. The microcode check
is omitted to speed up binding and unbinding.
This is how synonymous variables (such as *terminal-io*
and terminal-io
)
are created.
To forward one arbitrary cell to another (rather than specifically one value cell to another), given two locatives, do
(%p-store-tag-and-pointer locative1 dtp-one-q-forward locative2)
loc is a locative to a cell. Normally loc is returned, but if the
cell has been forwarded, this follows the chain of forwardings and returns
a locative to the final cell. If the cell is part of a structure which has
been forwarded, the chain of structure forwardings is followed, too.
If evcp-p is t
, external value cell pointers are followed; if
it is nil
they are not.
It should again be emphasized that improper use of these functions can damage or destroy the Lisp environment. It is possible to create pointers with illegal data-type, pointers to non-existent objects, and pointers to untyped storage, which will completely confuse the garbage collector.
Returns the data-type field of x, as a fixnum.
Returns the pointer field of x, as a fixnum. For most types, this is dangerous since the garbage collector can copy the object and change its address.
Makes up a pointer, with data-type in the data-type
field and pointer in the pointer field, and returns it. data-type
should be an internal numeric data-type code; these are the values of
the symbols that start with dtp-
. pointer may be any object;
its pointer field is used. This is
most commonly used for changing the type of a pointer. Do not use this
to make pointers which are not allowed to be in the machine, such as
dtp-null
, invisible pointers, etc.
Returns a pointer with data-type in the data-type
field, and pointer plus offset in the pointer field. The
data-type and pointer arguments are like those of %make-pointer
;
offset may be any object but is usually a fixnum. The
types of the arguments are not checked; their pointer fields are simply
added together. This is useful for constructing locative pointers
into the middle of an object. However, note that it is illegal to
have a pointer to untyped data, such as the inside of a FEF or
a numeric array.
Returns a fixnum which is pointer-1 minus pointer-2. No type checks are made. For the result to be meaningful, the two pointers must point into the same object, so that their difference cannot change as a result of garbage collection.
t
if object points to storage. For example,
(%pointerp "foo")
is t
, but (%pointerp 5)
is nil
.
t
if the specified data type is one which points to storage.
For example, (%pointer-type-p dtp-fix)
returns nil
.
t
if the contents of the word at location points to storage.
This is similar to (%pointerp (contects location))
, but the latter may get
an error if location contains a forwarding pointer, a header type, or a
void marker. In such cases, %p-pointerp
correctly tells you whether
the header or forward points to storage.
Similar to %p-pointerp
but operates on the word offset words beyond location.
Returns the contents of the word offset words beyond base-pointer. This first checks the cell pointed to by base-pointer for a forwarding pointer. Having followed forwarding pointers to the real structure pointed to, it adds offset to the resulting forwarded base-pointer and returns the contents of that location.
There is no %p-contents
, since car
performs that operation.
t
if the contents of word location are a valid Lisp object, at least
as far as data type is concerned. It is nil
if the word contains a header type,
a forwarding pointer, or a void marker. If the value of this function is
t
, you will not get an error from (contents location)
.
Similar to %p-contents-safe-p
but operates on the word offset words beyond location.
Given a pointer to a memory location containing a pointer that isn’t
allowed to be “in the machine” (typically an invisible pointer)
this function returns the contents of the location as a dtp-locative
.
It changes the disallowed data type to dtp-locative
so that you can safely
look at it and see what it points to.
Extracts the contents of a word like %p-contents-offset
,
but changes it into a locative like %p-contents-as-locative
.
This can be used, for example, to analyze the
dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
pointers in a FEF, which are
used by the compiled code to reference value cells and function cells
of symbols.
Returns the contents of the word offset words beyond location as accurately as possible without getting an error.
If the contents are a valid Lisp object, it is returned exactly.
If the contents are not a valid Lisp object but do point to storage, the value returned is a locative which points to the same place in storage.
If the contents are not a valid Lisp object and do not point to storage, the value returned is a fixnum with the same pointer field.
Forwarding pointers are checked as in %p-contents-offset
.
Stores value into the data-type and pointer fields of the location addressed by pointer, and returns value. The cdr-code field of the location remains unchanged.
Stores value in the location offset beyond words beyond
base-pointer, then returns value. The cdr-code field remains
unchanged. Forwarding pointers in the location at base-pointer are
handled as they are in %p-contents-offset
.
Stores miscfields and pointerfield into the location addressed by pointer. 25 bits are taken from pointerfield to fill the pointer field of the location, and the low 7 bits of miscfields are used to fill both the data-type and cdr-code fields of the location. The low 5 bits of miscfields become the data-type, and the top two bits become the cdr-code. This is a good way to store a forwarding pointer from one structure to another (for example).
%p-store-tag-and-pointer
should be used only for storing into ‘boxed’ words,
for the same reason as %blt-typed
: the microcode could halt if the data stored
is not valid boxed data. See %blt-typed-fun.
Extracts a byte according to byte-spec from the contents of the
location addressed by pointer, in effect regarding the contents as a
32-bit number and using ldb
. The result is always a fixnum.
For example, (%p-ldb %%q-cdr-code loc)
returns the cdr-code of
the location addressed by loc.
Extracts a byte according to byte-spec from the contents of the
location offset words beyond base-pointer, after handling
forwarding pointers like %p-contents-offset
.
This is the way to reference byte fields within a structure without violating system storage conventions.
Like %p-ldb
, except that the selected byte is returned in its
original position within the word instead of right-aligned.
Like %p-ldb-offset
, except that the selected byte is returned in its
original position within the word instead of right-aligned.
Note: %p-dbp
, %p-dpb-offset
, %p-deposit-field
and
%p-deposit-field-offset
should never be used to modify
the pointer field of a boxed word if the data type is one which actually
points to storage, unless you are sure that the new pointer is such as
to cause no trouble (such as, if it points to a static area). Likewise,
it should never be used to change a data type which does not point to
storage into one which does. Either action could confuse the garbage
collector.
Stores value, a fixnum, into the byte selected
by byte-spec in the word addressed by pointer. nil
is returned.
You can use this to alter data types, cdr-codes, etc,
but see the note above for restrictions.
Stores value into the specified byte of the location offset
words beyond that addressed by base-pointer, after first
handling forwarding pointers in the location addressed by base-pointer
as in %p-contents-offset
. nil
is returned.
This is the way to alter unboxed data within a structure without violating system storage conventions. You can use this to alter boxed words too, but see the note above for restrictions.
Like %p-dpb
, except that the selected
byte is stored from the corresponding bits of value rather than
the right-aligned bits.
See the note above %p-dpb
for restrictions.
Like %p-dpb-offset
, except that the selected
byte is stored from the corresponding bits of value rather than
the right-aligned bits.
See the note above %p-dpb
for restrictions.
Extracts the pointer field of the contents of the location addressed by pointer and returns it as a fixnum.
Extracts the data-type field of the contents of the location addressed by pointer and returns it as a fixnum.
Extracts the cdr-code field of the contents of the location addressed by pointer and returns it as a fixnum.
Stores value in the pointer field of the location addressed by pointer, and returns value.
Stores value in the data-type field of the location addressed by pointer, and returns value.
Stores value in the cdr-code field of the location addressed by pointer, and returns value.
Returns a locative pointer to its caller’s stack frame. This
function is not defined in the interpreted Lisp environment; it only works
in compiled code. Since it turns into a “misc” instruction,
the “caller’s stack frame” really means “the frame for the FEF
that executed the %stack-frame-pointer
instruction”.
The following special variables have values which define the most important attributes
of the way Lisp data structures are laid out in storage. In addition to the variables
documented here, there are many others that are more specialized. They are not
documented in this manual since they are in the system
package rather than
the global
package. The variables whose names start with %%
are
byte specifiers, intended to be used with subprimitives such as %p-ldb
.
If you change the value of any of these variables, you will probably bring the
machine to a crashing halt.
The field of a memory word that contains the data-type code. See data-type-fun.
The field of a memory word that contains the pointer address, or immediate data.
The field of a memory word that contains the part of the address that lies within a single page.
The concatenation of the %%q-data-type
and %%q-pointer
fields.
This is now synonymous with %%q-cdr-code
, and therefore obsolete.
The concatenation of all fields of a memory word except for %%q-pointer
.
The concatenation of all fields of a memory word except for %%q-cdr-code
.
This subprimitive finds the structure into which pointer points, by searching backward for a header. It is a basic low-level function used by such things as the garbage collector. pointer is normally a locative, but its data-type is ignored. Note that it is illegal to point into an “unboxed” portion of a structure, for instance the middle of a numeric array.
In structure space, the “containing structure” of a pointer
is well-defined by system storage conventions. In list space,
it is considered to be the contiguous, cdr-coded segment of
list surrounding the location pointed to. If a cons of the list
has been copied out by rplacd
, the contiguous list includes
that pair and ends at that point.
This is identical to %find-structure-header
, except that if the
structure is an array with a leader, this returns a locative pointer
to the leader-header, rather than returning the array-pointer itself.
Thus the result of %find-structure-leader
is always the lowest
address in the structure. This is the one used internally by the garbage collector.
Returns the number of “boxed Q’s” in object. This is the number of words at the front of the structure which contain normal Lisp objects. Some structures, for example FEFs and numeric arrays, contain additional “unboxed Q’s” following their boxed Q’s. Note that the boxed size of a PDL (either regular or special) does not include Q’s above the current top of the PDL. Those locations are boxed, but their contents are considered garbage and are not protected by the garbage collector.
Returns the total number of words occupied by the representation of object, including boxed Q’s, unboxed Q’s, and garbage Q’s off the ends of PDLs.
This is the subprimitive for creating most structured-type objects.
area is the area in which it is to be created, as a fixnum or a symbol.
size is the number of words to be allocated. The value returned
points to the first word allocated and has data-type data-type.
Uninterruptibly, the words allocated are initialized so that storage
conventions are preserved at all times. The first word, the header,
is initialized to have header-type in its data-type field
and header in its pointer field. The second word is initialized
to second-word. The remaining words are initialized to nil
.
The cdr-codes of all words
except the last are set to cdr-next
; the cdr-code of the last word
is set to cdr-nil
. It is probably a bad idea to rely on this.
This is the subprimitive for creating arrays, called only by make-array
.
It is different from %allocate-and-initialize
because arrays have
a more complicated header structure.
The basic functions for creating list-type objects are cons
and
make-list
; no special subprimitive is needed. Closures, entities,
and select-methods are based on lists, but there is no primitive
for creating them. To create one, create a list and then use %make-pointer
to change the data type from dtp-list
to the desired type.
%blt
and %blt-typed
are subprimitives for copying blocks of
data, word aligned, from one place in memory to another with little
or no type checking.
Copies count words, separated by increment. The word at
address from is moved to address to, the word at address
from+
increment is moved to address to+
increment,
and so on until count words have been moved.
Only the pointer fields of from and to are significant; they may be locatives or even fixnums. If one of them must point to the unboxed data in the middle of a structure, you must make it a fixnum, and you must do so with interrupts disabled, or else garbage collection could move the structure after you have already created the fixnum.
%blt-typed
assumes that each copied word contains a data type field
and checks that field, interfacing suitably with the garbage collector
if necessary. %blt
does not check the data type fields of the copied words.
%blt
may be used on any data except boxed data containing pointers
to storage, while %blt-typed
may be used on any boxed data.
Both %blt
and %blt-typed
can be used validly on data which is formatted with
data types (boxed) but whose contents never point to storage. This includes
words whose contents are always fixnums or short floats, and also words which
contain array headers, array leader headers, or FEF headers. Whether or not the
machine is told to examine the data types of such data makes no difference
since, on examining them, it would decide that nothing needed to be done.
For unboxed data (data which is formatted not containing valid data type fields),
such as the inside of a numeric array or the instruction words of a FEF, only
%blt
may be used. If %blt-typed
were used, it would examine the data type
fields of the data words, and probably halt due to an invalid data type code.
For boxed data which may contain pointers, only %blt-typed
may be used. If
%blt
were used, it would appear to work, but problems could appear mysteriously
later because nothing would notice the presence of the pointer there. For
example, the pointer might point to a bignum in the number consing area, and
moving it in this way would fail to copy it into a nontemporary area. Then the
pointer would become invalidated the next time the number consing area was
emptied out. There could also be problems with lexical closures and with
garbage collection.
This peculiar function attempts to return object to free storage.
If it is a displaced array, this returns the displaced array itself,
not the data that the array points to. Currently return-storage
does nothing if the object is not at the end of its region, i.e if
it was not either the most recently allocated non-list object in its
area, or the most recently allocated list in its area.
If you still have any references to object anywhere in the Lisp world
after this function returns, the garbage collector can get a fatal error
if it sees them. Since the form that calls this function must get the
object from somewhere, it may not be clear how to legally call return-storage
.
One of the only ways to do it is as follows:
(defun func () (let ((object (make-array 100))) ... (return-storage (prog1 object (setq object nil)))))
so that the variable object
does not refer to the object when
return-storage
is called. Alternatively, you can free the
object and get rid of all pointers to it while interrupts are turned
off with without-interrupts
.
You should only call this function if you know what you are doing; otherwise the garbage collector can get fatal errors. Be careful.
This is the basic locking primitive. pointer is a locative to
a cell which is uninterruptibly read and written. If the contents of
the cell is eq
to old, then it is replaced by new and
t
is returned. Otherwise, nil
is returned and the contents
of the cell are not changed.
See also store-conditional
, a higher-level function which provides
type checking (store-conditional-fun).
The CADR processor has a 32-bit memory bus called the Xbus.
In addition to main memory and TV screen memory,
most I/O device registers are on this bus. There is also
a Unibus compatible with the PDP-11. A map of Xbus and Unibus
addresses can be found in SYS: DOC; UNADDR TEXT
.
Returns as a fixnum the contents of the register at the specified Unibus address. You must specify a full 18-bit address. This is guaranteed to read the location only once. Since the Lisp Machine Unibus does not support byte operations, this always references a 16-bit word, and so address should normally be an even number.
Writes the 16-bit number data at the specified Unibus address, exactly once.
Returns the contents of the register at the specified Xbus address. io-offset is an offset into the I/O portion of Xbus physical address space. This is guaranteed to read the location exactly once. The returned value can be either a fixnum or a bignum.
Writes data, which can be a fixnum or a bignum, into the register at the specified Xbus address. io-offset is an offset into the I/O portion of Xbus physical address space. This is guaranteed to write the location exactly once.
Does (%xbus-write w-loc w-data)
, but first synchronizes to
within about one microsecond of a certain condition. The synchronization
is achieved by looping until
(= (logand (%xbus-read sync-loc) sync-mask) sync-value)
is false, then looping until it is true, then looping delay times. Thus the write happens a specified delay after the leading edge of the synchronization condition. The number of microseconds of delay is roughly one third of delay.
This primitive is used to alter the color TV screen’s color map during vertical retrace.
Returns the contents of a word read from the Nu bus. Addresses on the Nu bus are divided into an 8-bit slot number which identifies which physical board is being referenced and a 24-bit address within slot. The address is measured in bytes and therefore should be a multiple of 4. Which addresses are valid depends on the type of board plugged into the specified slot. If, for example, the board is a 512k main memory board, then the valid address range from 0 to 4 * (512k - 1). (Of course, main memory boards are normally accessed through the virtual memory mechanism.)
Writes word into a word of the Nu bus, whose address is specified by slot and byte-address as described above.
The valid portions of the Nu bus address space are not contiguous. Each board is allocated 16m bytes of address space, but no memory board actually provides 16m bytes of memory.
The Lisp Machine virtual memory system maps virtual addresses into a contiguous physical address space. On the Lambda, this contiguous address space is mapped a second time into the discontiguous Nu bus address space. Unlike the mapping of virtual addresses to physical ones, the second mapping is determined from the hardware configuration when the machine is booted and does not change during operation.
This function performs exactly that mapping. The argument is
a physical page number (a physical address divided by sys:page-size
).
The argument is a "Nu bus page number"; multiplied by sys:page-size
and then by four, it yields the Nu bus byte address of the beginning
of that physical page.
See also sys:%physical-address
, sys:%physical-address-fun.
These subprimitives can be used (carefully!) to call a function with the
number of arguments variable at run time. They only work in compiled code
and are not defined in the interpreted Lisp environment.
The preferred higher-level primitive is apply
(apply-fun).
Starts a call to function. n-adi-pairs is the number of
pairs of additional information words already %push
’ed; normally
this should be 0
. destination is where to put the result;
the useful values are 0 for the value to be ignored, 1
for the value to go onto the stack, 3 for the value to be
the last argument to the previous open call block, and 2
for the value to be returned from this frame.
Pushes value onto the stack. Use this to push the arguments.
Causes the call to happen.
Pops the top value off of the stack and returns it as its value.
Use this to recover the result from a call made by %open-call-block
with a destination of 1.
Call this before doing a sequence of %push
’s or %open-call-block
’s
that will add n-words to the current frame. This subprimitive checks
that the frame will not exceed the maximum legal frame size, which is 255 words
including all overhead. This limit is dictated by the way stack frames are linked together.
If the frame is going to exceed the legal limit, %assure-pdl-room
signals
an error.
Binds the cell pointed to by locative to x, in the caller’s
environment. This function is not defined in the interpreted Lisp
environment; it only works from compiled code. Since it turns into an
instruction, the “caller’s environment” really means “the binding block
for the compiled function that executed the %bind
instruction”. The preferred
higher-level primitives that turn into this are let
(let-fun),
let-if
(let-if-fun), and progv
(progv-fun).
The binding is in effect for the scope of the innermost binding
construct, such as prog
or let
–even one that binds no
variables itself.
%bind
is the preferred name; bind
is an older name which will
eventually be eliminated.
[Someday this may discuss how it works.]
This variable contains bits that control various disk usage features.
Bit 0 (the least significant bit) enables read-compares after disk read operations. This causes a considerable slowdown, so it is rarely used.
Bit 1 enables read-compares after disk write operations.
Bit 2 enables the multiple page swap-out feature. When this is enabled, as it is by default, each time a page is swapped out, up to 16 contiguous pages are also written out to the disk if they have been modified. This greatly improves swapping performance.
Bit 3 controls the multiple page swap-in feature, which is also on by
default. This feature causes pages to be swapped in in groups; each
time a page is needed, several contiguous pages are swapped in in the
same disk operation. The number of pages swapped in can be specified
for each area using si:set-swap-recommendations-of-area
.
Specifies that pages of area area-number should be swapped in in groups of recommendation at a time. This recommendation is used only if the multiple page swap-in feature is enabled.
Generally, the more memory a machine has, the higher the swap recommendations should be to get optimum performance. The recommendations are set automatically according to the memory size when the machine is booted.
Specifies the swap-in recommendation of all areas at once.
t
) ¶If wire-p is t
, the page containing address is wired-down; that is,
it cannot be paged-out. If wire-p is nil
, the page ceases to be wired-down.
(si:unwire-page address)
is the same as
(si:wire-page address
.
nil
)
Makes sure that the storage that represents object is in main
memory. Any pages that have been swapped out to disk are read in,
using as few disk operations as possible. Consecutive disk pages are
transferred together, taking advantage of the full speed of the disk.
If object is large, this is much faster than bringing the pages
in one at a time on demand. The storage occupied by object is defined
by the %find-structure-leader
and %structure-total-size
subprimitives.
This is a version of sys:page-in-structure
that can bring in a portion
of an array. from and to are lists of subscripts; if they are shorter
than the dimensionality of array, the remaining subscripts are assumed to
be zero.
Like sys:page-in-array
except that the lists from and to, if
present, are assumed to have their subscripts in the order horizontal,
vertical, regardless of which of those two is actually the first axis of
the array. See make-pixel-array
, make-pixel-array-fun.
Any pages that have been swapped out to disk in the range of address space starting at address and continuing for n-words are read in with as few disk operations as possible.
All swapped-out pages of the specified region or area are brought into main memory.
These are similar to the above, except that they take pages out of main memory rather than bringing them in. Actually, they only mark the pages as having priority for replacement by others. Use these operations when you are done with a large object, to make the virtual memory system prefer reclaiming that object’s memory over swapping something else out.
If the page containing virtual-address is swapped out, or if it is
part of one of the low-numbered fixed areas, this returns nil
.
Otherwise it
returns the entire first word
of the page hash table entry for the page.
The %%pht1-
symbols in SYS: SYS; QCOM LISP
are byte specifiers you
can use with %logldb
for decoding the value.
The page hash table entry for the page containing virtual-address
is found and altered as specified. t
is returned if it was found,
nil
if it was not (presumably the page is swapped out). swap-status
and access-status-and-meta-bits can be nil
if those fields are not
to be changed. This doesn’t make any error checks; you can really
screw things up if you call it with the wrong arguments.
Makes the hashing function for the page hash table available to the user.
Returns the physical address which virtual-address currently maps into. The value is unpredictable if the virtual page is not swapped in; therefore, this function should be used on wired pages, or you should do
(without-interrupts
(%p-pointer virtual-address) ;swap it in
(sys:%physical-address virtual-address))
This is used when adjusting the size of real memory available to the machine. It adds an entry for the page frame at physical-address to the page hash table, with virtual address -1, swap status flushable, and map status 120 (read only). This doesn’t make error checks; you can really screw things up if you call it with the wrong arguments.
If there is a page in the page frame at physical-address, it is swapped out and its entry is deleted from the page hash table, making that page frame unavailable for swapping in of pages in the future. This doesn’t make error checks; you can really screw things up if you call it with the wrong arguments.
Loads virtual memory from the partition named by the concatenation of
the two 16-bit arguments, and starts executing it. The name 0
refers to the default load (the one the machine loads when it is
started up). This is the primitive used by disk-restore
(see disk-restore-fun).
Copies virtual memory into the partition named by the concatenation
of the two 16-bit arguments (0
means the default), then restarts
the world, as if it had just been restored. The physical-mem-size
argument should come from %sys-com-memory-size
in system-communication-area
.
If physical-mem-size is negative, it is minus the memory size,
and an incremental save is done.
This is the primitive used by disk-save
(see disk-save-fun).
Specifies the size of physical memory in words. The Lisp machine determines the actual amount of physical memory when it is booted, but with this function you can tell it to use less memory than is actually present. This may be useful for comparing performance based on the amount of memory.
These functions deal with things like what closures deal with: the distinction between internal and external value cells and control over how they work.
This is the primitive that could be used by closure
.
First, if any of the symbols in list-of-symbols has no external
value cell, a new external value cell is created for it, with
the contents of the internal value cell. Then a list of locatives,
twice as long as list-of-symbols, is created and returned.
The elements are grouped in pairs: pointers to the internal
and external value cells, respectively, of each of the symbols.
closure
could have been defined by:
(defun closure (variables function) (%make-pointer dtp-closure (cons function (sys:%binding-instances variables))))
This function is the primitive operation that invocation of closures
could use. It takes a list such as sys:%binding-instances
returns,
and for each pair of elements in the list, it “adds” a binding to the
current stack frame, in the same manner that the %bind
function
does. These bindings remain in effect until the frame returns or is
unwound.
sys:%using-binding-instances
checks for redundant bindings and ignores them.
(A binding is redundant if the symbol is already bound to the desired external
value cell.) This check avoids excessive growth of the special pdl in some cases
and is also made by the microcode which invokes closures, entities, and instances.
Given a closure, closure-bindings
extracts its list of binding instances,
which you can then pass to sys:%using-binding-instances
.
Returns the contents of the internal value cell of symbol.
dtp-one-q-forward
pointers are considered invisible, as usual, but
dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
s are not; this function can
return a dtp-external-value-cell-pointer
. Such pointers will be
considered invisible as soon as they leave the “inside of the machine”,
meaning internal registers and the stack.
The MIT Lisp Machine system runs on two types of processors: the CADR and the Lambda. These are similar enough that there is no difference in compiled code for them, and no provision for compile-time conditionalization. However, obscure or internal I/O code sometimes needs to behave differently at run-time depending on the type of processor. This is possible through the use of these macros.
This variable is 1 on a CADR processor or equivalent, 2 on a Lambda.
Executes body only when executing on a CADR.
Executes body only when executing on a Lambda.
Executes if-cadr-form when executing on a CADR, executes else-body when executing on a Lambda.
(format t "~&Processor is a ~A.~%" (if-in-cadr-else-lambda "CADR" "Lambda"))
Executes if-cadr-form when executing on a Lambda executes else-body when executing on a CADR.
Each clause consists of :cadr
or :lambda
followed by forms
to execute when running on that kind of processor. Example:
(format t "~&Processor is a ~A.~%" (select-processor (:cadr "CADR") (:lambda "Lambda")))
The following variables’ values actually reside in the scratchpad memory
of the processor. They are put there by dtp-one-q-forward
invisible
pointers. The values of these variables are used by the microcode.
Many of these variables are highly internal and you shouldn’t expect to
understand them.
This is the version number of the currently-loaded microcode, obtained from the version number of the microcode source file.
Size of micro-code-entry-area
and related areas.
default-cons-area
is documented on default-cons-area-var.
The area number of the area where bignums, ratios, full-size floats and
complexnums are consed. Normally this variable contains the value of
sys:extra-pdl-area
, which enables the “temporary storage” feature
for numbers, saving garbage collection overhead.
current-stack-group
and current-stack-group-resumer
are documented on current-stack-group-var.
The sg-state
of the currently-running stack group.
The argument list of the currently-running stack group.
The number of arguments to the currently-running stack group.
The microcode address of the most recent error trap.
The function that is called when the machine starts up.
Normally this is the definition of si:lisp-top-level
.
The stack group in which the machine starts up. Normally this is the initial Lisp Listener window’s process’s stack group.
The stack group that receives control when a microcode-detected error occurs. This stack group cleans up, signals the appropriate condition, or assigns a stack group to run the debugger on the erring stack group.
The stack group that receives control when a sequence break occurs.
A fixnum, the virtual address that maps to the Unibus location of the Chaosnet interface.
A fixnum, the inclusive lower bound of the region of virtual memory subject to the MAR feature (see mar).
A fixnum, the inclusive upper bound of the region of virtual memory subject to the MAR feature (see mar).
If non-nil
, you can write into read-only areas. This is used by fasload
.
self
is documented on self-var.
inhibit-scheduling-flag
is documented on inhibit-scheduling-flag-var.
If non-nil
, the scavenger is turned off. The scavenger is
the quasi-asynchronous portion of the garbage collector,
which normally runs during consing operations.
If this is nil
, scavenging can compete for all of the physical
memory of the machine. Otherwise, it should be a fixnum, which
specifies how much physical memory the scavenger can use: page numbers
as high as this number or higher are not available to it.
Increments whenever a new region is allocated.
Increments whenever a new page is allocated.
t
while the scavenger is running, nil
when there are no pointers
to oldspace.
A fixnum which is incremented whenever the garbage collector flips, converting
one or more regions from newspace to oldspace.
If this number has changed, the %pointer
of an object may have changed.
A fixnum, the virtual address of the TV buffer location of the run-light which lights up when the disk is active. This plus 2 is the address of the run-light for the processor. This minus 2 is the address of the run-light for the garbage collector.
A fixnum, the high 24 bits of the name of the disk partition from which virtual memory was booted. Used to create the greeting message.
Configuration of the disk being used for paging. Don’t change these!
sys:%disk-switches
is documented on sys:%disk-switches-var.
This is the last array to be called as a function, remembered for the
sake of the function store
.
This is the index used the last time an array was called as a
function, remembered for the sake of the function store
.
This is a vector of pointers that microcompiled code uses to refer to quoted constants.
Used for communication between the window system and the microcoded graphics primitives.
alphabetic-case-affects-string-comparison
is documented on
alphabetic-case-affects-string-comparison-var.
sys:tail-recursion-flag
is documented on
tail-recursion-flag-var.
zunderflow
is documented on zunderflow-var.
The next four have to do with implementing the metering system described in meter-section.
t
if the metering system is turned on for all stack-groups.
A temporary buffer used by the metering system.
Where the metering system writes its next block of results on the disk.
The number of disk blocks remaining for recording of metering information.
This is the static chain used in the implementation of lexical scoping of variable bindings in compiled code.
No longer used.
background-cons-area
is documented on
background-cons-area-var.
sys:self-mapping-table
is documented on
sys:self-mapping-table-var.
sys:processor-type-code
is documented on
sys:processor-type-code-var.
A list of all of the above symbols (and any others added after this documentation was written).
Microcode meters are locations in the scratchpad memory which contain
numbers. Most of them are used to count events of various sorts. They
are accessible only through the functions read-meter
and
write-meter
. They have nothing to do with the Lisp metering tools.
Returns the contents of the microcode meter named name, which can be a fixnum or a bignum. name must be one of the symbols listed below.
Writes value, a fixnum or a bignum, into the microcode meter named name. name must be one of the symbols listed below.
The microcode meters are as follows:
The number of times transmission on the Chaosnet was aborted, either by a collision or because the receiver was busy.
Internal state of the garbage collection algorithm.
The number of TV frames per clock sequence break. The default value is 67., which causes clock sequence breaks to happen about once per second.
The number of times the first-level virtual-memory map was invalid and had to be reloaded from the page hash table.
The number of times the second-level virtual-memory map was invalid and had to be reloaded from the page hash table.
The number of times the virtual address map was reloaded to contain only “meta bits”, not an actual physical address.
The number of read references to the pdl buffer that were virtual memory references that trapped.
The number of write references to the pdl buffer that were virtual memory references that trapped.
The number of virtual memory references that trapped in case they should have gone to the pdl buffer, but turned out to be real memory references after all (and therefore were needlessly slowed down).
The number of pages read from the disk.
The number of pages written to the disk.
The number of fresh (newly-consed) pages created in core, which would have otherwise been read from the disk.
The number of paging read operations; this can be smaller than the number of disk pages read when more than one page at a time is read.
The number of paging write operations; this can be smaller than the number of disk pages written when more than one page at a time is written.
The number of times a page was used after being read in before it was needed.
The number of times a page was read in before it was needed, but got evicted before it was ever used.
The number of times the machine waited for a page to finish being written out in order to evict the page.
The number of times the machine waited for a page to finish being written out in order to do something else with the disk.
The time spent waiting for the disk, in microseconds. This can be used to distinguish paging time from running time when measuring and optimizing the‘ performance of programs.
The number of recoverable disk errors.
The number of times the disk seek mechanism was recalibrated, usually as part of error recovery.
The number of disk errors that were corrected through the error correcting code.
The number of times a read compare was done, no disk error occurred, but the data on disk did not match the data in memory.
The number of times a disk read was done over because after the read a read compare was done and did not succeed (either it got an error or the data on disk did not match the data in memory).
The number of times a disk write was done over because after the write a read compare was done and did not succeed (either it got an error or the data on disk did not match the data in memory).
Address of the next entry to be written in the disk error log. The function
si:print-disk-error-log
(see si:print-disk-error-log-fun) prints this log.
The number of times the page ager set an age trap on a page, to determine whether it was being referenced.
The number of times the page ager saw that a page still had an age trap and hence made it “flushable”, a candidate for eviction from main memory.
A number from 0 to 3 that controls how long a page must remain unreferenced before it becomes a candidate for eviction from main memory.
The number of pages inspected by the page replacement algorithm.
The number of times no evictable page was found and extra aging had to be done.
A list of all of the above symbols (and any others added after this documentation was written).
Storage in the Lisp Machine is divided into areas. Each area contains related objects, of any type. Areas are intended to give the user control over the paging behavior of the program, among other things. Putting frequently used data and rarely used data in different areas can cause the frequently used data to occupy fewer pages. For example, the system puts the debugging info alists of compiled functions in a special area so that the other list structure the functions point to will be more compact.
Whenever a new object is created the area to be used can
optionally be specified. For example, instead of using cons
you can
use cons-in-area
(see cons-in-area-fun). Object-creating functions
which take keyword arguments generally accept a :area
argument.
You can also control which area is used by binding default-cons-area
(see default-cons-area-var); most functions that allocate storage
use the value of this variable, by default, to specify the area to use.
There is a default ‘working storage’ area that collects those objects that the user has not chosen to control explicitly.
Areas also give the user a handle to control the garbage collector. Some areas can be declared to be static, which means that they change slowly and the garbage collector should not attempt to reclaim any space in them. This can eliminate a lot of useless copying. A static area can be explicitly garbage-collected at infrequent intervals when it is believed that that might be worthwhile.
Each area can potentially have a different storage discipline, a different paging algorithm, and even a different data representation. The microcode dispatches on attributes of the area at the appropriate times. The structure of the machine makes the performance cost of these features negligible; information about areas is stored in extra bits in the memory mapping hardware where it can be quickly dispatched on by the microcode; these dispatches usually have to be done anyway to make the garbage collector work and to implement invisible pointers. This feature is not currently used by the system, except for the list/structure distinction described below.
Each area has a name and a number. The name is a symbol whose value is the number. The number is an index into various internal tables. Normally the name is treated as a special variable, so the number is what is given as an argument to a function that takes an area as an argument. Thus, areas are not Lisp objects; you cannot pass an area itself as an argument to a function; you just pass its number. There is a maximum number of areas (set at cold-load generation time); you can only have that many areas before the various internal tables overflow. Currently (as this manual is written) the limit is 256 areas, of which 64 already exist when you start.
The storage of an area consists of one or more regions. Each region is a contiguous section of address space with certain homogeneous properties. The most important of these is the data representation type. A given region can only store one type. The two types that exist now are list and structure. A list is anything made out of conses (a closure for instance). A structure is anything made out of a block of memory with a header at the front; symbols, strings, arrays, instances, compiled functions, etc. Since lists and structures cannot be stored in the same region, they cannot be on the same page. It is necessary to know about this when using areas to increase locality of reference.
When you create an area, one region is created initially. When you try
to allocate memory to hold an object in some area, the system tries to
find a region that has the right data representation type to hold this
object, and that has enough room for it to fit. If there isn’t any such
region, it makes a new one (or signals an error; see the :size
option
to make-area
, below). The size of the new region is an attribute of
the area (controllable by the :region-size
option to make-area
).
If regions are too large, memory may get taken up by a region and never used.
If regions are too small, the system may run out of regions because regions,
like areas, are defined by internal tables that have a fixed size (set at
cold-load generation time). Currently (as this manual is written) the limit
is 256 regions, of which about 105 already exist when you start.
(If you’re wondering why the limit on regions isn’t higher than the limit
on areas, as it clearly ought to be, it’s just because both limits have
to be multiples of 256 for internal reasons, and 256 regions seem
to be enough.)
The value of this variable is the number of the area in which objects are created
by default. It is initially the number of working-storage-area
.
Giving nil
where an area is required uses the value of default-cons-area
.
Note that to put objects into an area other than working-storage-area
you can either bind this variable or use functions such as
cons-in-area
(see cons-in-area-fun) which take the area as an explicit argument.
The value of this variable is the number of a non-temporary area in which objects created as incidental side effects by system functions should be created. This area is used whenever an object is created that should never be in a temporary area, even if default-cons-area is a temporary area.
By default, this area is working-storage-area
.
Creates a new area, whose name and attributes are specified by the keywords.
You must specify a symbol as a name; the symbol is setq
’ed to
the area-number of the new area, and that number is also returned,
so that you can use make-area
as the initialization of a defvar
.
Here are the meanings of the keywords:
A symbol that will be the name of the area. This item is required.
The maximum allowed size of the area, in words. Defaults to infinite. (Actually, the default is the largest positive fixnum; but the area is not limited to that size!) If the number of words allocated to the area reaches this size, attempting to cons an object in the area will signal an error.
The approximate size, in words, for regions within this area. The
default is the area size if a :size
argument was given, otherwise it is a
suitable medium size. Note that if you specify :size
and not
:region-size
, the area will have exactly one region. When making an
area that will grow very big, it is desirable to make the region size
larger than the default region size to avoid creating very many regions
and possibly overflowing the system’s fixed-size region tables.
The type of object to be contained in the area’s initial region.
The argument to this keyword can be :list
, :structure
, or a numeric code.
:structure
is the default. If you are only going to cons lists in your
area, you should specify :list
so you don’t get a useless structure region.
The type of garbage-collection to be employed. The choices are
:dynamic
(which is the default), :static
, and :temporary
.
:static
means that the area will not be copied by the garbage
collector, and nothing in the area or pointed to by the area will ever
be reclaimed, unless a garbage collection of this area is manually
requested. :temporary
is like :static
, but in addition you are
allowed to use si:reset-temporary-area
on this area.
With an argument of t
, causes the area to be made read-only. Defaults
to nil
. If an area is read-only, then any attempt to change anything
in it (altering a data object in the area or creating a new object in the
area) will signal an error unless sys:%inhibit-read-only
(see sys:%inhibit-read-only-var) is bound to a non-nil
value.
With an argument of t
, makes the area suitable for storing
regular-pdls of stack-groups. This is a special attribute due to the
pdl-buffer hardware. Defaults to nil
. Areas for which this is nil
may not be used to store regular-pdls. Areas for which this is t
are relatively slow to access; all references to pages in the area will
take page faults to check whether the referenced location is really in
the pdl-buffer.
With an argument of t
, adds this area to the list of areas that are
displayed by default by the room
function (see room-fun).
Example:
(make-area :name 'foo-area :gc :dynamic :representation :list)
area may be the name or the number of an area. Various attributes of the area are printed.
The value of area-list
is a list of the names of all existing areas.
This list shares storage with the internal area name table, so you should
not change it.
Returns the number of the area to which pointer points, or nil
if
it does not point within any known area. The data-type of pointer
is ignored.
Returns the number of the region to which pointer points, or nil
if
it does not point within any known region. The data-type of pointer
is ignored. (This information is generally not very interesting to users;
it is important only inside the system.)
Given an area number, returns the name. This “function” is actually an array.
This very dangerous operation marks all the storage in area area-number as free and available for re-use. Any data in the area is lost and pointers to it become meaningless. In principle, this operation should only be used if you are sure there are no pointers into the area.
If the area was not defined as temporary, this function gets an error.
See also cons-in-area
(cons-in-area-fun), list-in-area
(list-in-area-fun),
and room
(room-fun).
This section lists the names of some of the areas and tells what they are for. Only the ones of the most interest to a user are listed; there are many others.
This is the normal value of default-cons-area
.
Most working data are consed in this area.
This area is to be used for permanent data, which will (almost) never become
garbage. Unlike working-storage-area
, the contents of this area
are not continually copied by the garbage collector; it is a static area.
The ‘number consing area’ in which floating point numbers, ratios and bignums
are normally created. If a pointer to a number in this area is stored anywhere
outside the machine registers and current stack, a copy of the number is
made in working-storage-area
and a pointer to the copy is stored instead.
When sys:extra-pdl-area
gets full, the all numbers pointed to by the
registers and current stack are copied, and then nothing in the area can be
in use any more, so it is marked as empty.
Print-names of symbols are stored in this area.
Contains most of the symbols in the Lisp world, except t
and nil
.
Contains the symbols t
and nil
. nil
is known to be at address zero.
This area contains packages, principally the hash tables with which intern
keeps track of symbols.
Compiled functions (FEFs) are put here by the compiler and by fasload
.
So are the constants that they refer to.
This area holds the property lists of symbols.
sys:area-overflow
: (error
) ¶This is signaled on an attempt to make an area bigger than its declared maximum size.
The condition instance supports the operations :area-name
and
:area-maximum-size
.
sys:region-table-overflow
: (error
) ¶This is signaled if you run out of regions.
sys:virtual-memory-overflow
: (error
) ¶This is signaled if all of virtual memory is part of some region and an attempt is made to allocate a new region. There may be free space left in some regions in other areas, but there is no way to apply it to the area in which storage is to be allocated.
sys:cons-in-fixed-area
: (error
) ¶This is signaled if an attempt is made add a second region to a fixed area. The fixed areas are certain areas, created at system initialization, that are only allowed a single region, because their contents must be contiguous in virtual memory.
The purpose of the Lisp compiler is to convert Lisp functions into programs in the Lisp Machine’s instruction set, so that they run more quickly and take up less storage. Compiled functions are represented in Lisp by FEFs (Function Entry Frames), which contain machine code as well as various other information. The printed representation of a FEF is
#<DTP-FEF-POINTER address name>
If you want to understand the output of the compiler, refer to understanding-compiled-code.
There are three ways to invoke the compiler from the Lisp
Machine. First, you may have an interpreted function in the Lisp
environment that you would like to compile. The function compile
is
used to do this. Second, you may have code in an editor buffer that you
would like to compile. The Zmacs editor has commands to read code into
Lisp and compile it. Third, you may have a program (a group of function
definitions and other forms) written in a file on the file system. The
function compile-file
can translate this file into a QFASL file
that describes the compiled functions and associated data. The QFASL
file format is capable of representing an arbitrary collection of Lisp
objects, including shared structure. The name derives from ‘Q’, a
prefix once used to mean “for the Lisp Machine, not for Maclisp”, and
‘FASL’, an abbreviation for “fast loading”.
Compiles an individual interpreted function definition. If
definition is supplied, it is the definition to be compiled.
Otherwise, the current definition of function-spec is used. If
function-spec is non-nil
, the compiled function is stored as the
definition of function-spec, and function-spec is returned.
Otherwise, the compiled function object itself is returned.
(However, it is preferable to use compile-lambda
if your wish
is to create a compiled function object without storing it anywhere.)
The compiled function object created by compile
records the
interpreted definition it was made from on its debugging info alist (see
debugging-info-fun). This is useful in two ways: the function
uncompile
can be used to reinstall the interpreted definition, and
compile
invoked again on the same function-spec can find the
interpreted definition used before and compile it again. The latter is
useful if you have changed some macros or subst functions which the
definition refers to.
If function-spec is defined as a compiled function that records the
original definition that was compiled, then function-spec is redefined
with that original definition. This undoes the effect of calling
compile
on function-spec.
Returns a compiled function object produced by compiling lambda-exp.
The function name recorded by the compiled function object is
function-spec, but that function spec is not defined
by compile-lambda
. This function is preferable to
compile
with first argument nil
in that it allows you to
specify the name for the function to record internally.
Compiles all encapsulations that function-spec
currently has.
Encapsulations (see encapsulate) include tracing, breakons and
advice. Compiling tracing or breakons makes it possible (or at least
more possible) to trace or breakon certain functions that are used in
the evaluator. Compiling advice makes it less costly to advise
functions that are used frequently.
Any encapsulation that is changed will cease to be compiled; thus, if
you add or remove advice, you must do compile-encapsulations
again
if you wish the advice to be compiled again.
If this is non-nil
, all encapsulations that are created are compiled
automatically.
Compiles the file specified by input-file, a pathname or namestring. The format for files input to the compiler is described on compiler-input-section.
If output-file is specified, it is a pathname used for the compiled file.
Otherwise, the ouptut file name is computed from the input file name
by specifying :qfasl
as the type component.
package, if non-nil
specifies the package in which compilation
should be performed. Normally the system knows, or asks interactively,
and you need not supply this argument.
set-default-pathname, if non-nil
, means that the defaults
should be set to the input file’s name. set-default-pathname defaults to t
.
An older, obsolete way of invoking the compiler on a file.
file-local-declarations is for compiling multiple files as if they were one. dont-set-default-p suppresses the changing of the default file name to filename that normally occurs. The load-flag and in-core-flag arguments were not fully implemented and should not be used. read-then-process-flag causes the entire file to be read and then the entire file to be compiled; this is no longer advantageous now that there is enough memory to avoid thrashing when forms are read and compiled one by one, and it prevents compile-time reader-macros defined in the file from working properly.
Compiles a file and then loads in the resulting QFASL file.
If this variable is non-nil
, the compiler prints the name of each
function that it is about to compile.
The peephole optimizer is used if this variable is non-nil
.
The only reason to set it to nil
is if there is a suspicion of a bug in the optimizer.
See also the disassemble
function (disassemble-fun), which lists the instructions
of a compiled function in symbolic form.
The purpose of compile-file
is to take a file and produce
a translated version which does the same thing as the original except
that the functions are compiled. compile-file
reads through the input
file, processing the forms in it one by one. For each form, suitable
binary output is sent to the QFASL file so that when the QFASL file is
loaded the effect of that source form will be reproduced. The differences
between source files and QFASL files are that QFASL files are in a compressed
binary form, which reads much faster but cannot be edited, and that
function definitions in QFASL files have been translated from Lisp forms
to FEFs.
So, if the source contains a (defun ...)
form at top level,
then when the QFASL file is loaded the function will be defined as a
compiled function. If the source file contains a form that is not of a
type known specially to the compiler, then that form (encoded in QFASL
format) is output “directly” into the QFASL file, so that when the
QFASL file is loaded that form will be evaluated. Thus, if the source
file contains (princ "Hello")
at top level, then the compiler puts
in the QFASL file instructions to create the list (princ "Hello")
and then evaluate it.
The Lisp Machine editor Zmacs assumes that source files are formatted so that an open parenthesis at the left margin (that is, in column zero) indicates the beginning of a function definition or other top level list (with a few standard exceptions). The compiler assumes that you follow this indentation convention, enabling it to tell when a close-parenthesis is missing from one function as soon as the beginning of the next function is reached.
If the compiler finds an open parenthesis in column zero in the middle of a list, it invents enough close parentheses to close off the list that is in progress. A compiler warning is produced instead of an error. After that list has been processed, the open parenthesis is read again. The compilation of the list that was forcefully closed off is probably useless, but the compilation of the rest of the file is usually correct. You can read the source file into the editor to fix and recompile the function that was unbalanced.
A similar thing happens on end of file in the middle of a list, so that you get to see any warnings for the function that was unbalanced.
Certain special forms including eval-when
, progn
,
local-declare
, declare-flavor-instance-variables
, and comment
are customarily used around lists that start in column zero. These symbols
have a non-nil
si:may-surround-defun
property that makes the
compiler permit this. You can add such properties to other symbols if you
want.
If nil
, inhibits the compiler from checking for open-parentheses in
column zero.
Whan a macro definition (macro
and defmacro
forms) is
encountered at top level in the file being compiled, the macro
definition is recorded for the rest of the compilation so that the macro
thus defined can be used in the same file following its definition.
This is in addition to writing the compiled macro definition into the
QFASL file.
Flavor definitions (defflavor
forms, see defflavor-fun) and
global special
declarations (made with proclaim
,
proclaim-fun, or with defvar
, defvar-fun) are likewise
recorded for the rest of the compilation, as well as written into the
QFASL file so that they will be recorded permanently when the file is
loaded.
During file-to-file compilation,
the value of this variable is a list of all declarations that are in
effect for the rest of the file. Macro definitions, defdecl
’s,
proclaim
’s
and special declarations that come from defvar
s are all recorded on
this list.
Package-defining and altering functions such as defpackage
,
in-package
, export
and use-package
are executed by the
compiler in the ordinary, permanent fashion. They are also written in
the QFASL file so that the form is executed just the same when the file
is loaded. If you load the file later in the same session, the package
altering form is executed twice. This is normally harmless.
require
receives the same treatment.
You can control explicitly whether a form is evaluated by the compiler,
and whether it is written into the QFASL file to be executed when the
file is loaded, using the eval-when
construct. You might want a
form to be:
An eval-when
form looks like
(eval-when times-list form1 form2 ...)
The times-list may contain one or more of the symbols load
, compile
,
or eval
.
If load
is present, the forms are written into the QFASL file
to be evaluated when the QFASL file is loaded (except that defun
forms
put the compiled definition into the QFASL file instead).
If compile
is present, the forms are evaluated in the compiler.
If eval
is present, the forms are evaluated when read into Lisp;
this is because eval-when
is defined as a special form in Lisp. (The
compiler ignores eval
in the times-list.)
For example,
(eval-when (compile eval) (macro foo (x) (cadr x)))
would define foo
as a macro in the compiler and when the file
is read in interpreted, but not when the QFASL file is fasloaded.
When seen by the interpreter, if one of the times is the symbol eval
then the body forms are evaluated; otherwise eval-when
does nothing.
But when seen by the compiler, this special form does the special things described above.
Nested use of eval-when
is permitted but its meaning is tricky.
If an inner eval-when
form appears in an ordinary context
where a general form would be written into the QFASL file but not
executed at compile time, then it behaves in the usual fashion:
the body forms are written into the QFASL file if
load
is one of the times, and they are evaluated at
compile time if compile
is one of the times.
If the inner eval-when
form appears in a context which says
to evaluate at compile time only, then the body forms are
evaluated if eval
is one of the times.
If the inner eval-when
appears in a context which says to
write into the QFASL file and evaluate at compile time,
the the body forms are written into the QFASL file if
load
is one of the times, and they are evaluated at
compile time if either compile
or eval
is one of the times.
For the rest of this section, we will use lists such as are
given to eval-when
, e.g (load eval)
, (load compile)
, etc.,
to describe when forms are evaluated.
If a form is not enclosed in an eval-when
,
then the times at which it is evaluated depend on the form.
The following table summarizes at what times evaluation takes
place for any given form seen at top level by the compiler.
(eval-when times-list form ...)
times-list specifies when the form... should be performed.
(declare (special ...)) or (declare (unspecial ...))
The special
or unspecial
is performed at
(load compile)
time.
(declare anything-else)
anything-else is performed only at
(compile)
time.
(proclaim ...)
is performed at (load compile eval)
time.
(special ...) or (unspecial ...)
¶(load compile eval)
(macro ...) or (defmacro ...) or (defsubst ...)
or (defflavor ...) or (defstruct ...)
(load eval)
. However, during file to file compilation, the
definition is recorded temporarily and used for expanding calls
to the macro, or macros defined by the defstruct
for the
rest of the file.
(comment ...)
Ignored at all times.
(compiler-let ((var val) ...) body...)
Processes the body in its normal fashion, but with the indicated variable bindings in effect. These variables will typically affect the operation of the compiler or of macros. See compiler-let-discussion.
(local-declare (decl decl ...) body...)
Processes the body in its normal fashion, with the indicated
declarations added to the front of the list which is the value
of local-declarations
.
(defun ...) or (defmethod ...) or (defselect ...)
(load eval)
, but at load time what is processed is not this form
itself, but the result of compiling it.
(require ...) or (in-package ...)
or various other package functions
(load compile eval)
anything-else
(load eval)
Sometimes a macro wants to return more than one form for the compiler top level to see (and to be evaluated). The following facility is provided for such macros. If a form
(progn form1 form2 ...)
is seen at the compiler top level, all of the forms are processed as if they had been at compiler top level. (Of course, in the interpreter they are all evaluated.)
To prevent an expression from being optimized by the compiler,
surround it with a call to dont-optimize
.
In execution, this is equivalent to simply form. However, any source-level optimizations that the compiler would normally perform on the top level of form are not done.
Examples:
(dont-optimize (apply 'foo (list 'a 'b)))
actually makes a list and calls apply
, rather than doing
(foo 'a 'b) (dont-optimize (si:flavor-method-table flav))
actually calls si:flavor-method-table
as a function, rather than
substituting the definition of that defsubst
.
dont-optimize
can even be used around a defsubst
inside of
setf
or locf
, to prevent open-coding of the defsubst
.
In this case, a function will be created at load time to do the
setting or return the location.
(setf (dont-optimize (zwei:buffer-package buffer)) (pkg-find-package "foo"))
Subforms of form, such as arguments, are still optimized or open
coded, unless additional dont-optimize
’s appear around them.
When symbol properties are referred to during macro expansion, it is
desirable for properties defined in a file to be “in effect” for the
the rest of the file if the file is compiled. This does not happen if
get
and defprop
are used, because the defprop
will not be
executed until the QFASL file is loaded. Instead, you can use
getdecl
and defdecl
. These are normally the same as get
and
defprop
, but during file-to-file compilation they also refer to and
create declarations.
This is a version of get
that allows the properties of
the symbol to be overridden by declarations.
If a declaration of the form (property symbol value)
is
in effect, getdecl
returns value. Otherwise, getdecl
returns the result of (get symbol property)
.
If you intend to create such declarations with proclaim
or local use of declare
, you must make sure that
a declaration
declaration is in effect for property.
You can do this with (proclaim '(declaration property))
.
getdecl
is typically used in macro definitions.
For example, the setf
macro uses getdecl
to get the
properties which say how to store in the specified place.
See getdecl-example for an example of a macro
that uses getdecl
.
Causes (getdecl symbol property)
to return
value.
putdecl
usually simply does a putprop
. But if executed at
compile time during file-to-file compilation, it instead makes an entry
on file-local-declarations
of the form (property symbol
value)
.
In either case, this stores value where getdecl
can find it;
but if putdecl
is done during compilation, it affects only the
rest of that compilation.
When executed, this is like putdecl
except that the arguments
are not evaluated. It is usually the same as defprop
except for the order of the arguments.
Unlike defprop
, when defdecl
is encountered during file-to-file
compilation, a declaration is recorded which remains in
effect for the rest of the compilation. (The defdecl
form also goes
into the QFASL file to be executed when the file is loaded).
defprop
would have no effect whatever at compile time.
defdecl
is often useful as a part of the expansion of a macro.
It is also useful as a top-level expression in a source file.
Example:
(defdecl foo locf foo-location)
in a source file would allow (locf (foo args...))
to be used in the rest of that source file; and, once the file was
loaded, by anyone.
Simple use defsetf
expands into a defdecl
.
When the compiler prints warnings, it also records them in a data base, organized by file and by function within file. Old warnings for previous compilations of the same function are thrown away, so the data base contains only warnings that are still applicable. This data base can be used to visit, in the editor, the functions that got warnings. You can also save the data base and restore it later.
There are three editor commands that you can use to begin visiting the sites of the recorded warnings. They differ only in how they decide which files to look through:
Meta-X Edit Warnings
For each file that has any warnings, asks whether to edit the warnings for that file.
Meta-X Edit File Warnings
Reads the name of a file and then edits the warnings for that file.
Meta-X Edit System Warnings
Reads the name of a system and then
edits the warnings for all files in that system (see defsystem
,
defsystem-fun).
While the warnings are being edited, the warnings themselves appear in a small window at the top of the editor frame, and the code appears in a large window which occupies the rest of the editor frame.
As soon as you have finished specifying the file(s) or system to
process, the editor proceeds to visit the code for the first
warning. From then on, to move to the next warning, use the command
Control-Shift-W
. To move to the previous warning, use
Meta-Shift-W
. You can also switch to the warnings window with
Control-X O
or with the mouse, and move around in that buffer.
When you use Control-Shift-W
and there are no more warnings after
the cursor, you return to single-window mode.
You can also insert the text of the warnings into any editor buffer:
Meta-X Insert File Warnings
Reads the name of a file and inserts into the buffer after point the text for that file’s warnings. The mark is left after the warnings, but the region is not turned on.
Meta-X Insert Warnings
Inserts into the buffer after point the text for the warnings of all files that have warnings. The mark is left after the warnings, but the region is not turned on.
You can also dump the warnings data base into a file and
reload it
later. Then you can do Meta-X Edit Warnings
again in the later
session. You dump the warnings with si:dump-warnings
and load the
file again with load
. In addition, make-system
with the
:batch
option writes all the warnings into a file in this way.
Writes the warnings for the files named in warnings-file-pathnames (a list of pathnames or strings) into a file named output-file-pathname.
If this variable is non-nil
, errors in reading code to be compiled,
and errors in macro expansion within the compiler, produce only
warnings; they do not enter the debugger. The variable is normally
t
.
The default setting is useful when you do not anticipate errors during compilation, because it allows the compilation to proceed past such errors. If you have walked away from the machine, you do not come back to find that your compilation stopped in the first file and did not finish.
If you find an inexplicable error in reading or macroexpansion, and wish
to use the debugger to localize it, set compiler:warn-on-errors
to nil
and recompile.
By controlling the compile-time values of the variables run-in-maclisp-switch
,
obsolete-function-warning-switch
, and inhibit-style-warning-switch
(explained
above), you can enable or disable some of the warning messages of the compiler.
The following special form is also useful:
Prevents the compiler from performing style-checking on the top level of form. Style-checking is still done on the arguments of form. Both obsolete function warnings and won’t-run-in-Maclisp warnings are done by means of the style-checking mechanism, so, for example,
(setq bar (inhibit-style-warnings (value-cell-location foo)))
does not warn that value-cell-location
will not work in Maclisp,
but
(inhibit-style-warnings (setq bar (value-cell-location foo)))
does warn, since inhibit-style-warnings
applies only to the top
level of the form inside it (in this case, to the setq
).
Sometimes functions take arguments that they deliberately do not use. Normally the compiler warns you if your program binds a variable that it never references. In order to disable this warning for variables that you know you are not going to use, there are three things you can do.
The first thing is to name the variables ignore
or ignored
. The
compiler does not complain if a variable by one of these names is not
used. Furthermore, by special dispensation, it is all right to have
more than one variable in a lambda-list that has one of these names.
Another thing you can do is write an ignore
declaration. Example:
(defun the-function (list fraz-name fraz-size) (declare (ignore fraz-size)))
This has the advantage that arglist
(see arglist-fun) will return
a more meaningful argument list for the function, rather than returning
something with ignore
’s in it.
Finally, you can simply use the variable for effect (ignoring its value) at the front of the function. Example:
(defun the-function (list fraz-name fraz-size) fraz-size ; This argument is not used. ...)
The following function is useful for requesting compiler warnings in
certain esoteric cases. Normally, the compiler notices whenever any
function x uses (calls) any other function y; it makes notes of
all these uses, and then warns you at the end of the compilation if the
function y got called but no definition of it has been seen. This
usually does what you want, but sometimes there is no way the compiler
can tell that a certain function is being used. Suppose that instead of
x’s containing any forms that call y, x simply stores y
away in a data structure somewhere, and someplace else in the program
that data structure is accessed and funcall
is done on it. There is
no way that the compiler can see that this is going to happen, and so it
can’t notice the function usage, and so it can’t create a warning
message. In order to make such warnings happen, you can explicitly call
the following function at compile-time.
what is a symbol that is being used as a function. by may be any function spec.
compiler:function-referenced
must be
called at compile-time while a compilation is in progress. It tells the
compiler that the function what is referenced by by. When the compilation
is finished, if the function what has not been defined, the compiler
issues a warning to the effect that by referred to the function what,
which was never defined.
You can also tell the compiler about any function it should consider “defined”:
function-spec is marked as “defined” for the sake of the compiler; future calls to this function will not produce warnings.
This special form declares a function to be obsolete; code that calls it
will get a compiler warning, under the control of obsolete-function-warning-switch
.
This is used by the compiler to mark as obsolete some Maclisp functions which exist in
Zetalisp but should not be used in new programs. It can also
be useful when maintaining a large system, as a reminder that a function has
become obsolete and usage of it should be phased out. An example of an
obsolete-function declaration is:
(compiler:make-obsolete create-mumblefrotz "use MUMBLIFY with the :FROTZ option instead")
The warnings data base is not just for compilation. It can record operations for any number of different operations on files or parts of files. Compilation is merely the only operation in the system that uses it.
Each operation about which warnings can be recorded should have a name,
preferably in the keyword package. This symbol should have four
properties that tell the system how to print out the operation name
as various parts of speech. For compilation, the operation name is
:compile
and the properties are defined as follows:
(defprop :compile "compilation" si:name-as-action) (defprop :compile "compiling" si:name-as-present-participle) (defprop :compile "compiled" si:name-as-past-participle) (defprop :compile "compiler" si:name-as-agent)
The warnings system considers that these operations are normally performed on files that are composed of named objects. Each warning is associated with a filename and then with an object within the file. It is also possible to record warnings about objects that are not within any file.
To tell the warnings system that you are starting to process all or part
of a file, use the macro si:file-operation-with-warnings
.
body is executed within a context set up so that warnings can be recorded for operation operation-name about the file specified by generic-pathname (see pathname-generic-pathname-method).
In the case of compilation, this is done at the level of compile-file
(actually, it is done in compiler:compile-stream
).
whole-file-p should be non-nil
if the entire contents of the
file are to be processed inside the body if it finishes; this implies
that any warnings left over from previous iterations of this operation
on this file should be thrown away on exit. This is only relevant to
objects that are not found in the file this time; the assumption is that
the objects must have been deleted from the file and their warnings are
no longer appropriate.
All three of the special arguments are specified as expressions that are evaluated.
Within the processing of a file, you must also announce when you are beginning to process an object:
Executes body in a context set up so that warnings are recorded
for the object named object-name, which can be a symbol or a list.
Object names are compared with equal
.
In the case of compilation, this macro goes around the processing of a single function.
location-function is either nil
or a function that the editor
uses to find the text of the object. Refer to the file SYS: ZWEI; POSS
LISP
for more details on this.
object-name and location-function are specified with expressions that are evaluated.
You can enter this macro recursively. If the inner invocation is for the same object as the outer one, it has no effect. Otherwise, warnings recorded in the inner invocation apply to the object specified therein.
Finally, when you detect exceptions, you must make the actual warnings:
Records one warning for the object and file currently being processed.
The text of the warning is specified by format-stringand args,
which are suitable arguments for format
, but the warning is not
printed when you call this function. Those arguments will be used to
reprint the warning later.
Records a warning and also prints it.
type is a symbol that identifies the specific cause of the warning.
Types have meaning only as defined by a particular operation, and at
present nothing makes much use of them. The system defines one type:
si:premature-warnings-marker
.
severity measures how important a warning this is, and the general causal classification. It should be a symbol in the keyword package. Several severities are defined, and should be used when appropriate, but nothing looks at them:
:implausible
This warning is about something that is not intrinsically wrong but is probably due to a mistake of some sort.
:impossible
This warning is about something that cannot have a meaning even if circumstances outside the text being processed are changed.
:probable-error
This is used to indicate something that is certainly an error but can be made correct by a change somewhere else; for example, calling a function with the wrong number of arguments.
:missing-declaration
This is used for warnings about free variables not declared special, and such. It means that the text was not actually incorrect, but something else that is supposed to accompany it was missing.
:obsolete
This warning is about something that you shouldn’t use any more, but which still does work.
:very-obsolete
This is about something that doesn’t even work any more.
:maclisp
This is for something that doesn’t work in Maclisp.
:fatal
This indicates a problem so severe that no sense can be made of the object at all. It indicates that the presence or absence of other warnings is not significant.
:error
There was a Lisp error in processing the object.
location-info is intended to be used to inform the editor of the
precise location in the text of the cause of this warning. It is not
defined as yet, and you should use nil
.
If a warning is encountered while processing data that doesn’t really
have a name (such as forms in a source file that are not function
definitions), you can record a warning even though you are not inside
an invocation of sys:object-operation-with-warnings
. This
warning is known as a premature warning and it will be recorded with
the next object that is processed; a message will be added so that the
user can tell which warnings were premature.
Refer to the file SYS: SYS; QNEW LISP
for more information on the
warnings data base.
The compiler stores optimizers for source code on property lists so as
to make it easy for the user to add them. An optimizer can be used to
transform code into an equivalent but more efficient form (for
example, (eq obj nil)
is transformed into (null obj)
,
which can be compiled better). An optimizer can also be used to
tell the compiler how to compile a special form. For example,
in the interpreter do
is a special form, implemented by a function
which takes quoted arguments and calls eval
. In the compiler,
do
is expanded in a macro-like way by an optimizer into
equivalent Lisp code using prog
, cond
, and go
, which
the compiler understands.
The compiler finds the optimizers to apply to a form by looking for
the compiler:optimizers
property of the symbol that is the
car of the form. The value of this property should be a list of
optimizers, each of which must be a function of one argument. The
compiler tries each optimizer in turn, passing the form to be
optimized as the argument. An optimizer that returns the original
form unchanged (eq
to the argument) has “done nothing”, and
the next optimizer is tried. If the optimizer returns anything else,
it has “done something”, and the whole process starts over again.
Optimizers should not be used to define new language features, because they only take effect in the compiler; the interpreter (that is, the evaluator) doesn’t know about optimizers. So an optimizer should not change the effect of a form; it should produce another form that does the same thing, possibly faster or with less memory or something. That is why they are called optimizers. In principle, the code ought to compile just as correctly if the optimizer is eliminated.
Puts optimizer on function’s optimizers list if it isn’t there already. optimizer is the name of an optimization function, and function is the name of the function calls which are to be processed. Neither is evaluated.
(compiler:add-optimizer function optimizer optimize-into-1
optimize-into-2...)
also remembers optimize-into-1, etc., as
names of functions which may be called in place of function as a
result of the optimization. Then who-calls
of function will
also mention callers of optimize-into-1, etc.
Defines an optimizer and installs it. Equivalent to
(progn (defun optimizer-name lambda-list body...) (compiler:add-optimizer function optimizer-name optimizes-into...))
Makes function a synonym for for-function in code being compiled. Example:
(compiler:defcompiler-synonym plus +)
is how the compiler is told how to compile plus
.
Certain programs are intended to be run both in Maclisp and in
Zetalisp. Their source files need some special conventions. For
example, all special
declarations must be enclosed in declare
’s,
so that the Maclisp compiler will see them. The main issue is that many
functions and special forms of Zetalisp do not exist in
Maclisp. It is suggested that you turn on run-in-maclisp-switch
in
such files, which will warn you about a lot of problems that your program
may have if you try to run it in Maclisp.
The macro-character combination #+lispm
causes the object that
follows it to be visible only when compiling for Zetalisp. The
combination #+maclisp
causes the following object to be visible only
when compiling for Maclisp. These work both on subexpressions of the
objects in the file and at top level in the file. To conditionalize
top-level objects, however, it is better to put the macros
if-for-lispm
and if-for-maclisp
around them. The
if-for-lispm
macro turns off run-in-maclisp-switch
within its
object, preventing spurious warnings from the compiler. The #+lispm
reader construct does not dare do this, since it can be used to conditionalize
any object, not just a expression that will be evaluated.
To allow a file to detect what environment it is being compiled in, the following macros are provided:
If (if-for-lispm form)
is seen at the top level of
the compiler, form is passed to the compiler top level if
the output of the compiler is a QFASL file intended for Zetalisp.
If the Zetalisp interpreter sees this it evaluates form
(the macro expands into form).
If (if-for-maclisp form)
is seen at the top level of
the compiler, form is passed to the compiler top level if
the output of the compiler is a FASL file intended for Maclisp
(e.g if the compiler is COMPLR).
If the Zetalisp interpreter ignores this form entirely
(the macro expands into nil
).
If (if-for-maclisp-else-lispm form1 form2)
is seen at the top level of
the compiler, form1 is passed to the compiler top level if
the output of the compiler is a FASL file intended for Maclisp;
otherwise form2 is passed to the compiler top level.
In Zetalisp, (if-in-lispm form)
causes form
to be evaluated; in Maclisp, form is ignored.
In Maclisp, (if-in-maclisp form)
causes form
to be evaluated; in Zetalisp, form is ignored.
In order to make sure that those macros are defined when reading the file into the Maclisp compiler, you must make the file start with a prelude, which should look like:
(eval-when (compile) (cond ((not (status feature lispm)) (load '|PS:<L.SYS2>CONDIT.LISP|)))) ;; Or other suitable filename
This does nothing when you compile the program on the Lisp Machine.
If you compile it with the Maclisp compiler, it loads in definitions
of the above macros, so that they will be available to your
program. The form (status feature lispm)
is generally useful in
other ways; it evaluates to t
when evaluated on the Lisp Machine and
to nil
when evaluated in Maclisp.
There are some advertised variables whose compile-time values affect the operation of the compiler. Mostly these are for Maclisp compatibility features. You can set these variables by including in his file forms such as
(eval-when (compile) (setq open-code-map-switch t))
However, these variables seem not to be needed very often.
If this variable is non-nil
, the compiler tries to warn the
user about any constructs that will not work in Maclisp. By no means
all Lisp Machine system functions not built in to Maclisp
cause warnings; only those that could not be written by the user
in Maclisp (for example, make-array
, value-cell-location
, etc.).
Also, lambda-list keywords such as
&optional
and initialized prog
variables are be
mentioned. This switch also inhibits the warnings for obsolete Maclisp functions.
The default value of this variable is nil
.
If this variable is non-nil
, the compiler tries to warn
the user whenever an obsolete Maclisp-compatibility function such as
maknam
or samepnamep
is used. The default value is t
.
If this variable is non-nil
, the compiler allows the use of
the name of a variable in function position to mean that the
variable’s value should be funcall
’ed. This is for compatibility
with old Maclisp programs. The default value of this variable is
nil
.
If this variable is non-nil
, the compiler attempts
to produce inline code for the mapping functions (mapc
, mapcar
, etc.,
but not mapatoms
) if the function being mapped is an anonymous
lambda-expression.
The generated code is faster but larger. The default value is t
.
If you want to turn off open coding of these functions,
It is preferable to use (declare (notinline mapc mapcar ...))
.
If this variable is non-nil
, all compiler style-checking is
turned off. Style checking is used to issue obsolete function
warnings, won’t-run-in-Maclisp warnings, and other sorts of
warnings. The default value is nil
. See also the
inhibit-style-warnings
macro, which acts on one level only of an
expression.
Allows local rebinding
of global switches that affect either compilation or the behavior
of user-written macros. Its syntax is like that of let
, and
in the interpreter it is identical to let
.
When encountered in compiled code, the variables are bound
around the compilation of body rather than around
the execution at a later time of the compiled code for body.
For example,
Example:
(compiler-let ((open-code-map-switch nil)) (mapc (function (lambda (x) ...)) foo))
prevents the compiler from open-coding the mapc
.
The same results can be obtained more cleanly using declare
.
User-written macros can examine the declarations using getdecl
.
The next three functions are primarily for Maclisp compatibility. In
Maclisp, they are declarations, used within a declare
at top level
in the file.
Declares each symbol to be the name of a function. In addition it prevents these functions from appearing in the list of functions referenced but not defined, printed at the end of the compilation.
Declares each symbol to be the name of a function. In addition it prevents these functions from appearing in the list of functions referenced but not defined, printed at the end of the compilation.
Declares each symbol to be the name of a special form. In addition it prevents these names from appearing in the list of functions referenced but not defined, printed at the end of the compilation.
It is possible to make a QFASL file containing data, rather than a
compiled program. This can be useful to speed up loading of a data
structure into the machine, as compared with reading in printed
representations. Also, certain data structures such as arrays do not
have a convenient printed representation as text, but can be saved in
QFASL files. For example, the system stores fonts this way. Each
font is in a QFASL file (on the SYS: FONTS;
directory) that
contains the data structures for that font. When the file is loaded,
the symbol that is the name of the font gets set to the array that
represents the font. Putting data into a QFASL file is often
referred to as “fasdumping the data”.
In compiled programs, the constants are saved in the QFASL file in this way.
The compiler optimizes by making constants that are equal
become eq
when the file is loaded. This does not happen when you make a data file yourself;
identity of objects is preserved. Note that when a QFASL file is loaded,
objects that were eq
when the file was written are still eq
; this does not
normally happen with text files.
The following types of objects can be represented in QFASL files: Symbols (uninterned or uninterned), numbers of all kinds, lists, strings, arrays of all kinds, named structures, instances, and FEFs.
instances
: :fasd-form ¶When an instance is fasdumped (put into a QFASL file), it is sent a :fasd-form
message, which must return a Lisp form that, when evaluated, will recreate the
equivalent of that instance. This is because instances are often part of a large
data structure, and simply fasdumping all of the instance variables and making
a new instance with those same values is unlikely to work. Instances remain
eq
; the :fasd-form
message is only sent the first time a particular instance
is encountered during writing of a QFASL file. If the instance does
not accept the :fasd-form
message, it cannot be fasdumped.
Loading a QFASL file in which a named structure has been fasdumped
creates a new named structure with components identical to those of the
one that was dumped. Then the :fasd-fixup
operation is invoked,
which gives the new structure the opportunity to correct its contents if
they are not supposed to be just the same as what was dumped.
The meaning of a QFASL file is greatly affected by the package used for loading it. Therefore, the file itself says which package to use.
In dump-forms-to-file
, you can specify the package to use by
including a :package
attribute in the attribute-list argument.
For example, if that argument is the list (:package "SI")
then the
file is dumped and loaded in the si
package. If the package is not
specified in this way, user
is used. The other fasdumping functions
always use user
.
Writes a QFASL file named filename which contains, in effect, the forms in forms-list. That is to say, when the file is loaded, its effect will be the same as evaluating those forms.
Example:
(dump-forms-to-file "foo" '((setq x 1) (setq y 2))) (load "foo") x => 1 y => 2
attribute-list is the file attribute list to store in the QFASL
file. It is a list of
alternating keywords and values, and corresponds to the -*-
line of a source file.
The most useful keyword in this context is :package
, whose value in the
attribute list specifies the package to be used both in dumping the forms and in
loading the file. If no :package
keyword is present, the file will be loaded in
whatever package is current at the time.
Writes a QFASL file named filename which contains the value of symbol.
When the file is loaded, symbol will be setq
’ed to the same value.
filename is parsed and defaulted with the default pathname defaults.
The file type defaults to :qfasl
.
Writes the font named name into a QFASL file with the appropriate name
(on the SYS: FONTS;
directory).
This is a way to dump a complex data structure into a QFASL file. The values,
the function definitions, and some of the properties of certain symbols are put into
the QFASL file in such a way that when the file is loaded the symbols will
be setq
ed, fdefine
d, and putprop
ped appropriately. The user can
control what happens to symbols discovered in the data structures being fasdumped.
filename is the name of the file to be written. It is defaulted
with the default pathname defaults. The file type
defaults to "QFASL"
.
symbols is a list of symbols to be processed. properties is a list of properties which are to be fasdumped if they are found on the symbols. dump-values-p and dump-functions-p control whether the values and function definitions are also dumped.
new-symbol-function is called whenever a new symbol is found in the
structure being dumped. It can do nothing, or it can add the symbol to the
list to be processed by calling compiler:fasd-symbol-push
. The value
returned by new-symbol-function is ignored.
QFASL files are composed of 16-bit nibbles. The first two nibbles in the file contain fixed values, which are there so the system can tell a proper QFASL file. The next nibble is the beginning of the first group. A group starts with a nibble that specifies an operation. It may be followed by other nibbles that are arguments.
Most of the groups in a QFASL file are there to construct objects when the file is loaded. These objects are recorded in the fasl-table. Each time an object is constructed, it is assigned the next sequential index in the fasl-table. The indices are used by other groups later in the file, to refer back to objects already constructed.
To prevent the fasl-table from becoming too large, the QFASL file can be divided into whacks. The fasl-table is cleared out at the beginning of each whack.
The other groups in the QFASL file perform operations such as evaluating a list previously constructed or storing an object into a symbol’s function cell or value cell.
If you are having trouble with a QFASL file and want to find out exactly what it does when it is loaded, you can use UNFASL to find out.
Prints on *standard-output*
a description of the contents of the QFASL
file input-file-name.
Writes a description of the contents of the QFASL file
input-file-name into the output file. The output file type defaults
to :unfasl
and the rest of the pathname defaults from
input-file-name.
If eval
is handed a list whose car is a symbol, then eval
inspects the definition of the symbol to find out what to do. If the
definition is a cons, and the car of the cons is the symbol
macro
, then the definition (i.e that cons) is called a macro.
The cdr of the cons should be a function of two arguments.
eval
applies the function to the form it was originally given,
takes whatever is returned, and evaluates that in lieu of the
original form.
Here is a simple example. Suppose the definition of the symbol first
is
(macro lambda (x ignore) (list 'car (cadr x)))
This thing is a macro: it is a cons whose car is the symbol
macro
. What happens if we try to evaluate a form (first '(a b
c))
? Well, eval
sees that it has a list whose car is a symbol
(namely, first
), so it looks at the definition of the symbol and
sees that it is a cons whose car is macro
; the definition is
a macro.
eval
takes the cdr of the cons, which is supposed to be the macro’s
expander function, and calls it providing as arguments the original
form that eval
was handed, and an environment data structure that
this macro does not use. So it calls (lambda (x ignore) (list 'car
(cadr x)))
and the first argument is (first '(a b c))
. Whatever
this returns is the expansion of the macro call. It will be
evaluated in place of the original form.
In this case, x
is bound to (first '(a b c))
, (cadr x)
evaluates to '(a b c)
, and (list 'car (cadr x))
evaluates to
(car '(a b c))
, which is the expansion. eval
now evaluates the
expansion. (car '(a b c))
returns a
, and so the result is that
(first '(a b c))
returns a
.
What have we done? We have defined a macro called first
. What
the macro does is to translate the form to some other form. Our
translation is very simple–it just translates forms that look like
(first x)
into (car x)
, for any form x.
We can do much more
interesting things with macros, but first we show how
to define a macro.
The primitive special form for defining macros is macro
.
A macro definition looks like this:
(macro name (form-arg env-arg) body)
name can be any function spec. form-arg and env-arg must be variables. body is a sequence of Lisp forms that expand the macro; the last form should return the expansion.
To define our first
macro, we would say
(macro first (x ignore) (list 'car (cadr x)))
Only sophisticated macros need to use value passed for the env-arg;
this one does not need it, so the argument variable ignore
is used for it.
See &environment for information on it.
Here are some more simple examples of macros. Suppose we want
any form that looks like (addone x)
to be translated into
(plus 1 x)
. To define a macro to do this we would say
(macro addone (x ignore) (list 'plus '1 (cadr x)))
Now say we wanted a macro which would translate (increment x)
into (setq x (1+ x)
. This would be:
(macro increment (x ignore) (list 'setq (cadr x) (list '1+ (cadr x))))
Of course, this macro is of limited usefulness. The reason is that the
form in the cadr of the increment
form had better be a symbol.
If you tried (increment (car x))
, it would be translated into
(setq (car x) (1+ (car x)))
, and setq
would complain.
(If you’re interested in how to fix this problem, see setf
(setf-fun);
but this is irrelevant to how macros work.)
You can see from this discussion that macros are very different
from functions. A function would not be able to tell what kind of
subforms are present in a call to it; they get evaluated before the
function ever sees them. However, a macro gets to look at the whole
form and see just what is going on there. Macros are not functions;
if first
is defined as a macro, it is not meaningful to apply
first
to arguments. A macro does not take arguments at all; its
expander function takes a Lisp form and turns it into another Lisp
form.
The purpose of functions is to compute; the purpose of macros is to translate. Macros are used for a variety of purposes, the most common being extensions to the Lisp language. For example, Lisp is powerful enough to express many different control structures, but it does not provide every control structure anyone might ever possibly want. Instead, if a user wants some kind of control structure with a syntax that is not provided, he can translate it into some form that Lisp does know about.
For example, someone might want a limited iteration construct which increments a variable by one until it exceeds a limit (like the FOR statement of the BASIC language). He might want it to look like
(for a 1 100 (print a) (print (* a a)))
To get this, he could write a macro to translate it into
(do ((a 1 (1+ a))) ((> a 100)) (print a) (print (* a a)))
A macro to do this could be defined with
(macro for (x ignore) (list* 'do (list (list (second x) (third x) (list '1+ (second x)))) (list (list '> (second x) (fourth x))) (cddddr x)))
for
can now be used as if it were a built-in Lisp control construct.
The main problem with the definition for the for
macro is
that it is verbose and clumsy. If it is that hard to write a macro
to do a simple specialized iteration construct, one would wonder how
anyone could write macros of any real sophistication.
There are two things that make the definition so inelegant.
One is that the programmer must write things like (second x)
and (cddddr x)
to refer to the parts of the form he wants
to do things with. The other problem is that the long chains of calls
to the list
and cons
functions are very hard to read.
Two features are provided to solve these two problems.
The defmacro
macro solves the former, and the “backquote” (`
)
reader macro solves the latter.
Instead of referring to the parts of our form by (second x)
and such, we would like to give names to the various pieces of the form,
and somehow have the (second x)
automatically generated. This is done
by a macro called defmacro
. It is easiest to explain what defmacro
does
by showing an example. Here is how you would write the for
macro
using defmacro
:
(defmacro for (var lower upper . body) (list* 'do (list (list var lower (list '1+ var))) (list (list '> var upper)) body))
The (var lower upper body)
is a pattern to match against
the body of the form (to be more precise, to match against the cdr
of the argument to the macro’s expander function). If defmacro
tries to match the two
lists
(var lower upper . body)
and
(a 1 100 (print a) (print (* a a)))
var
is bound to the symbol a
, lower
to the fixnum 1
,
upper
to the fixnum 100
, and body
to the list
((print a) (print (* a a)))
.
var, lower, upper,
and body
are then used by the body
of the macro definition.
defmacro
is a general purpose macro-defining macro. A defmacro
form looks like
(defmacro name pattern . body)
name is the name of the macro
to be defined; it can be any function spec (see function-spec).
Normally it is not useful to define anything but a symbol,
since that is the only place that the evaluator looks for macro
definitions. However, sometimes it is useful to define a :property
function spec as a macro, when some part of the system (such as locf
)
will look for an expander function on a property.
The pattern may be anything made up out of symbols and conses.
When the macro is called, pattern
is matched against the body of the macro form; both pattern
and the form are car’ed and cdr’ed identically, and whenever
a non-nil
symbol is hit in pattern, the symbol is bound to the corresponding
part of the form. All of the symbols in pattern can be used
as variables within body.
body is evaluated with these bindings in effect,
and its result is returned to the evaluator as the expansion of the macro.
Note that the pattern need not be a list the way a lambda-list must.
In the above example, the pattern was a dotted list, since the symbol
body
was supposed to match the cddddr of the macro form.
If we wanted a new iteration form, like for
except that
our example would look like
(for a (1 100) (print a) (print (* a a)))
(just because we thought that was a nicer syntax), then we could
do it merely by modifying the pattern of the defmacro
above;
the new pattern would be (var (lower upper) . body)
.
Here is how we would write our other examples using defmacro
:
(defmacro first (the-list) (list 'car the-list)) (defmacro addone (form) (list 'plus '1 form)) (defmacro increment (symbol) (list 'setq symbol (list '1+ symbol)))
All of these were very simple macros and have very simple patterns,
but these examples show that we can replace the (cadr x)
with a
readable mnemonic name such as the-list
or symbol
, which
makes the program clearer, and enables documentation facilities such
as the arglist
function to describe the syntax of the special form
defined by the macro.
The pattern in a defmacro
is more like the lambda list
of a normal function than revealed above. It is allowed to
contain certain &
-keywords. Subpatterns of the lambda list pattern
can also use &
-keywords, a usage not allowed in functions.
&optional
is followed by variable, (variable)
,
(variable default)
, or (variable default
present-p)
, exactly the same as in a function. Note that
default is still a form to be evaluated, even though variable
is not being bound to the value of a form. variable does not have
to be a symbol; it can be a pattern. In this case the first form is
disallowed because it is syntactically ambigous. The pattern must at least be
enclosed in a singleton list. If variable is a pattern, default
can be evaluated more than once. Example:
(defmacro foo (&optional ((x &optional y) '(a))) ...)
Here the first argument of foo
is optional, and should
be a list of one or two elements which become x
and y
.
If foo
is given no arguments, the list (a)
is decomposed
to get x
and y
, so that x
’s value is a
and
y
’s value is nil
.
Using &rest
is the same as using a dotted list as the pattern,
except that it may be easier to read and leaves a place to put &aux
.
When &key
is used in a defmacro pattern, the keywords are decoded
at macro expansion time. Therefore, they must be constants. Example:
(defmacro l1 (&key a b c) (list 'list a b c)) (l1 :b 5 :c (car d)) ==> (list nil 5 (car d))
&aux
is the same in a macro as in a function, and has nothing to do
with pattern matching.
defmacro
implements a few additional keywords not allowed in functions.
&body
is identical to &rest
except that it informs the editor and the grinder
that the remaining subforms constitute a “body” rather than ordinary arguments
and should be indented accordingly. Example:
(defmacro with-open-file ((streamvar filename &rest options) &body body) ...)
&whole
causes the variable that follows it to be bound to the entire
macro call, just as the form-arg variable in macro
would be.
&whole
exists to make defmacro
able to do anything that macro
can be used for, for the sake of Common Lisp, in which defmacro
is the primitive and macro
does not exist. &whole
is
also useful in macrolet
.
&environment
causes the variable that follows it to be bound to
the local macros environment of the macro call being expanded.
This is useful if the code for expanding this macro needs to
invoke macroexpand
on subforms of the macro call. Then, to
achieve correct interaction with macrolet
, this local macros
environment should be passed to macroexpand
as its second argument.
&list-of
pattern requires that the corresponding position of the
form being translated must contain a list (or nil
). It
matches pattern against each element of that list. Each variable
in pattern is bound to a list of the corresponding values in each element
of the list matched by the &list-of
. This may be clarified by an
example. Suppose we want to be able to say things like:
(send-commands (aref turtle-table i) (forward 100) (beep) (left 90) (pen 'down 'red) (forward 50) (pen 'up))
We could define a send-commands
macro as follows:
(defmacro send-commands (object &body &list-of (command . arguments)) `(let ((o ,object)) . ,(mapcar #'(lambda (com args) `(send o ',com . ,args)) command arguments)))
Note that this example uses &body
together with &list-of
, so you
don’t see the list itself; the list is just the rest of the macro-form.
You can combine &optional
and &list-of
. Consider the following example:
(defmacro print-let (x &optional &list-of ((vars vals) '((*print-base* 10.) (*print-radix* nil)))) `((lambda (,@vars) (print ,x)) ,@vals)) (print-let foo) ==> ((lambda (*print-base* *print-radix*) (print foo)) 10 nil) (print-let foo ((bar 3))) ==> ((lambda (bar) (print foo)) 3)
In this example we aren’t using &body
or anything like it, so you do see
the list itself; that is why you see parentheses around the (bar 3)
.
Now we deal with the other problem: the long strings of calls to
cons
and list
. This problem is relieved by introducing some new
characters that are special to the Lisp reader. Just as the
single-quote character makes it easier to type things of the form
(quote x)
, so backquote and comma make it easier to type forms
that create new list structure. They allow you to create a list from a
template including constant and variable parts.
The backquote facility is used by giving a backquote character
(`
), followed by a list or vector. If the comma character does not
appear within the text for the list or vector, the backquote acts just
like a single quote: it creates a form which, when evaluated, produces
the list or vector specified. For example,
'(a b c) => (a b c) `(a b c) => (a b c) `#(a b) => #(a b)
So in the simple cases, backquote is just like the regular single-quote macro. The way to get it to do interesting things is to include a comma somewhere inside of the form following the backquote. The comma is followed by a form, and that form gets evaluated even though it is inside the backquote. For example,
(setq b 1) `(a b c) => (a b c) `(a ,b c) => (a 1 c) `(abc ,(+ b 4) ,(- b 1) (def ,b)) => (abc 5 0 (def 1)) `#(a ,b) => #(a 1)
In other words, backquote quotes everything except expressions preceded by a comma; those get evaluated.
The list or vector following a backquote can be thought of as a template for some new data structure. The parts of it that are preceded by commas are forms that fill in slots in the template; everything else is just constant structure that appears as written in the result. This is usually what you want in the body of a macro. Some of the form generated by the macro is constant, the same thing on every invocation of the macro. Other parts are different every time the macro is called, often being functions of the form that the macro appeared in (the arguments of the macro). The latter parts are the ones for which you would use the comma. Several examples of this sort of use follow.
When the reader sees the `(a ,b c)
it is actually generating
a form such as (list 'a b 'c)
. The actual form generated may use
list
, cons
, append
, or whatever might be a good idea; you
should never have to concern yourself with what it actually turns into.
All you need to care about is what it evaluates to. Actually, it
doesn’t use the regular functions cons
, list
, and so forth, but
uses special ones instead so that the grinder can recognize a form which
was created with the backquote syntax, and print it using backquote so
that it looks like what you typed in. You should never write any
program that depends on this, anyway, because backquote makes no
guarantees about how it does what it does. In particular, in some
circumstances it may decide to create constant forms, which will cause
sharing of list structure at run time, or it may decide to create forms
that will create new list structure at run time.
For example, if the reader sees `(r ,nil)
,
it may produce the same thing as (cons 'r nil)
, or '(r . nil)
.
Be careful that your program does not depend on which of these it does.
This is generally found to be pretty confusing by most people; the best way
to explain further seems to be with examples. Here is how we would write our
three simple macros using both the defmacro
and backquote facilities.
(defmacro first (the-list) `(car ,the-list)) (defmacro addone (form) `(plus 1 ,form)) (defmacro increment (symbol) `(setq ,symbol (1+ ,symbol)))
To demonstrate finally how easy it is to define macros with these two facilities,
here is the final form of the for
macro.
(defmacro for (var lower upper . body) `(do ((,var ,lower (1+ ,var))) ((> ,var ,upper)) . ,body))
Look at how much simpler that is than the original definition. Also,
look how closely it resembles the code it is producing. The functionality
of the for
really stands right out when written this way.
If a comma inside a backquote form is followed by an at-sign
character (‘@
’), it has a special meaning. The ‘,@
’ should
be followed by a form whose value is a list; then each of the elements
of the list is put into the list being created by the backquote. In other
words, instead of generating a call to the cons
function, backquote
generates a call to append
. For example, if a
is bound to
(x y z)
, then `(1 ,a 2)
would evaluate to (1 (x y z) 2)
,
but `(1 ,@a 2)
would evaluate to (1 x y z 2)
.
Here is an example of a macro definition that uses the ‘,@
’
construction. One way to define do-forever
would be for it to expand
(do-forever form1 form2 form3)
into
(tagbody a form1 form2 form3 (go a))
You could define the macro by
(defmacro do-forever (&body body) `(tagbody a ,@body (go a)))
(This definition has the disadvantage of interfering with use of the
go
tag a
to go from the body of the do-forever
to a tag
defined outside of it. A more robust implementation would construct a
new tag each time, using gensym
.)
A similar construct is ‘,
’ (comma, dot). This means the same thing
as ‘,@
’ except that the list which is the value of the following form
may be modified destructively; backquote uses nconc
rather than append
.
This should, of course, be used with caution.
Backquote does not make any guarantees about what parts of the structure it
shares and what parts it copies. You should not do destructive operations
such as nconc
on the results of backquote forms such as
`(,a b c d)
since backquote might choose to implement this as
(cons a '(b c d))
and nconc
would smash the constant. On the other hand, it would be
safe to nconc
the result of
`(a b ,c ,d)
since any possible expansion of this would make a new list. One possible expansion is
(list 'a 'b c d)
Backquote of course guarantees not to do any destructive operations
(rplaca
, rplacd
, nconc
) on the components of the
structure it builds, unless the ‘,
’ syntax is used.
Advanced macro writers sometimes write macro-defining macros:
forms which expand into forms which, when evaluated, define macros. In
such macros it is often useful to use nested backquote constructs. For
example, here is a very simple version of defstruct
(see
defstruct-fun) which does not allow any options and only the simplest
slot descriptors. Its invocation looks like:
(defstruct (name) item1 item2 ...)
We would like this form to expand into
(progn (defmacro item1 (x) `(aref ,x 0)) (defmacro item2 (x) `(aref ,x 1)) (defmacro item3 (x) `(aref ,x 2)) (defmacro item4 (x) `(aref ,x 3)) ...)
Here is the macro to perform the expansion:
(defmacro defstruct ((name) . items) (do ((item-list items (cdr item-list)) (ans nil) (i 0 (1+ i))) ((null item-list) `(progn . ,(nreverse ans))) (push `(defmacro ,(car item-list) (x) `(aref ,x ,',i)) ans)))
The interesting part of this definition is the body of
the (inner) defmacro
form:
`(aref ,x ,',i)
Instead of using this backquote construction, we could have written
(list 'aref x ,i)
That is, the ,',
acts like a comma that matches the outer backquote, while
the comma preceding the x
matches with the inner
backquote. Thus, the symbol i
is evaluated when the
defstruct
form is expanded, whereas the symbol x
is
evaluated when the accessor macros are expanded.
Backquote can be useful in situations other than the writing of macros. Whenever there is a piece of list structure to be consed up, most of which is constant, the use of backquote can make the program considerably clearer.
defmacro
or macro
defines a macro whose name has global scope;
it can be used in any function anywhere (subject to separation of
name spaces by packages). You can also make local macro definitions
which are in effect only in one piece of code. This is done with
macrolet
. Like lexical variable bindings made by let
or the
local function definitions made by flet
, macrolet
macro
definitions are in effect only for code contained lexically within
the body of the macrolet
construct.
Executes body and returns the values of the last form in it, with local macro definitions in effect according to local-macros.
Each element of local-macros looks like the cdr of a defmacro
form:
(name lambda-list macro-body...)
and it is interpreted just the same way. However, name is only thus defined for expressions appearing within body.
(macrolet ((ifnot (x y . z) `(if (not ,x) ,y . ,z))) (ifnot foo (print bar) (print t))) ==> (if (not foo) (print bar) (print t))
It is permissible for name to have a global definition also, as a macro or as a function. The global definition is shadowed within body.
(macrolet ((car (x) `(cdr (assq ,x '((a . ferrari) (b . ford)))))) ...(print (car symbol))...)
makes car
have an unusual meaning for its explicit use,
but due to lexical scoping it has no effect on what happens if print
calls car
.
macrolet
can also hide other local definitions made by macrolet
,
flet
or labels
(labels-fun).
A substitutable function is a function that is open coded by the compiler. It is like any other function when applied, but it can be expanded instead, and in that regard resembles a macro.
defsubst
is used for defining substitutable functions. It is used just
like defun
.
(defsubst name lambda-list . body)
and does almost the same thing. It defines a function that executes
identically to the one that a similar call to defun
would define. The
difference comes when a function that calls this one is compiled. Then,
the call is open-coded by substituting the substitutable function’s
definition into the code being compiled. The function itself
looks like (named-subst name lambda-list . body)
. Such a function
is called a subst. For example, if
we define
(defsubst square (x) (* x x)) (defun foo (a b) (square (+ a b)))
then if foo
is used interpreted, square
works just as if it had
been defined by defun
. If foo
is compiled, however, the squaring
is substituted into it and it produces the same code as
(defun foo (a b) (let ((tem (+ a b))) (* tem tem)))
square
’s definition would be
(named-subst square (x) (* x x))
(The internal formats of substs are explained in subst.)
A similar square
could be defined as a macro, but the simple way
(defmacro square (x) `(* ,x ,x))
has a bug: it causes the argument to be computed twice. The simplest correct definition as a macro is
(defmacro square (x) (once-only (x) `(* ,x ,x)))
See once-only-fun for information on once-only
.
In general, anything that is implemented as a subst can be
re-implemented as a macro, just by changing the defsubst
to a
defmacro
and putting in the appropriate backquote and commas, using
once-only
or creating temporary variables to make sure the arguments
are computed once and in the proper order. The disadvantage of macros
is that they are not functions, and so cannot be applied to arguments.
Also, the effort required to guarantee the order of evaluation is a
disadvantage. Their advantage is that they can do much more powerful
things than substs can. This is also a disadvantage since macros
provide more ways to get into trouble. If something can be implemented
either as a macro or as a subst, it is generally better to make it a
subst.
The lambda-list of a subst may contain &optional
and
&rest
, but no other lambda-list keywords. If there is a
rest argument, it is replaced in the body with an explicit call to
list
:
(defsubst append-to-foo (&rest args) (setq foo (append args foo))) (append-to-foo x y z)
expands to
(setq foo (append (list x y z) foo))
Rest arguments in substs are most useful with
apply
. Because of an optimization, if
(defsubst xhack (&rest indices) (apply 'xfun xarg1 indices))
has been done then
(xhack a (car b))
is equivalent to
(xfun xarg1 a (car b))
If xfun
is itself a subst, it is expanded in turn.
When a defsubst
is compiled, its list structure definition is kept
around so that calls can still be open-coded by the compiler. But
non-open-coded calls to the function run at the speed of compiled code.
The interpreted definition is kept in the compiled definition’s
debugging info alist (see debugging-info-fun). Undeclared free
variables used in a defsubst
being compiled do not get any warning,
because this is a common practice that works properly with nonspecial
variables when calls are open coded.
If you are using a defsubst
from outside the program to which it belongs,
you might sometimes be better off if it is not open-coded.
The decrease in speed might not be significant, and you would
have the advantage that you would not need to recompile your program
if the definition is changed. You can prevent open-coding by putting
dont-optimize
around the call to the defsubst
.
(dont-optimize (xhack a (car b)))
See dont-optimize-fun.
Straightforward substitution of the arguments could cause arguments to be computed more than once, or in the wrong order. For instance, the functions
(defsubst reverse-cons (x y) (cons y x)) (defsubst in-order (a b c) (and (< a b) (< b c)))
would present problems. When compiled, because of the substitution
a call to reverse-cons
would evaluate its arguments in the
wrong order, and a call to in-order
could evaluate its second
argument twice. In fact, a more complicated form of substitution
(implemented by si:sublis-eval-once
, si:sublis-eval-once-fun)
is used so that local variables are introduced as necessary to prevent
such problems.
Note that all occurrences of the argument names in the body are replaced with the argument forms, wherever they appear. Thus an argument name should not be used in the body for anything else, such as a function name or a symbol in a constant.
As with defun
, name can be any function spec.
There are many useful techniques for writing macros. Over the years, Lisp programmers have discovered techniques that most programmers find useful, and have identified pitfalls that must be avoided. This section discusses some of these techniques and illustrates them with examples.
The most important thing to keep in mind as you learn to write macros is that the first thing you should do is figure out what the macro form is supposed to expand into, and only then should you start to actually write the code of the macro. If you have a firm grasp of what the generated Lisp program is supposed to look like, you will find the macro much easier to write.
In general any macro that can be written as a substitutable
function (see defsubst-fun) should be written as one, not as a macro,
for several reasons: substitutable functions are easier to write and to
read; they can be passed as functional arguments (for example, you can
pass them to mapcar
); and there are some subtleties that can occur
in macro definitions that need not be worried about in substitutable
functions. A macro can be a substitutable function only if it has
exactly the semantics of a function, rather than of a special form. The
macros we will see in this section are not semantically like functions;
they must be written as macros.
One of the most common errors in writing macros is best illustrated by
example. Suppose we wanted to write dolist
(see dolist-fun) as
a macro that expanded into a do
(see do-fun). The first step,
as always, is to figure out what the expansion should look like. Let’s
pick a representative example form, and figure out what its expansion
should be. Here is a typical dolist
form.
(dolist (element (append a b)) (push element *big-list*) (foo element 3))
We want to create a do
form that does the thing that the above
dolist
form says to do. That is the basic goal of the macro: it
must expand into code that does the same thing that the original code
says to do, but it should be in terms of existing Lisp constructs.
The do
form might look like this:
(do ((list (append a b) (cdr list)) (element)) ((null list)) (setq element (car list)) (push element *big-list*) (foo element 3))
Now we could start writing the macro that would generate this code, and
in general convert any dolist
into a do
, in an analogous way.
However, there is a problem with the above scheme for expanding the
dolist
. The above example’s expansion works fine. But what if the input
form had been the following:
(dolist (list (append a b)) (push list *big-list*) (foo list 3))
This is just like the form we saw above, except that the programmer happened
to decide to name the looping variable list
rather than
element
. The corresponding expansion would be:
(do ((list (append a b) (cdr list)) (list)) ((null list)) (setq list (car list)) (push list *big-list*) (foo list 3))
This doesn’t work at all! In fact, this is not even a valid program,
since it contains a do
that uses the same variable in two different
iteration clauses.
Here’s another example that causes trouble:
(let ((list nil)) (dolist (element (append a b)) (push element list) (foo list 3)))
If you work out the expansion of this form, you will see that there are
two variables named list
, and that the programmer meant to refer to the
outer one but the generated code for the push
actually uses
the inner one.
The problem here is an accidental name conflict. This can happen in any macro that has to create a new variable. If that variable ever appears in a context in which user code might access it, then you have to worry that it might conflict with some other name that the user is using for his own program.
One way to avoid this problem is to choose a name that is very unlikely
to be picked by the user, simply by choosing an unusual name, in a
package which only you will write code in. This will probably work, but
it is inelegant since there is no guarantee that the user won’t just
happen to choose the same name. The way to avoid the name
conflict reliably is to use an uninterned symbol as the variable in the generated
code. The function gensym
(see gensym-fun) is useful for
creating such symbols.
Here is the expansion of the original form, using an uninterned
symbol created by gensym
.
(do ((#:g0005 (append a b) (cdr #:g0005)) (element)) ((null #:g0005)) (setq element (car #:g0005)) (push element *big-list*) (foo element 3))
This is the right kind of thing to expand into. (This is how the
expression would print; this text would not read in properly because a
new uninterned symbol would be created by each use of #:
.) Now that
we understand how the expansion works, we are ready to actually write
the macro. Here it is:
(defmacro dolist ((var form) . body) (let ((dummy (gensym))) `(do ((,dummy ,form (cdr ,dummy)) (,var)) ((null ,dummy)) (setq ,var (car ,dummy)) . ,body)))
Many system macros do not use gensym
for the internal variables in their
expansions. Instead they use symbols whose print names begin and end with a dot.
This provides meaningful names for these variables when looking at the generated
code and when looking at the state of a computation in the error-handler.
These symbols are in the si
package; as a result, a name conflict is possible
only in code which uses variables in the si
package. This would not normally
happen in user code, which resides in other packages.
A related problem occurs when you write a macro that expands into a
prog
or do
(or anything equivalent) behind the user’s back
(unlike dolist
, which is documented to be like do
). Consider
the error-restart
special form (see error-restart-fun). Suppose
we wanted to implement it as a macro that expands into a do-forever
,
which becomes a prog
. Then the following (contrived) Lisp program
would not behave correctly:
(dolist (a list) (error-restart ((sys:abort error) "Return from FOO.") (cond ((> a 10) (return 5)) ((> a 4) (ferror 'lose "You lose.")))))
The problem is that the return
would return from the
error-restart
instead of the prog
.
There are two possible ways to avoid this. The best is to make the expanded
code use only explicit block
’s with obscure or gensymmed block names,
and never a prog
or do
.
The other is to give any prog
or do
the name t
. t
as a
prog
name is special; it causes the prog
to generate only a
block
named t
, omitting the usual block
named nil
which
is normally generated as well. Because only block
s named nil
affect return
, the problem is avoided.
When error-restart
’s expansion is supposed to return from the
prog
named t
, it uses return-from
t
.
Macros like dolist
specifically should expand into an ordinary do
,
because the user expects to be able to exit them with return
.
Sometimes a macro wants to do several different things when its expansion
is evaluated. Another way to say this is that sometimes a macro wants to
expand into several things, all of which should happen sequentially at run
time (not macro-expand time). For example, suppose you wanted to implement
defconst
(see defconst-fun) as a macro. defconst
must do two
things, declare the variable to be special and set the variable to its
initial value. (Here we implement a simplified defconst
that does only
these two things, and doesn’t have any options.) What should a
defconst
form expand into? Well, what we would like is for an
appearance of
(defconst a (+ 4 b))
in a file to be the same thing as the appearance of the following two forms:
(proclaim '(special a)) (setq a (+ 4 b))
However, because of the way that macros work, they only expand into one
form, not two. So we need to have a defconst
form expand into
one form that is just like having two forms in the file.
There is such a form. It looks like this:
(progn (proclaim '(special a)) (setq a (+ 4 b)))
In interpreted Lisp, it is easy to see what happens here. This is a
progn
special form, and so all its subforms are evaluated, in turn.
The proclaim
form and the setq
form are evaluated.
The compiler recognizes progn
specially and treats each argument
of the progn
form as if it had been encountered at top level.
Here is the macro definition:
(defmacro defconst (variable init-form) `(progn (proclaim '(special ,variable)) (setq ,variable ,init-form)))
Here is another example of a form that wants to expand into several
things. We implement a special form called define-command
,
which is intended to be used in order to define commands in some
interactive user subsystem. For each command, there are two things
provided by the define-command
form: a function that executes the
command, and a character that should invoke the function in this subsystem.
Suppose that in
this subsystem, commands are always functions of no arguments,
and characters are used to index a vector called dispatch-table
to find the function to use.
A typical call to define-command
would look like:
(define-command move-to-top #\meta-< (do () ((at-the-top-p)) (move-up-one)))
Expanding into:
(progn (setf (aref dispatch-table #\meta-<) 'move-to-top) (push 'move-to-top *command-name-list*) (defun move-to-top () (do () ((at-the-top-p)) (move-up-one))) )
The define-command
expands into three forms. The first one sets up
the specified character to invoke this command. The second one puts the
command name onto the list of all command names. The third one is the
defun
that actually defines the function itself. Note that the
setf
and push
happen at load-time (when the file is loaded);
the function, of course, also gets defined at load time. (See the
description of eval-when
(eval-when-fun) for more discussion of
the differences between compile time, load time, and eval time.)
This technique makes Lisp a powerful language in which to implement your own language. When you write a large system in Lisp, frequently you can make things much more convenient and clear by using macros to extend Lisp into a customized language for your application. In the above example, we have created a little language extension: a new special form that defines commands for our system. It lets the writer of the system attach the code for a command character to the character itself. Macro expansion allows the function definitions and the command dispatch table to be made from the same source code.
There is a particular kind of macro that is very useful for many
applications. This is a macro that you place “around” some Lisp code,
in order to make the evaluation of that code happen in a modified context.
For a very simple example, we could define a macro called
with-output-in-base
, that executes the forms within its body
with any output of numbers that is done defaulting to a specified base.
(defmacro with-output-in-base ((base-form) &body body) `(let ((*print-base* ,base-form)) . ,body))
A typical use of this macro might look like:
(with-output-in-base (*default-base*) (print x) (print y))
which would expand into
(let ((*print-base* *default-base*)) (print x) (print y))
This example is too trivial to be very useful; it is intended to
demonstrate some stylistic issues. There are standard Zetalisp
constructs that are similar to this macro; see
with-open-file
(with-open-file-fun) and with-input-from-string
(with-input-from-string-fun), for example.
The really interesting thing, of course, is that you can define your
own such constructs for your applications. One very
powerful application of this technique was used in a system that
manipulates and solves the Rubik’s cube puzzle. The system heavily
uses a construct called with-front-and-top
, whose meaning is
“evaluate this code in a context in which this specified face of the
cube is considered the front face, and this other specified face is
considered the top face”.
The first thing to keep in mind when you write this sort of macro is
that you can make your macro much clearer to people who might read your
program if you conform to a set of loose standards of syntactic style.
By convention, the names of such constructs start with “with-
”.
This seems to be a clear way of expressing the concept that we are
setting up a context; the meaning of the construct is “do this stuff
with the following things true”. Another convention is that any
“parameters” to the construct should appear in a list that is the
first subform of the construct, and that the rest of the elements
should make up a body of forms that are evaluated sequentially with the
last one returned. All of the examples cited above work this way. In
our with-output-in-base
example, there was one parameter (the
base), which appears as the first (and only) element of a list that is
the first subform of the construct. The extra level of parentheses
in the printed representation serves to separate the “parameter” forms
from the “body” forms so that it is textually apparent which is which;
it also provides a convenient way to provide default parameters (a good
example is the with-input-from-string
construct
(with-input-from-string-fun), which takes two required and two
optional parameters). Another convention/technique is to use the
&body
keyword in the defmacro
to tell the editor how to
indent the elements of the body (see &body).
The other thing to keep in mind is that control can leave the construct
either by the last form’s returning, or by a non-local exit
(go
, return
or throw
). You should write the definition
in such a way that everything is cleaned up appropriately no
matter how control exits. In our with-output-in-base
example, there is no problem, because non-local exits undo
lambda-bindings. However, in even slightly more complicated cases, an
unwind-protect
form (see unwind-protect-fun) is needed: the
macro must expand into an unwind-protect
that surrounds the body,
with “cleanup” forms that undo the context-setting-up that the macro
did. For example, using-resource
(see using-resource-fun)
expands
(using-resource (window menu-resource) body...)
into
(let ((window nil)) (unwind-protect (progn (setq window (allocate-resource 'menu-resource)) body...) (and window (deallocate-resource 'menu-resource window))))
This way the allocated resource item is deallocated whenever control
leaves the using-resource
special form.
In any macro, you should always pay attention to the problem of multiple or out-of-order evaluation of user subforms. Here is an example of a macro with such a problem. This macro defines a special form with two subforms. The first is a reference, and the second is a form. The special form is defined to create a cons whose car and cdr are both the value of the second subform, and then to set the reference to be that cons. Here is a possible definition:
(defmacro test (reference form) `(setf ,reference (cons ,form ,form)))
Simple cases work all right:
(test foo 3) ==> (setf foo (cons 3 3))
But a more complex example, in which the subform has side effects, can produce surprising results:
(test foo (setq x (1+ x))) ==> (setf foo (cons (setq x (1+ x)) (setq x (1+ x))))
The resulting code evaluates the setq
form twice, and so x
is increased by two instead of by one. A better definition of test
that avoids this problem is:
(defmacro test (reference form) (let ((value (gensym))) `(let ((,value ,form)) (setf ,reference (cons ,value ,value)))))
With this definition, the expansion works as follows:
(test foo (setq x (1+ x))) ==> (let ((#:g0005 (setq x (1+ x)))) (setf foo (cons #:g0005 #:g0005)))
Once again, the expansion would print this way, but this text
would not read in as a valid expression due to the inevitable
problems of #:
.
In general, when you define a new construct which contains one or more argument forms, you must be careful that the expansion evaluates the argument forms the proper number of times and in the proper order. There’s nothing fundamentally wrong with multiple or out-of-order evalation if that is really what you want and if it is what you document your special form to do. But if this happens unexpectedly, it can make invocations fail to work as they appear they should.
once-only
is a macro that can be used to avoid multiple evaluation.
It is most easily explained by example. You would write test
using
once-only
as follows:
(defmacro test (reference form) (once-only (form) `(setf ,reference (cons ,form ,form))))
This defines test
in such a way that the form
is only evaluated
once, and references to form
inside the macro body refer to that
value. once-only
automatically introduces a lambda-binding of a
generated symbol to hold the value of the form. Actually, it is more
clever than that; it avoids introducing the lambda-binding for forms
whose evaluation is trivial and may be repeated without harm or cost,
such as numbers, symbols, and quoted structure. This is just an
optimization that helps produce more efficient code.
The once-only
macro makes it easier to follow the principle, but it
does not completely or automatically solve the problems of multiple and
out-of-order evaluation. It is just a tool that can solve some of the
problems some of the time; it is not a panacea.
The following description attempts to explain what once-only
does,
but it is a lot easier to use once-only
by imitating the example
above than by trying to understand once-only
’s rather tricky
definition.
var-list is a list of variables. The body is a Lisp program
that presumably uses the values of those variables. When the form
resulting from the expansion of the once-only
is evaluated, the first
thing it does is to inspect the values of each of the variables in
var-list; these values are assumed to be Lisp forms. For each of the
variables, it binds that variable either to its current value, if the
current value is a trivial form, or to a generated symbol. Next,
once-only
evaluates the body in this new binding environment and,
when they have been evaluated, it undoes the bindings. The result of the
evaluation of the last form in body is presumed to be a Lisp form, typically
the expansion of a macro. If all of the variables have been bound to
trivial forms, then once-only just returns that result. Otherwise,
once-only
returns the result wrapped in a lambda-combination that binds
the generated symbols to the result of evaluating the respective
non-trivial forms.
The effect is that the program produced by evaluating the once-only
form is coded in such a way that, each of the forms which was the value
of one of the variables in var-list is evaluated only once,
unless the form is such as to have no side effects. At the same time,
no unnecessary temporary variables appear in the generated code, but the
body of the once-only
is not cluttered up with extraneous code to
decide whether temporary variables are needed.
A useful technique for building language extensions is to define
programming constructs that employ two special forms, one of which is
used inside the body of the other. Here is a simple example. There
are two special forms. The outer one is called with-collection
,
and the inner one is called collect
. collect
takes one
subform, which it evaluates; with-collection
just has a body, whose
forms it evaluates sequentially. with-collection
returns a list of
all of the values that were given to collect
during the evaluation
of the with-collection
’s body. For example,
(with-collection (dotimes (i 5) (collect i))) => (1 2 3 4 5)
Remembering the first piece of advice we gave about macros, the next thing to do is to figure out what the expansion looks like. Here is how the above example could expand:
(let ((#:g0005 nil)) (dotimes (i 5) (push i #:g0005)) (nreverse #:g0005))
Now, how do we write the definition of the macros? Well,
with-collection
is pretty easy:
(defmacro with-collection (&body body) (let ((var (gensym))) `(let ((,var nil)) ,@body (nreverse ,var))))
The hard part is writing collect
. Let’s try it:
(defmacro collect (argument) `(push ,argument ,var))
Note that something unusual is going on here: collect
is using the
variable var
freely. It is depending on the binding that takes
place in the body of with-collection
in order to get access to the
value of var
. Unfortunately, that binding took place when
with-collection
got expanded; with-collection
’s expander
function bound var
, and the binding of var
was unmade when the expander function
was done. By the time the collect
form gets expanded, the binding
is long gone. The macro definitions above do not work.
Somehow the expander function of with-collection
has to communicate
with the expander function of collect
to pass over the generated
symbol.
The only way for with-collection
to convey information to the
expander function of collect
is for it to expand into something
that passes that information.
One way to write these macros is using macrolet
:
(defmacro with-collection (&body body) (let ((var (gensym))) `(macrolet ((collect (argument) `(push ,argument ,',var))) (let ((,var nil)) ,@body (nreverse ,var)))))
Here with-collection
expands into code which defines collect
specially to know about which variable to collect into. ,',
causes
var
’s value to be substituted when the outer backquote, the one
around the macrolet
, is executed. argument
, however, is
substituted in when the inner backquote is executed, which happens
when collect
is expanded.
This technique has the interesting consequence that collect
is
defined only within the body of a with-collection
. It would simply
not be recognized elsewhere; or it could have another definition, for
some other purpose, globally. This has both advantages and
disadvantages.
Another technique is to communicate through local declarations.
The code generated by with-collection
can contain a
local-declare
. The expansion of collect
can examine the declararion
with getdecl
to decide what to do. Here is the code:
(defmacro with-collection (&body body) (let ((var (gensym))) `(let ((,var nil)) (local-declare ((collection-var nil ,var)) ,@body (nreverse ,var))))) (defmacro collect (argument) (let ((var ,(getdecl nil 'collection-var))) (unless var (ferror nil "COLLECT not within a WITH-COLLECTION")) `(push ,argument var)))
Another way, used before getdecl
existed, was with compiler-let
(see compiler-let-fun). compiler-let
is identical to let
as
far as the interpreter is concerned, so the macro continues to work in
the interpreter with this change. When the compiler encounters a
compiler-let
, however, it actually performs the bindings that the
compiler-let
specifies and proceeds to compile the body of the
compiler-let
with all of those bindings in effect. In other words,
it acts as the interpreter would.
Here’s the right way to write these macros in this fashion:
(defvar *collect-variable*) (defmacro with-collection (&body body) (let ((var (gensym))) `(let ((,var nil)) (compiler-let ((*collect-variable* ',var)) . ,body) (nreverse ,var)))) (defmacro collect (argument) `(push ,argument ,*collect-variable*))
The technique of defining functions to be used during macro expansion
deserves explicit mention here. It may not occur to you, but a macro
expander function is a Lisp program like any other Lisp program, and it
can benefit in all the usual ways by being broken down into a
collection of functions that do various parts of its work. Usually
macro expander functions are pretty simple Lisp programs that take
things apart and put them together slightly differently, but
some macros are quite complex and do a lot of work. Several features
of Zetalisp, including flavors, loop
, and defstruct
,
are implemented using very complex macros, which, like any complex
well-written Lisp program, are broken down into modular functions. You should
keep this in mind if you ever invent an advanced language extension
or ever find yourself writing a five-page expander function.
A particular thing to note is that any functions used by macro-expander
functions must be available at compile-time. You can make a function
available at compile time by surrounding its defining form with an
(eval-when (compile load eval) ...)
; see eval-when-fun for more
details. Doing this means that at compile time the definition of the
function is interpreted, not compiled, and hence runs more
slowly.
Another approach is to separate macro definitions and the functions they call during expansion into a separate file, often called a “defs” (definitions) file. This file defines all the macros, and also all functions that the macros call. It can be separately compiled and loaded up before compiling the main part of the program, which uses the macros. The system facility (see system-system) helps keep these various files straight, compiling and loading things in the right order.
mexp
goes into a loop in which it reads forms and sequentially
expands them, printing out the result of each expansion (using the
grinder (see grind) to improve readability). When the form itself
has been expanded until it is no longer a macro call,
macroexpand-all
is used to expand all its subforms, and the result
is printed if it is different from what preceded. This allows you to
see what your macros are expanding into, without actually evaluating
the result of the expansion.
If the form you type is an atom, mexp
returns. Usually one simply
uses Abort
to exit it.
If the form you type is a list that not a macro call, nothing is printed. You are prompted immediately for another form.
If the argument form is given, it is expanded and printed as usual,
and then mexp
returns immediately.
If you type
(mexp)
followed by
(rest (first x))
then mexp
will print
(cdr (first x))
and then
(cdr (car x))
You would then type Abort
to exit mexp
.
Every time the the evaluator sees a macro form, it must call the
macro to expand the form. This is time consuming. To speed things up,
the expansion of the macro is recorded automatically by modifying the
form using rplaca
and rplacd
so that it no longer appears to
need expansion. If the same form is evaluated again, it can be processed
straight away. This is done using the function displace
.
A consequence of the evaluator’s policy of displacing macro calls is that if you change the definition of a macro, the new definition does not take effect in any form that has already been displaced. An existing form which calls the macro will use the new definition only if the form has never been evaluated.
form must be a list.
displace
replaces the car and cdr of form so
that it looks like:
(si:displaced form expansion)
When a form whose car is si:displaced
is evaluated, the evaluator
simply extracts the expansion and evaluates it. old-form-copy is a
newly consed pair whose car and cdr are the same as the original car and
cdr of the form; thus, it records the macro call which was expanded.
grindef
uses this information to print the code as it was, rather
than as it has been expanded.
displace
returns expansion.
The precise format of a displaced macro call may be changed in the future to facilitate the implementation of automatic reexpansion if the called macro changes.
The following two functions are provided to allow the user to control expansion of macros; they are often useful for the writer of advanced macro systems, and in tools that want to examine and understand code that may contain macros.
If form is a macro form, this expands it (once)
and returns the expanded form. Otherwise it just
returns form. The second value is t
if
form has been expanded.
local-macros-environment is a data structure which specifies the
local macro definitions (made by macrolet
) to be used for this
expansion in addition to the global macro definitions (made by
defmacro
and recorded in function cells of symbols). When
macroexpand-1
is called by the evaluator, this argument comes from
the evaluator’s own data structures set up by any macrolet
forms
which form was found within. When macroexpand-1
is called by
the compiler, this argument comes from data structures kept by the
compiler in its handling of macrolet
.
Sometimes macro definitions
call macroexpand-1
; in that case, if form was a subform of the
macro call, a &environment
argument in the macro definition can be
used to obtain a value to pass as local-macros-environment. See
&environment. setf
is one example of a macro that needs to use
&environment
since it expands some of its subforms in deciding
what code to expand into. See setf
, setf-fun.
If local-macros-environment is omitted or nil
, only global
macro definitions are used.
macroexpand-1
expands defsubst
function forms as well as macro forms.
If form is a macro form, this expands it repeatedly
until it is not a macro form and returns the final expansion.
Otherwise, it just returns form. The second value is t
if one or more expansions have take place.
Everything said about local-macros-environment under
macroexpand-1
applies here too.
macroexpand
expands defsubst
function forms as well as macro forms.
Expands all macro calls in form, including those which are
its subforms, and returns the result. By contrast, macroexpand
would not expand the subforms. This function knows the syntax
of all Lisp special forms, so the result is completely accurate.
Note, however, that quoted list structure within form is not
altered; there is no way to know whether you intend such list
structure to be code or to be used in constructing code.
The value is a function which is used by macroexpand-1
to invoke the
expander function of a macro. It receives arguments just like funcall
:
the expander function, and the arguments for it.
In fact, the default value of this variable is funcall
. The
variable exists so that the user can set it to some other function,
which performs the funcall
and possibly other associated
record-keeping.
*macroexpand-hook*
is not used when a macro is expanded by the
interpreter.
The definition of a macro is a list whose car is the symbol macro
.
The cdr of the list is the macro’s expander function. This expander
function contains the code written in the defmacro
or other construct
which was used to define the macro. It may be a lambda
expression,
or it may be a compiled function object (FEF). Expanding the macro is done
by invoking the expander function.
When an expander function is called, it receives two arguments: the
macro call to be expanded, and the local macros environment. If the
expansion is being done by macroexpand-1
then the local macros
environment passed is the one that was given to macroexpand-1
. In a
macro defined with defmacro
, the local macros environment can be
accessed by writing an &environment
parameter (see &environment).
Expander functions used to be given only one argument. For compatibility,
it is useful to define expander functions so that the second argument
is optional; defmacro
does so. In addition, old macro definitions
still work, because macroexpand-1
actually checks the number of
arguments which the expander function is ready to receive, and passes
only one argument if the expander function expects only one. This is
done using call
(see call-fun).
If function-spec is defined as a macro, then this returns its expander-function:
the function which should be called, with a macro call as its sole argument,
to produce the macro expansion. For certain special forms, macro-function
returns the “alternate macro definition” (see below).
Otherwise, macro-function
returns nil
.
Since a definition as a macro is really a list of the form (macro
expander-function)
, you can get the expander function using
(cdr (fdefinition function-spec))
. But it is cleaner to use
macro-function
.
(setf (macro-function function-spec) expander)
is permitted, and is equivalent to
(fdefinefunction-spec
(cons 'macroexpander
))
Certain constructs which Common Lisp specifies as macros are actually
implemented as special forms (cond
, for example). These special
forms have “alternate macro definitions” which are the definitions
they might have if they were implemented as macros. This is so that the
caller of macro-function
, if it is a portable Common Lisp program,
need not know about any special forms except the standard Common Lisp
ones in order to make deductions about all valid Common Lisp programs.
It can instead regard as a macro any symbol on which macro-function
returns a non-nil
value, and treat that value as the macro expander
function.
The alternate macro definition of a symbol such as cond
is not actually
its function definition. It exists only for macro-function
to return.
The existence of alternate macro definitions means that macro-function
is not useful for testing whether a symbol really is defined as a macro.
This section would logically belong within setf, but it is too advanced to go there. It is placed in this chapter because it deals with concepts related to macro-expansion.
There are three ways to tell the system how to setf
a function:
simple defsetf
when it is trivial, general defsetf
which
handles most other cases, and define-setf-method
which provides
the utmost generality.
The simple way to use defsetf
is useful when there is a setting
function which does all the work of storing a value into the appropriate place
and has the proper calling conventions.
(defsetf function setting-function)
says that the way to store into (function args...)
is to do
(setting-function args... new-value)
. For example,
(defsetf car sys:setcar)
is the way setf
of car
is defined. Its meaning is that (setf
(car x) y)
should expand into (sys:setcar x y)
.
(setcar
is like rplaca
except that setcar
returns its second
argument).
The more general form of defsetf
is used when there is no
setting function with exactly the right calling sequence. Thus,
(defsetf function (function-args...) (value-arg) body...)
tells setf
how to store into (function args...)
by
providing something like a macro defininition to expand into code to do
the storing. body computes the code; the last form in body
returns a suitable expression. function-args should be a lambda
list, which can have optional and rest args. body can substitute
the values of the variables in this lambda list, to refer to the
arguments in the form being setf
’ed. Likewise, it can substitute in
value-arg to refer to the value to be stored.
In fact, the function-args and value-arg are not actually
the subforms of the form being setf
d and the value to be stored;
they are gensyms. After the body returns, the corresponding
expressions may be substituted for the gensyms, or the gensyms may
remain as local variables with a suitable let
provided to bind them.
This is how setf
ensures a correct order of evaluation.
Example:
(defsetf car (list) (value) `(sys:setcar ,list ,value))
is how one could define the setf
’ing of car
using the general
form of defsetf
. The simple form of defsetf
can be regarded
as an abbreviation for something like this.
Since setf
automatically expands macros, if you define a macro whose
expansion is usable in setf
then the macro is usable there also.
Sometimes this is not desirable. For example, the accessor subst for a slot
in a defstruct
structure probably expands into aref
, but if the
slot is declared :read-only
this should not be allowed.
It is prevented by means of a defsetf
like this:
(defsetf accessor-function)
This means that setf
is explicitly prohibited on that function.
Defines how to do setf
on place’s starting with function, with
more power and generality than defsetf
provides, but more
complexity of use.
The define-setf-method
form receives its arguments almost like an
analogous defsetf
. However, the values it receives are the actual
subforms, and the actual form for the value, rather than gensyms which
stand for them.
The function-args are the actual subforms of the place to be setf
’ed,
and the full power of defmacro
arglists can be used to match against it.
value-arg is the actual form used as the second argument to setf
.
body is once again evaluated, but it does not return an expression
to do the storing. Instead, it returns five values which contain
sufficient information to enable anyone to examine and modify the
contents of the place. This information tells the caller which subforms
of the place need to be evaluated, and how to use them to examine or set
the value of the place. (Generally the function-args arglist is
arranged to make each arg get one subform.) A temporary variable must
be found or made (usually with gensym
) for each of them. Another
temporary variable should be made to correspond to the value to be
stored.
Then the five values to be returned are:
A list of the temporary variables for the subforms of the place.
A list of the subforms that they correspond to.
A list of the temporary variables for the values to be stored. Currently there can only be one value to be stored, so there is only one variable in this list, always.
A form to do the storing. This form refers to some or all of the temporary variables listed in value 1.
A form to get the value of the place. setf
does not need to do
this, but push
and incf
do. This too should refer only to the
temporary variables. No expression of contained it it should be a
subexpression of the place being stored in.
This information is everything that the macro (setf
or something
more complicated) needs to know to decide what to do.
Example:
(define-setf-method car (function-spec) (let ((tempvars (list (gensym))) (tempargs (list (list-form))) (storevar (gensym))) (values tempvars tempargs (list storevar) `(sys:setcar ,(first tempvars) ,storevar) `(car ,(first tempvars)))))
is how one could define the setf
’ing of car
using define-setf-method
.
This definition is equivalent to the other two definitions using the
simpler techniques.
Invokes the setf
method for form (which must be a list) and returns the
five values produced by the body of the define-setf-method
for the symbol
which is the car of form. The meanings of these five values are given
immediately above. If the way to setf
that symbol was defined with defsetf
you still get five values, which you can interpret in the same ways; thus,
defsetf
is effectively an abbreviation for a suitable define-setf-method
.
There are two ways to use get-setf-method
. One is in a macro which,
like setf
or incf
or push
, wants to store into a place. The
other is in a define-setf-method
for something like ldb
, which
is setf
by setting one of its arguments. You would append your new
tempvars and tempargs to the ones you got from get-setf-method
to
get the combined lists which you return. The forms returned by the
get-setf-method
you would stick into the forms you return.
An example of a macro which uses get-setf-method
is pushnew
.
(The real pushnew
is a little hairier than this, to handle the
test, test-not and key arguments).
(defmacro pushnew (value place) (multiple-value-bind (tempvars tempargs storevars storeform refform) (get-setf-method place) (si:sublis-eval-once (cons `(-val- . ,value) (pairlis tempvars tempargs)) `(if (memq -val- ,refform) ,refform ,(sublis (list (cons (car storevars) `(cons -val- ,refform))) storeform)) t t)))
An example of adefine-setf-method
that usesget-setf-method
is that forldb
:
(define-setf-method ldb (bytespec int) (multiple-value-bind (temps vals stores store-form access-form) (get-setf-method int) (let ((btemp (gensym)) (store (gensym)) (itemp (first stores))) (values (cons btemp temps) (cons bytespec vals) (list store) `(progn ,(sublis (list (cons itemp `(dpb ,store ,btemp ,access-form))) store-form) ,store) `(ldb ,btemp ,access-form)))))
What this says is that the way to setf
(ldb byte (foo))
is computed based on the way to setf
(foo)
.
Replaces temporary variables in form with corresponding values
according to alist, but generates local variables when necessary to
make sure that the corresponding values are evaluated exactly once and
in same order that they appear in alist. (This complication is
skipped when the values are constant). alist should be a list of
elements (tempvar . value)
. The result is a form equivalent
to
`(let ,(mapcar #'(lambda (elt) (list (car elt) (cdr elt))) alist) ,form)
but it usually contains fewer temporary variables and executes faster.
If reuse-tempvars is non-nil
, the temporary variables which
appear as the cars of the elements of alist are allowed to appear in
the resulting form. Otherwise, none of them appears in the resulting
form, and if any local variables turn out to be needed, they are made
afresh with gensym
. reuse-tempvars should be used only when it
is guaranteed that none of the temporary variables in alist is
referred to by any of the values to be substituted; as, when the
temporary variables have been freshly made with gensym
.
If sequential-flag is non-nil
, then the value substituted for a
temporary variable is allowed to refer to the temporary variables
preceding it in alist. setf
and similar macros should all use this
option.
Is a quick way to define setf
’ing macros which resemble incf
.
For example, here is how incf
is defined:
(define-modify-macro incf (&optional (delta 1)) + "Increment PLACE's value by DELTA.")
lambda-list describes any arguments the macro accepts, but not first
argument, which is always the place to be examined and modified. The
old value of this place, and any additional arguments such as delta
in the case of incf
, are combined using the combiner-function
(in this case, +
) to get the new value which is stored back in the
place.
Defines how to perform locf
on a generalized variable.
There are two forms of usage, analogous to those of defsetf
.
(deflocf function locating-function)
says that the way to get the location of (function args...)
is to do
(locating-function args...)
. For example,
(deflocf car sys:car-location)
could be used to define locf
on car
forms.
is the way setf
of car
is defined. Its meaning is that (locf
(car x))
should expand into (sys:car-location x)
.
The more general form of deflocf
is used when there is no
locating function with exactly the right calling sequence. Thus,
(deflocf function (function-args...) body...)
tells locf
how to locate (function args...)
by
providing something like a macro defininition to expand into code to do
the locating. body computes the code; the last form in body
returns a suitable expression. function-args should be a lambda
list, which can have optional and rest args. body can substitute
the values of the variables in this lambda list, to refer to the
arguments in the form being locf
’ed.
Example:
(deflocf car (list) `(sys:car-location ,list))
is how one could define the locf
’ing of car
using the general
form of deflocf
. The simple form of deflocf
can be regarded
as an abbreviation for something like this.
(deflocf function)
says that locf
should not be allowed on forms starting with function.
This is useful only when function is defined as a macro or subst, for then
locf
’s normal action is to expand the macro call and try again. In
other cases there is no way to locf
a function unless you define
one, so you can simply refrain from defining any way.
loop
is a Lisp macro that provides a programmable
iteration facility. The same loop
module operates compatibly in
Zetalisp, Maclisp (PDP-10 and Multics), and NIL, and a
moderately compatible package is under development for the MDL
programming environment. loop
was inspired by the FOR
facility of CLISP in InterLisp; however, it is not compatible and
differs in several details.
The general approach is that a form introduced by the word
loop
generates a single program loop, into which a large variety
of features can be incorporated. The loop consists of some
initialization (prologue) code, a body that may be executed
several times, and some exit (epilogue) code. Variables may be
declared local to the loop. The special features of loop
are concerned with loop
variables, deciding when to end the iteration, putting user-written
code into the loop, returning a value from the construct, and
iterating a variable through various real or virtual sets of values.
The loop
form consists of a series of clauses, each
introduced by a “keyword” symbol. These symbols are keywords from
loop
’s point of view; they are not keywords in the usual sense
(symbols in the keyword
package). loop
ignores the package
when it compares a symbol against the known keywords.
Forms appearing in or implied by the
clauses of a loop
form are classed as those to be executed as
initialization code, body code, and/or exit code; within each part of
the template filled in by loop
, they are executed strictly in
the order implied by the original composition. Thus, just as in
ordinary Lisp code, side-effects may be used, and one piece of code
may depend on following another for its proper operation. This is the
principal philosophic difference from InterLisp’s FOR facility.
Note that loop
forms are intended to look like stylized
English rather than Lisp code. There is a notably low density of
parentheses, and many of the keywords are accepted in several synonymous
forms to allow writing of more euphonious and grammatical English. Some
find this notation verbose and distasteful, while others find it
flexible and convenient. The former are invited to stick to do
.
Here are some examples to illustrate the use of loop
.
(defun print-elements-of-list (list-of-elements) (loop for element in list-of-elements do (print element)))
prints each element in its argument, which
should be a list. It returns nil
.
(defun gather-alist-entries (list-of-pairs) (loop for pair in list-of-pairs collect (car pair)))
takes an association list and
returns a list of the keys; that is, (gather-alist-entries
'((foo 1 2) (bar 259) (baz)))
returns (foo bar baz)
.
(defun extract-interesting-numbers (start-value end-value) (loop for number from start-value to end-value when (interesting-p number) collect number))
takes two arguments, which should be
integers, and returns a list of all the numbers in that range
(inclusive) which satisfy the predicate interesting-p
.
(defun find-maximum-element (an-array) (loop for i from 0 below (array-dimension-n 1 an-array) maximize (aref an-array i)))
returns the maximum of the elements of its argument, a one-dimensional array.
(defun my-remove (object list) (loop for element in list unless (equal object element) collect element))
is like the standard function remove
, except
that it copies the entire list.
(defun find-frob (list) (loop for element in list when (frobp element) return element finally (ferror nil "No frob found in the list ~S" list)))
returns the first element of its list argument which
satisfies the predicate frobp
. If none is found, an error is
signaled.
Common Lisp defines loop
as equivalent to do-forever
: it is used
with a body consisting only of forms to be evaluated until a nonlocal
exit happens. This is incompatible with the traditional loop
macro
which this chapter is about. However, it is possible to tell which
meaning of loop
the programmer intended: in the traditional loop
macro, it must be a symbol, while in the Common Lisp loop
it is
useless to use a symbol there. Therefore, if the first argument of
a loop
form is not a symbol, it is treated as a Common Lisp loop
.
Internally, loop
constructs a prog
which includes
variable bindings, pre-iteration (initialization) code,
post-iteration (exit) code, the body of the iteration, and stepping
of variables of iteration to their next values (which happens on
every iteration after the body is executed).
A clause consists of a keyword symbol and any Lisp
forms and keywords that it deals with. For example,
(loop for x in l do (print x)),
contains two clauses, for x in l
and do (print x)
.
Certain of the parts of the clause will be described as being
expressions, e.g (print x)
in the above. An expression can
be a single Lisp form, or a series of forms implicitly collected with
progn
. An expression is terminated by the next following atom,
which is taken to be a keyword. This syntax allows only the first
form in an expression to be atomic, but makes misspelled keywords
more easily detectable.
loop
uses print-name equality to compare keywords so
that loop
forms may be written without package prefixes; in
Lisp implementations that do not have packages, eq
is used for
comparison.
Bindings and iteration variable steppings may be performed either sequentially or in parallel. This affects how the stepping of one iteration variable may depend on the value of another. The syntax for distinguishing the two will be described with the corresponding clauses. When a set of variables are to be bound in parallel, all of the initial values are computed and then all the bindings are established. Subsequent bindings will be performed inside of that binding environment. When the same variables are stepped, all the new values are computed and then the variables are set.
These clauses all create a variable of iteration, which
is bound locally to the loop and takes on a new value on each
successive iteration. Note that if more than one iteration-driving
clause is used in the same loop, several variables are created that
all step together through their values; when any of the iterations
terminates, the entire loop terminates. Nested iterations are not
generated; for those, you need a second loop
form in the body of
the loop. In order not to produce strange interactions, iteration-driving clauses are required to precede any clauses that produce
body code: that is, all except those that produce prologue or
epilogue code (initially
and finally
), bindings
(with
), the named
clause, and the iteration termination
clauses (while
and until
).
Clauses which drive the iteration may be arranged to perform
their testing and stepping either in series or in parallel. They are
by default grouped in series, which allows the stepping computation of
one clause to use the just-computed values of the iteration variables
of previous clauses. They may be made to step in parallel, as is
the case with the do
special form, by “joining” the iteration
clauses with the keyword and
. The form this typically takes is
something like
(loop ... for x = (f) and for y = init then (g x) ...)
which sets x
to (f)
on every iteration, and binds y
to the value of init for the first iteration, and on every
iteration thereafter sets it to (g x)
, where x
still has
the value from the previous iteration. Thus, if the calls to
f
and g
are not order-dependent, this would be best
written as
(loop ... for y = init then (g x) for x = (f) ...)
because, as a general rule, parallel stepping has more overhead than sequential stepping. Similarly, the example
(loop for sublist on some-list and for previous = 'undefined then sublist ...)
which is equivalent to the do
construct
(do ((sublist some-list (cdr sublist)) (previous 'undefined sublist)) ((null sublist) ...) ...)
in terms of stepping, would be better written as
(loop for previous = 'undefined then sublist for sublist on some-list ...)
When iteration-driving clauses are joined with and
, if
the token following the and
is not a keyword that introduces an
iteration driving clause, it is assumed to be the same as the keyword
that introduced the most recent clause; thus, the above example
showing parallel stepping could have been written as
(loop for sublist on some-list and previous = 'undefined then sublist ...)
The order of evaluation in iteration-driving clauses is as follows: those expressions that are only evaluated once are evaluated in order at the beginning of the form, during the variable-binding phase, while those expressions that are evaluated each time around the loop are evaluated in order in the body.
One common and simple iteration-driving clause is
repeat
:
repeat expression
¶Evaluates expression (during the variable binding phase),
and causes the loop
to iterate that many times.
expression is expected to evaluate to an integer. If
expression evaluates to a zero or negative result, the body code
will not be executed.
All remaining iteration-driving clauses are subdispatches of
the keyword for
, which is synonomous with as
.
In all of them a variable of iteration is specified. Note that,
in general, if an iteration-driving clause implicitly supplies an
endtest, the value of this iteration variable is undefined as the loop is exited
(i.e, when the epilogue code is run). This is
discussed in more detail in section
loop-iteration-framework-section.
Here are all of the varieties of for
clauses. Optional
parts are enclosed in curly brackets.
for var in expr1 {by expr2}
Iterates over each of the elements in the list expr1. If
the by
subclause is present, expr2 is evaluated once
on entry to the loop
to supply the function to be used to fetch successive sublists,
instead of cdr
.
for var on expr1 {by expr2}
Like the previous for
format, except that var is
set to successive sublists of the list instead of successive elements.
Note that
loop
uses a null
rather than an atom
test to
implement both this and the preceding clause.
for var = expr
On each iteration, expr is evaluated and var is set to the result.
for var = expr1 then expr2
var is bound to expr1 when the loop is entered, and set to expr2 (re-evaluated) at all but the first iteration. Since expr1 is evaluated during the binding phase, it cannot reference other iteration variables set before it; for that, use the following:
for var first expr1 then expr2
Sets var to expr1 on the first iteration, and to
expr2 (re-evaluated) on each succeeding iteration. The
evaluation of both expressions is performed inside of the
loop
binding environment, before the loop
body. This
allows the first value of var to come from the first value of
some other iteration variable, allowing such constructs as
(loop for term in poly for ans first (car term) then (gcd ans (car term)) finally (return ans))
for var from expr1 {to expr2} {by expr3}
This performs numeric iteration. var is initialized to
expr1, and on each succeeding iteration is incremented by
expr3 (default 1
). If the to
phrase is given, the
iteration terminates when var becomes greater than expr2.
Each of the expressions is evaluated only once, and the to
and
by
phrases may be written in either order. Alternative keywords
may be used in place of to
; this choice controls the direction
of stepping and the step at which the loop terminates.
downto
instead of to
says that var is decremented by
the step value, and the endtest is adjusted accordingly. If
below
is used instead of to
, or above
instead of
downto
, the iteration terminates before expr2 is
reached, rather than after. Note that the to
variant
appropriate for the direction of stepping must be used for the endtest
to be formed correctly; i.e the code will not work if expr3
is negative or zero. If no limit-specifying clause is given, then the
direction of the stepping may be specified as decreasing by
using downfrom
instead of from
. upfrom
may also be
used instead of from
; it forces the stepping direction to be
increasing.
for var being expr and its path ...
for var being {each|the} path ...
Provides a user-definable iteration facility. path names the manner in which the iteration is to be performed. The ellipsis indicates where various path dependent preposition/expression pairs may appear. See the section on Iteration Paths (iteration-path-page) for complete documentation.
The with
keyword may be used to establish initial
bindings, that is, variables that are local to the loop but are only
set once, rather than on each iteration. The with
clause looks like:
with var1 {= expr1}
{and var2 {= expr2}}...
If no expr is given, the variable is initialized to nil
.
with
bindings linked by and
are performed in
parallel; those not linked are performed sequentially. That is,
(loop with a = (foo) and b = (bar) and c ...)
binds the variables like
(let ((a (foo)) (b (bar)) c) ...)
whereas
(loop with a = (foo) with b = (bar a) with c ...)
binds the variables like
(let ((a (foo))) (let ((b (bar))) (let (c) ...)))
All expr’s in with
clauses are evaluated in the order they
are written, in lambda expressions surrounding the generated
prog
. The loop
expression
(loop with a = xa and b = xb with c = xc for d = xd then (f d) and e = xe then (g e d) for p in xp with q = xq ...)
produces the following binding contour, where t1
is a
loop
-generated temporary:
(let ((a xa) (b xb)) (let ((c xc)) (let ((d xd) (e xe)) (let ((p nil) (t1 xp)) (let ((q xq)) ...)))))
Because all expressions in with
clauses are evaluated during the
variable binding phase, they are best placed near the front of the
loop
form for stylistic reasons.
For binding more than one variable with no particular initialization, one may use the construct
with variable-list {and ...}
as in
with (i j k t1 t2) ...
These are cases of destructuring which loop
handles
specially; destructuring and data type keywords are discussed in
section loop-destructuring-section.
initially expression
¶Puts expression into the prologue of the iteration. It
will be evaluated before any other initialization code except for
initial bindings. For the sake of good style, the initially
clause should therefore be placed after any with
clauses but
before the main body of the loop.
finally expression
¶Puts expression into the epilogue of the loop, which is
evaluated when the iteration terminates (other than by an explicit
return
). For stylistic reasons, then, this clause should appear
last in the loop body. Note that certain clauses may generate code
which terminates the iteration without running the epilogue code;
this behavior is noted with those clauses. Most notable of these are
those described in the section aggregated-boolean-tests-section,
Aggregated Boolean Tests. This clause may be used to cause the loop
to return values in a non-standard way:
(loop for n in l sum n into the-sum count t into the-count finally (return (quotient the-sum the-count)))
do expression
¶doing expression
expression is evaluated each time through the loop, as shown in
the print-elements-of-list
example on
print-elements-of-list-example.
The following clauses accumulate a return value for the iteration in some manner. The general form is
type-of-collection expr {into var}
where type-of-collection is a loop
keyword, and expr
is the thing being accumulated somehow. If no into
is
specified, then the accumulation will be returned when the loop
terminates. If there is an into
, then when the epilogue of the
loop
is reached, var (a variable automatically bound
locally in the loop) will have been set to the accumulated
result and may be used by the epilogue code. In this way, a user may
accumulate and somehow pass back multiple values from a single
loop
, or use them during the loop. It is safe to reference
these variables during the loop, but they should not be modified
until the epilogue code of the loop is reached.
For example,
(loop for x in list collect (foo x) into foo-list collect (bar x) into bar-list collect (baz x) into baz-list finally (return (list foo-list bar-list baz-list)))
has the same effect as
(do ((#:g0001 list (cdr #:g0001)) (x) (foo-list) (bar-list) (baz-list)) ((null #:g0001) (list (nreverse foo-list) (nreverse bar-list) (nreverse baz-list))) (setq x (car #:g0001)) (setq foo-list (cons (foo x) foo-list)) (setq bar-list (cons (bar x) bar-list)) (setq baz-list (cons (baz x) baz-list)))
except that loop
arranges to form the lists in the correct
order, obviating the nreverse
s at the end, and allowing the
lists to be examined during the computation. (This is how the
expression would print; this text would not read in properly because a
new uninterned symbol would be created by each use of #:
.)
collect expr {into var}
¶collecting ...
Causes the values of expr on each iteration to be collected into a list.
nconc expr {into var}
¶nconcing ...
append ...
appending ...
Like collect
, but the results are nconc
’ed or
append
’ed together as appropriate.
(loop for i from 1 to 3 nconc (list i (* i i))) => (1 1 2 4 3 9)
count expr {into var}
¶counting ...
If expr evaluates non-nil
, a counter is incremented.
sum expr {into var}
¶summing ...
Evaluates expr on each iteration and accumulates the sum of all the values.
maximize expr {into var}
¶minimize ...
Computes the maximum (or minimum) of expr over all iterations. Note that if the loop iterates zero times, or if conditionalization prevents the code of this clause from being executed, the result will be meaningless.
Not only may there be multiple accumulations in a
loop
, but a single accumulation may come from multiple
places within the same loop
form. Obviously, the types of
the collection must be compatible. collect
, nconc
, and
append
may all be mixed, as may sum
and count
, and
maximize
and minimize
. For example,
(loop for x in '(a b c) for y in '((1 2) (3 4) (5 6)) collect x append y) => (a 1 2 b 3 4 c 5 6)
The following computes the average of the entries in the list list-of-frobs:
(loop for x in list-of-frobs count t into count-var sum x into sum-var finally (return (cli:// sum-var count-var)))
The following clauses may be used to provide additional
control over when the iteration gets terminated, possibly causing
exit code (due to finally
) to be performed and possibly returning
a value (e.g, from collect
).
while expr
¶If expr evaluates to nil
, the loop is exited, performing
exit code (if any) and returning any accumulated value. The
test is placed in the body of the loop where it is written. It may
appear between sequential for
clauses.
until expr
¶Identical to while (not expr)
.
This may be needed, for example, to step through a strange data structure, as in
(loop until (top-of-concept-tree? concept) for concept = expr then (superior-concept concept) ...)
Note that the placement of the until
clause before the for
clause is valid in this case because of the definition of this
particular variant of for
, which binds concept
to
its first value rather than setting it from inside the loop
.
The following may also be of use in terminating the iteration:
(loop-finish)
causes the iteration to terminate “normally”, like
implicit termination by an iteration-driving clause, or by the
use of while
or until
–the epilogue code (if any) will be
run, and any implicitly collected result will be returned as the value
of the loop
.
For example,
(loop for x in '(1 2 3 4 5 6) collect x do (cond ((= x 4) (loop-finish)))) => (1 2 3 4)
This particular example would be better written as until (= x 4)
in place of the do
clause.
All of these clauses perform some test and may immediately terminate the iteration depending on the result of that test.
always expr
¶Causes the loop to return t
if expr always
evaluates
non-null
. If expr evaluates to nil
the loop
immediately returns nil
, without running the epilogue code (if
any, as specified with the finally
clause); otherwise, t
will be returned when the loop finishes, after the epilogue code has
been run.
never expr
¶Causes the loop to return t
if expr never
evaluates
non-null
. This is equivalent to always (not expr)
.
thereis expr
¶If expr evaluates non-nil
, then the iteration is
terminated, and that value is returned without running the epilogue
code.
These clauses may be used to “conditionalize” the following
clause. They may precede any of the side-effecting or value-producing
clauses, such as do
, collect
, always
, or
return
.
when expr
¶if expr
If expr evaluates to nil
, the following clause will be
skipped, otherwise not.
unless expr
¶This is equivalent to when (not expr))
.
Multiple conditionalization clauses may appear in sequence. If one test fails, then any following tests in the immediate sequence, as well as the clause being conditionalized, are skipped.
Multiple clauses may be conditionalized under the same test by
joining them with and
, as in
(loop for i from a to b when (zerop (remainder i 3)) collect i and do (print i))
which returns a list of all multiples of 3
from a
to
b
(inclusive) and prints them as they are being collected.
If-then-else conditionals may be written using the else
keyword, as in
(loop for i from a to b when (oddp i) collect i into odd-numbers else collect i into even-numbers)
Multiple clauses may appear in an else
-phrase, using and
to join them
in the same way as above.
Conditionals may be nested. For example,
(loop for i from a to b when (zerop (remainder i 3)) do (print i) and when (zerop (remainder i 2)) collect i)
returns a list of all multiples of 6
from a
to b
,
and prints all multiples of 3
from a
to b
.
When else
is used with nested conditionals, the “dangling else”
ambiguity is resolved by matching the else
with the innermost when
not already matched with an else
. Here is a complicated example.
(loop for x in l when (atom x) when (memq x *distinguished-symbols*) do (process1 x) else do (process2 x) else when (memq (car x) *special-prefixes*) collect (process3 (car x) (cdr x)) and do (memoize x) else do (process4 x))
Useful with the conditionalization clauses is the return
clause, which causes an explicit return of its argument as
the value of the iteration, bypassing any epilogue code. That is,
when expr1 return expr2
is equivalent to
when expr1 do (return expr2)
Conditionalization of one of the “aggregated boolean value” clauses simply causes the test that would cause the iteration to terminate early not to be performed unless the condition succeeds. For example,
(loop for x in l when (significant-p x) do (print x) (princ "is significant.") and thereis (extra-special-significant-p x))
does not make the extra-special-significant-p
check unless the
significant-p
check succeeds.
The format of a conditionalized clause is typically something like
when expr1 keyword expr2
If expr2 is the keyword it
, then a variable is generated to
hold the value of expr1, and that variable gets substituted for
expr2. Thus, the composition
when expr return it
is equivalent to the clause
thereis expr
and one may collect all non-null values in an iteration by saying
when expression collect it
If multiple clauses are joined with and
, the it
keyword
may only be used in the first. If multiple when
s,
unless
es, and/or if
s occur in sequence, the value
substituted for it
will be that of the last test performed.
The it
keyword is not recognized in an else
-phrase.
named name
¶Defines a block
named name around the code for the loop
,
so that one may use return-from
to return explicitly out of
this particular loop
. This is obsolete now that block
exists; it is cleaner to write (
around the block
name ...)loop
.
Note that every loop
generates a block
named nil
,
so the function return
can always be used to exit the innermost
loop
(assuming no other construct generating a block
nil
intervenes).
return expression
¶Immediately returns the value of expression as the value of the
loop, without running the epilogue code. This is most useful with
some sort of conditionalization, as discussed in the previous
section. Unlike most of the other clauses, return
is not
considered to “generate body code”, so it is allowed to occur between
iteration clauses, as in
(loop for entry in list when (not (numberp entry)) return (ferror ...) as frob = (times entry 2) ...)
Although ferror
is called only for effect, return
is used
so that it can be called from that point in the loop
.
If one instead desires the loop to have some return value when it
finishes normally, one may place a call to the return
function in the
epilogue (with the finally
clause, loop-finally-clause).
May be used to make keyword, a loop
keyword (such as
for
), into a Lisp macro that may introduce a loop
form.
For example, after evaluating
(define-loop-macro for),
one may now write an iteration as
(for i from 1 below n do ...)
This facility exists primarily for diehard users of a
predecessor of loop
. Its unconstrained use is not recommended,
as it tends to decrease the transportability of the code and
needlessly uses up a function name.
Destructuring provides one with the ability to “simultaneously” assign or bind multiple variables to components of some data structure. Typically this is used with list structure. For example,
(loop with (foo . bar) = '(a b c) ...)
has the effect of binding foo
to a
and bar
to (b
c)
.
loop
’s destructuring support is intended to parallel and
perhaps augment that provided by the host Lisp implementation, with a goal
of minimally providing destructuring over list structure patterns.
Thus, in Lisp implementations with no system destructuring support at
all, one may still use list-structure patterns as loop
iteration
variables and in with
bindings.
One may specify the data types of the components of a pattern
by using a corresponding pattern of the data type keywords in place of
a single data type keyword. This syntax remains unambiguous because
wherever a data type keyword is possible, a loop
keyword is
the only other possibility. Thus, if one wants to do
(loop for x in l as i = (car x) and j = (cadr x) and k = (cddr x) ...)
and no reference to x
is needed, one may instead write
(loop for (i j . k) in l ...)
To allow some abbreviation of the data type pattern, an atomic component of the data type pattern is considered to state that all components of the corresponding part of the variable pattern are of that type. That is, the previous form could be written as
(loop for (i j . k) in l ...)
(defun map-over-properties (fn symbol) (loop for (propname propval) on (plist symbol) by 'cddr do (funcall fn symbol propname propval)))
maps fn over the properties on symbol, giving it arguments of the symbol, the property name, and the value of that property.
This section describes the way loop
constructs
iterations. It is necessary if you will be writing your own iteration
paths, and may be useful in clarifying what loop
does with its
input.
loop
considers the act of stepping to have four
possible parts. Each iteration-driving clause has some or all of these
four parts, which are executed in this order:
This is an endtest which determines if it is safe to step to the next value of the iteration variable.
Variables that get stepped. This is internally manipulated as a
list of the form (var1 val1 var2 val2
..)
; all of those variables are stepped in parallel, meaning that
all of the vals are evaluated before any of the vars are
set.
Sometimes you can’t see if you are done until you step to the next value; that is, the endtest is a function of the stepped-to value.
Other things that need to be stepped. This is typically used for internal variables that are more conveniently stepped here, or to set up iteration variables that are functions of some internal variable(s) actually driving the iteration. This is a list like steps, but the variables in it do not get stepped in parallel.
The above alone is actually insufficient in just about all
the iteration-driving clauses that loop
handles. What is missing
is that in most cases the stepping and testing for the first time
through the loop is different from that of all other times. So, what
loop
deals with is two four-tuples as above; one for the first
iteration, and one for the rest. The first may be thought of as
describing code that immediately precedes the loop in the prog
,
and the second following the body code–in fact, loop
does
just this, but severely perturbs it in order to reduce code
duplication. Two lists of forms are constructed in parallel: one is
the first-iteration endtests and steps, the other the
remaining-iterations endtests and steps. These lists have dummy
entries in them so that identical expressions will appear in the same
position in both. When loop
is done parsing all of the clauses,
these lists get merged back together such that corresponding identical
expressions in both lists are not duplicated unless they are “simple”
and it is worth doing.
Thus, one may get some duplicated code if one has
multiple iterations. Alternatively, loop
may decide to use and
test a flag variable that indicates whether one iteration has been
performed. In general, sequential iterations have less overhead than
parallel iterations, both from the inherent overhead of stepping
multiple variables in parallel, and from the standpoint of potential
code duplication.
One other point that must be noted about parallel stepping is
that although the user iteration variables are guaranteed to be
stepped in parallel, the placement of the endtest for any particular
iteration may be either before or after the stepping. A notable case
of this is
(loop for i from 1 to 3 and dummy = (print 'foo) collect i) => (1 2 3)
but prints foo
four times. Certain other constructs, such
as for var on
, may or may not do this depending on the
particular construction.
This problem also means that it may not be safe to examine an
iteration variable in the epilogue of the loop form. As a general
rule, if an iteration-driving clause implicitly supplies an endtest,
then one cannot know the state of the iteration variable when the loop
terminates. Although one can guess on the basis of whether the
iteration variable itself holds the data upon which the endtest is
based, that guess may be wrong. Thus,
(loop for subl on expr ... finally (f subl))
is incorrect, but
(loop as frob = expr while (g frob) ... finally (f frob))
is safe because the endtest is explicitly dissociated from the stepping.
Iteration paths provide a mechanism for user extension of
iteration-driving clauses. The interface is constrained so that the
definition of a path need not depend on much of the internals of
loop
. The typical form of an iteration path is
for var being {each|the} path {preposition1 expr1}...
path is an atomic symbol which is defined as a loop
path
function.
Any number of preposition/expression pairs may be
present; the prepositions allowable for any particular path are
defined by that path. For example,
(loop for x being the array-elements of my-array from 1 to 10 ...)
To enhance readability, paths are usually defined in both the singular and plural forms; this particular example could have been written as
(loop for x being each array-element of my-array from 1 to 10 ...)
Another format, which is not so generally applicable, is
for var being expr0 and its path {preposition1 expr1}...
In this format, var takes on the value of expr0 the first
time through the loop. Support for this format is usually limited to
paths for which the next value is obtained by operating on the previous value.
Thus, we can hypothesize the cdrs
path, such that
(loop for x being the cdrs of '(a b c . d) collect x) => ((b c . d) (c . d) d)
but
(loop for x being '(a b c . d) and its cdrs collect x) => ((a b c . d) (b c . d) (c . d) d)
To satisfy the anthropomorphic among you, his
, her
, or
their
may be substituted for the its
keyword, as may
each
. Egocentricity is not condoned. Some example uses of
iteration paths are shown in section predefined-paths-section.
Very often, iteration paths step internal variables which the
user does not specify, such as an index into some data-structure.
Although in most cases the user does not wish to be concerned with
such low-level matters, it is occasionally useful to have a handle on
such things. loop
provides an additional syntax with which one
may provide a variable name to be used as an “internal” variable by an
iteration path, with the using
“prepositional phrase”.
The using
phrase is placed with the other phrases associated
with the path, and contains any number of keyword/variable-name pairs:
(loop for x being the array-elements of a using (index i) ...)
which says that the variable i
should be used to hold the index
of the array being stepped through. The particular keywords which may
be used are defined by the iteration path; the index
keyword is
recognized by all loop
sequence paths (section
loop-sequence-section). Note that any individual using
phrase applies to only one path; it is parsed along with the
“prepositional phrases”. It is an error if the path does not call for
a variable using that keyword.
By special dispensation, if a path is not recognized,
then the default-loop-path
path will be invoked upon a syntactic
transformation of the original input. Essentially, the loop
fragment
for var being frob
is taken as if it were
for var being default-loop-path in frob
and
for var being expr and its frob ...
is taken as if it were
for var being expr and its default-loop-path in frob
Thus, this “undefined path hook” only works if the
default-loop-path
path is defined. Obviously, the use of this
“hook” is competitive, since only one such hook may be in use, and the
potential for syntactic ambiguity exists if frob is the name of
a defined iteration path. This feature is not for casual use; it is
intended for use by large systems that wish to use a special
syntax for some feature they provide.
loop
comes with two pre-defined iteration path
functions; one implements a mapatoms
-like iteration path
facility and the other is used for defining iteration paths for
stepping through sequences.
The interned-symbols
iteration path is like a
mapatoms
for loop
.
(loop for sym being interned-symbols ...)
iterates over all of the symbols in the current package and its
superiors.
This is the same set
of symbols over which mapatoms
iterates, although not
necessarily in the same order. The particular package to look in may
be specified as in
(loop for sym being the interned-symbols in package ...)
which is like giving a second argument to mapatoms
.
You can restrict the iteration to the symbols directly present in
the specified package, excluding inherited symbols, using the
local-interned-symbols
path:
(loop for sym being the local-interned-symbols {in package} ...)
Example:
(defun my-apropos (sub-string &optional (pkg package)) (loop for x being the interned-symbols in pkg when (string-search sub-string x) when (or (boundp x) (fboundp x) (plist x)) do (print-interesting-info x)))
In the Zetalisp and NIL implementations of loop
, a package
specified with the in
preposition may be anything acceptable to
the pkg-find-package
function. The code generated by this path
will contain calls to internal loop
functions, with the effect
that it will be transparent to changes to the implementation of
packages. In the Maclisp implementation, the obarray must be an
array pointer, not a symbol with an array
property.
The hash-elements
path provides an effect like that of
the function maphash
. It can find all the occupied entries in a hash table.
(loop for value being the hash-elements of hash-table ...)
iterates over all the occupied entries in hash-table. Each time, value is the value stored in the entry. To examine the keys of the entries as well, write
(loop for value being the hash-elements of hash-table with-key keysym ...)
and then keysym
’s value each will be the hash key that corresponds to value.
One very common form of iteration is done over the elements
of some object that is accessible by means of an integer index.
loop
defines an iteration path function for doing this in a
general way and provides a simple interface to allow users to define
iteration paths for various kinds of “indexable” data.
path-name-or-names is either an atomic path name or list of path
names. fetch-fun is a function of two arguments, the sequence
and the index of the item to be fetched. (Indexing is assumed to be
zero-origined.) size-fun is a function of one argument, the
sequence; it should return the number of elements in the sequence.
sequence-type is the name of the data-type of the sequence, and
default-var-type the name of the data-type of the elements of
the sequence. These are applicable to use of loop
in other
Lisp systems; on the Lisp Machine they might as well be omitted.
The Zetalisp implementation of loop
utilizes the
Zetalisp array manipulation primitives to define both
array-element
and array-elements
as iteration paths:
(define-loop-sequence-path (array-element array-elements)
aref array-active-length)
Then, the loop
clause
for var being the array-elements of array
will step var over the elements of array, starting from
element 0. The sequence path function also accepts in
as a
synonym for of
.
The range and stepping of the iteration may be specified with
the use of all of the same keywords which are accepted by the loop
arithmetic stepper (for var from ...
); they are
by
, to
, downto
, from
, downfrom
,
below
, and above
, and are interpreted in the same manner.
Thus,
(loop for var being the array-elements of array from 1 by 2 ...)
steps var over all of the odd elements of array, and
(loop for var being the array-elements of array downto 0 ...)
steps in reverse order.
(define-loop-sequence-path (vector-elements vector-element) vref vector-length notype notype)
is how the vector-elements
iteration path can be defined in NIL
(which it is). One can then do such things as
(defun cons-a-lot (item &restv other-items) (and other-items (loop for x being the vector-elements of other-items collect (cons item x))))
All such sequence iteration paths allow one to specify the
variable to be used as the index variable, by use of the index
keyword with the using
prepositional phrase, as described (with
an example) on loop-using-crock.
This section and the next may not be of interest to those
not interested in defining their own iteration paths.
In addition to the code which defines the iteration (section
loop-iteration-framework-section), a loop
iteration clause (e.g
a for
or as
clause) produces variables to be bound and
pre-iteration (prologue) code. This breakdown allows a
user-interface to loop
which does not have to depend on or know
about the internals of loop
. To complete this separation, the
iteration path mechanism parses the clause before giving it to the user
function that will return those items. A function to generate code for
a path may be declared to loop
with the define-loop-path
function:
This defines path-function to be the handler for the path(s) path-or-names, which may be either a symbol or a list of symbols. Such a handler should follow the conventions described below. The datum-i are optional; they are passed in to path-function as a list.
The handler will be called with the following arguments:
The name of the path that caused the path function to be invoked.
The “iteration variable”.
The data type supplied with the iteration variable, or nil
if
none was supplied. This is a facility of the loop
intended for
other Lisp systems in which declaring the type of a variable produces
more efficient code. It is not documented in this manual since it is
never useful on the Lisp Machine.
This is a list with entries of the form (preposition
expression), in the order in which they were collected. This may
also include some supplied implicitly (e.g an of
phrase when
the iteration is inclusive, and an in
phrase for the
default-loop-path
path); the ordering will show the order of
evaluation that should be followed for the expressions.
This is t
if variable should have the starting point of
the path as its value on the first iteration (by virtue of being
specified with syntax like for var being expr and its
path
), nil
otherwise. When t
, expr
will appear in prepositional-phrases with the of
preposition; for example, for x being foo and its cdrs
gets
prepositional-phrases of ((of foo))
.
This is the list of allowable prepositions declared for the path that caused the path function to be invoked. It and data (immediately below) may be used by the path function such that a single function may handle similar paths.
This is the list of “data” declared for the path that caused the path function to be invoked. It may, for instance, contain a canonicalized path, or a set of functions or flags to aid the path function in determining what to do. In this way, the same path function may be able to handle different paths.
The handler should return a list of either six or ten elements:
This is a list of variables that need to be bound. The entries in it
may be of the form variable or (variable expression).
Note that it is
the responsibility of the handler to make sure the iteration variable
gets bound. All of these variables will be bound in parallel;
if initialization of one depends on others, it should be done with a
setq
in the prologue-forms. Returning only the variable
without any initialization expression is not allowed if the variable
is a destructuring pattern.
This is a list of forms that should be included in the loop
prologue.
These are the four items described in section loop-iteration-framework-section, loop-iteration-framework-page: pre-step-endtest, steps, post-step-endtest, and pseudo-steps.
If these four items are given, they apply to the first iteration, and the previous four apply to all succeeding iterations; otherwise, the previous four apply to all iterations.
Here are the routines that are used by loop
to compare
keywords for equality. In all cases, a token may be any Lisp
object, but a keyword is expected to be an atomic symbol. In
certain implementations these functions may be implemented as macros.
This is the loop
token comparison function. token is any Lisp
object; keyword is the keyword it is to be compared
against. It returns t
if they represent the same token,
comparing in a manner appropriate for the implementation.
The member
variant of si:loop-tequal
.
The assoc
variant of si:loop-tequal
.
If an iteration path function desires to make an internal
variable accessible to the user, it should call the following function
instead of gensym
:
This should only be called from within an iteration path function. If
keyword has been specified in a using
phrase for this
path, the corresponding variable is returned; otherwise, gensym
is called and that new symbol returned. Within a given path function,
this routine should only be called once for any given keyword.
If the user specifies a using
preposition containing any keywords
for which the path function does not call si:loop-named-variable
,
loop
will inform the user of his error.
Here is an example function that defines the
string-characters
iteration path. This path steps a variable
through all of the characters of a string. It accepts the format
(loop for var being the string-characters of str ...)
The function is defined to handle the path by
(define-loop-path string-characters string-chars-path (of))
Here is the function:
(defun string-chars-path (path-name variable data-type prep-phrases inclusive? allowed-prepositions data &aux (bindings nil) (prologue nil) (string-var (gensym)) (index-var (gensym)) (size-var (gensym))) allowed-prepositions data ; unused variables data-type ; To iterate over the characters of a string, we need ; to save the string, save the size of the string, ; step an index variable through that range, setting ; the user’s variable to the character at that index. ; We support exactly one “preposition”, which is required, ; so this check suffices: (cond ((null prep-phrases) (ferror nil "OF missing in ~S iteration path of ~S" path-name variable))) ; We do not support “inclusive” iteration: (cond ((not (null inclusive?)) (ferror nil "Inclusive stepping not supported in ~S path ~ of ~S (prep phrases = ~:S)" path-name variable prep-phrases))) ; Set up the bindings (setq bindings (list (list variable nil) (list string-var (cadar prep-phrases)) (list index-var 0) (list size-var 0))) ; Now set the size variable (setq prologue (list `(setq ,size-var (string-length ,string-var)))) ; and return the appropriate stuff, explained below. (list bindings prologue `(= ,index-var ,size-var) nil nil (list variable `(aref ,string-var ,index-var) index-var `(1+ ,index-var))))
The first element of the returned list is the bindings. The
second is a list of forms to be placed in the prologue. The
remaining elements specify how the iteration is to be performed. This
example is a particularly simple case, for two reasons: the actual
“variable of iteration”, index-var
, is purely internal
(being gensym
med), and the stepping of it (1+
) is such
that it may be performed safely without an endtest. Thus
index-var
may be stepped immediately after the setting of the
user’s variable, causing the iteration specification for the first
iteration to be identical to the iteration specification for all
remaining iterations. This is advantageous from the standpoint of the
optimizations loop
is able to perform, although it is frequently
not possible due to the semantics of the iteration (e.g, for
var first expr1 then expr2
) or to subtleties of
the stepping. It is safe for this path to step the user’s variable in
the pseudo-steps (the fourth item of an iteration specification)
rather than the “real” steps (the second), because the step value can
have no dependencies on any other (user) iteration variables. Using
the pseudo-steps generally results in some efficiency gains.
If one desired the index variable in the above definition to
be user-accessible through the using
phrase feature with the
index
keyword, the function would need to be changed in two
ways. First, index-var
should be bound to
(si:loop-named-variable 'index)
instead of (gensym)
.
Secondly, the efficiency hack of stepping the index variable ahead of
the iteration variable must not be done. This is effected by changing
the last form to be
(list bindings prologue nil (list index-var `(1+ ,index-var)) `(= ,index-var ,size-var) (list variable `(aref ,string-var ,index-var)) nil nil `(= ,index-var ,size-var) (list variable `(aref ,string-var ,index-var)))
Note that although the second `(= ,index-var ,size-var)
could
have been placed earlier (where the second nil
is), it is best
for it to match up with the equivalent test in the first iteration
specification grouping.
defstruct
provides a facility in Lisp for creating and
using aggregate datatypes with named elements. These are like
structures in PL/I, or records in Pascal. In the last two chapters we
saw how to use macros to extend the control structures of Lisp; here we
see how they can be used to extend Lisp’s data structures as well.
To explain the basic idea, assume you were writing a Lisp program that dealt with space ships. In your program, you want to represent a space ship by a Lisp object of some kind. The interesting things about a space ship, as far as your program is concerned, are its position (x and y), velocity (x and y), and mass. How do you represent a space ship?
Well, the representation could be a list of the x-position,
y position, and so on. Equally well it could be an array of five
elements, the zeroth being the x position, the first being the
y position, and so on. The problem with both of these representations
is that the “elements” (such as x position) occupy places in the object
which are quite arbitrary, and hard to remember (Hmm, was the mass the
third or the fourth element of the array?). This would make programs
harder to write and read. It would not be obvious when reading
a program that an expression such as (cadddr ship1)
or (aref ship2 3)
means “the y component of the ship’s velocity”, and it would be very easy
to write caddr
in place of cadddr
.
What we would like to see are names, easy to remember and to understand.
If the symbol foo
were bound to a representation of a space ship, then
(ship-x-position foo)
could return its x position, and
(ship-y-position foo)
its y position, and so forth. The defstruct
facility does just this.
defstruct
itself is a macro which defines a structure. For the
space ship example above, we might define the structure by saying:
(defstruct (ship) "Represents a space ship." ship-x-position ship-y-position ship-x-velocity ship-y-velocity ship-mass)
This says that every ship
is an object with five named components.
(This is a very simple case of defstruct
; we will see the general form
later.) The evaluation of this form does several things. First, it
defines ship-x-position
to be a function which, given a ship, returns
the x component of its position. This is called an accessor function,
because it accesses a component of a structure.
defstruct
defines the other four accessor functions analogously.
defstruct
also defines make-ship
to be a macro or function
(you can specify which one) that can create a ship
object. So (setq s
(make-ship))
makes a new ship, and sets s
to it. This is
called the constructor, because it constructs a new structure.
We also want to be able to change the contents of a structure. To do this,
we use the setf
macro (see setf-fun), as follows (for example):
(setf (ship-x-position s) 100)
Here s
is bound to a ship, and after the evaluation of the setf
form, the ship-x-position
of that ship is 100. Another way
to change the contents of a structure is to use the alterant macro,
which is described later, in using-defstruct-alterant.
How does all this map into the familiar primitives of Lisp? In this simple
example, we left the choice of implementation technique up to
defstruct
; by default, it chooses to represent a ship as an array. The array has
five elements, which are the five components of the ship. The accessor
functions are defined thus:
(defun ship-x-position (ship) (aref ship 0))
The constructor form (make-ship)
performs (make-array 5)
, which
makes an array of the appropriate size to be a ship. Note that a program which
uses ships need not contain any explicit knowledge that ships are represented
as five-element arrays; this is kept hidden by defstruct
.
The accessor functions are not actually ordinary functions; instead they
are substs (see subst). This difference has two implications: it allows
setf
to understand the accessor functions, and it allows the compiler to
substitute the body of an accessor function directly into any function that uses it,
making compiled programs that use defstruct
exactly equal in efficiency to
programs that “do it by hand”. Thus writing (ship-mass s)
is exactly
equivalent to writing (aref s 4)
, and writing (setf (ship-mass s) m)
is exactly equivalent to writing (setf (aref s 4) m)
, when the program is compiled.
It is also possible to tell defstruct
to implement the accessor
functions as macros; this is not normally done in Zetalisp, however.
We can now use the describe-defstruct
function to look at the
ship
object, and see what its contents are:
(describe-defstruct x 'ship) => #<art-q-5 17073131> is a ship ship-x-position: 100 ship-y-position: nil ship-x-velocity: nil ship-y-velocity: nil ship-mass: nil #<art-q-5 17073131>
(The describe-defstruct
function is explained more fully on
describe-defstruct-fun.)
By itself, this simple example provides a powerful structure
definition tool. But, in fact, defstruct
has many other features. First
of all, we might want to specify what kind of Lisp object to use for the
“implementation” of the structure. The example above implemented a ship
as an array, but defstruct
can also implement structures as array-leaders,
lists, and other things. (For array-leaders, the accessor functions call
array-leader
, for lists, nth
, and so on.)
Most structures are implemented as arrays. Lists take slightly less storage, but elements near the end of a long list are slower to access. Array leaders allow you to have a homogeneous aggregate (the array) and a heterogeneous aggregate with named elements (the leader) tied together into one object. Packages are this sort of an object, and so are the strings which Zmacs uses for storing lines of text.
The constructor function or macro allows you to specify values
for slots in the new structure. defstruct
allows you to specify
default initial values for slots; whenever a structure is constructed
and no value is specified for a slot, the slot’s default initial value
is stored in it.
The defstruct
in Zetalisp also works in various
dialects of Maclisp, and so it has some features that are not useful in
Zetalisp. When possible, the Maclisp-specific features attempt
to do something reasonable or harmless in Zetalisp, to make it
easier to write code that will run equally well in Zetalisp and
Maclisp. (Note that this defstruct
is not necessarily the one installed in Maclisp!)
Note that there is another version of defstruct
used in Common Lisp
programs, which is slightly incompatible. See cli-defstruct.
A call to defstruct
looks like:
(defstruct (name options...
) [doc-string] slot-description-1 slot-description-2...
)
name must be a symbol; it is the name of the structure. It is given a
si:defstruct-description
property that describes the attributes and elements of the
structure; this is intended to be used by programs that examine Lisp
programs and that want to display the contents of structures in a helpful
way. name is used for other things, described below.
Each option may be either a symbol, which should be one of the recognized option names listed in the next section, or a list, whose car should be one of the option names and the rest of which should be arguments to the option. Some options have arguments that default; others require that arguments be given explicitly.
doc-string is a string which is recorded as the documentation of
name as a structure. It can be accessed via (documentation
'name 'structure)
. It is not required.
Each slot-description may be in any of three forms:
(1) slot-name (2) (slot-name [default-init slot-options...
]) (3) ((slot-name-1 byte-spec-1 [default-init-1 slot-options...
]) (slot-name-2 byte-spec-2 [default-init-2 slot-options...
])...
)
Each slot-description allocates one element of the physical structure, even though in form (3) several slots are defined.
Each slot-name must always be a symbol; an accessor function is defined for each slot.
In form (1), slot-name simply defines a slot with the given name. An
accessor function is defined with the name slot-name (but see the
:conc-name
option, defstruct-conc-name-option). Form (2) is
similar, but allows a default initialization for the slot. Initialization
is explained further on defstruct-initialization. Form (3) lets you pack
several slots into a single element of the physical underlying structure, using
the byte field feature of defstruct
, which is explained on
defstruct-byte-field.
Forms (2) and (3) allow slot-options which are alternating keywords and values (unevaluated). These slot option keywords are defined:
:read-only flag
¶If flag is non-nil
, this specifies that this slot should not be changed in
an existing structure. setf
will not be allowed on the slot’s
accessor.
:type type-spec
¶Declares that the contents of this slot must be of type type-spec.
The Lisp machine compiler does not use this information,
but sometimes it enables defstruct
to deduce that it
can pack the structure into less space by using a specialized array type.
:documentation documentation-string
¶Makes documentation-string the documentation for the slot’s accessor
function. It also goes in the si:defstruct-slot-description-documentation
for this slot in the defstruct-description
structure.
Here is an eggsample of using slot options:
(defstruct (eggsample :named :conc-name) (yolk 'a :documentation "First thing you need in an eggsample.") (grade 3) (albumen nil :read-only t)) (documentation 'eggsample-yolk 'function) => "First thing you need in an eggsample." (setf (eggsample-albumen (make-eggsample)) 'eggsistential) >>ERROR: SETF is forbidden on EGGSAMPLE-ALBUMEN. While in the function ...
Because evaluation of a defstruct
form causes many functions and macros
to be defined, you must take care not to define the same name with two
different defstruct
forms. A name can only have one function
definition at a time; if it is redefined, the latest definition is the one
that takes effect, and the earlier definition is clobbered. (This is no
different from the requirement that each defun
which is intended to
define a distinct function must have a distinct name.)
To systematize this necessary carefulness, as well as for
clarity in the code, it is conventional to prefix the names of all of the
accessor functions with some text unique to the structure. In the example
above, all the names started with ship-
. The :conc-name
option can be used to provide such prefixes automatically (see defstruct-conc-name-option).
Similarly, the conventional name for the constructor in the example
above was make-ship
, and the conventional name for the alterant macro
(see using-defstruct-alterant) was alter-ship
.
The describe-defstruct
function lets you examine an instance of
a structure.
describe-defstruct
takes an instance of a structure, and prints
out a description of the instance, including the contents of each of its
slots. name should be the name of the structure; you must provide
the name of the structure so that describe-defstruct
can know what
structure instance is an instance of, and therefore figure out what
the names of the slots of instance are.
If instance is a named structure, you don’t have to provide name,
since it is just the named structure symbol of instance.
Normally the describe
function (see describe-fun) calls
describe-defstruct
if it is asked to describe a named structure;
however some named structures have their own idea of how to describe themselves.
See named-structure for more information about named structures.
This section explains each of the options that can be given to defstruct
.
Here is an example that shows the typical syntax of a call to defstruct
that gives several options.
(defstruct (foo (:type (:array (mod 256))) (:make-array (:leader-length 3)) :conc-name (:size-macro foo)) a b)
:type
¶The :type
option specifies what kind of Lisp object to use
to implement the structure. It must be given one argument, which must
be one of the symbols enumerated below, or a user-defined type.
If the option itself is not
provided, the type defaults to :array
in traditional programs,
or :vector
in Common Lisp programs. You can define your
own types; this is explained in defining-your-own-defstruct-types.
:list
¶Uses a list.
:named-list
¶Like :list
, but the first element of the list holds the
symbol that is the name of the structure and so is not used
as a component.
:array
¶:typed-array
:vector
These are all synonymous. They use an array, storing components in the body of the array.
:named-array
¶Like :array
, but makes the array a named structure (see
named-structure) using the name of the structure as the named
structure symbol. Element 0 of the array holds the named
structure symbol and so is not used to hold a component of the
structure.
:named-typed-array
¶:named-vector
These two synonyms are
like :named-array
but the array always has a leader and the
named structure symbol is stored there. As a result, it is
possible to use the :subtype
option to specify a restricted
array type, such as art-8b
.
:phony-named-vector
¶This is what you get in Common Lisp if you say
(:type :vector)
and :named
.
:array-leader
¶Use an array, storing components in the leader of the array.
(See the :make-array
option, described below.)
:named-array-leader
¶Like :array-leader
, but makes the array a named structure (see
named-structure) using the name of the structure as the named
structure symbol. Element 1 of the leader holds the named
structure symbol and so is not used to hold a component of the
structure.
:fixnum-array
¶Like :array
, but the type of the array is art-32b
.
:flonum-array
¶Like :array
, but the type of the array is art-float
.
:named-fixnum-array
¶:named-flonum-array
Like :fixnum-array
or :flonum-array
but also a named structure, with a leader
to hold the named structure symbol.
:tree
¶The structure is implemented out of a binary tree of conses, with the leaves serving as the slots.
:fixnum
¶This unusual type implements the structure as a single fixnum. The structure may only have one slot. This is only useful with the byte field feature (see defstruct-byte-field); it lets you store a bunch of small numbers within fields of a fixnum, giving the fields names.
:grouped-array
¶This is described in grouped-array.
The argument of :type
may also have the form
(type subtype)
. This is equivalent to
specifying type for the :type
option and subtype
for the :subtype
option. For example, (:type (:array (mod 16.)))
specifies an array of four-bit bytes.
:subtype
For structures which are arrays, :subtype
permits the array type
to be specified. It requires an argument, which must be either
an array type name such as art-4b
or a type specifier restricting the elements
of the array. In other words, it should be a suitable value for either
the type or the element-type argument to make-array
.
If no :subtype
option is specified but a :type
slot option is
given for every slot, defstruct
may deduce a subtype automatically
to make the structure more compact.
See type-specifiers for more information on type specifiers.
:constructor
¶Specifies how to make a constructor for the structure. In the simplest
use, there is one argument, which specifies the name to give to the
standard keyword-argument constructor. If the argument is not provided
or if the option itself is not provided, the name of the constructor is
made by concatenating the string "make-"
to the name of the
structure. If the argument is provided and is nil
, no constructor
is defined. More complicated usage is explained in
using-defstruct-constructor.
:alterant
¶Takes one argument, which specifies the name of the alterant
macro. If the argument is not provided, the name of the alterant is
made by concatenating the string "alter-"
to the name of the
structure. If the argument is provided and is nil
, no alterant is
defined. Use of the alterant macro is explained in
using-defstruct-alterant.
In Common Lisp programs, the default for :alterant
is nil
;
no alterant is defined. In traditional programs, the default is alter-name
.
:predicate defstruct
Causes defstruct
to generate a predicate
to recognize instances of the structure. Naturally it only works for
“named” types. The argument to the :predicate
option is the name of
the predicate. If the option is present without an argument, then the
name is formed by concatenating ‘-p
’ to the end of the name symbol
of the structure. If the option is not present, then no predicate is
generated. Example:
(defstruct (foo :named :predicate) a b)
defines a single argument function, foo-p
, that is true only of
instances of this structure.
The defaulting of the :predicate
option is different (and complicated)
in Common Lisp programs. See cli-defstruct.
:copier defstruct
Causes defstruct
to generate a single argument function that can
copy instances of this structure. Its argument is the name of the copying
function. If the option is present without an argument, then the name is
formed by concatenating ‘copy-
’ with the name of the structure. Example:
(defstruct (foo (:type :list) :copier) foo-a foo-b)
Generates a function approximately like:
(defun copy-foo (x) (list (car x) (cadr x)))
:default-pointer
¶Normally, the accessors defined by defstruct
expect to
be given exactly one argument. However, if the :default-pointer
argument is used, the argument to each accessor is optional. If
the accessor is used with no argument, it evaluates the default-pointer
form to find a structure and accesses the appropriate component of
that structure. Here is an example:
(defstruct (room (:default-pointer *default-room*)) room-name room-contents) (room-name x) ==> (aref x 0) (room-name) ==> (aref *default-room* 0)
If the argument to the :default-pointer
argument is not given, it
defaults to the name of the structure.
:conc-name
¶It is conventional to begin the names of all the accessor functions of
a structure with a specific prefix, usually
the name of the structure followed by a hyphen. The :conc-name
option allows you to specify this prefix and have it concatenated
onto the front of all the slot names to make the names of the accessor
functions. The argument should be a string to be used as the prefix,
or a symbol whose pname is to be used.
If :conc-name
is specified without an argument, the prefix is the
name of the structure followed by a hyphen. If the argument is nil
or ""
,
the names of the accessors are the same as the slot names,
and it is up to you to name the slots according to some suitable convention.
In Common Lisp programs, the default for :conc-name
, when this
option is not specified, is the structure name followed by a hyphen.
For traditional programs, the default is nil
.
The keywords recognized by the constructor and alterant are the slot
names, not the accessor names, transfered into the keyword package. It
is important to keep this in mind when using :conc-name
, since it
causes the slot and accessor names to be different. Here is an example:
(defstruct (door :conc-name) knob-color width) (setq d (make-door :knob-color 'red :width 5.0)) (door-knob-color d) ==> red
:include
¶Builds a new structure definition as an extension of an old
structure definition. Suppose you have a structure called person
that
looks like this:
(defstruct (person :named :conc-name) name age sex)
Now suppose you want to make a new structure to represent an astronaut.
Since astronauts are people too, you would like them to also have the
attributes of name, age, and sex, and you would like Lisp functions
that operate on person
structures to operate just as well on
astronaut
structures. You can do this by defining astronaut
with the :include
option, as follows:
(defstruct (astronaut :named (:include person) :conc-name) helmet-size (favorite-beverage 'tang))
The argument to the :include
option is required, and must be the
name of some previously defined structure of the same type as this
structure. :include
does not work with structures of type
:tree
or of type :grouped-array
.
The :include
option inserts the slots of the included structure at
the front of the list of slots for this structure. That is, an
astronaut
has five slots; first the three defined in person
, and
then after those the two defined in astronaut
itself. The accessor
functions defined by the person
structure, such as person-name
, can be used also on
astronaut
’s. New accessor functions are generated for these slots
in the astronaut
structure as if they were defined afresh;
their names start with astronaut-
instead of person-
.
In fact, the functions person-age
and astronaut-age
receive
identical definitions.
Since the structures are named structures, recognizable by typep
,
subtypep
considers astronaut
a subtype of person
,
and typep
considers any astronaut
to be of type person
.
The following examples illustrate how you can
construct and use astronaut
structures:
(setq x (make-astronaut :name 'buzz :age 45. :sex t :helmet-size 17.5)) (person-name x) => buzz (astronaut-name x) => buzz (astronaut-favorite-beverage x) => tang (typep x 'astronaut) => t (typep x 'person) => t
Note that the :conc-name
option was not inherited from the
included structure; it is present for :astronaut
only because it was
specified explicitly in the definition. Similarly, the
:default-pointer
and :but-first
options are not inherited from
the :include
’d structure.
The following is an advanced feature. Sometimes, when one structure
includes another, the default values or slot options for the slots that
came from the included structure are not what you want. The new
structure can specify new default values or slot options for the
included slots by giving the :include
option as:
(:include name new-descriptor-1 ...
new-descriptor-n)
Each new-slot-descriptor is just like the slot descriptors used for
defining new slots, except that byte fields are not allowed. The
default initialization specified in new-slot-descriptor, or the
absence of one, overrides what was specified in the included structure
type (person
). Any slot option values specified in new-slot-descriptor
also override the values given in the included structure’s definition.
Any inherited slots for which no new-slot-descriptor is given,
and any slot options not explicitly overridden, are inherited.
For example, if we had wanted to define astronaut
so that the
default age for an astronaut is 45.
, and provide
documentation for its accessor, then we could have said:
(defstruct (astronaut :conc-name (:include person (age 45. :documentation "The ASTRONAUT's age in years."))) helmet-size (favorite-beverage 'tang))
If the :read-only
option is specified as nil
when t
would have been inherited, an error is signaled.
:named
¶This means that you want to use one of the “named” types. If you
specify a type of :array
, :array-leader
, or :list
, and give
the :named
option, then the :named-array
,
:named-array-leader
, or :named-list
type is used instead.
Asking for type :array
and giving the :named
option as well
is the same as asking for the type :named-array
; the only difference
is stylistic.
The :named
option works quite differently in Common Lisp programs;
see cli-defstruct.
:make-array
¶If the structure being defined is implemented as an array, this option
may be used to control those aspects of the array that are not otherwise constrained by
defstruct
. For example, you might want to control the area in which
the array is allocated. Also, if you are creating a structure of type
:array-leader
, you almost certainly want to specify the dimensions
of the array to be created, and you may want to specify the type of the
array.
The argument to the :make-array
option should be a list of alternating
keyword symbols for the make-array
function (see make-array-fun),
and forms whose values are the arguments to those keywords. For example,
(:make-array (:area 'permanent-storage-area))
would request that the array
be allocated in a particular area. Note that the keyword symbol is not evaluated.
defstruct
overrides any of the :make-array
options that it needs
to. For example, if your structure is of type :array
, then
defstruct
supplies the size of that array regardless of what you
say in the :make-array
option. If you use the :initial-element
make-array
option, it initializes all the slots, but
defstruct
’s own initializations are done afterward. If a subtype
has been specified to or deduced by defstruct
, it overrides
any :type
keyword in the :make-array
argument.
Constructors for structures implemented as arrays recognize the keyword
argument :make-array
. Attributes supplied therein overide any
:make-array
option attributes supplied in the original defstruct
form. If some attribute appears in neither the invocation of the
constructor nor in the :make-array
option to defstruct
, then the
constructor chooses appropriate defaults. The :make-array
option
may only be used with the default style of
constructor that takes keyword arguments.
If a structure is of type :array-leader
, you probably want to
specify the dimensions of the array. The dimensions of an array are
given to :make-array
as a position argument rather than a keyword
argument, so there is no way to specify them in the above syntax. To
solve this problem, you can use the keyword :dimensions
or the
keyword :length
(they mean the same thing), with a value that is
anything acceptable as make-array
’s first argument.
:times
¶Used for structures of type :grouped-array
to control
the number of repetitions of the structure to be allocated by the
constructor. (See grouped-array.) The constructor also accepts a
keyword argument :times
to override the value given in the
defstruct
. If :times
appears in neither the invocation of the
constructor nor as a defstruct
option, the constructor allocates
only one instance of the structure.
:size-macro
¶Defines a special macro to expand into the size of this structure. The
exact meaning of the size varies, but in general this number is the one
you would need to know if you were going to allocate one of these
structures yourself (for example, the length of the array or list). The
argument of the :size-macro
option is the name to be used for the
macro. If this option is present without an argument, then the name of
the structure is concatenated with ‘-size
’ to produce the macro
name.
Example:
(defstruct (foo :conc-name :size-macro) a b) (macroexpand '(foo-size)) => 2
:size-symbol
¶Like :size-macro
but defines a global variable rather than a macro.
The size of the structure is the variable’s value. Use of :size-macro
is considered cleaner.
:initial-offset
¶This allows you to tell defstruct
to skip over a certain
number of slots before it starts allocating the slots described in the
body. This option requires an argument (which must be a fixnum), which
is the number of slots you want defstruct
to skip. To make use of
this option requires that you have some familiarity with how defstruct
is implementing your structure; otherwise, you will be unable to make
use of the slots that defstruct
has left unused.
:but-first
¶This option is best explained by example:
(defstruct (head (:type :list) (:default-pointer person) (:but-first person-head)) nose mouth eyes)
The accessors expand like this:
(nose x) ==> (car (person-head x)) (nose) ==> (car (person-head person))
The idea is that :but-first
’s argument is an accessor from some
other structure, and it is never expected that this structure will be
found outside of that slot of that other structure. Actually, you can
use any one-argument function, or a macro that acts like a one-argument
function. It is an error for
the :but-first
option to be used without an argument.
:callable-accessors defstruct
Controls whether accessors are really functions,
and therefore “callable”, or whether they are really macros. With
an argument of t
, or with no argument, or if the option is not
provided, then the accessors are really functions. Specifically,
they are substs, so that they have all the efficiency of macros
in compiled programs, while still being function objects that
can be manipulated (passed to mapcar
, etc.). If
the argument is nil
then the accessors are really macros.
:callable-constructors defstruct
Controls whether constructors are really functions,
and therefore “callable”, or macros. An argument of t
makes them functions; nil
makes them macros.
The default is t
in Common Lisp programs, nil
in
traditional programs. See using-defstruct-constructor for more information.
:property defstruct
For each structure defined by defstruct, a property list is maintained for the recording of arbitrary properties about that structure. (That is, there is one property list per structure definition, not one for each instantiation of the structure.)
The :property
option can be used to give a defstruct
an
arbitrary property. (:property property-name value)
gives the
defstruct
a property-name property of value. Neither
argument is evaluated. To access the property list, the user must
look inside the defstruct-description
structure himself (see
defstruct-description).
:print defstruct
Controls the printed representation of his structure in a way independent of the Lisp dialect in use. Here is an example:
(defstruct (foo :named (:print "#<Foo ~S ~S>" (foo-a foo) (foo-b foo))) foo-a foo-b)
Of course, this only works if you use some named type, so that the system can recognize examples of this structure automatically.
The arguments to the :print
option are arguments to the format
function (except for the stream of course!). They are evaluated in an
environment where the name symbol of the structure (foo
in this
case) is bound to the instance of the structure to be printed.
This works by generating a defselect
that creates a named structure
handler. Do not use the :print
option if you define a named
structure handler yourself, as they will conflict.
:print-function
is the Common Lisp version of the :print
option. Its argument is a function
to print a structure of this type, and it is called with three arguments:
the structure to be printed, the stream to print it on, and the current printing depth
(which should be compared with *print-level*
to decide when to cut off
recursion and print ‘#
’).
The function is expected to observe the values of the various printer-control variables
such as *print-escape*
(see *print-escape*-var). Example:
(defstruct (bar :named :conc-name
(:print-function
(lambda (struct stream depth)
depth ; unused
(sys:printing-random-object
(struct stream :type)
(format stream "with zap ~S"
(bar-zap struct))))))
"The famous BAR structure."
(zap 'yow)
random-slot)
(make-bar) => #<BAR with zap YOW>
type
In addition to the options listed above, any currently defined type
(any legal argument to the :type
option) can be used as an option.
This is mostly for compatibility with the old version of defstruct
.
It allows you to say just type instead of (:type type)
. It
is an error to give an argument to one of these options.
other
Finally, if an option isn’t found among those listed above,
it should be a valid defstruct-keyword for the type
of structure being defined, and the option should be of the form
(option-name value)
. If so, the option is treated
just like (:property option-name value)
.
That is, the defstruct
is given an option-name property of value.
This provides a primitive way for you to define your own options to
defstruct
, particularly in connection with user-defined types (see
defining-your-own-defstruct-types). Several of the options listed above
are actually implemented using this mechanism. They include
:times
, :subtype
and :make-array
.
The valid defstruct-keywords of a type are in a list in the
defstruct-keywords
slot of the
defstruct-type-description
structure for type.
After you have defined a new structure with defstruct
, you can
create instances of this structure using the constructor, and
you can alter the values of its slots using the alterant macro. By
default, traditional defstruct
defines both the constructor and the alterant,
forming their names by concatenating ‘make-
’ and ‘alter-
’,
respectively, onto the name of the structure. The defstruct
for Common Lisp
programs defines no alterant by default. You can specify the names
yourself by passing the name you want to use as the argument to the
:constructor
or :alterant
options, or specify that you don’t
want the macro created at all by passing nil
as the argument.
A call to a constructor, in general, has the form
(name-of-constructor keyword-1 value-1 keyword-2 value-2 ...
)
Each keyword is a keyword (a symbol in the keyword
package)
whose name matches one of the slots of the structure,
or one of a few specially recognized keywords.
The name of the constructor is specified by the :constructor
option,
which can also specify a documentation string for it:
(:constructor name-of-constructor [doc-string])
If a keyword matches the name of a slot (not the name of an
accessor), then the corresponding value is used to initialize that
slot of the new structure. Any slots whose values are not specified in
this way are initialized to the values of the default initial value forms
specified in the defstruct
. If no default initial value was specified
either for a slot, that slot’s initial value is undefined.
You should always specify the initialization, either in the defstruct
or in the constructor invocation, if you care about the initial value of the slot.
Constructors may be macros or functions. They are functions
if the :callable-constructors
option to defstruct
is non-nil
. By default, they are functions in Common Lisp programs
and macros in traditional programs.
Constructor macros allow the slot name (in its own package) to be
used instead of a keyword. Constructor functions do not, as they
are ordinary functions defined using &key
. Old code using slot
names not in the keyword package should be converted.
The default initial value forms are evaluated (if needed) each
time a structure is constructed, so that if (gensym)
is used as a
default initial value form then a new symbol is generated for each
structure. The order of evaluation of the default initial value forms
is unpredictable. When the constructor is a macro, the order of
evaluation of the keyword argument forms it is given is also
unpredictable.
The two special keyword arguments recognized by constructors are :make-array
and :times
. :make-array
should be used only for structures
which are represented as arrays, and :times
only for :grouped-array
structures. If one of these arguments is given, then it overrides the :make-array
option or the :times
option (see defstruct-make-array-option)
specified in the defstruct
. For example:
For example,
(make-ship :ship-x-position 10.0 :ship-y-position 12.0 :make-array '(:leader-length 5 :area disaster-area))
User-defined types of structures can define their own special constructor keywords.
If the :constructor
option is given as
(:constructor name arglist [doc-string])
, then instead of making a keyword
driven constructor, defstruct
defines a positional constructor,
taking arguments whose meaning is determined by the argument’s position
rather than by a keyword.
The arglist is used to describe what arguments the constructor should accept.
In the simplest case something like
(:constructor make-foo (a b c))
defines make-foo
to be a three-argument
constructor macro whose arguments are used to initialize the
slots named a
, b
, and c
.
In addition, the keywords &optional
, &rest
, and &aux
are
recognized in the argument list. They work in the way you might expect,
but there are a few fine points worthy of explanation:
(:constructor make-foo (a &optional b (c 'sea) &rest d &aux e (f 'eff)) "Make a FOO, with positional arguments")
This defines make-foo
to be a constructor of one or more arguments.
The first argument is used to initialize the a
slot. The second
argument is used to initialize the b
slot. If there isn’t any
second argument, then the default value given in the body of the
defstruct
(if given) is used instead. The third argument is used to
initialize the c
slot. If there isn’t any third argument, then the
symbol sea
is used instead. Any arguments following the third
argument are collected into a list and used to initialize the d
slot. If there are three or fewer arguments, then nil
is placed in
the d
slot. The e
slot is not initialized; its initial
value is undefined, even if a default value was specified in its slot-description.
Finally, the f
slot is initialized to contain
the symbol eff
.
The actions taken in the b
and e
cases were carefully
chosen to allow the user to specify all possible behaviors. Note that
the aux “variables” can be used to override completely the default
initializations given in the body.
Since there is so much freedom in defining constructors this
way, it would be cruel to only allow the :constructor
option to be
given once. So, by special dispensation, you are allowed to give the
:constructor
option more than once, so that you can define several
different constructors, each with a different syntax. These
may include both keyword and positional constructors. If there are
multiple keyword constructors, they all behave the same, differing
only in the name. It is important
to have a keyword constructor
because otherwise the #S
reader
construct cannot work.
Note that positional constructors may be macros or functions,
just like keyword constructors, and based on the same criterion: they
are functions if the :callable-constructors
option to defstruct
is non-nil
. By default, they are functions in Common Lisp programs
and macros in traditional programs. If the positional constructor is a
macro, then the actual order of evaluation of its arguments is
unpredictable.
Also note that you cannot specify the :make-array
or :times
information in a positional constructor.
A call to the alterant macro, in general, has the form
(name-of-alterant-macro instance-form slot-name-1 form-1 slot-name-2 form-2 ...)
instance-form is evaluated and should return an instance of the structure. Each form is evaluated and the corresponding slot is changed to have the result as its new value. The slots are altered after all the forms are evaluated, so you can exchange the values of two slots, as follows:
(alter-ship enterprise :ship-x-position (ship-y-position enterprise) :ship-y-position (ship-x-position enterprise))
As with constructor macros, the order of evaluation of the forms is
undefined. Using the alterant macro can produce more efficient Lisp
than using consecutive setf
s when you are altering two byte fields
of the same object, or when you are using the :but-first
option.
The byte field feature of defstruct
allows you to specify that
several slots of your structure are bytes (see
byte-manipulation-functions) in an integer stored in one
element of the structure. For example, suppose we had the following
structure:
(defstruct (phone-book-entry (:type :list)) name address (area-code 617.) exchange line-number)
This works correctly but it wastes space. Area codes and
exchange numbers are always less than 1000, and so both can fit
into 10 bit fields when expressed as binary numbers. Since Lisp
Machine fixnums have (more than) 20 bits, both of these
values can be packed into a single fixnum. To tell defstruct
to do
so, you can change the structure definition to the following:
(defstruct (phone-book-entry (:type :list)) name address ((area-code (byte 10. 10.) 617.) (exchange (byte 10. 0))) line-number)
The expressions (byte ...)
calculate byte specifiers to be used
with the functions ldb
and dpb
. The accessors, constructor, and
alterant will now operate as follows:
(area-code pbe) ==> (ldb (byte 10. 10.) (caddr pbe)) (exchange pbe) ==> (ldb (byte 10. 0) (caddr pbe))
(make-phone-book-entry :name "Fred Derf" :address "259 Octal St." :exchange ex :line-number 7788.) ==> (list "Fred Derf" "259 Octal St." (dpb ex (byte 10. 0) 631808.) 7788.)
(alter-phone-book-entry pbe :area-code ac :exchange ex) ==> ((lambda (#:g0530) (setf (nth 2 #:g0530) (dpb ac (byte 10. 10.) (dpb ex (byte 10. 0) (nth 2 #:g0530))))) pbe)
(This is how the expression would print; this text would not read in
properly because a new uninterned symbol would be created by each use of
#:
.)
Note that the alterant macro is optimized to only read and write the
second element of the list once, even though you are altering two
different byte fields within it. This is more efficient than using two
setf
’s. Additional optimization by the alterant macro occurs if the
byte specifiers in the defstruct
slot descriptions are constants.
However, you don’t need to worry about the details of how the alterant
macro does its work.
If the byte specifier is nil
, then the accessor is
defined to be the usual kind that accesses the entire Lisp object,
thus returning all the byte field components as a fixnum. These slots
may have default initialization forms.
The byte specifier need not be a constant; a variable or, indeed, any Lisp form, is legal as a byte specifier. It is evaluated each time the slot is accessed. Of course, unless you are doing something very strange you will not want the byte specifier to change between accesses.
Constructors (both functions and macros) initialize words divided into byte fields as if they were deposited in in the following order:
1) Initializations for the entire word given in the defstruct form.
2) Initializations for the byte fields given in the defstruct form.
3) Initializations for the entire word given in the constructor invocation.
4) Initializations for the byte fields given in the constructor invocation.
Alterant macros work similarly: the modification for the entire Lisp object is done first, followed by modifications to specific byte fields. If any byte fields being initialized or altered overlap each other, the action of the constructor and alterant is unpredictable.
The grouped array feature allows you to store several instances
of a structure side-by-side within an array. This feature is somewhat
limited; it does not support the :include
and :named
options.
The accessor functions are defined to take an extra argument, which
should be an integer, and is the index into the array of where this
instance of the structure starts. This index should normally be a multiple
of the size of the structure, for things to make sense. Note that the
index is the first argument to the accessor function and the structure
is the second argument, the opposite of what you might expect. This
is because the structure is &optional
if the :default-pointer
option
is used.
Note that the “size” of the structure (for purposes of the
:size-symbol
and :size-macro
options) is the number of elements
in one instance of the structure; the actual length of the array is
the product of the size of the structure and the number of instances.
The number of instances to be created by the constructor is taken from
the :times
keyword of the constructor or the argument to the
:times
option to defstruct
.
The named structure feature provides a very simple form of
user-defined data type. (Flavors are another, more powerful, facility
for defining data types, but they are more expensive in simple cases. See
flavor.) A named structure is actually an array, containing
elements and optionally a leader. The difference between a named
structure and an ordinary array is that the named structure also contains
an explicit slot to hold its ostensible data type. This data type is a
symbol, any symbol the programmer cares to use. In traditional
programs, named structures are normally defined using defstruct
with
the :named
option. In Common Lisp programs, defstruct
defines a
named structure by default. Individual named structures are made with
the constructors defined by defstruct
.
The data type symbol of a named structure is also called the named structure symbol. It is stored in array element 0 if the structure has no leader. If there is a leader, the type symbol is stored in array leader element 1 (recall that element 0 is reserved for the fill pointer). If a numeric-type array is to be a named structure, it must have a leader, since a symbol cannot be an element of a numeric array.
Named structure are recognizable; that is, if you define a named
structure called foo
, you can always tell whether an object is a
foo
structure. No array created in the normal fashion, no matter
what components it has, will be mistaken for a genuine foo
.
Named structures can recognized by typep
. Specify foo
,
the named structure name, as the second argument, and the object to be
tested as the first argument. type-of
of an ordinary array returns
array
, but type-of
of a named structure returns the explicitly
recorded data type symbol.
(defstruct (foo :named) a b) (type-of (make-foo)) => foo (typep (make-foo) 'foo) => t
Named structures of other types which include foo
are also recognized
as foo
’s by typep
. For example, using the previously-given definitions
of person
and astronaut
, then
(typep (make-astronaut) 'person) => t
because the type person
was explicitly included by the defstruct
for astronaut
. Indirect includes count also:
(defstruct (mission-specialist :named
(:include astronaut))
...
)
(typep (make-mission-specialist) 'person) => t
(subtypep 'person 'mission-specialist) => t
It should be emphasized that the named structure is an array.
All the usual array functions, such as aref
and array-dimension
,
can be used on it. If it is one-dimensional (as is usually the case)
then the named structure is a vector and the generic sequence functions
can be used on it.
(typep (make-astronaut) 'array) => t (arrayp (make-astronaut)) => t (array-rank (make-astronaut)) => 1
Because named structure data types are recognizable, they can define generic
operations and say how to handle them. A few
such operations are defined by the system and are invoked automatically
from well-defined places. For example print
automatically invokes
the :print-self
operation if you give it a named structure. Thus,
each type of named structure can define how it should print. The standardly
defined named structure operations are listed below. You can also define
new named structure operations and invoke them by calling the named structure
as a function just as you would invoke a flavor instance.
Operations on a named structure are all handled by a single function,
which is found as the named-structure-invoke
property of the
structure type symbol. It is OK for a named structure type to have no
handler function. Then invocation of any operation on the named
structure returns nil
, and system routines such as print
take
default actions.
If a handler function exists, it is given these arguments:
The name of the operation being invoked; usually a keyword.
The named structure which is being operated on.
Any other arguments which were passed when the operation was invoked. The handler function should have a rest parameter so it can accept any number of arguments.
The handler function should return nil
if it does not recognize
the operation.
These are the named structure operations used by the system at present:
:which-operations
Should return a list of the names of the operations the function handles. Every handler function must handle this operation, and every opertation that the function handles should be included in this list.
:print-self
Should output the printed representation of the named structure to a stream.
The additional arguments are the stream to output to, the current
depth in list-structure, and the current value of *print-escape*
. If
:print-self
is not in the value returned by :which-operations
,
or if there is no handler function, print
uses #s
syntax.
:describe
Is invoked by describe
and should output a description of the
structure to *standard-output*
. If there is no handler function
or :describe
is not in its :which-operations
list,
describe
prints the names and values of the structure’s fields as
defined in the defstruct
.
:sxhash
Is invoked by sxhash
and should return a hash code to
use as the value of sxhash
for this structure. It is often useful
to call sxhash
on some (perhaps all) of the components of the
structure and combine the results in some way.
There is one additional argument to this operation: a flag saying
whether it is permissible to use the structure’s address in forming the
hash code. For some kinds of structure, there may be no way to generate
a good hash code except to use the address. If the flag is nil
,
they must simply do the best they can, even if it means always returning
zero.
It is permissible to return nil
for :sxhash
. Then sxhash
produces a hash code in its default fashion.
:fasd-fixup
Is invoked by fasload
on a named structure that has
been created from data in a QFASL file. The purpose of the operation
is to give the structure a chance to “clean itself up” if, in order to
be valid, it needs to have contents that are not exactly identical
to those that were dumped. For example, readtables push themselves onto
the list si:*all-readtables*
so that they can be found by name.
For most kinds of structures it is
acceptable not to define this operation at all (so that it returns nil
).
Example handler function:
(defun (:property person named-structure-invoke) (op self &rest args) (selectq op (:which-operations '(:print-self :describe)) (:describe (format (car args) "This is a ~D-year-old person" (person-age self))) (:print-self (if *print-escape* (si:printing-random-object (self (car args) :type) (princ (person-name self) (car args))) (princ (person-name self) (car args))))))
or
(defselect ((:property person named-structure-handler) ignore) (:print-self (self stream ignore &optional ignore) (if *print-escape* (si:printing-random-object (self stream :type) (princ (person-name self) stream)) (princ (person-name self) stream))) (:describe (self) (format *standard-output* "This is a ~D-year-old person" (person-age self))))
This handler causes a person structure to include its name in its printed
representation; it also causes princ
of a person to print just the
name, with no ‘#<
’ syntax. This simple example could have been
done even more simply with the :print-function
option.
It is often convenient to define a handler function with defselect
;
but you must be careful. defselect
by default defines the function
to signal an error if it is called with a first argument that is not
recognized. A handler function should return nil
and get no error.
To avoid the problem, specify ignore
as the default handler when you
write the defselect
. See defselect-fun.
Note that the handler function of a named structure type is not
inherited by other named structure types that include it. For
example, the above definition of a handler for person
has no
effect at all on the astronaut
structure. If you need such
inheritance, you must use flavors rather than named structures (see
flavor).
The following functions operate on named structures.
This semi-predicate returns nil
if x is not a named structure; otherwise
it returns x’s named structure symbol.
Marks array as a named structure and returns it.
This is used by make-array
when creating named structures.
You should not normally call it explicitly.
Invokes a named structure operation on structure.
operation should be a keyword symbol, and structure should be a
named structure. The handler function of the named structure symbol,
found as the value of the named-structure-invoke
property of the
symbol, is called with appropriate arguments.
If the structure type has no named-structure-invoke
property,
nil
is returned. By convention, nil
is also returned
by the handler if it does not recognize operation
.
(send structure operation args...)
has the same effect, by calling named-structure-invoke
.
See also the :named-structure-symbol
keyword to make-array
, make-array-fun.
The version of defstruct
used in Common Lisp programs
differs from the traditional defstruct
in the defaults for
a few options and the meanings of a few of them.
The :conc-name
option defaults to the structure type name followed
by a hyphen in cli:defstruct
. In traditional defstruct
it
defaults to nil
.
The :callable-constructors
option defaults to t
in
cli:defstruct
, so that the constructor is a function.
Traditionally, it defaults to nil
.
The :alterant
option defaults to nil
in cli:defstruct
,
so that no alterant is defined. Traditionally, an alterant is defined
by default with the name alter-name
.
The :type
option defaults to :named-vector
in cli:defstruct
.
This makes a named structure, and you may specify how to print it.
The :predicate
option defaults to t
in this case.
If the :type
option is specified in cli:defstruct
, you never get
a named structure. You get either a plain list or a plain vector.
There is no type-testing predicate, and you may not request one.
You may not say how to print the structure, either.
If you specify the :named
option along with :type
, you still
do not get a named structure. You get a plain list or a plain vector
in which the structure name happens to be stored. The type is either
:named-list
or :phony-named-vector
.
The :predicate
option defaults to nil
, but you may specify t
yourself.
However, any randomly created list or vector with the structure name
stored in the right place will satisfy the predicate thus defined.
typep
cannot recognize these phony named structures, and you
may not specify how to print them (they do not understand named-structure-invoke
.)
This section discusses the internal structures used by
defstruct
that might be useful to programs that want to interface
to defstruct
nicely. For example, if you want to write a program
that examines structures and displays them the way describe
(see describe-fun) and the Inspector do, your program should work
by examining these structures.
The information in this section is also
necessary for anyone who is thinking of defining his own structure
types.
Whenever the user defines a new structure using defstruct
,
defstruct
creates an instance of the si:defstruct-description
structure.
This can be found as the si:defstruct-description
property of
the name of the structure; it contains such useful information as
the number of slots in the structure, the defstruct
options specified,
and so on.
This is a simplified version of the way
the si:defstruct-description
structure is defined.
It omits some slots whose meaning is not worth documenting here.
(The actual definition is in the system-internals
package.)
(defstruct (defstruct-description (:default-pointer description) (:conc-name defstruct-description-)) name size property-alist slot-alist documentation)
The name
slot contains the symbol supplied by the user to be
the name of his structure, such as spaceship
or
phone-book-entry
.
The size
slot contains the total number of slots in an
instance of this kind of structure. This is not the same number as
that obtained from the :size-symbol
or :size-macro
options to
defstruct
. A named structure, for example, usually uses up an extra
location to store the name of the structure, so the :size-macro
option
will get a number one larger than that stored in the defstruct
description.
The property-alist
slot contains an alist with pairs of the
form (property-name property)
containing properties placed there
by the :property
option to defstruct
or by property names used as
options to defstruct
(see the :property
option, defstruct-property-option).
The slot-alist
slot contains an alist of pairs of the form
(slot-name slot-description)
. A slot-description is
an instance of the defstruct-slot-description
structure. The
defstruct-slot-description
structure is defined something like
this (with other slots that are omitted here), also in the si
package:
(defstruct (defstruct-slot-description (:default-pointer slot-description) :conc-name) number ppss init-code type property-alist ref-macro-name documentation)
The number
slot contains the number of the location of this
slot in an instance of the structure. Locations are numbered,
starting with 0, and continuing up to a number one less than the size of the
structure. The actual location of the slot is determined by the
reference-consing function associated with the type of the structure; see
defstruct-reference-consing-function.
The ppss
slot contains the byte specifier code for this slot if
this slot is a byte field of its location. If this slot is the entire
location, then the ppss
slot contains nil
.
The init-code
slot contains the initialization code supplied
for this slot by the user in his defstruct
form. If there is no
initialization code for this slot then the init-code slot contains a
canonical object which can be obtained (for comparison using eq
)
as the result of (si:defstruct-empty)
.
The ref-macro-name
slot contains the symbol that is defined as
a macro or a subst that expands into a reference to this slot (that is, the name
of the accessor function).
The macro si:defstruct-define-type
can be used to teach defstruct
about new types that it can use to implement structures.
Is used for teaching defstruct
about new types.
The syntax of si:defstruct-define-type
is:
(si:defstruct-define-type type
option-1 option-2 ...
)
where each option is either the symbolic name of an option or a list of
the form (option-name rest)
. Different options interpret
rest in different ways. The symbol type is given an
si:defstruct-type-description
property of a structure that describes the type
completely.
The semantics of si:defstruct-define-type
is the subject
of the rest of this section.
Let us start by examining a sample call to
defstruct-define-type
. This is how the :list
type of structure might
have been defined:
(si:defstruct-define-type :list (:cons (initialization-list description keyword-options) :list `(list . ,initialization-list)) (:ref (slot-number description argument) `(nth ,slot-number ,argument)))
This is the simplest possible form of defstruct-define-type
. It
provides defstruct
with two Lisp forms: one for creating forms to
construct instances of the structure, and one for creating forms to
become the bodies of accessors for slots of the structure.
The keyword :cons
is followed by a list of three variables that will
be bound while the constructor-creating form is evaluated. The first,
initialization-list
, will be bound to a list of the initialization
forms for the slots of the structure. The second, description
, will
be bound to the defstruct-description
structure for the structure
(see defstruct-description). The third variable and the :list
keyword
will be explained later.
The keyword :ref
is followed by a list of three variables that will
be bound while the accessor-creating form is evaluated. The first,
slot-number
, will bound to the number of the slot that the new accessor
should reference. The second, description
, will be bound to the
defstruct-description
structure for the structure. The third, argument
,
will be bound to the form that was provided as the argument to the accessor.
This section is a catalog of all the options currently known
about by si:defstruct-define-type
.
:cons
¶Specifies the code to cons up a form that will construct an instance of a structure of this type.
The :cons
option has the syntax:
(:cons (inits description keywords) kind body)
body is some code that should construct and return a piece of code that will construct, initialize, and return an instance of a structure of this type.
The symbol inits will be bound to the information that the
constructor conser should use to initialize the slots of the
structure. The exact form of this argument is determined by the
symbol kind. There are currently two kinds of initialization.
There is the :list
kind, where inits is bound to a list of
initializations, in the correct order, with nil
s in uninitialized
slots. And there is the :alist
kind, where inits is bound to an
alist with pairs of the form (slot-number init-code)
. Additional
kinds may be provided in the future.
The symbol description will be bound to the instance of the
defstruct-description
structure (see defstruct-description) that
defstruct
maintains for this particular structure. This is so that
the constructor conser can find out such things as the total size of
the structure it is supposed to create.
The symbol keywords will be bound to an alist with pairs of the form
(keyword value)
, where each keyword was a keyword supplied to
the constructor that wasn’t the name of a slot, and value was the Lisp
object that followed the keyword. This is how you can make your own special
keywords, like the existing :make-array
and :times
keywords. See the
section on using the constructor, using-defstruct-constructor. You
specify the list of acceptable keywords with
the :cons-keywords
option (see defstruct-define-type-keywords).
It is an error not to supply the :cons
option to
si:defstruct-define-type
.
:ref
¶Specifies the code to cons up a form that will reference an instance of a structure of this type.
The :ref
option has the syntax:
(:ref (number description arg-1 ...
arg-n)
body)
body is some code that should construct and return a piece of code that will reference an instance of a structure of this type.
The symbol number will be bound to the location of the slot
that is to be referenced. This is the same number that is found
in the number slot of the defstruct-slot-description
structure
(see defstruct-slot-description-structure).
The symbol description will be bound to the instance of the
si:defstruct-description
structure that defstruct
maintains for this
particular structure.
The symbols arg-i are bound to the forms supplied to the accessor as
arguments. Normally there should be only one of these. The last argument
is the one that will be defaulted by the :default-pointer
option (see
defstruct-default-pointer-option). defstruct
will check that the user
has supplied exactly n arguments to the accessor function before calling the
reference consing code.
It is an error not to supply the :ref
option to
si:defstruct-define-type
.
:overhead
¶Declares to defstruct
that the implementation of this particular type
of structure “uses up” some number of locations in the object
actually constructed. This option is used by various “named” types of
structures that store the name of the structure in one location.
For example, named arrays have an overhead of one, and named array
leaders an overhead of two, but named typed arrays have no overhead
since the structure type symbol is stored in the array leader whilst the
actual data specifying the values of the slots is stored in the array proper.
The syntax of :overhead
is (:overhead n)
, where n is a
fixnum that says how many locations of overhead this type needs.
This number is used only by the :size-macro
and :size-symbol
options to defstruct
(see defstruct-size-macro-option).
:named
¶Controls the use of the :named
option to defstruct
. With no
argument, the :named
option means that this type is one which
records the structure type name somehow (not necessarily by using an
actual named structure). With an argument, as in (:named
type-name)
, the symbol type-name should be the name of some
other structure type that defstruct
should use if the user
specifies this type and :named
as well. For example, the
definition of the :list
type contains (:named :named-list)
,
saying that a defstruct
that specifies (:list :named)
really
uses type :named-list
.
:cons-keywords
¶Defines additional constructor keywords for this type of structure.
Using these keywords, one may specify additional information
about a structure at the time it is created (“consed”) using one of
its constructor functions or macros.
(The :times
constructor keyword for structures of type
:grouped-array
is an example.) The syntax is: (:cons-keywords
keyword-1 ... keyword-n)
where each keyword is a symbol
that the constructor conser expects to find in the keywords alist
(explained above).
:keywords si:defstruct-define-type
:keywords
is an old name for the :cons-keywords
option.
:defstruct-keywords
¶Defines additional defstruct
options allowed for this
type of structure. (The :subtype
option for structures of type
:array
is an example.) These options take effect at the time
the structure is defined using defstruct
, and thus affect
all structures of a particular type (unless overridden in some way.)
In contrast, the :cons-keywords
options affect the creation
of individual structures of a particular type.
The syntax is:
(:defstruct-keywords keyword-1 ... keyword-n)
where each
keyword is a keyword that defstruct
will recognize as an option.
defstruct
puts such options, with their values, in the
property-alist
slot of the defstuct-description
structure
(defined above)
:predicate si:defstruct-define-type
Tells defstruct
how to produce predicates for a particular type
(for the :predicate
option to defstruct
). Its syntax is:
(:predicate (description name)
body...
)
The variable description is bound to the defstruct-description
structure maintained for the structure for which a predicate is being
generated. The variable name is bound to the symbol that is to be
defined as a predicate. body is a piece of code to compute
the defining form for the predicate. A typical use of this
option might look like:
(:predicate (description name) `(defun ,name (x) (and (frobbozp x) (eq (frobbozref x 0) ',(si:defstruct-description-name description)))))
:copier si:defstruct-define-type
defstruct
knows how to generate a copier function using the
constructor and reference code that must be provided with any new
defstruct type. Nevertheless it is sometimes desirable to specify a
specific method of copying a particular defstruct type. The :copier
option to si:defstruct-define-type
allow this to be done:
(:copier (description name) body)
As with the :predicate
option, description is bound to an instance of the
defstruct-description
structure, name is bound to the symbol to be defined,
and body is some code to evaluate to get the defining form. For example:
(:copier (description name) `(fdefine ',name 'copy-frobboz))
:defstruct
¶The :defstruct
option to si:defstruct-define-type
allows the user
to run some code and return some forms as part of the expansion of the
defstruct
macro.
The :defstruct
option has the syntax:
(:defstruct (description) body)
body is a piece of code that will be run whenever defstruct
is expanding a defstruct
form that defines a structure of this type.
The symbol description will be bound to the instance of the
defstruct-description
structure that defstruct
maintains for this
particular structure.
The value returned by the body should be a list
of forms to be included with those that the defstruct
expands into.
Thus, if you only want to run some code at defstruct
-expand time, and
you don’t want to actually output any additional code, then you should
be careful to return nil
from the code in this option.
defstruct
will cause the body forms to be evaluated as early
as possible in the parsing of a structure definition, and cause the
returned forms to be evalutated as late as possible in the
macro-expansion of the defstuct
forms. This is so that body
can rehack arguments, signal errors, and the like before many of
defstruct
’s internal forms are executed, while enabling it to
return code which will modify or extend the default forms produced by
a vanilla defstruct
.
The object-oriented programming style used in the Smalltalk and Actor families of languages is available in Zetalisp and used by the Lisp Machine software system. Its purpose is to perform generic operations on objects. Part of its implementation is simply a convention in procedure-calling style; part is a powerful language feature, called Flavors, for defining abstract objects. This chapter attempts to explain what programming with objects and with message passing means, the various means of implementing these in Zetalisp, and when you should use them. It assumes no prior knowledge of any other languages.
When writing a program, it is often convenient to model what the program does in terms of objects, conceptual entities that can be likened to real-world things. Choosing what objects to provide in a program is very important to the proper organization of the program. In an object-oriented design, specifying what objects exist is the first task in designing the system. In a text editor, the objects might be “pieces of text”, “pointers into text”, and “display windows”. In an electrical design system, the objects might be “resistors”, “capacitors”, “transistors”, “wires”, and “display windows”. After specifying what objects there are, the next task of the design is to figure out what operations can be performed on each object. In the text editor example, operations on “pieces of text” might include inserting text and deleting text; operations on “pointers into text” might include moving forward and backward; and operations on “display windows” might include redisplaying the window and changing which “piece of text” the window is associated with.
In this model, we think of the program as being built around a set of objects, each of which has a set of operations that can be performed on it. More rigorously, the program defines several types of object (the editor above has three types), and it can create many instances of each type (that is, there can be many pieces of text, many pointers into text, and many windows). The program defines a set of types of object and, for each type, a set of operations that can be performed on any object of the type.
The new types may exist only in the programmer’s mind. For example, it
is possible to think of a disembodied property list as an abstract data
type on which certain operations such as get
and putprop
are
defined. This type can be instantiated with (cons nil nil)
(that
is, by evaluating this form you can create a new disembodied property
list); the operations are invoked through functions defined just for
that purpose. The fact that disembodied property lists are really
implemented as lists, indistinguishable from any other lists, does not
invalidate this point of view. However, such conceptual data types
cannot be distinguished automatically by the system; one cannot ask “is
this object a disembodied property list, as opposed to an ordinary
list”.
The defstruct
for ship
early in chapter defstruct-chapter
defines another conceptual type. defstruct
automatically defines some
operations on this object, the operations to access its elements. We
could define other functions that did useful things with ship
’s,
such as computing their speed, angle of travel, momentum, or velocity,
stopping them, moving them elsewhere, and so on.
In both cases, we represent our conceptual object by one Lisp object.
The Lisp object we use for the representation has structure and
refers to other Lisp objects. In the disembodied property list case,
the Lisp object is a list of pairs; in the ship
case, the Lisp
object is an array whose details are taken care of by defstruct
. In
both cases, we can say that the object keeps track of an internal
state, which can be examined and altered by the operations
available for that type of object. get
examines the state of a
property list, and putprop
alters it; ship-x-position
examines
the state of a ship, and (setf (ship-x-position ship) 5.0)
alters it.
We have now seen the essence of object-oriented programming. A conceptual object is modeled by a single Lisp object, which bundles up some state information. For every type of object, there is a set of operations that can be performed to examine or alter the state of the object.
An important benefit of the object-oriented style is that it lends itself to a particularly simple and lucid kind of modularity. If you have modular programming constructs and techniques available, they help and encourage you to write programs that are easy to read and understand, and so are more reliable and maintainable. Object-oriented programming lets a programmer implement a useful facility that presents the caller with a set of external interfaces, without requiring the caller to understand how the internal details of the implementation work. In other words, a program that calls this facility can treat the facility as a black box; the program knows what the facility’s external interfaces guarantee to do, and that is all it knows.
For example, a program that uses disembodied property lists never needs
to know that the property list is being maintained as a list of
alternating indicators and values; the program simply performs the
operations, passing them inputs and getting back outputs. The program
only depends on the external definition of these operations: it knows
that if it putprop
’s a property, and doesn’t remprop
it (or
putprop
over it), then it can do get
and be sure of getting back
the same thing it put in. The important thing about this hiding of
the details of the implementation is that someone reading a program that uses disembodied
property lists need not concern himself with how they are implemented;
he need only understand what they undertake to do. This saves the
programmer a lot of time and lets him concentrate his energies on
understanding the program he is working on. Another good thing about
this hiding is that the representation of property lists could be
changed and the program would continue to work. For example, instead
of a list of alternating elements, the property list could be
implemented as an association list or a hash table. Nothing in the
calling program would change at all.
The same is true of the ship
example. The caller is presented with
a collection of operations, such as ship-x-position
,
ship-y-position
, ship-speed
, and ship-direction
; it simply
calls these and looks at their answers, without caring how they did what
they did. In our example above, ship-x-position
and
ship-y-position
would be accessor functions, defined automatically
by defstruct
, while ship-speed
and ship-direction
would be
functions defined by the implementor of the ship
type. The code
might look like this:
(defstruct (ship :conc-name) x-position y-position x-velocity y-velocity mass) (defun ship-speed (ship) (sqrt (+ (^ (ship-x-velocity ship) 2) (^ (ship-y-velocity ship) 2)))) (defun ship-direction (ship) (atan2 (ship-y-velocity ship) (ship-x-velocity ship)))
The caller need not know that the first two functions were structure accessors
and that the second two were written by hand and do arithmetic. Those
facts would not be considered part of the black box characteristics of
the implementation of the ship
type. The ship
type does not
guarantee which functions will be implemented in which ways; such aspects
are not part of the contract between ship
and its callers. In fact,
ship
could have been written this way instead:
(defstruct (ship :conc-name) x-position y-position speed direction mass) (defun ship-x-velocity (ship) (* (ship-speed ship) (cos (ship-direction ship)))) (defun ship-y-velocity (ship) (* (ship-speed ship) (sin (ship-direction ship))))
In this second implementation of the ship
type, we have decided to
store the velocity in polar coordinates instead of rectangular
coordinates. This is purely an implementation decision. The caller has
no idea which of the two ways the implementation uses; he just
performs the operations on the object by calling the appropriate
functions.
We have now created our own types of objects, whose implementations are hidden from the programs that use them. Such types are usually referred to as abstract types. The object-oriented style of programming can be used to create abstract types by hiding the implementation of the operations and simply documenting what the operations are defined to do.
Some more terminology: the quantities being held by the elements of the
ship
structure are referred to as instance variables. Each
instance of a type has the same operations defined on it; what
distinguishes one instance from another (besides eq
-ness)
is the values that reside in its instance variables. The example above
illustrates that a caller of operations does not know what the instance
variables are; our two ways of writing the ship
operations have
different instance variables, but from the outside they have exactly the
same operations.
One might ask: “But what if the caller evaluates (aref ship 2)
and
notices that he gets back the x velocity rather than the speed? Then he
can tell which of the two implementations were used.” This is true; if
the caller were to do that, he could tell. However, when a facility is
implemented in the object-oriented style, only certain functions are
documented and advertised, the functions that are considered to be
operations on the type of object. The contract from ship
to its
callers only speaks about what happens if the caller calls these
functions. The contract makes no guarantees at all about what would
happen if the caller were to start poking around on his own using
aref
. A caller who does so is in error; he is depending on
something that is not specified in the contract. No guarantees were
ever made about the results of such action, and so anything may happen;
indeed, ship
may get reimplemented overnight, and the code that does
the aref
will have a different effect entirely and probably stop
working. This example shows why the concept of a contract between a callee and
a caller is important: the contract specifies the interface
between the two modules.
Unlike some other languages that provide abstract types, Zetalisp makes no attempt to have the language automatically forbid constructs that circumvent the contract. This is intentional. One reason for this is that the Lisp Machine is an interactive system, and so it is important to be able to examine and alter internal state interactively (usually from a debugger). Furthermore, there is no strong distinction between the “system” programs and the “user” programs on the Lisp Machine; users are allowed to get into any part of the language system and change what they want to change. Another reason is the traditional MIT AI Lab philosophy that opposes “fascist” restrictions which impose on the user “for his own good”. The user himself should decide what is good for him.
In summary: by defining a set of operations and making only a specific set of external entrypoints available to the caller, the programmer can create his own abstract types. These types can be useful facilities for other programs and programmers. Since the implementation of the type is hidden from the callers, modularity is maintained and the implementation can be changed easily.
We have hidden the implementation of an abstract type by making its
operations into functions which the user may call. The important thing
is not that they are functions–in Lisp everything is done with functions.
The important thing is that we have defined a new conceptual operation
and given it a name, rather than requiring anyone who wants to do the
operation to write it out step-by-step. Thus we say (ship-x-velocity s)
rather than (aref s 2)
.
Often a few abstract operation functions are simple enough that
it is desirable
to compile special code for them rather than really calling the function.
(Compiling special code like this is often called open-coding.)
The compiler is directed to do this through use of macros, substs, or
optimizers. defstruct
arranges for this kind of special compilation
for the functions that get the instance variables of a structure.
When we use this optimization, the implementation of the abstract type is only hidden in a certain sense. It does not appear in the Lisp code written by the user, but does appear in the compiled code. The reason is that there may be some compiled functions that use the macros (or whatever); even if you change the definition of the macro, the existing compiled code will continue to use the old definition. Thus, if the implementation of a module is changed programs that use it may need to be recompiled. This is something we sometimes accept for the sake of efficiency.
In the present implementation of flavors, which is discussed below,
there is no such compiler incorporation of nonmodular knowledge into a
program, except when the :ordered-instance-variables
feature is
used; see ordered-instance-variables-option, where this problem is
explained further. If you don’t use the
:ordered-instance-variables
feature, you don’t have to worry about
this.
Suppose we think about the rest of the program that uses the
ship
abstraction. It may want to deal with other objects that are
like ship
’s in that they are movable objects with mass, but unlike
ship
s in other ways. A more advanced model of a ship might include
the concept of the ship’s engine power, the number of passengers on
board, and its name. An object representing a meteor probably would
not have any of these, but might have another attribute such as how
much iron is in it.
However, all kinds of movable objects have positions, velocities, and
masses, and the system will contain some programs that deal with these
quantities in a uniform way, regardless of what kind of object the
attributes apply to. For example, a piece of the system that calculates
every object’s orbit in space need not worry about the other, more
peripheral attributes of various types of objects; it works the same way
for all objects. Unfortunately, a program that tries to calculate the
orbit of a ship needs to know the ship’s attributes, and must therefore
call ship-x-position
and ship-y-velocity
and so on. The problem is
that these functions won’t work for meteors. There would have to be a
second program to calculate orbits for meteors that would be exactly the
same, except that where the first one calls ship-x-position
, the
second one would call meteor-x-position
, and so on. This would be
very bad; a great deal of code would have to exist in multiple copies,
all of it would have to be maintained in parallel, and it would take up
space for no good reason.
What is needed is an operation that can be performed on objects of
several different types. For each type, it should do the thing
appropriate for that type. Such operations are called generic
operations. The classic example of generic operations is the arithmetic
functions in most programming languages, including Zetalisp. The +
(or plus
) function accepts integers, floats, ratios and complex
numbers, and perform an appropriate kind of addition, based on the data
types of the objects being manipulated. In our example, we need a
generic x-position
operation that can be performed on either
ship
’s, meteor
’s, or any other kind of mobile object represented
in the system. This way, we can write a single program to calculate
orbits. When it wants to know the x position of the object it is
dealing with, it simply invokes the generic x-position
operation on
the object, and whatever type of object it has, the correct operation is
performed, and the x position is returned.
Another terminology for the use of such generic operations has emerged
from the Smalltalk language: performing a generic operation
is called sending a message. The message consists of an operation
name (a symbol) and arguments. The objects in the program are thought
of as little people, who get sent messages and respond with answers
(returned values). In the example above, the objects are sent
x-position
messages, to which they respond with their x
position.
Sending a message is a way of invoking a function without specifying which function is to be called. Instead, the data determines the function to use. The caller specifies an operation name and an object; that is, it said what operation to perform, and what object to perform it on. The function to invoke is found from this information.
The two data used to figure out which function
to call are the type of the object, and the name of the operation.
The same set of functions are used for all instances of a given type, so
the type is the only attribute of the object used to figure out which
function to call. The rest of the message besides the operation is data
which are passed as arguments to the function, so the operation is the only
part of the message used to find the function. Such a function is
called a method. For example, if we send an x-position
message
to an object of type ship
, then the function we find is “the
ship
type’s x-position
method”. A method is a function that
handles a specific operation on a specific kind of object; this
method handles messages named x-position
to objects of type
ship
.
In our new terminology: the orbit-calculating program finds the x
position of the object it is working on by sending that object a message
consisting of the operation x-position
and no arguments. The
returned value of the message is the x position of the object. If
the object was of type ship
, then the ship
type’s x-position
method was invoked; if it was of type meteor
, then the meteor
type’s x-position
method was invoked. The orbit-calculating program
just sends the message, and the right function is invoked based on the
type of the object. We now have true generic functions, in the form of
message passing: the same operation can mean different things depending
on the type of the object.
How do we implement message passing in Lisp? Our convention is that objects
that receive messages are always functional objects (that is, you
can apply them to arguments). A message is sent to an object by
calling that object as a function, passing the operation name as
the first argument and the arguments of the message as the rest of the
arguments. Operation names are represented by symbols; normally these
symbols are in the keyword package (see package), since messages are
a protocol for communication between different programs, which may
reside in different packages. So if we have a variable my-ship
whose value is an object of type ship
, and we want to know its
x position, we send it a message as follows:
(send my-ship :x-position)
To set the
ship’s x position to 3.0
, we send it a message like this:
(send my-ship :set :x-position 3.0)
It should be stressed that no new features are added to Lisp for message sending; we simply define a convention on the way objects take arguments. The convention says that an object accepts messages by always interpreting its first argument as an operation name. The object must consider this operation name, find the function which is the method for that operation, and invoke that function.
Sends object a message with operation and arguments as specified.
Currently send
is identical to funcall
, but preferable when
a message is being sent, just for clarity.
There are vague ideas of making send different from funcall if object is a symbol, list, number, or other object that does not normally handle messages when funcalled, but the meaning of this is not completely clear.
Currently lexpr-send
is the same as apply.
This raises the question of how message receiving works. The object must somehow find the right method for the message it is sent. Furthermore, the object now has to be callable as a function. But an ordinary function will not do. We need something that can store the instance variables (the internal state) of the object. We need a function with internal state; that is, we need a coroutine.
Of the Zetalisp features presented so far, the most appropriate
is the closure (see closure). A message-receiving object could be
implemented as a closure over a set of instance variables. The function
inside the closure would have a big selectq
form to dispatch on its
first argument. (Actually, rather than using closures and a selectq
,
you would probably use entities (entity) and defselect
(defselect-fun).)
While using closures (or entities) does work, it has several serious
problems. The main problem is that in order to add a new operation to a
system, it is necessary to modify a lot of code; you have to find all
the types that understand that operation, and add a new clause to the
selectq
. The problem with this is that you cannot textually
separate the implementation of your new operation from the rest of the
system; the methods must be interleaved with the other operations for
the type. Adding a new operation should only require adding Lisp code;
it should not require modifying Lisp code.
The conventional way of making generic operations is to have a procedure
for each operation, which has a big selectq
for all the types; this
means you have to modify code to add a type. The way described above is
to have a procedure for each type, which has a big selectq
for all
the operations; this means you have to modify code to add an operation.
Neither of these has the desired property that extending the system
should only require adding code, rather than modifying code.
Closures (and entities) are also somewhat clumsy and crude. A far more streamlined, convenient, and powerful system for creating message-receiving objects exists; it is called the flavor mechanism. With flavors, you can add a new method simply by adding code, without modifying anything. Furthermore, many common and useful things are very easy to do with flavors. The rest of this chapter describes flavors.
A flavor, in its simplest form, is a definition of an abstract type.
New flavors are created with the defflavor
special form, and
methods of the flavor are created with the defmethod
special form.
New instances of a flavor are created with the make-instance
function. This section explains simple uses of these forms.
For an example of a simple use of flavors, here is how the ship
example above would be implemented.
(defflavor ship (x-position y-position x-velocity y-velocity mass) () :gettable-instance-variables) (defmethod (ship :speed) () (sqrt (+ (^ x-velocity 2) (^ y-velocity 2)))) (defmethod (ship :direction) () (atan2 y-velocity x-velocity))
The code above creates a new flavor. The first subform of the
defflavor
is ship
, which is the name of the new flavor. Next
is the list of instance variables; they are the five that should be
familiar by now. The next subform is something we will get to later.
The rest of the subforms are the body of the defflavor
, and each
one specifies an option about this flavor. In our example, there is
only one option, namely :gettable-instance-variables
. This means
that for each instance variable, a method should automatically be
generated to return the value of that instance variable. The name of
the operation is a symbol with the same name as the instance variable, but
interned on the keyword package. Thus, methods are created to handle
the operations :x-position
, :y-position
, and so on.
Each of the two defmethod
forms adds a method to the flavor. The
first one adds a handler to the flavor ship
for the operation
:speed
. The second subform is the lambda-list, and the rest is the
body of the function that handles the :speed
operation. The body can
refer to or set any instance variables of the flavor, just like variables
bound by a containing let
. When any instance of the
ship
flavor is invoked with a first argument of :direction
, the
body of the second defmethod
is evaluated in an environment in
which the instance variables of ship
refer to the instance variables
of this instance (the one to which the message was sent). So the arguments
passed to cli:atan
are the the velocity components of this particular ship.
The result of cli:atan
becomes the value returned by the :direction
operation.
Now we have seen how to create a new abstract type: a new flavor. Every
instance of this flavor has the five instance variables named in
the defflavor
form, and the seven methods we have seen (five that
were automatically generated because of the
:gettable-instance-variables
option, and two that we wrote
ourselves). The way to create an instance of our new flavor is with the
make-instance
function. Here is how it could be used:
(setq my-ship (make-instance 'ship))
This returns an object whose printed representation is
#<SHIP 13731210>
.
(Of course, the value of the magic number will vary; it is just
the object address in octal.) The argument to make-instance
is
the name of the flavor to be instantiated. Additional
arguments, not used here, are init options, that is, commands
to the flavor of which we are making an instance, selecting optional
features. This will be discussed more in a moment.
Examination of the flavor we have defined shows that it is quite useless
as it stands, since there is no way to set any of the parameters. We
can fix this up easily by putting the :settable-instance-variables
option into the defflavor
form. This option tells defflavor
to
generate methods for operation :set
for first argument
:x-position
, :y-position
, and so on; each such method takes one
additional argument and sets the corresponding instance variable to that value.
It also generates methods for the operations :set-x-position
,
:set-y-position
and so on; each of these takes one argument
and sets the corresponding variable.
Another option we can add to the defflavor
is
:inittable-instance-variables
, which allows us to initialize the values
of the instance variables when an instance is first created.
:inittable-instance-variables
does not create any methods; instead,
it makes initialization keywords named :x-position
,
:y-position
, etc., that can be used as init-option arguments to
make-instance
to initialize the corresponding instance variables.
The list of init options is sometimes called the init-plist because
it is like a property list.
Here is the improved defflavor
:
(defflavor ship (x-position y-position x-velocity y-velocity mass) () :gettable-instance-variables :settable-instance-variables :inittable-instance-variables)
All we have to do is evaluate this new defflavor
, and the existing
flavor definition is updated and now includes the new methods and
initialization options. In fact, the instance we generated a while ago
now accepts the new operations! We can set the mass of
the ship we created by evaluating
(send my-ship :set-mass 3.0)
or
(send my-ship :set :mass 3.0)
and the mass
instance variable of my-ship
is properly set to
3.0
. Whether you use :set-mass
or the general operation
:set
is a matter of style; :set
is used by the expansion of
(setf (send my-ship :mass) 3.0)
.
If you want to play around with flavors, it is useful
to know that describe
of an instance tells you the flavor of the
instance and the values of its instance variables. If we were to evaluate
(describe my-ship)
at this point, the following would be printed:
#<SHIP 13731210>, an object of flavor SHIP, has instance variable values: X-POSITION: void Y-POSITION: void X-VELOCITY: void Y-VELOCITY: void MASS: 3.0
Now that the instance variables are inittable, we can create another
ship and initialize some of the instance variables using the init-plist.
Let’s do that and describe
the result:
(setq her-ship (make-instance 'ship :x-position 0.0 :y-position 2.0 :mass 3.5)) => #<SHIP 13756521> (describe her-ship) #<SHIP 13756521>, an object of flavor SHIP, has instance variable values: X-POSITION: 0.0 Y-POSITION: 2.0 X-VELOCITY: void Y-VELOCITY: void MASS: 3.5
A flavor can also establish default initial values for instance variables. These default values are used when a new instance is created if the values are not initialized any other way. The syntax for specifying a default initial value is to replace the name of the instance variable by a list, whose first element is the name and whose second is a form to evaluate to produce the default initial value. For example:
(defvar *default-x-velocity* 2.0) (defvar *default-y-velocity* 3.0) (defflavor ship ((x-position 0.0) (y-position 0.0) (x-velocity *default-x-velocity*) (y-velocity *default-y-velocity*) mass) () :gettable-instance-variables :settable-instance-variables :inittable-instance-variables) (setq another-ship (make-instance 'ship :x-position 3.4)) => #<SHIP 14563643> (describe another-ship) #<SHIP 14563643>, an object of flavor SHIP, has instance variable values: X-POSITION: 3.4 Y-POSITION: 0.0 X-VELOCITY: 2.0 Y-VELOCITY: 3.0 MASS: void
x-position
was initialized explicitly, so the default was ignored.
y-position
was initialized from the default value, which was
0.0
. The two velocity instance variables were initialized from
their default values, which came from two global variables. mass
was not explicitly initialized and did not have a default
initialization, so it was left void.
There are many other options that can be used in defflavor
, and the
init options can be used more flexibly than just to initialize instance
variables; full details are given later in this chapter. But even with
the small set of features we have seen so far, it is easy to write
object-oriented programs.
Now we have a system for defining message-receiving objects so that we
can have generic operations. If we want to create a new type called
meteor
that would accept the same generic operations as ship
, we
could simply write another defflavor
and two more defmethod
’s
that looked just like those of ship
, and then meteors and ships
would both accept the same operations. ship
would have some
more instance variables for holding attributes specific to ships
and some more methods for operations that are not generic, but
are only defined for ships; the same would be true of meteor
.
However, this would be a a wasteful thing to do. The same code has to
be repeated in several places, and several instance variables have to be
repeated. The code now needs to be maintained in many places, which is
always undesirable. The power of flavors (and the name “flavors”) comes
from the ability to mix several flavors and get a new flavor. Since the
functionality of ship
and meteor
partially overlap, we can take
the common functionality and move it into its own flavor, which might be
called moving-object
. We would define moving-object
the same
way as we defined ship
in the previous section. Then, ship
and
meteor
could be defined like this:
(defflavor ship (engine-power number-of-passengers name) (moving-object) :gettable-instance-variables) (defflavor meteor (percent-iron) (moving-object) :inittable-instance-variables)
These defflavor
forms use the second subform, which we ignored
previously. The second subform is a list of flavors to be combined to
form the new flavor; such flavors are called components.
Concentrating on ship
for a moment (analogous things are true of
meteor
), we see that it has exactly one component flavor:
moving-object
. It also has a list of instance variables, which
includes only the ship-specific instance variables and not the ones that
it shares with meteor
. By incorporating moving-object
, the ship
flavor acquires all of its instance variables, and so need not name them
again. It also acquires all of moving-object
’s methods, too. So
with the new definition, ship
instances still implement the
:x-velocity
and :speed
operations, with the same meaning as before.
However, the :engine-power
operation is also understood (and
returns the value of the engine-power
instance variable).
What we have done here is to take an abstract type, moving-object
,
and build two more specialized and powerful abstract types on top of it.
Any ship or meteor can do anything a moving object can do, and each also
has its own specific abilities. This kind of building can continue; we
could define a flavor called ship-with-passenger
that was built on
top of ship
, and it would inherit all of moving-object
’s
instance variables and methods as well as ship
’s instance variables
and methods. Furthermore, the second subform of defflavor
can be a
list of several components, meaning that the new flavor should combine
all the instance variables and methods of all the flavors in the list,
as well as the ones those flavors are built on, and so on. All the
components taken together form a big tree of flavors. A flavor is built
from its components, its components’ components, and so on. We
sometimes use the term “components” to mean the immediate components
(the ones listed in the defflavor
), and sometimes to mean all the
components (including the components of the immediate components and so
on). (Actually, it is not strictly a tree, since some flavors might be
components through more than one path. It is really a directed graph;
it can even be cyclic.)
The order in which the components are combined to form a flavor is
important. The tree of flavors is turned into an ordered list by
performing a top-down, depth-first walk of the tree, including
non-terminal nodes before the subtrees they head, ignoring any
flavor that has been encountered previously somewhere else in the tree.
For example, if flavor-1
’s immediate components are flavor-2
and
flavor-3
, and flavor-2
’s components are flavor-4
and
flavor-5
, and flavor-3
’s component was flavor-4
, then the
complete list of components of flavor-1
would be:
flavor-1, flavor-2, flavor-4, flavor-5, flavor-3
The flavors earlier in this list are the more specific, less basic ones;
in our example, ship-with-passengers
would be first in the list,
followed by ship
, followed by moving-object
. A flavor is always
the first in the list of its own components. Notice that flavor-4
does not appear twice in this list. Only the first occurrence of a
flavor appears; duplicates are removed. (The elimination of duplicates
is done during the walk; if there is a cycle in the directed graph, it
does not cause a non-terminating computation.)
The set of instance variables for the new flavor is the union of all the
sets of instance variables in all the component flavors. If both
flavor-2
and flavor-3
have instance variables named foo
,
then flavor-1
has an instance variable named foo
, and any
methods that refer to foo
refer to this same instance variable.
Thus different components of a flavor can communicate with one another
using shared instance variables. (Typically, only one component ever
sets the variable; the others only look at it.) The default initial
value for an instance variable comes from the first component flavor to
specify one.
The way the methods of the components are combined is the heart of the flavor system. When a flavor is defined, a single function, called a combined method, is constructed for each operation supported by the flavor. This function is constructed out of all the methods for that operation from all the components of the flavor. There are many different ways that methods can be combined; these can be selected by the user when a flavor is defined. The user can also create new forms of combination.
There are several kinds of methods, but
so far, the only kinds of methods we have seen are primary methods.
The default way primary methods are combined is that all but the
earliest one provided are ignored. In other words, the combined method
is simply the primary method of the first flavor to provide a primary
method. What this means is that if you are starting with a flavor
foo
and building a flavor bar
on top of it, then you can
override foo
’s method for an operation by providing your own method.
Your method will be called, and foo
’s will never be called.
Simple overriding is often useful; for example, if you want to make a
new flavor bar
that is just like foo
except that it reacts
completely differently to a few operations. However, often you don’t
want to completely override the base flavor’s (foo
’s) method;
sometimes you want to add some extra things to be done. This is where
combination of methods is used.
The usual way methods are combined is that one flavor provides a primary method, and other flavors provide daemon methods. The idea is that the primary method is “in charge” of the main business of handling the operation, but other flavors just want to keep informed that the message was sent, or just want to do the part of the operation associated with their own area of responsibility.
daemon methods come in two kinds, before and after. There is
a special syntax in defmethod
for defining such methods. Here is an example
of the syntax. To give the ship
flavor an after-daemon method for the
:speed
operation, the following syntax would be used:
(defmethod (ship :after :speed) () body)
Now, when a message is sent, it is handled by a new function called the
combined method. The combined method first calls all of the before daemons,
then the primary method, then all the after daemons. Each method is passed the
same arguments that the combined method was given. The returned values from the
combined method are the values returned by the primary method; any values
returned from the daemons are ignored. Before-daemons are called in the order
that flavors are combined, while after-daemons are called in the reverse order.
In other words, if you build bar
on top of foo
, then bar
’s
before-daemons run before any of those in foo
, and bar
’s
after-daemons run after any of those in foo
.
The reason for this order is to keep the modularity order correct. If
we create flavor-1
built on flavor-2
, then it should not matter
what flavor-2
is built out of. Our new before-daemons go before all
methods of flavor-2
, and our new after-daemons go after all methods of
flavor-2
. Note that if you have no daemons, this reduces to the
form of combination described above. The most recently added component
flavor is the highest level of abstraction; you build a higher-level
object on top of a lower-level object by adding new components to the
front. The syntax for defining daemon methods can be found in the
description of defmethod
below.
To make this a bit more clear, let’s consider a simple example that is
easy to play with: the :print-self
method. The Lisp printer
(i.e the print
function; see printer) prints instances of flavors by sending
them :print-self
messages. The first argument to the
:print-self
operation is a stream (we can ignore the others for now),
and the receiver of the message is supposed to print its printed
representation on the stream. In the ship
example above, the reason
that instances of the ship
flavor printed the way they did is
because the ship
flavor was actually built on top of a very basic
flavor called vanilla-flavor
; this component is provided
automatically by defflavor
. It was vanilla-flavor
’s
:print-self
method that was doing the printing. Now, if we give
ship
its own primary method for the :print-self
operation, then
that method completely takes over the job of printing;
vanilla-flavor
’s method will not be called at all. However, if we
give ship
a before-daemon method for the :print-self
operation,
then it will get invoked before the vanilla-flavor
method, and so
whatever it prints will appear before what vanilla-flavor
prints.
So we can use before-daemons to add prefixes to a printed
representation; similarly, after-daemons can add suffixes.
There are other ways to combine methods besides daemons, but this way is the
most common. The more advanced ways of combining methods are explained
in a later section; see method-combination. vanilla-flavor
and what it does for
you are also explained later; see vanilla-flavor.
A flavor is defined by a form
(defflavor flavor-name (var1 var2...) (flav1 flav2...) opt1 opt2...)
flavor-name is a symbol which serves to name this flavor. It is given an si:flavor
property which is the internal data-structure containing the details of the flavor.
(type-of obj)
, where obj is an instance of the flavor named
flavor-name, returns the symbol flavor-name.
(typep obj flavor-name)
is t
if obj is an instance of a
flavor, one of whose components (possibly itself) is flavor-name.
var1, var2, etc are the names of the instance-variables containing the local state for this flavor. A list of the name of an instance-variable and a default initialization form is also acceptable; the initialization form is evaluated when an instance of the flavor is created if no other initial value for the variable is obtained. If no initialization is specified, the variable remains void.
flav1, flav2, etc are the names of the component flavors out of which this flavor is built. The features of those flavors are inherited as described previously.
opt1, opt2, etc are options; each option may be either a
keyword symbol or a list of a keyword symbol and arguments. The options
to defflavor
are described in defflavor-options.
A list of the names of all the flavors that have ever been defflavor
’ed.
A method, that is, a function to handle a particular operation for instances of a particular flavor, is defined by a form such as
(defmethod (flavor-name method-type operation) lambda-list form1 form2...)
flavor-name is a symbol which is the name of the flavor which is to receive the method. operation is a keyword symbol which names the operation to be handled. method-type is a keyword symbol for the type of method; it is omitted when you are defining a primary method. For some method-types, additional information is expected. It comes after operation.
The meaning of method-type depends on what style of
method combination is declared for this operation. For instance, if
:daemon
combination (the default style) is in use,
method types :before
and :after
are allowed. See
method-combination for a complete description of method types and
the way methods are combined.
lambda-list describes the arguments and aux variables of the
function; the first argument to the method, which is the operation
name itself, is automatically handled and so is not included in the
lambda-list. Note that methods may not have unevaluated ("e
) arguments;
that is, they must be functions, not special forms. form1,
form2, etc are the function body; the value of the last form
is returned.
The variant form
(defmethod (flavor-name operation) function)
where function is a symbol, says that flavor-name’s method for
operation is function, a symbol which names a function. That
function must take appropriate arguments; the first argument is the
operation. When the function is called, self
will be bound.
If you redefine a method that is already defined, the old definition is
replaced by the new one. Given a flavor, an operation name, and a
method type, there can only be one function (with the exception of
:case
methods; see case-method-combination), so if you define a :before
daemon method for the
foo
flavor to handle the :bar
operation, then you replace the
previous before-daemon; however, you do not affect the primary method or
methods of any other type, operation or flavor.
The function spec for a method (see method-function-spec) looks like:
(:method flavor-name operation) or (:method flavor-name method-type operation) or (:method flavor-name method-type operation suboperation)
This is useful to know if you want to trace (trace-fun), breakon (breakon-fun) or advise (advise-fun) a method, or if you want to poke around at the method function itself, e.g disassemble it (see disassemble-fun).
Creates and returns an instance of the specified flavor. Arguments
after the first are alternating init-option keywords and arguments to
those keywords. These options are used to initialize instance variables
and to select arbitrary options, as described above. An :init
message is sent to the newly-created object with one argument, the
init-plist. This is a disembodied property-list containing the
init-options specified and those defaulted from the flavor’s
:default-init-plist
(however, init keywords that simply initialize instance
variables, and the corresponding values, may be absent when the
:init
methods are called). make-instance
is an easy-to-call
interface to instantiate-flavor
, below.
If :allow-other-keys
is used as an init keyword
with a non-nil
value, this error check is suppressed.
Then unrecognized keywords are simply ignored. Example:
(make-instance 'foo :lose 5 :allow-other-keys t)
specifies the init keyword :lose
, but prevents an error
should the keyword not be handled.
This is an extended version of make-instance
, giving you more features.
Note that it takes the init-plist as an individual argument, rather than taking a rest
argument of init options and values.
The init-plist argument must be a disembodied property list;
locf
of a rest argument is satisfactory. Beware! This property list
can be modified; the properties from the default init plist are
putprop
’ed on if not already present, and some :init
methods
do explicit putprop
’s onto the init-plist.
In the event that :init
methods remprop
properties already on
the init-plist (as opposed to simply doing get
and putprop
),
then the init-plist is rplacd
’ed. This means that the actual
supplied list of options is modified. It also means that locf
of a
rest argument does not work; the caller of instantiate-flavor
must copy its rest argument (e.g with copylist
); this is because
rplacd
is not allowed on stack lists.
Do not use nil
as the init-plist argument. This would mean
to use the properties of the symbol nil
as the init options.
If your goal is to have no init options, you must provide a property list
containing no properties, such as the list (nil)
.
Here is the sequence of actions by which instantiate-flavor
creates
a new instance:
First, the specified flavor’s instantiation flavor function (instantiation-flavor-function), if it exists, is called to determine which flavor should actually be instantiated. If there is no instantiation flavor function, the specified flavor is instantiated.
If the flavor’s method hash-table and other internal information have not been computed or are not up to date, they are computed. This may take a substantial amount of time or even invoke the compiler, but it happens only once for each time you define or redefine a particular flavor.
Next, the instance itself is created. If the area argument is
specified, it is the number of an area in which to cons the instance;
otherwise the flavor’s instance area function is called to choose an area
if there is one; otherwise, default-cons-area
is used. See
instance-area-function.
Then the initial values of the instance variables are computed. If an instance variable is declared inittable, and a keyword with the same spelling as its name appears in init-plist, the property for that keyword is used as the initial value.
Otherwise, if the default init plist specifies such a property, it is
evaluated and the value is used. Otherwise, if the flavor definition
specifies a default initialization form, it is evaluated and the value
is used. The initialization form may not refer to any instance
variables. It can find the new instance in self
but should not
invoke any operations on it and should not refer directly to any
instance variables. It can get at instance variables using accessor
macros created by the :outside-accessible-instance-variables
option
(outside-accessible-instance-variables-option) or the function
symeval-in-instance
(symeval-in-instance-fun).
If an instance variable does not get initialized either of these ways it
is left void; an :init
method may initialize it (see below).
All remaining keywords and values specified in the
:default-init-plist
option to defflavor
, that do not initialize
instance variables and are not overridden by anything explicitly specified
in init-plist are then merged into init-plist using putprop
.
The default init plist of the instantiated flavor is considered first,
followed by those of all the component flavors in the standard order.
See default-init-plist-option.
Then keywords appearing in the init-plist but not defined with the
:init-keywords
option or the :inittable-instance-variables
option for some component flavor are collected. If the
:allow-other-keys
option is specified with a non-nil
value
(either in the original init-plist argument or by some default init
plist) then these unhandled keywords are ignored. If the
return-unhandled-keywords argument is non-nil
, a list of these
keywords is returned as the second value of instantiate-flavor
.
Otherwise, an error is signaled if any unrecognized init keywords are
present.
If the send-init-message-p argument is supplied and non-nil
, an
:init
message is sent to the newly-created instance, with one
argument, the init-plist. get
can be used to extract options
from this property-list. Each flavor that needs initialization can
contribute an :init
method by defining a daemon.
The :init
methods should not look on the init-plist for keywords
that simply initialize instance variables (that is, keywords defined
with :inittable-instance-variables
rather than :init-keywords
).
The corresponding instance variables are already set up when the
:init
methods are called, and sometimes the keywords and their
values may actually be missing from the init-plist if it is more
efficient not to put them on. To avoid problems, always refer to the
instance variables themselves rather than looking for the init keywords
that initialize them.
"all
: flavor instances" :init init-plist ¶This operation is implemented on all flavor instances. Its purpose is to
examine the init keywords and perform whatever initializations are
appropriate. init-plist is the argument that was given to
instantiate-flavor
, and may be passed directly to get
to examine the value of any particular init option.
The default definition of this operation does nothing. However,
many flavors add :before
and :after
daemons to it.
Returns t
if object
is an instance.
This is equivalent to (typep object 'instance)
.
This is hairy and if you don’t understand it you should skip it.
Sometimes the way the flavor system combines the methods of different
flavors (the daemon system) is not powerful enough. In that case defwrapper
can be used to define a macro that expands into code that is wrapped around
the invocation of the methods. This is best explained by an example;
suppose you needed a lock locked during the processing of the
:foo
operation on flavor bar
, which takes two arguments,
and you have a lock-frobboz
special-form that knows how to lock the lock
(presumably it generates an unwind-protect
). lock-frobboz
needs to see
the first argument to the operation; perhaps that tells it what sort of operation
is going to be performed (read or write).
(defwrapper (bar :foo) ((arg1 arg2) . body) `(lock-frobboz (self arg1) . ,body))
The use of the body
macro-argument prevents the macro defined by
defwrapper
from knowing the exact implementation and allows
several defwrapper
’s from different flavors to be combined
properly.
Note well that the argument variables, arg1
and arg2
, are not referenced
with commas before them. These may look like defmacro
“argument” variables,
but they are not. Those variables are not bound at the time the defwrapper
-defined
macro is expanded and the back-quoting is done; rather the result of that
macro-expansion and back-quoting is code which, when a message is sent, will
bind those variables to the arguments in the message as local variables of
the combined method.
Consider another example. Suppose you thought you wanted a :before
daemon,
but found that if the argument was nil
you needed to return from processing
the message immediately, without executing the primary method. You could write
a wrapper such as
(defwrapper (bar :foo) ((arg1) . body) `(cond ((null arg1)) (t (print "About to do :FOO") . ,body)))
Suppose you need a variable for communication among the daemons for a particular
operation; perhaps the :after
daemons need to know what the primary method did,
and it is something that cannot be easily deduced from just the arguments. You
might use an instance variable for this, or you might create a special variable
which is bound during the processing of the operation and used free by the methods.
(defvar *communication*) (defwrapper (bar :foo) (ignore . body) `(let ((*communication* nil)) . ,body))
Similarly you might want a wrapper that puts a catch
around the processing
of an operation so that any one of the methods could throw out in the event of
an unexpected condition.
Like daemon methods, wrappers work in outside-in order; when you add a
defwrapper
to a flavor built on other flavors, the new wrapper
is placed outside any wrappers of the component flavors. However,
all wrappers happen before any daemons happen. When the combined
method is built, the calls to the before-daemon methods, primary methods,
and after-daemon methods are all placed together, and then the wrappers
are wrapped around them. Thus, if a component flavor defines a wrapper,
methods added by new flavors execute within that wrapper’s context.
:around
methods can do some of the same things that wrappers can. See
around-method-type. If one flavor defines both a wrapper and an
:around
method for the same operation, the :around
method is
executed inside the wrapper.
By careful about inserting the body into an internal lambda-expression
within the wrapper’s code. Doing so interacts with the internals of the
flavor system and requires knowledge of things not documented in the
manual in order to work properly. It is much simpler to use an
:around
method instead.
(undefmethod (flavor :before :operation))
removes the method created by
(defmethod (flavor :before :operation) (args) ...)
To remove a wrapper, use undefmethod
with :wrapper
as the method type.
undefmethod
is simply an interface to fundefine
(see fundefine-fun) that accepts the same syntax as
defmethod
.
If a file that used to contain a method definition is reloaded
and if that method no longer seems to have a definition in the file,
the user is asked whether to undefmethod
that method. This may be
important to enable the modified program to inherit the methods it is
supposed to inherit. If the method in question has been redefined by some
other file, this is not done, the assumption being that the definition was
merely moved.
Undefines flavor flavor. All methods of the flavor are lost. flavor and all flavors that depend on it are no longer valid to instantiate.
If instances of the discarded definition exist, they continue to use that definition.
When a message is sent to an object, the variable self
is automatically
bound to that object, for the benefit of methods which want to manipulate
the object itself (as opposed to its instance variables).
funcall-self
is nearly equivalent to funcall
with self
as
the first argument. funcall-self
used to be faster, but now
funcall
of self
is just as fast. Therefore, funcall-self
is obsolete. It should be replaced with funcall
or send
of self
.
Likewise, lexpr-funcall-self
should be replaced with use of
lexpr-send
to self
.
Applies function to arguments with sys:self-mapping-table
bound to mapping-table. This is faster than binding the variable
yourself and doing an ordinary funcall
, because the system assumes
that the mapping table you specify is the correct one for function
to be run with. However, if you pass the wrong mapping table, incorrect
execution will take place.
This function is used in the code for combined methods and is also useful
for the user in :around
methods (see around-method-type).
Applies function to arguments using lexpr-funcall
, with
sys:self-mapping-table
bound to mapping-table.
Sometimes it is useful to have a function which is not itself a method, but
which is to be called by methods and wants to be able to access the
instance variables of the object self
. The form
(declare-flavor-instance-variables (flavor-name) (defun function args body...))
surrounds the function definition with a peculiar kind of declaration
which makes the instance variables of flavor flavor-name
accessible by name. Any kind of function definition is allowed;
it does not have to use defun
per se.
If you call such a function when self
’s value is an instance whose
flavor does not include flavor-name as a component, it is an error.
Cleaner than using declare-flavor-instance-variables
, because it
does not involve putting anything around the function definition, is using
a local declaration. Put (declare (:self-flavor flavorname))
as
the first expression in the body of the function. For example:
(defun foo (a b) (declare (:self-flavor myobject)) (+ a (* b speed)))
(where speed
is an instance variable of the flavor myobject
)
is equivalent to
(declare-flavor-instance-variables (myobject) (defun foo (a b) (+ a (* b speed))))
Within the body of this special form, all of self
’s instance
variables are bound as specials to the values inside self
.
(Normally this is true only of those instance variables that are
specified in :special-instance-variables
when self
’s flavor was
defined.) As a result, inside the body you can use set
, boundp
and symeval
, etc, freely on the instance variables of self
.
t
) (do-dependents t
) ¶Updates the internal data of the flavor and any flavors that depend on it.
If single-operation is supplied non-nil
, only the methods for that
operation are changed. The system does this when you define a new method that
did not previously exist.
If use-old-combined-methods is t
, then the existing combined
method functions are used if possible. New ones are generated only
if the set of methods to be called has changed. This
is the default.
If use-old-combined-methods is nil
, automatically-generated functions
to call multiple methods or to contain code generated by wrappers are regenerated
unconditionally.
If do-dependents is nil
, only the specific flavor you specified
is recompiled. Normally all flavors that depend on it are also recompiled.
recompile-flavor
affects only flavors that have already been compiled.
Typically this means it affects flavors that have been instantiated,
but does not bother with mixins (see mixin-flavor).
If this variable is non-nil
, automatic recompilation of combined methods
is turned off.
If you wish to make several changes each of which will cause recompilation
of the same combined methods, you can use this variable to speed things up by
making the recompilations happen only once. Set the variable to t
,
make your changes, and then set the variable back to nil
.
Then use recompile-flavor
to recompile whichever combined methods
need it. For example:
(setq si:*dont-recompile-flavors* t) (undefmethod (tv:sheet :after :bar)) (defmethod (tv:sheet :before :bar) ...) (setq si:*dont-recompile-flavors* nil) (recompile-flavor 'tv:sheet :bar)
tv:sheet
has very many dependents; recompile-flavor
even once
takes painfully long. It’s nice to avoid spending the time twice.
The form (compile-flavor-methods flavor-name-1
flavor-name-2...)
, placed in a file to be compiled, directs the
compiler to include the automatically-generated combined methods for the
named flavors in the resulting QFASL file, provided all of the necessary
flavor definitions have been made. Furthermore, all internal data
structures needed to instantiate the flavor will be computed when the
QFASL file is loaded rather than waiting until the first attempt to
instantiate it.
This means that the combined methods get compiled at compile time and the data structures get generated at load time, rather than both things happening at run time. This is a very good thing, since if the the compiler must be invoked at run time, the program will be slow the first time it is run. (The compiler must be called in any case if incompatible changes have been made, such as addition or deletion of methods that must be called by a combined method.)
You should only use compile-flavor-methods
for flavors that are
going to be instantiated. For a flavor that is never to be instantiated
(that is, a flavor that only serves to be a component of other flavors
that actually do get instantiated), it is a complete waste of time,
except in the unusual case where those other flavors can all inherit
the combined methods of this flavor instead of each one having its
own copy of a combined method which happens to be identical to the
others. In this unusual case, you should use the :abstract-flavor
option in defflavor
(abstract-flavor-option).
The compile-flavor-methods
forms should be compiled after all of
the information needed to create the combined methods is available. You
should put these forms after all of the definitions of all relevant
flavors, wrappers, and methods of all components of the flavors mentioned.
The methods used by compile-flavor-methods
to form the combined
methods that go in the QFASL file are all those present in the file
being compiled and all those defined in the Lisp world.
When a compile-flavor-methods
form is seen by the interpreter,
the combined methods are compiled and the internal data structures
are generated.
Given an object and an operation, this returns the object’s method for that
operation, or nil
if it has none. When object is an instance of
a flavor, this function can be useful to find which of that flavor’s
components supplies the method. If you get back a combined method,
you can use the Meta-X List Combined Methods
editor command (list-combined-methods)
to find out what it does.
This is related to the :handler
function spec
(see function-spec).
It is preferable to use the generic operation :get-handler-for
.
Returns non-nil
if the flavor named flavor-name allows keyword
in the init options when it is instantiated, or nil
if it does not.
The non-nil
value is the name of the component flavor that contributes
the support of that keyword.
Returns a list of all the init keywords that may be used in instantiating flavor-name.
Returns the value of the instance variable symbol inside
instance. If there is no such instance variable, an error is
signaled, unless no-error-p is non-nil
in which case nil
is returned.
Sets the value of the instance variable symbol inside instance to value. If there is no such instance variable, an error is signaled.
Returns a locative pointer to the cell inside instance which holds the value of the instance variable named symbol.
Prints descriptive information about a flavor; it is self-explanatory. An important thing it tells you that can be hard to figure out yourself is the combined list of component flavors; this list is what is printed after the phrase ‘and directly or indirectly depends on’.
Contains a history of when the flavor mechanism invoked the compiler. It is a list; elements toward the front of the list represent more recent compilations. Elements are typically of the form
(function-spec pathname)
where the function spec starts with :method
and has a method type of
:combined
.
You may setq
this variable to nil
at any time; for instance before
loading some files that you suspect may have missing or obsolete
compile-flavor-methods
in them.
sys:unclaimed-message
: (error
) ¶This condition is signaled whenever a flavor instance is sent a message whose operation it does not handle. The condition instance supports these operations:
:object
The flavor instance that received the message.
:operation
The operation that was not handled.
:arguments
The list of arguments to that operation
There are quite a few options to defflavor
. They are all described here,
although some are for very specialized purposes and not of interest to most users.
Each option can be written in two forms; either the keyword by itself, or a list
of the keyword and arguments to that keyword.
Several of these options declare things about instance variables.
These options can be given with arguments which are instance variables,
or without any arguments in which case they refer to all of the
instance variables listed at the top of the defflavor
. This is
not necessarily all the instance variables of the component
flavors, just the ones mentioned in this flavor’s defflavor
. When
arguments are given, they must be instance variables that were listed
at the top of the defflavor
; otherwise they are assumed to be
misspelled and an error is signaled. It is legal to declare things
about instance variables inherited from a component flavor, but to do
so you must list these instance variables explicitly in the instance
variable list at the top of the defflavor
.
:gettable-instance-variables
¶Enables automatic generation of methods for getting the values of instance variables. The operation name is the name of the variable, in the keyword package (i.e it has a colon in front of it).
Note that there is nothing special about these methods; you could easily
define them yourself. This option generates them automatically to save
you the trouble of writing out a lot of very simple method definitions.
(The same is true of methods defined by the
:settable-instance-variables
option.) If you define a method for the
same operation name as one of the automatically generated methods, the
explicit definition overrides the automatic one.
:settable-instance-variables
¶Enables automatic generation of methods for setting the values of
instance variables. The operation name is ‘:set-
’ followed by the
name of the variable. All settable instance
variables are also automatically made gettable and inittable.
(See the note in the description of the :gettable-instance-variables
option, above.)
In addition, :case
methods are generated for the :set
operation
with suboperations taken from the names of the variables, so that
:set
can be used to set them.
:inittable-instance-variables
¶The instance variables listed as arguments, or all instance variables
listed in this defflavor
if the keyword is given alone, are made
inittable. This means that they can be initialized through use of a
keyword (a colon followed by the name of the variable) as an init-option
argument to make-instance
.
:special-instance-variables
¶The instance variables listed as arguments, or all instance variables
listed in this defflavor
if the keyword is given alone, will
be bound dynamically when handling messages. (By default, instance
variables are bound lexically with the scope being the method.)
You must do this to any instance variables that you wish to be accessible
through symeval
, set
, boundp
and makunbound
, since they
see only dynamic bindings.
This should also be done for any instance variables that are declared
globally special. If you omit this, the flavor system does it for
you automatically when you instantiate the flavor, and gives you a
warning to remind you to fix the defflavor
.
:init-keywords
¶The arguments are declared to be valid keywords to use in
instantiate-flavor
when creating an instance of this flavor (or any
flavor containing it). The system uses this for error-checking: before
the system sends the :init
message, it makes sure that all the
keywords in the init-plist are either inittable instance variables or
elements of this list. If any is not recognized, an error is signaled.
When you write a :init
method that accepts some keywords, they
should be listed in the :init-keywords
option of the flavor.
If :allow-other-keys
is used as an init keyword
with a non-nil
value, this error check is suppressed.
Then unrecognized keywords are simply ignored.
:default-init-plist
¶The arguments are alternating keywords and value forms, like a property list. When the flavor is instantiated, these properties and values are put into the init-plist unless already present. This allows one component flavor to default an option to another component flavor. The value forms are only evaluated when and if they are used. For example,
(:default-init-plist :frob-array (make-array 100))
would provide a default “frob array” for any instance for which the user did not provide one explicitly.
(:default-init-plist :allow-other-keys t)
prevents errors for unhandled init keywords in all instantiation of this flavor and other flavors that depend on it.
:required-init-keywords defflavor
The arguments are init keywords which are to be required each time this flavor (or any flavor containing it) is instantiated. An error is signaled if any required init keyword is missing.
:required-instance-variables
¶Declares that any flavor incorporating this one that is instantiated into an object must contain the specified instance variables. An error occurs if there is an attempt to instantiate a flavor that incorporates this one if it does not have these in its set of instance variables. Note that this option is not one of those that checks the spelling of its arguments in the way described at the start of this section (if it did, it would be useless).
Required instance variables may be freely accessed by methods just like
normal instance variables. The difference between listing instance
variables here and listing them at the front of the defflavor
is
that the latter declares that this flavor “owns” those variables and
accepts responsibility for initializing them, while the former declares that this
flavor depends on those variables but that some other flavor must be
provided to manage them and whatever features they imply.
:required-methods
¶The arguments are names of operations that any flavor incorporating this
one must handle. An error occurs if there is an attempt to instantiate
such a flavor and it is lacking a method for one of these operations.
Typically this option appears in the defflavor
for a base flavor
(see base-flavor). Usually this is used when a base flavor does a
(send self ...)
to send itself a message that is
not handled by the base flavor itself; the idea is that the base flavor
will not be instantiated alone, but only with other components (mixins)
that do handle the message. This keyword allows the error of having no
handler for the message to be detected when the flavor instantiated or when
compile-flavor-methods
is done, rather than when the missing
operation is used.
:required-flavors
¶The arguments are names of flavors that any flavor incorporating this one
must include as components, directly or indirectly. The difference between
declaring flavors as required and listing them directly as components at the
top of the defflavor
is that declaring flavors to be required does not make
any commitments about where those flavors will appear in the ordered list of
components; that is left up to whoever does specify them as components.
The purpose of declaring a flavor to be required is to allow
instance variables declared by that flavor to be accessed. It also provides
error checking: an attempt to instantiate a flavor that does not include the
required flavors as components signals an error. Compare this with
:required-methods
and :required-instance-variables
.
For an example of the use of required flavors, consider the ship
example given earlier, and suppose we want to define a relativity-mixin
which increases the mass dependent on the speed. We might write,
(defflavor relativity-mixin () (moving-object)) (defmethod (relativity-mixin :mass) () (// mass (sqrt (- 1 (^ (// (send self :speed) *speed-of-light*) 2)))))
but this would lose because any flavor that had relativity-mixin
as a component would get moving-object
right after it in its
component list. As a base flavor, moving-object
should be last
in the list of components so that other components mixed in can replace
its methods and so that daemon methods combine in the right order.
relativity-mixin
has no business changing the order in which flavors
are combined, which should be under the control of its caller. For example,
(defflavor starship () (relativity-mixin long-distance-mixin ship))
puts moving-object
last (inheriting it from ship
).
So instead of the definition above we write,
(defflavor relativity-mixin () () (:required-flavors moving-object))
which allows relativity-mixin
’s methods to access moving-object
instance variables such as mass
(the rest mass), but does not
specify any place for moving-object
in the list of components.
It is very common to specify the base flavor of a mixin with the
:required-flavors
option in this way.
:included-flavors
¶The arguments are names of flavors to be included in this flavor. The difference
between declaring flavors here and declaring them at the top of the defflavor
is that when component flavors are combined, if an included flavor is not specified
as a normal component, it is inserted into the list of components immediately after
the last component to include it. Thus included flavors act like defaults.
The important thing is that if an included flavor is specified as a component,
its position in the list of components is completely controlled by that specification,
independently of where the flavor that includes it appears in the list.
:included-flavors
and :required-flavors
are used in similar ways; it would
have been reasonable to use :included-flavors
in the relativity-mixin
example above. The difference is that when a flavor is required but not given
as a normal component, an error is signaled, but when a flavor is included
but not given as a normal component, it is automatically inserted into the list
of components at a reasonable place.
:no-vanilla-flavor
¶Normally when a flavor is instantiated, the special flavor
si:vanilla-flavor
is included automatically at the end of its list of
components. The vanilla flavor provides some default methods for the
standard operations which all objects are supposed to understand. These
include :print-self
, :describe
, :which-operations
, and several
other operations. See vanilla-flavor.
If any component of a flavor specifies the :no-vanilla-flavor
option,
then si:vanilla-flavor
is not included in that flavor. This option
should not be used casually.
:default-handler
¶The argument is the name of a function that is to be called to handle
any operation for which there is no method. Its arguments are
the arguments of the send
which invoked the operation,
including the operation name as the first argument. Whatever values
the default handler returns are the values of the operation.
Default handlers can be inherited from component flavors. If a flavor
has no default handler, any operation for which there is no method
signals a sys:unclaimed-message
error.
:ordered-instance-variables
¶This option is mostly for esoteric internal system uses.
The arguments are names of instance variables which must appear first (and in this order)
in all instances of this flavor, or any flavor depending on this flavor.
This is used for instance variables that are specially known about by
microcode, and also in connection with the :outside-accessible-instance-variables
option. If the keyword is given alone, the arguments default to the list
of instance variables given at the top of this defflavor
.
Removing any of the :ordered-instance-variables
, or changing their
positions in the list, requires that you recompile all methods that use
any of the affected instance variables.
:outside-accessible-instance-variables
¶The arguments are instance variables which are to be accessible from
outside of this flavor’s methods.
A macro (actually a subst) is defined which takes an object of
this flavor as an argument and returns the value of the instance variable;
setf
may be used to set the value of the instance variable. The name
of the macro is the name of the flavor concatenated with a hyphen and the
name of the instance variable. These macros are similar to the accessor
macros created by defstruct
(see defstruct.)
This feature works in two different ways, depending on whether the instance
variable has been declared to have a fixed slot in all instances, via the
:ordered-instance-variables
option.
If the variable is not ordered, the position of its value cell in the instance must be computed at run time. This takes noticeable time, although less than actually sending a message would take. An error is signaled if the argument to the accessor macro is not an instance or is an instance that does not have an instance variable with the appropriate name. However, there is no error check that the flavor of the instance is the flavor the accessor macro was defined for, or a flavor built upon that flavor. This error check would be too expensive.
If the variable is ordered, the compiler compiles a call to
the accessor macro into a subprimitive which simply accesses that
variable’s assigned slot by number. This subprimitive is only three
or four times slower than car
. The only error-checking
performed is to make sure that the argument is really an instance
and is really big enough to contain that slot. There is no check
that the accessed slot really belongs to an instance variable of
the appropriate name.
:accessor-prefix
¶Normally the accessor macro created by the :outside-accessible-instance-variables
option to access the flavor f’s instance variable v is named f-v.
Specifying (:accessor-prefix get$)
causes it to be named get$v
instead.
:alias-flavor
¶Marks this flavor as being an alias for another flavor. This flavor should have only one component, which is the flavor it is an alias for, and no instance variables or other options. No methods should be defined for it.
The effect of the :alias-flavor
option is that an attempt to instantiate
this flavor actually produces an instance of the other flavor. Without
this option, it would make an instance of this flavor, which might behave
identically to an instance of the other flavor. :alias-flavor
eliminates
the need for separate mapping tables, method tables, etc for this flavor,
which becomes truly just another name for its component flavor.
The alias flavor and its base flavor are also equivalent when used as
an argument of subtypep
or as the second argument of typep
;
however, if the alias status of a flavor is changed, you must
recompile any code which uses it as the second argument to typep
in order for such code to function.
:alias-flavor
is mainly useful for changing a flavor’s name gracefully.
:abstract-flavor
¶This option marks the flavor as one that is not supposed to be instantiated (that is, is supposed to be used only as a component of other flavors). An attempt to instantiate the flavor signals an error.
It is sometimes useful to do compile-flavor-methods
on a flavor that
is not going to be instantiated, if the combined methods for this flavor
will be inherited and shared by many others. :abstract-flavor
tells
compile-flavor-methods
not to complain about missing required
flavors, methods or instance variables. Presumably the flavors that
depend on this one and actually are instantiated will supply what is
lacking.
:method-combination
¶Specifies the method combination style to be used for certain
operations.
Each argument to this option is a list (style order operation1 operation2...)
.
operation1, operation2, etc. are names of operations whose methods
are to be combined in the declared fashion. style is a keyword that
specifies a style of combination; see method-combination. order
is a keyword whose interpretation is up to style; typically it is
either :base-flavor-first
or :base-flavor-last
.
Any component of a flavor may specify the type of method combination to
be used for a particular operation. If no component specifies a style
of method combination, then the default style is used, namely
:daemon
. If more than one component of a flavor specifies the
combination style for a given operation, then they must agree on the
specification, or else an error is signaled.
:instance-area-function defflavor
The argument is the name of a function to be used when this flavor is instantiated, to determine which area to create the new instance in. Use a function name rather than an explicit lambda expression.
(:instance-area-function function-name)
When the instance area function is called, it is given the init plist as
an argument, and should return an area number or nil
to use the
default. Init keyword values can be accessed using get
on the init
plist.
Instance area functions can be inherited from component flavors.
If a flavor does not have or inherit an instance area function,
its instances are created in default-cons-area
.
:instantiation-flavor-function defflavor
You can define a flavor foo
so that, when you try to instantiate it,
it calls a function to decide what flavor it should really instantiate
(not necessarily foo
). This is done by giving foo
an
instantiation flavor function:
(:instantiation-flavor-function function-name)
When (make-instance 'foo keyword-args...)
is done, the
instantiation flavor function is called with two arguments: the flavor
name specified (foo
in this case) and the init plist (the list of
keyword args). It should return the name of the flavor that should
actually be instantiated.
Note that the instantiation flavor function applies only to the flavor it is specified for. It is not inherited by dependent flavors.
:run-time-alternatives defflavor
:mixture defflavor
A run-time-alternative flavor defines a collection of similar flavors, all built on the same base flavor but having various mixins as well. Instantiation chooses a flavor of the collection at run time based on the init keywords specified, using an automatically generated instantiation flavor function.
A simple example would be
(defflavor foo () (basic-foo) (:run-time-alternatives (:big big-foo-mixin)) (:init-keywords :big))
Then (make-instance 'foo :big t)
makes an instance of a flavor
whose components are big-foo-mixin
as well as foo
. But
(make-instance 'foo)
or (make-instance 'foo :big nil)
makes an
instance of foo
itself. The clause (:big big-foo-mixin)
in the
:run-time-alternatives
says to incorporate big-foo-mixin
if
:big
’s value is t
, but not if it is nil
.
There may be several clauses in the :run-time-alternatives
. Each
one is processed independently. Thus, two keywords :big
and
:wide
could independently control two mixins, giving four
possibilities.
(defflavor foo () (basic-foo) (:run-time-alternatives (:big big-foo-mixin) (:wide wide-foo-mixin)) (:init-keywords :big))
It is possible to test for values other than t
and nil
. The clause
(:size (:big big-foo-mixin) (:small small-foo-mixin) (nil nil))
allows the value for the keyword :size
to be :big
, :small
or nil
(or omitted).
If it is nil
or omitted, no mixin is used (that’s what the second nil
means).
If it is :big
or :small
, an appropriate mixin is used. This kind of clause
is distinguished from the simpler kind by having a list as its second element.
The values to check for can be anything, but eq
is used to compare them.
The value of one keyword can control the interpretation of others by nesting clauses within clauses. If an alternative has more than two elements, the additional elements are subclauses which are considered only if that alternative is selected. For example, the clause
(:etherial (t etherial-mixin) (nil nil (:size (:big big-foo-mixin) (:small small-foo-mixin) (nil nil))))
says to consider the :size
keyword only if :etherial
is nil
.
:mixture
is synonymous with :run-time-alternatives
. It exists
for compatibility with Symbolics systems.
:documentation
¶Specifies the documentation string for the flavor definition, which is
made accessible through (documentation flavorname 'flavor)
.
This documentation can be viewed with the describe-flavor
function
(see describe-flavor-fun) or the editor’s Meta-X Describe Flavor
command (see describe-flavor-command).
Previously this option expected two arguments, a keyword and a string. The keyword was intended to classify the flavor as a base flavor, mixin or combination. But no way was found for this classification to serve a useful purpose. Keyword are still accepted but no longer recommended for use.
The following organization conventions are recommended for programs that use flavors.
A base flavor is a flavor that defines a whole family of related flavors,
all of which have that base flavor as a component.
Typically the base flavor includes things relevant to the whole family,
such as instance variables, :required-methods
and :required-instance-variables
declarations, default methods for certain operations, :method-combination
declarations, and documentation on the general protocols and conventions
of the family. Some base flavors are complete and can be instantiated, but
most are not instantiatable and merely serve as a base upon which to build
other flavors. The base flavor for the foo family is often named basic-foo
.
A mixin flavor is a flavor that defines one particular feature of an object.
A mixin cannot be instantiated, because it is not a complete description.
Each module or feature of a program
is defined as a separate mixin; a usable flavor can be constructed by choosing
the mixins for the desired characteristics and combining them, along with the
appropriate base flavor. By organizing your flavors this way, you keep separate
features in separate flavors, and you can pick and choose among them.
Sometimes the order of combining mixins does not matter,
but often it does, because the order of flavor combination controls the order
in which daemons are invoked and wrappers are wrapped. Such order dependencies
should be documented as part of the conventions of the appropriate family of flavors.
A mixin flavor that provides the mumble feature is often named mumble-mixin
.
If you are writing a program that uses someone else’s facility to do something,
using that facility’s flavors and methods, your program may still define
its own flavors, in a simple way. The facility provides a base flavor and
a set of mixins: the caller can combine these in various ways depending
on exactly what it wants, since the facility probably does not provide all possible
useful combinations. Even if your private flavor has exactly the
same components as a pre-existing flavor, it can still be useful since
you can use its :default-init-plist
(see default-init-plist-option) to
select options of its component flavors and you can define one or two methods
to customize it “just a little”.
The operations described in this section are a standard protocol, which all
message-receiving objects are assumed to understand. The standard methods
that implement this protocol are automatically supplied by the flavor
system unless the user specifically tells it not to do so. These methods
are associated with the flavor si:vanilla-flavor
:
: si:vanilla-flavor ¶Unless you specify otherwise (with the :no-vanilla-flavor
option to
defflavor
), every flavor includes the “vanilla” flavor, which has no
instance variables but provides some basic useful methods.
:print-self
: stream prindepth escape-p ¶The object should output its printed-representation to a stream. The
printer sends this message when it encounters an instance or an entity.
The arguments are the stream, the current depth in list-structure (for
comparison with prinlevel
), and whether escaping is enabled (a copy
of the value of *print-escape*
; see *print-escape*-var).
si:vanilla-flavor
ignores the last two arguments and prints something like
#<flavor-name octal-address>
. The flavor-name tells you
what type of object it is and the octal-address allows you to tell
different objects apart (provided the garbage collector doesn’t move
them behind your back).
: :describe ¶The object should describe itself, printing a description onto the
*standard-output*
stream. The describe
function sends this
message when it encounters an instance. si:vanilla-flavor
outputs in a reasonable format the object, the name of its flavor, and
the names and values of its instance-variables.
:set
: keyword value ¶The object should set the internal value specified by keyword
to the new value value. For flavor instances, the :set
operation uses :case
method combination, and a method is
generated automatically to set each settable instance variable,
with keyword being the variable’s name as a keyword.
: :which-operations ¶The object should return a list of the operations it can handle.
si:vanilla-flavor
generates the list once per flavor and remembers
it, minimizing consing and compute-time. If the set of operations
handled is changed, this list is regenerated the next time someone asks
for it.
:operation-handled-p
: operation ¶operation is an operation name. The object should return t
if it
has a handler for the specified operation, nil
if it does not.
:get-handler-for
: operation ¶operation is an operation name.
The object should return the method it uses to handle operation.
If it has no handler for that operation, it should return nil
.
This is like the get-handler-for
function (see get-handler-for-fun),
but, of course, you can use it only on objects known to accept messages.
:send-if-handles
: operation &rest arguments ¶operation is an operation name and arguments is a list of
arguments for the operation. If the object handles the operation, it
should send itself a message with that operation and arguments, and
return whatever values that message returns. If it doesn’t handle the
operation it should just return nil
.
:eval-inside-yourself
: form ¶The argument is a form that is evaluated in an environment in which special
variables with the names of the instance variables are bound to the values
of the instance variables. It works to setq
one of these special variables;
the instance variable is modified. This is intended to be used mainly
for debugging.
:funcall-inside-yourself
: function &rest args ¶function is applied to args in an environment in which special
variables with the names of the instance variables are bound to the values
of the instance variables. It works to setq
one of these special variables;
the instance variable is modified. This is a way of allowing callers
to provide actions to be performed in an environment set up by the instance.
: :break ¶break
is called in an environment in which special
variables with the names of the instance variables are bound to the values
of the instance variables.
When a flavor has or inherits more than one method for an operation, they must be called in a specific sequence. The flavor system creates a function called a combined method which calls all the user-specified methods in the proper order. Invocation of the operation actually calls the combined method, which is responsible for calling the others.
For example, if the flavor foo
has components and methods as follows:
(defflavor foo () (foo-mixin foo-base)) (defflavor foo-mixin () (bar-mixin)) (defmethod (foo :before :hack) ...) (defmethod (foo :after :hack) ...) (defmethod (foo-mixin :before :hack) ...) (defmethod (foo-mixin :after :hack) ...) (defmethod (bar-mixin :before :hack) ...) (defmethod (bar-mixin :hack) ...) (defmethod (foo-base :hack) ...) (defmethod (foo-base :after :hack) ...)
then the combined method generated looks like this (ignoring many important details not related to this issue):
(defmethod (foo :combined :hack) (&rest args) (apply #'(:method foo :before :hack) args) (apply #'(:method foo-mixin :before :hack) args) (apply #'(:method bar-mixin :before :hack) args) (multiple-value-prog1 (apply #'(:method bar-mixin :hack) args) (apply #'(:method foo-base :after :hack) args) (apply #'(:method foo-mixin :after :hack) args) (apply #'(:method foo :after :hack) args)))
This example shows the default style of method combination, the one
described in the introductory parts of this chapter, called :daemon
combination. Each style of method combination defines which method types
it allows, and what they mean. :daemon
combination
accepts method types :before
and :after
,
in addition to untyped methods; then it creates a combined method which
calls all the :before
methods, only one of the untyped methods, and
then all the :after
methods, returning the value of the untyped
method. The combined method is constructed by a function much like a
macro’s expander function, and the precise technique used to create the
combined method is what gives :before
and :after
their meaning.
Note that the :before
methods are called in the order foo
,
foo-mixin
, bar-mixin
and foo-base
. (foo-base
does not
have a :before
method, but if it had one that one would be last.)
This is the standard ordering of the components of the flavor foo
(see flavor-components); since it puts the base flavor last, it is
called :base-flavor-last
ordering. The :after
methods are
called in the opposite order, in which the base flavor comes first.
This is called :base-flavor-first
ordering.
Only one of the untyped methods is used; it is the one that comes first
in :base-flavor-last
ordering. An untyped method used in this way
is called a primary method.
Other styles of method combination define their own method types
and have their own ways of combining them. Use of another
style of method combination is requested with the :method-combination
option to
defflavor
(see method-combination-option). Here is an example
which uses :list
method combination, a style of combination
that allows :list
methods and untyped methods:
(defflavor foo () (foo-mixin foo-base)) (defflavor foo-mixin () (bar-mixin)) (defflavor foo-base () () (:method-combination (:list :base-flavor-last :win))) (defmethod (foo :list :win) ...) (defmethod (foo :win) ...) (defmethod (foo-mixin :list :win) ...) (defmethod (bar-mixin :list :win) ...) (defmethod (bar-mixin :win) ...) (defmethod (foo-base :win) ...)
yielding the combined method
(defmethod (foo :combined :win) (&rest args) (list (apply #'(:method foo :list :win) args) (apply #'(:method foo-mixin :list :win) args) (apply #'(:method bar-mixin :list :win) args) (apply #'(:method foo :win) args) (apply #'(:method bar-mixin :win) args) (apply #'(:method foo-base :win) args)))
The :method-combination
option in the defflavor
for foo-base
causes :list
method combination to be used for the :win
operation on all flavors that have foo-base
as a component,
including foo
. The result is a combined method which calls all the
methods, including all the untyped methods rather than just one, and
makes a list of the values they return. All the :list
methods are
called first, followed by all the untyped methods; and within each type,
the :base-flavor-last
ordering is used as specified. If the :method-combination
option said :base-flavor-first
, the relative order of the :list
methods would be reversed, and so would the untyped methods, but
the :list
methods would still be called before the untyped ones.
:base-flavor-last
is more often right, since it means that
foo
’s own methods are called first and si:vanilla-flavor
’s
methods (if it has any) are called last.
A few specific method types, such as :default
and :around
, have
standard meanings independent of the style of method combination, and
can be used with any style. They are described in a table below.
Here are the standardly defined method combination styles.
:daemon
The default style of method combination. All the :before
methods are called, then the primary (untyped) method for the outermost
flavor that has one is called, then all the :after
methods are
called. The value returned is the value of the primary method.
:daemon-with-or
Like the :daemon
method combination style, except that the primary
method is wrapped in an :or
special form with all :or
methods.
Multiple values can be returned from the primary method, but not from
the :or
methods (as in the or
special form). This produces
code like the following in combined methods:
(progn (foo-before-method) (multiple-value-prog1 (or (foo-or-method) (foo-primary-method)) (foo-after-method)))
This is useful primarily for flavors in which a mixin introduces an
alternative to the primary method. Each :or
method gets a chance
to run before the primary method and to decide whether the primary
method should be run or not; if any :or
method returns a non-nil
value, the primary method is not run (nor are the rest of the :or
methods). Note that the ordering of the combination of the :or
methods
is controlled by the order keyword in the :method-combination
option.
:daemon-with-and
Like :daemon-with-or
except that it combines :and
methods
in an and
special form. The primary method is run only
if all of the :and
methods return non-nil
values.
:daemon-with-override
Like the :daemon
method combination style, except an or
special form is wrapped around the entire combined method with all
:override
typed methods before the combined method. This differs
from :daemon-with-or
in that the :before
and :after
daemons
are run only if none of the :override
methods returns
non-nil
. The combined method looks something like this:
(or (foo-override-method) (progn (foo-before-method) (foo-primary-method) (foo-after-method)))
:progn
Calls all the methods inside a progn
special form. Only
untyped and :progn
methods are allowed. The combined method calls
all the :progn
methods and then all the untyped methods. The result
of the combined method is whatever the last of the methods returns.
:or
Calls all the methods inside an or
special form. This means
that each of the methods is called in turn. Only untyped methods and
:or
methods are allowed; the :or
methods are called first. If a
method returns a non-nil
value, that value is returned and none of
the rest of the methods are called; otherwise, the next method is
called. In other words, each method is given a chance to handle the
message; if it doesn’t want to handle the message, it can return
nil
, and the next method gets a chance to try.
:and
Calls all the methods inside an and
special form. Only
untyped methods and :and
methods are allowed. The basic idea is
much like :or
; see above.
:append
Calls all the methods and appends the values together.
Only untyped methods and :append
methods are allowed; the
:append
methods are called first.
:nconc
Calls all the methods and nconc
’s the values together.
Only untyped methods and :nconc
methods are allowed, etc.
:list
Calls all the methods and returns a list of their returned values.
Only untyped methods and :list
methods are allowed, etc.
:inverse-list
Calls each method with one argument; these arguments are successive
elements of the list that is the sole argument to the operation.
Returns no particular value. Only untyped methods and :inverse-list
methods are allowed, etc.
If the result of a :list
-combined operation is
sent back with an :inverse-list
-combined operation, with the same
ordering and with corresponding method definitions, each component
flavor receives the value that came from that flavor.
:pass-on
Calls each method on the values returned by the preceeding one. The values
returned by the combined method are those of the outermost call. The format
of the declaration in the defflavor
is:
(:method-combination (:pass-on (ordering . arglist)) . operation-names)
where ordering is :base-flavor-first
or :base-flavor-last
.
arglist may include the &aux
and &optional
keywords.
Only untyped methods and :pass-on
methods are allowed.
The :pass-on
methods are called first.
:case
With :case
method combination, the combined method automatically
does a selectq
dispatch on the first argument of the operation,
known as the suboperation. Methods of type :case
can be used,
and each one specifies one suboperation that it applies to. If no
:case
method matches the suboperation, the primary method, if any,
is called.
Example:
(defflavor foo (a b) () (:method-combination (:case :base-flavor-last :win)))
This method handles (send a-foo :win :a)
:
(defmethod (foo :case :win :a) () a)
This method handles (send a-foo :win :a*b)
:
(defmethod (foo :case :win :a*b) () (* a b))
This method handles (send a-foo :win :something-else)
:
(defmethod (foo :win) (suboperation) (list 'something-random suboperation))
:case
methods are unusual in that one flavor can have many :case
methods for the same operation, as long as they are for different
suboperations.
The suboperations :which-operations
, :operation-handled-p
,
:send-if-handles
and :get-handler-for
are all handled
automatically based on the collection of :case
methods that are
present.
Methods of type :or
are also allowed. They are called just before
the primary method, and if one of them returns a non-nil
value, that
is the value of the operation, and no more methods are called.
Here is a table of all the method types recognized by the standard styles of method combination.
(no type)
If no type is given to defmethod
, a primary method is created.
This is the most common type of method.
:before
:after
Used for the before-daemon and after-daemon
methods used by :daemon
method combination.
:default
If there are no untyped methods among any of the flavors being combined,
then the :default
methods (if any) are treated as if they were untyped.
If there are any untyped methods, the :default
methods are ignored.
Typically a base-flavor (see base-flavor) defines some default methods for certain of the operations understood by its family. When using the default kind of method combination these default methods are suppressed if another component provides a primary method.
:or
:and
Used for :daemon-with-or
and :daemon-with-and
method combination. The :or
methods are wrapped in an or
,
or the :and
methods are wrapped in an and
, together
with the primary method, between the :before
and :after
methods.
:override
Allows the features of :or
method combination to
be used together with daemons. If you specify
:daemon-with-override
method combination, you may use
:override
methods. The :override
methods are executed first, until
one of them returns non-nil
. If this happens, that method’s value(s)
are returned and no more methods are used. If all the :override
methods return nil
, the :before
, primary and :after
methods are
executed as usual.
In typical usages of this feature, the
:override
method usually returns nil
and does nothing,
but in exceptional circumstances it takes over the handling of the
operation.
:or, :and, :progn, :list, :inverse-list, pass-on, :append, :nconc.
Each of these methods types is allowed in the method combination style of the same name. In those method combination styles, these typed methods work just like untyped ones, but all the typed methods are called before all the untyped ones.
:case
:case
methods are used by :case
method combination.
These method types can be used with any method combination style; they have standard meanings independent of the method combination style being used.
:around
An :around
method is able to control when, whether and how the
remaining methods are executed. It is given a continuation that is a
function that will execute the remaining methods, and has complete
responsibility for calling it or not, and deciding what arguments to give
it. For the simplest behavior, the arguments should be the operation name
and operation arguments that the :around
method itself received; but
sometimes the whole purpose of the :around
method is to modify the
arguments before the remaining methods see them.
The :around
method receives three special arguments before the
arguments of the operation itself: the continuation, the
mapping-table, and the original-argument-list. The last is a list
of the operation name and operation arguments. The simplest way
for the :around
method to invoke the remaining methods is to do
(lexpr-funcall-with-mapping-table continuation mapping-table original-argument-list)
In general, the continuation should be called with either
funcall-with-mapping-table
or lexpr-funcall-with-mapping-table
,
providing the continuation, the mapping-table, and the operation name
(which you know because it is the same as in the defmethod
), followed
by whatever arguments the remaining methods are supposed to see.
(defflavor foo-one-bigger-mixin () ()) (defmethod (foo-one-bigger-mixin :around :set-foo) (cont mt ignore new-foo) (funcall-with-mapping-table cont mt :set-foo (1+ new-foo)))
is a mixin which modifies the :set-foo
operation so that the value
actually used in it is one greater than the value specified in the message.
:inverse-around
:inverse-around
methods work like :around
methods, but they are
invoked at a different time and in a different order.
With :around
methods, those of earlier flavor components components
are invoked first, starting with the instantiated flavor itself, and
those of earlier components are invoked within them.
:inverse-around
methods are invoked in the opposite order:
si:vanilla-flavor
would come first. Also, all :around
methods
and wrappers are invoked inside all the :inverse-around
methods.
For example, the :inverse-around
:init
method for tv:sheet
(a base
flavor for all window flavors) is used to handle the init keywords
:expose-p
and :activate-p
, which cannot be handled correctly
until the window is entirely set up. They are handled in this method
because it is guaranteed to be the first method invoked by the :init
operation on any flavor of window (because no component of tv:sheet
defines an :inverse-around
method for this operation). All the rest
of the work of making a new window valid takes place in this method’s
continuation; when the continuation returns, the window must be as valid
as it will ever be, and it is ready to be exposed or activated.
:wrapper
Used internally by defwrapper
.
Note that if one flavor defines both a wrapper and an :around
method
for the same operation, the :around
method is executed inside the
wrapper.
:combined
Used internally for automatically-generated combined methods.
The most common form of combination is :daemon
. One thing may not
be clear: when do you use a :before
daemon and when do you use an :after
daemon? In some cases the primary method performs a clearly-defined
action and the choice is obvious: :before :launch-rocket
puts in the
fuel, and :after :launch-rocket
turns on the radar tracking.
In other cases the choice can be less obvious. Consider the :init
message, which is sent to a newly-created object. To decide what kind
of daemon to use, we observe the order in which daemon methods are
called. First the :before
daemon of the instantiated flavor
is called, then :before
daemons of successively more basic
flavors are called, and finally the :before
daemon (if
any) of the base flavor is called. Then the primary method is called.
After that, the :after
daemon for the base flavor is
called, followed by the :after
daemons at successively less
basic flavors.
Now, if there is no interaction among all these methods, if their
actions are completely independent, then it doesn’t matter whether you
use a :before
daemon or an :after
daemon. There is a difference
if there is some interaction. The interaction we are talking about is
usually done through instance variables; in general, instance variables
are how the methods of different component flavors communicate with each
other. In the case of the :init
operation, the init-plist can be
used as well. The important thing to remember is that no method knows
beforehand which other flavors have been mixed in to form this flavor; a
method cannot make any assumptions about how this flavor has been
combined, and in what order the various components are mixed.
This means that when a :before
daemon has run, it must assume that
none of the methods for this operation have run yet. But the :after
daemon knows that the :before
daemon for each of the other flavors
has run. So if one flavor wants to convey information to the other, the
first one should “transmit” the information in a :before
daemon, and
the second one should “receive” it in an :after
daemon. So while
the :before
daemons are run, information is “transmitted”; that is,
instance variables get set up. Then, when the :after
daemons are
run, they can look at the instance variables and act on their values.
In the case of the :init
method, the :before
daemons typically set up
instance variables of the object based on the init-plist, while the
:after
daemons actually do things, relying on the fact that all of the
instance variables have been initialized by the time they are called.
The problems become most difficult when you are creating a network of
instances of various flavors that are supposed to point to each other.
For example, suppose you have flavors for “buffers” and “streams”, and
each buffer should be accompanied by a stream. If you create the stream
in the :before
:init
method for buffers, you can inform the
stream of its corresponding buffer with an init keyword, but the stream
may try sending messages back to the buffer, which is not yet ready to
be used. If you create the stream in the :after
:init
method
for buffers, there will be no problem with stream creation, but some
other :after
:init
methods of other mixins may have run and made
the assumption that there is to be no stream. The only way to guarantee
success is to create the stream in a :before
method and inform it of
its associated buffer by sending it a message from the buffer’s
:after
:init
method. This scheme–creating associated objects
in :before
methods but linking them up in :after
methods–often
avoids problems, because all the various associated objects used by
various mixins at least exist when it is time to make other objects
point to them.
Since flavors are not hierarchically organized, the notion of levels of abstraction is not rigidly applicable. However, it remains a useful way of thinking about systems.
An object that is an instance of a flavor is implemented using the
data type dtp-instance
. The representation is a structure whose
first word, tagged with dtp-instance-header
, points to a structure
(known to the microcode as an “instance descriptor”) containing the
internal data for the flavor. The remaining words of the structure are value cells
containing the values of the instance variables. The instance descriptor
is a defstruct
that appears on the si:flavor
property of the flavor
name. It contains, among other things, the name of the flavor, the
size of an instance, the table of methods for handling operations, and
information for accessing the instance variables.
defflavor
creates such a data structure for each flavor, and
links them together according to the dependency relationships
between flavors.
A message is sent to an instance simply by calling it as a function,
with the first argument being the operation.
The microcode binds self
to the object and binds those instance
variables that are supposed to be special to the value
cells in the instance. Then it
passes on the operation and arguments to a funcallable hash table taken
from the flavor-structure for this flavor.
When the funcallable hash table is called as a function, it hashes the
first argument (the operation) to find a function to handle the operation
and an array called a mapping table. The variable
sys:self-mapping-table
is bound to the mapping table, which tells
the microcode how to access the lexical instance variables, those not
defined to be special. Then the function is called. If there is only
one method to be invoked, this function is that method; otherwise it is
an automatically-generated function called the combined method (see
combined-method),
which calls the appropriate methods in the right order.
If there are wrappers, they are incorporated into this combined
method.
The mapping table is an array whose elements correspond to the instance
variables which can be accessed by the flavor to which the currently
executing method belongs. Each element contains the position in
self
of that instance variable. This position varies with the other
instance variables and component flavors of the flavor of self
.
Each time the combined method calls another method, it sets up the
mapping table required by that method–not in general the same
one which the combined method itself uses. The mapping tables for the
called methods are extracted from the array leader of the mapping table
used by the combined method, which is kept in a local variable of the
combined method’s stack frame while sys:self-mapping-table
is set to
the mapping tables for the component methods.
Holds the current mapping table, which tells the running
flavor method where in self
to find each instance variable.
Ordered instance variables are referred to directly without going through the mapping table. This is a little faster, and reduces the amount of space needed for mapping tables. It is also the reason why compiled code contains the positions of the ordered instance variables and must be recompiled when they change.
There is a certain amount of freedom to the order in which you do defflavor
’s,
defmethod
’s, and defwrapper
’s. This freedom is designed to make it easy
to load programs containing complex flavor structures without having to do things
in a certain order. It is considered important that not all the methods for a flavor
need be defined in the same file. Thus the partitioning of a program into files
can be along modular lines.
The rules for the order of definition are as follows.
Before a method can be defined (with defmethod
or defwrapper
) its flavor
must have been defined (with defflavor
). This makes sense because the system
has to have a place to remember the method, and because it has to know the
instance-variables of the flavor if the method is to be compiled.
When a flavor is defined (with defflavor
) it is not necessary that
all of its component flavors be defined already. This is to allow
defflavor
’s to be spread between files according to the modularity
of a program, and to provide for mutually-dependent flavors.
Methods can be defined for a flavor some of whose component flavors are
not yet defined; however, in certain cases compiling those methods may
produce a warning that an instance variable was declared
special (because the system did not realize it was an instance
variable). If this happens, you should fix the problem and recompile.
The methods automatically generated by the :gettable-instance-variables
and :settable-instance-variables
defflavor
options
(see gettable-instance-variables-option) are generated at the time
the defflavor
is done.
The first time a flavor is instantiated, or when
compile-flavor-methods
is done, the system looks through all of the
component flavors and gathers various information. At this point an
error is signaled if not all of the components have been
defflavor
’ed. This is also the time at which certain other errors
are detected, for instance lack of a required instance-variable (see the
:required-instance-variables
defflavor
option,
required-instance-variables-option). The combined methods (see
combined-method) are generated at this time also, unless they already
exist.
After a flavor has been instantiated, it is possible to make changes to it. Such changes affect all existing instances if possible. This is described more fully immediately below.
You can change anything about a flavor at any time. You can change the
flavor’s general attributes by doing another defflavor
with the same
name. You can add or modify methods by doing defmethod
’s. If you
do a defmethod
with the same flavor-name, operation (and
suboperation if any), and (optional) method-type as an existing method,
that method is replaced by the new definition. You can remove a
method with undefmethod
(see undefmethod-fun).
These changes always propagate to all flavors that depend upon the
changed flavor. Normally the system propagates the changes to all
existing instances of the changed flavor and its dependent flavors.
However, this is not possible when the flavor has been changed so
drastically that the old instances would not work properly with the new
flavor. This happens if you change the number of instance variables,
which changes the size of an instance. It also happens if you change
the order of the instance variables (and hence the storage layout of an
instance), or if you change the component flavors (which can change
several subtle aspects of an instance). The system does not keep a list
of all the instances of each flavor, so it cannot find the instances and
modify them to conform to the new flavor definition. Instead it gives
you a warning message, on the *error-output*
stream, to the effect
that the flavor was changed incompatibly and the old instances will not
get the new version. The system leaves the old flavor data-structure
intact (the old instances continue to point at it) and makes a new
one to contain the new version of the flavor. If a less drastic change
is made, the system modifies the original flavor data-structure, thus
affecting the old instances that point at it. However, if you redefine
methods in such a way that they only work for the new version of the
flavor, then trying to use those methods with the old instances won’t
work.
This section briefly documents some editor commands that are useful in conjunction with flavors.
Meta-.
The Meta-.
(Edit Definition
) command can find the definition of a flavor
in the same way that it can find the definition of a function.
Edit Definition
can find the definition of a method if you give it
a suitable function spec starting with :method
, such as (:method
tv:sheet :expose)
. The keyword :method
may be omitted if the
definition is in the editor already. Completion is available on the
flavor name and operation name, as usual only for definitions
loaded into the editor.
Meta-X Describe Flavor
Asks for a flavor name in the mini-buffer and describes its characteristics. When typing the flavor name you have completion over the names of all defined flavors (thus this command can be used to aid in guessing the name of a flavor). The display produced is mouse sensitive where there are names of flavors and of methods; as usual the right-hand mouse button gives you a menu of editor commands to apply to the name and the left-hand mouse button does one of them, typically positioning the editor to the source code for that name.
Meta-X List Methods
Meta-X Edit Methods
Asks you for an operation in the mini-buffer and lists all the flavors
that have a method for that operation. You may type in the operation name,
point to it with the mouse, or let it default to the operation of the message
being sent by the Lisp form the cursor is on. List Methods
produces a mouse-sensitive display allowing you to edit selected methods
or just to see which flavors have methods, while Edit Methods
skips the
display and proceeds directly to editing the methods.
As usual with this type of command, the editor command Control-Shift-P
advances the editor cursor to the next method in the list, reading in
its source file if necessary. Typing Control-Shift-P
, while the display
is on the screen, edits the first method.
In addition, you can find a copy of the list in the editor buffer
*Possibilities*
. While in that buffer, the command Control-/
visits the definition of the method described on the line the cursor is
pointing at.
These techniques of moving through the objects listed apply to all the following commands as well.
Meta-X List Combined Methods
Meta-X Edit Combined Methods
Asks you for an operation name and a flavor in two mini-buffers and lists all the methods that would be called to handle that operation for an instance of that flavor.
List Combined Methods
can be very useful for telling what a flavor
will do in response to a message. It shows you the primary method,
the daemons, and the wrappers and lets you see the code for all of
them; type Control-Shift-P
to get to successive ones.
Meta-X List Flavor Components
Meta-X Edit Flavor Components
Asks you for a flavor and lists or begins visiting all the flavors it depends on.
Meta-X List Flavor Dependents
Meta-X Edit Flavor Dependents
Asks you for a flavor and lists or begins visiting all the flavors that depend on it.
Meta-X List Flavor Direct Dependents
Meta-X Edit Flavor Direct Dependents
Asks you for a flavor and lists or begins visiting all the flavors that depend directly on it.
Meta-X List Flavor Methods
Meta-X Edit Flavor Methods
Asks you for a flavor and lists or begins visiting all the methods defined for that flavor. (This does not include methods inherited from its component flavors.)
It is often useful to associate a property list with an abstract object,
for the same reasons that it is useful to have a property list
associated with a symbol. This section describes a mixin flavor that
can be used as a component of any new flavor in order to provide that
new flavor with a property list. For more details and examples, see the
general discussion of property lists (plist). The usual property
list functions (get
, putprop
, etc) all work on instances by
sending the instance the corresponding message.
: si:property-list-mixin ¶This mixin flavor provides the basic operations on property lists.
si:property-list-mixin
: :get property-name &optional default ¶Looks up the object’s property-name property. If it finds such a property, it returns the value; otherwise it returns default.
si:property-list-mixin
: :getl property-name-list ¶Like the :get
operation, except that the
argument is a list of property names. The :getl
operation searches
down the property list until it finds a property whose property name is
one of the elements of property-name-list. It returns the portion
of the property list begining with the first such property that it
found. If it doesn’t find any, it returns nil
.
si:property-list-mixin
: :putprop value property-name ¶Gives the object an property-name property of value.
(send object :set :get property-name value)
also has this effect.
si:property-list-mixin
: :remprop property-name ¶Removes the object’s property-name property, by splicing it out
of the property list. It returns one of the cells spliced out, whose car
is the former value of the property that was just removed. If there was
no such property to begin with, the value is nil
.
si:property-list-mixin
: :get-location-or-nil property-name ¶si:property-list-mixin
: :get-location property-name ¶Both return a locative pointer to the cell in which this object’s
property-name property is stored. If there is no such property,
:get-location-or-nil
returns nil
, but :get-location
adds a cell to the property list and initialized to nil
, and a
pointer to that cell is returned.
si:property-list-mixin
: :push-property value property-name ¶The property-name property of the object should be a list (note that
nil
is a list and an absent property is nil
). This operation sets
the property-name property of the object to a list whose car is
value and whose cdr is the former property-name property of the
list. This is analogous to doing
(push value (get object property-name))
See the push
special form (push-fun).
si:property-list-mixin
: :property-list ¶Returns the list of alternating property names and values that implements the property list.
si:property-list-mixin
: :property-list-location ¶Returns a locative pointer to the cell in the instance which holds the property list data.
si:property-list-mixin
: :set-property-list list ¶Sets the list of alternating property names and values that implements the property list to list. So does
(send object :set :property-list list)
si:print-readably-mixin
: :property-list list ¶This initializes the list of alternating property names and values that implements the property list to list.
A flavor instance can print out so that it can be read back in, as long
as you give it a :print-self
method that produces a suitable
printed representation, and provide a way to parse it. The convention
for doing this is to print as
#leftHorseshoeflavor-name additional-datadelta
and make sure that the flavor defines or inherits a :read-instance
method that can parse the additional-data and return an instance
(see horseshoe-read). A convenient way of doing this is to use
si:print-readably-mixin
.
: si:print-readably-mixin ¶Provides for flavor instances to print out using the #leftHorseshoe
syntax, and also for reading things that were printed in that way.
si:print-readably-mixin
: :reconstruction-init-plist ¶When you use si:print-readably-mixin
, you must define the operation
:reconstruction-init-plist
. This should return an alternating list
of init options and values that could be passed to make-instance
to
create an instance “like” this one. Sufficient similarity is defined
by the practical purposes of the flavor’s implementor.
Many people have asked “How do I copy an instance?” and have
expressed surprise when told that the flavor system does not
include any built-in way to copy instances. Why isn’t there
just a function copy-instance
that creates a new instance
of the same flavor with all its instance variables having the same
values as in the original instance? This would work for the
simplest use of flavors, but it isn’t good enough for most
advanced uses of flavors. A number of issues are raised by
copying:
Do you or do you not send an :init
message to the new instance?
If you do, what init-plist options do you supply?
If the instance has a property list, you should copy the property
list (e.g. with copylist
) so that putprop
or remprop
on one of the instances does not affect the properties of the
other instance.
If the instance is a pathname, the concept of copying is not even meaningful. Pathnames are interned, which means that there can only be one pathname object with any given set of instance-variable values.
If the instance is a stream connected to a network, some of the instance variables represent an agent in another host elsewhere in the network. Should the copy talk to the same agent, or should a new agent be constructed for it?
If the instance is a stream connected to a file, should copying the stream make a copy of the file or should it make another stream open to the same file? Should the choice depend on whether the file is open for input or for output?
In general, you can see that in order to copy an instance one must understand a lot about the instance. One must know what the instance variables mean so that the values of the instance variables can be copied if necessary. One must understand what relations to the external environment the instance has so that new relations can be established for the new instance. One must even understand what the general concept ‘copy’ means in the context of this particular instance, and whether it means anything at all.
Copying is a generic operation, whose implementation for a particular instance
depends on detailed knowledge relating to that instance. Modularity dictates
that this knowledge be contained in the instance’s flavor, not in a “general
copying function”. Thus the way to copy an instance is to send it a message,
as in (send object :copy)
. It is up to you to implement the
operation in a suitable fashion, such as
(defflavor foo (a b c) () (:inittable-instance-variables a b)) (defmethod (foo :copy) () (make-instance 'foo :a a :b b))
The flavor system chooses not to provide any default method for copying an instance, and does not even suggest a standard name for the copying message, because copying involves so many semantic issues.
If a flavor supports the :reconstruction-init-plist
operation, a
suitable copy can be made by invoking this operation and passing the
result to make-instance
along with the flavor name. This is
because the definition of what the :reconstruction-init-plist
operation should do requires it to address all the problems listed
above. Implementing this operation is up to you, and so is making
sure that the flavor implements sufficient init keywords to transmit
any information that is to be copied. See
si:print-readably-mixin-reconstruction-init-plist-method.
Zetalisp provides a powerful and flexible system for performing
input and output to peripheral devices. Device independent I/O is
generalized in the concept of an I/O stream. A stream is a source
or sink for data in the form of characters or integers; sources are
called input streams and sinks are called output streams. A
stream may be capable of use in either direction, in which case it is a
bidirectional stream. In a few unusual cases, it is useful to have
a ‘stream’ which supports neither input nor output; for example, opening
a file with direction :probe
returns one (probe-streams).
Streams on which characters are transferred are called character
streams, and are used more often than binary streams, which
usually transfer integers of type (unsigned-byte n)
for some
n.
Streams automatically provide a modular separation between the program
which implements the stream and the program which uses it, because
streams obey a standard protocol. The stream protocol is a special case
is based on the general message passing protocol: a stream operation is
invoked by calling the stream as a function, with a first argument that
is a keyword and identifies the I/O operation desired (such as, :tyi
to read a character) and additional arguments as that operation calls
for them. The stream protocol consists of a particular set of operation
names and calling conventions for them. It is documented in
streams.
Many programs do not invoke the stream operations directly; instead, they call standard I/O functions which then invoke stream operations. This is done for two reasons: the functions may provide useful services, and they may be transportable to Common Lisp or Maclisp. Programs that use stream operations directly are not transportable outside Zetalisp. The I/O functions are documented in the first sections of this chapter.
The generality of the Zetalisp I/O stream comes from the fact that
I/O operations on it can invoke arbitrary Lisp code. For example,
it would be very simple to implement a "morse code" stream that accepted
character output and used beep
with appropriate pauses to ‘display’ it.
How to implement a stream is documented in stream-implementation,
and the following sections.
The most commonly used streams are windows, which read input from the keyboard and dispose of output by drawing on the screen, file streams, editor buffer streams which get input from the text in a buffer and insert output into the buffer, and string streams which do likewise with the contents of a string.
Another unusual aspect of Lisp I/O is the ability to input and output
general Lisp objects, represented as text. These are done using the
read
and related functions and using print
and related functions.
They are documented in chapter expression-io-chapter.
The input functions read characters, lines, or bytes from an input
stream. This argument is called stream. If omitted or nil
,
the current value of *standard-input*
. This is the
“default input stream”, which in simple use reads
from the terminal keyboard. If the argument is t
, the current
value of *terminal-io*
is used; this is conventionally supposed to
access “the user’s terminal” and nearly always reads from the keyboard
in processes belonging to windows.
If the stream is an interactive one, such as the terminal, the input is
echoed, and functions which read more than a single character allow
editing as well. peek-char
echoes all of the characters that were
skipped over if read-char
would have echoed them; the character not
removed from the stream is not echoed either.
When an input stream has no more data to return, it reports end of file.
Each stream input operation has a convention for how to do this.
The input functions accept an argument eof-option or two arguments
eof-error and eof-value to tell them what to do if end of file
is encountered instead of any input. The functions that take two
eof- arguments are the Common Lisp ones. For them, end of
file is an error if eof-error is non-nil
or if it is
unsupplied. If eof-error is nil
, then the function returns
eof-value at end of file.
The functions which have one argument called eof-option are from
Maclisp. End of file causes an error if the argument is not supplied.
Otherwise, end of file causes the function to return the argument’s
value. Note that an eof-option of nil
means to return nil
if the end of the file is reached; it is not equivalent to supplying
no eof-option.
sys:end-of-file
: (error
) ¶All errors signaled to report end of file possess this condition name.
The :stream
operation on the condition instance returns the stream
on which end of file was reached.
t
) eof-value ignore options ¶Reads a line of text, terminated by a Return
. It
returns the line as a character string, without the Return
character that ended the line. The argument ignore
must be accepted for the sake of the Common Lisp specifications
but it is not used.
This function is usually used to get a line of input from the user. If rubout processing is happening, then options is passed as the list of options to the rubout handler (see rubout-handler).
There is a second value, t
if the line was terminated by end of file.
Like read-line
but uses the Maclisp convention for specifying
what to do about end of file. This function can take its first two
arguments in the other order, for Maclisp compatibility only; see the
note in maclisp-input-functions.
This is like readline
except that leading and trailing spaces and
tabs are discarded from the value before it is returned.
Like readline-trim
except that nil
is returned if the line is empty
or all blank.
Reads input from stream until a delimiter character is reached, then
returns as a string all the input up to but not including the delimiter.
delimiter is either a character or a list of characters which all
serve as delimiters. It defaults to the character End
. stream
defaults to the value of *standard-input*
.
If eof is non-nil
, then end of file on attempting to read the
first character is an error. Otherwise it just causes an empty string
to be returned. End of file once at least one character has been read
is never an error but it does cause the function to return all the input
so far.
Input is done using rubout handling and echoing if stream supports the
:rubout-handler
operation. In this case, rubout-handler-options
are passed as the options argument to that operation.
buffer-size specifies the size of string buffer to allocate initially.
The second value returned is t
if input ended due to end of file.
The third value is the delimiter character which terminated input,
or nil
if input terminated due to end of file.
This character is currently represented as a fixnum, but perhaps someday
will be a character object instead.
t
) eof-value ¶Reads a character from stream and returns it as a character object.
End of file is an error if eof-errorp is non-nil
; otherwise, it
causes read-char
to return eof-value. This uses the :tyi
stream operation.
t
) eof-value ¶Like read-char
but returns an integer rather than a character
object. In strict Common Lisp, only read-char
can be used
on character streams and only read-byte
can be used on binary streams.
t
) eof-value ¶Similar but returns nil
immediately when no input is available on an interactive stream.
Uses the :tyi-no-hang
stream operation (streams-tyi-no-hang-method).
Puts char back into stream so that it will be read again
as the next input character. char must be the same character that was
read from stream most recently. It may not work to unread two characters
in a row before reading again.
Uses the :untyi
stream operation (streams-untyi-method).
t
) eof-value ¶If peek-type is nil
, this is like read-char
except leaves the character
to be read again by the next input operation.
If peek-type is t
, skips whitespace characters and peeks at the
first nonwhitespace character. That character is the value, and is also
left to be reread.
If peek-type is a character, reads input until that character is seen. That character is unread and also returned.
t
if input is now available on stream. Uses the :listen
operation
(streams-listen-method).
Discards any input now available on stream, if it is an interactive stream.
Uses the :clear-input
stream operation (streams-clear-input-method).
These functions accept an argument eof-option to tell them what to
do if end of file is encountered instead of any input. End of file
signals an error if the argument is not supplied. Otherwise, end of
file causes the function to return the argument’s value. Note that an
eof-option of nil
means to return nil
if the end of the
file is reached; it is not equivalent to supplying no
eof-option.
The arguments stream and eof-option can also be given in the
reverse order for compatibility with old Maclisp programs. The
functions attempt to figure out which way they were called by seeing
whether each argument is a plausible stream. Unfortunately, there is
an ambiguity with symbols: a symbol might be a stream and it might be
an eof-option. If there are two arguments, one being a symbol and the
other being something that is a valid stream, or only one argument,
which is a symbol, then these functions interpret the symbol as an
eof-option instead of as a stream. To force them to interpret a
symbol as a stream, give the symbol an si:io-stream-p
property
whose value is t
.
Reads one character from stream and returns it.
The character is echoed if stream is interactive,
except that Rubout
is not echoed.
The Control
, Meta
, etc shifts echo as C-
, M-
, etc.
The :tyi
stream operation is preferred over the tyi
function for
some purposes. Note that it does not echo. See general-stream-ops.
(This function can take its arguments in the other order, for Maclisp compatibility only; see the note above.)
Like tyi
except that instead of returning a fixnum character, it
returns a symbol whose print name is the character. The symbol is
interned in the current package. This is just Maclisp’s version of
character object. (This function can take its arguments in the other
order, for Maclisp compatibility only; see the note above.)
This function is provided only for Maclisp compatibility, since in Zetalisp never uses symbols to represent characters in this way.
This function is provided mainly for Maclisp compatibility;
the :tyipeek
stream operation is usually clearer (see tyipeek-stream-operation).
What tyipeek
does depends on the peek-type, which
defaults to nil
. With a peek-type of nil
,
tyipeek
returns the next character to be read from
stream, without actually removing it from the input stream.
The next time input is done from stream the character will still
be there; in general, (= (tyipeek) (tyi))
is t
.
If peek-type is a fixnum less than 1000 octal, then tyipeek
reads characters from stream until it gets one equal to peek-type.
That character is not removed from the input stream.
If peek-type is t
, then tyipeek
skips over input characters
until the start of the printed representation of a Lisp object is reached.
As above, the last character (the one that starts an object)
is not removed from the input stream.
The form of tyipeek
supported by Maclisp in which peek-type
is a fixnum not less than 1000 octal is not supported, since the readtable
formats of the Maclisp reader and the Zetalisp reader are quite different.
Characters passed over by tyipeek
are echoed if stream is interactive.
Reads some sort of object from *query-io*
, parsing
it according to type-of-parsing, and prompting by calling format
using format-string and format-args.
type-of-parsing is either a keyword or a list starting with a keyword and continuing with a list of options and values, whose meanings depend on the keyword used.
Most keywords specify reading a line of input and parsing it in some
way. The line can be terminated with Return
or End
. Sometimes
typing just End
has a special meaning.
The keywords defined are
:eval-sexp
:eval-form prompt-and-read
This keyword directs prompt-and-read
to accept a Lisp
expression. It is evaluated, and the value is returned by prompt-and-read
.
If the Lisp expression is not a constant or quoted, the user is asked to confirm the value it evaluated to.
A default value can be specified with an option, as in
(:eval-sexp :default default)
Then, if the user types Space
, prompt-and-read
returns the
default as the first value and :default
as the second value.
:eval-sexp-or-end
:eval-form-or-end prompt-and-read
Synonymously direct prompt-and-read
to accept a Lisp expression or
just the character End
. If End
is typed, prompt-and-read
returns nil
as its first value and :end
as its second value.
Otherwise, things proceed as for :eval-sexp
.
A default value is allowed, as in :eval-sexp
.
:read
:expression prompt-and-read
Synonymously direct prompt-and-read
to read an object
and return it, with no evaluation.
:expression-or-end
Is like :expression
except that the user is also allowed to type just
End
. If he does so, prompt-and-read
returns the two values
nil
and :end
.
:number
Directs prompt-and-read
to read and return a number.
It insists on getting a number, forcing the user to rub out anything else.
Additional features can be specified with options:
(:number :input-radix radix :or-nil nil-ok-flag)
parses the number using radix radix if the number is a rational. (By default,
the ambient radix is used). If
nil-ok-flag is non-nil
, then the user is also permitted to type
just Return
or End
, and then nil
is returned.
:decimal-number
:number-or-nil prompt-and-read
:decimal-number-or-nil prompt-and-read
Abbreviations for
(:number :input-radix 10) (:number :or-nil t) (:number :input-radix 10 :or-nil t)
:date
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a date and time, terminated
with Return or End
, and return it
as a universal time (see get-universal-time-fun). It allows several options:
(:date :never-p never-ok :past-p past-required)
If past-required is non-nil
, the date must be before the
present time, or the user must rub out and use a different date. If
never-ok is non-nil
, the user may also type “never”; then
nil
is returned.
:date-or-never
:past-date prompt-and-read
:past-date-or-never prompt-and-read
Abbreviations for
(:date :never-p t) (:date :past-p t) (:date :never-p t :past-p t)
:character
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a single character and
return a character object representing it.
:string
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a line and return its
contents as a string, using readline
.
:string-or-nil
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a line and return its
contents as a string, using readline-trim
. In addition, if the
result would be empty, nil
is returned instead of the empty string.
:string-list
Like :string-trim
but regards the line as a sequence of input
strings separated by commas. Each substring between commas is trimmed,
and a list of the strings is returned.
:keyword-list
Like :string-list
but converts each string to a keyword by interning
it in the keyword
package. The value is therefore a list of keywords.
:font-list
Like :string-list
but converts each string to a font name by interning
it in the fonts
package. The symbols must already exist in that package
or the user is required to retype the input.
:delimited-string
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a string terminated by specified delimiters.
With
(:delimited-string :delimiter delimiter-list :buffer-size size)
you can specify a list of delimiter characters and an initial size for the
buffer. The list defaults to (#\end)
and the size to 100.
The work is done by read-delimited-string
(read-delimited-string-fun). The delimiters and size are passed to
that function.
:delimited-string-or-nil
Like :delimited-string
except that nil
is returned instead
of the empty string if the first character read is a delimiter.
:host
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a line and interpret the
contents as a network host name. The value returned is the host, looked up
using si:parse-host
(si:parse-host-fun). An option is defined:
(:host :default default-name :chaos-only chaos-only)
If the line read is empty, the host named default-name is used.
If chaos-only is non-nil
, only hosts on the Chaosnet are
permitted input.
:host-list
Like :host
but regards the line as a sequence of host names
separated by commas. Each host name is looked up as in :host
and a list of the resulting hosts is returned.
:pathname-host
Like :host
but uses fs:get-pathname-host
to look up the host
object from its name (fs:get-pathname-host-fun). Thus, you find
hosts that can appear in pathnames rather than hosts that are on the
network.
:pathname
Directs prompt-and-read
to read a line and parse it as
a pathname, merging it with the defaults. If the line is empty,
the default pathname is used. These options are defined:
(:pathname :defaults defaults-alist-or-pathname :version default-version)
uses defaults-alist-or-pathname as the defaults argument to
fs:merge-pathname-defaults
, and default-version as the
version argument to it.
:pathname-or-nil
Is like :pathname
, but if the user types just End
it
is interpreted as meaning “no pathname” rather than “use the default”.
Then nil
is returned.
:pathname-list
Like :pathname
but regards the line as a sequence of filenames
separated by commas. Each filename is parsed and defaulted and a list
of the resulting pathnames is returned.
:fquery
Directs prompt-and-read
to query the user for a fixed
set of alternatives, using fquery
. type-of-parsing should always
be a list, whose car is :fquery
and whose cdr is a list to be passed
as the list of options (fquery
’s first argument).
Example:
(prompt-and-read `(:fquery . ,format:y-or-p-options) "Eat it? ")
is equivalent to
(y-or-n-p "Eat it? ")
This keyword is most useful as a way to get to fquery
when going
through an interface defined to call prompt-and-read
.
These functions all take an optional argument called stream, which is
where to send the output. If unsupplied stream defaults to the value of
*standard-output*
. If stream is nil
, the value of
*standard-output*
(i.e the default) is used. If it is t
, the value of
*terminal-io*
is used (i.e the interactive terminal). This is all
more-or-less compatible with Maclisp, except that instead of the
variable *standard-output*
Maclisp has several variables and complicated rules.
For detailed documentation of streams, refer to streams.
For print
and the other expression output functions, see
expression-output.
Outputs char to stream (using :tyo
). char may be an
integer or a character object; in the latter case, it is converted to an
integer before the :tyo
.
Outputs number to stream using :tyo
.
In strict Common Lisp, output to binary streams can be done only with
write-byte
and output to character streams requires write-char
.
In fact, the two functions are identical on the Lisp Machine.
0
) end ¶Outputs string (or the specified portion of it) to stream.
0
) end ¶Outputs string (or the specified portion) to stream, followed by a Return
character.
Outputs a Return
character to stream
unless either
nothing has been output to stream yet, or
the last thing output was a Return
character, or
stream does not remember what previous output there has been.
This uses the :fresh-line
stream operation.
The value is t
if a Return
is output, nil
if nothing is output.
Causes stream’s buffered output, if any, to be transmitted immediately.
This uses the :force-output
stream operation.
Causes stream’s buffered output, if any, to be transmitted immediately,
and waits until that is finished.
This uses the :finish
stream operation.
Discards any output buffered in stream.
This uses the :clear-output
stream operation.
Outputs a Return
character to stream.
It returns t
for Maclisp compatibility.
It is wise not to depend on the value terpri
returns.
Outputs a Return
character to stream.
Returns nil
to meet Common Lisp specifications.
It is wise not to depend on the value cli:terpri
returns.
The format
function (see format-fun) is very useful for producing
nicely formatted text. It can do anything any of the above functions
can do, and it makes it easy to produce good looking messages and such.
format
can generate a string or output to a stream.
stream-copy-until-eof
inputs characters from from-stream
and outputs them to to-stream, until it reaches the end of file
on the from-stream. For example, if x
is bound to a stream
for a file opened for input, then (stream-copy-until-eof x *terminal-io*)
prints the file on the console.
If from-stream supports the :line-in
operation and to-stream
supports the :line-out
operation, then stream-copy-until-eof
uses those operations instead of :tyi
and :tyo
, for greater
efficiency. leader-size is passed as the argument to the
:line-in
operation.
*terminal-io*
) ¶This function is intended to attract the user’s attention by causing
an audible beep, or flashing the screen, or something similar. If
the stream supports the :beep
operation, then this function sends
it a :beep
message, passing beep-type along as an argument. Otherwise
it just causes an audible beep on the terminal.
beep-type is a keyword which explains the significance of this beep.
Users can redefine beep
to make different noises depending on the
beep type. The defined beep types are:
zwei:converse-problem
Used for the beep that is done when Converse is unable to send a message.
zwei:converse-message-received
Used for the beeps done when a Converse message is received.
zwei:no-completion
Used when you ask for completion in the editor and the string does not complete.
tv:notify
Used for the beep done when you get a notification that cannot be printed on the selected window.
fquery
Used for the beep done by yes-or-no-p
or by fquery
with the
:beep
option specified.
supdup:terminal-bell
Used for the beep requested by the remote host being used through a Supdup window.
nil
Used whenever no other beep type applies.
The :beep
operation is described on streams-beep-method.
This function exists primarily for Maclisp compatibility. Usually it is preferable to send the appropriate messages (see the Window System manual).
cursorpos
normally operates on the *standard-output*
stream;
however, if the last argument is a stream or t
(meaning *terminal-io*
)
then cursorpos
uses that stream and ignores it when doing the operations
described below. cursorpos
only works on streams
that are capable of these operations, such as windows.
A stream is taken to be any argument that is not a number and not a symbol,
or that is a symbol other than nil
with a name more than one character long.
(cursorpos) => (line column)
, the current
cursor position.
(cursorpos line column)
moves the cursor to that position.
It returns t
if it succeeds and nil
if it doesn’t.
(cursorpos op)
performs a special operation coded by op,
and returns t
if it succeeds and nil
if it doesn’t.
op is tested by string comparison, it is not a keyword symbol
and may be in any package.
f
Moves one space to the right.
b
Moves one space to the left.
d
Moves one line down.
u
Moves one line up.
t
Homes up (moves to the top left corner). Note that t
as the last
argument to cursorpos
is interpreted as a stream, so a stream must
be specified if the t
operation is used.
z
Home down (moves to the bottom left corner).
a
Advances to a fresh line. See the :fresh-line
stream operation.
c
Clears the window.
e
Clear from the cursor to the end of the window.
l
Clear from the cursor to the end of the line.
k
Clear the character position at the cursor.
x
b
then k
.
An I/O stream, or just stream, is a source and/or sink of characters or bytes. A set of operations is available with every stream; operations include things like “output a character” and “input a character”. The way to perform an operation on a stream is the same for all streams, although what happens inside the stream is very different depending on what kind of a stream it is. So all a program has to know is how to deal with streams using the standard, generic operations. A programmer creating a new kind of stream only needs to implement the appropriate standard operations.
A stream is a message-receiving object. This means that it is something that you can apply to arguments. The first argument is a keyword symbol which is the name of the operation you wish to perform. The rest of the arguments depend on what operation you are doing. Message-passing and generic operations are explained in the flavor chapter (flavor).
Some streams can only do input, some can only do output, and
some can do both. Some operations are only supported by some streams.
Also, there are some operations that the stream may not support by
itself, but which work anyway, albeit slowly, because the stream
default handler can handle them. All streams support the operation
:which-operations
, which returns a list of the names of all of the
operations that are supported “natively” by the stream.
(:which-operations
itself is not in the list.)
All input streams support all the standard input operations, and all output streams support all the standard output operations. All bidirectional streams support both.
According to Common Lisp, this returns t
if object is a stream. In
the Lisp machine, a stream is any object which can be called as a
function with certain calling conventions. It is theoretically
impossible to test for this. However, streamp
does return t
for any of
the usual types of streams, and nil
for any Common Lisp datum which is
not a stream.
There are several variables whose values are streams used by many
functions in the Lisp system. These variables and their uses are listed here.
By convention, variables that are expected to hold a stream capable of input
have names ending with -input
, and similarly for output. Those expected
to hold a bidirectional stream have names ending with -io
. The names
with asterisks are synonyms introduced for the sake of Common Lisp.
In the normal Lisp top-level loop, input is read from
*standard-input*
(that is, whatever stream is the value of
*standard-input*
). Many input functions, including tyi
and
read
, take a stream argument that defaults to *standard-input*
.
In the normal Lisp top-level loop, output is sent to
*standard-output*
(that is, whatever stream is the value of
*standard-output*
). Many output functions, including tyo
and
print
, take a stream argument that defaults to *standard-output*
.
The value of *error-output*
is a stream on which noninteractive error
or warning messages should be printed. Normally this is the same as
*standard-output*
, but *standard-output*
might be bound to a file
and *error-output*
left going to the terminal.
The value of *debug-io*
is used for all input and output by the
error handler. Normally this is a synonym for *terminal-io*
. The
value may be nil
, which is regarded as equivalent to a synonym for
*terminal-io*
. This feature is provided because users often set
*debug-io*
by hand, and it is much easier to set it back to nil
afterward than to figure out the proper synonym stream pointing to
*terminal-io*
.
The value of *query-io*
is a stream that should be used when
asking questions of the user. The question should be output to this
stream, and the answer read from it. The reason for this is that when
the normal input to a program may be coming from a file, questions such
as “Do you really want to delete all of the files in your directory??” should
be sent directly to the user, and the answer should come from the user,
not from the data file. *query-io*
is used by fquery
and related
functions; see fquery-fun.
The value of *terminal-io*
is the stream that the program should use
to talk to the user’s console. In an interactive program, it is the
window from which the program is being run; I/O on this stream reads
from the keyboard and displays on the screen. However, in a background
process that has no window, *terminal-io*
defaults to a stream that
does not ever expect to be used. If it is used, perhaps by an error
printout, it turns into a background window and requests the user’s
attention.
The value of *trace-output*
is the stream on which the trace
function
prints its output.
*standard-input*
, *standard-output*
, *error-output*
, *debug-io*
,
*trace-output*
, and *query-io*
are initially bound to synonym
streams that pass all operations on to the stream that is the value of
*terminal-io*
. Thus any operations performed on those streams go
to the keyboard and screen.
Most user programs should not change the value of *terminal-io*
. A
program which wants (for example) to divert output to a file should do
so by binding the value of *standard-output*
; that way queries on
*query-io*
, debugging on *debug-io*
and error messages sent to
*error-output*
can still get to the user by going through
*terminal-io*
, which is usually what is desired.
streams
: :tyi &optional eof ¶The stream inputs one character and returns it. For example, if the next character to be read in by the stream is a ‘C’, then the form
(send s :tyi)
returns the value of #/C
(that is, 103 octal).
Note that the :tyi
operation does not
echo the character in any fashion; it just does the input. The
tyi
function (see tyi-fun) does echoing
when reading from the terminal.
The optional eof argument to the :tyi
operation tells the stream what to do if it gets to the end of the
file. If the argument is not provided or is nil
, the stream
returns nil
at the end of file. Otherwise it signals a sys:end-of-file
error.
Note that this is not the same as the eof-option argument to
read
, tyi
, and related functions.
The :tyi
operation on a binary input stream returns a non-negative
number, not necessarily to be interpreted as a character.
For some streams (such as windows), not all the input data are numbers.
Some are lists, called blips. The :tyi
operation returns only
numbers. If the next available input is not a number, it is discarded,
and so on until a number is reached (or end of file is reached).
streams
: :any-tyi &optional eof ¶Like :tyi
but returns any kind of datum. Non-numbers are not
discarded as they would be by :tyi
. This distinction only makes
a difference on streams which can provide input which is not composed
of numbers; currently, only windows can do that.
streams
: :tyipeek &optional eof ¶Peeks at the next character or byte from the stream without discarding
it. The next :tyi
or :tyipeek
operation will get the same
character.
eof is the same as in the :tyi
operation: if nil
, end of
file returns nil
; otherwise, it signals a sys:end-of-file
error.
streams
: :untyi char ¶Unreads the character or byte char; that is to say, puts it back into
the input stream so that the next :tyi
operation will read it again.
For example,
(send s :untyi 120) (send s :tyi) ==> 120
This operation is used by read
, and any stream that supports :tyi
must support :untyi
as well.
You are only allowed to :untyi
one character before doing a
:tyi
, and the character you :untyi
must be the last character
read from the stream. That is, :untyi
can only be used to back up
one character, not to stuff arbitrary data into the stream. You also
can’t :untyi
after you have peeked ahead with :tyipeek
since
that does one :untyi
itself. Some streams implement :untyi
by
saving the character, while others implement it by backing up the
pointer to a buffer.
streams
: :string-in eof-option string &optional (start 0
) end ¶Reads characters from the stream and stores them into the array
string. Many streams can implement this far more efficiently that
repeated :tyi
’s. start and end, if supplied, delimit the
portion of string to be stored into. If eof-option is
non-nil
then a sys:end-of-file
error is signaled if end of file
is reached on the stream before the string has been filled. If
eof-option is nil
, any number of characters before end of file
is acceptable, even no characters.
If string has an array-leader, the fill pointer is adjusted to start plus the number of characters stored into string.
Two values are returned: the index of the next position in string to be filled,
and a flag that is non-nil
if end of file was reached before string was
filled. Most callers do not need to look at either of these values.
string may be any kind of array, not necessarily a string; this is useful when reading from a binary input stream.
streams
: :line-in &optional leader ¶The stream should input one line from the input source, and return it as a
string with the carriage return character stripped off. Contrary to what you
might assume from its name, this operation is not much like the readline
function.
Many streams have a string that is used as a buffer for lines. If this string
itself were returned, there would be problems caused if the caller of the stream
attempted to save the string away somewhere, because the contents of the string
would change when the next line was read in. In order to solve this problem,
the string must be copied. On the other hand, some streams don’t reuse the
string, and it would be wasteful to copy it on every :line-in
operation.
This problem is solved by using the leader argument to :line-in
. If
leader is nil
(the default), the stream does not bother to copy the
string and the caller should not rely on the contents of that string after the
next operation on the stream. If leader is t
, the stream does make a
copy. If leader is a fixnum then the stream makes a copy with an array
leader leader elements long. (This is used by the editor, which represents
lines of buffers as strings with additional information in their array-leaders,
to eliminate an extra copy operation.)
If the stream reaches end of file while reading in characters, it
returns the characters it has read in as a string and returns a second value of
t
. The caller of the stream should therefore arrange to receive the second
value, and check it to see whether the string returned was a whole line or just
the trailing characters after the last carriage return in the input source.
This operation should be implemented by all input streams whose data are characters.
streams
: :string-line-in eof-option string &optional (start 0
) end ¶Reads characters, storing them in string, until string is full
or a Return
character is read. If input stops due to a Return, the Return
itself is not put in the buffer.
Thus, this operation is nearly the same as :string-in
, except that
:string-in
always keeps going until the buffer is full or until end
of file.
start and end, if supplied, delimit the
portion of string to be stored into. If eof-option is
non-nil
then a sys:end-of-file
error is signaled if end of file
is reached on the stream before the string has been filled. If
eof-option is nil
, any number of characters before end of file
is acceptable, even no characters.
If string has an array-leader, the fill pointer is adjusted to start plus the number of characters stored into string.
string may be any kind of array, not necessarily a string; this is useful when reading from a binary input stream.
Three values are returned:
The index in string at which input stopped. This is the first index not stored in.
t
if input stopped due to end of file.
t
if the line is incomplete; that is, if a Return
character
did not terminate it.
streams
: :read-until-eof ¶Discards all data from the stream until it is at end of file, or does anything else with the same result.
streams
: :close &optional ignore ¶Releases resources associated with the stream, when it is not going to be used any more. On some kinds of streams, this may do nothing. On Chaosnet streams, it closes the Chaosnet connection, and on file streams, it closes the input file on the file server.
The argument is accepted for compatibility with :close
on output streams.
streams
: :tyo char ¶The stream outputs the character char. For example, if s
is bound
to a stream, then the form
(send s :tyo #/B)
outputs a B
to the stream. For binary output streams, the argument
is a non-negative number rather than specifically a character.
streams
: :fresh-line ¶Tells the stream that it should position itself at the beginning of a new line. If the stream is already at the beginning of a fresh line it should do nothing; otherwise it should output a carriage return. If the stream cannot tell whether it is at the beginning of a line, it should always output a carriage return.
streams
: :string-out (string 0
) &optional start end ¶Outputs the characters of string successively to stream. This
operation is provided for two reasons; first, it saves the writing of a loop
which is used very often, and second, many streams can perform this operation
much more efficiently than the equivalent sequence of :tyo
operations.
If start and end are not supplied, the whole string is output.
Otherwise a substring is output; start is the index of the first character
to be output (defaulting to 0
), and end is one greater than the index of
the last character to be output (defaulting to the length of the string). Callers
need not pass these arguments, but all streams that handle :string-out
must
check for them and interpret them appropriately.
streams
: :line-out string &optional (start 0
) end ¶Outputs the characters of string successively to stream, then
outputs a Return
character. start and end optionally
specify a substring, as with :string-out
. If the stream doesn’t
support :line-out
itself, the default handler implements it by means
of :tyo
.
This operation should be implemented by all output streams whose data are characters.
streams
: :close &optional mode ¶Closes the stream to make the output final if this is necessary. The
stream becomes closed and no further output operations should be
performed on it. However, it is all right to :close
a closed
stream. On many file server hosts, a file being written is not
accessible to be read until the output stream is closed.
This operation does nothing on streams for which it is not meaningful.
The mode argument is normally not supplied. If it is :abort
, we are
abnormally exiting from the use of this stream. If the stream is outputting to
a file, and has not been closed already, the stream’s newly-created file is
deleted; it will be as if it was never opened in the first place. Any previously
existing file with the same name remains undisturbed.
streams
: :eof ¶Indicates the end of data on an output stream. This is different from :close
because some devices allow multiple data files to be transmitted without closing.
:close
implies :eof
when the stream is an output stream and the close
mode is not :abort
.
This operation does nothing on streams for which it is not meaningful.
All streams are supposed to support certain operations which enable a program using the stream to ask which operations are available.
streams
: :which-operations ¶Returns a list of operations handled natively by the stream. Certain operations not in the list may work anyway, but slowly, so it is just as well if any programs that work with or without them choose not to use them.
:which-operations
itself need not be in the list.
streams
: :operation-handled-p operation ¶Returns t
if operation is handled natively by the stream:
if operation is a member of the :which-operations
list, or is
:which-operations
.
streams
: :send-if-handles operation &rest arguments ¶Performs the operation operation, with the specified arguments,
only if the stream can handle it. If operation is handled, this
is the same as sending an operation message directly, but if operation
is not handled, using :send-if-handles
avoids any error.
If operation is handled, :send-if-handles
returns whatever values
the execution of the operation returns. If operation is not handled,
:send-if-handles
returns nil
.
streams
: :direction ¶Returns :input
, :output
, or :bidirectional
for a bidirectional stream.
There are a few kinds of streams, which cannot do either input or
output, for which the :direction
operation returns nil
. For
example, open
with the :direction
keyword specified as nil
returns a stream-like object which cannot do input or output but can
handle certain file inquiry operations such as :truename
and
:creation-date
.
streams
: :characters ¶Returns t
if the data input or output on the stream
represent characters, or nil
if they are just numbers (as for a stream
reading a non-text file).
streams
: :element-type ¶Returns a type specified describing in principle the data input or output on the stream.
Refer to the function stream-element-type
, below, which works
using this operation.
These functions for inquiring about streams are defined by Common Lisp.
t
if stream handles input operations (at least, if it handles :tyi
).
t
if stream handles output operations (at least, if it handles :tyo
).
Returns a type specifier which describes, conceptually, the kind of data
input from or output to stream. The value is always a subtype of
integer
(for a binary stream) or a subtype of character
(for a
character stream). If it is a subtype of integer
, a Common Lisp
program should use read-byte
(read-byte-fun) or write-byte
(write-byte-fun) for I/O. If it is a subtype of character
,
read-char
(read-char-fun) or write-char
(write-char-fun)
should be used.
The value returned is not intended to be rigidly accurate. It describes
the typical or characteristic sort of data transferred by the stream,
but the stream may on occasion deal with data that do not fit the type;
also, not all objects of the type may be possible as input or even make
sense as output. For example, windows describe their element type
as character
even though they may offer blips, which are lists,
as input on occasion. In addition, streams which say they provide
characters really return integers if the :tyi
operation is used
rather than the standard Common Lisp function read-char
.
The operations :listen
, :tyi-no-hang
, :rubout-handler
and
:beep
are intended for interactive streams, which communicate with
the user. :listen
and :tyi-no-hang
are supported in a trivial
fashion by other streams, for compatibility.
streams
: :listen ¶On an interactive device, the :listen
operation returns non-nil
if
there are any input characters immediately available, or nil
if there is
no immediately available input. On a non-interactive device, the operation
always returns non-nil
except at end of file.
The main purpose of :listen
is to test whether the user has hit
a key, perhaps trying to stop a program in progress.
streams
: :tyi-no-hang &optional eof ¶Just like :tyi
except that it returns nil
rather than waiting if
it would be necessary to wait in order to get the character. This lets
the caller check efficiently for input being available and get the input
if there is any.
:tyi-no-hang
is different from :listen
because it reads a
character.
Streams for which the question of whether input is available is not
meaningful treat this operation just like :tyi
. So do
Chaosnet file streams. Although in fact reading a
character from a file stream may involve a delay, these delays are
supposed to be insignificant, so we pretend they do not exist.
streams
: :any-tyi-no-hang &optional eof ¶Like :tyi-no-hang
but does not filter and discard input which is not numbers.
It is therefore possible to see blips in the input stream.
The distinction matters only for input from windows.
streams
: :rubout-handler options function &rest args ¶This is supported by interactive bidirectional streams, such as windows on the terminal, and is described in its own section below (see rubout-handler).
streams
: :read-cursorpos &optional (units :pixel
) ¶This operation is supported by all windows and some other streams.
It returns two values, the current x and y coordinates
of the cursor. It takes one optional argument, which is a symbol indicating
in what units x and y should be; the symbols :pixel
and :character
are understood. :pixel
means that the coordinates
are measured in display pixels (bits), while :character
means that
the coordinates are measured in characters horizontally and lines vertically.
This operation and :increment-cursorpos
are used by the format
~T
request (see format-t-operation), which is why ~T
doesn’t work on all
streams. Any stream that supports this operation should support
:increment-cursorpos
as well.
Some streams return a meaningful value for the horizontal position
but always return zero for the vertical position. This is sufficient
for ~T
to work.
streams
: :increment-cursorpos x-increment y-increment &optional (units :pixel
) ¶Moves the stream’s cursor left or down according to the specified increments,
as if by outputting an appropriate number of space or return characters.
x and y
are like the values of :read-cursorpos
and units is the same
as the units argument to :read-cursorpos
.
Any stream which supports this operation should support
:read-cursorpos
as well, but it need not support :set-cursorpos
.
Moving the cursor with :increment-cursorpos
differs from moving it
to the same place with :set-cursorpos
in that this operation is
thought of as doing output and :set-cursorpos
is not. For example,
moving a window’s cursor down with :increment-cursorpos
when it is
near the bottom to begin with will wrap around, possibly doing a
**MORE**
. :set-cursorpos
, by comparison, cannot move the cursor
“down” if it is at the bottom of the window; it can move the cursor
explicitly to the top of the window, but then no **MORE**
will
happen.
Some streams, such as those created by with-output-to-string
, cannot
implement arbitrary cursor motion, but do implement this operation.
streams
: :set-cursorpos x y &optional (units :pixel
) ¶This operation is supported by the same streams that support
:read-cursorpos
. It sets the position of the cursor. x and y
are like the values of :read-cursorpos
and units is the same
as the units argument to :read-cursorpos
.
streams
: :clear-screen ¶Erases the screen area on which this stream displays. Non-window streams don’t support this operation.
There are many other special-purpose stream operations for graphics. They are not documented here, but in the window-system documentation. No claim that the above operations are the most useful subset should be implied.
grindef
runs much more efficiently on streams that implement
the :untyo-mark
and :untyo
operations.
streams
: :untyo-mark ¶This is used by the grinder (see grindef-fun) if the output stream supports it. It takes no arguments. The stream should return some object that indicates how far output has gotten up to in the stream.
streams
: :untyo mark ¶This is used by the grinder (see grindef-fun) in conjunction with :untyo-mark
.
It takes one argument, which is something returned by the :untyo-mark
operation of the stream. The stream should back up output to the point
at which the object was returned.
The following operations are implemented only by streams to random-access devices, principally files.
streams
: :read-pointer ¶Returns the current position within the file, in characters (bytes in fixnum mode). For text files on ASCII file servers, this is the number of Lisp Machine characters, not ASCII characters. The numbers are different because of character-set translation.
streams
: :set-pointer new-pointer ¶Sets the reading position within the file to new-pointer (bytes in fixnum mode). For text files on ASCII file servers, this does not do anything reasonable unless new-pointer is 0, because of character-set translation. Some file systems support this operation for input streams only.
streams
: :rewind ¶This operation is obsolete. It is the same as :set-pointer
with
argument zero.
streams
: :clear-input ¶Discards any buffered input the stream may have. It does nothing on streams for which it is not meaningful.
streams
: :clear-output ¶Discards any buffered output the stream may have. It does nothing on streams for which it is not meaningful.
streams
: :force-output ¶This is for output streams to buffered asynchronous devices, such as the
Chaosnet. :force-output
causes any buffered output to be sent to the
device. It does not wait for it to complete; use :finish
for that. If a
stream supports :force-output
, then :tyo
, :string-out
, and
:line-out
may have no visible effect until a :force-output
is done.
This operation does nothing on streams for which it is not meaningful.
streams
: :finish ¶This is for output streams to buffered asynchronous devices, such as the
Chaosnet. :finish
does a :force-output
, then waits until the
currently pending I/O operation has been completed.
This operation does nothing on streams for which it is not meaningful.
The following operations are implemented only by buffered input streams. They allow increased efficiency by making the stream’s internal buffer available to the user.
streams
: :read-input-buffer &optional eof ¶Returns three values: a buffer array, the index in that array of the next input byte,
and the index in that array just past the last available input byte. These values
are similar to the string, start, end arguments taken by many functions
and stream operations. If the end of the file
has been reached and no input bytes are available,
this operation returns nil
or signals an error,
based on the eof argument, just like the :tyi
operation.
After reading as many bytes from the array
as you care to, you must use the :advance-input-buffer
operation.
streams
: :get-input-buffer &optional eof ¶This is an obsolete operation similar to :read-input-buffer
.
The only difference is that the third value is the number of significant
elements in the buffer-array, rather than a final index.
If found in programs, it should be replaced with :read-input-buffer
.
streams
: :advance-input-buffer &optional new-pointer ¶If new-pointer is non-nil
, it is the index in the buffer array of the next
byte to be read. If new-pointer is nil
, the entire buffer has been used up.
Windows are one important class of streams. Each window can be used as
a stream. Output is displayed on the window and input comes from the
keyboard. A window is created using make-instance
on a window
flavor. Simple programs use windows implicitly through *terminal-io*
and the other standard stream variables.
Also important are file streams, which are produced by the function
open
(see open-fun). These read or write the contents of a file.
Chaosnet streams are made from Chaosnet connections. Data output to the stream goes out over the network; data coming in over the network is available as input from the stream. File streams that deal with Chaosnet file servers are very similar to Chaosnet streams, but Chaosnet streams can be used for many purposes other than file access.
String streams read or write the contents of a string. They are
made by with-output-to-string
or with-input-from-string
(see with-input-from-string-fun), or by make-string-input-stream
or make-string-output-stream
, below.
Editor buffer streams read or write the contents of an editor buffer.
The null stream may be passed to a program that asks for a stream
as an argument. It returns immediate end of file if used for input
and throws away any output. The null stream is the symbol
si:null-stream
. This is to say, you do not call that function to
get a stream or use the symbol’s value as the stream; the symbol
itself is the object that is the stream.
The cold-load stream is able to do I/O to the keyboard and screen
without using the window system. It is what is used by the error
handler, if you type Terminal Call
, to handle a background error that the
window system cannot deal with. It is called the cold-load stream
because it is what is used during system bootstrapping, before the
window system has been loaded.
This function is the null stream. Like any stream, it supports various operations. Output operations are ignored and input operations report end of file immediately, with no data. Usage example:
(let ((*standard-output* 'si:null-stream)) (function-whose-output-I-dont-want))
The one and only cold-load stream. Usage example:
(let ((*query-io* si:cold-load-stream)) (yes-or-no-p "Clear all window system locks? "))
body is executed with variable bound to the value of
expression, which ought to be a stream. On exit, whether normal
or by throwing, a :close
message with argument :abort
is sent
to the stream.
This is a generalization of with-open-file
, which is equivalent
to using with-open-stream
with a call to open
as the
expression.
Like with-open-stream
as far as opening and closing the stream are
concerned, but instead of a simple body, it has clauses like those of a
condition-case
that say what to do if expression does or does
not get an error. See with-open-file-case
, with-open-file-case-fun.
Creates and returns a synonym stream (‘syn’ for short). Any operations sent to this stream are redirected to the stream that is the value of the argument (if it is a symbol) or the contents of it (if it is a locative).
A synonym stream is actually an uninterned symbol whose function
defnition is forwarded to the function cell of the argument or
to the contents of the argument as appropriate. If the argument is a
symbol, the synonym stream’s print-name is symbol-syn-stream
;
otherwise the name is just syn-stream
. Once a synonym stream is
made for a symbol, it is recorded, and the same one is handed out
again if there is another request for it.
The two names for this function are synonyms too.
Returns an input stream which will read its input from the first of streams until that reaches its eof, then read input from the second of streams, and so on until the last of streams has reached end of file.
Returns a bidirectional stream which passes input operations to input-stream and passes output operations to output-stream. This works by attempting to recognize all standard input operations; anything not recognized is passed to output-stream.
Like make-two-way-stream
except that each input character read via
input-stream is output to output-stream before it is returned to
the caller.
Returns a stream that only works in the output direction. Any output sent to
this stream is forwarded to all of the streams given. The :which-operations
is the intersection of the :which-operations
of all of the streams. The value(s)
returned by a stream operation are the values returned by the last stream in streams.
Returns a bidirectional stream that reads or writes all or part of an
editor buffer. Note that editor buffer streams can also be obtained
from open
by using a pathname whose host is ED
, ED-BUFFER
or
ED-FILE
(see editor-hosts).
The first three arguments specify the buffer or portion to be read or
written. Either the first argument is an interval (a buffer is one
kind of interval), and all the text of that interval is read or written,
or the first two arguments are two buffer pointers delimiting the range
to be read or written. The third argument is used only in the latter
case; if non-nil
, it tells the function to assume that the second
buffer pointer comes later in the buffer than the first and not to take
the time to verify the assumption.
The stream has only one pointer inside it, used for both input and output. As you do input, the pointer advances through the text. When you do output, it is inserted in the buffer at the place where the pointer has reached. The pointer starts at the beginning of the specified range.
hack-fonts tells what to do about fonts. Its possible values are
t
The character epsilon
is recognized as special when you output to the
stream; sequences such as epsilon2
are interpreted as font-changes. They
do not get inserted into the buffer; instead, they change the font in
which following output will be inserted. On input, font change
sequences are included to indicate faithfully what was in the buffer.
:tyo
You are expected to read and write 16-bit characters containing font numbers.
nil
All output is inserted in font zero and font information is discarded in the input you receive. This is the best mode to use if you are reading or otherwise parsing the contents of an editor buffer.
Executes the body with the variable stream bound to a suitable
stream for printing a large help message. If *standard-output*
is a
window, then stream is also a window; a temporary window which fills
the screen. Otherwise, stream is just the same as
*standard-output*
.
The purpose of this is to spare the user the need to read a large help
printout in a small window, or have his data overwritten by it
permanently. This is the mechanism used if you type the Control-Help
key while in the rubout handler.
options is a list of alternating keywords and values.
:label
The value (which is evaluated) is used as the label of the temporary window, if one is used.
:width
The value, which is not evaluated, is a symbol. While body is executed, this symbol is bound to the width, in characters, available for the message.
:height
The value is a symbol, like the value after :width
, and it is bound
to the height in lines of the area available for the help message.
:superior
The value, which is evaluated, specifies the original stream to use in
deciding where to print the help message. The default is
*standard-output*
.
The functions and special forms in this section allow you to create I/O streams that input from or output to the contents of a string.
0
) end ¶Returns a stream which can be used to read the contents of string (or the portion of it from index start to index end) as input. End of file occurs on reading past position end or the end of string.
Returns an output stream which will accumulate all output in a string.
If string is non-nil
, output is added to it with string-nconc
(string-nconc-fun). Otherwise, a new string is created and used to
hold the output.
Returns the string of output accumulated so far by a stream which was
made by make-string-output-stream
. The accumulated output is
cleared out, so it will not be obtained again if
get-output-stream-string
is called another time on the same stream.
The form
(with-input-from-string (var string) body)
evaluates the forms in body with the variable var bound to a stream which reads characters from the string which is the value of the form string. The value of the construct is the value of the last form in its body.
If the start and end arguments are specified, they should be forms. They are evaluated at run time to produce the indices starting and ending the portion of string to be read.
If the index argument is specified, it should be something setf
can store in. When body is finished, the index in the string at
which reading stopped is stored there. This is the index of the first
character not read. If the entire string was read, it is the length of
the string. The value of index is not updated until
with-input-from-string
is exited, so you can’t use its value within
the body to see how far the reading has gotten. Example:
(with-input-from-string (foo "This is a test." :start (+ 2 2) :end 8 :index bar) (readline))
returns " is "
and sets bar
to eight.
An older calling sequence which used positional rather than keyword arguments is still accepted:
(with-input-from-string (var string index end) body)
The functions read-from-string
and cli:read-from-string
are convenient special cases of what with-input-from-string
can do.
See read-from-string-fun.
This special form provides a variety of ways to send output to a string through an I/O stream.
(with-output-to-string (var) body)
evaluates the forms in body with var bound to a stream which saves the characters output to it in a string. The value of the special form is the string.
(with-output-to-string (var string) body)
appends its output to the string which is the value of the form string.
(This is like the string-nconc
function; see string-nconc-fun.)
The value returned is the value of the last form in the body, rather than the string.
Multiple values are not returned. string must have a fill pointer.
If string
is too small to contain all the output, adjust-array-size
is used to
make it bigger.
(with-output-to-string (var string index) body)
is similar to the above except that index is a variable or setf
-able
reference which contains the index of the next character to be stored into.
It must be initialized before the with-output-to-string
and it is updated
upon normal exit.
The value of index is not updated until with-output-to-string
returns, so you can’t use its value within the body to see how far
the writing has gotten. The presence of index means that string
is not required to have a fill-pointer; if there is one, it is updated on exit.
Another way of doing output to a string is to use the format
facility
(see format-fun).
There are two ways to implement a stream: using defun
or using flavors.
Using flavors is best when you can take advantage of the predefined stream mixins, including those which perform buffering, or when you wish to define several similar kinds of streams that can inherit methods from each other.
defun
(or defselect
, which is a minor variation of the
technique) may have an advantage if you are dividing operations into
broad groups and handling them by passing them off to one or more other
streams. In this case, the automatic operation decoding provided by
flavors may get in the way. A number of streams in the system are
implemented using defun
or defselect
for historical reasons. It
isn’t yet clear whether there is any reason not to convert most of them
to use flavors.
If you use defun
, you can use the stream default handler to
implement some of the standard operations for you in a default manner.
If you use flavors, there are predefined mixins to do this for you.
A few streams are individual objects, one of a kind. For example, there is only one null stream, and no need for more, since two null streams would behave identically. But most streams are elements of a general class. For example, there can be many file streams for different files, even though all behave the same way. There can also be multiple streams reading from different points in the same file.
If you implement a class of streams with defun
, then the actual
streams must be closures of the function you define, made with
closure
.
If you use flavors to implement the streams, having a class of similar streams comes naturally: each instance of the flavor is a stream, and the instance variables distinguish one stream of the class from another.
To define a stream using flavors, define a flavor which incorporates the appropriate predefined stream flavor, and then redefine those operations which are peculiar to your own type of stream.
Flavors for defining unbuffered streams:
: si:stream ¶This flavor provides default definitions for a few standard operations such as
:direction
and :characters
. Usually you do not have to mention
this explicitly; instead you use the higher level flavors below, which
are built on this one.
: si:input-stream ¶This flavor provides default definitions of all the mandatory input
operations except :tyi
and :untyi
, in terms of those two. You
can make a simple non-character input stream by defining a flavor
incorporating this one and giving it methods for :tyi
and
:untyi
.
: si:output-stream ¶This flavor provides default definitions of all the mandatory output
operations except :tyo
, in terms of :tyo
. All you need to do to
define a simple unbuffered non-character output stream is to define a
flavor incorporating this one and give it a method for the
:tyo
operation.
: si:bidirectional-stream ¶This is a combination of si:input-stream
and si:output-stream
.
It defines :direction
to return :bidirectional
. To define a
simple unbuffered non-character bidirectional stream, build on this
flavor and define :tyi
, :untyi
and :tyo
.
The unbuffered streams implement operations such as :string-out
and
:string-in
by repeated use of :tyo
or :tyi
.
For greater efficiency, if the stream’s data is available in blocks, it
is better to define a buffered stream. You start with the predefined
buffered stream flavors, which define :tyi
or :tyo
themselves
and manage the buffers for you. You must provide other operations that
the system uses to obtain the next input buffer or to write or discard
an output buffer.
Flavors for defining buffered streams:
: si:buffered-input-stream ¶This flavor is the basis for a non-character buffered input stream.
It defines :tyi
as well as all the other standard input operations,
but you must define the two operations :next-input-buffer
and
:discard-input-buffer
, which the buffer management routines use.
si:buffered-input-stream
: :next-input-buffer ¶In a buffered input stream, this operation is used as a subroutine of
the standard input operations, such as :tyi
, to get the next
bufferful of input data. It should return three values: an array
containing the data, a starting index in the array, and an ending index.
For example, in a Chaosnet stream, this operation would get the next
packet of input data and return pointers delimiting the actual data in
the packet.
si:buffered-input-stream
: :discard-input-buffer buffer-array ¶In a buffered input stream, this operation is used as a subroutine of
the standard input operations such as :tyi
. It says that the buffer
management routines have used or thrown away all the input in a buffer,
and the buffer is no longer needed.
In a Chaosnet stream, this operation would return the packet buffer to the pool of free packets.
: si:buffered-output-stream ¶This flavor is the basis for a non-character buffered output stream. It
defines :tyo
as well as all the other standard output operations, but
you must define the operations :new-output-buffer
,
:send-output-buffer
and :discard-output-buffer
, which the buffer
management routines use.
si:buffered-output-stream
: :new-output-buffer ¶In a buffered output stream, this operation is used as a subroutine of
the
standard output operations, such as :tyo
, to get an empty buffer for
storing more output data. How the buffer is obtained depends on the
kind of stream, but in any case this operation should return an array
(the buffer), a starting index, and an ending index. The two indices
delimit the part of the array that is to be used as a buffer.
For example, a Chaosnet stream would get a packet from the free pool and return indices delimiting the part of the packet array which can hold data bytes.
si:buffered-output-stream
: :send-output-buffer buffer-array ending-index ¶In a buffered output stream, this operation is used as a subroutine of
the standard output operations, such as :tyo
, to send the data in a
buffer that has been completely or partially filled.
ending-index is the first index in the buffer that has not actually
been stored. This may not be the same as the ending index that was
returned by the :new-output-buffer
operation that was used to
obtain this buffer; if a :force-output
is being handled, ending-index
indicates how much of the buffer is currently full.
The method for this operation should process the buffer’s data and, if necessary, return the buffer to a free pool.
si:buffered-output-stream
: :discard-output-buffer buffer-array ¶In a buffered output stream, this operation is used as a subroutine
of the standard output operations, such as :clear-output
, to free an
output buffer and say that the data in it should be ignored.
It should simply return buffer-array to a free pool, if appropriate.
Some buffered output streams simply have one buffer array which they use
over and over. For such streams, :new-output-buffer
can simply
return that particular array each time; :send-output-buffer
and
:discard-output-buffer
do not have to do anything about returning
the buffer to a free pool. In fact, :discard-output-buffer
can
probably do nothing.
: si:buffered-stream ¶This is a combination of si:buffered-input-stream
and
si:buffered-output-stream
, used to make a buffered bidirectional
stream. The input and output buffering are completely independent of
each other. You must define all five of the low level operations:
:new-output-buffer
, :send-output-buffer
and
:discard-output-buffer
for output, and :next-input-buffer
and
:discard-input-buffer
for input.
The data in most streams are characters. Character streams should support
either :line-in
or :line-out
in addition to the other standard
operations.
: si:unbuffered-line-input-stream ¶This flavor is the basis for unbuffered character input streams.
You need only define :tyi
and :untyi
.
: si:line-output-stream-mixin ¶To make an unbuffered character output stream, mix this flavor into the
one you define, together with si:output-stream
. In addition, you
must define :tyo
, as for unbuffered non-character streams.
: si:buffered-input-character-stream ¶This is used just like si:buffered-input-stream
, but it also
provides the :line-in
operation and makes :characters
return
t
.
: si:buffered-output-character-stream ¶This is used just like si:buffered-output-stream
, but it also
provides the :line-out
operation and makes :characters
return
t
.
: si:buffered-character-stream ¶This is used just like si:buffered-stream
, but it also
provides the :line-in
and :line-out
operations and makes
:characters
return t
.
To make an unbuffered random-access stream, you need only define the
:read-pointer
and :set-pointer
operations as appropriate.
Since you provide the :tyi
or :tyo
handler yourself, the system
cannot help you.
In a buffered random-access stream, the random access operations must interact with the buffer management. The system provides for this.
: si:input-pointer-remembering-mixin ¶Incorporate this into a buffered input stream to
support random access. This flavor defines the :read-pointer
and
:set-pointer
operations. If you wish :set-pointer
to work, you
must provide a definition for the :set-buffer-pointer
operation.
You need not do so if you wish to support only :read-pointer
.
si:input-pointer-remembering-mixin
: :set-buffer-pointer new-pointer ¶You must define this operation if you use
si:input-pointer-remembering-mixin
and want the :set-pointer
operation to work.
This operation should arrange for the next :next-input-buffer
operation to provide a bufferful of data that includes the specified
character or byte position somewhere inside it.
The value returned should be the file pointer corresponding to the first character or byte of that next bufferful.
: si:output-pointer-remembering-mixin ¶Incorporate this into a buffered output stream to
support random access. This mixin defines the :read-pointer
and
:set-pointer
operations. If you wish :set-pointer
to work, you
must provide definitions for the :set-buffer-pointer
and
:get-old-data
operations. You need not do so if you wish to support
only :read-pointer
.
si:output-pointer-remembering-mixin
: :set-buffer-pointer new-pointer ¶This is the same as in si:input-pointer-remembering-mixin
.
si:output-pointer-remembering-mixin
: :get-old-data buffer-array lower-output-limit ¶The buffer management routines perform this operation when you do a
:set-pointer
that is outside the range of pointers that fit in the
current output buffer. They first send the old buffer, then do
:set-buffer-pointer
as described above to say where in the file the
next output buffer should come, then do :new-output-buffer
to get the
new buffer. Then the :get-old-data
operation is performed.
It should fill current buffer (buffer-array) with the old contents of the file at the corresponding addresses, so that when the buffer is eventually written, any bytes skipped over by random access will retain their old values.
The instance variable si:stream-output-lower-limit
is the starting
index in the buffer of the part that is supposed to be used for output.
si:stream-output-limit
is the ending index.
The instance variable si:output-pointer-base
is the file pointer
corresponding to the starting index in the buffer.
: si:file-stream-mixin ¶Incorporate this mixin together with si:stream
to make a file probe stream,
which cannot do input or output but records the answers to an enquiry
about a file. You should specify the init option :pathname
when you
instantiate the flavor.
You must provide definitions for the :plist
and :truename
operations; in terms of them, this mixin defines the operations
:get
, :creation-date
, and :info
.
: si:input-file-stream-mixin ¶Incorporate this mixin into input streams that are used to read files.
You should specify the file’s pathname with the :pathname
init option
when you instantiate the flavor.
In addition to the services and requirements of
si:file-stream-mixin
, this mixin takes care of mentioning the file
in the who-line. It also includes
si:input-pointer-remembering-mixin
so that the :read-pointer
operation, at least, will be available.
: si:output-file-stream-mixin ¶This is the analogue of si:input-file-stream-mixin
for output
streams.
You do not need to use flavors to implement a stream. Any object that can be used as a function, and decodes its first argument appropriately as an operation name, can serve as a stream. Although in practice using flavors is as easy as any other way, it is educational to see how to define streams “from scratch”.
We could begin to define a simple output stream, which accepts characters and conses them onto a list, as follows:
(defvar the-list nil) (defun list-output-stream (op &optional arg1 &rest rest) (ecase op (:tyo (setq the-list (cons arg1 the-list))) (:which-operations '(:tyo))))
This is an output stream, and so it supports the :tyo
operation.
All streams must support :which-operations
.
The lambda-list for a stream defined with a defun
must always have
one required parameter (op), one optional parameter (arg1), and
a rest parameter (rest).
This definition is not satisfactory, however. It handles :tyo
properly, but it does not handle :string-out
, :direction
,
:send-if-handles
, and other standard operations.
The function stream-default-handler
exists to spare us the trouble
of defining all those operations from scratch in simple streams like
this. By adding one additional clause, we let the default handler take
care of all other operations, if it can.
(defun list-output-stream (op &optional arg1 &rest rest) (selectq op (:tyo (setq the-list (cons arg1 the-list))) (:which-operations '(:tyo)) (otherwise (stream-default-handler #'list-output-stream op arg1 rest))))
If the operation is not one that the stream understands (e.g :string-out
),
it calls stream-default-handler
. Note how the rest argument is
passed to it. This is why the argument list must look the way it does.
stream-default-handler
can be thought of as a restricted analogue of
flavor inheritance.
If we want to have only one stream of this sort, the symbol
list-output-stream
can be used as the stream. The data output to it
will appear in the global value of the-list
. One more step is
required, though:
(defprop list-output-stream t si:io-stream-p)
This tells certain functions including read
to treat the symbol
list-output-stream
as a stream rather than as an end of file option.
If we wish to be able to create any number of list output streams, each accumulating its own list, we must use closures:
(defvar the-stream nil "Inside a list output stream, holds the stream itself.") (defvar the-list nil "Inside a list output stream, holds the list of characters being accumulated.") (defun list-output-stream (op &optional arg1 &rest rest) (selectq op (:tyo (push arg1 the-list))) (:withdrawal (prog1 the-list (setq the-list nil))) (:which-operations '(:tyo :withdrawal)) (otherwise (stream-default-handler the-stream op arg1 rest)))) (defun make-list-output-stream () (let ((the-stream the-list)) (setq the-stream (closure '(the-stream the-list) 'list-output-stream))))
We have added a new operation :withdrawal
that can be used to find
out what data has been accumulated by a stream. This is necessary
because we can no longer simply look at or set the global value of
the-list
; that is not the same as the value closed into the stream.
In addition, we have a new variable the-stream
which allows the
function list-output-stream
to know which stream it is serving at
any time. This variable is passed to stream-default-handler
so that
when it simulates :string-out
by means of :tyo
, it can do the
:tyo
’s to the same stream that the :string-out
was done to.
The same stream could be defined with defselect
instead of
defun
. It actually makes only a small difference. The defun
for list-output-stream
could be replaced with this code:
(defselect (list-output-stream list-output-d-h) (:tyo (arg1) (push arg1 the-list)) (:withdrawal () (prog1 the-list (setq the-list nil)))) (defun list-output-d-h (op &optional arg1 &rest rest) (stream-default-handler the-stream op arg1 rest))
defselect
takes care of decoding the operations, provides a
definition for :which-operations
, and allows you to write a separate
lambda list for each operation.
By comparison, the same stream defined using flavors looks like this:
(defflavor list-output-stream ((the-list nil)) (si:line-output-stream-mixin si:output-stream)) (defmethod (list-output-stream :tyo) (character) (push character the-list)) (defmethod (list-outut-stream :withdrawal) () (prog1 the-list (setq the-list nil))) (defun make-list-output-stream () (make-instance 'list-output-stream))
Here is a simple input stream, which generates successive characters of a list.
(defvar the-list) ;Put your input list here (defvar the-stream) (defvar untyied-char nil) (defun list-input-stream (op &optional arg1 &rest rest) (selectq op (:tyi (cond ((not (null untyied-char)) (prog1 untyied-char (setq untyied-char nil))) ((null the-list) (and arg1 (error arg1))) (t (pop the-list)))) (:untyi (setq untyied-char arg1)) (:which-operations '(:tyi :untyi)) (otherwise (stream-default-handler the-stream op arg1 rest)))) (defun make-list-input-stream (the-list) (let (the-stream untyied-char) (setq the-stream (closure '(the-list the-stream untyied-char) 'list-input-stream))))
The important things to note are that :untyi
must be supported,
and that the stream must check for having reached the end of the information
and do the right thing with the argument to the :tyi
operation.
Tries to handle the op operation on stream, given arguments of arg1 and the elements of rest. The exact action taken for each of the defined operations is explained with the documentation on that operation, above.
There are two ways of doing general formatted output. One is the
function format
. The other is the output
subsystem.
format
uses a control string written in a special format
specifier language to control the output format.
format:output
provides Lisp functions to do
output in particular formats.
For simple tasks in which only the most basic format specifiers are
needed, format
is easy to use and has the advantage of brevity.
For more complicated tasks, the format specifier language becomes
obscure and hard to read. Then format:output
becomes advantageous
because it works with ordinary Lisp control constructs.
Produces formatted output.
format
outputs the characters of control-string, except
that a tilde (‘~
’) introduces a directive. The character after
the tilde, possibly preceded by prefix parameters and modifiers, specifies
what kind of formatting is desired. Most directives use one or more
elements of args to create their output; the typical directive
puts the next element of args into the output, formatted in
some special way.
The output is sent to destination. If destination is
nil
, a string is created which contains the output; this string is
returned as the value of the call to format
. In all other cases
format
returns no interesting value (generally it returns nil
).
If destination is a stream, the output is sent to it. If
destination is t
, the output is sent to *standard-output*
. If
destination is a string with an array-leader, such as would be
acceptable to string-nconc
(see string-nconc-fun), the output is
added to the end of that string.
A directive consists of a tilde, optional prefix parameters
separated by commas, optional colon (‘:
’) and atsign (‘@
’) modifiers,
and a single character indicating what kind of directive this is.
The alphabetic case of the character is ignored.
The prefix parameters are generally decimal numbers.
Examples of control strings:
"~S" ; This is an S directive with no parameters. "~3,4:@s" ; This is an S directive with two parameters, 3 and 4, ; and both the colon and atsign flags. "~,4S" ; The first prefix parameter is omitted and takes ; on its default value, while the second is 4.
format
includes some extremely complicated and specialized
features. It is not necessary to understand all or even most of its
features to use format
efficiently. The beginner should
skip over anything in the following documentation that is not
immediately useful or clear. The more sophisticated features are
there for the convenience of programs with complicated formatting
requirements.
Sometimes a prefix parameter is used to specify a character,
for instance the padding character in a right- or left-justifying
operation. In this case a single quote ("'
") followed by the
desired character may be used as a prefix parameter, so that you don’t
have to know the decimal numeric values of characters in the character
set. For example, you can use "~5,'0d"
instead of "~5,48d"
to
print a decimal number in five columns with leading zeros.
In place of a prefix parameter to a directive, you can put the letter
V
, which takes an argument from args as a parameter to the
directive. Normally this should be a number but it doesn’t really have
to be. This feature allows variable column-widths and the like. Also,
you can use the character #
in place of a parameter; it represents the
number of arguments remaining to be processed.
Here are some relatively simple examples to give you the general
flavor of how format
is used.
(format nil "foo") => "foo" (setq x 5) (format nil "The answer is ~D." x) => "The answer is 5." (format nil "The answer is ~3D." x) => "The answer is 5."
(setq y "elephant") (format nil "Look at the ~A!" y) => "Look at the elephant!" (format nil "The character ~:@C is strange." #\meta-beta) => "The character Meta-beta (Greek-b) is strange."
(setq n 3) (format nil "~D item~:P found." n) => "3 items found." (format nil "~R dog~:[s are~; is~] here." n (= n 1)) => "three dogs are here." (format nil "~R dog~:*~[~1; is~:;s are~] here." n) => "three dogs are here." (format nil "Here ~[~1;is~:;are~] ~:*~R pupp~:@P." n) => "Here are three puppies."
The directives will now be described. arg will be used to refer to the next argument from args.
~A
arg, any Lisp object, is printed without escaping (as by princ
).
~:A
prints ()
if arg is nil
; this is useful when printing
something that is always supposed to be a list.
~nA
inserts spaces on the right, if necessary, to make the
column width at least n. The @
modifier causes the spaces
to be inserted on the left rather than the right.
~mincol,colinc,minpad,padcharA
is the full form of ~A
,
which allows elaborate control of the padding.
The string is padded on the right with at least minpad copies
of padchar; padding characters are then inserted colinc characters
at a time until the total width is at least mincol.
The defaults are 0 for mincol and minpad, 1 for colinc,
and space for padchar.
~S
This is just like ~A
, but arg is printed with escaping
(as by prin1
rather than princ
).
~D
arg, a number, is printed in base ten.
Unlike print
, ~D
never puts a decimal point after the number.
~nD
uses a column width of n; spaces are inserted on
the left if the number requires less than n columns for its digits
and sign. If the number doesn’t fit in n columns, additional columns
are used as needed. ~n,mD
uses m as the pad character
instead of space. If arg is not a number, it is printed
in ~A
format and decimal base.
The @
modifier causes the number’s sign to be printed always; the default
is only to print it if the number is negative.
The :
modifier causes commas to be printed between groups of three digits;
the third prefix parameter may be used to change the character used as the comma.
Thus the most general form of ~D
is
~mincol,padchar,commacharD
.
~O
This is just like ~D
but prints in octal instead of decimal.
~X
This is just like ~D
but prints in hex instead of decimal.
Note that ~X
used to have a different meaning: print one or more spaces.
Uses of ~X
intended to have this meaning should be replaced with ~@T
.
~B
This is just like ~D
but prints in binary instead of decimal.
~w,d,k,ovfl,padF
arg is printed in nonexponential floating point format, as in ‘10.5’. (If the magnitude of arg is very large or very small, it is printed in exponential notation.) The parameters control the details of the formatting.
is the total field width desired. If omitted, this is not constrained.
is the number of digits to print after the decimal point. If d is omitted, it is chosen to do a good job based on w (if specified) and the value of arg.
is a scale factor. arg is multiplied by (exp 10 k)
before it is printed.
is a character to use for overflow. If arg is too big to print and fit the constraints of field width, etc, and ovfl is specified then the whole field is filled with ovfl. If ovfl is not specified, arg is printed using extra width as needed.
is a character to use for padding on the left, when the field width is specified and not that many characters are really needed.
If the @
modifier is used, a sign is printed even if arg is positive.
Rational numbers are converted to floats and then printed.
Anything else is printed with ~wD
format.
~w,d,e,k,ovfl,pad,exptE
arg is printed in exponential notation, as in ‘.105e+2’. The parameters control the details of the formatting.
is the total field width desired. If omitted, this is not constrained.
control the number of mantissa digits and their arrangement around the decimal point. d+1 digits are printed. If k is positive, all of them are significant digits, and the decimal point is printed after the first k of them. If k is zero or negative, the first |k|+1 of the d+1 digits are leading zeros, and the decimal point follows the first zero. (This zero can be omitted if necessary to fit the number in w characters.) So the number of significant figures is less than d if k is negative.
The exponent printed always compensates for any powers of ten
introduced according to k, so 10.5 might be printed as
0.105e+2
or as 1050.0e-2
.
If d is omitted, the system chooses enough significant figures to represent the float accurately. If k is omitted, the default is one.
is the number of digits to use for the exponent. If it is not specified, however many digits are needed are used.
is the overflow character. If the exponent doesn’t fit in e digits or the entire number does not fit in w characters, then if ovfl is specified, the field of w characters is filled with ovfl. Otherwise more characters are used as needed.
is a character to use for padding on the left, when the field width is specified and not that many characters are really needed.
is a character to use to separate the mantissa from the exponent.
The default is e
or s
or f
, whichever would be used
in printing the number normally.
If the @
modifier is used, a sign is printed even if arg is positive.
~w,d,e,k,ovfl,pad,exptG
Prints a floating point number arg in either ~F
or ~E
format. Fixed format is used if the absolute value of arg is less
than (expt 10 d)
, and exponential format otherwise. (If d
is not specified, it defaults based on the value of arg.) If fixed
format is used, e+2 blanks are printed at the end (where the
exponent and its separator and sign would go, in exponential format).
These count against the width w if that is specified. Four blanks
are used if e is omitted. The diminished width available, d,
ovfl and pad are used as specified. The scale factor used in
fixed format is always zero, not k.
If exponential format needs to be used, all the parameters are passed to
the ~E
directive to print the number.
Rational numbers are converted to floats and then printed.
Anything else is printed with ~wD
format.
~$
~rdig,ldig,field,padchar$
prints
arg, a float, with exactly rdig digits after the decimal
point. The default for rdig is 2, which is convenient for
printing amounts of money. At least ldig digits are printed
preceding the decimal point; leading zeros are printed if there would
be fewer than ldig. The default for ldig is 1. The number is
right justified in a field field
columns long, padded out with padchar. The colon modifier means
that the sign character is to be at the beginning of the field, before
the padding, rather than just to the left of the number. The atsign modifier
says that the sign character should always be output.
If arg is not a number, or is unreasonably large, it is printed
in ~field,,,padchar@A
format; i.e it is princ
’ed
right-justified in the specified field width.
~C
(character arg)
is put in the output. arg is treated as a
keyboard character (see %%kbd), thus it may contain extra
control-bits. These are printed first by representing them with
abbreviated prefixes: ‘C-
’ for Control
, ‘M-
’ for Meta
, ‘H-
’ for Hyper
,
and ‘S-
’ for Super
.
With the colon flag (~:C
), the names of the control bits are spelled out
(e.g ‘Control-Meta-F
’) and non-printing characters
are represented by their names (e.g ‘Return
’) rather than being output
as themselves. The printing characters Space and Altmode are also represented
as their names, but all others are printed directly.
With both colon and atsign (~:@C
), the colon-only format is printed, and then
if the character requires the Top
or Greek
(Front
) shift key(s) to type it,
this fact is mentioned (e.g ‘universalQuantifier (Top-U)
’). This is the format
used for telling the user about a key he is expected to type, for instance
in prompt messages.
For all three of these formats, if the character is a mouse character, it
is printed as Mouse-
, the name of the button, ‘-
’, and the number
of clicks.
With just an atsign (~@C
), the character is printed in such a way that
the Lisp reader can understand it, using ‘#\
’ or ‘#/
’, depending
on the escaping character of *readtable*
(see escape-characters).
~%
Outputs a carriage return. ~n%
outputs n carriage returns.
No argument is used. Simply putting a carriage return in the control string
would work, but ~%
is usually used because it makes the control string
look nicer in the Lisp source program.
~&
The :fresh-line
operation is performed on the output stream.
Unless the stream knows that it is already at the front of a line,
this outputs a carriage return. ~n&
does a :fresh-line
operation
and then outputs n-1 carriage returns.
~|
Outputs a page separator character (#\page
). ~n|
does this
n times. With a :
modifier, if the output stream supports the
:clear-screen
operation this directive clears the screen, otherwise
it outputs page separator character(s) as if no :
modifier were
present. |
is vertical bar, not capital I.
~~
Outputs a tilde. ~n~
outputs n tildes.
~ <CR>
Tilde immediately followed by a carriage return ignores the carriage return
and any whitespace at the beginning of the next line. With a :
, the whitespace
is left in place. With an @
, the carriage return is left in place.
This directive is typically used when a format control string is too long
to fit nicely into one line of the program.
~*
arg is ignored. ~n*
ignores the next n arguments.
~:*
“ignores backwards”; that is, it backs up in the list of
arguments so that the argument last processed will be processed again.
~n:*
backs up n arguments. ~n
is absolute;
it moves to argument n (n = 0 specifies the first argument).
When within a ~{
construct (see below), the ignoring (in either
direction) is relative to the list of arguments being processed by the
iteration.
~P
If arg is not 1
, a lower-case ‘s’ is printed. (‘P
’ is for ‘plural’.)
~:P
does the same thing, after doing a ~:*
; that is, it prints
a lower-case s if the last argument was not 1. ~@P
prints ‘y’
if the argument is 1, or ‘ies’ if it is not. ~:@P
does the same thing,
but backs up first.
~T
Spaces over to a given column. ~n,mT
outputs
sufficient spaces to move the cursor to column n. If the cursor
is already past column n, it outputs spaces to move it to
column n+mk, for the smallest integer value k possible.
n and m default to 1
. Without the colon flag, n and
m are in units of characters; with it, they are in units of pixels.
Note: this operation works properly only on streams that support
the :read-cursorpos
and :increment-cursorpos
stream operations
(see read-cursorpos). On other streams, any ~T
operation
simply outputs two spaces. When format
is creating
a string, ~T
works by assuming that the first character in the string
is at the left margin.
~@T
simply outputs a space.
~relT
simply outputs rel spaces.
~rel, periodT
outputs rel spaces and then
additional spaces until it reaches a column which is a multiple
of period. If the output stream does not support :read-cursorpos
then it simply outputs rel spaces.
~R
~R
prints arg as a cardinal English number, e.g four.
~:R
prints arg as an ordinal number, e.g fourth.
~@R
prints arg as a Roman numeral, e.g IV
.
~:@R
prints arg as an old Roman numeral, e.g IIII
.
~nR
prints arg in radix n.
The flags and any remaining parameters are used as for the ~D
directive.
Indeed, ~D
is the same as ~10R
. The full form here is therefore
~radix,mincol,padchar,commacharR
.
~?
Uses up two arguments, and processes the first one as a format control string using the second one’s elements as arguments. Thus,
(format nil "~? ~D" "~O ~O" '(4 20.) 9)
returns "4 24 9"
.
~?
processes the following argument as a format control string,
using all the remaining arguments. Any arguments it does not use
are left to be processed by the format directives following the ~?
in the original control string.
(format nil "~? ~D" "~O ~O" 4 20. 9)
likewise returns "4 24 9"
.
~str~
Performs the formatting specified by str, with indentation on
any new lines. Each time a Return
is printed during the processing of str,
it is followed by indentation sufficient to line up underneath the place
where the cursor was at the beginning of str. For example,
(format t "Foo: ~8T~~A~" string)
prints string with each line starting at column 8. If string
is (string-append "This is" #\return "the string")
then the output is
Foo: This is the string
~(str~)
Performs output with case conversion.
The formatting specified by str is done, with all the letters in the
resulting output being converted to upper or lower case according to
the modifiers given to the ~(
command:
~( without modifiers
Converts all the letters to lower case.
~:(
Converts the first letter of each word to upper case and the rest to lower case.
~@(
Converts the first letter of the first word to upper case, and all other letters to lower case.
~:@(
Converts all the letters to upper case.
~1(
Converts the first letter of the first word to upper case and does not change anything else. If you arrange to generate all output in lower case except for letters that should be upper case regardless of context, you can use this directive when the output appears at the beginning of a sentence.
Example:
"~(FoO BaR~) ~:(FoO BaR~) ~@(FoO BaR~) ~:@(FoO BaR~) ~1(at the White Hart~)"
produces
foo bar Foo Bar Foo bar FOO BAR At the White Hart
~[str0~;str1~;...~;strn~]
This is a set of alternative control strings. The alternatives
(called clauses)
are separated by ~;
and the construct is terminated by ~]
.
For example,
"~[Siamese ~;Manx ~;Persian ~;Tortoise-Shell ~ ~;Tiger ~;Yu-Shiang ~]kitty"
The argth
alternative is selected; 0
selects the first.
If a prefix parameter is given (i.e ~n[
),
then the parameter is used instead of an argument
(this is useful only if the parameter is ‘#
’).
If arg is out of range no alternative is selected.
After the selected alternative has been processed, the control string
continues after the ~]
.
~[str0~;str1~;...~;strn~:;default~]
has a default case.
If the last ~;
used to separate clauses
is instead ~:;
, then the last clause is an “else” clause,
which is performed if no other clause is selected.
For example,
"~[Siamese ~;Manx ~;Persian ~;Tiger ~ ~;Yu-Shiang ~:;Bad ~] kitty"
~[~tag00,tag01,...;str0~tag10,tag11,...;str1...~]
allows the clauses to have explicit tags. The parameters to each ~;
are numeric tags for the clause which follows it. That clause is processed
which has a tag matching the argument. If ~a1,a2,b1,b2,...:;
(note the colon)
is used, then the following clause is tagged not by single values but
by ranges of values a1 through a2 (inclusive), b1 through b2, etc.
~:;
with no parameters may be used at the end to denote a default clause.
For example,
"~[~'+,'-,'*,'//;operator ~'A,'Z,'a,'z:;letter ~ ~'0,'9:;digit ~:;other ~]"
~:[false~;true~]
selects the false control string
if arg is nil
, and selects the true control string otherwise.
~@[true~]
tests the argument. If it is not nil
,
then the argument is not used up, but is the next one to be processed,
and the one clause is processed.
If it is nil
, then the argument is used up, and the clause is not processed. For example,
(setq *print-level* nil *print-length* 5) (format nil "~@[ *PRINT-LEVEL*=~D~]~@[ *PRINT-LENGTH*=~D~]" prinlevel prinlength) => " *PRINT-LENGTH*=5"
The combination of ~[
and #
is useful, for
example, for dealing with English conventions for printing lists:
(setq foo "Items:~#[ none~; ~S~; ~S and ~ ~S~:;~{~#[~1; and~] ~S~^,~}~].") (format nil foo) => "Items: none." (format nil foo 'foo) => "Items: FOO." (format nil foo 'foo 'bar) => "Items: FOO and BAR." (format nil foo 'foo 'bar 'baz) => "Items: FOO, BAR, and BAZ." (format nil foo 'foo 'bar 'baz 'quux) => "Items: FOO, BAR, BAZ, and QUUX."
~;
Separates clauses in ~[
and ~<
constructions. It is undefined elsewhere.
~]
Terminates a ~[
. It is undefined elsewhere.
~{str~}
This is an iteration construct. The argument should be a list,
which is used as a set of arguments as if for a recursive call to format
.
The string str is used repeatedly as the control string.
Each iteration can absorb as many elements of the list as it likes;
if str uses up two arguments by itself, then two elements of the
list get used up each time around the loop.
If before any iteration step the list is empty, then the iteration is terminated.
Also, if a prefix parameter n is given, then there can be at most n
repetitions of processing of str. Here are some simple examples:
(format nil "Here it is:~{ ~S~}." '(a b c)) => "Here it is: A B C." (format nil "Pairs of things:~{ <~S,~S>~}." '(a 1 b 2 c 3)) => "Pairs of things: <A,1> <B,2> <C,3>."
Using ~^
as well, to terminate str if no arguments remain,
we can print a list with commas between the elements:
(format nil "Elements: ~{~S~^, ~}." '(a b c)) => "Elements: A, B, C."
~:{str~}
is similar, but the argument should be a list of sublists.
At each repetition step one sublist is used as the set of arguments for
processing str; on the next repetition a new sublist is used, whether
or not all of the last sublist had been processed. Example:
(format nil "Pairs of things:~:{ <~S,~S>~}." '((a 1) (b 2) (c 3))) => "Pairs of things: <A,1> <B,2> <C,3>."
~{str~}
is similar to ~{str~}
, but instead of
using one argument which is a list, all the remaining arguments
are used as the list of arguments for the iteration. Example:
(format nil "Pairs of things:~{ <~S,~S>~}." 'a 1 'b 2 'c 3) => "Pairs of things: <A,1> <B,2> <C,3>."
~:{str~}
combines the features of ~:{str~}
and ~{str~}
.
All the remaining arguments
are used, and each one must be a list.
On each iteration the next argument is used as a list of arguments to str.
Example:
(format nil "Pairs of things:~:{ <~S,~S>~}." '(a 1) '(b 2) '(c 3)) => "Pairs of things: <A,1> <B,2> <C,3>."
Terminating the repetition construct with ~:}
instead of ~}
forces str to be processed at least once even if the initial
list of arguments is null (however, it does not override an explicit
prefix parameter of zero).
If str is empty, then an argument is used as str. It must be a string, and precedes any arguments processed by the iteration. As an example, the following are equivalent:
(apply #'format stream string args) (format stream "~1{~:}" string args)
This uses string
as a formatting string. The ~1{
says it must
be processed at most once, and the ~:}
says it must be processed at least once.
Therefore it is processed exactly once, using args
as the arguments.
As another example, the format
function itself uses format-error
(a routine internal to the format
package) to signal
error messages, which in turn uses ferror
, which uses format
recursively.
Now format-error
takes a string and arguments, just like format
,
but also prints some additional information: if the control string in ctl-string
actually is a string (it might be a list–see below), then it prints the string
and a little arrow showing where in the processing of the control string the
error occurred. The variable ctl-index
points one character after the place of
the error.
(defun format-error (string &rest args) (if (stringp ctl-string) (ferror nil "~1{~:}~%~VTdownArrow~%~3@T/"~A/"~%" string args (+ ctl-index 3) ctl-string) (ferror nil "~1{~:}" string args)))
This first processes the given string and arguments using ~1{~:}
, then
tabs a variable amount for printing the down-arrow, then prints the control
string between double-quotes. The effect is something like this:
(format t "The item is a ~[Foo~;Bar~;Loser~]." 'quux) >>ERROR: The argument to the FORMAT "~[" command must be a number downArrow "The item is a ~[Foo~;Bar~;Loser~]." ..
~}
Terminates a ~{
. It is undefined elsewhere.
~<
~mincol,colinc,minpad,padchar<text~>
justifies text within a field at least mincol wide. text
may be divided up into segments with ~;
–the
spacing is evenly divided between the text segments.
With no modifiers, the leftmost text segment is left justified in the
field, and the rightmost text segment right justified; if there is
only one, as a special case, it is right justified.
The :
modifier causes
spacing to be introduced before the first text segment; the @
modifier causes spacing to be added after the last.
Minpad, default 0
, is the minimum number of padchar
(default space) padding characters to be output between each segment.
If the total width needed to satisfy these constraints is greater
than mincol, then mincol is adjusted upwards in
colinc increments. colinc defaults to 1
. mincol defaults to 0
.
For example,
(format nil "~10<foo~;bar~>") => "foo bar" (format nil "~10:<foo~;bar~>") => " foo bar" (format nil "~10:@<foo~;bar~>") => " foo bar " (format nil "~10<foobar~>") => " foobar" (format nil "~10:<foobar~>") => " foobar" (format nil "~10@<foobar~>") => "foobar " (format nil "~10:@<foobar~>") => " foobar " (format nil "$~10,,,'*<~3f~>" 2.5902) => "$******2.59"
Note that text may include format directives. The last example
illustrates how the ~<
directive can be combined with the ~f
directive to provide more advanced control over the formatting of
numbers.
Here are some examples of the use of ~^
within a ~<
construct.
~^
is explained in detail below, however the general idea is that
it eliminates the segment in which it appears and all following segments
if there are no more arguments.
(format nil "~15<~S~;~^~S~;~^~S~>" 'foo) => " FOO" (format nil "~15<~S~;~^~S~;~^~S~>" 'foo 'bar) => "FOO BAR" (format nil "~15<~S~;~^~S~;~^~S~>" 'foo 'bar 'baz) => "FOO BAR BAZ"
The idea is that if a segment contains a ~^
, and format
runs out
of arguments, it just stops there instead of getting an error, and it as
well as the rest of the segments are ignored.
If the first clause of a ~<
is terminated with ~:;
instead of ~;
,
then it is used in a special way. All of the clauses are processed
(subject to ~^
, of course), but the first one is omitted in
performing the spacing and padding. When the padded result has been
determined, then if it will fit on the current line of output, it is output,
and the text for the first clause is discarded. If, however, the padded text
will not fit on the current line, then the
text segment for the first clause is output before the padded text. The first clause ought
to contain a carriage return (~%
). The first clause is
always processed, and so any arguments it refers to will be used;
the decision is whether to use the resulting segment of text, not whether to
process the first clause. If the ~:;
has a prefix parameter n, then
the padded text must fit on the current line with n character positions to spare
to avoid outputting the first clause’s text.
For example, the control string
"~%;; ~{~<~%;; ~1:; ~S~>~^,~}.~%"
can be used to print a list of items separated by commas, without
breaking items over line boundaries, and beginning each line with
‘;;
’. The prefix parameter 1
in ~1:;
accounts for the width of the
comma which will follow the justified item if it is not the last
element in the list, or the period if it is. If ~:;
has a second
prefix parameter, then it is used as the width of the line,
thus overriding the natural line width of the output stream. To make
the preceding example use a line width of 50, one would write
"~%;; ~{~<~%;; ~1,50:; ~S~>~^,~}.~%"
If the second argument is not specified, then format
sees whether
the stream handles the :size-in-characters
message. If it does,
then format
sends that message and uses the first returned value as
the line length in characters. If it doesn’t, format
uses 72.
as the line length.
Rather than using this complicated syntax, one can often call the function
format:print-list
(see format:print-list-fun).
~>
Terminates a ~<
. It is undefined elsewhere.
~^
This is an escape construct. If there are no more arguments remaining
to be processed, then the immediately enclosing ~{
or ~<
construct is terminated. If there is no such enclosing construct, then
the entire formatting operation is terminated.
In the ~<
case, the formatting is performed, but no
more segments are processed before doing the justification.
The ~^
should appear only at the beginning of a ~<
clause,
because it aborts the entire clause. ~^
may appear anywhere in a ~{
construct.
If a prefix parameter is given, then termination occurs if the parameter
is zero. (Hence ~^
is the same as ~#^
.) If two parameters are
given, termination occurs if they are equal. If three are given, termination
occurs if the second is between the other two in ascending order. Of course,
this is useless if all the prefix parameters are constants; at least one
of them should be a #
or a V
parameter.
If ~^
is used within a ~:{
construct, then it merely terminates
the current iteration step (because in the standard case it tests for
remaining arguments of the current step only); the next iteration step
commences immediately. To terminate the entire iteration process,
use ~:^
.
~Q
An escape to arbitrary user-supplied code. arg is called as a function;
its arguments are the prefix parameters to ~Q
, if any. args can be
passed to the function by using the V
prefix parameter. The function may
output to *standard-output*
and may look at the variables format:colon-flag
and format:atsign-flag
, which are t
or nil
to reflect the
:
and @
modifiers on the ~Q
. For example,
(format t "~VQ" foo bar)
is a fancy way to say
(funcall bar foo)
and discard the value.
Note the reversal of order; the V
is processed before the Q
.
~\
This begins a directive whose name is longer than one character.
The name is terminated by another \
character.
The following directives have names longer than one character
and make use of the ~\
mechanism as part of their operation.
~\lozenged-string\
This is like ~A
except when output is to a window, in which case the
argument is printed in a small font inside a lozenge.
~\lozenged-character\
This is like ~C
except when output is to a window, in which case the
argument is printed in a small font inside a lozenge if it has a character name,
even if it is a formatting character or graphic character.
~\date\
This expects an argument that is a universal time (see
universal-time), and prints it as a date and time using
time:print-universal-date
.
Example:
(format t "It is now ~\date\" (get-universal-time))
prints
It is now Saturday the fourth of December, 1982; 4:00:32 am
~\time\
This expects an argument that is a universal time (see
universal-time), and prints it in a brief format using
time:print-universal-time
.
Example:
(format t "It is now ~\time\" (get-universal-time))
prints
It is now 12/04/82 04:01:38
~\datime\
This prints the current time and date. It does not use an argument.
It is equivalent to using the ~\time\
directive with
(time:get-universal-time)
as argument.
~\time-interval\
This prints a time interval measured in seconds using the function
time:print-interval-or-never
.
Example:
(format t "It took ~\time-interval\." 3601.)
prints
It took 1 hour 1 second.
You can define your own directives. How to do this is not documented
here; read the code. Names of user-defined directives longer than one
character may be used if they are enclosed in backslashes (e.g
~4,3\GRAPH\
).
(Note: format
also allows control-string to be a list. If the
list is a list of one element, which is a string, the string is simply
printed. This is for the use of the format:outfmt
function below.
The old feature wherein a more complex interpretation of this list was
possible is now considered obsolete; use format:output
if you like
using lists.)
A condition instance can also be used as the control-string. Then
the :report
operation is used to print the condition instance;
any other arguments are ignored. This way, you can pass a condition
instance directly to any function that normally expects a format string
and arguments.
This function provides a simpler interface for the specific purpose of
printing comma-separated lists with no list element split across two
lines; see the description of the ~:;
directive
(ultra-hairy-print-list) to see the more complex way to do this
within format
. destination tells where to send the output; it
can be t
, nil
, a string-nconc
’able string, or a stream, as
with format
. element-format is a format
control-string
that tells how to print each element of list; it is used as the
body of a ~{...~}
construct. separator, which defaults to
", "
(comma, space) is a string which goes after each element
except the last. format
control commands are not recommended in
separator. start-line, which defaults to three spaces, is a
format
control-string that is used as a prefix at the beginning of
each line of output, except the first. format
control commands are
allowed in separator, but they should not swallow arguments from
list. tilde-brace-options is a string inserted before the
opening ‘{
’; it defaults to the null string, but allows you to
insert colon and/or atsign. The line-width of the stream is computed
the same way that the ~:;
command computes it;
it is not possible to override the natural line-width of the stream.
The formatting functions associated with the format:output
subsystem allow
you to do formatted output using Lisp-style control structure. Instead
of a directive in a format
control string, there is one formatting
function for each kind of formatted output.
The calling conventions of most of the formatting functions are similar. The first argument is usually the datum to be output. The second argument is usually the minimum number of columns to use. The remaining arguments are keyword arguments.
Most of the functions accept the keyword arguments padchar, minpad and tab-period. padchar is a character to use for padding. minpad is a minimum number of padding characters to output after the data. tab-period is the distance between allowable places to stop padding. To make the meaning of tab-period clearer, if the value of tab-period is 5, if the minimum size of the field is 10, and if the value of minpad is 2, then a datum that takes 9 characters is padded out to 15 characters. The requirement to use at least two characters of padding means it can’t fit into 10 characters, and the tab-period of 5 means the next allowable stopping place is at 10+5 characters. The default values for minpad and tab-period, if they are not specified, are zero and one. The default value for padchar is space.
The formatting functions always output to *standard-output*
and do
not require an argument to specify the stream. The macro
format:output
allows you to specify the stream or a string, just
as format
does, and also makes it convenient to concatenate
constant and variable output.
Makes it convenient to intersperse arbitrary output
operations with printing of constant strings.
*standard-output*
is bound to stream, and each string-or-form
is processed in succession from left to right. If it is a string, it is
printed; otherwise it is a form, which is evaluated for effect. Presumably
the forms will send output to *standard-output*
.
If stream is written as nil
, then the output is put into a
string which is returned by format:output
. If stream is written
as t
, then the output goes to the prevailing value of
*standard-output*
. Otherwise stream is a form, which must evaluate
to a stream.
Here is an example:
(format:output t "FOO is " (prin1 foo) " now." (terpri))
Because format:output
is a macro, what matters about stream is
not whether it evaluates to t
or nil
, but whether it
is actually written as t
or nil
.
Some system functions ask for a format
control string and
arguments, to be printed later. If you wish to generate the output
using the formatted output functions, you can use format:outfmt
, which
produces a control argument that will eventually make format
print the desired output (this is a list whose one element is a string
containing the output). A call to format:outfmt
can be used as
the second argument to ferror
, for example:
(ferror nil (format:outfmt "Foo is " (format:onum foo) " which is too large"))
Outputs number in base radix, padding to at least minwidth columns and obeying the other padding options specified as described above.
radix can be a number, or it can be :roman
, :english
,
or :ordinal
. The default radix is 10
(decimal).
If signed is non-nil
, a +
sign is printed if the number is
positive. If commas is non-nil
, a comma is printed every third
digit in the customary way. These arguments are meaningful only with
numeric radices.
Outputs number as a floating point number using
n-digits digits. If force-exponential-notation is
non-nil
, then an exponent is always used. minwidth and
the padding options are interpreted as usual.
Outputs string, padding to at least
minwidth columns if minwidth is not nil
, and obeying
the other padding options specified as described above.
Normally the data are left justified; any padding follows the data.
If right-justify is non-nil
, the padding comes before
the data. The amount of padding is not affected.
The argument need not really be a string. Any Lisp object is allowed,
and it is output with princ
.
Prints object, any Lisp object, padding to at
least minwidth columns if minwidth is not nil
, and
obeying the padding options specified as described above.
Normally the data are left justified; any padding follows the data.
If right-justify is non-nil
, the padding comes before
the data. The amount of padding is not affected.
The printing of the object is done with prin1
.
Outputs character in one of three styles, selected by the style argument. minwidth and the padding options control padding as usual.
:read or nil
The character is printed using #\
or #/
so that it could be read
back in.
:editor
Output is in the style of
‘Meta-Rubout
’. Non-printing characters, and the two printing
characters Space and Altmode, are represented by their names. Other printing
characters are printed directly.
:brief
Brief prefixes such as ‘C-
’ and
‘M-
’ are used, rather than ‘Control-
’ or ‘Meta-
’. Also,
character names are used only if there are meta bits present.
:lozenged
The output is the same as that of the :editor
style, but If the
character is not a graphic character or if it has meta bits, and the
stream supports the :display-lozenged-string
operation, that
operation is used instead of :string-out
to print the text. On
windows this operation puts the character name inside a lozenge.
:sail
‘’, ‘
’, etc are used to represent
Control
and Meta
,
and shorter names for characters are also used when possible. See
character-set.
top-explain is useful with the :editor
, :brief
and
:sail
styles. It says that any character that has to be typed using the
Top or Greek keys should be followed by an explanation of how to type
it. For example: ‘rightArrow (Top-K)
’ or ‘alpha (Greek-a)
’.
Outputs padding at least until column mincol. It is the only formatting function that bases its actions on the actual cursor position rather than the width of what is being output. The padding options padchar, minpad, and tab-period are obeyed. Thus, at least the minpad number of padding characters are output even if that goes past mincol, and once past mincol, padding can only stop at a multiple of tab-period characters past mincol.
In addition, if the terpri option is t
, then if column
mincol is passed, format:tab
starts a new line and indents it
to mincol.
The unit option specifies the units of horizontal position.
The default is to count in units of characters. If unit is
specified as :pixel
, then the computation (and the argument
mincol and the minpad and tab-period options) are
in units of pixels.
format:pad
is used for printing several items in a fixed amount of
horizontal space, padding between them to use up any excess space.
Each of the body forms prints one item. The padding goes between
items. The entire format:pad
always uses at least minwidth
columns; any columns that the items don’t need are distributed as
padding between the items. If that isn’t enough space, then more
space is allocated in units controlled by the tab-period option
until there is enough space. If it’s more than enough, the excess is
used as padding.
If the minpad option is specified, then at least that many pad characters must go between each pair of items.
Padding goes only between items. If you want to treat several actual
pieces of output as one item, put a progn
around them. If you
want padding before the first item or after the last, as well as
between the items, include a dummy item nil
at the beginning or
the end.
If there is only one item, it is right justified. One item followed by
nil
is left-justified. One item preceded and followed by nil
is
centered. Therefore, format:pad
can be used to provide the usual
padding options for a function that does not provide them itself.
Outputs either the singular or the plural form of a
word depending on the value of number. The singular is used if and only if
number is 1. singular specifies the singular form of the word.
string-pluralize
is used to compute the plural, unless
plural is explicitly specified.
It is often useful for number to be a value returned by
format:onum
, which returns its argument. For example:
(format:plural (format:onum n-frobs) " frob")
prints "1 frob" or "2 frobs".
Goes to the next line if there is
not enough room for something to be output on the current line.
The print-always forms print the text which is supposed to fit
on the line. linel is the column before which the text must end.
If it doesn’t end before that column, then format:breakline
moves to the next line and executes the print-if-terpri form
before doing the print-always forms.
Constant strings are allowed as well as forms for print-if-terpri and print-always. A constant string is just printed.
To go to a new line unconditionally, simply call terpri
.
Here is an example that prints the elements of a list, separated by commas, breaking lines between elements when necessary.
(defun pcl (list linel) (do ((l list (cdr l))) ((null l)) (format:breakline linel " " (princ (car l)) (and (cdr l) (princ ", ")))))
The rubout handler is a feature of all interactive streams, that is, streams
that connect to terminals. Its purpose is to allow the user to edit
minor mistakes made during type-in. At the same time, it is not supposed to
get in the way; input is to be seen by Lisp as soon as a syntactically complete
form has been typed. The definition of ‘syntactically complete form’
depends on the function that is reading from the stream; for read
, it
is a Lisp expression.
Some interactive streams (‘editing Lisp listeners’) have a rubout handler that allows input to be edited with the full power of the ZWEI editor. (ZWEI is the general editor implementation on which Zmacs and ZMail are based.) Most windows have a rubout handler that apes ZWEI, implementing about twenty common ZWEI commands. The cold load stream has a simple rubout handler that allows just rubbing out of single characters, and a few simple commands like clearing the screen and erasing the entire input typed so far. All three kinds of rubout handler use the same protocol, which is described in this section. We also say a little about the most common of the three rubout handlers. [Eventually some version of ZWEI will be used for all streams except the cold load stream]
The tricky thing about the rubout handler is the need for it to figure
out when you are all done. The idea of a rubout handler is that you can
type in characters, and they are saved up in a buffer so that if you
change your mind, you can rub them out and type different characters.
However, at some point, the rubout handler has to decide that the time
has come to stop putting characters into the buffer and to let the
function parsing the input, such as read
, return. This is
called activation. The right time to activate depends on the function
calling the rubout handler, and may be very complicated (if the function
is read
, figuring out when one Lisp expression has been typed
requires knowledge of all the various printed representations, what all
currently-defined reader macros do, and so on). Rubout handlers should
not have to know how to parse the characters in the buffer to
figure out what the caller is reading and when to activate; only the
caller should have to know this. The rubout handler interface is
organized so that the calling function can do all the parsing, while the
rubout handler does all the handling of editing commands, and the two are kept
completely separate.
The basic way that the rubout handler works is as follows. When
an input function that reads characters from a stream, such as read
or readline
(but not tyi
), is invoked with a stream which has :rubout-handler
in its :which-operations
list, that function “enters” the rubout handler.
It then goes ahead :tyi
’ing characters from the stream. Because control
is inside the rubout handler, the stream echoes these characters so the user
can see what he is typing. (Normally echoing is considered to be a higher-level
function outside of the province of streams, but when the higher-level function
tells the stream to enter the rubout handler it is also handing it the responsibility
for echoing.) The rubout handler is also saving all these characters in a buffer,
for reasons disclosed in the following paragraph.
When the parsing function decides it has enough
input, it returns and control “leaves” the rubout handler. This is the easy case.
If the user types a rubout, a throw
is done out of all recursive levels
of read
, reader macros, and so forth, back to the point where the rubout
handler was entered. Also the rubout is echoed by erasing from the screen
the character which was rubbed out. Now the read
is tried over again,
re-reading all the characters that have not been rubbed out, not echoing
them this time. When the saved characters have been exhausted, additional input is read
from the user in the usual fashion.
The effect of this is a complete separation of the functions of rubout
handling and parsing, while at the same time mingling the execution of
these two functions in such a way that input is always activated at
just the right time. It does mean that the parsing function (in the
usual case, read
and all macro-character definitions) must be
prepared to be thrown through at any time and should not have
non-trivial side-effects, since it may be called multiple times.
If an error occurs while inside the rubout handler, the error message is printed and then additional characters are read. When the user types a rubout, it rubs out the error message as well as the character that caused the error. The user can then proceed to type the corrected expression; the input will be reparsed from the beginning in the usual fashion.
The rubout handler based on the ZWEI editor interprets control characters in the usual ZWEI way: as editing commands, allowing you to edit your buffered input.
The common rubout handler also recognizes a subset of the editor
commands, including Rubout
, Control-F
and Meta-F
and others.
Typing Help
while in the rubout handler displays a list of the
commands. The kill and yank commands in the rubout handler use the same
kill ring as the editor, so you can kill an expression in the editor and
yank it back into a rubout handler with Control-Y
, or kill an
expression in the rubout handler with Control-K
or Clear-input
and yank it back in the editor. The rubout processor also keeps a ring
buffer of most recent input strings (a separate ring for each stream),
and the commands Control-C
and Meta-C
retrieve from this ring
just as Control-Y
and Meta-Y
do from the kill ring.
When not inside the rubout handler, and when typing at a program that uses control characters for its own purposes, control characters are treated the same as ordinary characters.
Some programs such as the debugger allow the user to type either a
control character or an expression. In such programs, you are really
not inside the rubout handler unless you have typed the beginning of an
expression. When the input buffer is empty, a control character is
treated as a command for the program (such as, Control-C
to continue
in the debugger); when there is text in the rubout handler buffer, the
same character is treated as a rubout handler command. Another
consequence of this is that the message you get by typing Help
varies, being either the rubout handler’s documentation or the
debugger’s documentation.
To write a parsing function that reads with rubout handling,
use with-input-editing
.
Invokes the rubout handler on stream, if stream supports it,
and then executes body. body is executed in any case,
within the rubout handler if possible. rubout-handler
is
non-nil
while in body if rubout handling is in use.
options are used as the rubout handler options.
If already within an invocation of the rubout handler, options are
appended to the front of the options already in effect. This happens if
a function which reads input using with-input-editing
, such as
read
or readline
, is called from the body of another
with-input-editing
. The :norecursive
option can be used
to cause the outer set of options to be completely ignored even
when not overridden by new ones.
body’s values are returned by with-input-editing
.
body ought to read input from stream and return
a Lisp object that represents the input. It should have
no nontrivial side effects aside from reading input from stream
structure, as it may be aborted at any time it reads input
and may be executed over and over.
If the :full-rubout
option is specified, and the user types some input
and rubs it all out, the with-input-editing
form returns immediately.
See :full-rubout
, below.
If a preemptive command is input by the user, with-input-editing
returns immediately with the values being as specified below
under the :command
and :preemptable
options. body
is aborted from its call to the :tyi
operation, and the input
read so far remains in the rubout handler editing buffer to be read
later.
If control is inside the rubout handler in this process,
the value is the stream on which rubout handling is being done.
Otherwise, the value is nil
.
streams
: :rubout-handler options function &rest args ¶Invokes the rubout handler on the stream, with options as
the options, and parses by applying function to args.
with-input-editing
uses this operation.
streams
: :read-bp ¶This operation may be used only from within the code for parsing input from this stream inside the rubout handler. It returns the index within the rubout handler buffer which parsing has reached.
streams
: :force-rescan ¶This operation may be used only from within the code for parsing input from this stream inside the rubout handler. It causes parsing to start again immediately from the beginning of the buffer.
streams
: :rescanning-p ¶This operation may be used only from within the code for
parsing input from this stream inside the rubout handler.
It returns t
if parsing is now being done on input
already in the buffer, nil
if parsing has used up all
the buffered input and the next character parsed will come
from the keyboard.
Each option in the list of rubout handler options consists of a list whose first element is a keyword and whose remaining elements are the arguments of that keyword. Note that this is not the same format as the arguments to a typical function that takes keyword arguments; rather this is an alist of options. The standard options are:
(:activation fn args...)
Activate if certain characters are typed in. When the user types an activation character, the rubout handler moves the editing pointer immediately to the end of the buffer and inserts the activation character. This immediately causes the parsing function to begin rescanning the input.
fn is used to test characters for being activators. It is called
with an input character as the first arg (possibly a fixnum, possibly a
character object) and args as additional args. If fn returns
non-nil
, the character is an activation. fn is not called
for blips.
After the parsing function has read the entire contents of the buffer,
it sees the activation character as a blip (:activation char
numeric-arg)
where char is the character that activated and
numeric-arg is the numeric arg that was pending for the next rubout
handler command. Normally the parsing function will return at this point.
Then the activation character does not echo. But if the parsing function
continues to read input, the activation character echoes and is inserted
in the buffer.
(:do-not-echo chars...)
Poor man’s activation characters. Like :activation
except that the
characters that should activate are listed explicitly, and the character
itself is returned to the parsing function rather than a blip.
(:full-rubout val)
If the user rubs out all the characters he typed, then control is returned
from the rubout handler immediately. Two values are returned; the first is
nil
and the second is val. (If the user doesn’t rub out all the
characters, then the rubout handler propagates multiple values back
from the function that it calls, as usual.) In the absence of this option, the rubout
handler would simply wait for more characters to be typed in and would ignore
any additional rubouts.
This is how the debugger knows to remove Eval:
from the screen
if you type the beginning of a form and rub it all out.
(:pass-through char1 char2...)
The characters char1, char2, etc. are not to be treated as special by the rubout handler. They are read as input by the parsing function. If the parsing function does not return, they can be rubbed out. This works only for characters with no modifier bits.
(:preemptable value)
Makes all blips read as input by the rubout handler act as preemptive commands. If this option is specified, the rubout handler returns immediately when it reads a blip. It returns two values: the blip that was read, and value. The parsing function is not allowed to finish parsing up to a delimiter; instead, any buffered input remains in the buffer for the next time input is done. In the mean time, the preemptive command character can be processed by the command loop.
While this applies to all blips, the blips which it is probably intended for are mouse blips.
(:command fn args...)
Makes certain characters preemptive commands. A preemptive command
returns instantly to the caller of the :rubout-handler
operation,
regardless of the input in the buffer. It returns two values: a list
(:command char numeric-arg)
and the keyword :command
.
The parsing function is not allowed to finish parsing up to a delimiter;
instead, any buffered input remains in the buffer for the next time
input is done. In the mean time, the preemptive command character can
be processed by the command loop.
The test for whether a character should be a preemptive command
is done using fn and args just as in :activation
.
(:editing-command (char doc)...)
Defines editing commands to be executed by the parsing function itself.
This is how qsend
implements the Control-Meta-Y
command.
Each char is such a command, and doc says what it does.
(doc is printed out by the rubout handler’s Help
command.)
If any of these characters is read by the rubout handler,
it is returned immediately to the parsing function
regardless of where the editing pointer is in the buffer.
(Normal inserted text is not returned immediately when read unless the editing pointer
is at the end of the buffer.)
The parsing function should not regard these characters as part of the input. There are two reasonable things that the parsing function can do when it receives one of the editing command characters: print some output, or force some input.
If it prints output, it should invoke the :refresh-rubout-handler
operation
afterward before the next :tyi
. This causes the rubout handler to redisplay
so that the input being edited appears after the output that was done.
If the parsing function forces input, the input is read by the rubout
handler. This can be used to modify the buffered input. qsend
’s
Control-Meta-Y
command works by forcing the yanked text as input.
There is no way to act directly on the buffered input because different
implementations of the rubout handler store it in different ways.
(:prompt function)
(:reprompt function)
When it is time for the user to be prompted, function is called with
two arguments. The first is a stream it may print on; the second is the
character which caused the need for prompting, e.g #\clear-input
or #\clear-screen
, or nil
if the rubout handler was just entered.
The difference between :prompt
and :reprompt
is that the latter does
not call the prompt function when the rubout handler is first entered, but only
when the input is redisplayed (e.g after a screen clear). If both options
are specified then :reprompt
overrides :prompt
except when the rubout
handler is first entered.
function may also be a string. Then it is simply printed.
If the rubout handler is exited with an empty buffer due to the
:full-rubout
option, whatever prompt was printed is erased.
(:initial-input string)
Pretends that the user typed string. When the rubout handler is entered, string is typed out. The user can input more characters or rub out characters from it.
(:initial-input-index index)
Positions the editing pointer initially index characters into the
initial input string. Used only in company with with
:initial-input
.
(:no-input-save t)
Don’t save this batch of input in the input history when it is done.
For example, yes-or-no-p
specifies this option.
(:norecursive t)
If this invocation of the rubout handler is within another one, the options specified in the previous call should be completely ignored during this one. Normally, individual options specified this time override the previous settings for the same options, but any of the previous options not individually overridden are still in effect.
Rubout handlers handle the condition sys:parse-error
if it is
signaled by the parsing function. The handling consists of printing the
error message, waiting for the user to rub out, erasing the error message,
and parsing the input again. All errors signaled by a parsing function
that signify that the user’s input was syntactically invalid should have
this condition name. For example, the errors read
signals have
condition name sys:parse-error
since it is is a consequence of sys:read-error
.
sys:parse-error
: (error
) ¶The condition name for syntax errors in input being parsed.
The compiler handles sys:parse-error
by proceeding with proceed-type
:no-action
. All signalers of sys:parse-error
should offer
this proceed type, and respond to its use by continuing to parse,
ignoring the invalid input.
Signals a sys:parse-error
error, using format-string and args
to print the error message. The proceed-type :no-action
is provided,
and if a handler uses it, this function returns nil
.
People cannot deal directly with Lisp objects, because the
objects live inside the machine. In order to let us get at and talk
about Lisp objects, Lisp provides a representation of objects in the
form of printed text; this is called the printed representation.
This is what you have been seeing in the examples throughout this manual.
Functions such as print
, prin1
, and princ
take a Lisp
object and send the characters of its printed representation to a
stream. These functions (and the internal functions they call) are
known as the printer. The read
function takes characters from a stream,
interprets them as a printed representation of a Lisp object, builds a
corresponding object, and returns it. It and related functions are known as the reader.
(Streams are explained in streams.)
For the rest of the chapter, the phrase ‘printed representation’ is abbreviated as ‘p.r.’
The printed representation of an object depends on its type. In
this section, we consider each type of object and explain how it is
printed. There are several variables which you can set before calling
the printer to control how certain kinds of objects print. They are
mentioned where relevant in this section and summarized in the following
section, but one of them is so important it must be described now. This
is the escaping feature, controlled by the value of
*print-escape*
.
Escaping means printing extra syntactical delimiters and escape characters
when necessary to avoid ambiguity. Without escaping, a symbol is
printed by printing the contents of its name; therefore, the symbol
whose name consists of the three characters 1
, .
and 5
prints just like the floating point number 1.5
. Escaping causes the symbol to
print as |1.5|
to differentiate the two. |
is a kind of escape
character; see escape-characters for more information on escape
characters and what they mean syntactically.
Escaping also involves printing package prefixes for symbols, printing
double-quotes or suitable delimiters around the contents of strings,
pathnames, host names, editor buffers, condition objects, and many other
things. For example, without escaping, the pathname SYS: SYS; QCP1 LISP
prints as
exactly those characters. The string with those contents prints indistinguishably.
With escaping, the pathname prints as
#FS:LOGICAL-PATHNAME "SYS: SYS; QCP1 LISP"delta
and the string prints as "SYS: SYS; QCP1 LISP"
.
The non-escaped version is nicer looking in general, but if you give it
to read
it won’t do the right thing. The escaped version is
carefully set up so that read
will be able to read it in. Printing
with escaping is useful in writing expressions into files. Printing without
escaping is useful when constructing messages for the user. However, when the purpose
of a message printed for the user is to mention an object,
the object should be printed with escaping:
Your output is in the file SYS: SYS; QCP1 QFASL.
vs
Expected pathname properties missing from #FS:LOGICAL-PATHNAME "SYS: SYS; QCP1 LISP"delta.
The printed representation of an object also may depend on whether
Common Lisp syntax is in use. Common Lisp syntax and traditional
Zetalisp syntax are incompatible in some aspects of their specifications. In order to
print objects so that they can be read back in, the printer needs to
know which syntax rules the reader will use. This decision is based on
the current readtable: the value of *readtable*
at the time printing
is done.
Now we describe how each type of object is standardly printed.
Integers:
For an integer (a fixnum or a bignum): the printed representation consists of
a possible radix prefix
a minus sign, if the number is negative
the representation of the number’s absolute value
a possible radix suffix.
The radix used for printing the number’s absolute value
is found as the value of *print-base*
. This should be either
a positive fixnum or a symbol with an si:princ-function
property.
In the former case, the number is simply printed in that radix.
In the latter case, the property is called as a function with two
arguments, minus the absolute value of the number, and the stream
to print on. The property is responsible for all printing.
If the value of *print-base*
is unsuitable, an error is signaled.
A radix prefix or suffix is used if either *nopoint
is nil
and the radix used is ten, or if *nopoint
is non-nil
and
*print-radix*
is non-nil
. For radix ten, a period is used
as the suffix. For any other radix, a prefix of the form
#radixr
is used. A radix prefix or suffix is useful
to make sure that read
parses the number using the same
radix used to print it, or for reminding the user how to interpret
the number.
Ratios:
The printed representation of a ratio consists of
a possible radix prefix
a minus sign, if the number is negative
the numerator
a ratio delimiter
the denominator
If Common Lisp syntax is in use, the ratio delimiter is a slash (/
).
If traditional syntax is in use, backslash (\
) is used. The
numerator and denominator are printed according to *print-base*
.
The condition for printing a radix prefix is the same as for integers,
but a prefix #10r
is used to indicate radix ten, rather than a
period suffix.
Floating Point Numbers:
a minus sign, if the number is negative
one or more decimal digits
a decimal point
one or more decimal digits
an exponent, if the number is small enough or large enough to require one. The exponent, if present, consists of
a delimiter, the letter e
, s
or f
a minus sign, if the exponent is negative
one to three decimal digits
The number of digits printed is just enough to represent all the
significant mantissa bits the number has. Feeding the p.r of a float
back to the reader is always supposed to produce an equal float.
Floats are always printed in decimal; they are not affected by escaping
or by *print-base*
, and there are never any radix prefixes or
suffixes.
The Lisp Machine supports two floating point number formats. At any
time, one of them is the default; this is controlled by the value of
*read-default-float-format*
. When a floating point number whose
format is not currently the default is printed, it must be printed
with an exponent so that the exponent delimiter can specify the format.
The exponent is introduced in this case by f
or s
to specify the
format. To the reader, f
specifies single-float
format and
s
specifies short-float
format.
A floating point number of the default format is printed with no exponent
if this looks nice; namely, if this does not require too many extra zeros
to be printed before or after the decimal point. Otherwise, an exponent
is printed and is delimited with e
. To the reader, e
means
‘use the default format’.
Normally the default float format is single-float
. Therefore, the
printer may print full size floats without exponents or with e
exponents, but short floats are always printed with exponents
introduced by s
so as to tell the reader to make a short float.
Complex Numbers:
The traditional printed representation of a complex number consists of
the real part
a plus sign, if the imaginary part is positive
the imaginary part
the letter i
, printed in lower case
If the imaginary part is negative, the +
is omitted since the initial -
of the imaginary part serves to separate it from the real part.
In Common Lisp syntax, a complex number is printed as #C(realpart
imagpart)
; for example, #C(5 3)
. Common Lisp inexplicably
does not allow the more natural 5+3i
syntax.
The real and imaginary parts are printed individually according to the specifications above. Symbols:
If escaping is off, the p.r is simply the successive
characters of the print-name of the symbol. If escaping is on,
two changes must be made. First, the symbol might require a package prefix
in order that read
work correctly, assuming that the package into which
read
will read the symbol is the one in which it is being printed.
See the chapter on packages (package) for an explanation
of the package name prefix. If the symbol is one which would have
another symbol substituted for it if printed normally and read back,
such as the symbol member
printed using Common Lisp syntax
which would be replaced with cli:member
if read in thus,
it is printed with a package prefix (e.g, global:member
)
to make it read in properly. See reader-symbol-substitutions
for more information on this.
If the symbol is uninterned, #:
is printed instead of a package
prefix, provided *print-gensym*
is non-nil
.
Secondly, if the p.r would not read in as a symbol at all (that is, if the print-name looks like a number, or contains special characters), then escape characters are added so as to suppress the other reading. Two kinds of escape characters may be used: single-character escapes and multiple escapes. A single-character escape can be used in front of a character to overrule its special syntactic meaning. Multiple escapes are used in pairs, and all the characters between the pair have their special syntactic meanings suppressed except single-character escapes. If the symbol name contains escape characters, they are escaped with single-character escapes. If the symbol name contains anything else problematical, a pair of multiple escape characters are printed around it.
The single-character and multiple escape characters are determined by
the current readtable. Standardly the multiple escape character is
vertical bar (|
), in both traditional and Common Lisp syntax. The
single-character escape character is slash (/
) in traditional syntax
and backslash (\
) in Common Lisp syntax.
FOO ;typical symbol, name composed of upper case letters A/|B ;symbol with a vertical bar in its name |Symbol with lower case and spaces in its name| |One containing slash (//) and vertical bar (/|) also|
Except when multiple escape characters are printed, any upper case
letters in the symbol’s name may be printed as lower case, according to
the value of the variable *print-case*
. This is true whether escaping
is enabled or not. See the next section for
details.
Conses:
The p.r for conses tends to favor lists. It starts with an
open-parenthesis. Then the car of the cons is printed and the
cdr of the cons is examined. If it is nil
, a close-parenthesis
is printed. If it is anything else but a cons, space dot space followed
by that object is printed. If it is a cons, we print a space and start
all over (from the point after we printed the open-parenthesis)
using this new cons. Thus, a list is printed as an open-parenthesis,
the p.r.’s of its elements separated by spaces, and a close-parenthesis.
This is how the printer produces representations such as (a b (foo bar)
c)
in preference to synonymous forms such as (a . (b . ((foo . (bar
nil)) . (c . nil))))
.
The following additional feature is provided for the p.r of conses: as
a list is printed, print
maintains the length of the list so far and
the depth of recursion of printing lists. If the length exceeds the
value of the variable *print-length*
, print
terminates the
printed representation of the list with an ellipsis (three periods) and
a close-parenthesis. If the depth of recursion exceeds the value of the
variable *print-level*
, then the character #
is printed instead
of the list. These two features allow a kind of abbreviated printing
that is more concise and suppresses detail. Of course, neither the
ellipsis nor the #
can be interpreted by read
, since the
relevant information is lost. In Common Lisp read syntax, either one
causes read
to signal an error.
If *print-pretty*
is non-nil
, conses are given to the grinder to print.
If *print-circle*
is non-nil
, a check is made for cars or cdrs
that are circular or shared structure, and any object (except for an
interned symbol) already mentioned is replaced by a #n#
label
reference. See circular-structure-reading for more information on them.
(let ((*print-circle* t)) (prin1 (circular-list 3 4)))
prints
#1= (3 4 . #1#)
Character Objects:
When escaping is off, a character object is printed by printing the character itself, with no delimiters.
In Common Lisp syntax, a character object is printed with escaping as
#font\character-or-name
. font is the character’s font
number, in decimal, or is omitted if zero. character-or-name begins
with prefixes for any modifier bits (control, meta, etc) present in
the character, each followed by a hyphen. Then comes a representation
of the character sans font and modifier bits. If this reduced character
is a graphic character, it represents itself. Otherwise, it certainly
has a standard name; the name is used. If a graphic characters has special
syntactic properties (such as whitespace, paretheses, and macro characters)
and modifier bit prefixes have been printed then
a single-character escape character is printed before it.
In traditional syntax, the p.r is the similar except that the \
is
replaced by /
.
Strings:
If escaping is off, the p.r is simply the successive characters of the
string. If escaping is on, double-quote characters (‘"
’) are printed
surrounding the contents, and any single-character escape characters or
double-quotes inside the contents are preceded by single-character
escapes. If the string contains a Return character followed by an open
parenthesis, a single-character escape is printed before the open
parenthesis. Examples:
"Foo" "/"Foo/", he said."
Named Structures:
If the named structure type symbol has a named-structure-invoke
property, the property is called as a function with four arguments: the
symbol :print-self
, the named structure itself, the stream to print
on, and the current depth of list structure (see below). It is this
function’s responsibility to output a suitable printed representation to
the stream. This allows a user to define his own p.r for his named
structures; more information can be found in the named structure section
(see named-structure). Typically the printed representation used
starts with either #
<
if it is not supposed to be readable or #
(see horseshoe-read) if it is supposed to be readable.
If the named structure symbol does not have a named-structure-invoke
property, the printed-representation depends on whether escaping is in
use. If it is, #s
syntax is used:
#s(named-structure-symbol component value component value ...)
Named structure component values are checked for circular or shared structure
if *print-circle*
is non-nil
.
If escaping is off, the p.r is like that used for miscellaneous data-types: #
<
,
the named structure symbol, the numerical address of the structure, and >
.
Other Arrays:
If *print-array*
is non-nil
, the array is printed in a way which
shows the elements of the array. Bit vectors use #*
syntax, other
vectors use #(...)
syntax, and arrays of rank other than one use
#na(...)
syntax. The printed representation does not indicate
the array type (that is, what elements it is allowed to contain). If
the printed representation is read in, a general array (array type
art-q
) is always created. See array-syntax for more information
on these syntaxes. Examples:
(vector 1 2 5) => #(1 2 5) (make-array '(2 4) :initial-element t) => #2a((t t t t) (t t t t))
Vector and array groupings count like list groupings in maintaining the
depth value that is compared with *print-level*
for cutting off
things that get too deep. More than *print-length*
elements in a
given vector or array grouping level are cut off with an ellipsis just
like a list that is so long.
Array elements are checked for circular or shared structure if
*print-circle*
is non-nil
.
If *print-array*
is nil
, the p.r starts with #
<
. Then the
art-
symbol for the array type is printed. Next the dimensions of
the array are printed, separated by hyphens. This is followed by a
space, the machine address of the array, and a >
, as in
#<ART-COMPLEX-FLOAT-3-6 34030451>
.
Instances and Entities:
If the object says it can handle the
:print-self
message, that message is sent with three arguments: the
stream to print to, the current depth of list structure (see below),
and whether escaping is enabled. The object should print a
suitable p.r on the stream. See flavor for documentation on
instances. Most such objects print like “any other data type” below,
except with additional information such as a name. Some objects print
only their name when escaping is not in effect (when
princ
’ed). Some objects, including pathnames, use a printed
representation that begins with #
, ends with delta
, and contains
sufficient information for the reader to reconstruct an
equivalent object. See horseshoe-read. If the object cannot handle
:print-self
, it is printed like “any other data type”.
Any Other Data Type:
The printed representation starts with #
<
and ends with >
. This
sort of printed representation cannot be read back in. The #
<
is
followed by the dtp-
symbol for this datatype, a space, and the
octal machine address of the object. The object’s name, if one can be
determined, often appears before the address. If this style of printed
representation is being used for a named structure or instance, other
interesting information may appear as well. Finally a greater-than sign
(>
) is printed in octal. Examples:
#'equal => #<DTP-U-ENTRY EQUAL 410> (value-cell-location nil) => #<DTP-LOCATIVE 1>
Including the machine address in the p.r makes it possible to tell two objects of this
kind apart without explicitly calling eq
on them. This can be very useful during
debugging. It is important to know that if garbage collection is turned on, objects
will occasionally be moved, and therefore their octal machine addresses will be
changed. It is best to shut off garbage collection temporarily when depending on
these numbers.
Printed representations that start with ‘#
<
’ can never be read
back.
This can be a problem if, for example, you are printing a structure into a
file with the intent of reading it in later. The following feature allows
you to make sure that what you are printing may indeed be read with the reader.
When si:print-readably
is bound to t
, the printer signals an error
if there is an attempt to print an object that cannot be interpreted by read
.
When the printer sends a :print-self
or a :print
message, it assumes
that this error checking is done for it. Thus it is possible for these messages
not to signal an error, if they see fit.
The vast majority of objects that define :print-self
messages have much
in common. This macro is provided for convenience so that users do not
have to write out that repetitious code. It is also the preferred interface
to si:print-readably
. With no keywords, si:printing-random-object
checks the value of si:print-readably
and signals an error if it is not
nil
. It then prints a number sign and a less-than sign, evaluates the
forms in body, then prints a space, the octal machine address
of the object and
a greater-than sign. A typical use of this macro might look like:
(si:printing-random-object (ship stream :typep) (tyo #\space stream) (prin1 (ship-name ship) stream))
This might print #<ship "ralph" 23655126>
.
The following keywords may be used to modify the behaviour of si:printing-random-object
:
:no-pointer
This suppresses printing of the octal address of the object.
:type
This prints the result of (type-of object)
after the less-than sign.
In the example above, this option could have been used instead of
the first two forms in the body.
sys:print-not-readable
: (error
) ¶This condition is signaled by si:print-readably
when the object
cannot be printed readably.
The condition instance supports the operation :object
, which
returns the object that was being printed.
If you want to control the printed representation of some object,
usually the right way to do it is to make the object an array that is a
named structure (see named-structure), or an instance of a flavor
(see flavor). However, occasionally it is desirable to get control
over all printing of objects, in order to change, in some way, how they
are printed. If you need to do this, the best way to proceed is to
customize the behavior of si:print-object
(see
si:print-object-fun), which is the main internal function of the
printer. All of the printing functions, such as print
and
princ
, as well as format
, go through this function. The way to
customize it is by using the “advice” facility (see advise).
Several special variables are defined by the system for the user to set or bind
before calling print
or other printing functions. Their values, as set
up by the user, control how various kinds of objects are printed.
Escaping is done if this variable is non-nil
. See the previous section
for a description of the many effects of escaping. Most of the output functions
bind this variable to t
or to nil
, so you rarely use the variable itself.
The radix to use for printing integers and ratios. The value must be either an
integer from 2 to 36 or a symbol with a valid si:princ-function
property, such as :roman
or :english
.
The default value of *print-base*
is ten. In input from files, the
Base
attribute (see file-attribute-list) controls the value of
*print-base*
(and of *read-base*
).
The synonym base
is from Maclisp.
If non-nil
, integers and ratios are output with a prefix or suffix
indicating the radix used to print them. For integers and radix ten, a
period is printed as a suffix. Otherwise, a prefix such as #x
or
#3r
is printed. The default value of *print-radix*
is nil
.
If the value of *nopoint
is nil
, a trailing decimal point
is printed when a fixnum is printed out in base 10. This allows
the numbers to be read back in correctly even if *read-base*
is not 10 at the time of reading. The default value of *nopoint
is t
. *nopoint
has no effect if *print-radix*
is non-nil
.
*nopoint
exists for Maclisp compatibility. But to get truly
compatible behavior, you must set *nopoint
to nil
(and, by default, base
and ibase
to eight).
If non-nil
, the printer recognizes circular and shared structure and
prints it using #n=
labels so that it has a finite printed
representation (which can be read back in). The default is nil
,
since t
makes printing slower. See circular-structure-reading
for information on the #n=
construct.
If non-nil
, the printer actually calls grind-top-level
so that it prints extra
whitespace for the sake of formatting. The default is nil
.
If non-nil
, uninterned symbols are printed with the prefix #:
to mark them as such
(but only when *print-escape*
is non-nil
). The prefix causes the
reader to construct a similar uninterned symbol when the expression is read.
If nil
, no prefix is used for uninterned symbols. The default is t
.
If non-nil
, non-string arrays are printed using the #
(...)
,
#*
or #na
(...)
syntax so that you can see their contents
(and so that they can be read back in). If nil
, such arrays are
printed using #
<...>
syntax and do not show their contents. The
default is nil
. The printing of strings is not affected by this
variable.
Controls the case used for printing upper-case letters in the names of
symbols. Its value should be :upcase
, :downcase
or
:capitalize
. These mean, respectively, to print those letters as
upper case, to print them as lower case, or to capitalize each word (see
string-capitalize
, string-capitalize-fun). Any lower case
letters in the symbol name are printed as lower case and escaped
suitably; this flag does not affect them. Note that the case used for
printing the upper case letters has no effect on reading the symbols
back in, since they are case-converted by read
. Any upper case
letters that happen to be escaped are always printed in upper case.
(dolist (*print-case* '(:upcase :downcase :capitalize)) (prin1-then-space 'foo) (prin1-then-space '|Foo|))
prints FOO |Foo| foo |Foo| Foo |Foo|
.
*print-level*
can be set to the maximum number of nested lists that
can be printed before the printer gives up and just prints a #
instead of a list element. If it is nil
, which it is initially, any
number of nested lists can be printed. Otherwise, the value of
*print-level*
must be a fixnum. Example:
(let ((*print-level* 2)) (prin1 '(a (b (c (d e))))))
prints (a (b #))
.
The synonym prinlevel
is from Maclisp.
*print-length*
can be set to the maximum number of elements of a
list that can be printed before the printer gives up and prints an
ellipsis (three periods). If it is nil
, which it is initially,
any length list may be printed. Example:
(let ((*print-length* 3)) (prin1 '((a b c d) #(e f g h) (i j k l) (m n o p))))
prints ((a b c ...) #(e f g ...) (i j k ...) ...)
.
The synonym prinlength
is from Maclisp.
The purpose of the reader is to accept characters, interpret them as the p.r of a Lisp object, and create and return such an object. The reader cannot accept everything that the printer produces; for example, the p.r.’s of compiled code objects, closures, stack groups, etc., cannot be read in. However, it has many features that are not seen in the printer at all, such as more flexibility, comments, and convenient abbreviations for frequently-used unwieldy constructs.
This section shows what kind of p.r.’s the reader understands,
and explains the readtable, reader macros, and various features
provided by read
.
The syntax specified for Common Lisp is incompatible with the
traditional Zetalisp syntax. Therefore, the Lisp Machine supports
both traditional and Common Lisp syntax, but read
must be told
in advance which one to use. This is controlled by the choice of
readtable (see readtable). When reading input from a file, the Lisp
system chooses the syntax according to the file’s attribute list:
Common Lisp syntax is used if the Common Lisp
attribute is present
(see file-attribute-list).
The main difference between traditional and Common Lisp syntax is
that traditionally the single-character escape is slash (/
), whereas
in Common Lisp syntax it is backslash (\
). Thus, the division
function which in traditional syntax is written //
is written
just /
in Common Lisp syntax. The other differences are obscure
and are mentioned below where they occur.
In general, the reader operates by recognizing tokens in the input stream. Tokens can be self-delimiting or can be separated by delimiters such as whitespace. A token is the p.r of an atomic object such as a symbol or number, or a special character such as a parenthesis. The reader reads one or more tokens until the complete p.r of an object has been seen, then constructs and returns that object.
Escape characters can be used to suppress the special syntactic
significance of any character, including :
, Space
, (
or
"
. There are two kinds of escape character: the single-character
escape (/
in traditional syntax, \
in Common Lisp syntax)
suppresses the significance of the immediately following character;
multiple escapes (vertical bar, |
) are used in pairs, and
suppress the special significance of all the characters except escapes
between the pair. Escaping a character causes it to be treated as a
token constituent and causes the token containing it to be read as a
symbol. For example, (12 5 x)
represents a list of three elements,
two of which are integers, but (/12 5/ x)
or (|15| |5 X|)
represents a list of two elements, both symbols. Escaping also prevents
conversion of letters to upper case, so that |x|
is
the symbol whose print name contains a lower-case x
.
The circle-cross (circleX
) character an octal escape character
which may be useful for including weird characters in the input. The
next three characters are read and interpreted as an octal number, and the
character whose code is that number replaces the circle-cross and the digits in the
input stream. This character is always treated as a token constituent and
forces the token to be read as a symbol. circleX
is allowed in both traditional
and Common Lisp syntax, but it is not valid Common Lisp.
Integers:
The reader understands the p.r.’s of integers in a way more general than is employed by the printer. Here is a complete description of the format for integers.
Let a simple integer be a string of digits, optionally
preceded by a plus sign or a minus sign, and optionally followed by a
trailing decimal point. A simple integer is interpreted by
read
as an integer. If the trailing decimal point is present, the
digits are interpreted in decimal radix; otherwise, they are
considered as a number whose radix is the value of the variable
*read-base*
.
The value of ibase
or *read-base*
is an integer between 2 and 36
that is the radix in which integers and ratios are read. The initial value of is
ten. For input from files or editor buffers, the Base
attribute
specifies the value to be used (see file-attribute-list); if it is
not given, the ambient value is used.
The synonym ibase
is from Maclisp.
If the input radix is greater than ten, letters starting with a
are
used as additional “digits” with values ten and above. For example, in
radix 16, the letters a
through f
are digits with values ten
through 15. Alphabetic case is not significant. These additional
digits can be used wherever a simple integer is expected and are parsed
using the current input radix. For example, if *read-base*
is 16
then ff
is recognized as an integer (255 decimal). So is 10e5
,
which is a float when *read-base*
is ten.
Traditional syntax also permits a simple integer,
followed by an underscore (_
) or a circumflex (^
),
followed by another simple integer. The two simple integers
are interpreted in the usual way;
the character in between indicates an operation that is then
performed on the two integers. The underscore indicates a binary
“left shift”; that is, the integer to its left is doubled the
number of times indicated by the integer to its right. The circumflex
multiplies the integer to its left by *read-base*
the number of
times indicated by the integer to its right. (The second simple
integer is not allowed to have a leading minus sign.) Examples: 3_2
means 12
and 645^3
means 645000
.
Here are some examples of valid representations
of integers to be given to read
:
4
23456.
-546
+45^+6 ;means 45000000
2_11 ;4096
72361356126536125376512375126535123712635
-123456789.
105_1000 ;(ash 105 1000) has this value.
105_1000.
Floating Point Numbers:
Floats can be written with or without exponent.
The syntax for a float without exponent is an optional plus or minus sign, optionally
some digits, a decimal point, and one or more digits. A float with exponent
consists of a simple integer or a float without exponent, followed by an exponent
delimiter (a letter) and a simple integer (the exponent itself) which is the
power of ten by which the number is to be scaled. The exponent may not have
a trailing decimal point. Both the mantissa and the exponent are always
interpreted in base ten, regardless of the value of *read-base*
.
Only certain letters are allowed for delimiting the exponent: e
, s
, f
,
d
and l
. The case of the letter is not significant. s
specifies
that the number should be a short float; f
, that it should be a full-size
float. d
or l
are equivalent to f
; Common Lisp defines them
to mean ‘double float’ or ‘long float’, but the Lisp Machine does not support
anything longer than a full-size float, so it regards d
and l
as synonymous
with f
. e
tells the reader to use the current default format,
whatever it may be, as specified by the value of *read-default-float-format*
.
The value is the type for read to produce by default for floats whose
precise type is not specified by the syntax. The value should be either
global:small-float
or global:single-float
, these being the only
distinct floating formats that the Lisp Machine has. The default is
single-float
, to make full-size floats.
Here are some examples of printed-representations that always read as full-size floats:
6.03f23 1F-9 1.f3 3d6
Here are some examples of printed-representations that always read as short floats:
0s0 1.5s9 -42S3 1.s5
These read as floats or as a short floats according to *read-default-float-format*
:
0.0 1.5 14.0 0.01 707 -.3 +3.14159 6.03e23 1E-9 1.e3
Rationals:
The syntax for a rational is an integer, a ratio delimiter, and another integer.
The integers may not include the ^
and _
scaling characters
or decimal points, and only the first one may have a sign.
The ratio delimiter is backslash (\
) in traditional syntax, slash (/
) in
Common Lisp syntax. Here are examples:
1\2 -100000000000000\3 80\10 traditional 1/2 -100000000000000/3 80/10 Common Lisp
Recall that rationals include the integers; 80\10
as input to the
reader is equivalent to 8
.
Complex Numbers:
The traditional syntax for a complex number is a number (for the real
part), a sign (+ or -
), an unsigned number (for the imaginary part),
and the letter i
. The real and imaginary parts can be any type of
number, but they are converted to be of the same type (both floating of
the same format, or both rational). For example:
1-3\4i 1.2s0+3.45s8i
The Common Lisp syntax for a complex number is #c(real imag)
,
where real is the real part and imag is the imaginary part.
This construction is allowed in traditional syntax too.
#c(1 -3/4) #c(1.2s0 3.45s8)
Symbols:
A string of letters, numbers, and characters without
special syntactic meaning is recognized by the reader as a symbol, provided
it cannot be interpreted as a number. Alphabetic case is ignored
in symbols; lower-case letters are translated to upper-case unless
escaped.
When the reader sees the p.r of a symbol, it interns it on a package
(see package, for an explanation of interning and the package system).
Symbols may start with digits; you could even
have one named -345t
; read
accepts this as a symbol
without complaint. If you want to put strange characters (such as
lower-case letters, parentheses, or reader macro characters) inside the name of a symbol,
they must be escaped. If the symbol’s name would look like a number,
at least one character in the name must be escaped, but it matters not which one.
Examples of symbols:
foo bar/(baz/) ; traditional bar\(baz\) ; Common Lisp 34w23 |Frob Sale| and F|rob |S|ale| are equivalent |a/|b| ; traditional |a\|b| ; Common Lisp
In Common Lisp syntax, a symbol composed only of two or more periods is not allowed unless escaping is used.
The reader can be directed to perform substitutions on the symbols it
reads. Symbol substitutions are used to implement the incompatible
Common Lisp definitions of various system functions. Reading of Common
Lisp code is done with substitutions that replace subst
with
cli:subst
, member
with cli:member
, and so on. This is why,
when a Common Lisp program uses the function member
, it gets the
standard Common Lisp member
function rather than the traditional
one. This is why we say that cli:member
is “the Common Lisp
version of member
”. While cli:member
can be referred to from
any program in just that way, it exists primarily to be referred to from
a Common Lisp program which says simply member
.
Symbol substitutions do not apply to symbols written with package
prefixes, so one can use a package prefix to force a reference to a
symbol that is normally substituted for, such as using global:member
in a Common Lisp program.
Strings:
Strings are written with double-quote characters ("
) before and after
the string contents. To include a double-quote character or single-character escape
character in the contents, write an extra single-character escape character
in front of it.
Examples of strings:
"This is a typical string." "That is a /"cons cell/"." ;; traditional "That is a \"cons cell\"." ;; Common Lisp "Strings are often used for I//O." ;; traditional "Strings are often used for I/O." ;; Common Lisp "Here comes one backslash: \\" ;; Common Lisp
Conses:
When read
sees an open-parenthesis, it knows that
the p.r of a cons is coming, and calls itself recursively to
get the elements of the cons or the list that follows.
The following are valid p.r’s of conses:
(foo . bar) (foo "bar" 33) (foo . ("bar" . (33 . nil))) (foo bar . quux)
The first is a cons, whose car and cdr are both symbols. The second
is a list, and the third is equivalent to the second (although
print
would never produce it). The fourth is a dotted list;
the cdr of the last cons cell (the second one) is not nil
, but
quux
.
The reader always allocates new cons cells to represent parentheses. They are never shared with other structure, not even part of the same read. For example,
(let ((x (read)))
(eq (car x) (cdr x)))
((a b) . (a b)) ;; data for read
=> nil
because each time (a b)
is read, a new list is constructed. This contrasts
with the case for symbols, as very often read
returns symbols
that it found interned in the package rather than creating new symbols
itself. Symbols are the only thing that work this way.
The dot that separates the two elements of a dotted-pair p.r
for a cons is only recognized if it is surrounded by delimiters
(typically spaces). Thus dot may be freely used within print-names of
symbols and within numbers. This is not compatible with Maclisp; in
Maclisp (a.b)
reads as a cons of symbols a
and b
, whereas in
Zetalisp it reads as a list of a symbol a.b
.
Comments:
A comment begins with a semicolon (;
) and continues to the end of
the line. Comments are ignored completely by the reader. If the
semicolon is escaped or inside a string, it is not recognized as
starting a comment; it is part of a symbol or part of the string.
;; This is a comment. "This is a string; but no comment."
Another way to write a comment is to start it with #|
and end it with |#
.
This is useful for commenting out multiple-line segments of code.
The two delimiters nest, so that #| #| |# |#
is a single comment.
This prevents surprising results if you use this construct to comment out
code which already contains such a comment.
(cond ((atom x) y) #| ((foo x) (do-it y)) |# (t (hack y)))
Abbreviations:
The single-quote character ('
) is an abbreviation for a list starting with the
symbol quote
. The following pairs of p.r’s produce equal lists:
'a and (quote a) '(x (y)) and (quote (x (y)))
The backquote character (`
) and comma are used in a syntax that
abbreviates calls to the list and vector construction functions.
For example,
`(a ,b c)
reads as a list whose meaning as a Lisp form is equivalent to
(list 'a b 'c)
See backquote for full details about backquote.
Sharp-sign (#
) is used to introduce syntax extensions.
It is the beginning of a two-character sequence whose meaning
depends on the second character. Sharp-sign is only recognized with
a special meaning if it occurs at the beginning of a token.
If encountered while a token is in progress, it is a symbol constituent.
For example, #xff
is a sharp-sign construct that interprets
ff
as a hexidecimal number, but 1#xff
is just a symbol.
If the sharp-sign is followed by decimal digits, the digits form a
parameter. The first non-digit determines which sharp-sign construct
is actually in use, and the decimal integer parsed from the digits
is passed to it. For example, #r
means “read in specified radix”;
it must actually be used with a radix notated in decimal between the #
and the r
, as in #8r
.
It is possible for a sharp-sign construct to have different meanings
in Common Lisp and traditional syntax. The only constructs which
differ are #\
and #/
.
The function set-dispatch-macro-character
(see
set-dispatch-macro-character-fun) can be used to define additional
sharp sign abbreviations.
Here are the currently-defined sharp sign constructs:
#/
#/
is used in traditional syntax only to represent the number that
is the character code for a character. You can follow the #/
with
the character itself, or with the character’s name. The name is
preferable for nonprinting characters, and it is the only way to
represent characters which have control bits since they cannot go in
files. Here are examples of #/
:
#/a #o141 #/A #o101 #/( #o50 #/c-a the character code forControl-A
#/c-/a the character code forControl-a
#/c-sh-a the character code forControl-a
#/c-/A the character code forControl-A
#/c-/( the character code forControl-(
#/return the character code forReturn
#/h-m-system the character code forHyper-Meta-System
To represent a printing character, write #/x
where x is the
character. For example, #/a
is equivalent to #o141
but clearer
in its intent. To avoid ambiguity, the character following x should
not be a letter; good style would require this anyway.
As in strings, upper and lower-case letters are distinguished after
#/
. Any character works after #/
, even those that are normally
special to read
, such as parentheses. Thus, #/A
is equivalent
to #o101
, and #/(
is equivalent to #o50
. Note that the
slash causes this construct to be parsed correctly by the editors Emacs
and Zmacs. Even non-printing characters may be used, but for them it is
preferable to use the character’s name.
To refer to a character by name, write #/
followed by the name. For
example, #/
return
reads as the numeric code for the character
Return
. The defined character names are documented below (see
xr-special-character-names). In general, the names that are written
on the keyboard keys are accepted. In addition, all the nonalphanumeric
characters have names. The abbreviations cr
for return
and
sp
for space
are accepted, since these characters are used so
frequently. The page separator character is called page
, although
form
and clear-screen
are also accepted since the keyboard has
one of those legends on the page key. The rules for reading name
are the same as those for symbols; thus letters are converted to upper
case unless escaped, and the name must be terminated by a delimiter such
as a space, a carriage return, or a parenthesis.
When the system types out the name of a special character, it uses the same table
that #/
uses; therefore, any character name typed out is acceptable as input.
#/
can also be used to read in the names of characters that have
modifier bits (Control, Meta, Super and Hyper). The syntax looks like
#/
control-meta-b
to get a ‘B’ character with the control and
meta bits set. You can use any of the prefix bit names control
,
meta
, hyper
, and super
. They may be in any order, and case
is not significant. Prefix bit names can be abbreviated as the single
letters c
, m
, h
and s
, and control
may be spelled
ctrl
as it is on the keyboard. The last hyphen may be followed by a
single character or by any of the special character names normally
recognized by #/
. A single character is treated the same way the
reader normally treats characters in symbols; if you want to use a
lower-case character or a special character such as a parenthesis, you
must precede it by a slash character. Examples:
#/
Hyper-Super-A
, #/
meta-hyper-roman-i
,
#/
CTRL-META-/(
.
An obsolete method of specifying control bits in a character is to
insert the characters alpha
, beta
, epsilon
, pi
and between the
#
and the /
. Those stand for control
, meta
,
control-meta
, super
and hyper
, respectively. This syntax should
be converted to the new #\
control-meta-x
syntax described below.
greek
(or front
), top
, and shift
(or sh
) are also
allowed as prefixes of names. Thus, #/
top-g
is equivalent to
#/^K
or #/
uparrow
. #/
top-g
should be used if you are
specifying the keyboard commands of a program and the mnemonic
significance belongs to the ‘G
’ rather than to the actual character
code.
#\
In traditional syntax, #\
is a synonym for #/
.
In the past, #/
had to be used before a single character
and #\
had to be used in all other cases. Now either one is allowed
in either case.
In Common Lisp syntax, #\
produces a character object rather than
a fixnum representing a character.
#/
#/
x is the traditional syntax way to produce a character object.
It is used just like #/
. Thus, Common Lisp #\
is equivalent to
traditional syntax #/
.
#^
#^x
is exactly like #/
control-x
if the input is being
read by Zetalisp; it generates Control-x.
In Maclisp x is converted to upper case and then exclusive-or’ed with 100 (octal).
Thus #^x
always generates the character returned by tyi
if
the user holds down the control key and types x.
(In Maclisp #/
control-x
sets the bit set by the Control key when the TTY is
open in fixnum
mode.)
#'
#'foo
is an abbreviation for (function foo)
.
foo is the p.r of any object. This abbreviation can be remembered by
analogy with the '
macro-character, since the function
and quote
special forms are somewhat analogous.
#(
#(elements...)
constructs a vector (rank-one array) of type
art-q
with elements elements. The length of the vector is the
number of elements written. Thus, #
(a 5 "Foo")
reads as a vector
containing a symbol, an integer and a string. If a decimal integer
appears after the #
, it specifies the length of the vector.
The last element written is replicated to fill the remaining elements.
#a
#na contents
signifies an array of rank n, containing contents.
contents is passed to make-array
as the initial-contents
argument. It is a list of lists of lists... or vector of vectors...
as deep as n. The dimensions of the array are specified by the
lengths of the lists or vectors. The rank is specified
explicitly so that the reader can distinguish whether a list or vector
in the contents is a sequence of array elements or a single array element.
The array type is always art-q
.
Examples:
#2a ((x y) (a b) ((uu 3) "VV"))
produces a 3 by 2 array. (uu 3)
is one of the elements.
#2a ("foo" "bar")
produces a 2 by 3 array whose elements are character objects. Recall that a string is a kind of vector.
#0a 5
produces a rank-0 array whose sole element is 5.
#*
#*bbb...
signifies a bit vector; bbb... are the bits
(characters 1
or 0
). A vector of type art-1b
is created
and filled with the specified bits, the first bit specified going in
array element 0. The length is however many bits you specify.
Alternatively, specify the length with a decimal number between the
#
and the *
. The last 1
or 0
specified is duplicated
to fill the additional bits. Thus, #8
*0101
is the same as #*
01011111
.
#s
#s(type slot value slot value slot value ...)
constructs a structure of type type. Any structure type defined with
defstruct
can be used as type provided it has a standard constructor
taking slot values as keyword arguments. (Standard constructors can be
functions or macros; either kind works for #s
.) The slot names
and values appearing in the read syntax are passed to the constructor
so that they initialize the structure. Example:
(defstruct (foo :named) bar lose) #s (foo :bar 5 :lose haha)
produces a foo
whose bar
component is 5 and whose lose
component
is haha
.
#=
##
Are used to represent circular structure or shared structure.
#n=
preceding an object “labels” that object with the label n,
a decimal integer. This has no effect on the way the object labeled
is read, but it makes the label available for use in a #n#
construct
within that object (to create circular structure) or later on (to create
shared structure). #n#
counts as an object in itself, and reads
as the object labeled by n.
For example, #1=
(a .
is a way of notating a circular list such
as would be produced by #1#
)(circular-list 'a)
. The list is labeled
with label 1, and then its cdr is given as a reference to label 1.
(
is an example of shared structure. An uninterned
symbol named #1=#:
foo #1#
)foo
is used as the first element of the list, and
labeled. The second element of the list is the very same uninterned
symbol, by virtue of a reference to the label.
Printing outputs #n=
and #n#
to represent circular or
shared structure when *print-circle
is non-nil
.
#,
Evaluate a form at load time.
#,foo
evaluates foo (the p.r of a Lisp form) at read
time, except that during file-to-file compilation it is arranged
that foo will be evaluated when the QFASL file is loaded. This is a way,
for example, to include in your code complex list-structure constants that cannot
be written with quote
. Note that the reader does not put quote
around the result of the evaluation. You must do this yourself if you
want it, typically by using the '
macro-character. An example of
a case where you do not want quote
around it is when this object is
an element of a constant list.
#.
#.foo
evaluates foo (the p.r of a lisp form) at read
time, regardless of who is doing the reading.
#`
#`
is a construct for repeating an expression with some
subexpressions varying. It is an abbreviation for writing several
similar expressions or for the use of mapc
. Each subexpression
that is to be varied is written as a comma followed by a list of the
things to substitute. The expression is expanded at read time into
a progn
containing the individual versions.
#`(send stream ',(:clear-input :clear-output))
expands into
(progn (send stream :clear-input) (send stream :clear-output))
Multiple repetitions can be done in parallel by using commas in several subexpressions:
#`(rename-file ,("foo" "bar") ,("ofoo" "obar"))
expands into
(progn (rename-file "foo" "ofoo") (rename-file "bar" "obar"))
If you want to do multiple independent repetitions, you must use nested
#`
constructs. Individual commas inside the inner #`
apply to
that #`
; they vary at maximum speed. To specify a subexpression
that varies in the outer #`
, use two commas.
#`#`(print (* ,(5 7) ,,(11. 13.)))
expands into
(progn (progn (print (* 5 11.)) (print (* 7 11.))) (progn (print (* 5 13.)) (print (* 7 13.)))
#o
#o number
reads number in octal regardless of the
setting of *read-base*
. Actually, any expression can be prefixed
by #o
; it is read with *read-base*
bound to 8.
#b
Like #o
but reads in binary.
#x
Like #x
but reads in radix 16 (hexadecimal). The letters a
through f
are used as the digits beyond 9.
#r
#radixr number
reads number in radix radix regardless
of the setting of *read-base*
. As with #o
, any expression
can be prefixed by #radixr
; it is read with *read-base*
bound to radix. radix must be a valid decimal integer between
2 and 36.
For example, #3r102
is another way of writing 11
and
#11r32
is another way of writing 35
. Bases larger than ten use
the letters starting with a
as the additional digits.
#c
#c(real imag)
constructs a complex number with real part
real and imaginary part. It is equivalent to real+imagi
,
except that #c
is allowed in Common Lisp syntax and the other is not.
#+
¶This abbreviation provides a read-time conditionalization facility. It
is used as #+feature form
. If feature is a symbol, then
this is read as form if feature is present in the list
*features*
(see *features*-var). Otherwise, the construct is
regarded as whitespace.
Alternately, feature may be a boolean expression composed of and
, or
, and
not
operators and symbols representing items that may appear on
*features*
. Thus,
#+
(or lispm amber)
causes the following object to be seen
if either of the features lispm
or amber
is present.
For example, #+
lispm form
makes form count if being read by Zetalisp,
and is thus equivalent to #q form
. Similarly, #+
maclisp form
is equivalent
to #m form
. #+
(or lispm nil) form
makes form count on either
Zetalisp or in NIL.
Here is a list of features with standard meanings:
lispm
This feature is present on any Lisp machine (no matter what version of hardware or software).
maclisp
This feature is present in Maclisp.
nil
This feature is present in NIL (New Implementation of Lisp).
mit
This feature is present in the MIT Lisp machine system, which is what this manual is about.
symbolics
This feature is present in the Symbolics version of the Lisp machine system. May you be spared the dishonor of using it.
#+
, and the other read-time conditionalization constructs that
follow, discard the following expression by reading it with
*read-suppress*
bound to t
if the specified condition is false.
#-
#-feature form
is equivalent to #+
(not feature) form
.
#q
#q foo
reads as foo if the input is being read by
Zetalisp, otherwise it reads as nothing (whitespace).
This is considered obsolete; use #+
lispm
instead.
#m
#m foo
reads as foo if the input is being read into Maclisp,
otherwise it reads as nothing (whitespace).
This is considered obsolete; use #+
maclisp
instead.
#n
#n foo
reads as foo if the input is being read into NIL
or compiled to run in NIL, otherwise it reads as nothing (white space).
This is considered obsolete; use #+
nil
instead.
#
#
introduces an expression in infix notation.
should be used
to terminate it. The text in between describes a Lisp object such as a symbol,
number or list but using a nonstandard, infix-oriented syntax. For example,
#x:y+car(a1[i,j])
is equivalent to
(setq x (+ y (car (aref a1 i j))))
It is not strictly true that the Lisp object produced in this way has to be an expression. Since the conversion is done at read time, you can use a list expressed this way for any purpose. But the infix syntax is designed to be used for expressions.
For full details, refer to the file SYS: IO1; INFIX LISP
.
#<
This is not legal reader syntax. It is used in the p.r of objects that cannot
be read back in. Attempting to read a #
<
signals an error.
#
This is used in the p.r of miscellaneous objects (usually named
structures or instances) that can be read back in. #
should be
followed by a typename and any other data needed to construct an
object, terminated with a
delta
. For example, a pathname might print as
#FS:ITS-PATHNAME "AI: RMS; TEST 5"delta
The typename is a keyword that read
uses to figure out how to read in
the rest of the printed representation and construct the object. It is read in in
package user
(but it can contain a package prefix). The resulting symbol
should either have a si:read-instance
property or be the name of a flavor
that handles the :read-instance
operation.
In the first case, the property is applied as a function to the typename
symbol itself and the input stream. In the second, the handler for that
operation is applied to the operation name (as always), the typename
symbol, and the input stream (three arguments, but the first is implicit
and not mentioned in the defmethod
). self
will be nil
and
instance variables should not be referred to.
si:print-readably-mixin
is a useful implementation the
:read-instance
operation for general purposes; see
si:print-readably-mixin-flavor.
In either case, the handler function should read the remaining data from
the stream, and construct and return the datum it describes. It should
return with the delta
character waiting to be read from the input stream
(:untyi
it if necessary). read
signals an error after it is returned
to if a delta
character is not next.
The typename can be any symbol with an appropriate property or flavor, not
necessarily related to the type of object that is created; but for clarity, it is good
if it is the same as the type-of
of the object printed. Since the type symbol is
passed to the handler, one flavor’s handler can be inherited by many other
flavors and can examine the type symbol read in to decide what flavor to
construct.
#|
#|
is used to comment out entire pieces of code. Such a comment
begins with #|
and ends with |#
. The text in between should be
one or more properly balanced p.r’s of Lisp objects, possibly
including nested #|...|#
comments. This text is skipped over by the
reader, and does not contribute to the value returned by read
.
These functions all take an optional argument called stream, which is
where to send the output. If unsupplied stream defaults to the value of
*standard-output*
. If stream is nil
, the value of
*standard-output*
(i.e the default) is used. If it is t
, the value of
*terminal-io*
is used (i.e the interactive terminal). This is all
more-or-less compatible with Maclisp, except that instead of the
variable *standard-output*
Maclisp has several variables and complicated rules.
For detailed documentation of streams, refer to streams.
Outputs the printed representation of object to stream, with escaping (see escaping). object is returned.
Like prin1
except that output
is followed by a space.
Like prin1
except that output
is preceded by a carriage return and followed by a space.
object is returned.
Like prin1
except that the output is not escaped. object is
returned.
Prints object on stream, having bound all the printing flags according to the
keyword arguments if specified. For example, the keyword argument array specifies how
to bind *print-array*
; if array is omitted, the ambient value of *print-array*
is used. This function is sometimes cleaner than binding a printing control variable
explicitly. The value is object.
pprint
is like prin1
except that *print-pretty*
is bound to t
so that the grinder is used. pprint
returns zero values, just as
the form (values)
does.
Prints the definitions of one or more functions, with indentation to make the code
readable. Certain other “pretty-printing” transformations are performed: The quote
special form is represented with the '
character. Displacing macros are
printed as the original code rather than the result of macro expansion.
The code resulting from the backquote (`
) reader macro is represented
in terms of `
.
The subforms to grindef
are the function specs whose
definitions are to be printed; the usual way grindef
is used
is with a form like (grindef foo)
to print the definition
of foo
. When one of these subforms is a symbol, if
the symbol has a value its value is prettily printed also. Definitions are
printed as defun
special forms, and values are printed as setq
special
forms.
If a function is compiled, grindef
says so and tries to find its
previous interpreted definition by looking on an associated property
list (see uncompile
(uncompile-fun). This works only if the
function’s interpreted definition was once in force; if the definition
of the function was simply loaded from a QFASL file, grindef
cannot
not find the interpreted definition.
With no subforms, grindef
assumes the same arguments as when it was
last called.
*standard-output*
) (untyo-p nil
) (displaced 'si:displaced
) (terpri-p t
) notify-fun loc ¶Pretty-prints obj on stream, putting up to width characters
per line. This is the primitive interface to the pretty-printer. Note that it does not
support variable-width fonts. If the width argument is supplied, it is how many
characters wide the output is to be. If width is unsupplied or nil
,
grind-top-level
tries to figure out the natural width of the stream,
by sending a :size-in-characters
message to the stream and using the first
returned value. If the stream doesn’t handle that message, a width of 95.
characters is used instead.
The remaining optional arguments activate various strange features and usually should not
be supplied. These options are for internal use by the system and are documented
here for only completeness.
If untyo-p is t
, the :untyo
and :untyo-mark
operations are
be used on stream, speeding up the algorithm somewhat. displaced controls the
checking for displacing macros; it is the symbol which flags a place that has been
displaced, or nil
to disable the feature.
If terpri-p is nil
, grind-top-level
does
not advance to a fresh line before printing.
If notify-fun is non-nil
, it should be a function that to be
called with three arguments for each “token” in the pretty-printed
output. Tokens are atoms, open and close parentheses, and reader macro
characters such as '
. The arguments given to notify-fun are the
token, its “location” (see next paragraph), and t
if it is an atom
or nil
if it is a character.
loc is the “location” (typically a cons) whose car is obj. As the
grinder recursively descends through the structure being printed, it keeps track
of the location where each thing came from, for the benefit of the notify-fun.
This makes it possible for a program to correlate the printed output
with the list structure. The “location” of a close parenthesis is t
, because
close parentheses have no associated location.
Like write
, prin1
and princ
, respectively, but put the output in a string
and return the string (see write-fun).
See also the with-output-to-string
special form (with-output-to-string-fun).
The following obsolete functions are for Maclisp compatibility only. The examples use traditional syntax.
Returns a list of characters (represented as fixnums) that
are the characters that would be typed out by (princ object)
(i.e the unescaped printed representation of object).
Example:
(exploden '(+ /12 3)) => #o(50 53 40 61 62 40 63 51)
Returns a list of characters represented by symbols,
interned in the current package,
whose names are the characters that would be typed out by
(princ object)
(i.e the unescaped printed representation of object).
Example:
(explodec '(+ /12 3)) => (|(| + | | |1| |2| | | |3| |)|)
(Note that there are escaped spaces in the above list.)
Like explodec
but uses the escaped printed representation.
Example:
(explode '(+ /12 3)) => (|(| + | | // |1| |2| | | |3| |)|)
(Note that there are escaped spaces in the above list.)
Returns the number of characters in the escaped printed representation of object.
Returns the number of characters in the unescaped printed representation of object.
Most expression input functions read characters from an input stream.
This argument is called stream. If unsupplied it
defaults to the value of *standard-input*
.
All of these functions echo their input and permit editing if used on an
interactive stream (one which supports the :rubout-handler
operation; see below.)
The functions accept an argument eof-option or two arguments eof-error and eof-value to tell them what to do if end of file is encountered instead of an object’s p.r. The functions that take two eof- arguments are the Common Lisp ones.
In functions that accept the eof-option argument, if no argument
is supplied, an error is signaled at eof. If the argument is
supplied, end of file causes the function to return that argument. Note
that an eof-option of nil
means to return nil
if the end of
the file is reached; it is not equivalent to supplying no
eof-option.
In functions that accept two arguments eof-error and eof-value,
end of file is an error if eof-error is non-nil
or if it is unsupplied.
If eof-error is nil
, then the function returns eof-value
at end of file.
An error is always signaled if end of file is encountered in the middle of an object; for example, if a file does not contain enough right parentheses to balance the left parentheses in it. Mere whitespace does not count as starting an object. If a file contains a symbol or a number immediately followed by end-of-file, it can be read normally without error; if an attempt is made to read further, end of file is encountered immediately and the eof- argument(s) obeyed.
These end-of-file conventions are not completely compatible with Maclisp. Maclisp’s deviations from this are generally considered to be bugs rather than features.
For Maclisp compatibility, nil
as the stream argument also means
to use the value of *standard-input*
, and t
as the stream
argument means to use the value of *terminal-io*
. This is only
advertised to work in functions that Maclisp has, and should not be
written in new programs. Instead of the variable *standard-input*
Maclisp has several variables and complicated rules. For detailed
documentation of streams, refer to streams.
The functions below that take stream and eof-option arguments
can also be called with the stream and eof-option in the other order.
This functionality is only for compatibility with old Maclisp programs,
and should never be used in new programs. The functions attempt to
figure out which way they were called by seeing whether each argument is
a plausible stream. Unfortunately, there is an ambiguity with symbols:
a symbol might be a stream and it might be an eof-option. If there are
two arguments, one being a symbol and the other being something that is
a valid stream, or only one argument, which is a symbol, then these
functions interpret the symbol as an eof-option instead of as a
stream. To force them to interpret a symbol as a stream, give the
symbol an si:io-stream-p
property whose value is t
.
Reads the printed representation of a Lisp object from stream, builds a corresponding Lisp object, and returns the object. rubout-handler-options are used as options for the rubout handler, if stream supports one; see rubout-handler for more information on this.
t
) eof-value recursive-p ¶The Common Lisp version of read
differs only in how its arguments
are passed.
recursive-p should be non-nil
when calling from the reader or
from the defining function of a read-macro character; that is, when
reading a subexpression as part of the task of reading a larger
expression. This has two effects: the subexpression is allowed to share
#n#
labels with the containing expression, and whitespace which
terminates the subexpression (if it is a symbol or number) is not
discarded.
Like read
, but on an interactive stream if the input is just
the character End
it returns the two values nil
and :end
.
Certain printed representations given to read
, notably those of symbols
and numbers, require a delimiting character after them. (Lists do not, because
the matching close-parenthesis serves to mark the end of the list.)
Normally read
throws away the delimiting character if it is whitespace,
but preserves it (using the :untyi
stream operation) if the character is
syntactically meaningful, since it may be the start of the next expression.
If read-preserve-delimiters
is bound to t
around a call to read
,
the delimiting character is never thrown away, even if it is whitespace.
This may be useful for certain reader macros or special syntaxes.
t
) eof-value recursive-p ¶Like cli:read
but binds read-preserve-delimiters
to t
.
This is the Common Lisp way of requesting the read-preserve-delimiters
feature.
Reads expressions from stream until the character char is seen
at top level when an expression is expected; then returns a list of
the objects read. char may be a fixnum or a character object.
For example, if char is #/]
, and the text to be read from
stream is a (b c)]
... then the objects a
and (b c)
are read, the ]
is seen as a terminator and discarded, and the
value returned is (a (b c))
. recursive-p is as for
cli:read
. End of file within this function is always an error
since it is always “within an object”–the object whose textual
representation is terminated by char.
Note that use of this function does not cause char to terminate
tokens. Usually you want that to happen, but it is purely under the
control of the readtable. So you must modify the readtable to make this
so. The usual way is to define char as a macro character whose
defining function just signals an error. The defining function is not
called when char is encountered in the expected context by
read-delimited-list
; if char is encountered anywhere else,
it is an unbalanced bracket and an error is appropriate.
This is a slightly different version of read
. It differs from read
only in that it ignores close-parentheses seen at top level,
and it returns the symbol si:eof
if the stream reaches end-of-file
if you have not supplied an eof-option (instead of signalling
an error as read
would). This version of read
is used in
the system’s “read-eval-print” loops.
This is like read
, but validates the input based on indentation.
It assumes that the input data is formatted to follow the usual
convention for source files, that an open-parenthesis in column zero
indicates a top-level list (with certain specific exceptions).
An open-parenthesis in column zero encountered in the middle of a list
is more likely to result from close-parentheses missing before it than
from a mistake in indentation.
If read-check-indentation
finds an open-parenthesis
following a return character in the middle of a list, it
invents enough close-parentheses to close off all pending lists, and
returns. The offending open-parenthesis is :untyi
’d so it can begin
the next list, as it probably should. End of file in the middle of a
list is handled likewise.
read-check-indentation
notifies the caller of the incorrect formatting
by signaling the condition sys:missing-closeparen
. This
is how the compiler is able to record a warning about the missing
parentheses. If a condition handler proceeds, read
goes ahead
and invents close-parentheses.
There are a few special forms that are customarily used around function
definitions–for example, eval-when
, local-declare
, and comment
.
Since it is desirable to begin the function definitions in
column zero anyway, read-check-indentation
allows a list to begin
in column zero within one of these special forms. A non-nil
si:may-surround-defun
property identifies the symbols for which this
is allowed.
This variable is non-nil
during a read in which indentation is being
checked.
The following functions do expression input but get the characters from a string or a list instead of a stream.
0
) end ¶The characters of string are given successively to the reader, and the Lisp object built by the reader is returned. Macro characters and so on all take effect. If string has a fill-pointer it controls how much can be read.
eof-option is what to return if the end of the string is reached, as
in read
. start is the index in the string of the first
character to be read. end is the index at which to stop reading;
that point is treated as end of file.
read-from-string
returns two values; the first is the object read
and the second is the index of the first character in the string not read.
If the entire string was read, this is the length of the string.
Example:
(read-from-string "(a b c)") => (a b c) and 7
t
) eof-value &key (start 0
) end preserve-whitespace ¶The Common Lisp version of read-from-string
uses a different calling
convention. The arguments mean the same thing but are arranged
differently. There are three arguments with no counterparts:
eof-errorp and eof-value, which are simply passed on to
cli:read
, and preserve-whitespace, which if non-nil
means
that the reading is done with read-preserve-delimiters
bound to
t
.
See also the with-input-from-string
special form (with-input-from-string-fun).
0
) end (radix 10.
) junk-allowed ¶Parses the contents of string (or the portion from start to end) as a numeral for an integer using the specified radix, and returns the integer. Radices larger than ten are allowed, and they use letters as digits beyond 9. Leading whitespace is always allowed and ignored. A leading sign is also allowed and considered part of the number.
When junk-allowed is nil
, the entire specified portion of string
must consist of an integer and leading and trailing whitespace.
Otherwise, an error happens.
If junk-allowed is non-nil
, parsing just stops when a non-digit
is encountered. The number parsed so far is returned as the first
value, and the index in string at which parsing stopped is returned
as the second value. This number equals end (or the length of
string) if there is nothing but a number. If non-digits are found
without finding a number first, the first value is nil
. Examples:
(parse-integer " 1A " :radix 16.) => 26. (parse-integer " 15X " :end 3) => 15. (parse-integer " -15X " :junk-allowed t) => -15. 3 (parse-integer " 15X ") => error!
This function is provided mainly for Maclisp compatibility.
char-list is a list of characters. The characters may be
represented by anything that the function character
accepts:
character objects, fixnums, strings, or symbols. The characters are
given successively to the reader, and the Lisp object built by the
reader is returned. Macro characters and so on all take effect.
If there are more characters in char-list beyond those needed to
define an object, the extra characters are ignored. If there are not
enough characters, some kind of sys:read-end-of-file
error is signaled.
sys:read-error
: (sys:parse-error
error
) ¶This condition name classifies all errors detected by the reader per se.
Since sys:parse-error
is implied, all sys:read-error
errors
must provide the proceed type :no-action
so that automatic proceed
is possible if the error happens during compilation. See sys:parse-error-condition.
Since this condition name implies sys:parse-error
and error
, those
two are not mentioned as implications below when sys:read-error
is.
sys:read-end-of-file
: (sys:read-error
sys:end-of-file
) ¶Whenever the reader signals an error for end of file, the condition object possesses this condition name.
Since sys:end-of-file
is implied, the :stream
operation on the
condition instance returns the stream on which end of file was reached.
sys:read-list-end-of-file
: (sys:read-end-of-file
sys:read-error
sys:end-of-file
) ¶This condition is signaled when read
detects end of file in the middle of a list.
In addition to the :stream
operation provided because
sys:end-of-file
is one of the proceed types, the condition instance
supports the :list
operation, which returns the list read so far.
Proceed type :no-action
is provided. If it is used, the reader
invents a close-parenthesis to close off the list.
Within read-check-indentation
, the reader signals the error only once,
no matter how many levels of list are unterminated.
sys:read-string-end-of-file
: (sys:read-end-of-file
sys:read-error
sys:end-of-file
) ¶This is signaled when read
detects end of file in the middle of a
string delimited by double-quotes.
The :string
operation on the condition instance returns the string
read so far.
Proceed type :no-action
terminates the string and returns.
If the string is within other constructs that are unterminated,
another end of file error is will be signaled later.
sys:read-symbol-end-of-file
: (sys:read-end-of-file
sys:read-error
sys:end-of-file
) ¶This is signaled when read
detects end of file within
a multiple escape construct.
The :string
operation on the condition instance returns the print
name read so far.
Proceed type :no-action
terminates the symbol and returns.
If the symbol is within other constructs that are unterminated,
another end of file error is will be signaled later.
sys:missing-closeparen
: (condition
) ¶This condition, which is not an error, is signaled when
read-check-indentation
finds an open-parenthesis in column zero
within a list.
Proceed type :no-action
is provided. On proceeding, the reader
invents enough close-parentheses to close off all the lists that are
pending.
The syntax used by the reader is controlled by a data structure called
the readtable. (Some aspects of printing are also controlled by the
readtable.) There can be many readtables, but the one that is used is
the one which is the value of *readtable*
. A particular syntax can be
selected for use by setting or binding *readtable*
to a readtable
which specifies that syntax before reading or printing. In particular,
this is how Common Lisp or traditional syntax is selected. The
readtable also controls the symbol substitutions which implement
the distinction between the traditional and Common Lisp versions of
functions such as subst
, member
and defstruct
.
The functions in this section allow you to modify the syntax of individual characters in a readtable in limited ways. You can also copy a readtable; then you can modify one copy and leave the other unchanged.
A readtables may have one or more names. Named readtables are recorded in a central data base so that you can find a readtable by name. When you copy a readtable, the new one is anonymous and is not recorded in the data base.
The value of readtable
or *readtable*
is the current readtable.
This starts out as the initial standard readtable. You can bind this
variable to change temporarily the readtable being used.
The two names are synonymous.
This is copied into *readtable*
every time the machine is booted.
Therefore, it is normally the same as *readtable*
unless you make
*readtable*
be some other readtable. If you alter the contents of
*readtable*
without setting or binding it to some other readtable,
this readtable is changed.
The value of si:initial-readtable
is a read-only copy of the default
current readtable. Its purpose is to preserve a copy of the standard
read syntax in case you modify the contents of *readtable*
and regret
it later. You could use si:initial-readtable
as the
from-readtable argument to copy-readtable
or
set-syntax-from-char
to restore all or part of the standard syntax.
A readtable which initially is set up to define Common Lisp read syntax. Reading of Common Lisp programs is done using this readtable.
A read-only copy of si:common-lisp-readtable
, whose purpose is to
preserve a copy of the standard Common Lisp syntax in case you modify
si:common-lisp-readtable
(such as, by reading a Common Lisp program
which modifies the current readtable).
Returns the list of names of readtable
.
You may setf
this to add or remove names.
Returns the readtable named name
, or nil
if none is recorded.
t
if object is a readtable.
The user can program the reader by changing the readtable in any of three ways.
The syntax of a character can be set to one of several predefined possibilities.
A character can be made into a macro character, whose interpretation
is controlled by a user-supplied function which is called when the character is read.
The user can create a completely new readtable, using the readtable compiler
(SYS: IO; RTC LISP
) to define new kinds of syntax and to assign syntax classes to
characters. Use of the readtable compiler is not documented here.
from-readtable, which defaults to the current readtable, is copied.
If from-readtable is nil
, the standard Common Lisp syntax is
copied. If to-readtable is unsupplied or nil
, a fresh copy is
made. Otherwise to-readtable is clobbered with the copied syntax.
Use copy-readtable
to get a private readtable before using the following
functions to change the syntax of characters in it. The value of *readtable*
at the start of a Lisp Machine session is the initial standard readtable, which
usually should not be modified.
Copies the syntax of from-char in from-readtable to character
to-char in to-readtable. to-readtable defaults to the
current readtable and from-readtable defaults to si:initial-standard-readtable
(standard traditional syntax).
Is a Common Lisp function which copies the syntax of from-char in
from-readtable to character to-char in to-readtable.
to-readtable defaults to the current readtable and
from-readtable defaults to si:initial-common-lisp-readtable
(standard Common Lisp syntax).
Common Lisp has a peculiar idea of what it means to copy the syntax of a character. The only aspect of syntax that the readtable supposedly specifies is the choice among
*
token constituent:
digits, letters, random things like @
, !
, $
, and also colon!
*
whitespace:
spaces, Tab
, Return
.
*
single escape character:
/
traditionally, \
in Common Lisp.
*
multiple escape character: vertical-bar.
*
macro character:
standardly ()",.'`;
*
nonterminating macro character:
#
is the only such character standardly defined.
The differences among macro characters are determined entirely by the
functions that they invoke. The differences among token constituents
(including the difference between A
and colon) are fixed! You
can make A
be a macro character, or whitespace, or a quote
character, but if you make it a token constituent then it always behaves
the way it normally does. You can make colon be a macro character,
or whitespace, etc, but if it is a token constituent it always
delimits package names. If you make open-parenthesis into a token
constituent, there is only one kind of token constituent it can be (it
forces the token to be a symbol, like $
or @
or %
).
This is not how Lisp Machine readtables really work, but since
cli:set-syntax-from-char
is provided just for Common Lisp, the
behavior specified by Common Lisp is laboriously provided. So, if
from-char is some kind of token constituent, this function makes
to-char into a token constituent of the kind that to-char is
supposed to be–not the kind of token constituent that from-char is.
By contrast, the non-Common-Lisp set-syntax-from-char
would make
to-char have exactly the same syntactic properties that
from-char has.
Changes readtable so that from-char will be translated to to-char upon read-in, when readtable is the current readtable. This is normally used only for translating lower case letters to upper case. Character translation is inhibited by escape characters and within strings. readtable defaults to the current readtable.
The following syntax-setting functions are more or less obsolete.
Sets the syntax of char in readtable to be that described by the symbol description. readtable defaults to the current readtable.
Each readtable has its own set of descriptions which it defines. The following descriptions are defined in the standard readtable:
si:alphabetic
An ordinary character such as ‘A
’.
si:break
A token separator such as ‘(
’. (Obviously left parenthesis has other
properties besides being a break.
si:whitespace
A token separator that can be ignored, such as ‘
’.
si:single
¶A self-delimiting single-character symbol. The initial readtable does not contain any of these.
si:escape
The character quoter. In the initial readtable this is ‘/
’.
si:multiple-escape
The symbol print-name quoter. In the initial readtable this is ‘|
’.
si:macro
A macro character. Don’t use this; use set-macro-character
(set-macro-character-fun).
si:non-terminating-macro
A macro character recognized only at the start of a token. In the
initial readtable, ‘#
’ is such a character. (It is also a dispatching
macro, but that is another matter.) The correct way to make a character
be a macro is with set-macro-character
.
si:character-code-escape
The octal escape for special characters. In the initial readtable this is ‘circleX
’.
si:digitscale
a character for shifting an integer by digits.
In the initial readtable this is ‘^
’.
si:bitscale
A character for shifting an integer by bits.
In the initial readtable this is ‘_
’ (underscore).
si:slash
si:circlecross
Obsolete synonyms for si:escape
and si:character-code-escape
.
Unfortunately it is no longer possible to provide si:doublequote
as
double-quote is now an ordinary macro character.
These symbols may be moved to the keyword package at some point.
This exists only for Maclisp compatibility. The above functions are preferred in new
programs. The syntax of character is altered in the current readtable, according
to arg2 and arg3. character can be a fixnum, a symbol, or a string,
i.e anything acceptable to the character
function.
arg2 is usually a keyword; it can be in any package since this is a Maclisp
compatibility function. The following values are allowed for arg2:
:macro
The character becomes a macro character. arg3 is the name of a function to be
invoked when this character is read. The function takes no arguments, may tyi
or
read
from *standard-input*
(i.e may call tyi
or read
without
specifying a stream),
and returns an object which is taken as the result of the read.
:splicing
Like :macro
but the object returned by the macro function is a list
that is nconc
ed into the list being read. If the character is read
anywhere except inside a list (at top level or after a dotted-pair dot),
then it may return ()
, which means it is ignored, or (obj)
,
which means that obj is read.
:single
The character becomes a self-delimiting single-character symbol. If arg3 is a fixnum, the character is translated to that character.
nil
The syntax of the character is not changed, but if arg3 is a fixnum, the character is translated to that character.
a symbol
The syntax of the character is changed to be the same as that of the character arg2 in the standard initial readtable. arg2 is converted to a character by taking the first character of its print name. Also if arg3 is a fixnum, the character is translated to that character.
A read-macro character (or just macro character) is a character whose syntax is defined by a function which the reader calls whenever that character is seen (unless it is escaped). This function can optionally read additional characters and is then responsible for returning the object which they represent.
The standard meanings of the characters open-parenthesis, semicolon,
single-quote, double-quote, #
, backquote (`
) and comma are
implemented by making them macro characters.
For example, open-parenthesis is implemented as a macro character
whose defining function reads expressions until a close-parenthesis is found,
throws away the close-parenthesis, and returns a list of the expressions read.
(It actually must be more complicated than this in order to deal properly
with dotted lists and with indentation checking.) Semicolon is implemented as
a macro character whose defining function swallows characters until a Return
and then returns no values.
Close-parenthesis and close-horseshoe (delta
) are also macro
characters so that they will terminate symbols. Their defining
functions signal errors if actually called; but when these delimiters
are encountered in their legitimate contexts they are recognized
and handled specially before the defining function is called.
The user can also define macro characters.
When a macro’s defining function is called, it receives two arguments: the input stream, and the macro character being handled. The function may read characters from the stream, and should return zero or more values, which are the objects that the macro construct “reads as”. Zero values causes the macro construct to be ignored (the semicolon macro character does this), and one value causes the macro construct to read as a single object (most macro characters do this). More than one value is allowed only within a list.
Macro characters may be terminating or non-terminating.
A non-terminating macro character is only recognized as a macro character
when it appears at the beginning of a token. If it appears when a token
is already in progress, it is treated as a symbol constituent. Of the standard
macro characters, all but #
are terminating.
One kind of macro character is the dispatch macro character.
This kind of character is handled by reading one more character,
converting it to upper case,
and looking it up in a table. Thus, the dispatch macro character
is the start of a two-character sequence, with which is associated
a defining function. #
is the only standardly defined dispatch
macro character.
When a dispatch macro character is used, it may be followed by a decimal integer which serves as a parameter. The character for the dispatch is actually the first non-digit seen.
The defining function for a dispatch macro two-character sequence
is almost like that of an ordinary macro character. However, it receives
one more argument. This is the parameter, the decimal integer that
followed the dispatch macro character, or nil
if no parameter was written.
Also, the second argument is the subdispatch character, the second character
of the sequence. The dispatch macro character itself is not available.
Sets the syntax of character char in readtable in-readtable to be that of a
macro character which is handled by function. When that character is read
by read
, function is called.
char is made a non-terminating macro character
if non-terminating-p is non-nil
, a terminating one otherwise.
Returns two values that describe the macro character status of char
in in-readtable. If char is not a macro character, both values
are nil
. Otherwise, the first value is the function and the
second value is the non-terminating-p for this character.
Those two values, passed to set-macro-character
, are usually
sufficient to recreate exactly the syntax char has now;
however, since one of the arguments that the function receives
is the macro character that invoked it, it may not behave the same
if installed on a different character or in a different readtable.
In particular, the definition of a dispatch macro character is
a standard function that looks the macro character up in the readtable.
Thus, the definition only records that the macro character is
a dispatch macro character; it does not say what subcharacters
are allowed or what they mean.
Makes char be a dispatch macro character in in-readtable. This
means that when char is seen read
will read one more character
to decide what to do. #
is an example of a dispatch macro
character. non-terminating-p means the same thing as in
set-macro-character
.
Sets the syntax of the two-character sequence char subchar, assuming that char is already a dispatch macro character. function becomes the defining function for this sequence.
If subchar is lower case, it is converted to upper case. Case is never
significant for the character that follows a dispatch macro character.
The decimal digits may not be defined as subchars since they are always
used for infix numeric arguments as in #5r
.
Returns the function for subchar following dispatch macro character char
in readtable in-readtable. The value is nil
if subchar is not defined
for following char.
These subroutines are for use by the defining functions of macro characters.
Ordinary read
should not be used for reading subexpressions, and
the ordinary :tyi
operation or functions read-char
or tyi
should not be used for single-character input. The functions below
should be used instead.
Equivalent to (cli:read stream t nil t)
. See cli:read-fun.
This is the recommended way for a macro character’s defining function
to read a subexpression.
Reads the next input character from stream, for a macro character’s defining
function. If ignore-whitespace is non-nil
, any whitespace characters
seen are discarded and the first non-whitespace character is returned.
The first value is the character as translated; the third value is the
original character, before translation. The second value is a syntax
code which is of no interest to users except to be passed to
si:xr-xruntyi
if this character must be unread.
Normally, this function processes all the escape characters, and
performs translations (such as from lower case letters to upper case
letters) on characters not escaped. Font specifiers (epsilons followed
by digits or *
) are ignored if the file is formatted using them.
If no-multiple-escapes is non-nil
, multiple escapes (vertical bar
characters) are not processed; they are returned to the caller. This mode
is used for reading the contents of strings. If no-chars-special
is non-nil
, no escape characters are processed. All characters are
simply returned to the caller (except that font specifiers are still
discarded if appropriate).
Unreads char, for a macro character’s defining function.
char should be the third value returned by the last call to si:xr-xrtyi
,
and num should be the second value.
If this variable is non-nil
, all the standard read functions and
macro characters do their best to avoid any errors, and any side effects
except for removing characters from the input stream. For example,
symbols are not interned to avoid either errors (for nonexistent packages)
or side effects (adding new symbols to packages). In fact, nil
is
used in place of any symbol that is written.
User macro characters should also notice this variable when appropriate.
The purpose of the variable is to allow expressions to be skipped and
discarded. The read-time conditional constructs #+
and #-
bind
it to t
to skip the following expression if it is not wanted.
The following functions for defining macro characters are more or less obsolete.
Changes readtable so that char is a macro character. When char is read, function is called. readtable defaults to the current readtable.
function is called with two arguments, list-so-far and the input stream.
When a list is being read, list-so-far is that list (nil
if this is the
first element). At the top level of read
, list-so-far is the symbol
:toplevel
. After a dotted-pair dot, list-so-far is the symbol :after-dot
.
function may read any number of characters from the input stream and process
them however it likes.
function should return three values, called thing, type, and splice-p.
thing is the object read. If splice-p is nil
, thing is the result.
If splice-p is non-nil
, then when reading a list thing replaces
the list being read–often it will be list-so-far with something else
nconc
’ed onto the end. At top-level and after a dot, if splice-p is non-nil
the thing is ignored and the macro-character does not contribute anything to
the result of read
.
type is a historical artifact and is not really used; nil
is a safe value.
Most macro character functions return just one value and let the other two
default to nil
.
Note that the convention for values returned by function is different from that
used for functions specified in set-macro-character
, above. set-syntax-macro-char
works by encapsulating function in a closure to convert the values to
the sort that set-macro-character
wants and then passing the closure to
set-macro-character
.
function should not have any side-effects other than on the stream and list-so-far. Because of the way the rubout-handler works, function can be called several times during the reading of a single expression in which the macro character only appears once.
char is given the same syntax that single-quote, backquote, and comma have
in the initial readtable (it is called :macro
syntax).
Causes function to be called when #char
is read.
readtable defaults to the current readtable.
The function’s arguments and return values are the same as for normal macro
characters, documented above. When function is called, the special variable
si:xr-sharp-argument
contains nil
or a number that is the
number or special bits between the #
and char.
This exists only for Maclisp compatibility. set-dispatch-macro-character
should be used instead.
If function is nil
, #character
is turned off, otherwise it
becomes a macro that calls function. type can be :macro
, :peek-macro
,
:splicing
, or :peek-splicing
. The splicing part controls whether function returns
a single object or a list of objects. Specifying peek causes character
to remain in the input stream when function is called; this is useful if
character is something like a left parenthesis. function gets one
argument, which is nil
or the number between the #
and the character.
A stream can specially handle the reading and printing of objects by
handling the :read
and :print
stream operations. Note that these
operations are optional and most streams do not support them.
If the read
function is given a stream that has :read
in its
which-operations, then instead of reading in the normal way it sends the
:read
message to the stream with one argument, read
’s
eof-option if it had one or a magic internal marker if it didn’t.
Whatever the stream returns is what read
returns.
If the stream wants to implement the :read
operation by internally
calling read
, it must use a different stream that does not have
:read
in its which-operations.
If a stream has :print
in its which-operations, it may intercept all
object printing operations, including those due to the print
, prin1
,
and princ
functions, those due to format
, and those used internally,
for instance in printing the elements of a list. The stream receives the
:print
message with three arguments: the object being printed, the
depth (for comparison against the *print-level*
variable), and
escape-p (which is the value of *print-escape*
). If the stream
returns nil
, then normal printing takes place as usual. If the stream
returns non-nil
, then print
does nothing; the stream is assumed to have
output an appropriate printed representation for the object.
The two following functions are useful in this connection; however, they are
in the system-internals
package and may be changed without much notice.
Outputs the printed-representation of object to stream, as modified
by depth and the values of the *print-...
variables.
This is the internal guts of the Lisp printer. When a stream’s
:print
handler calls this function, it should supply the list
(:string-out)
for which-operations, to prevent itself from being
called recursively. Or it can supply nil
if it does not want to
receive :string-out
messages.
If you want to customize the behavior of all printing of Lisp objects, advising (see advise) this function is the way to do it. See customizing-the-printer.
This is the part of the Lisp printer that prints lists. A stream’s
:print
handler can call this function, passing along its own arguments
and its own which-operations, to arrange for a list to be printed the
normal way and the stream’s :print
hook to get a chance at each of the
list’s elements.
A Lisp Machine generally has access to many file systems. While it may have its own file system on its own disks, usually a community of Lisp Machine users want to have a shared file system accessible by any of the Lisp Machines over a network. These shared file systems can be implemented by any computer that is capable of providing file system service. A file server computer may be a special-purpose computer that does nothing but service file system requests from computers on a network, or it may be a time-sharing system.
Programs need to use names to designate files within these file systems. The main difficulty in dealing with names of files is that different file systems have different naming formats for files. For example, in the ITS file system, a typical name looks like:
DSK: GEORGE; FOO QFASL
with DSK
being a device name, GEORGE
being a directory name, FOO
being the first file name and QFASL
being the second file name. However, in
TOPS-20, a similar file name is expressed as:
PS:<GEORGE>FOO.QFASL
It would be unreasonable for each program that deals with file names to be expected to know about each different file name format that exists, or new formats that could get added in the future. However, existing programs should retain their abilities to manipulate the names.
The functions and flavors described in this chapter exist to solve this problem. They provide an interface through which a program can deal with names of files and manipulate them without depending on anything about their syntax. This lets a program deal with multiple remote file servers simultaneously, using a uniform set of conventions.
All file systems dealt with by the Lisp Machine are mapped into a common model, in which files are named by something called a pathname. A pathname always has six components, each with a standard meaning. These components are the common interface that allows programs to work the same way with different file systems; the mapping of the pathname components into the concepts peculiar to each file system is taken care of by the pathname software. Pathname components are described in the following section, and the mappings between components and user syntax is described for each file system later in this chapter.
t
if object is a pathname.
A pathname is an instance of a flavor (see flavor); exactly which
flavor depends on what the host of the pathname is, but pathname
is always one of its component flavors. If p is a pathname, then
(typep p 'pathname)
returns t
. One of the messages
handled by host objects is the :pathname-flavor
operation, which
returns the name of the flavor to use for pathnames on that host. And
one of the differences between host flavors is how they handle this
operation.
There are functions for manipulating pathnames, and there are also messages that can be sent to them. These are described later in this chapter.
Two important operations of the pathname system are parsing and merging. Parsing is the conversion of a string–which might be something typed in by the user when asked to supply the name of a file–into a pathname object. This involves finding out what host the pathname is for, then using the file name syntax conventions of that host to parse the string into the standard pathname components. Merging is the operation that takes a pathname with missing components and supplies values for those components from a set of defaults.
The function string
, applied to a pathname, converts it into a
string that is in the file name syntax of its host’s file system, except
that the name of the host followed by a colon is inserted at the front.
This is the inverse of parsing. princ
of a pathname also does this,
then prints the contents of the string. Flavor operations such as
:string-for-dired
exist which convert all or part of a pathname to a
string in other fashions that are designed for specific applications.
prin1
of a pathname prints the pathname using the #
syntax so
it can be read back in to produce an equivalent pathname (or the same
pathname, if read in the same session).
Since each kind of file server can have its own character string representation of names of its files, there has to be a different parser for each of these representations, capable of examining such a character string and figuring out what each component is. The parsers all work differently. How can the parsing operation know which parser to use? The first thing that the parser does is to figure out which host this filename belongs to. A filename character string may specify a host explicitly by having the name of the host, followed by a colon, at either the beginning or the end of the string. For example, the following strings all specify hosts explicitly:
AI: COMMON; GEE WHIZ ; This specifies host AI. COMMON; GEE WHIZ AI: ; So does this. AI: ARC: USERS1; FOO BAR ; So does this. ARC: USERS1; FOO BAR AI: ; So does this. EE:PS:<COMMON>GEE.WHIZ.5 ; This specifies host EE. PS:<COMMON>GEE.WHIZ.5 EE: ; So does this.
If the string does not specify a host explicitly, the parser chooses a
host by default and uses the syntax for that host. The optional
arguments passed to the parsing function (fs:parse-pathname
) tell it
which host to assume. Note: the parser is not confused by strings
starting with DSK:
or PS:
because it knows that neither of
those is a valid host name. But if the default host has a device whose
name happens to match the name of some host, you can prevent the device
name from being misinterpreted as a host name by writing an extra colon
at the beginning of the string: For example, :EE:<RMS>FOO.BAR
refers
to the device EE
on the default host (assumed to use TOPS-20 syntax)
rather than to the host named EE
.
Pathnames are kept unique, like symbols, so that there is only one object with a given set of components. This is useful because a pathname object has a property list (see plist) on which you can store properties describing the file or family of files that the pathname represents. The uniqueness implies that each time the same components are typed in, the program gets the same pathname object and finds there the properties it ought to find.
Note that a pathname is not necessarily the name of a specific file. Rather,
it is a way to get to a file; a pathname need not correspond to any file that
actually exists, and more than one pathname can refer to the same file. For
example, the pathname with :newest
as its version refers to the same file
as a pathname which has the appropriate number as the version.
In systems with links, multiple file names, logical devices, etc, two pathnames
that look quite different may really turn out to address the same file.
To get from a pathname to a file requires doing a file system operation
such as open
.
When you want to store properties describing an individual file,
use the pathname you get by sending :truename
to a stream rather
than the pathname you open. This avoids problems with different pathnames
that refer to the same file.
To get a unique pathname object representing a family of files, send the
message :generic-pathname
to a pathname for any file in the family
(see generic-pathname).
These are the components of a pathname. They are clarified by an example below.
An object that represents the file system machine on which the file
resides. A host object is an instance of a flavor one of whose
components is si:basic-host
. The precise flavor varies depending on the type
of file system and how the files are to be accessed.
Corresponds to the “device” or “file structure” concept in many host file systems.
The name of a group of related files belonging to a single user or project. Corresponds to the “directory” concept in many host file systems.
The name of a group of files that can be thought of as conceptually the “same” file. Many host file systems have a concept of “name” which maps directly into this component.
Corresponds to the “filetype” or “extension” concept in many host file systems. This says what kind of file this is; such as, a Lisp source file, a QFASL file, etc.
Corresponds to the “version number” concept in many host file systems. This is a number that increments every time the file is modified. Some host systems do not support version numbers.
As an example, consider a Lisp program named CONCH
. If it belongs
to GEORGE
, who uses the FISH
machine, the host would be the
host-object for the machine FISH
, the device would probably be the default
and the directory would be GEORGE
. On this directory
would be a number of files related to the CONCH
program. The source
code for this program would live in a set of files with name CONCH
,
type LISP
, and versions 1
, 2
, 3
, etc. The compiled form
of the program would live in files named CONCH
with type QFASL
;
each would have the same version number as the source file that it came
from. If the program had a documentation file, it would have type
INFO
.
Not all of the components of a pathname need to be specified. If a
component of a pathname is missing, its value is nil
. Before a file
server can do anything interesting with a file, such as opening the
file, all the missing components of a pathname must be filled in from
defaults. But pathnames with missing components are often handed around
inside the machine, since almost all pathnames typed by users do not
specify all the components explicitly. The host is not allowed to be
missing from any pathname; since the behavior of a pathname is
host-dependent to some extent, it has to know what its host is. All
pathnames have host attributes, even if the string being parsed does not
specify one explicitly.
A component of a pathname can also be the special symbol
:unspecific
. :unspecific
means, explicitly, “this component has
been specified as missing”, whereas nil
means that the component was
not specified and should default. In merging, :unspecific
counts as
a specified component and is not replaced by a default. :unspecific
does not mean “unspecified”; it is unfortunate that those two words
are similar.
:unspecific
is used in generic pathnames, which refer not to a
file but to a whole family of files. The version, and usually the type,
of a generic pathname are :unspecific
. Another way :unspecific
is used has to do with mapping of pathnames into file systems such as
ITS that do not have all six components. A component that is really “not
there” is :unspecific
in the pathname. When a pathname is
converted to a string, nil
and :unspecific
both cause the
component not to appear in the string.
A component of a pathname can also be the special symbol :wild
. This is
useful only when the pathname is being used with a directory primitive such
as fs:directory-list
(see fs:directory-list-fun), where it means that this pathname component matches
anything. The printed representation of a pathname usually designates
:wild
with an asterisk; however, this is host-dependent.
What values are allowed for components of a pathname depends, in general, on the pathname’s host. However, in order for pathnames to be usable in a system-independent way certain global conventions are adhered to. These conventions are stronger for the type and version than for the other components, since the type and version are actually understood by many programs, while the other components are usually just treated as something supplied by the user that only needs to be remembered.
In general, programs can interpret the components of a pathname independent of the file system; and a certain minimum set of possible values of each component are supported on all file systems. The same pathname component value may have very different representations when the pathname is made into a string, depending on the file system. This does not affect programs that operate on the components. The user, when asked to type a pathname, always uses the system-dependent string representation. This is convenient for the user who moves between using the Lisp Machine on files stored on another host and making direct use of that host. However, when the mapping between string form and components is complicated, the components may not be obvious from what you type.
The type is always a string, or one of the special symbols nil
,
:unspecific
, and :wild
. Certain hosts impose a limit on the
size of string allowed, often very small. Many programs that deal with
files have an idea of what type they want to use. For example, Lisp
source programs are usually "LISP"
, compiled Lisp programs are
"QFASL"
, etc. However, these file type conventions are
host-specific, for the important reason that some hosts do not allow a
string five characters long to be used as the type. Therefore, programs
should use a canonical type rather than an actual string to specify
their conventional default file types. Canonical types are described below.
For the version, it is always legitimate to use a positive fixnum, or
certain special symbols. nil
, :unspecific
, and :wild
have
been explained above. The other standardly allowed symbols are
:newest
and :oldest
. :newest
refers to the largest version
number that exists when reading a file, or that number plus one when
writing a new file. :oldest
refers to the smallest version number
that exists. Some file systems may define other special version
symbols, such as :installed
for example, or may allow negative
numbers. Some do not support versions at all. Then a pathname may still
contain any of the standard version components, but it does not matter
what the value is.
The device, directory, and name are more system-dependent. These can be strings (with host-dependent rules on allowed characters and length) or they can be structured. A structured component is a list of strings. This is used for file system features such as hierarchical directories. The system is arranged so that programs do not need to know about structured components unless they do host-dependent operations. Giving a string as a pathname component to a host that wants a structured value converts the string to the appropriate form. Giving a structured component to a host that does not understand them converts it to a string by taking the first element and ignoring the rest.
Some host file systems have features that do not fit into this pathname model. For instance, directories might be accessible as files, there might be complicated structure in the directories or names, or there might be relative directories, such as ‘<’ in Multics. These features appear in the parsing of strings into pathnames, which is one reason why the strings are written in host-dependent syntax. Pathnames for hosts with these features are also likely to handle additional messages besides the common ones documented in this chapter, for the benefit of host-dependent programs that want to access those features. However, once your program depends on any such features, it will work only for certain file servers and not others; in general, it is a good idea to make your program work just as well no matter what file server is being used.
On some host file systems it is conventional to use lower-case letters in file names, while in others upper case is customary, or possibly required. When pathname components are moved from pathnames of one file system to pathnames of another file system, it is useful to convert the case if necessary so that you get the right case convention for the latter file system as a default. This is especially useful when copying files from one file system to another.
The Lisp Machine system defines two representations for each of several
pathname components (the device, directory, name and type). There is
the raw form, which is what actually appears in the filename on the
host file system, and there is the interchange form, which may
differ in alphabetic case from the raw form. The raw form is what is
stored inside the pathname object itself, but programs nearly always
operate on the interchange form. The :name
, :type
, etc,
operations return the interchange form, and the :new-name
, etc,
operations expect the interchange form. Additional operations
:raw-name
, etc, are provided for working with the raw components,
but these are rarely needed.
The interchange form is defined so that it is always customarily in
upper case. If upper case is customary on the host file system, then
the interchange form of a component is the same as the raw form. If
lower case is customary on the host file system, as on Unix, then the
interchange form has case inverted. More precisely, an all-upper-case
component is changed to all-lower-case, an all-lower-case component is
changed to all-upper-case, and a mixed-case component is not changed.
(This is a one-to-one mapping). Thus, a Unix pathname with a name
component of "foo"
has an interchange-format name of
"FOO"
, and vice versa.
For host file systems which record case when files are created but ignore case when comparing filenames, the interchange form is always upper case.
The host component is not really a name, and case is always ignored in host names, so there is no need for two forms of host component. The version component does not need them either, because it is never a string.
pathname
: :host ¶pathname
: :device ¶pathname
: :directory ¶pathname
: :name ¶pathname
: :type ¶pathname
: :version ¶These return the components of the pathname, in interchange form. The returned values can be strings, special symbols, or lists of strings in the case of structured components. The type is always a string or a symbol. The version is always a number or a symbol.
pathname
: :raw-device ¶pathname
: :raw-directory ¶pathname
: :raw-name ¶pathname
: :raw-type ¶These return the components of the pathname, in raw form.
pathname
: :new-device dev ¶pathname
: :new-directory dir ¶pathname
: :new-name name ¶pathname
: :new-type type ¶pathname
: :new-version version ¶These return a new pathname that is the same as the pathname they are
sent to except that the value of one of the components has been changed.
The specified component value is interpreted as being in interchange
form, which means its case may be converted. The :new-device
,
:new-directory
and :new-name
operations accept a string (or a
special symbol) or a list that is a structured name. If the host does
not define structured components, and you specify a list, its first
element is used.
pathname
: :new-raw-device dev ¶pathname
: :new-raw-directory dir ¶pathname
: :new-raw-name name ¶pathname
: :new-raw-type type ¶These return a new pathname that is the same as the pathname they are sent to except that the value of one of the components has been changed. The specified component value is interpreted as raw.
pathname
: :new-suggested-name name ¶pathname
: :new-suggested-directory dir ¶These differ from the :new-name
and :new-directory
operations in
that the new pathname constructed has a name or directory based on the
suggestion, but not necessarily identical to it. It tries, in a
system-dependent manner, to adapt the suggested name or directory to the
usual customs of the file system in use.
For example, on a TOPS-20 system, these operations would convert name or dir to upper case, because while lower-case letters may appear in TOPS-20 pathnames, it is not customary to generate such pathnames by default.
pathname
: :new-pathname &rest options ¶This returns a new pathname that is the same as the pathname it is sent
to except that the values of some of the components have been changed.
options is a list of alternating keywords and values. The keywords
all specify values of pathname components; they are :host
,
:device
, :directory
, :name
, :type
, and :version
.
Alternatively, the keywords :raw-device
, :raw-directory
,
:raw-name
and :raw-type
may be used to specify a component in
raw form.
Two additional keywords, :canonical-type
and :original-type
,
allow the type field to be specified as a canonical type. See the
following section for a description of canonical types. Also, the value
specified for the keyword :type
may be a canonical type symbol.
If an invalid component is specified, it is replaced by some valid
component so that a valid pathname can be returned. You can tell
whether a component is valid by specifying it in :new-pathname
and seeing whether that component of the resulting pathname
matches what you specified.
The operations :new-name
, etc, are equivalent to :new-pathname
specifying only one component to be changed; in fact, that is how those
operations are implemented.
Canonical types are a way of specifying a pathname type component
using host-dependent conventions without making the program itself
explicitly host dependent. For example, the function compile-file
normally provides a default type of "LISP"
, but on VMS systems the
default must be "LSP"
instead, and on Unix systems it is "l"
.
What compile-file
actually does is to use a canonical type, the keyword
:lisp
, as the default. This keyword is given a definition as a
canonical type, which specifies what it maps into on various file
systems.
A single canonical type may have more than one mapping on a particular
file system. For example, on TOPS-20 systems the canonical type
:LISP
maps into either "LISP"
or "LSP"
. One of the
possibilities is marked as “preferred”; in this case, it is "LISP"
.
The effect of this is that either FOO.LISP
or FOO.LSP
would be
acceptable as having canonical type :lisp
, but merging
yields "LISP"
as the type when defaulting from :lisp
.
Note that the canonical type of a pathname is not a distinct component. It is another way of describing or specifying the type component.
A canonical type must be defined before it is used.
Defines symbol as a canonical type. standard-mapping is the actual type component that it maps into (a string), with exceptions as specified by system-dependent-mappings. Each element of system-dependent-mappings (that is, each additional argument) is a list of the form
(system-type preferred-mapping other-mappings...)
system-type is one of the system-type keywords the :system-type
operation on a host object can return, such as :unix
, :tops20
,
and :lispm
(see si:host-alist-var). The argument describes how
to map this canonical type on that type of file system.
preferred-map (a string) is the preferred mapping of the canonical
type, and other-mappings are additional strings that are accepted as
matching the canonical type.
system-type may also be a list of system types. Then the argument applies to all of those types of file systems.
All of the mapping strings are in interchange form.
For example, the canonical type :lisp
is defined as follows:
(fs:define-canonical-type :lisp "LISP" (:unix "L" "LISP") (:vms "LSP") ((:tops20 :tenex) "LISP" "LSP"))
Other canonical types defined by the system include :qfasl
,
:text
, :press
, :qwabl
, :babyl
, :mail
, :xmail
,
:init
, :patch-directory
, :midas
, :palx
, :unfasl
,
:widths
, :output
, mac
, tasm
, doc
, mss
, tex
,
pl1
and clu
. The standard mapping for each is the symbol’s
pname.
To match a pathname against a canonical type, use the :canonical-type
operation.
pathname
: :canonical-type ¶Returns two values which describe whether and how this pathname’s type component matches any canonical type.
If the type component is one of the possible mappings of some canonical
type, the first value is that canonical type (the symbol). The second
value is nil
if the type component is the preferred mapping of the
canonical type; otherwise it is the actual type component, in
interchange form. The second value is called the original type of
the pathname.
If the type component does not match a canonical type, the first value is the
type component in interchange form (a string), and the second value is nil
.
This operation is useful in matching a pathname against a canonical
type; the first value is eq
to the canonical type if the pathname
matches it. The operation is also useful for transferring a type field
from one file system to another while preserving canonical type; this is
described below.
A new pathname may also be constructed by specifying a canonical type.
pathname
: :new-canonical-type canonical-type &optional original-type ¶Returns a pathname different from this one in having a type component that matches canonical-type.
If original-type is a possible mapping for canonical-type on
this pathname’s host, then it is used as the type component. Otherwise,
the preferred mapping for canonical-type is used. If
original-type is not specified, it defaults to this pathname’s type
component. If it is specified as nil
, the preferred mapping of the
canonical type is always used. If canonical-type is a string rather
than an actual canonical type, it is used directly as the type
component, and the original-type does not matter.
The :new-pathname
operation accepts the keywords :canonical-type
and :original-type
. The :new-canonical-type
operation is
equivalent to :new-pathname
with those keywords.
Suppose you wish to copy the file named old-pathname to a directory named target-directory-pathname, possibly on another host, while preserving the name, version and canonical type. That is, if the original file has a name acceptable for a QFASL file, the new file should also. Here is how to compute the new pathname:
(multiple-value-bind (canonical original) (send old-pathname :canonical-type) (send target-directory-pathname :new-pathname :name (send old-pathname :name) :version (send old-pathname :version) :canonical-type canonical :original-type original))
Suppose that old-pathname is OZ:<FOO>A.LISP.5
, where OZ
is a
TOPS-20, and the target directory is on a VMS host. Then canonical
is
:lisp
and original
is "LISP"
. Since "LISP"
is
not an acceptable mapping for :lisp
on a VMS system, the resulting pathname
has as its type component the preferred mapping for :lisp
on VMS,
namely, "LSP"
.
But if the target host is a Unix host, the new file’s type is
"LISP"
, since that is an acceptable (though not preferred) mapping
for :lisp
on Unix hosts.
If you would rather that the preferred mapping always be used for the
new file’s type, omit the :original-type
argument to the
:new-pathname
operation. This would result in a type component of
"L"
in interchange form, or "l"
in raw form, in the new file’s pathname.
The function compile-file
actually does something cleverer than using the
canonical type as a default. Doing that, and opening the resulting
pathname, would look only for the preferred mapping of the canonical
type. compile-file
actually tries to open each possible mapping,
trying the preferred mapping first. Here is how it does so:
pathname
: :open-canonical-default-type canonical-type &rest options ¶If this pathname’s type component is non-nil
, the pathname is simply
opened, passing the options to the :open
operation. If the type
component is nil
, each mapping of canonical-type is tried as a
type component, in the order the mappings appear in the canonical type
definition. If an open succeeds, a stream is returned. The
possibilities continue to be tried as long as fs:file-not-found
errors happen; other errors are not handled. If all the possibilities fail,
a fs:file-not-found
error is signaled for the caller, with a pathname
that contains the preferred mapping as its type component.
When the user is asked to type in a pathname, it is of course unreasonable to require the user to type a complete pathname, containing all components. Instead there are defaults, so that components not specified by the user can be supplied automatically by the system. Each program that deals with pathnames typically has its own set of defaults.
The system defines an object called a defaults alist. Functions are
provided to create one, get the default pathname out of one, merge a pathname
with one, and store a pathname back into one. A defaults alist can remember
more than one default pathname if defaults are being kept separately for
each host; this is controlled by the variable fs:*defaults-are-per-host*
.
The main primitive for using defaults is the function
fs:merge-pathname-defaults
(see fs:merge-pathname-defaults-fun).
In place of a defaults alist, you may use just a pathname. Defaulting one pathname from another is useful for cases such as a program that has an input file and an output file, and asks the user for the name of both, letting the unsupplied components of one name default from the other. Unspecified components of the output pathname come from the input pathname, except that the type should default not to the type of the input but to the appropriate default type for output from this program.
The implementation of a defaults alist is an association list of host names
and default pathnames. The host name nil
is special and holds the
defaults for all hosts, when defaults are not per-host.
The merging operation takes as input a pathname, a defaults alist (or another pathname), a default type, and a default version, and returns a pathname. Basically, the missing components in the pathname are filled in from the defaults alist. However, if a name is specified but the type or version is not, then the type or version is treated specially.
Here are the merging rules in full detail.
If no host is specified, the host is taken from the defaults. If the pathname explicitly specifies a host and does not supply a device, then the the default file device for that host is used.
If the pathname specifies a device named DSK
, that is replaced with the
working device for the pathname’s host, and the directory defaults to
the working directory for the host if it is not specified. See
fs:set-host-working-directory
, below.
Next, if the pathname does not specify a host, device, directory, or name, that component comes from the defaults.
If the value of fs:*always-merge-type-and-version*
is non-nil
,
the type and version are merged just like the other components.
If fs:*always-merge-type-and-version*
is nil
, as it normally
is, the merging rules for the type and version are more complicated
and depend on whether the pathname specifies a name. If the pathname
doesn’t specify a name, then the type and version, if not provided,
come from the defaults, just like the other components. However,
if the pathname does specify a name, then the type and version come
from the default-type and default-version arguments to
merge-pathname-defaults
. If those arguments were omitted, the
value of fs:*name-specified-default-type*
(initially, :lisp
)
is used as the default type, and :newest
is used as the default
version.
The reason for this is that the type and version “belong to” some other filename, and are thought to be unlikely to have anything to do with the new filename you are typing in.
Sets the working device and working directory for host to
those specified in pathname. host should be a host object or the
name of a host. pathname may be a string or a pathname.
The working device and working directory are used for defaulting pathnames
in which the device is specified as DSK
.
The editor command Meta-X Set Working Directory
provides a convenient
interface to this function.
The following special variables are parts of the pathname interface that are relevant to defaults.
This is a user customization option intended to be set by a user’s
LISPM INIT
file (see lispm-init-file). The default value is
nil
, which means that each program’s set of defaults contains only
one default pathname. If you type in just a host name and a colon, the
other components of the name default from the previous host, with
appropriate translation to the new host’s pathname syntax. If
fs:*defaults-are-per-host*
is set to t
, each program’s set of
defaults maintains a separate default pathname for each host. If
you type in just a host name and a colon, the last file that was
referenced on that host is used.
If this variable is non-nil
, then the type and version are defaulted
only from the pathname defaults just like the other components.
If fs:*always-merge-type-and-version*
is nil
, then when a name is
specified but not a type, the type defaults from an argument to the
merging function. If that argument is not specified, this variable’s
value is used. It may be a string or a canonical type keyword. The
value is initially :lisp
.
This is the default defaults alist; if the pathname primitives that need a set of defaults are not given one, they use this one. Most programs, however, should have their own defaults rather than using these.
The Common Lisp version of the default pathname defaults. The value of this variable is a pathname rather than an alist. This variable is magically (with a forwarding pointer) identified with a cell in the defaults-alist which the system really uses, so that setting this variable modifies the contents of the alist.
This is the pathname of the last file that was opened. Occasionally this is useful as a default. Since some programs deal with files without notifying the user, you must not expect the user to know what the value of this symbol is. Using this symbol as a default may cause unfortunate surprises if you don’t announce it first, and so such use is discouraged.
These functions are used to manipulate defaults alists directly.
Creates a defaults alist initially containing no defaults. If you ask
this empty set of defaults for its default pathname before anything has
been stored into it you get the file FOO
on the user’s home
directory on the host he logged in to.
Creates a defaults alist, initially a copy of defaults.
This is the primitive function for getting a default pathname out of a defaults alist.
Specifying the optional arguments host, default-type, and default-version
to be non-nil
forces those fields of the returned pathname to contain those values.
If fs:*defaults-are-per-host*
is nil
(its default value), this gets the
one relevant default from the alist. If it is t
, this gets the default for
host if one is specified, otherwise for the host most recently used.
If defaults is not specified, the default defaults are used.
This function also has an additional optional argument internal-p, which is obsolete.
Returns the default host object specified by the defaults-alist defaults. This is the host used by pathname defaulting with the given defaults if no host is specified.
This is the primitive function for updating a set of defaults. It stores pathname into defaults. If defaults is not specified, the default defaults are used.
This function obtains a pathname from an object if that is possible.
Converts object to a pathname and returns that, if possible. If
object is a string or symbol, it is parsed. If object is a
plausible stream, it is asked for its pathname with the :pathname
operation. If object is a pathname, it is simply returned.
Any other kind of object causes an error.
These functions are what programs use to parse and default file names that have been typed in or otherwise supplied by the user.
0
) end junk-allowed ¶Is the Common Lisp function for parsing file names. It is equivalent to
fs:parse-pathname
except in that it takes some keyword arguments where
the other function takes all positional arguments.
0
) end junk-allowed ¶This turns thing, which can be a pathname, a string, a symbol, or a
Maclisp-style name list, into a pathname. Most functions that are advertised
to take a pathname argument call fs:parse-pathname
on it so that they can
accept anything that can be turned into a pathname. If thing
is itself
a pathname, it is returned unchanged.
If thing is a string, start and end are interpreted as
indices specifying a substring to parse. They are just like
the second and third arguments to substring
. The rest of thing is
ignored. start and end are ignored if thing is not a string.
If junk-allowed is non-nil
, parsing stops without error if the
syntax is invalid, and this function returns nil
. The second value
is then the index of the invalid character. If parsing is successful,
the second value is the index of the place at which parsing was supposed
to stop (end, or the end of thing). If junk-allowed is
nil
, invalid syntax signals an error.
This function does not do defaulting, even though it has an argument
named defaults; it only does parsing. The host and defaults
arguments are there because in order to parse a string into a pathname,
it is necessary to know what host it is for so that it can be parsed with
the file name syntax peculiar to that host. If thing does not contain
a manifest host name, then if host is non-nil
, it is the host name
to use, as a string. If thing is a string, a manifest host name may be
at the beginning or the end, and consists of the name of a host followed by a colon.
If host is nil
then the host name is obtained
from the default pathname in defaults. If defaults is not supplied,
the default defaults (*default-pathname-defaults*
) are used.
Note that if host is specified, and thing contains a host name, an error is signaled if they are not the same host.
fs:pathname-parse-error
: (fs:pathname-error
error
) ¶This condition is signaled when fs:parse-pathname
finds a syntax
error in the string it is given.
fs:parse-pathname
sets up a nonlocal proceed type :new-pathname
for this condition. The proceed type expects one argument, a pathname,
which is returned from fs:parse-pathname
.
Fills in unspecified components of pathname from the defaults and returns a new pathname. This is the function that most programs should call to process a file name supplied by the user. pathname can be a pathname, a string, a symbol, or a Maclisp namelist. The returned value is always a pathname. The merging rules are documented on pathname-merging-rules.
If defaults is a pathname, rather than a defaults alist, then the defaults
are taken from its components. This is how you merge two pathnames. (In Maclisp
that operation is called mergef
.)
defaults defaults to the value of *default-pathname-defaults*
if unsupplied. default-type defaults to the value of
fs:*name-specified-default-type*
. default-version defaults to :newest
.
:newest
) ¶Is the Common Lisp function for pathname defaulting. It does only some
of the things that fs:merge-pathname-defaults
does. It merges
defaults from defaults (which defaults to the value of
*default-pathname-defaults*
) into pathname to get a new
pathname, which is returned. pathname can be a string (or symbol);
then it is parsed and the result is defaulted. default-version is
used as the version when pathname has a name but no version.
This is the same as fs:merge-pathname-defaults
except that after it
is done the defaults-list defaults is modified so that the merged
pathname is the new default. This is handy for programs that have
sticky defaults, which means that the default for each command
is the last filename used. (If defaults is a pathname rather than a
defaults alist, then no storing back is done.) The optional arguments
default the same way as in fs:merge-pathname-defaults
.
These functions convert a pathname into a namestring for all or some of the pathname’s components.
Returns a string containing the printed form of pathname, as you would type it in.
This uses the :string-for-printing
operation.
Returns a string showing just the name, type and version of pathname.
This uses the :string-for-dired
operation.
Returns a string showing just the device and directory of pathname.
This uses the :string-for-directory
operation.
Returns a string showing just the components of pathname which would
not be obtained by defaulting from defaults. This is the shortest
string that would suffice to specify pathname, given those defaults. It
is made by using the :string-for-printing
operation on a modified
pathname.
This function yields a pathname given its components.
t
) host device raw-device directory raw-directory name raw-name type raw-type version canonical-type original-type ¶Returns a pathname whose components are as specified.
If defaults is a pathname or a defaults-alist, any components not
explicitly specified default from it. If defaults is t
(which
is the default), then unspecified components default to nil
, except
for the host (since every pathname must have a specific host), which
defaults based on *default-pathname-defaults*
.
These functions give the components of a pathname.
Returns the host component of pathname.
Likewise, for the other components
These functions return useful information.
user-id
) force-p ¶user-id
) force-p ¶Returns the pathname of the user’s home directory on host. These default to the logged in user and the host logged in to. Home directory is a somewhat system-dependent concept, but from the point of view of the Lisp Machine it is the directory where the user keeps personal files such as init files and mail.
This function returns a pathname without any name, type, or version
component (those components are all nil
).
If reset-p is specified non-nil
, the machine the user is logged
in to is changed to be host.
The synonym user-homedir-pathname
is from Common Lisp.
Returns the pathname of the logged-in user’s init file for the program program-name,
on the host, which defaults to the host the user logged in to. Programs that load
init files containing user customizations call this function to find where to look
for the file, so that they need not know the separate init file name conventions of
each host operating system. The program-name "LISPM"
is used by the login
function.
These functions are useful for poking around.
If pathname is a pathname object, this describes it, showing you its properties
(if any) and information about files with that name that have been loaded into the
machine. If pathname is a string, this describes all interned pathnames that
match that string, ignoring components not specified in the string.
One thing this is useful for is finding the directory of a file
whose name you remember. Giving describe
(see describe-fun) a pathname
object invokes this function.
Parses and defaults pathname, then returns the list of properties of that pathname.
This is the hash table in which pathname objects are interned. You can
find all pathnames ever constructed by applying the function maphash
to this hash table.
A generic pathname stands for a whole family of files. The property
list of a generic pathname is used to remember information about the
family, some of which (such as the package) comes from the -*-
line
(see file-attribute-list)
of a source file in the family. Several types of files with that name, in
that directory, belong together. They are different members of the same
family; for example, they may be source code and compiled code.
However, there may be several other types
of files that form a logically distinct group even though they have
this same name; TEXT
and PRESS
for example. The exact mapping is
done on a per host basis since it can sometimes be affected by host naming
conventions.
The generic pathname of pathname p usually has the same host,
device, directory, and name as p does. However, it has a version of
:unspecific
. The type of the generic pathname is obtained by
sending a :generic-base-type
type-of-p message to the host of
p. The default response to this message is to return the associated
type from fs:*generic-base-type-alist*
if there is one, else
type-of-p. Both the argument and the value are either strings, in
interchange form, or canonical type symbols.
However, the ITS file system presents special problems. One cannot
distinguish multiple generic base types in this same way since the type
component does not exist as such; it is derived from the second
filename, which unfortunately is also sometimes used as a version
number. Thus, on ITS, the type of a generic pathname is always
:unspecific
if there is any association for the type of the pathname
on fs:*generic-base-type-alist*
.
Since generic pathnames are primarily useful for storing properties,
it is important that they be as standardized and conceptualized as possible.
For this reason, generic pathnames are defined to be backtranslated, i.e
the generic pathname of a pathname that is (or could be) the result of a logical host
translation has the host and directory of the logical pathname. For
example, the generic pathname of OZ:<L.WINDOW>;STREAM LISP
would be
SYS:WINDOW;STREAM
if OZ
is the system host.
All version numbers of a particular pathname share the same identical generic pathname. If the values of particular properties have changed between versions, it is possible for confusion to result. One way to deal with this problem is to have the property be a list associating version number with the actual desired property. Then it is relatively easy to determine which versions have which values for the property in question and select one appropriately. But in the applications for which generic pathnames are typically used, this is not necessary.
The :generic-pathname
operation on a pathname returns its
corresponding generic pathname. See
pathname-generic-pathname-method. The :source-pathname
operation
on a pathname returns the actual or probable pathname of the
corresponding source file (with :newest
as the version). See
pathname-source-pathname-method.
This is an association list of the file types and the type of the generic pathname
used for the group of which that file type is a part. Constructing a generic
pathname replaces the file type with the association from this list, if there
is one (except that ITS hosts always replace with :unspecific
).
File types not in this list are really part of the name in some sense.
The initial list is
((:text . :text) ("DOC" . :text) (:press . :text) ("XGP" . :text) (:lisp . :unspecific) (:qfasl . :unspecific) (nil . :unspecific))
The association of :lisp
and :unspecific
is unfortunately made
necessary by the problems of ITS mentioned previously. This way makes
the generic pathnames of logically mapped LISP
files identical no
matter whether the logical host is mapped to an ITS host or not.
The first entry in the list with a particular cdr is the entry for
the type that source files have. Note how the first element whose
cdr is :unspecific
is the one for :lisp
. This is how the
:source-pathname
operation knows what to do, by default.
Some users may need to add to this list.
The system records certain properties on generic pathnames automatically.
:warnings
This property is used to record compilation and other warnings for the file.
:definitions
This property records all the functions and other things defined in the file. The value has one element for each package into which the file has been loaded; the element’s car is the package itself and the cdr is a list of definitions made.
Each definition is a cons whose car is the symbol or function spec
defined and whose cdr is the type of definition (usually one of the
symbols defun
, defvar
, defflavor
and defstruct
).
:systems
This property’s value is a list of the names of all the systems (defined
with defsystem
, see defsystem-fun) of which this is a source file.
:file-id-package-alist
This property records what version of the file was most recently loaded.
In case the file has been loaded into more than one package, as is
sometimes necessary, the loaded version is remembered for each package
separately. This is how make-system
tells whether a file needs to
be reloaded. The value is a list with an element for each package that
the file has been loaded into; the elements look like
(package file-information)
package is the package object itself; file-information
is the value returned by the :info
operation on a file stream, and
is usually a cons whose car is the truename (a pathname) and whose cdr
is the file creation date (a universal time number).
Some additional properties are put on the generic pathname by reading the attribute list of the file (see fs:read-attribute-list-fun). It is not completely clear that this is the right place to store these properties, so it may change in the future. Any property name can appear in the attributes list and get onto the generic pathname; the standard ones are described in file-attribute-list.
This section documents the operations a user may send to a pathname object. Pathnames handle some additional operations that are only intended to be sent by the file system itself, and therefore are not documented here. Someone who wants to add a new host to the system would need to understand those internal operations.
The operations on pathnames that actually operate on files are documented in pathname-file-operations. Certain pathname flavors, for specific kinds of hosts, allow additional special purpose operations. These are documented in specific-host-syntax in the section on the specific host type.
pathname
: :generic-pathname ¶Returns the generic pathname for the family of files of which this pathname is a member. See generic-pathname for documentation on generic pathnames.
pathname
: :source-pathname ¶Returns the pathname for the source file in the family of files to which
this pathname belongs. The returned pathname has :newest
as its version. If the file has been loaded in some fashion into the
Lisp environment, then the pathname type is that which the user actually
used. Otherwise, the conventional file type for source files is determined
from the generic pathname.
pathname
: :primary-device ¶Returns the default device name for the pathname’s host. This is used in generating the initial default pathname for a host.
Operations dealing with wildcards.
The character *
in a namestring is a wildcard.
It means that the pathname is a really a pattern which
specifies a set of possible filenames rather than a single
filename. The matches any sequence of characters
within a single component of the name. Thus, the component
FOO*
would match FOO
, FOOBAR
, FOOT
,
or any other component starting with FOO
.
Any component of a pathname can contain wildcards except the
host; wild hosts are not allowed because a known host is required
in order to know what flavor the pathname should be.
If a pathname component is written in the namestring as just *
,
the actual component of the pathname instance is the keyword
:wild
. Components which contain wildcards but are not
simply a single wildcard are represented in ways subject to change.
Pathnames whose components contain wildcards are called
wild pathnames. Wild pathnames useful in functions such as
delete-file
for requesting the deletion of many files at once.
Less obviously but more fundamentally, wild pathnames are
required for most use of the function fs:directory-list
;
an entire directory’s contents are obtained by specifying a
pathname whose name, type and version components are :wild
.
pathname
: :wild-p ¶Returns non-nil
if this pathname contains any sort of wildcards.
If the value is not nil
, it is a keyword, one of
device
, :directory
, :name
, :type
and
:version
, and it identifies the ‘first’ component
which is wild.
pathname
: :device-wild-p ¶t
if this pathname’s device contains any sort of wildcards.
pathname
: :directory-wild-p ¶pathname
: :name-wild-p ¶pathname
: :type-wild-p ¶pathname
: :version-wild-p ¶Similar, for the other components that can be wild. (The host cannot ever be wild.)
pathname
: :pathname-match candidate-pathname &optional (match-host-p t
) ¶Returns t
if candidate-pathname
matches the pathname
on which the operation is invoked (called, in this context, the
pattern pathname). If the pattern pathname contains
no wildcards, the pathnames match only if they are identical.
This operation is intended in cases where wildcards are expected.
Wildcard matching is done individually by component; the operation
returns t
only if each component matches. Within each component,
an occurrencs of *
in pattern pathname’s component can match
any sequence of characters in candidate-pathname’s component.
Other characters, except for host-specific wildcards, must match exactly.
:wild
as a component of the pattern pathname matches any component
that candidate-pathname may have.
Note that if a component of the pattern pathname is nil
,
candidate-pathname’s component must be nil
also to match it.
Most user programs that read pathnames and use them as patterns
default unspecified components to :wild
first.
Examples:
(defvar pattern) (defun test (str) (send pattern :pathname-match (parse-namestring str))) (setq pattern (parse-namestring "OZ:*:<F*O>*.TEXT.*")) (test "OZ:<FOO>A.TEXT") => t (test "OZ:<FO>HAHA.TEXT.3") => t (test "OZ:<FPPO>HAHA.TEXT.*") => t (test "OZ:<FOX>LOSE.TEXT") => nil (setq pattern (parse-namestring "OZ:*:<*>A.TEXT*.5")) (test "OZ:<FOO>A.TEXT.5") => t (test "OZ:<FOO>A.TEXTTTT.5") => t (test "OZ:<FOO>A.TEXT") => nil
If match-host-p is nil
, then the host components of
the two pathnames are not tested. The result then depends only
on the other components.
pathname
: :translate-wild-pathname target-pattern starting-data &optional reversible ¶Returns a pathname corresponding to starting-data under the mapping
defined by the wild pathnames source-pattern, which is the
pathname this operation is invoked on, and target-pattern, the argument.
It is expected that starting-data would match
the source pattern under the :pathname-match
operation.
:translate-wild-pathname
is used by functions such as
copy-file
which use one wild pathname to
specify a set of files and a second wild pathname to specify
a corresponding filename for each file in the set.
The first wild pathname would be used as the source-pattern
and the second, specifying the name to copy each file to,
would be passed as the target-pattern pathname.
Each component of the result is computed individually from the corresponding components of starting-data and the pattern pathnames, using the following rules:
If target-pattern’s component is ;wild
,
then the result component is taken from starting-data.
Otherwise, each non-wild character in target-pattern’s component is taken literally into the result. Each wild character in target-pattern’s component is paired with a wild character in source-pattern’s component, and thereby with the portion of starting-data’s component which that matched. This portion of starting-data appears in the result in place of the wild target character.
Example:
(setq source (fs:parse-pathname "OZ:PS:<FOO>A*B*.*.*")) (setq target (fs:parse-pathname "OZ:SS:<*>*LOSE*.*B.*")) (send source :translate-wild-pathname target (fs:parse-pathname "OZ:PS:<FOO>ALIBI.LISP.3")) => the pathname OZ:SS:<FOO>LILOSEI.LISPB.3
It is easiest to understand the mapping as being done in interchange case: the interchange components of the arguments are used and the results specify the interchange components of the value.
The type component is slightly special; if the target-pattern type
is :wild
, the canonical type of starting-data is taken
and then interpreted according to the mappings of the target host.
Example:
(setq source (fs:parse-pathname "OZ:PS:<FOO>A*.*.*")) (setq target (fs:parse-pathname "U://usr//foo//b*.*")) (send source :translate-wild-pathname target (fs:parse-pathname "OZ:PS:<FOO>ALL.LISP")) => the pathname U:/usr/foo/bll.l
If reversible is non-nil
, rule 1 is not used;
rule 2 controls all mapping. This mode is used by logical
pathname translation. It makes a difference when
the target pattern component is :wild
and the source
pattern component contains wildcards but is not simply
:wild
. For example, with source and target pattern
components BIG
and *
*
, and starting data
BIGGER
, the result is ordinarily BIGGER
by rule 1,
but with reversible translation the result is GER
.
Operations to get a path name string out of a pathname object:
pathname
: :string-for-printing ¶Returns a string that is the printed representation of the path name. This is
the same as what you get if you princ
the pathname or take string
of it.
pathname
: :string-for-wholine length ¶Returns a string like the :string-for-printing
, but designed to fit
in length characters. length is a suggestion; the actual
returned string may be shorter or longer than that. However, the
who-line updater truncates the value to that length if it is longer.
pathname
: :string-for-editor ¶Returns a string that is the pathname with its components rearranged so that the name is first. The editor uses this form to name its buffers.
pathname
: :string-for-dired ¶Returns a string to be used by the directory editor. The string contains only the name, type, and version.
pathname
: :string-for-directory ¶Returns a string that contains only the device and directory of the pathname. It identifies one directory among all directories on the host.
pathname
: :string-for-host ¶Returns a string that is the pathname the way the host file system likes to see it.
Operations to move around through a hierarchy of directories:
pathname
: :pathname-as-directory ¶Assuming that the file described by the pathname is a directory,
return another pathname specifying that as a directory.
Thus, if sent to a pathname OZ:<RMS>FOO.DIRECTORY
, it would return the
pathname OZ:<RMS.FOO>
. The name, type and version of the returned
pathname are :unspecific
.
pathname
: :directory-pathname-as-file ¶This is the inverse of the preceding operation. It returns a pathname specifying as a file the directory of the original pathname. The name, type and version of the original pathname are ignored.
The special symbol :root
can be used as the directory component of a
pathname on file systems that have a root directory.
Operations to manipulate the property list of a pathname:
pathname
: :get property-name &optional default-value ¶pathname
: :getl list-of-property-names ¶pathname
: :putprop value property-name ¶pathname
: :remprop property-name ¶pathname
: :plist ¶These manipulate the pathname’s property list, and are used if you call the property list functions of the same names (see get-fun) giving the pathname as the first argument. Please read the paragraph on pathname-plist-warning explaining the care you must take in using property lists of pathnames.
This section lists the host file systems supported, gives an example of the pathname syntax for each system, and discusses any special idiosyncracies. More host types may be added in the future.
An ITS pathname looks like "host: device: dir; name type-or-version"
.
The primary device is DSK:
but other devices such as ML:
, ARC:
,
DVR:
, or PTR:
may be used.
ITS does not exactly fit the virtual file system model, in that a file
name has two components (FN1 and FN2) rather than three (name, type, and
version). Consequently to map any virtual pathname into an ITS
filename, it is necessary to decide whether the FN2 is the type or
the version. The rule is that usually the type goes in the FN2 and the
version is ignored; however, certain types (LISP
and TEXT
) are
ignored and instead the version goes in the FN2. Also if the type is :unspecific
the FN2 is the version.
Given an ITS filename, it is converted into a pathname by making the FN2
the version if it is ‘<’, ‘>’, or a number. Otherwise the FN2 becomes
the type. ITS pathnames allow the special version symbols :oldest
and :newest
, which correspond to ‘<’ and ‘>’ respectively.
In every ITS pathname either the version or the type is :unspecific
or nil
; sometimes both are. When you create a new ITS pathname, if
you specify only the version or only the type, the one not specified
becomes :unspecific
. If both are specified, the version is
:unspecific
unless the type is a normally-ignored type (such as
LISP
) in which case the version is :newest
and the type is
:unspecific
so that numeric FN2’s are found.
Each component of an ITS pathname is mapped to upper case and truncated to six characters.
Special characters (space, colon, and semicolon) in a component of an ITS pathname
can be quoted by prefixing them with right horseshoe (delta
)
or equivalence sign (). Right horseshoe is the same character code in the
Lisp Machine character set as control-Q in the ITS character set.
An ITS pathname can have a structured name, which is a list of two strings, the FN1 and the FN2. In this case there is neither a type nor a version.
An ITS pathname with an FN2 but no FN1 (i.e a type and/or version but no name)
is represented with the placeholder FN1 ‘’, because ITS pathname syntax
provides no way to write an FN2 without an FN1 before it.
The ITS init file naming convention is "homedir; user program"
.
The ITS file system does not have separate file types and version numbers; both components are stored in the “FN2”. This variable is a list of the file types that are “not important”; files with these types use the FN2 for a version number. Files with other types use the FN2 for the type and do not have a version number. The initial list is
("LISP" "TEXT" nil :unspecific)
Some users may need to add to this list.
its-pathname
: :fn1 ¶its-pathname
: :fn2 ¶These two operations return a string that is the FN1 or FN2 host-dependent component of the pathname.
pathname
: :type-and-version ¶pathname
: :new-type-and-version new-type new-version ¶These two operations provide a way of pretending that ITS pathnames can have both a type and a version. They use the first three characters of the FN2 to store a type and the last three to store a version number.
On an ITS-pathname,
:type-and-version
returns the type and version thus extracted (not
the same as the type and version of the pathname).
:new-type-and-version
returns a new pathname constructed from the
specified new type and new version.
On any other type of pathname, these operations simply return or set both the type component and the version component.
A pathname on TOPS-20 (better known as Twenex) looks like
host:device:<directory>name.type.version
The primary device is PS:
.
TOPS-20 pathnames are mapped to upper case. Special characters (including
lower-case letters) are quoted with the circle-cross (circleX
) character, which
has the same character code in the Lisp Machine character set as Control-V,
the standard Twenex quoting character, in the ASCII character set.
If you specify a period after the name, but nothing after that,
then the type is :unspecific
, which translates into an empty
extension on the TOPS-20 system. If you omit the period, you have
allowed the type to be defaulted.
TOPS-20 pathnames allow the special version symbols :oldest
and
:newest
. In the string form of a pathname, these are expressed as
‘.-2
’, and as an omitted version.
The directory component of a TOPS-20 pathname may be structured. The
directory <FOO.BAR>
is represented as the list ("FOO" "BAR")
.
The characters *
and %
are wildcards that match any sequence of
characters and any single character (within one pathname component),
respectively. To specify a filename that actually contains a *
or
%
character, quote the character with circleX
. When a component is
specified with just a single *
, the symbol :wild
appears in the
pathname object.
The TOPS-20 init file naming convention is "<user>program.INIT"
.
When there is an attempt to display a TOPS-20 file name in the who-line and there isn’t enough room to show the entire name, the name is truncated and followed by a center-dot character to indicate that there is more to the name than can be displayed.
Tenex pathnames are almost the same as TOPS-20 pathnames, except that
the version is preceeded by a semi-colon instead of a period, the
default device is DSK
instead of PS
, and the quoting
requirements are slightly different.
VMS pathnames are basically like TOPS-20 pathnames, with a few
complexities. The primary device is USRD$
.
First of all, only alphanumeric characters are allowed in filenames
(though $
and underscore can appear in device names).
Secondly, a version number is preceded by ‘;
’ rather than by ‘.
’.
Thirdly, file types (called “extensions” in VMS terminology) are limited to three characters. Each of the system’s canonical types has a special mapping for VMS pathnames, which is three characters long:
:lisp LSP :text TXT :qfasl QFS :midas MID :press PRS :widths WID :patch-directory PDR :qwabl QWB :babyl BAB :mail MAI :xmail XML :init INI :unfasl UNF :output OUT
A Unix pathname is a sequence of directory or file names separated by slashes. The last name is the filename; preceding ones are directory names (but directories are files anyway). There are no devices or versions. Alphabetic case is significant in Unix pathnames, no case conversion is normally done, and lower case is the default. Therefore, components of solid upper or lower case are inverted in case when going between interchange form and raw form. (What the user types in a pathname string is the raw form.)
Unix allows you to specify a pathname relative to your default directory
by using just a filename, or starting with the first subdirectory name;
you can specify it starting from the root directory by starting with
a slash. In addition, you can start with ‘..
’ as a directory name one
or more times, to refer upward in the hierarchy from the default
directory.
Unix pathnames on the Lisp Machine provide all these features too, but the canonicalization to a simple descending list of directory names starting from the root is done on the Lisp Machine itself when you merge the specified pathname with the defaults.
If a pathname string starts with a slash, the pathname object that results from parsing it is called “absolute”. Otherwise the pathname object is called “relative”.
In an absolute pathname object, the directory component is either a
symbol (nil
, :unspecific
or :root
), a string, or a list of
strings. A single string is used when there is only one level of
directory in the pathname.
A relative pathname has a directory that is a list of the symbol
:relative
followed by some strings. When the pathname is merged
with defaults, the strings in the list are appended to the strings
in the default directory. The result of merging is always an absolute
pathname.
In a relative pathname’s string form, the string “..
” can be used as a
directory name. It is translated to the symbol :up
when the string
is parsed. That symbol is processed when the relative pathname is
merged with the defaults.
Restrictions on the length of Unix pathnames require abbreviations for the standard Zetalisp pathname types, just as for VMS. On Unix the preferred mappings of all canonical types are one or two characters long. We give here the mappings in raw form; they are actually specified in interchange form.
:lisp l :text tx :qfasl qf :midas md :press pr :widths wd :patch-directory pd :qwabl qw :babyl bb :mail ma :xmail xm :init in :unfasl uf :output ot
The Multics file system is much like the Unix one; there are absolute and relative pathnames, absolute ones start with a directory delimiter, and there are no devices or versions. Alphabetic case is significant.
There are differences in details. Directory names are terminated, and
absolute pathnames begun, with the character ‘>
’. The containing
directory is referred to by the character ‘<
’, which is complete in
itself. It does not require a delimiter. Thus, <<FOO>BAR
refers to
subdirectory FOO
, file BAR
in the superdirectory of the superdirectory
of the default directory.
The limits on filename sizes are very large, so the system canonical types all use their standard mappings. Since the mappings are specified as upper case, and then interpreted as being in interchange form, the actual file names on Multics contain lower case.
There are two file systems that run in the MIT Lisp Machine system. They have different pathname syntax. Both can be accessed either remotely like any other file server, or locally.
The Local-File system uses host name LM
for the machine you are on.
A Local-File system on another machine can be accessed using the name of
that machine as a host name, provided that machine is known as a file
server.
The remainder of the pathname for the Local-File system looks like
"directory; name.type#version"
. There is no restriction on the length
of names; letters are converted to upper case. Subdirectories are
allowed and are specified by putting periods between the directory
components, as in RMS.SUBDIR;
.
The TOPS-20 pathname syntax is also accepted. In addition, if the flag
fs:*lmfs-use-twenex-syntax*
is non-nil
, Local-File pathnames
print out using TOPS-20 syntax. Note that since the printed representation
of a pathname is cached, changing this flag’s value does not change the
printing of pathnames with existing representations.
The Local-File system on the filecomputer at MIT has the host name FS
.
The LMFILE system is primarily for use as a file server, unless you have
512k of memory. At MIT it runs on the filecomputer and is accessed
remotely with host name FC
.
The remainder of an LMFILE pathname looks like "directory;
name type#version"
. However, the directory and name can
be composed of any number of subnames, separated by backslashes. This
is how subdirectories are specified. FOO;BAR\X
refers to the same
file as FOO\BAR;X
, but the two ways of specifying the file have
different consequences in defaulting, getting directory listings, etc.
Case is significant in LMFILE pathnames; however, when you open a file, the LMFILE system ignores the case when it matches your pathname against the existing files. As a result, the case you use matters when you create or rename a file, and appears in directory listings, but it is ignored when you refer to an existing file, and you cannot have two files whose names differ only in case. When components are accessed in interchange form, they are always converted to upper case.
There is another kind of pathname that doesn’t correspond to any particular file server. It is called a logical pathname, and its host is called a logical host. Every logical pathname can be translated into a corresponding physical pathname because each logical host records a corresponding actual (“physical”) host and rules for translating the other components of the pathname.
The reason for having logical pathnames is to make it easy to keep
bodies of software on more than one file system. An important example
is the body of software that constitutes the Lisp Machine system. Every
site has a copy of all of the sources of the programs that are loaded
into the initial Lisp environment. Some sites may store the sources on
an ITS file system, while others may store them on a TOPS-20. However,
system software (including make-system
) wishes to be able to find a
particular file independent of the name of the host a particular site
stores it on, or even the kind of host it is. This is done by means of
the logical host SYS
; all pathnames for system files are actually
logical pathnames with host SYS
. At each site, SYS
is defined
as a logical host, but translations are different at each site. For
example, at MIT the source files are stored on the TOPS-20 system named
OZ, so MIT’s site file says that SYS
should translate to the host
OZ
.
Each logical host, such as SYS
, has a list of translations, each of
which says how to map certain pathnames for that host into pathnames for
the corresponding physical host. To translate a logical pathname, the
system tests each of the logical host’s translations, in sequence, to see if it is applicable.
(If none is applicable, an error is signaled.) A translation
consists of a pair of pathnames or namestrings, typically containing
wildcards. Unspecified components in them default to :wild
. The
from-pathname of the translation is used to match against the
pathname to be translated; if it matches, the corresponding
to-pathname is used to construct the translation, filling in its
wild fields from the pathname being translated as in the
:translate-wild-pathname
operation
(pathname-translate-wild-pathname-method).
Most commonly the translations contain pathnames that have only directories specified, everything else wild. Then the other components are unchanged by translation.
If the files accessed through the logical host are moved, the translations can be changed so that the same logical pathnames refer to the same files on their new physical host via physical pathnames changed to fit the restrictions and the conventions of the new physical host.
Each translation is specified as a list of two strings. The strings
are parsed into pathnames and any unspecified components are defaulted
to :wild
. The first string of the pair is the source pattern;
it is parsed with logical pathname syntax. The second string is the
target pattern, and it is parsed with the pathname syntax for the
specified physical host.
For example, suppose that logical host FOO
maps to physical host
BAR
, a Tops-20, and has the following list of translations:
(("BACK;" "PS:<FOO.BACK>") ("FRONT;* QFASL" "SS:<FOO.QFASL>*.QFASL") ("FRONT;" "PS:<FOO.FRONT>"))
Then all pathnames with host FOO
and directory BACK
translate to host BAR
, device PS
and directory <FOO.BACK>
with name, type and version unchanged.
All pathnames with host FOO
, directory FRONT
and
type QFASL
translate to host BAR
, device SS
,
directory <FOO.QFASL>
and type QFASL
, with name
and version unchanged. All other pathnames with host FOO
and directory FRONT
map to host BAR
, device PS
and directory <FOO.FRONT>
, with name, type and version
unchanged. Note that the first translation whose pattern
matches a given pathname is the one that is used.
Another site might define FOO
’s to map to a Unix host
QUUX
, with the following translation list:
(("BACK;" "//nd//foo//back//") ("FRONT;" "//nd//foo//front//"))
This site apparently does not see a need to store the QFASL
files in a separate directory. Note that the slashes are duplicated
to quote them for Lisp; the actual namestrings contain single slashes
as is usual with Unix.
If the last translation’s source pattern is entirely wild, it applies to any pathname not so far handled. Example:
(("BACK;" "//nd//foo//back//") ("" "//nd//foo1//*//"))
Physical pathnames can also be back-translated into the
corresponding logical pathname. This is the inverse transformation
of ordinary translation. It is necessary to specify which logical
host to back translate for, as it may be that the same physical
pathname could be the translation of different logical pathnames
on different hosts. Use the :back-translated-pathname
operation,
below.
Both create a new logical host named logical-host. Its corresponding physical host (that is, the host to which it should forward most operations) is physical-host. logical-host and physical-host should both be strings. translations should be a list of translation specifications, as described above. The two functions differ only in that one accepts positional arguments and the other accepts keyword arguments. Example:
(add-logical-pathname-host "MUSIC" "MUSIC-10-A" '(("MELODY;" "SS:<MELODY>") ("DOC;" "PS:<MUSIC-DOCUMENTATION>")))
This creates a new logical host called MUSIC
. An attempt to open the
file MUSIC:DOC;MANUAL TEXT 2
will be re-directed to the file
MUSIC-10-A:PS:<MUSIC-DOCUMENTATION>MANUAL.TEXT.2
(assuming that the
host MUSIC-10-A
is a TOPS-20 system).
Requests that the definition of logical host name be
loaded from a standard place in the file system: namely,
the file SYS: SITE; name TRANSLATIONS
.
This file is loaded immediately with load
, in
the fs
package.
It should contain code to create the logical host;
normally, a call to fs:set-logical-pathname-host
or
fs:add-logical-pathname-host
, above.
The same file is automatically reloaded, if it has been changed,
at appropriate times: by load-patches
, and whenever
site information is updated.
fs:logical-pathname
: :translated-pathname ¶Converts a logical pathname to a physical pathname. It returns the translated pathname of this instance, a pathname whose host component is the physical host that corresponds to this instance’s logical host.
If this operation is applied to a physical pathname, it simply returns that pathname unchanged.
fs:logical-pathname
: :back-translated-pathname pathname ¶Converts a physical pathname to a logical pathname.
pathname should be a pathname whose host is the physical host
corresponding to this instance’s logical host. This returns
a pathname whose host is the logical host and whose translation
is pathname. If pathname is not the translation
of any logical pathname on this instance’s host, nil
is returned.
Here is an example of how this would be used in connection with truenames. Given a stream that was obtained by opening a logical pathname,
(send stream :pathname)
returns the logical pathname that was opened.
(send stream :truename)
returns the true name of the file that is open, which of course is a pathname on the physical host. To get this in the form of a logical pathname, one would do
(send (send stream :pathname) :back-translated-pathname (send stream :truename))
If this operation is applied to a physical pathname, it simply returns its argument. Thus the above example works no matter what kind of pathname was opened to create the stream.
fs:unknown-logical-pathname-translation
: (fs:pathname-error
error
) ¶This is signaled when a logical pathname has no translation.
The condition instance supports the :logical-pathname
operation,
which returns the pathname that was untranslatable.
The proceed type :define-directory
is supported.
It expects a single argument, a pathname or a string to be parsed into one.
This defines the target pattern for a translation whose source pattern
is the directory from the untranslatable pathname (and all else wild).
Such a translation is added to the logical host, making it possible
to translate the pathname.
A logical pathname looks like "host: directory; name type version"
.
There is no way to specify a device; parsing a logical pathname
always returns a pathname whose device component is :unspecific
.
This is because devices don’t have any meaning in logical pathnames.
The equivalence-sign character () can be used for quoting special
characters such as spaces and semicolons. The double-arrow character
(‘
’) can be used as a place-holder for components that are
nil
,
and the up-horseshoe (‘circlePlus
’) indicates :unspecific
(generic pathnames
typically have :unspecific
as the type and the version).
All letters are mapped to upper case unless quoted. The :newest
, :oldest
,
and :wild
values for versions are written as
‘>
’, ‘<
’, and ‘*
’ respectively.
There isn’t any init file naming convention for logical hosts; you
can’t log into them. The :string-for-host
,
:string-for-wholine
, :string-for-dired
, and :string-for-editor
messages are all
passed on to the translated pathname, but the :string-for-printing
is handled by the fs:logical-pathname
flavor itself and shows
the logical name.
The hosts ED
, ED-BUFFER
and ED-FILE
are used in pathnames
which refer to buffers in the editor. If you open such a pathname, you
get a stream that reads or writes the contents of an editor buffer. The
three host names differ only in the syntax of the pathname, and in how
it is interpreted.
The host ED
is followed by an abbreviation that should complete to
the name of an existing editor buffer. For example, the pathname
ED:FOO
could refer to the buffer FOO.LISP PS:<ME> OZ:
.
The host ED-BUFFER
is followed by an exact buffer name. If there is
no buffer with that name, one is created. This is most useful for
creating a buffer.
The host ED-FILE
is followed by an arbitrary pathname, including a
host name. An ED-FILE
pathname refers to a buffer visiting that
file. If necessary, the file is read into the editor. For example,
ED-FILE: OZ: PS:<ME>FOO.LISP
would refer to the same buffer as
ED: FOO
. The current default defaults are used in processing the
pathname that follows ED-FILE
, when the pathname is parsed.
Each host known to the Lisp Machine is represented by a flavor instance
known as a host object. The host object records such things as the name(s)
of the host, its operating system type, and its network address(es).
Host objects print like #FS:TOPS20-CHAOS-HOST "MIT-OZ"delta
, so they
can be read back in.
Not all hosts support file access. Those that do support it appear on the list
fs:*pathname-host-list*
and can be the host component of pathnames.
A host object is also used as an argument when you make a Chaosnet
connection for any purpose.
The hosts that you can use for making network connections appear in the
value of si:host-alist
. Most of the hosts you can use for pathnames
are among these; but some, such as logical hosts, are not.
t
) ¶Returns a host object that recognizes the specified name.
If the name is not recognized, it is an error, unless no-error-p is
non-nil
; in that case, nil
is returned.
If unknown-ok is non-nil
(the default), a host table server on the
local network is contacted, to see if perhaps it can find the name there. If
it can’t, an error is signalled or nil
is returned, according to
no-error-p. The host instance created in this manner contains all the kinds
of information that a host defined from the host table file has.
If a string of the form CHAOS|
nnn is used, a host object is
created and given nnn (interpreted as octal) as its Chaosnet
address. This can be done regardless of the unknown-ok argument.
The first argument is allowed to be a host object instead of a string. In this case, that argument is simply returned.
sys:unknown-host-name
: (sys:local-network-error
sys:network-error
error
) ¶This condition is signaled by si:parse-host
when the
host is not recognized, if that is an error.
The :name
operation on the condition instance returns the string
given to si:parse-host
.
Returns a host object given an address and the name of the network which
that address is for. Usually the symbol :chaos
is used as the
network name.
nil
is returned if there is no known host with that address.
Returns a host object that can be used in pathnames.
If the name is not recognized, it is an error, unless no-error-p is
non-nil
; in that case, nil
is returned.
The first argument is allowed to be a host object instead of a string. In this case, that argument is simply returned.
si:parse-host
and fs:get-pathname-host
differ in the set of
hosts searched.
fs:unknown-pathname-host
: (fs:pathname-error
error
) ¶This condition is signaled by fs:get-pathname-host
when the
host is not recognized, if that is an error.
The :name
operation on the condition instance returns the string
given to fs:get-pathname-host
.
This is a list of all the host objects that support file access.
This variable is a list of one element for each known network host. The element looks like this:
(full-name host-object (nickname nickname2 ... full-name) system-type machine-type site network list-of-addresses network2 list-of-addresses2 ...)
The full-name is the host’s official name. The :name
operation on
the host object returns this.
The host-object is a flavor instance that represents this host.
It may be nil
if none has been created yet; si:parse-host
creates them when they are referred to.
The nicknames are alternate names that si:parse-host
should
recognize for this host, but which are not its official name.
The system-type is a symbol that tells what software the
host runs. This is used to decide what flavor of host object to
construct. Symbols now used include :lispm
, :its
, :tops-20
,
:tenex
, :vms
, :unix
, :multics
, :minits
, :waits
,
:chaos-gateway
, :dos
, :rsx
, :magicsix
, :msdos
, and others.
Not all of these are specifically understood in any way by the Lisp Machine.
If none of these applies to a host you wish to add, use a new symbol.
The machine-type is a symbol that describes the hardware of the
host. Symbols in use include :lispm
, :pdp10
, :pdp11
,
:vax
, :nu
, :pe3230
, and :ibmpc
.
(nil)
has also been observed to appear here.
Note that these machine types attempt to have wide meanings, lumping
together various brands, models, etc.
The site does not describe anything about the host. Instead it serves to say what the Lisp Machine’s site name was when the host was defined. This is so that, when a Lisp Machine system is moved to a different institution that has a disjoint set of hosts, all the old site’s hosts can be deleted from the host alist by site reinitialization.
The networks and lists of addresses describe how to reach the host.
Usually there is only one network and only one address in the list.
The generality is so that hosts with multiple addresses on multiple
networks can be recorded. Networks include :chaos
and :arpa
.
The address is meaningful only to code for a specific network.
"host
: objects" :name ¶Returns the full, official name of the host.
"host
: objects" :name-as-file-computer ¶Returns the name to print in pathnames on this host (assuming it supports files). This is likely to be a short nickname of the host.
"host
: objects" :short-name ¶Returns the shortest known nickname for this host.
"host
: objects" :pathname-host-namep string ¶Returns t
if string is recognized as a name for this host for
purposes of pathname parsing. The local host will recognise LM
as a pathname host name.
"host
: objects" :system-type ¶Returns the operating system type symbol for this host. See host-table.
"host
: objects" :network-type ¶Returns the symbol for one network that this host is connected to,
or nil
if it is not connected to any. :chaos
is preferred if it
is one of the possible values.
"host
: objects" :network-typep network ¶Returns t
if the host is connected to the specified network.
"host
: objects" :network-addresses ¶Returns an alternating list of network names and lists of addresses, such as
(:chaos (3104) :arpa (106357002))
You can therefore find out all networks a host is known to be on, and its addresses on any network.
"host
: objects" :sample-pathname ¶Returns a pathname for this host, whose device, directory, name, type
and version components are all nil
. Sample pathnames are often
useful because many file-system-dependent pathname operations depend
only on the pathname’s host.
"host
: objects" :open-streams ¶Returns a list of all the open file streams for files on this host.
"host
: objects" :close-all-files ¶Closes all file streams open for files on this host.
"host
: objects" :generic-base-type type-component ¶Returns the type component for a generic pathname assuming it is being made from a pathname whose type component is the one specified.
The Lisp Machine can access files on a variety of remote file servers, which are typically (but not necessarily) accessed through the Chaosnet, as well as accessing files on the Lisp Machine itself, if the machine has its own file system. You are not allowed to refer to files without first logging in, and you may also need to specify a username and password for the host on which the file is stored; see login-fun.
The way to read or write a file’s contents is to open the file to get an input or output stream, use the standard stream I/O functions or operations described in chapters io-chapter and expression-io-chapter, and then close the stream. The first section of this chapter tells how to open and close the stream. The rest of the chapter describes things specific to files such as deleting and renaming, finding out the true name of the file that has been opened, and listing a directory.
Files are named with pathnames. There is much to know about pathnames aside from accessing files with them; all this is described in the previous chapter.
Many functions in this chapter take an argument called file which is intended to specify a file to be operated on. This argument may be given as a pathname (which is defaulted), a namestring (which is parsed into a pathname and then defaulted), or a stream open to a file (the same file is used).
Evaluates the body forms with the variable stream bound to a stream that reads or writes the file named by the value of file. The options forms evaluate to the file-opening options to be used; see file-opening-options.
When control leaves the body, either normally or abnormally (via throw
),
the file is closed. If a new output file is being written and control leaves
abnormally, the file is aborted and it is as if it were never written. Because
it always closes the file, even when an error exit is taken, with-open-file
is preferred over open
. Opening a large number of files and forgetting to
close them tends to break some remote file servers, ITS’s for example.
If an error occurs in opening the file, the result depends on the
values of the error option, the if-exists option, and the
if-does-not-exist option. An error may be signaled (and possibly
corrected with a new pathname), or stream may be bound to a condition
object or even nil
.
This opens and closes the file like with-open-file
, but what happens
afterward is determined by clauses that are like the clauses of a
condition-case
(condition-case-fun). Each clause begins with a
condition name or a list of condition names and is executed if open
signals a condition that possesses any of those names. A clause
beginning with the symbol :no-error
is executed if the file is
opened successfully. This would be where the reading or writing of the
file would be done.
Example:
(with-open-file-case (stream (send generic-pathname :source-pathname)) (sys:remote-network-error (format t "~&Host down.")) (fs:file-not-found (format t "~&(New file)")) (:no-error (setq list (read stream))))
file-retry-new-pathname
executes body. If body does not
signal any of the conditions in condition-names, body’s values
are simply returned. If any of condition-names is signaled,
file-retry-new-pathname
reads a new pathname, setq
’s
pathname-var to it, and executes body again.
The user can type End
instead of a pathname if he wishes
to let the condition be handled by the debugger.
file-retry-new-pathname-if
is similar, but the conditions are
handled only if cond-form’s value is non-nil
.
For an example, see the example of the following macro.
Like with-open-file
inside of a file-retry-new-pathname
. If an
error occurs while opening the file and it has one of the specified
condition-names, a new pathname is read, the variable
pathname-var is setq
’d to it, and another attempt is made to
open a file with the newly specified name. Example:
(with-open-file-retry (instream (infile fs:file-not-found)) ...)
infile
should be a variable whose value is a pathname or namestring.
The example is equivalent to
(file-retry-new-pathname (infile fs:file-not-found) (with-open-file (instream infile) ...))
Opens a file, trying various pathnames until one of them succeeds. The
pathnames tried differ only in their type components. For example,
load
uses this macro to search for either a compiled file or a
source file. The calling sequence looks like
(with-open-file-search (streamvar (operation defaults auto-retry) types-and-pathname options...) body...)
with-open-file-search
tries opening various files until one succeeds; then binds streamvar to the stream
and executes body, closing the stream on exit. The values of body are returned.
types-and-pathname specifies which files to open. It should be a form which evaluates to two values, the first being a list of types to try and the second being a pathname called the base pathname. Each pathname to try is made by merging the base pathname with the defaults defaults and one of the types. The types may be strings or canonical type keywords (see canonical-types).
options are forms whose values should be alternating to keywords and
values, which are passed to open
each time.
If all the names to be tried fail, a fs:multiple-file-not-found
error is signaled.
operation is provided just so that the :operation
operation on the condition
object can return it. Usually the value given for operation should be the
user-level function for which the with-open-file-search
is being done.
If auto-retry is non-nil
, an error causes the user to be
prompted for a new base pathname. The entire set of types specified is
tried anew with the new pathname.
Returns a stream that is connected to the specified file. Unlike
Maclisp, the open
function creates streams only for files;
streams of other kinds are created by other functions. The file
and options arguments are the same as in with-open-file
; see above.
When the caller is finished with the stream, it should close the file by using
the :close
operation or the close
function. The with-open-file
special form does this automatically and so is usually preferred. open
should only be used when the control structure of the program necessitates opening
and closing of a file in some way more complex than the simple way provided
by with-open-file
. Any program that uses open
should set up
unwind-protect
handlers (see unwind-protect-fun) to close its files
in the event of an abnormal exit.
The close
function simply sends the :close
message to stream.
If option is :abort
for a file output stream, the file is discarded.
The Common Lisp version of close
is the same as close
except for
its calling convention. If abort is non-nil
for a file output
stream, the file is discarded.
Closes all open files. This is useful when a program has run wild opening
files and not closing them. It closes all the files in :abort
mode
(see close-message), which means that files open for output are
deleted. Using this function is dangerous, because you may close files
out from under various programs like Zmacs and ZMail; only use it if you
have to and if you feel that you know what you’re doing.
The options used when opening a file are normally alternating keywords and
values, like any other function that takes keyword arguments. In addition,
for compatibility with the Maclisp open
function, if only a single option
is specified it is either a keyword or a list of keywords (not alternating with
values).
The file-opening options control things like whether the stream is for input from a existing file or output to a new file, whether the file is text or binary, etc.
The following keyword arguments are standardly recognized; additional keywords can be implemented by particular file system hosts.
Controls which direction of I/O can be done on the resulting stream.
The possible values are :input
(the default), :output
, nil
,
:probe
, :probe-directory
and :probe-link
. The first two
should be self-explanatory. nil
or :probe
means that this is a
“probe” opening; no data are to be transferred, the file is being opened
only to verify its existence or access its properties. The stream
created in this case does not permit any I/O. nil
and :probe
differ in causing different defaults for the argument if-does-not-exist.
If that argument is specified explicitly, nil
and :probe
are equivalent.
:probe-directory
is used to see whether a directory exists. If the
directory specified for the file to be opened is found, then the
open
completes (returning a non-I/O stream) as if the specified file
existed whether it really exists or not.
:probe-link
is used to find out the truename of a link. If the file
specified exists as a link, then the open
completes returning a
non-I/O stream which describes the link itself rather than the file
linked to. If the file exists and is not a link, the open
also
completes for it as with any probe.
Common Lisp defines the value :io
for this argument, requesting a stream
that can do input and output, but no file system
supported by the Lisp Machine has this capability.
The possible values are t
(the default), nil
, which means that the
file is a binary file, and :default
, which means that the file system should
decide whether the file contains characters or binary data and open it in the
appropriate mode.
The possible values are nil
(the default), a number, which is the number
of bits per byte, and :default
, which means that the file system should
choose the byte size based on attributes of the file. If the file is being
opened as characters, nil
selects the appropriate system-dependent byte
size for text files; it is usually not useful to use a different byte size.
If the file is being opened as binary, nil
selects the default byte size
of 16 bits.
This is the Common Lisp way to specify what kind of objects the stream wants to read or write. This combines the effect of the characters and byte-size arguments. The value is a type specifier; it must be one of the following:
string-char
Read or write characters as usual. The default.
character
Read or write characters, dealing with characters that are more than 8 bits. You can succeed in writing out any sequence of character objects and reading it back, but the file does not look anything like a text file.
(unsigned-byte n)
Read or write n-bit bytes.
Like characters = nil
, byte-size = n.
unsigned-byte
Similar, but uses the byte size that the file was originally written with.
This is the same as characters = nil
, byte-size = :default
.
(signed-byte n)
Read or write n-bit bytes, sign-extending on input. Each byte read from the file is sign-extended so that its most significant bit serves as a sign bit.
signed-byte
Similar, but uses the byte size that the file was originally written with.
(mod n)
Like unsigned-byte
for a big enough byte size to hold all numbers
less than n. bit
is also accepted, and means (mod 2)
.
:default
Is allowed, even though it is not a type specifier.
It is the same as using :default
as the value of characters.
For output opens, if-exists specifies what to do if a file with the specified name already exists. There are several values you can use:
:new-version
Create a new version. This makes sense only when the pathname has
:newest
as its version, and it is the default in that case.
:supersede
Make a new file which, when closed, replaces the old one.
:overwrite
Write over the data of the existing file, starting at the beginning, and set the file’s length to the length of the newly written data.
:truncate
Like :overwrite
except that it discards the old contents
of the file immediately, making it empty except for what is written into
it this time.
:append
Add new data onto the existing file at the end.
:rename
Rename the existing file and then create a new one.
:rename-and-delete
Rename the existing file, create a new one, and delete the old file when the new one is closed.
:error
Signal an error (fs:file-already-exists
).
This is the default when the pathname’s version is not :newest
.
The further handling of the error is controlled by the error argument.
nil
Return nil
from open
in this case.
The error argument is irrelevant in this case.
Specifies what to do when the file requested does not exist. There are three allowed values:
:create
Create a file. This is the default for output opens, except when if-exists
is :append
, :overwrite
or :truncate
. This silly exception
is part of the Common Lisp specifications.
:error
Signal an error. This is the default for input opens,
and also for output opens when if-exists is :append
, :overwrite
or :truncate
.
The further handling of the error is controlled by the error argument.
nil
Return nil
from open
. This is the default for :probe
opens.
The error argument is irrelevant in this case.
Specifies what to do if an error is signaled for any reason.
(Note that the values of the if-exists and if-does-not-exist arguments
control whether an error is signaled in certain circumstances.)
The possible values are t
(the default), :reprompt
and nil
.
t
means that nothing special is done, so the error invokes the
debugger if the caller does not handle it. nil
means that the
condition object should be returned as the value of open
. :reprompt
means that a new file name should be read and opened.
Any caller which need not know reliably which file was ultimately opened
might as well specify :reprompt
for this argument. Callers which
need to know if a different file is substituted should never specify
:reprompt
; they may use with-open-file-retry
or
file-retry-new-pathname
(see file-retry-new-pathname-fun) if they
wish to permit an alternative file name to be substituted.
If specified as t
when opening a file for output, the file is
submitted as a batch job if it is closed normally. The default is
nil
. You must specify :direction
:output
as well.
The default is nil
. If t
is specified, and the file system has the
concept of deleted but not expunged files, it is possible to open a deleted
file. Otherwise deleted files are invisible.
If t
is specified, the file is marked as
temporary, if the file system has that concept. The default is nil
.
If t
is specified, the file’s reference and
modification dates are not updated. The default is nil
.
This controls the kind of file to be opened. The default is nil
, a
normal file. Other possible values are :directory
and :link
.
Only certain file systems recognize this keyword.
When creating a file with flavor :link
, this argument must be
specified; its value is a pathname or namestring that becomes the target of the link.
The value can be either nil
(the default) or t
.
If the value is t
, and the :direction
is :output
, the
resulting file will be submitted as a batch job.
Currently, this option is implemented only for Twenex and VMS.
The value may be nil
(the default), which means there is no estimated
size, or a number of bytes. Some file systems use this to optimize disk
allocation.
The value may be nil
(the default), or a string that is the name
of a physical volume on which the file is to be stored. This is not meaningful
for all file systems.
The value may be nil
(the default), or a string that is the name
of a logical volume on which the file is to be stored. This is not meaningful
for all file systems.
The value may be nil
(the default), or t
, which
disables the special treatment of rubout in ASCII files. Normally, rubout is
an escape which causes the following character to be interpreted specially,
allowing all characters from 0 through 376 (octal) to be stored. This applies to
ASCII file servers only.
The value may be nil
(the default), or t
, which
disables all character set translation in ASCII files. This applies to ASCII
file servers only.
In the Maclisp compatibility mode, there is only one option, and it is either a symbol or a list of symbols. These symbols are recognized no matter what package they are in, since Maclisp does not have packages. The following symbols are recognized:
in, read
Select opening for input (the default).
out, write, print
Select opening for output; a new file is to be created.
binary, fixnum
Select binary mode; otherwise character mode is used. Note that fixnum mode uses 16-bit binary words and is not compatible with Maclisp fixnum mode, which uses 36-bit words. On the PDP-10, fixnum files are stored with two 16-bit words per PDP-10 word, left-justified and in PDP-10 byte order.
character, ascii
The opposite of fixnum. This is the default.
single, block
Ignored for compatibility with the Maclisp open
function.
byte-size
Must be followed by a number in the options list, and must be used in combination
with fixnum
. The number is the number of bits per byte, which can be from
1 to 16. On a PDP-10 file server these bytes will be packed into words in the
standard way defined by the ILDB
instruction. The :tyi
stream operation
will (of course) return the bytes one at a time.
probe, error, noerror, raw, super-image, deleted, temporary
These are not available in Maclisp. The corresponding keywords in the normal form of file-opening options are preferred over these.
The following functions and operations may be used on file streams, in addition to the normal I/O operations which work on all streams. Note that several of these operations are useful with file streams that have been closed. Some operations use pathnames; refer to pathname for an explanation of pathnames.
Returns the length of the file open on file-stream, in terms of the units in which I/O is being done on that stream. (A stream is needed, rather than just a pathname, in order to specify the units.)
With one argument, returns the current position in the file of file-stream,
using the :read-pointer
stream operation. It may return nil
meaning that
the position cannot be determined. In fact, it always returns nil
for a stream open in character mode and not at the beginning of the file.
With two arguments, sets the position using the :set-pointer
stream
operation, if possible, and returns t
if the setting was possible
and nil
if not. You can specify :start
as the new-position
to position to the beginning of the file, or :end
to position to the
end.
"file
: streams" :pathname ¶Returns the pathname that was opened to get this stream. This may not be
identical to the argument to open
, since missing components will have been
filled in from defaults. The pathname may have been replaced wholesale if
an error occurred in the attempt to open the original pathname.
"file
: streams" :truename ¶Returns the pathname of the file actually open on this stream. This can be
different from what :pathname
returns because of file links, logical
devices, mapping of version :newest
to a particular version number, etc. For
an output stream the truename is not meaningful until after the stream has been
closed, at least when the file server is an ITS.
"file
: streams" :generic-pathname ¶Returns the generic pathname of the pathname that was opened to get this
stream. Normally this is the same as the result of sending the
:generic-pathname
message to the value of the :pathname
operation on the stream; however, it does special things when the Lisp
system is bootstrapping itself.
"file
: streams" :qfaslp ¶Returns t
if the file has a magic flag at the front that says it is a QFASL file,
nil
if it is an ordinary file.
"file
: streams" :length ¶Returns the length of the file, in bytes or characters. For text files on ASCII file servers, this is the number of ASCII characters, not Lisp Machine characters. The numbers are different because of character-set translation; see character-set-differences for a full explanation. For an output stream the length is not meaningful until after the stream has been closed, at least when the file server is an ITS.
"file
: streams" :creation-date ¶Returns the creation date of the file, as a number that is a universal time. See the chapter on the time package (time).
"file
: streams" :info ¶Returns a cons of the file’s truename and its creation date. This can
be used to tell if the file has been modified between two open
’s.
For an output stream the information is not guaranteed to be correct
until after the stream has been closed.
"file
: streams" :properties &optional (error-p t
) ¶This returns two values: a property list (like an element of the list
returned by fs:directory-list
), and a list of the settable
properties. See the section on standard file properties (directory-list) for a
description of the ones that may possible found in the list.
"file
: streams" :set-byte-size new-byte-size ¶This is only allowed on binary file streams. The byte size can be changed to any number of bits from 1 to 16.
"file
: streams" :delete &optional (error-p t
) ¶Deletes the file open on this stream. For the meaning of error-p, see the deletef
function. The file doesn’t really go away until the stream is closed.
"file
: streams" :undelete &optional (error-p t
) ¶If you have used the :deleted
option in open
to open a deleted
file, this operation undeletes the file.
"file
: streams" :rename new-name &optional (error-p t
) ¶Renames the file open on this stream. For the meaning of error-p, see the renamef
function.
File output streams implement the :finish
and :force-output
operations.
This section describes functions for doing things to files aside from reading or writing their contents.
Returns the truename of the file specified somehow by object. If
object is a plausible stream, it is asked for the truename with the
:truename
operation. Otherwise, object is converted to a
pathname and that pathname is opened to get its file’s truename.
t
) query? ¶t
) query? ¶Both delete the specified file. The two functions differ in accepting keyword arguments versus positional arguments. file may contain wildcard characters, in which case multiple files are deleted.
If query? is non-nil
, the user is queried about each file
(whether there are wildcards or not). Only the files that the user
confirms are actually deleted.
If error-p is t
, then if an error occurs it is signaled as
a Lisp error. If error-p is nil
and an error occurs, the error
message is returned as a condition object. Otherwise, the value is a list of
elements, one for each file considered. The car of each element is
the truename of the file, and the cadr is non-nil
if the file
was actually deleted (it is always t
unless querying was done).
t
) query? ¶t
) query? ¶Both undelete the specified file. Wildcards are allowed, just as in
deletef
. The rest of the calling conventions are the same as well.
The two functions differ in taking keyword arguments versus positional
arguments.
Not all file systems support undeletion, and if it is not supported on
the one you are using, it gets an error or returns a string according to
error-p. To find out whether a particular file system supports
this, send the :undeletable-p
operation to a pathname. If it
returns t
, the file system of that pathname supports undeletion.
t
) query? ¶t
) query? ¶Both rename the specified file to new-name (a pathname or string).
The two functions differ in taking keyword arguments versus positional
arguments. file may contain wildcards, in which case multiple files
are renamed. Each file’s new name is produced by passing new-name
to merge-pathname-defaults
with the file’s truename as the defaults.
Therefore, new-name should be a string in this case.
If query? is non-nil
, the user is queried about each file
(whether there are wildcards or not). Only the files that the user
confirms are actually renamed.
If error-p is t
, then if an error occurs it is signaled as
a Lisp error. If error-p is nil
and an error occurs, the error
message is returned as a condition object. Otherwise, the value is a list of
elements, one for each file considered. The car of each element is
the original truename of the file, the cadr is the name it was to be
renamed to, and the caddr is non-nil
if the file was renamed.
The caddr is nil
if the user was queried and said no.
t
) (copy-creation-date t
) (copy-author t
) report-stream (create-directories :query
) (characters :default
) (byte-size :default
) ¶Copies the file specified by file to the name new-name.
characters and byte-size specify what mode of I/O to use to transfer the data. characters can be
t
to specify character input and output.
nil
for binary input and output,
:ask
meaning ask the user which one
:maybe-ask
meaning ask if it is not possible to tell with certainty which method is best,
:default
meaning to guess as well as possible automatically.
If binary transfer is done, byte-size specifies the byte size to
use; :default
means to ask the file system for the byte size that
the old file is stored in, just as it does in open
.
copy-author and copy-creation-date say whether to set those properties of the new file to be the same as those of the old file. If a property is not copied, it is set to your login name or the current date and time.
report-stream, if non-nil
, is a stream on which a message should
be printed describing the file copied, where it is copied to, and which
mode was used.
create-directories says what to do if the output filename specifies a directory that
does not exist. It can be t
meaning create the directory, nil
meaning treat it as
an error, or :query
meaning ask the user which one to do. The default is :query
.
error, if nil
, means that if an error happens then this function
should just return an error indication.
If the pathname to copy from contains wildcards, multiple files are
copied. The new name for each file is obtained by merging new-name
(parsed into a pathname) with that file’s truename as a default. The
mode of copy is determined for each file individually, and each copy is
reported on the report-stream if there is one. If error is nil
,
an error in copying one file does not prevent the others from being
copied.
There are four values. If wildcards were used, each value is a list with one element describing each file that matched; otherwise, each value describes the single file specified (though the value may be a list anyway). The values, for each file, are:
The defaulted pathname to be opened for output in copying this file.
The truename of the file copied
The truename of the new file, If the file was successfully copied.
A condition object, if there was an error and error was nil
.
nil
if the user was asked whether to copy this file and said no.
A Common Lisp type descriptor such as string-char
or (unsigned-byte 8)
saying how the file was copied.
Returns nil
if there is no file named file; otherwise returns a
pathname that is the true name of the file, which can be different from
file because of file links, version numbers, etc. If file is
a stream, this function cannot return nil
.
Any problem in opening the file except for fs:file-not-found
signals
an error.
probef
is the Maclisp name; probe-file
is the Common Lisp name.
Returns the creation date/time of file, as a universal time.
Returns the name of the author of file (the user who wrote it), as a string.
*standard-output*
) leader ¶Copies the contents of the specified file, opened in character
mode, onto output-stream
. Normally this has the effect of printing
the file on the terminal. leader is passed along to
stream-copy-until-eof
(see stream-copy-until-eof-fun).
t
) ¶Creates a link named link-name which points to a file named link-to. An error happens if the host specified in link-name does not support links, or for any of the usual problems that can happen in creating a file.
To load a file is to read through the file, evaluating each form
in it. Programs are typically stored in files; the expressions in the file are mostly
special forms such as defun
and defvar
which define the functions and
variables of the program.
Loading a compiled (or QFASL) file is similar, except that the file does not contain text but rather pre-digested expressions created by the compiler which can be loaded more quickly.
These functions are for loading single files. There is a system for keeping track of programs which consist of more than one file; for further information refer to system-system.
t
) set-default-pathname package ¶Loads the specified file into the Lisp environment. If
file is a stream, load
reads from it; otherwise file
is defaulted from the default pathname defaults and the result
specifies a file to be opened. If the file is a QFASL file, fasload
is used; otherwise readfile
is used. If file specifies a name
but no type, load
looks first for the canonical type :qfasl
and
then for the canonical type :lisp
.
Normally the file is read into the package specified in its attribute
list, but if package is supplied then the file is read in that
package. If package is nil
and verbose is nil
, load
prints a message saying what file is being loaded and what package is
being used. verbose defaults to the value of *load-verbose*
.
If if-does-not-exist is nil
, load
just returns nil
if no
file with the specified name exists. Error conditions other than
fs:file-not-found
are not handled by this option.
If a file is loaded, load
returns the file’s truename.
If print is non-nil
, the value of each expression evaluated from
the file is printed on *standard-output*
.
pathname is defaulted from the default pathname defaults. If
set-default-pathname is non-nil
, the pathname defaults are set
to the name of the file loaded. The default for
set-default-pathname is t
.
load
used to be called with a different calling sequence:
(load pathname pkg nonexistent-ok dont-set-default)
This calling sequence is detected and still works, but it is obsolete.
Is the default value for the verbose argument to load
.
readfile
is the version of load
for text files. It reads and evaluates
each expression in the file. As with load
, pkg can specify what package
to read the file into. Unless no-msg-p is t
, a message is printed
indicating what file is being read into what package.
fasload
is the version of load
for QFASL files. It defines
functions and performs other actions as directed by the specifications
inserted in the file by the compiler. As with load
, pkg can
specify what package to read the file into. Unless no-msg-p is
t
, a message is printed indicating what file is being read into what
package.
Here are the operations that access files. Many accept an argument
error or error-p which specifies whether to signal an error or
to return a condition instance, if the file cannot be accessed. For
these arguments, nil
and non-nil
are the only significant values.
:reprompt
has no special meaning as a value. That value when passed
to one of the file accessing functions (open
, deletef
, etc)
has its special significance at a higher level.
pathname
: :truename ¶Returns a pathname object describing the exact name of the file specified by the pathname the object is sent to.
This may be different from the original pathname. For example, the
original pathname may have :newest
as the version, but the truename
always has a number as the version if the file system supports versions.
pathname
: :open pathname &rest options ¶Opens a stream for the file named by the pathname.
The argument pathname is what the :pathname
operation on the
resulting stream should return. When a logical pathname is opened,
pathname is that logical pathname, but self
is
its translated pathname.
options is a list of alternating keywords and values, as would be
passed to open
. The old style of open
keywords are not allowed;
when they are used with open
, open
converts them to the new
style before sending the :open
message.
pathname
: :delete &optional (error-p t
) ¶pathname
: :undelete &optional (error-p t
) ¶Respectively delete or undelete the file specified by the pathname.
All file systems support :delete
but not all support :undelete
.
If error-p is nil
, problems such as nonexistent files cause a
string describing the problem to be returned. Otherwise, they signal an
error.
pathname
: :undeletable-p ¶Returns t
if this pathname is for a file system which allows
deletion to be undone. Such pathnames support the :undelete
and :expunge
operations.
pathname
: :rename new-name &optional (error-p t
) ¶Renames the file specified by the pathname. new-name, a string or
pathname, specifies the name to rename to. If it is a string, it is
parsed using self
as the defaults.
If error-p is nil
, problems such as nonexistent files cause a
string describing the problem to be returned. Otherwise, they signal an
error.
pathname
: :complete-string string options ¶Attempts to complete the filename string, returning the results.
This operation is used by the function fs:complete-pathname
(see
fs:complete-pathname-fun). The pathname the message is sent to is
used for defaults. options is a list whose elements may include
:deleted
, :read
(file is for input), :write
(it’s for
output), :old
(only existing files allowed), or :new-ok
(new files
are allowed too).
There are two values: a string, which is the completion as far as possible,
and a flag, which can be :old
, :new
or nil
.
:old
says that the returned string names an existing file,
:new
says that the returned string is no file but some completion was done,
nil
says that no completion was possible.
pathname
: :change-properties error-p &rest properties ¶Changes the properties of the file specified by the pathname. properties should be an alternating list of property names and values.
pathname
: :directory-list options ¶Performs the work of (fs:directory-list this-pathname options...)
.
pathname
: :properties ¶Returns a property list (in the form of a directory-list element) and a list of settable properties. See directory-list for more information on file properties.
pathname
: :wildcard-map function plistp dir-list-options &rest args ¶Maps function over all the files specified by this pathname (which may contain wildcards). Each time function is called, its first argument is a pathname with no wildcards, or else a directory-list element (whose car is a pathname and whose cdr contains property names and values). The elements of args are given to function as additional arguments.
plistp says whether function’s first argument should be a
directory-list element or just a pathname. t
specifies a
directory-list element. That provides more information, but it makes it
necessary to do extra work if the specified pathname does not
contain wildcards.
dir-list-options is passed to fs:directory-list
. You can use this
to get deleted files mentioned in the list, for example.
The remaining file-access operations are defined only on certain file systems.
pathname
: :expunge &key (error t
) ¶Expunges the directory specified by the host, device and directory components of the pathname.
The argument error says whether to signal an error if the directory
does not exist. nil
means just return a string instead.
pathname
: :create-directory &key (error t
) ¶Creates the directory specified in this pathname.
pathname
: :remote-connect &key (error t
) access ¶Performs the work of fs:remote-connect
with the same arguments
on this pathname’s host.
Any text file can contain an attribute list that specifies several attributes of the file. The above loading functions, the compiler, and the editor look at this property list. Attribute lists are especially useful in program source files, i.e a file that is intended to be loaded (or compiled and then loaded). QFASL files also contain attribute lists, copied from their source files.
If the first non-blank line in a text file contains the three characters
‘-*-
’,
some text, and ‘-*-
’ again, the text is recognized as the file’s attribute list.
Each attribute consists of the attribute name, a colon, and the attribute value.
If there is more than one attribute they are separated by semicolons. An example
of such an attribute list is:
; -*- Mode:Lisp; Package:Cellophane; Base:10 -*-
This defines three attributes: mode, package, and base. The initial semicolon makes the line look like a comment rather than a Lisp expression. Another example is:
c Part of the Lisp Machine manual. -*- Mode:Bolio -*-
An attribute name is made up of letters, numbers, and otherwise-undefined punctuation characters such as hyphens. An attribute value can be such a name, or a decimal number, or several such items separated by commas. Spaces may be used freely to separate tokens. Upper and lower-case letters are not distinguished. There is no quoting convention for special characters such as colons and semicolons.
If the attribute list text contains no colons, it is an old Emacs
format, containing only the value of the Mode
attribute.
The file attribute list format actually has nothing to do with Lisp; it
is just a convention for placing some information into a file that is
easy for a program to interpret. The Emacs editor on the PDP-10 knows
how to interpret these attribute lists (primarily in order to look at the
Mode
attribute).
The Lisp Machine handles the attribute list stored in the file by parsing it into a Lisp data structure, a property list. Attribute names are interpreted as Lisp symbols and are interned on the keyword package. Numbers are interpreted as Lisp fixnums and are read in decimal. If a attribute value contains any commas, then the commas separate several expressions that are formed into a list.
When a file is compiled, its attribute list data structure is stored in the QFASL file. It can be loaded back from the QFASL file as well. The representation in the QFASL file resembles nothing described here, but when the attribute list is extracted from there, the same Lisp data structure described above is obtained.
When a file is edited, loaded, or compiled, its file attribute list is
read in and the properties are stored on the property list of the
generic pathname (see generic-pathname) for that file, where they can
be retrieved with the :get
and :plist
messages. This is done
using the function fs:read-attribute-list
, below. So the way you
examine the properties of a file is usually to use messages to a
pathname object that represents the generic pathname of a file. Note
that there are other properties there, too.
Here the attribute names with standard meanings:
The editor major mode to be used when editing this file. This is typically
the name of the language in which the file is written. The most common values
are Lisp
and Text
.
This attribute specifies the package in which symbols in the file should
be interned. The attribute may be either the name of a package, or a
list that specifies both the package name and how to create the package
if it does not exist. If it is a list, it should look like
(name superpackage initial-size ...options...)
. See package
for more information about packages.
The number base in which the file is written (remember, it is
always parsed in decimal). This affects both *read-base*
and *print-base*
,
since it is confusing to have the input and output bases be different.
The most common values are 8 and 10.
The value specifies the syntax (that is, the choice of readtable)
to use for reading Lisp objects from this file.
The defined values are t
or traditional
for traditional
Lisp Machine syntax, and cl
or common-lisp
for Common Lisp syntax.
If you do not specify this option, the objects in the file are read
using whatever readtable is current in the program that reads them.
If the attribute value is not nil
, the file is written in lower-case letters
and the editor does not translate to upper case. (The editor does not translate
to upper case by default unless the user enables Electric Shift Lock mode.)
The attribute value is a list of font names, separated by commas. The editor
uses this for files that are to be displayed in a specific font, or
contain multiple fonts. If this attribute is present,
the file is actually stored in the file system with font-change indicators.
A font-change indicator is an epsilon (epsilon
) followed by a digit or *
.
epsilon
n means to enter font n. The previous font is saved on a stack
and epsilon
* means to pop the stack, returning to the previous font.
If the file includes an epsilon as part of its contents, it is stored as
epsilonepsilon
.
When expressions are read from such files, font-change indicators
are ignored, and epsilonepsilon
is treated as a single epsilon
.
If the attribute value is not nil
, Overstrike
characters in the
file should cause characters to overprint on each other. The default is
to disallow overprinting and display Overstrike
the way other
special function keys are displayed. This default is to prevent the
confusion that can be engendered by overstruck text.
If the attribute value is not nil
, the file is a patch file. When it is loaded
the system will not complain about function redefinitions. In a patch
file, the defvar
special-form turns into defconst
; thus patch files
always reinitialize variables. Patch files are usually created by special
editor commands described in patch-facility.
A non-nil
value for this attribute identifies files that are part of
the cold load, the core from which a new system version is built.
Certain features that do not work in the cold load check this flag to
give an error or a compiler warning if used in such files, so that the
problem can be detected sooner.
You are free to define additional file attributes of your own. However, to avoid accidental name conflicts, you should choose names that are different from all the names above, and from any names likely to be defined by anybody else’s programs.
The following functions are used to examine file attribute lists:
Returns the attribute list of the file specified by the pathname. This works on both text files and QFASL files.
Returns the attribute list read from the specified stream, which should
be pointing to the beginning of a file. This
works on both text streams and QFASL file binary streams.
After the attribute list is read, the stream’s pointer is set back to
the beginning of the file using the :set-pointer
file
stream operation (see streams-set-pointer-method).
pathname should be a pathname object (not a string or namelist, but an actual pathname); usually it is a generic pathname (see generic-pathname). stream should be a stream that has been opened and is pointing to the beginning of the file whose file attribute list is to be parsed. The attribute list is read from the stream and then corresponding properties are placed on the specified pathname. The attribute list is also returned.
The fundamental way that programs in the Lisp Machine notice the
presence of properties on a file’s attribute list is by examining the
property list in the generic pathname. However, there is another way
that is more convenient for some applications. File attributes can
cause special variables to be bound whenever Lisp expressions are being
read from the file–when the file is being loaded, when it is being
compiled, when it is being read from by the editor, and when its QFASL
file is being loaded. This is how the Package
and Base
attributes work.
You can also deal with attributes this way, by using the following function:
Returns values describing the special variables that should be bound
before reading expressions from file pathname.
It examines the property list of pathname and finds all
those property names that have fs:file-attribute-bindings
properties.
Each such property name specifies a set of variables to bind and
a set of values to which to bind them. This function returns two values,
a list of all the variables and a list of all the corresponding values.
Usually you use this function by calling it on a generic pathname
that has had fs:read-attribute-list
done on it, and then
you use the two returned values as the first two arguments of a
progv
special form (see progv-fun). Inside the body of the progv
the
specified bindings will be in effect.
pathname may be anything acceptable as the first argument of get
.
Usually it is a generic pathname.
Of the standard attribute names, the following ones have
fs:file-attribute-bindings
, with the following effects. Package
binds the variable package
(see package-var) to the package.
Base
binds the variables *print-base*
(see base-var) and *read-base*
(see ibase-var) to the value. Readtable
binds the variable readtable
to a value computed from the specified attribute. Patch-file
binds
fs:this-is-a-patch-file
to the value. Cold-load
binds
si:file-in-cold-load
to the value. Fonts
binds
si:read-discard-font-changes
to t
.
Any properties whose names do not have fs:file-attribute-bindings
properties are ignored completely.
You can also add your own attribute names that affect bindings. If
an indicator symbol has an fs:file-attribute-bindings
property, the
value of that property is a function that is called when a file with a
file attribute of that name is going to be read from. The function is
given three arguments: the file pathname, the attribute name, and the
attribute value. It must return two values: a list of variables to be
bound and a list of values to bind them to. The function for the
Base
keyword could have been defined by:
(defun (:base file-attribute-bindings) (file ignore bse) (if (not (and (typep bse 'fixnum) (> bse 1) (< bse 37.))) (ferror 'fs:invalid-file-attrbute "File ~A has an illegal -*- Base:~D -*-" file bse)) (values (list 'base 'ibase) (list bse bse)))
Returns two values: a list of variables, and a corresponding list of values to bind them to, giving the attribute bindings of the attribute list found on stream
fs:invalid-file-attribute
: (error
) ¶An attribute in the file attribute list had a bad value. This is detected within
fs:file-attribute-bindings
.
To understand the functions in this section, it is vital to have read
the chapter on pathnames. The filespec argument in many of
these functions may be a pathname or a namestring; its name, type and
version default to :wild
.
Prints on *standard-output*
the names of the files that match
filespec, and their sizes, creation dates, and other information
that comes in the directory listing.
Finds all the files that match filespec and returns a list with one
element for each file. Each element is a list whose car is the pathname
of the file and whose cdr is a list of the properties of the file; thus the element
is a disembodied property list and get
may be used to access the file’s
properties. The car of one element is nil
; the properties in this element
are properties of the file system as a whole rather than of a specific file.
filespec normally contains wildcards, and the data returned describe all existing files that match it. If it contains no wildcards, it specifies a single file and only that file is described in the data that are returned.
The options are keywords which modify the operation. The following options are currently defined:
:noerror
¶If a file-system error (such as no such directory) occurs during the operation,
normally an error is signaled and the user is asked to supply a new pathname.
However, if :noerror
is specified then, in the event of an error,
a condition object describing the error is returned as the result of fs:directory-list
.
This is identical to the :noerror
option to open
.
:deleted
¶This is for file servers on which deletion is not permanent. It specifies that deleted (but not yet expunged) files are to be included in the directory listing.
:sorted
¶This requests that the directory list be sorted by filenames before it is returned.
The properties that may appear in the list of property lists returned by
fs:directory-list
are host-dependent to some extent. The following
properties are those that are defined for both ITS and TOPS-20 file servers. This set of
properties is likely to be extended or changed in the future.
:length-in-bytes
The length of the file expressed in terms of the basic units in which it is written (characters in the case of a text file).
:byte-size
The number of bits in one of those units.
:length-in-blocks
The length of the file in terms of the file system’s unit of storage allocation.
:block-size
The number of bits in one of those units.
:creation-date
The date the file was created, as a universal time. See time.
:reference-date
The most recent date on which the file was used, as a universal time or
nil
, meaning the file was never referenced.
:modification-date
The most recent date on which the file’s contents were changed, as a universal time.
:author
The name of the person who created the file, as a string.
:reader
The name of the person who last read the file, as a string.
:not-backed-up
t
if the file exists only on disk, nil
if it has been backed up on magnetic tape.
:directory
t
if this file is actually a directory.
:temporary
t
if this file is temporary.
:deleted
t
if this file is deleted. Deleted files are included in the
directory list only if you specify the :deleted
option.
:dont-delete
t
indicates that the file is not allowed to be deleted.
:dont-supersede
t
indicates that the file may not be superseded; that is, a file
with the same name and higher version may not be created.
:dont-reap
t
indicates that this file is not supposed to be deleted
automatically for lack of use.
:dont-dump
t
indicates that this file is not supposed to be dumped onto
magnetic tape for backup purposes.
:characters
t
indicates that this file contains characters (that is, text).
nil
indicates that the file contains binary data.
This property, rather than the file’s byte size, should be used to
decide whether it is a text file.
:link-to
If the file is a link, this property is a string containing the name that the link points to.
:offline
T
if the file’s contents are not online.
:incremental-dump-date
The last time this file was dumped during an incremental dump (a universal time).
:incremental-dump-tape
The tape on which the last was saved in that incremental dump (a string).
:complete-dump-date
The last time this file was dumped during an full dump (a universal time).
:complete-dump-tape
The tape on which the last was saved in that full dump (a string).
:generation-retention-count
The number of files differing in version that are kept around.
:default-generation-retention-count
The generation-retention-count that a file ordinarily gets when it is created in this directory.
:auto-expunge-interval
The interval at which files are expunged from this directory, in seconds.
:date-last-expunged
The last (universal) time this directory was expunged, or nil
.
:account
The account to which the file belongs, a string.
:protection
A system-dependent description of the protection of this file as a string.
:physical-volume
A string naming the physical volume on which the file is found.
:volume-name
A string naming the logical volume on which the file is found.
:pack-number
A string describing the pack on which this file is found.
:disk-space-description
A system-dependent description of the space usage on the file system. This usually appears in the plist that applies to the entire directory list.
The element in the directory list that has nil
instead of a file’s
pathname describes the directory as a whole.
:physical-volume-free-blocks
This property is an alist in which each element maps a physical volume name (a string) into a number, that is the number of free blocks on that volume.
:settable-properties
This property is a list of file property names that may be set. This information is provided in the directory list because it is different for different file systems.
:pathname
This property is the pathname from which this directory list was made.
:block-size
This is the number of words in a block in this directory. It can be used to interpret the numbers of free blocks.
This is like fs:directory-list
but returns the information in a
different form. Instead of returning the directory list all at once, it
returns a special kind of stream which gives out one element of the
directory list at a time.
The directory list stream supports two operations: :entry
and
:close
. :entry
asks for the next element of the directory
stream. :close
closes any connection to a remote file server.
The purpose of using fs:directory-list-stream
instead of
fs:directory-list
is that, when communicating with a remote file
server, the directory list stream can give you some of the
information without waiting for it to all be transmitted and parsed.
This is desirable if the directory is being printed on the console.
Returns a list of pathnames (truenames) of the files in the directory specified by filespec. Wildcards are allowed. This is the Common Lisp way to find the contents of a directory.
t
) ¶Expunges the directory specified in filespec; that is, permanently
eliminates any deleted files in that directory. If error is nil
,
there is no error if the directory does not exist.
Note that not all file systems support this function. To find out
whether a particular one does, send the :undeletable-p
operation to
a pathname. If it returns t
, the file system of that pathname
supports undeletion (and therefore expunging).
t
) ¶Creates the directory specified in filespec.
If error is nil
, there is no error if the directory cannot be
created; instead an error string is returned.
Not all file servers support creation of directories.
t
) access ¶Performs the TOPS-20 “connect” or “access” function, or their
equivalents, in a remote file server. Access is done if
access is non-nil
; otherwise, connect is done.
The connect operation grants you full access to the specified directory. The access operation grants you whatever access to all files and directories you would have if logged in on the specified directory. Both operations affect access only, since the connected directory of the remote server is never used by the Lisp Machine in choosing which file to operate on.
This function may ask you for a password if one is required for the
directory you specify. If the operation cannot be performed, then if
error is nil
, an error object is returned.
File Properties:
Changes one or more properties of the
file file. The properties arguments are alternating keywords
and values. If an error occurs accessing the file or changing the
properties, the error-p argument controls what is done; if it is
nil
, a condition object describing the error is returned; if it is
t
a Lisp error is signaled. If no error occurs,
fs:change-file-properties
returns t
.
Only some of the properties of a file may be changed; for instance,
its creation date or its author. Exactly which properties may be
changed depends on the host file system; a list of the changeable
property names is the :settable-properties
property of the file
system as a whole, returned by fs:directory-list
as explained
above.
t
) ¶Returns a disembodied property list for a single file (compare this to
fs:directory-list
). The car of the returned list is the truename of
the file and the cdr is an alternating list of indicators and values.
The error-p argument is the same as in fs:change-file-properties
.
string is a partially-specified file name. (Presumably it was typed in by a user
and terminated with the Altmode
key or the End
key to request completion.)
fs:complete-pathname
looks in the file system on the appropriate host and
returns a new, possibly more specific string. Any unambiguous abbreviations
are expanded out in a host-dependent fashion.
defaults, type, and version are the arguments to be given to
fs:merge-pathname-defaults
(see fs:merge-pathname-defaults-fun) when the
user’s input is eventually parsed and defaulted.
options are keywords (without following values) that control how the completion is performed. The following option keywords are allowed:
:deleted
Looks for files which have been deleted but not yet expunged.
:read or :in
¶The file is going to be read. This is the default.
:print or :write or :out
¶The file is going to be written (i.e a new version is going to be created).
:old
Looks only for files that already exist. This is the default.
:new-ok
Allows either a file that already exists or a file that does not yet exist.
An example of the use of this is the C-X
C-F
(Find File) command in the editor.
The first value returned is always a string containing a file name, either the
original string or a new, more specific string. The second value returned
indicates the success or failure of the completion. It is nil
if an
error occurred. One possible error is that the file is on a file system that
does not support completion, in which case the original string is returned
unchanged. Other possible second values are :old
, which means that the
string completed to the name of a file that exists, :new
, which means that
the string completed to the name of a file that could be created, and nil
again, which means that there is no possible completion.
fs:balance-directories
is a function for maintaining multiple copies
of a directory. Often it is useful to maintain copies of your files on
more than one machine; this function provides a simple way of keeping
those copies up to date.
The function first parses filespec1, filling in missing components
with wildcards (except for the version, which is :newest
). Then
filespec2 is parsed with filespec1 as the default. The
resulting pathnames are used to generate directory lists using
fs:directory-list
. Note that the resulting directory lists need not
be entire directories; any subset of a directory that
fs:directory-list
can produce will do.
First the directory lists are matched up on the basis of file name and type. All of the files in either directory list which have both the same name and the same type are grouped together.
The directory lists are next analyzed to determine if the directories are consistent, meaning that two files with the same name and type have equal creation-dates when their versions match, and greater versions have later creation-dates. If any inconsistencies are found, a warning message is printed on the console.
If the version specified for both filespec1 and filespec2 was
:newest
(the default), then the newest version of each file in each
directory is copied to the other directory if it is not already
there. The result is that each directory has the newest copy
of every file in either of the two directories.
If one or both of the specified versions is not :newest
, then every
version that appears in one directory list and not in the other is
copied. This has the result that the two directories are completely the
same. (Note that this is probably not the right thing to use to
copy an entire directory. Use copy-file
with a wildcard
argument instead.)
The options are keywords arguments which modify the operation. The following options are currently defined:
:ignore
¶This option takes one argument, which is a list of file names to ignore
when making the directory lists. The default value is nil
.
:error
¶This option is identical to the :error
option to open
.
:query-mode
¶This option takes one argument, which indicates whether or not the user
should be asked before files are transferred. If the argument is
nil
, no querying is done. If it is :1->2
, then only files
being transferred from filespec2 to filespec1 are queried,
while if it is :2->1
, then files transferred from filespec1 to
filespec2 are queried. If the argument is :always
, then
the user is asked about all files.
:copy-mode
¶This option is identical to the :copy-mode
option of copy-file
,
and is used to control whether files are treated as binary or textual
data.
:direction
This option specifies transfer of files in one direction only.
If the value is :1->2
then files are transfered only from filespec1
to filespec2, never in the other direction. If the value is
:2->1
then files are transferred only from filespec2 to
filespec1. nil
, the default, means transfer in either direction
as appropriate.
fs:file-error
: (error
) ¶This flavor is the basis for all errors signaled by the file system.
It defines two special operations, :pathname
and :operation
.
Usually, these return the pathname of the file being operated on, and
the operation used. This operation was performed either on the pathname
object itself, or on a stream.
It defines prompting for the proceed types :retry-file-operation
and
:new-pathname
, both of which are provided for many file errors.
:retry-file-operation
tries the operation again exactly as it was
requested by the program; :new-pathname
expects on argument, a
pathname, and tries the same operation on this pathname instead of the
original one.
fs:file-operation-failure
: (fs:file-error
) ¶This condition name signifies a problem with the file operation
requested. It is an alternative to fs:file-request-failure
(file-request-failure-page), which means that the file system
was unable to consider the operation properly.
All the following conditions in this section are always accompanied by
fs:file-operation-failure
, fs:file-error
, and error
, so they
will not be mentioned.
: fs:file-open-for-output ¶The request cannot be performed because the file is open for output.
: fs:file-locked ¶The file cannot be accessed because it is already being accessed. Just which kinds of simultaneous access are allowed depends on the file system.
: fs:circular-link ¶A link could not be opened because it pointed, directly or indirectly through other links, to itself. In fact, some systems report this condition whenever a chain of links exceeds a fixed length.
: fs:invalid-byte-size ¶In open
, the specified byte size was not valid for the particular
file server or file.
: fs:no-more-room ¶Processing a request requires resources not available, such as space in a directory, or free disk blocks.
: fs:filepos-out-of-range ¶The :set-pointer
operation was used with a pointer value outside the bounds of the file.
: fs:not-available ¶A requested pack, file, etc. exists but is currently off line or not available to users.
: fs:file-lookup-error ¶This condition name categorizes all sorts of failure to find a specified file, for any operation.
fs:device-not-found
: (fs:file-lookup-error
) ¶The specified device does not exist.
fs:directory-not-found
: (fs:file-lookup-error
) ¶The specified directory does not exist.
fs:file-not-found
: (fs:file-lookup-error
) ¶There is no file with the specified name, type and version. This implies that the device and directory do exist, or one of the errors described above would have been signaled.
fs:multiple-file-not-found
: (fs:file-lookup-error
) ¶There is no file with the specified name and any of the
specified types, in with-open-file-search
.
Three special operations are defined:
:operation
Returns the function which used with-open-file-search
, such as load
.
:pathname
The base pathname used.
:pathnames
A list of all the pathnames that were looked for.
fs:link-target-not-found
: (fs:file-lookup-error
) ¶The file specified was a link, but the link’s target filename fails to be found.
: fs:access-error ¶The operation is possible, but the file server is insubordinate and refuses to obey you.
fs:incorrect-access-to-file
: (access-error
). ¶fs:incorrect-access-to-directory
: (access-error
). ¶The file server refuses to obey you because of protection attached to the file (or, the directory).
: fs:invalid-wildcard ¶A pathname had a wildcard in a place where the particular file server
does not support them. Such pathnames are not created by pathname
parsing, but they can be created with the :new-pathname
operation.
: fs:wildcard-not-allowed ¶A pathname with a wildcard was used in an operation that does not support it. For example, opening a file with a wildcard in its name.
: fs:wrong-kind-of-file ¶An operation was done on the wrong kind of file. If files and directories share one name space and it is an error to open a directory, the error possesses this condition name.
: fs:creation-failure ¶An attempt to create a file or directory failed for a reason specifically connected with creation.
fs:file-already-exists
: (fs:creation-failure
) ¶The file or directory to be created already exists.
fs:superior-not-directory
: (fs:creation-failure
fs:wrong-kind-of-file
) ¶In file systems where directories and files share one name space, this error results from an attempt to create a file using a filename specifying a directory whose name exists in the file system but is not a directory.
: fs:delete-failure ¶A file to be deleted exists, but for some reason cannot be deleted.
fs:directory-not-empty
: (fs:delete-failure
) ¶A file could not be deleted because it is a directory and has files in it.
fs:dont-delete-flag-set
: (fs:delete-failure
) ¶A file could not be deleted because its “don’t delete” flag is set.
: fs:rename-failure ¶A file to be renamed exists, but the renaming could not be done. The
:new-pathname
operation on the condition instance returns the
specified new pathname, which may be a pathname or a string.
fs:rename-to-existing-file
: (fs:rename-failure
) ¶Renaming cannot be done because there is already a file with the specified new name.
fs:rename-across-directories
: (fs:rename-failure
) ¶Renaming cannot be done because the new pathname contains a different device or directory from the one the file is on. This may not always be an error–some file systems support it in certain cases–but when it is an error, it has this condition name.
fs:unknown-property
: (fs:change-property-failure
) ¶A property name specified in a :change-properties
operation is not
supported by the file server. (Some file servers support only a fixed
set of property names.) The :property
operation on the condition
instance returns the problematical property name.
fs:invalid-property-value
: (fs:change-property-failure
) ¶In a :change-properties
operation, some property was given a value
that is not valid for it. The :property
operation on the
condition instance returns the property name, and the :value
operation returns the specified value.
fs:invalid-property-name
: (fs:change-property-failure
) ¶In a :change-properties
operation, a syntactically invalid property
name was specified. This may be because it is too long to be stored.
The :property
operation on the condition instance returns the
property name.
Files on remote file servers are accessed using file servers over the Chaosnet. Normally connections to servers are established automatically when you try to use them, but there are a few ways you can interact with them explicitly.
When characters are written to a file server computer that
normally uses the ASCII character set to store text, Lisp Machine
characters are mapped into an encoding that is reasonably close to an
ASCII transliteration of the text. When a file is written, the
characters are converted into this encoding; the inverse
transformation is done when a file is read back. No information is
lost. Note that the length of a file, in characters, is not the
same measured in original Lisp Machine characters as it is measured in
the encoded ASCII characters. In the currently implemented ASCII file
servers, the following encoding is used. All printing characters and
any characters not mentioned explicitly here are represented as
themselves. Codes 010 (lambda), 011 (gamma), 012 (delta), 014
(plus-minus), 015 (circle-plus), 177 (integral), 200 through 207
inclusive, 213 (Delete
), and 216 and anything higher, are preceded
by a 177; that is, 177 is used as a quoting character for these codes.
Codes 210 (Overstrike
), 211 (Tab
), 212 (Line
), and 214 (Page
), are
converted to their ASCII cognates, namely 010 (backspace), 011
(horizontal tab), 012 (line feed), and 014 (form feed) respectively.
Code 215 (Return
) is converted into 015 (carriage return) followed by
012 (line feed). Code 377 is ignored completely, and so cannot be
stored in files.
When a file server is first created for you on a particular host, you must tell the server how to log in on that host. This involves specifying a username, and, if the obstructionists are in control of your site, a password. The Lisp Machine prompts you for these on the terminal when they are needed.
Logging in a file server is not the same thing as logging in on the Lisp
Machine (see login
, login-fun). The latter identifies you as a
user in general and involves specifying one host, your login host. The
former identifies you to a particular file server host and must be done
for each host on which you access files. However, logging in on the
Lisp Machine does specify the username for your login host and logs in
a file server there.
The Lisp Machine uses your username (or the part that follows the last period) as a first guess for your password (this happens to take no extra time). If that does not work, you are asked to type a password, or else a username and a password, on the keyboard. You do not have to give the same user name that you are logged in as, since you may have or use different user names on different machines.
Once a password is recorded for one host, the system uses that password as the guess if you connect to a file server on another host.
This is an alist matching host names with the usernames you have specified on those hosts. Each element is the cons of a host object and the username, as a string.
For hosts running ITS, the symbol fs:its
is used instead of a
host object. This is because every user has the same username on all
ITS hosts.
Once you have specified a password for a given username and host, it is remembered for the duration of the session in this variable. The value is a list of elements, each of the form
((username hostname) password)
All three data are strings.
The remembered passwords are used if more than one file server is needed on the same host, or if the connection is broken and a new file server needs to be created.
If you are very scared of your password being known, you can turn off the recording by setting this variable:
Passwords are recorded when typed in if this variable is non-nil
.
You should set the variable at the front of your init file, and also set
fs:user-host-password-alist
to nil
, since it will already have
recorded your password when you logged in.
If you do not use a file server for a period of time, it is killed to save resources on the server host.
This is the length of time after which an idle file server connection should be closed, in 60ths of a second. The default is 20 minutes.
Some hosts have a caste system in which all users are not equal. It is sometimes necessary to enable one’s privileges in order to exercise them. This is done with these functions:
Enables the named capabilities on file servers for the specified host.
capabilities is a list of strings, whose meanings depend on the
particular file system that is available on host.
If capabilities is nil
, a default list of capabilities is
enabled; the default is also dependent on the operating system type.
Disables the named capabilities on file servers for the specified host.
capabilities is a list of strings, whose meanings depend on the
particular file system that is available on host.
If capabilities is nil
, a default list of capabilities is
disabled; the default is also dependent on the operating system type.
The PEEK utility has a mode that displays the status of all your file
connections, and of the host unit data structures that record them.
Clicking on a connection with the mouse gets a menu of operations, of
which the most interesting is reset
. Resetting a host unit may
be useful if the connection becomes hung.
fs:file-request-failure
: (fs:file-error
error
) ¶This condition name categorizes errors that prevent the file system from processing the request made by the program.
The following condition names are always accompanied by the more general
classifications fs:file-request-failure
, fs:file-error
, and error
.
: fs:data-error ¶This condition signifies inconsistent data found in the file system, indicating a failure in the file system software or hardware.
: fs:host-not-available ¶This condition signifies that the file server host is up, but refusing connections for file servers.
: fs:network-lossage ¶This condition signifies certain problems in the use of the Chaosnet by a file server, such as failure to open a data connection when it is expected.
: fs:not-enough-resources ¶This condition signifies a shortage of resources needed to consider processing a request, as opposed to resources used up by the request itself. This may include running out of network connections or job slots on the server host. It does not include running out of space in a directory or running out of disk space, because these are resources whose requirements come from processing the request.
: fs:unknown-operation ¶This condition signifies that the particular file system fails to implement a standardly defined operation; such as, expunging or undeletion on ITS.
The purpose of the basic software protocol of Chaosnet is to allow high-speed communication among processes on different machines, with no undetected transmission errors.
The principal service provided by Chaosnet is a connection between two user processes. This is a full-duplex reliable packet-transmission channel. The network undertakes never to garble, lose, duplicate, or resequence the packets; in the event of a serious error it may break the connection off entirely, informing both user processes. User programs may deal explicitly in terms of packets. They may also ignore packet boundaries and treat the connection as two uni-directional streams of 8-bit or 16-bit bytes, but this really works by means of packets.
If you just want to ask a question of another process or host and receive a reply, you can use a simple transaction: You send only one packet to the other host, and it sends one packet back. This is more efficient than establishing a connection and using it only briefly. In a simple transaction, the server cannot tell whether the user received the answer; and if the user does not receive the answer, it cannot tell whether the server received the question. In fact, the server might receive the question more than once. If this is unacceptable, a connection must be used.
Each node (or host) on the network is identified by an address,
which is a 16-bit number. These addresses are used in the routing of
packets. There is a table (the system host table, SYS: CHAOS; HOSTS
TXT
) that relates symbolic host names to numeric host addresses. The
host table can record addresses on any number of different networks, and
in certain contexts a host address is meaningful only together with the
name of the network it is for.
The data transmitted over connections are in units called packets. Each packet contains an 8-bit number, the opcode, which indicates what its function is. Opcode numbers are always given in octal. Opcodes less than 200 (octal) are special purpose. Each such opcode that is used has an assigned name and a specific function. Users need not know about all of them. Opcodes 200 through 277 (octal) are used for 8-bit user data. Opcodes 300 through 377 (octal) are used for 16-bit user data.
Each packet also contains some number of data bytes, whose meaning depends on the opcode. If the opcode is for user data, then it is up to the application user software to decide on the interpretation.
Establishing a connection:
A connection is created because one process sends a request to a host.
The request is a packet containing the special-purpose opcode RFC. The
data contains a contact name which is used to find the process to
connect to. There may be a process on the target host listening on
this contact name. If so, it decides whether to agree to the
connection. Alternatively, the contact name can be the name of a standard service
such as TELNET
. In this case, the receiving host creates a
process to respond, loaded with the program for that service.
Once a connection has been established, there is no more need for the contact name and it is discarded. The Lisp Machine remembers what contact name was used to open a connection, but this is only for the user’s information.
In the case where two existing processes that already know about each other want to establish a connection, they must agree on a contact name, and then one of them must send the request while the other listens. They must agree between themselves which is to do which.
Contact names are restricted to strings of upper-case letters, numbers, and ASCII punctuation. The maximum length of a contact name is limited only by the packet size, although on ITS hosts the names of automatically-started servers are limited by the file-system to six characters. The contact name is terminated by a space. If the RFC packet contains data beyond the contact name, it is just for interpretation by the listening process, which can also use it in deciding whether to accept the connection.
A simple transaction is also begun with an RFC packet. There is nothing in the RFC packet which indicates whether it is intended to start a connection or a simple transaction. The server has the option of doing either one. But normally any given server always does one or the other, and the requestor knows which one to expect.
The server accepts the request for a connection by sending an OPN packet (a packet with opcode OPN) to the requestor. It can also refuse the connection by sending a CLS packet. The data in the CLS packet is a string explaining the reason for the refusal. Another alternative is to tell the requestor to try a different host or a different contact name. This is called forwarding the request, and is done with a FWD packet.
The server can also respond with an answer, an ANS packet, which is the second half of a simple transaction. (Refusing and forwarding are also meaningful when a simple transaction is intended, just as when a connection is intended).
Once the connection is open:
Data transmitted through Chaosnet generally follow Lisp Machine standards. Bits and bytes are numbered from right to left, or least-significant to most-significant. The first 8-bit byte in a 16-bit word is the one in the arithmetically least-significant position. The first 16-bit word in a 32-bit double-word is the one in the arithmetically least-significant position. This is the “little-endian” convention.
Big-endian machines such as the PDP-10 need to reorder the characters in a word in order to access them conveniently. For their sake, some packet opcodes imply 8-bit data and some imply 16-bit data. Packets known to contain 8-bit bytes, including opcodes 200 through 277, are stored in the big-endian machine’s memory a character at a time, whereas packets containing 16-bit data are stored 16 bits at a time.
The character set used is dictated by the higher-level protocol in use. Telnet and Supdup, for example, each specifies its own ASCII-based character set. The default character set–used for new protocols and for text that appears in the basic Chaosnet protocol, such as contact names–is the Lisp Machine character set.
If one process tries to send data faster than the other can process it,
the buffered packets could devour lots of memory. Preventing this is
the purpose of flow control. Each process specifies a window
size, which is the number of packets that are allowed to be waiting
for that process to read. Attempting to send on a connection whose
other side’s window is full waits until the other side reads some
packets. The default window size is 13, but for some applications you
might wish to specify a larger value (see chaos:connect
,
chaos:connect-fun). There is little reason ever to
specify a smaller value.
Breaking a connection:
Either end of a connection can break the connection abruptly by sending a CLS packet. The data in this packet is a string describing why the connection was broken.
To break a connection gently, it is necessary to verify that all the data transmitted was received properly before sending a CLS. This matters in some applications and is unnecessary in others. When it is needed, it is done by sending a special packet, an EOF packet, which is mostly like a data packet except for its significance with regard to closing the connection. The EOF packet is like the words “the end” at the end of a book: it tells the recipient that it has received all the data it is supposed to receive, that there are no missing pages that should have followed. When the sender of the EOF sees the acknowledgement for the EOF packet, indicating that the EOF was received and understood, it can break the connection with a CLS.
If a process that expects to receive an EOF gets a CLS with no EOF, it takes this to mean that the connection was broken before the transmission was finished. If the process does receive an EOF, it does not break the connection itself immediately. It waits to see the sender of the EOF break it. If this does not happen in a few seconds, the EOF recipient can break the connection.
It is illegal to put data in an EOF packet; in other words, the byte count should always be zero. Most Chaosnet implementations simply ignore any data that is present in an EOF.
If both sides are sending data and both need to know for certain where “the end” is, they must do something a little more complicated. Arbitrarily call one party the user and the other the server. The protocol is that after sending all its data, each party sends an EOF and waits for it to be acknowledged. The server, having seen its EOF acknowledged, sends a second EOF. The user, having seen its EOF acknowledged, looks for a second EOF and then sends a CLS and goes away. The server goes away when it sees the user’s CLS, or after a brief timeout has elapsed. This asymmetrical protocol guarantees that each side gets a chance to know that both sides agree that all the data have been transferred. The first CLS is sent only after both sides have waited for their (first) EOF to be acknowledged.
Clearing up inconsistencies:
If a host crashes, it is supposed to forget all the connections that it had. When a packet arrives on one of the former connections, the host will report “no such connection” to the sender with a LOS packet, whose data is a string explaining what happened. The same thing happens if a CLS packet is lost; the intended recipient may keep trying to use the connection that the other side (which sent the CLS) no longer believes should exist. LOS packets are used whenever a host receives a packet that it should not be getting; the recipient of the LOS packet knows that the connection it thought it was using does not exist any more.
On the Lisp Machine, your handle on a connection is a named
structure of type chaos:conn
. The conn
may have an actual
connection attached to it, or it may have a connection still being made,
or record that a connection was refused, closed or broken.
chaos:inactive-state "connection state"
This conn
is not really in use at all.
chaos:rfc-sent-state "connection state"
This conn
was used to request a connection to another process,
but no reply has been received. When the reply is received, it may
change the conn
’s state to chaos:answered-state
,
chaos:cls-received-state
, or chaos:open-state
.
chaos:listening-state "connection state"
This conn
is being used to listen with.
If a RFC packet is received for the contact name you are listening
on, the state changes to chaos:rfc-received-state
.
chaos:rfc-received-state "connection state"
This means that your listen has “heard” an RFC packet that matches
it. You can accept, reject, forward or answer the request. Accepting
goes to state chaos:open-state
; refusing or forwarding goes to to state
chaos:inactive-state
.
chaos:open-state "connection state"
This conn
is one end of an open connection.
You can receive any data packets that are waiting and you can transmit
data.
chaos:answered-state "connection state"
This conn
was used to send an RFC packet and an ANS packet
was received in response (a simple transaction answer arrived). You can
read the ANS packet, that is all.
chaos:cls-received-state "connection state"
This conn
has received a CLS packet (the connection was closed
or refused). You can read any data packets that came in before the
CLS; after them you can read the CLS.
chaos:los-received-state "connection state"
This conn
’s connection was broken and the other end sent a LOS
packet to say so. The LOS packet is the only packet available to be
read.
chaos:host-down-state "connection state"
The host at the other end of this conn
’s connection has not
responded to anything for a significant time.
chaos:foreign-state "connection state"
The connection is being used with a foreign protocol encapsulated in UNC packets (see the MIT AI Lab memo entitled “Chaosnet” for more information on this).
These are
the fields of a conn
that you might be interested in:
This slot holds the state of conn. It is one of the symbols listed above.
Returns the address of the host at the other end of this connection.
Use si:get-host-from-address
to find out which host this is
(see si:get-host-from-address-fun).
Internally threaded chain of incoming packets available to be read from conn.
Its main use for the applications programmer is to test whether there are any incoming packets.
Returns the number of packets you may transmit before the network software forces you to wait for the receiver to read some. This is just a minimum. By the time you actually send this many packets, the receiver may already have said he has room for some more.
This slot is used to store arbitrary properties on conn.
You can store properties yourself; use property names that are not in
the chaos
package to avoid conflict.
Returns the contact name with which conn was created. The contact
name is not significant to the functioning of the connection once an RFC
and LSN have matched, but it is remembered for the sake of debugging.
The user can use this function or the :contact-name
message to a
stream to determine any contact name “arguments.”
Waits until the state of conn is not the symbol state, or until
timeout 60ths of a second have elapsed. If the timeout occurs, nil
is
returned; otherwise t
is returned. whostate is the process state to
put in the who-line; it defaults to "Chaosnet wait"
.
Opens a stream connection; returns a conn
if it succeeds or else a
string giving the reason for failure. host may be a number or the name
of a known host. contact-name is a string containing the contact name
and any additional arguments to go in the RFC packet. If window-size
is not specified it defaults to 13. If timeout is not specified it
defaults to 600 (ten seconds).
Taking arguments similar to those of chaos:connect
, this performs the user
side of a simple-transaction. The returned value is either an ANS packet
or a string containing a failure message. The ANS packet should be disposed
of (using chaos:return-pkt
, see below) when you are done with it.
Makes conn null and void. It becomes inactive, all its buffered packets are freed, and the corresponding Chaosnet connection (if any) goes away. This is called removing the connection. conn itself is marked for reuse for another Chaosnet connection, so you should not do anything else with it after it is removed.
Closes and removes the connection. If it is open, a CLS packet is sent
containing the string reason. Don’t use this to reject RFC’s; use
chaos:reject
for that.
Creates a conn
that may be used to transmit and receive foreign
protocols encapsulated in UNC packets. host and index are the
destination address for packets sent with chaos:send-unc-pkt
.
pkt-allocation is the ‘window size’, i.e the maximum number of input
packets that may be buffered. It defaults to 10.
If distinguished-port is supplied, the local index is set to it.
This is necessary for protocols that define the meanings of particular index
numbers.
See the MIT AI Lab memo entitled “Chaosnet” for more information on using foreign protocols.
Waits for an RFC for the specified contact name to arrive, then returns a
conn
that is in chaos:rfc-received-state
. If window-size is
not specified it defaults to 13. If wait-for-rfc is specified as nil
(it defaults to t
) then the conn
is returned immediately without
waiting for an RFC to arrive.
Contains an entry for each server that always exists. When an RFC
arrives for one of these servers, the specified form is evaluated in the
background process; typically it creates a process that will then do a
chaos:listen
. Use the add-initialization
function to add entries
to this list. Here is how the EVAL server is installed:
(ADD-INITIALIZATION "EVAL" '(PROCESS-RUN-FUNCTION "EVAL Server" 'EVAL-SERVER-FUNCTION) NIL 'CHAOS:SERVER-ALIST)
conn must be in chaos:rfc-received-state
. An OPN packet is
transmitted and conn enters the chaos:open-state
. If the RFC packet
has not already been read with chaos:get-next-pkt
, it is discarded. You
should read it before accepting, if it contains arguments in addition to the
contact name.
conn must be in chaos:rfc-received-state
. A CLS packet containing
the string reason is sent and conn is removed from the connection table.
Causes all future requests for connection to this host on contact-name to be forwarded to the same contact name at host host.
conn must be in chaos:rfc-received-state
. An ANS packet containing
the string string is sent and conn is removed from the connection table.
conn must be in chaos:rfc-received-state
. pkt is transmitted as
an ANS packet and conn is removed. Use this function when the answer
is some binary data rather than a text string.
If a pending RFC exists to contact-name, an ANS containing string
is sent in response to it and t
is returned. Otherwise nil
is returned.
This function involves the minimum possible overhead. No conn
is created.
Opens a Chaosnet connection and returns a stream that does I/O to it.
host is the host to connect to; contact-name is the contact name at that host.
These two arguments are passed along to chaos:connect
.
If host is nil
, a connection to contact-name is listened
for, and a stream is returned as soon as a request comes in for that
contact name. At this time, you must accept or reject the connection by
invoking the stream operation :accept
or :reject
. Before you
decide which to do, you can use the :foreign-host
operation to find
out where the connection came from.
The remaining arguments are:
These two arguments specify two arguments for chaos:connect
.
If the value is non-nil
, a failure to connect causes a Lisp error.
Otherwise, it causes a string describing the error to be returned.
These three arguments are passed along to chaos:make-stream
.
Creates and returns a stream that does I/O on the connection conn,
which should be open as a stream connection. direction may be
:input
, :output
or :bidirectional
.
If characters is non-nil (which is the default), the stream reads
and writes 8-bit bytes. If characters is nil
, the stream reads
and writes 16-bit bytes.
If ascii-translation is non-nil
, characters written to the
stream are translated to standard ASCII before they are sent, and
characters read are translated from ASCII to the Lisp Machine character
set.
chaos:basic-stream
: :connection ¶Returns the connection with which this stream is connected.
chaos:basic-stream
: :contact-name ¶Return the contact name with with this stream was opened.
chaos:basic-stream
: :foreign-host ¶Returns the host object for the host at the other end of this stream’s connection.
chaos:basic-stream
: :accept ¶Accepts the request for a connection which this stream received.
Used only for streams made by chaos:open-stream
with nil
as
the host argument.
chaos:basic-stream
: :reject reason-string ¶Rejects the request for a connection which this stream received, sending
reason-string in the CLS packet as the reason. Used only for
streams made by chaos:open-stream
with nil
as the host
argument.
chaos:basic-stream
: :close &optional abort-p ¶Sends a CLS packet and removes the connection. For output connections and bidirectional
connections, the :eof
operation is performed first, if
abort-p is nil
.
chaos:basic-output-stream
: :force-output ¶Any buffered output is transmitted. Normally output is accumulated until a full packet’s worth of bytes are available, so that maximum-size packets are transmitted.
chaos:basic-output-stream
: :finish ¶Waits until either all packets have been sent and acknowledged, or the connection ceases
to be open. If successful, returns t
; if the connection goes into a bad state,
returns nil
.
chaos:basic-output-stream
: :eof ¶Forces out any buffered output, sends an EOF packet, and does a :finish
.
chaos:basic-input-stream
: :clear-eof ¶Allows you to read past an EOF packet on input. Normally, each :tyi
done at eof returns nil
or signals the specified eof error. If you
do :clear-eof
on the stream, you can then read more data (assuming
there are data packets following the EOF packet).
Input and output on a Chaosnet connection can be done at the whole-packet
level, using the functions in this section. A packet is represented by
a chaos:pkt
data structure. Allocation of pkts
is controlled by the system;
each pkt
that it gives you must be given back. There are functions to
convert between pkts
and strings. A pkt
is an art-16b
array
containing the packet header and data; the leader of a pkt
contains a number of fields used by the system.
This is the index in any pkt
of the element that is the first
16-bit word of user data. (Preceding elements are used to store a
header used by the hardware.)
The maximum number of 16-bit data words allowed in a packet.
Accessor for the opcode of the packet pkt. To set the opcode, do
(setf (chaos:pkt-opcode my-pkt) my-opcode)
The system provides names for all the opcodes standardly used. The names useful to the applications programmer appear at the end of this section.
Accessor for the number-of-data-bytes field of pkt’s.
This field says how much of pkt’s contects are valid data,
measured in 8-bit bytes.
This field can be set with setf
also.
An indirect array that is the data field of pkt as a string of 8-bit bytes.
The length of this string is equal to (chaos:pkt-nbytes pkt)
.
If you wish to record the contects of pkt permanently, you must copy this string.
Copies the strings into the data field of pkt, concatenating them,
and sets (chaos:pkt-nbytes pkt)
accordingly.
Allocates a pkt
for use by the user.
Returns pkt to the system for reuse. The packets given to you by chaos:get-pkt
,
chaos:get-next-pkt
and chaos:simple
should be returned to the system in this way
when you are finished with them.
chaos:dat-op
) ¶Transmits pkt on conn. pkt should have been allocated with chaos:get-pkt
and then had its data field and n-bytes filled in. opcode must be a data opcode
(#o200 or more) or EOF. An error is signaled, with condition chaos:not-open-state
,
if conn is not open.
Giving a pkt
to chaos:send-pkt
constitutes giving it back to the system.
You do not need to call chaos:return-pkt
.
Sends a data packet containing the concatenation of strings as its data.
Transmits pkt, an UNC packet, on conn. The opcode, packet number, and acknowledge number fields in the packet header are filled in (the latter two only if the optional arguments are supplied).
See the MIT AI Lab memo entitled “Chaosnet” for more information on using foreign protocols.
A predicate that returns t
if there is any space in the window for
transmitting on conn. If the value is nil
, you may have to wait
if you try to transmit. If the value is t
, you certainly do not have to wait.
"Net Finish"
) ¶Waits until either all packets have been sent and acknowledged, or the connection ceases
to be open. If successful, returns t
; if the connection goes into a bad state,
returns nil
. whostate is the process state to display in the who-line
while waiting.
t
unless conn is open and has sent packets which have not been acknowledged.
nil
) whostate check-conn-state ¶Returns the next input packet from conn. When you are done with the packet you
must give it back to the system with chaos:return-pkt
. This can return
an RFC, CLS, or ANS packet, in addition to data, UNC, or EOF.
If no packets are available, nil
is returned
if no-hang-p is t
. Otherwise, chaos:get-next-pkt
waits for a packet to come in or for the state to change. whostate is displayed
in the who line; it defaults to "Chaosnet Input"
.
If check-conn-state is non-nil
, the connection state is checked
for validity before anything else is done, and an error is signaled if
the connection is in a bad state, with condition name
chaos:host-down
, chaos:los-received-state
, or
chaos:read-on-closed-connection
. If check-conn-state is nil
and no-hang-p is t
, nil
is returned. check-conn-state
defaults to (not no-hang-p)
.
A predicate that returns t
if there any input packets available from conn.
Here are symbolic names for the opcodes that an applications programmer needs to know about:
This special-purpose opcode is used for requesting a connection. The data consists of the contact name terminated by a space character, followed optionally by additional data whose meaning is up to the server for that contact name.
This special purpose opcode is for requesting responses from many hosts. Currently, there is no user end for initiating these requests in the Lisp Machine system, but the Lisp Machine can respond to such requests. An incoming packet of this type is treated like an RFC packet.
This special-purpose opcode is used when you ask to listen on a contact name. The data is just the contact name. This packet is never actually sent over the network, just kept in the Chaosnet software and compared with the contact names in RFC packets that arrive.
This special-purpose opcode is used by the server process to accept the request for a connection conveyed by an RFC packet. Its data serves only internal functions.
This special-purpose opcode is used to send a simple reply. The simple reply is sent back in place of opening a connection.
This special-purpose packet is what you receive if you try to use a connection that has been broken. Its data is a message explaining the situation, which you can print for the user.
This special-purpose packet is used to close a connection. Its data is a message explaining the reason, and it can be printed for the user. Note that you cannot count on receiving a CLS packet because it is not retransmitted if it is lost. If that happens you get a LOS when you try to use the connection (thinking it is still open).
CLS packets are also used for refusing to open a connection in the first place.
This special-purpose opcode is used to indicate the end of the data that
you really want to transmit. When this packet is acknowledged by the
other process, you know that all the real data was received properly.
You can wait for this with chaos:finish
.
The EOF packet carries no data itself.
This is opcode 200 (octal), which is the normal opcode used for 8-bit user data. Some protocols use multiple data opcodes in the range 200 through 277, but simple protocols that do not need to distinguish types of packets just use opcode 200.
This attribute of a conn
is a function to be called when certain
events occur on this connection. Normally this is nil
, which means
not to call any function, but you can use setf
to store a function
here. Since the function is called in the Chaosnet background process,
it should not do any operations that might have to wait for the network,
since that could permanently hang the background process.
The function’s first argument is one of the following symbols, giving the reason for the interrupt. The function’s second argument is conn. Additional arguments may be present depending on the reason. The possible reasons are:
:input
A packet has arrived for the connection when it had no input packets queued.
It is now possible to do chaos:get-next-pkt
without having to wait.
There are no additional arguments.
:output
An acknowledgement has arrived for the connection and made space in the window
when formerly it was full. Additional output packets may now be transmitted
with chaos:send-pkt
without having to wait.
There are no additional arguments.
:change-of-state
The state of the connection has changed. The third argument to the function is the symbol for the new state.
Some interrupt functions want to look at the queued input packets of a connection
when they get a :input
interrupt. chaos:read-pkts
returns the first packet
available for reading. Successive packets can be found by following chaos:pkt-link
.
Lists of packets in the NCP are threaded together by storing each packet
in the chaos:pkt-link
of its predecessor. The list is terminated with nil
.
sys:network-error
: (error
) ¶All errors from the Chaosnet code use flavors built on this one.
sys:local-network-error
: (sys:network-error
error
) ¶This flavor is used for problems in connection with the Chaosnet that have entirely to do with what is going on in this Lisp Machine.
sys:network-resources-exhausted
: (sys:local-network-error
sys:network-error
error
) ¶Signaled when some local resource in the NCP was exhausted. Most likely, there are too many Chaosnet connections and the connection table is full.
sys:unknown-address
: (sys:local-network-error
sys:network-error
error
) ¶The address argument to chaos:connect
or some similar function was not recognizable.
The :address
operation on the condition instance returns the address that was supplied.
sys:remote-network-error
: (sys:network-error
error
) ¶This flavor is used for network problems that involve the actions (or lack of them) of other machines. It is often useful to test for as a condition name.
The operations :connection
and :foreign-host
return the
chaos:conn
object and the host object for the foreign host.
All the condition names listed below imply the presence of
sys:remote-network-error
, sys:network-error
and
error
. For brevity, these are not mentioned in the
individual descriptions.
Every instance of sys:remote-network-error
is either a
sys:connection-error
or a sys:bad-connection-state
.
: sys:connection-error ¶This condition name categorizes failure to complete a connection.
: sys:bad-connection-state ¶This condition name categorizes errors where an existing, valid connection becomes invalid. The error is not signaled until you try to use the connection.
: sys:host-not-responding ¶This condition name categorizes errors where no packets whatever are received from the foreign host, making it seem likely that that host or the network is down.
sys:host-not-responding-during-connection
: (sys:connection-error
sys:host-not-responding
) ¶This condition is signaled when a host does not respond while it is being asked to make a connection.
sys:no-server-up
: (sys:connection-error
) ¶This condition is signaled by certain functions which request service from any available machine which can provide it, if no such machine is responding or no host is listed as a server for a particular service.
sys:host-stopped-responding
: (sys:bad-connection-state
sys:host-not-responding
) ¶This condition is signaled when a host does not respond even though a connection to it already exists.
sys:connection-refused
: (sys:connection-error
) ¶This is signaled when a connection is refused.
The :reason
operation on the condition instance returns the reason
specified in the CLS packet (a string) or nil
if no reason was
given.
Note that many Chaosnet implementations do not send CLS packets when
there is no process or server listening for a contact name. Also, it is
possible for the CLS packet to get lost in the network, so that the
error actually signalled is not unlikely to be
sys:host-not-responding-during-connection
.
sys:connection-closed
: (sys:bad-connection-state
) ¶This is signaled when you try to send on a connection which has been closed by the other host.
The :reason
operation on the condition instance returns the reason
specified in the CLS packet (a string) or nil
if no reason was
given.
sys:connection-lost
: (sys:bad-connection-state
) ¶This is signaled when you try to use a connection on which a LOS packet was received.
The :reason
operation on the condition instance returns the reason
specified in the CLS packet (a string) or nil
if no reason was
given.
sys:connection-no-more-data
: (sys:bad-connection-state
) ¶This is signaled when you try to read from a connection which has been closed by the other host, when there are no packets left to be read. (It is no error to read from a connection which has been closed, if you have not yet read all the packets which arrived, including the CLS packet).
The :reason
operation on the condition instance returns the reason
specified in the CLS packet (a string) or nil
if no reason was
given.
180.
) ¶t
if host responds over the Chaosnet within timeout sixtieths of
a second, otherwise nil
. The value is always nil
if host
is not on the Chaosnet.
250.
) ¶Returns a list of all the hosts in host-list which are currently responding
over the Chaosnet. host-list is a list of host names and/or host objects.
The value is always a list of host objects, possibly nil
for none of them.
If number-of-hosts is non-nil
, it should be a positive integer; when that
many hosts have responded, chaos:up-hosts
returns right away without
bothering to listen for replies from the rest.
timeout is an integer; if a host fails to respond for that many sixtieths of a second, it is assumed to be down.
host may be a number or a known host name, and defaults to the local host. Two
values are returned. The first value is the host name and the second is
the host number. If the host is a number not in the table, it is asked its name
using the STATUS
protocol; if no response is received the name
"Unknown"
is returned.
t
) ¶Prints everything the system knows about the connection. If short is nil
it
also prints everything the system knows about each queued input and output packet
on the connection.
nil
) ¶Prints everything the system knows about the packet, except its data field.
If short is t
, only the first line of the information is printed.
t
) ¶Calls chaos:print-pkt
on pkt and all packets on the threaded list emanating
from it.
Prints the hardware status. (Currently works for the CADR only.)
Resets the hardware and software and turns off Chaosnet communication.
Turns on Chaosnet communication if it is not already on. It is normally always on unless you call one of the functions in this section.
Resets the hardware and turns on Chaosnet communication.
Resets the hardware and turns off Chaosnet communication.
*standard-output
) ¶Print out host’s routing table onto stream.
si:local-host
) to (stream *standard-output
) ¶Show how a packet would get from from to to. For this to
work when the hosts are on different subnets, the bridge must respond to
the DUMP-ROUTING-TABLE
request.
The sixteen bit Chaosnet address of this Lisp Machine. On the CADR, this is set by reading a location off the Chaosnet (I/O) board. On a Lambda, this is set by looking at the name of the disk pack, and using that as a host name to get the Chaosnet address. (This is because a Lambda talks Chaosnet through an Ethernet interface, which has a pre-assigned address of its own.)
The high eight bits of chaos:my-address
.
This is an art-16b
array which contains for each subnet the address
of a bridge which is the best way of getting to that subnet. Since
(currently) Lisp Machines can only have one interface to the network,
the addresses in the table all contain the same subnet, namely, the name
of chaos:my-address
.
The maximum cost that a route can be in the routing table. Subnets with a cost greater than this do not appear in the Peek Chaosnet display
This is an art-16b
array which contains for each subnet the cost for
getting to that subnet.
If not nil
(the default), broadcast packets are responded to.
A list of elements of the form (
contact-name address)
recording what hosts have been contacting this machine with broadcast
requests.
The number of broadcast packets (opcode BRD-OP
) that have been
received. This should never be less than (length chaos:*brd-history*)
.
The PEEK program has a mode that displays the status of all of the Lisp Machine’s Chaosnet connections, and various other information, in a continuously updating fashion.
This section briefly documents some of the higher-level protocols of
the most general interest. There are quite a few other protocols which
are too specialized to mention here. All protocols other than the
STATUS
protocol are optional and are only implemented by those
hosts that need them. All hosts are required to implement the
STATUS
protocol since it is used for network maintenance.
The site files tell the Lisp Machine which hosts at your site implement certain higher-level protocols. See site-files.
All network nodes, even bridges, are required to answer RFC’s with contact
name STATUS
, returning an ANS packet in a simple transaction. This
protocol is primarily used for network maintenance. The answer to a
STATUS
request should be generated by the Network Control Program,
rather than by starting up a server process, in order to provide rapid
response.
The STATUS
protocol is used to determine whether a host is up,
to determine whether an operable path through the network exists between
two hosts, to monitor network error statistics, and to debug new Network
Control Programs and new Chaosnet hardware. The hostat
function
on the Lisp Machine uses this protocol.
The first 32 bytes of the ANS contain the name of the node, padded on the right with zero bytes. The rest of the packet contains blocks of information expressed in 16-bit and 32-bit words, low byte first (little-endian convention). The low-order half of a 32-bit word comes first. Since ANS packets contain 8-bit data (not 16-bit), big-endian machines such as PDP-10s have to shuffle the bytes explicitly when using this protocol. The first 16-bit word in a block is its identification. The second 16-bit word is the number of 16-bit words to follow. The remaining words in the block depend on the identification.
This is the only block type currently defined. All items are optional, according to the count field, and extra items not defined here may be present and should be ignored. Note that items after the first two are 32-bit words.
A number between 400 and 777 octal. This is 400 plus a subnet number. This block contains information on this host’s direct connection to that subnet.
The number of 16-bit words to follow, usually 16.
The number of packets received from this subnet.
The number of packets transmitted to this subnet.
The number of transmissions to this subnet aborted by collisions or because the receiver was busy.
The number of incoming packets from this subnet lost because the host had not yet read a previous packet out of the interface and consequently the interface could not capture the packet.
The number of incoming packets from this subnet with CRC errors. These were either transmitted wrong or damaged in transmission.
The number of incoming packets from this subnet that had no CRC error when received, but did have an error after being read out of the packet buffer. This error indicates either a hardware problem with the packet buffer or an incorrect packet length.
The number of incoming packets from this subnet that were rejected due to incorrect length (typically not a multiple of 16 bits).
The number of incoming packets from this subnet rejected for other reasons (e.g too short to contain a header, garbage byte-count, forwarded too many times.)
If word 0, the identification, is a number between 0 and 377 octal, this is an obsolete format of block. The identification is a subnet number and the counts are as above except that they are only 16 bits instead of 32, and consequently may overflow. This format should no longer be sent by any hosts.
Identification numbers of 1000 octal and up are reserved for future use.
For network and NCP debugging, this RFC/ANS protocol should be
implemented. The contact name is DUMP-ROUTING-TABLE
, and the
response is an ANS packet whose words alternately contain a
method to getting to a subnet, and the cost.
If the method is zero, then the machine knows of no way to get to
that subnet. If the method is positive and less than 400 (octal),
it is an interface of some kind to that subnet.
If the method is 400 (octal) or greater, this is actually a bridge
(host) off which the machine is bouncing packets destined for the
subnet.
The Telnet and Supdup protocols of the Arpanet exist in identical form in Chaosnet. These protocols allow access to a computer system as an interactive terminal from another network node.
The contact names are TELNET
and SUPDUP
. The direct borrowing of
the Telnet and Supdup protocols was eased by their use of 8-bit byte
streams and of only a single connection. Note that these protocols define
their own character sets, which differ from each other and from the
Chaosnet standard character set.
For the Telnet protocol, refer to the RFC 854 (An RFC is a network document put out by the NIC or Network Information Center.) For the Supdup protocol, see MIT AI Lab memo 644.
Chaosnet contains no counterpart of the INR/INS attention-getting feature of the Arpanet. The Telnet protocol sends a packet with opcode 201 octal in place of the INS signal. This is a controlled packet and hence does not provide the “out of band” feature of the Arpanet INS, however it is satisfactory for the Telnet ‘interrupt process’ and ‘discard output’ operations on the kinds of hosts attached to Chaosnet.
The FILE protocol is primarily used by Lisp Machines to access files on
network file servers. ITS, TOPS-20, Tenex, Unix, VMS, and Lisp Machines are
equipped to act as file servers. A user end for the file protocol also
exists for all the operating systems mentioned (except VMS) and
is used for general-purpose file transfer. For complete documentation
on the file protocol, see SYS: DOC; FILE TEXT
. The Arpanet file
transfer protocols have not been implemented on the Chaosnet (except
through the Arpanet gateway described below).
The MAIL protocol is used to transmit inter-user messages through the Chaosnet. The Arpanet mail protocol in FTP was not used because of its complexity and poor state of documentation. This simple protocol is by no means the last word in mail protocols; however, it is adequate for the mail systems we presently possess.
The sender of mail connects to contact name MAIL
and establishes a stream connection.
It then sends the names of all the recipients to which the mail is to be sent
at (or via) the server host. The names are sent one to a line and terminated
by a blank line (two carriage returns in a row). The Lisp Machine character
set is used. A reply (see below) is immediately returned for each recipient.
A recipient is typically just the name of a user, but it can be a user-atsign-host
sequence or anything else acceptable to the mail system on the server machine.
After sending the recipients, the sender sends the text of the message, terminated
by an EOF. After the mail has been successfully swallowed, a reply is sent.
After the sender of mail has read the reply, both sides close the connection.
In the MAIL protocol, a reply is a signal from the server to the user (or sender) indicating success or failure. The first character of a reply is a plus sign for success, a minus sign for permanent failure (e.g no such user exists), or a percent sign for temporary failure (e.g unable to receive message because disk is full). The rest of a reply is a human-readable character string explaining the situation, followed by a carriage return.
The message text transmitted through the mail protocol normally contains a header formatted in the Arpanet standard fashion. Refer to the Arpanet Protocols Handbook.
The SMTP protocol can also be used over Chaosnet; the contact name is
SMTP
. See RFC 821 for details.
The SEND protocol is used to transmit an interactive message (requiring
immediate attention) between users. The sender connects to contact name
SEND
at the machine to which the recipient is logged in. The remainder of
the RFC packet contains the name of the person being sent to. A stream
connection is opened and the message is transmitted, followed by an EOF.
Both sides close after following the end-of-data protocol described in safe-eof-protocol.
The fact that the RFC was responded to affirmatively indicates that the
recipient is in fact present and accepting messages. The message text should begin
with a suitable header, naming the user that sent the message. The standard
for such headers, not currently adhered to by all hosts, is one line formatted
as in the following example:
Moon@MIT-MC 6/15/81 02:20:17
Automatic reply to the sender can be implemented by searching for the first ‘@’ and using the SEND protocol to the host following the ‘@’ with the argument preceding it.
The Name/Finger protocol of the Arpanet exists in identical form on the Chaosnet. Both Lisp Machines and timesharing machines support this protocol and provide a display of the user(s) currently logged in to them.
The contact name is NAME
, which can be followed by a space and a string of
arguments like the “command line” of the Arpanet Name protocol. A stream
connection is established and the “finger” display is output in Lisp
Machine character set, followed by an EOF.
Lisp Machines also support the FINGER protocol, a simple-transaction version
of the NAME protocol. An RFC with contact name FINGER
is transmitted and
the response is an ANS containing the following items of information separated
by carriage returns: the logged-in user ID, the location of the terminal, the
idle time in minutes or hours-colon-minutes, the user’s full name, and
the user’s group affiliation.
The Time protocol allows a host such as a Lisp Machine that has no
long-term timebase to ask the time of day. An RFC to contact name
TIME
evokes an ANS containing the universal time as a 32-bit
number in four 8-bit bytes, least-significant byte first.
Returns either a universal time, or a string explaining why the time couldn’t be found out, from one of hosts. Hosts defaults to the list of Chaosnet time server hosts.
*standard-output*
) ¶Print out on stream the times given by hosts. Any host that returns a time that is more than three minutes off this hosts time will have its repsonse marked with “!” Hosts defaults to the list of Chaosnet time server hosts.
For a time server that does not have any other way to correct its own
time (usually because it is a bridge), that host should support this
simple way of accepting a request to reset its own timebase. The contact
name is RESET-TIME-SERVER
, and the response (on successful
completion) is an ANS. Following such a request, if the network is the
only source of a timebase, it may be wise to
immediately disable the TIME
server, wait about 20 seconds, and then
attempt to get the time from the network. This may prevent the host
from getting bad times from other machines that were “infected” with
it.
Reset the network time server of host. It will try to tell you the time it gets afterward, if possible.
This is similar to the TIME protocol, except that the contact
name is UPTIME
, and the time returned is actually an interval (in
seconds) describing how long the host has been up.
*standard-output*
) ¶Return the number of seconds that host has been up, and print that
out in human-readable form if stream is not nil
.
*standard-output*
) hosts ¶Print out the uptimes for hosts (which if not supplied defaults to all Chaosnet hosts) onto stream.
This protocol allows a Chaosnet host to access almost any service on the Internet. The gateway server runs on each ITS host that is connected to both networks. It creates an Internet connection and a Chaosnet connection and forwards data bytes from one to the other. It also provides for a one-way auxiliary connection, used for the data connection of the Arpanet File Transfer Protocol.
The RFC packet contains a contact name of TCP
, a space, the name
of the Internet host to be connected to, optionally followed by a space
and the contact-socket number in octal, which defaults to 1 if omitted.
The name of host can also be an Internet-format address.
The bi-directional 8-bit connection is made by connecting to the host
with TCP.
If a data packet with opcode 201 (octal) is received, an Arpanet INS signal is transmitted. Any data bytes in this packet are transmitted normally. (This does nothing in the current server, since TCP does not define an interrupt signal.)
If a data packet with opcode 210 (octal) is received, an auxiliary connection on each network is opened. The first eight data bytes are the Chaosnet contact name for the auxiliary connection; the user should send an RFC with this name to the server. The next four data bytes are the TCP socket number to be connected to, in the wrong order, most-significant byte first. The byte-size of the auxiliary connection is 8 bits.
The normal closing of an TCP connection corresponds to an EOF packet. Closing due to an error, such as Host Dead, corresponds to a CLS packet.
The HOSTAB
protocol may be used to access tables of host addresses
on other networks, such as the Arpanet or Internet. Servers for this protocol
currently exist for Tenex, TOPS-20, ITS, and Lisp Machines.
The user connects to contact name HOSTAB
, undertakes a number of
transactions, then closes the connection. Each transaction is initiated
by the user transmitting a host name followed by a carriage return. The
server responds with information about that host, terminated with an EOF,
and is then ready for another transaction. The server’s response
consists of a number of attributes of the host. Each attribute consists
of an identifying name, a space character, the value of the attribute,
and a carriage return. Values may be strings (free of carriage returns
and not surrounded by double-quotes) or octal numbers.
Attribute names and most values are in upper case. There can be more than
one attribute with the same name; for example, a host may have more than
one name or more than one network address.
The standard attribute names defined now are as follows. Note that more are likely to be added in the future.
ERROR
The value is an error message. The only error one might expect to get is “no such host”.
NAME
The value is a name of the host. There may be more than one NAME
attribute; the first one is always the official name, and any additional
names are nicknames.
MACHINE-TYPE
The value is the type of machine, such as LISPM
, PDP10
, etc.
SYSTEM-TYPE
The value is the type of software running on the machine,
such as LISPM
, ITS
, etc.
ARPA
The value is an address of the host on the Arpanet, in the form host/imp. The two numbers are decimal.
CHAOS
The value is an address of the host on Chaosnet, as an octal number.
DIAL
The value is an address of the host on Dialnet, as a telephone number.
LCS
The value is an address of the host on the LCSnet, as two octal numbers separated by a slash.
SU
The value is an address of the host on the SUnet, in the form net#host. The two numbers are octal.
A press file may be sent to the Dover printer at MIT by connecting to contact
name DOVER
at host AI-CHAOS-11
. This host provides a protocol
translation service that translates from Chaosnet stream protocol to
the EFTP
protocol spoken by the Dover printer. Only one file at
a time can be sent to the Dover, so an attempt to use this service may
be refused by a CLS packet containing the string "BUSY"
.
Once the connection has been established, the press file is transmitted
as a sequence of 8-bit bytes in data packets (opcode 200). It is necessary
to provide packets rapidly enough to keep the Dover’s program (Spruce)
from timing out; a packet every five seconds suffices. Of course, packets
are normally transmitted much more rapidly.
Once the file has been transmitted, an EOF packet must be sent.
The transmitter must wait for that EOF to be acknowledged, then send a
second one, and then close the connection. The two EOF’s are
necessary to provide the proper connection-closing sequence for the
EFTP
protocol. Once the press file has been transmitted to the
Dover in this way and stored on the Dover’s local disk, it will be
processed, prepared for printing, and printed.
If an error message is returned by the Dover while the press file is being transmitted, it is reported back through the Chaosnet as a LOS containing the text of the error message. Such errors are fairly common; the sender of the press file should be prepared to retry the operation a few times.
Most programs that send press files to the Dover first wait for the Dover to be idle, using the Foreign Protocol mechanism of Chaosnet to check the status of the Dover. This is optional, but is courteous to other users since it prevents printing from being held up while additional files are sent to the Dover and queued on its local disk.
It would be possible to send to a press file to the Dover using its
EFTP
protocol through the Foreign Protocol mechanism, rather than
using the AI-CHAOS-11
gateway service. This is not usually done
because EFTP
, which requires a handshake for every packet, tends to
be very slow on a timesharing system.
The Remote Disk server exists on Lisp Machines to allow other machines to refer to or modify the contents of the Lisp Machine’s disk. Primarily this is used for printing and editing the disk label.
After first establishing a connection to contact name REMOTE-DISK
,
the user process sends commands as packets which contain a line of text,
ending with a Return
character. The text consists of a command name, a
space, and arguments interpreted according to the command. The server
processing the command may send disk data to the user, or it may read
successive packets and write them to the disk. It is up to the user to
know how many packets of disk data to read or send after each command.
The commands are:
READ unit block n-blocks
Reads n-blocks of data from disk unit starting at block and transmits their contents to the user process.
WRITE unit block n-blocks
Reads data from the net connection and stores it into n-blocks disk blocks on disk unit starting at block.
SAY text
Prints text, which is simply all the rest of the line following SAY
,
on the screen of the server host as a notification.
Each disk block is transmitted as three packets, the first two containing the data for 121 (decimal) Lisp Machine words, and the third containing the data for the remaining 14 (decimal) words of the disk block. Each packet’s data ends with a checksum made by adding together all the 8-bit bytes of the actual disk data stored in the packet.
The Eval server is available on Lisp Machines with contact name
EVAL
. It provides a read-eval-print loop which reads and prints
using the Chaosnet connection. The data consists of text in the ASCII
character set.
Each time a complete s-expression arrives, the Eval server reads it, evaluates it and prints the list of values back onto the network connection, followed by a CRLF. There is no way for the user process to tell the end of the output for a particular s-expression; the usual application is simply to copy all the output to a user’s terminal asynchronously.
The Eval server is disabled when the Lisp Machine is logged in, unless the user requests to enable it.
Turn the Eval server on this Lisp Machine on or off.
mode can be t
(on), nil
(off), or :notify
(on, but
notify the user when a connection is made).
Sends a message to another user. qsend
is different from mail
because it
sends the message immediately; it will appear within seconds on the other user’s
screen, rather than being saved in her mail file.
user should be a string of the form "username
;
host is the name of the Lisp Machine or timesharing system the user
is currently logged-in to. Multiple recipients separated by commas are
also allowed. text is a string which is the message. If text
is not specified, you are prompted to type in a message.
@
hostname"
Unlike mail
and bug
, qsend
does not put up a window to allow
you to compose the message; it just reads it from the input stream. Use
Converse if you wish to compose sends in the editor. Converse can be
invoked by typing System
C
. If you have started typing in a message to
qsend
, you can switch to Converse by typing Control-Meta-E
(“Edit”). The text you have typed so far is transferred into
Converse.
qsend
does give you the ability to insert the text of the last
message you received. Type Control-Meta-Y
to do this.
Sends text as a message to the last user who sent a message to you,
like qsend
with an appropriate first argument provided.
The two names are synonymous.
Sends message to every Lisp Machine at your site.
If you do not specify message, it is read from *standard-input*
.
Reprints any messages that have been received. This is useful if you want to see a message again.
host may be a string or symbol, which is taken as a host name, or a number, which is taken as a host number. If no host is given, the machine you are logged-in to is assumed. This function opens a connection to the host over the Chaosnet using the Supdup protocol, and allows the Lisp Machine to be used as a terminal for any ITS, UNIX or TOPS-20 system.
To give commands to supdup
, type the Network
key followed by one character.
Type Network
followed by Help
for documentation.
telnet
is similar to supdup
but uses the Arpanet-standard Telnet
protocol, simulating a printing terminal rather than a display terminal.
Asks each of the hosts for its status using the STATUS
protocol,
and prints the results. If no hosts are specified, all hosts on the
Chaosnet are asked. Hosts can be specified either by name or by number.
For each host, a line is output that either says that the host is not
responding or gives metering information for the host’s network
attachments. If a host is not responding, that usually means that it is down
or there is no such host at that address. A Lisp Machine can fail to respond
if it is looping inside without-interrupts
or paging extremely heavily,
such that it is simply unable to respond within a reasonable amount of time.
*standard-output*
) ¶*standard-output*
) ¶Prints brief (finger
) or verbose (whois
) information about a user
or users specified by spec, on stream. spec can be a user
name, @
followed by a host name, or a user name, @
, and a host
name. If there is no host name, the default login host is used. If
there is no user name, all users on the host are described.
Examples:
(finger "@OZ") (whois "RMS@OZ")
Prints a line of information about the user of each Lisp Machine in
hosts (the default is all Lisp Machines at this site) on stream
(default is *standard-output*
).
If print-free is non-nil
, information on free Lisp Machines and
nonresponding Lisp Machines is also printed.
If return-free is non-nil
, then this function returns two
values, the first a list of host objects of free Lisp Machines, the
second a list of host objects of nonresponding Lisp Machines.
Returns t
if there is a user named username logged in on
host (a host name or host object).
Return a list of host objects for hosts on which user is logged in. All Lisp Machines at this site are checked, and so are hosts (which are presumably non-Lisp machines).
Close the connections of all network servers on this Lisp Machine, giving reason (a string) as the reason in the CLS packet.
Note that PEEK has a mode that displays information on the active network servers.
A Lisp program is a collection of function definitions. The functions are known by their names, and so each must have its own name to identify it. Clearly a programmer must not use the same name for two different functions.
The Lisp Machine consists of a huge Lisp environment, in which many
programs must coexist. All of the operating system, the compiler, the
editor, and a wide variety of programs are provided in the initial
environment. Furthermore, every program that you use during
a session must be loaded into the same environment. Each of these
programs is composed of a group of functions; apparently each function
must have its own distinct name to avoid conflicts. For example, if
the compiler had a function named pull
, and you loaded a program
which had its own function named pull
, the compiler’s pull
would be
redefined, probably breaking the compiler.
It would not really be possible to prevent these conflicts,
since the programs are written by many different people who could
never get together to hash out who gets the privilege of using
a specific name such as pull
.
Now, if we are to enable two programs to coexist in the Lisp
world, each with its own function pull
, then each program must have
its own symbol named pull
, because there can’t be two function
definitions on the same symbol. This means that separate name
spaces–mappings between names and symbols–must be provided for
the two programs. The package system is designed to do just that.
Under the package system, the author of a program or a group of closely related programs identifies them together as a package. The package system associates a distinct name space with each package.
Here is an example: suppose there are two programs named chaos
and arpa
, for handling the Chaosnet and Arpanet respectively. The
author of each program wants to have a function called get-packet
,
which reads in a packet from the network (or something). Also, each
wants to have a function called allocate-pbuf
, which allocates the
packet buffer. Each “get” routine first allocates a packet buffer,
and then reads bits into the buffer; therefore, each version of
get-packet
should call the respective version of allocate-pbuf
.
Without the package system, the two programs could not coexist
in the same Lisp environment. But the package feature can be used to
provide a separate name space for each program. What is required is
to define a package named chaos
to contain the Chaosnet program, and
another package arpa
to hold the Arpanet program. When the Chaosnet
program is read into the machine, its symbols would be entered in the
chaos
package’s name space. So when the Chaosnet program’s
get-packet
referred to allocate-pbuf
, the allocate-pbuf
in the chaos
name space would be found, which would be the allocate-pbuf
of the
Chaosnet program–the right one. Similarly, the Arpanet program’s
get-packet
would be read in using the arpa
package and
would refer to the Arpanet program’s allocate-pbuf
.
In order to have multiple name spaces, the function intern
, which
searches for a name, must allow the name space to be specified.
intern
accepts an optional second argument which is the package
to search.
It’s obvious that every file has to be loaded into the right package to serve its purpose. It may not be so obvious that every file must be compiled in the right package, but it’s just as true. Luckily, this usually happens automatically.
The system can get the package of a source file from its -*-
line. For instance, you can put at the front of your file a line such
as
; -*- Mode:Lisp; Package:System-Internals -*-
The compiler puts the package name into the QFASL file for use when it is loaded. If a file doesn’t have such a package specification in it, the system loads it into the current package and tells you what it did.
At any time, one package is the current package. By default, symbol lookup happens in the current package.
The value of the this variable is the current package. intern
searches this package if it is not given a second argument.
Many other functions for operating on packages also use this as the default.
Setting or binding the variable changes the current package. May the Goddess help you if you set it to something that isn’t a package!
The two names are synonymous.
Each process or stack group can have its own setting for the current
package by binding *package*
with let
. The actual current package
at any time is the value bound by the process which is running. The bindings
of another process are irrelevant until the process runs.
pkg may be a package or a package name. The forms of the body
are evaluated sequentially with the variable *package*
bound to the
package named by pkg.
Example:
(pkg-bind "ZWEI" (read-from-string function-name))
When a file is loaded, *package*
is bound to the correct package for
the file (the one named in the file’s -*-
line). The Chaosnet program
file has Package: Chaos;
in the -*-
line, and therefore its symbols
are looked up in the chaos
package. A QFASL file has an encoded representation
of the -*-
line of the source file; it looks different, but it serves the
same purpose.
The current package is also relevant when you type Lisp expressions on
the keyboard; it controls the reading of the symbols that you type.
Initially it is the package user
. You can select a different
package using pkg-goto
, or even by setq
ing *package*
. If you
are working with the Chaosnet program, it might be useful to type
(pkg-goto 'chaos)
so that your symbols are found in the chaos
package by default. The Lisp listen loop binds *package*
so that
pkg-goto
in one Lisp listener does not affect others, or any
other processes whatever.
Sets *package*
to package, if package is suitable.
(Autoexporting packages used by other packages are not suitable
because it you could cause great troubles by interning new symbols in them).
package may be specified as a package object or the name of one.
If globally
is non-nil
, then this function also calls
pkg-goto-globally
(see below)
The Zmacs editor records the correct package for each buffer; it is
determined from the file’s -*-
line. This package is used whenever
expressions are read from the buffer. So if you edit the definition of
the Chaosnet get-packet
and recompile it, the new definition is read in the
chaos
package. The current buffer’s package is also used for all
expressions or symbols typed by the user. Thus, if you type Meta-.
allocate-pbuf
while looking at the Chaosnet program, you get the
definition of the allocate-pbuf
function in the chaos
package.
The variable *package*
also has a global binding, which is in
effect in any process or stack group which does not rebind the variable.
New processes that do bind *package*
generally use the global
binding to initialize their own bindings, doing (let ((*package*
*package*)) ...)
. Therefore, it can be useful to set the global
binding. But you cannot do this with setq
or pkg-goto
from a
Lisp listener, or in a file, because that will set the local binding of
*package*
instead. Therefore you must use setq-globally
(setq-globally-fun) or pkg-goto-globally
.
Sets the global binding of *package*
to package.
An error is signaled if package is not suitable.
Bindings of package other than the the global one are not changed,
including the current binding if it is not the global one.
The name of the current package is always displayed in the middle of the who line, with a colon following it. This describes the process which the who line in general is describing; normally, the process of the selected window. No matter how the current package is changed, the who line will eventually show it (at one-second intervals). Thus, while a file is being loaded, the who line displays that file’s package; in the editor, the who line displays the package of the selected buffer.
The separation of name spaces is not an uncrossable gulf. Consider a
program for accessing files, using the Chaosnet. It may be useful to
put it in a distinct package file-access
, not chaos
, so that the
programs are protected from accidental name conflicts. But the file
program cannot exist without referring to the functions of the Chaosnet
program.
The colon character (‘:
’) has a special meaning to the Lisp reader.
When the reader sees a colon preceded by the name of a package, it
reads the next Lisp object with *package*
bound to that package.
Thus, to refer to the symbol connect
in package chaos
, we write
chaos:connect
. Some symbols documented in this manual require
package prefixes to refer to them; they are always written with an
appropriate prefix.
Similarly, if the chaos
program wanted to refer to the arpa
program’s allocate-pbuf
function (for some reason), it could use
arpa:allocate-pbuf
.
Package prefixes are printed on output also. If you would need a
package prefix to refer to a symbol on input, then the symbol is printed
with a suitable package prefix if it supposed to be printed readably
(prin1
, as opposed to princ
).
Just as the current package affects how a symbol is read, it also
affects how the symbol is printed. A symbol available in the
current package is never printed with a package prefix.
The printing of package prefixes makes it possible to print list structure containing symbols from many packages and read the text to produce an equal list with the same symbols in it–provided the current package when the text is read is the same one that was current when the text was printed.
The package name in a package prefix is read just like a symbol name.
This means that escape characters can be used to include special
characters in the package name. Thus, foo/:bar:test
refers to the
symbol test
in the package whose name is “FOO:BAR”, and so does
|FOO:BAR|:test
. Also, letters are converted to upper case unless
they are escaped. For this reason, the actual name of a package is
normally all upper case, but you can use either case when you write a
package prefix.
In Common Lisp programs, simple colon prefixes are supposed to be used
only for referring to external symbols (see external-symbols).
To refer to other symbols, one is supposed to use two colons, as in
chaos::lose-it-later
.
The Lisp machine tradition is to allow reference to any symbol with
a single colon. Since this is upward compatible with what is allowed
in Common Lisp, single-colon references are always allowed.
However, double-colon prefixes are printed for internal symbols
when Common Lisp syntax is in use, so that data printed on a Lisp Machine
can be read by other Common Lisp implementations.
Each symbol remembers one package which it belongs to: normally, the
first one it was ever interned in. This package is available as
(symbol-package symbol)
.
With make-symbol
(see make-symbol-fun) it is possible to create a
symbol that has never been interned in any package. It is called an
uninterned symbol, and it remains one as long as nobody interns it.
The package cell of an uninterned symbol contains nil
. Uninterned
symbols print with #:
as a prefix, as in #:foo
. This syntax can
be used as input to create an uninterned symbol with a specific name;
but a new symbol is created each time you type it, since the mechanism
which normally makes symbols unique is interning in a package.
Thus, (eq #:foo #:foo)
returns nil
.
Returns the contents of symbol’s package cell, which is the
package which owns symbol, or nil
if symbol is uninterned.
Returns a locative pointer to symbol’s package cell. It is preferable to write
(locf (symbol-package symbol))
rather than calling this function explicitly.
Printing of package prefixes is based on the contents of the symbol’s
package cell. If the cell contains the chaos
package, then
chaos:
is printed as the prefix when a prefix is necessary.
As a result of obscure actions involving interning and uninterning in multiple
packages, the symbol may not actually be present in chaos
any more.
Then the printed prefix is inaccurate. This cannot be helped.
If the symbol is not where it claims to be, there is no easy way to
find wherever it might be.
Distinct name spaces are useful for symbols which have function definitions or values, to enable them to be used independently by different programs.
Another way to use a symbol is to check for it with eq
. Then there
is no possibility of name conflict. For example, the function open
,
part of the file system, checks for the symbol :error
in its input
using eq
. A user function might do the same thing. Then the symbol
:error
is meaningful in two contexts, but these meanings do not
affect each other. The fact that a user program contains the code (eq
sym :error)
does not interfere with the function of system code which
contains a similar expression.
There is no need to separate name spaces for symbols used in this way.
In fact, it would be a disadvantage. If both the Chaosnet program and
the Arpanet program wish to recognize a keyword named “address”, for
similar purposes (naturally), it is very useful for programs that can
call either one if it is the same keyword for either program. But
which should it be? chaos:address
? arpa:address
?
To avoid this uncertainty, one package called keyword
has been set
aside for the keywords of all programs. The Chaosnet and Arpanet
programs would both look for keyword:address
, normally written
as just :address
.
Symbols in keyword
are the normal choice for names of keyword
arguments; if you use &key
to process them, code is automatically
generated to look for for symbols in keyword
. They are also
the normal choice for flavor operation names, and for any set of
named options meaningful in a specific context.
keyword
and the symbols belonging to it are treated
differently from other packages in a couple of ways designed to make
them more convenient for this usage.
Symbols belonging to keyword
are constants; they always
evaluate to themselves. (This is brought about by storing
the symbol in its own value cell when the symbol is placed in the package).
So you can write just :error
rather than ':error
.
The nature of the application of keywords is such that they
would always be quoted if they were not constant.
A colon by itself is a sufficient package prefix for keyword
.
This is because keywords are the most frequent application of package
prefixes.
t
if object is a symbol which belongs to the keyword package.
There are certain cases when a keyword should not be used for a
symbol to be checked for with eq
. Usually this is when the symbol
1) does not need to be known outside of a single program, and 2) is to
be placed in shared data bases such as property lists of symbols which
may sometimes be in global
or keyword
. For example, if the
Chaosnet program were to record the existence of a host named CAR by
placing an :address
property on the symbol :car
, or the symbol
car
(notice that chaos:car
is car
), it would risk
conflicts with other programs that might wish to use the :address
property of symbols in general. It is better to call the property
chaos:address
.
In the simplest (but not the default) case, a package is independent
of all other packages. This is not the default because it is not
usually useful. Consider the standard Lisp function and variables names,
such as car
: how can the Chaosnet program, using the chaos
package,
access them? One way would be to install all of them in the chaos
package, and every other package. But it is better to have one table
of the standard Lisp symbols and refer to it where necessary. This is
called inheritance. The single package global
is the only one
which actually contains the standard Lisp symbols; other packages such
as chaos
contain directions to “search global
too”.
Each package has a hash table of the symbols. The symbols in this table
are said to be present (more explicitly, present directly) in
the package, or interned in it. In addition, each package has a
list of other packages to inherit from. By default, this list contains
the package global
and no others; but packages can be added and
removed at any time with the functions use-package
and
unuse-package
. We say that a package uses the packages it
inherits from. Both the symbols present directly in the package and the
symbols it inherits are said to be available in the package.
Here’s how this works in the above example. When the Chaosnet program
is read into the Lisp world, the current package would be the chaos
package. Thus all of the symbols in the Chaosnet program would be
interned in the chaos
package. If there is a reference to a
standard Lisp symbol such as append
, nothing is found in the
chaos
package’s own table; no symbol of that name is present
directly in chaos
. Therefore the packages used by chaos
are
searched, including global
. Since global
contains a symbol
named append
, that symbol is found. If, however, there is a
reference to a symbol that is not standard, such as get-packet
, the
first time it is used it is not found in either chaos
or global
.
So intern
makes a new symbol named get-packet
, and installs it
in the chaos
package. When get-packet
is referred to later in
the Chaosnet program, intern
finds get-packet
immediately in the
chaos
package. global
does not need to be searched.
When the Arpanet program is read in, the current package is
arpa
instead of chaos
. When the Arpanet program refers
to append
, it gets the global
one; that is, it shares the same one
that the Chaosnet program got. However, if it refers to get-packet
,
it does not get the same one the Chaosnet program got, because
the chaos
package is presumably not used by arpa
. The get-packet
in chaos
not being available, no symbol is found, so a new one is
created and placed in the arpa
package. Further references in the
Arpanet program find that get-packet
. This is the desired
result: the packages share the standard Lisp symbols only.
Inheritance between other packages can also be useful, but it must
be restricted: inheriting only some of the symbols of the used package.
If the file access program refers frequently to the advertised symbols
of the Chaosnet program–the connection states, such as open-state
,
functions such as connect
, listen
and open-stream
, and
others–it might be convenient to be able to refer to these symbols from
the file-access
package without need for package prefixes.
One way to do this is to place the appropriate symbols of the chaos
package into the file-access
package as well. Then they can be
accessed by the file access program just like its own symbols. Such
sharing of symbols between packages never happens from the ordinary
operation of packages, but it can be requested explicitly using
import
.
*package*
) ¶Is the standard Common Lisp way to insert a specific symbol or symbols into a package. symbols is a symbol or a list of symbols. Each of the specified symbols becomes present directly in package.
If a symbol with the same name is already present (directly or by
inheritance) in package, an error is signaled. On proceeding, you
can say whether to leave the old symbol there or replace it with the one
specified in import
.
But importing may not be the best solution. All callers of the Chaosnet program probably want to refer to the same set of symbols: the symbols described in the documentation of the Chaosnet program. It is simplest if the Chaosnet program, rather than each caller, says which symbols they are.
Restricted inheritance allows the chaos
package to specify which
of its symbols should be inheritable. Then file-access
can use
package chaos
and the desired symbols are available in it.
The inheritable symbols of a package such as chaos
in this example
are called external; the other symbols are internal. Symbols
are internal by default. The function export
is how symbols are
made external. Only the external symbols of a package are inherited by
other packages which use it. This is true of global
as well; Only
external symbols in global
are inherited. Since global
exists
only for inheritance, every symbol in it is external; in fact, any
symbol placed in global
is automatically made external. global
is said to be autoexporting. A few other packages with special
uses, such as keyword
and fonts
, are autoexporting. Ordinary
packages such as chaos
, which programs are loaded in, should not be.
If a request is made to find a name in a package, first the symbols present directly in that package are searched. If the name is not found that way, then all the packages in the used-list are searched; but only external symbols are accepted. Internal symbols found in the used packages are ignored. If a new symbol needs to be created and put into the name space, it is placed directly in the specified package. New symbols are never put into the inherited packages.
The used packages of a package are not in any particular order. It does not make any difference which one is searched first, because they are not allowed to have any conflicts among them. If you attempt to set up an inheritance situation where a conflict would exist, you get an error immediately. You can then specify explicitly how to resolve the conflict. See name-conflict.
The packages used by the packages used are not searched. If package
file-access
uses package chaos
and file mypackage
uses
package file-access
, this does not cause mypackage
to inherit
anything from chaos
. This is desirable; the Chaosnet functions for whose sake
file-access
uses chaos
are not needed in the programs in mypackage
simply to enable them to communicate with file-access
. If it is desirable
for mypackage
to inherit from chaos
, that can be requested explicitly.
These functions are used to set up and control package inheritance.
*package*
) ¶Makes in-package inherit symbols from packages, which should be either a single package or name for a package, or a list of packages and/or names for packages.
This can cause a name conflict, if any of packages has a symbol whose name matches a symbol in in-package. In this case, an error is signaled, and you must resolve the conflict or abort.
*package*
) ¶Makes in-package cease to inherit symbols from packages.
Returns the list of packages used by package.
Returns the list of packages which use package.
You can add or remove inheritance paths at any time, no matter what else you have done with the package.
These functions are used to make symbols external or internal in a package. By default, they operate on the current package.
*package*
) ¶Makes symbols external in package. symbols should be a symbol or string or a list of symbols and/or strings. The specified symbols or strings are interned in package, and the symbols found are marked external in package.
If one of the specified symbols is found by inheritance from a used package, it is made directly present in package and then marked external there. (We know it was already external in the package it was inherited from.)
Note that if a symbol is present directly in several packages, it can be
marked external or internal in each package independently. Thus, it is
the symbol’s presence in a particular package which is external or not,
rather than the symbol itself. export
makes symbols external
in whichever package you specify; if the same symbols are present directly
in any other package, their status as external or internal in the other package
is not affected.
*package*
) ¶Makes symbols not be external in package. An error occurs if any of the symbols fails to be directly present in package.
Returns a list of all the external symbols of package.
Sometimes it will be discovered that a symbol which ought to be in
global
is not there, and the file defining it has already been
loaded, thus mistakenly creating a symbol with that name in some other
package. Creating a symbol in global
would not fix the problem,
since pointers to the misbegotten symbol already exist. Even worse,
similarly named symbols may have been created mistakenly in other
packages by code attempting to refer to the global symbol, and those
symbols also are already pointed to. globalize
is designed for
use in correcting such a situation.
"GLOBAL"
) ¶If name-or-symbol is a name (a string), interns the name in into-package and then forwards together all symbols with the same name in all the packages that use into-package as well as in into-package itself. These symbols are forwarded together so that they become effectively one symbol as far as the value, function definition and properties are concerned. The value of the composite is taken from whichever of the symbols had a value; a proceedable error is signaled if multiple, distinct values were found. The function definition is treated similarly, and so is each property that any of the symbols has.
If name-or-symbol is a symbol, globalize
interns that symbol
in into-package and then forwards the other symbols to that one.
The symbol which ultimately is present in into-package is also exported.
The most important service of the package system is to look up a name in
a package and return the symbol which has that name in the package’s
name space. This is done by the function intern
, and is called
interning. When you type a symbol as input, read
converts your
characters to the actual symbol by calling intern
.
The function intern
allows you to specify a package as the
second argument. It can be specified by giving either the package
object itself or a string or symbol that is a name for the package.
intern
returns three values. The first is the interned symbol. The
second is a keyword that says how the symbol was found. The third is
the package in which the symbol was actually found. This can be either
the specified package or one of its used packages.
When you don’t specify the second argument to intern
, the
current package, which is the value of the symbol *package*
, is used.
This happens, in particular, when you call read
and read
calls intern
. To specify the
package for such functions to use, bind the symbol *package*
temporarily to the desired package with pkg-bind
.
There are actually four forms of the intern
function: regular
intern
, intern-soft
, intern-local
, and
intern-local-soft
. -soft
means that the symbol should not be
added to the package if there isn’t already one; in that case, all three
values are nil
. -local
turns off inheritance; it means that the
used packages should not be searched. Thus, intern-local
can be
used to cause shadowing. intern-local-soft
is right when you want
complete control over what packages to search and when to add symbols.
All four forms of intern
return the same three values, except that
the soft
forms return nil nil nil
when the symbol isn’t found.
*package*
) ¶The simplest case of intern
is where string-or-symbol is a string.
(It makes a big difference which one you use.)
intern
searches pkg and its used packages sequentially, looking
for a symbol whose print-name is equal to string-or-symbol. If one is found,
it is returned. Otherwise, a new symbol with string-or-symbol as print name
is created, placed in package pkg, and returned.
The first value of intern
is always the symbol found or created.
The second value tells whether an existing symbol was found, and how.
It is one of these four values:
:internal
A symbol was found present directly in pkg, and it was internal in pkg.
:external
A symbol was found present directly in pkg, and it was external in pkg.
:inherited
A symbol was found by inheritance from a package used by pkg. You can deduce that the symbol is external in that package.
nil
A new symbol was created
The third value returned by intern
says which package the symbol found
or created is present directly in. This is different from pkg if and only if
if the second value is :inherited
.
If string-or-symbol is a symbol, the search goes on just the same,
using the print-name of string-or-symbol as the string to search
for. But if no existing symbol is found, string-or-symbol itself is
placed directly into pkg, just as import
would do. No new
symbol is created; string-or-symbol itself is the “new” symbol.
This is done even if string-or-symbol is already present in another
package. You can create arbitrary arrangements of sharing of symbols
between packages this way.
Note: intern
is sensitive to case; that is, it will consider two
character strings different even if the only difference is one of
upper-case versus lower-case. The reason that symbols get converted
to upper-case when you type them in is that the reader converts
the case of characters in symbols; the characters are converted to
upper-case before intern
is ever called. So if you call intern
with a lower-case "foo"
and then with an upper-case "FOO"
, you
won’t get the same symbol.
*package*
) ¶Like intern
but ignores inheritance. If a symbol whose name
matches string-or-symbol is present directly in pkg,
it is returned; otherwise string-or-symbol (if it is a symbol)
or a new symbol (if string-or-symbol is a string) is placed
directly in pkg.
intern-local
returns second and third values with the same meaning
as those of intern
. However, the second value can never be
:inherited
, and the third value is always pkg.
The function import
is implemented by passing the symbol
to be imported to intern-local
.
*package*
) ¶*package*
) ¶Like intern
but never creates a symbol or modifies pkg.
If no existing symbol is found, nil
is returned for all
three values. It makes no important difference if you
pass a symbol instead of a string.
intern-soft
returns second and third values with the same meaning
as those of intern
. However, if the second value is nil
,
it does not mean that a symbol was created, only that none was found.
In this case, the third value is nil
rather than a package.
find-symbol
is the Common Lisp name for this function.
The two names are synonymous.
*package*
) ¶Like intern-soft
but without inheritance. If a matching symbol
is found directly present in pkg, it is returned;
otherwise, the value is nil
.
intern-local-soft
returns second and third values with the same meaning
as those of intern
. However, if the second value is nil
,
it does not mean that a symbol was created, only that none was found.
Also, it can never be :inherited
. The third value is rather useless
as it is either pkg, or nil
if the second value is nil
.
(symbol-package symbol)
) ¶*package*
) ¶Both remove symbol from package.
symbol itself is unaffected, but intern
will no longer find
it in package. symbol is not removed from any other package,
even packages used by package, if it should be present in them.
If symbol was present in package (and therefore, was removed)
then the value is t
; otherwise, the value is nil
.
In remob
, package defaults to the contents of the symbol’s
package cell, the package it belongs to. In unintern
, package
defaults to the current package. unintern
is the Common Lisp
version and remob
is the traditional version.
If package is the package that symbol belongs to, then
symbol is marked as uninterned: nil
is stored in its package
cell.
If a shadowing symbol is removed, a previously-hidden name conflict between distinct symbols with the same name in two used packages can suddenly be exposed, like a discovered check in chess. If this happens, an error is signaled.
In a package that uses global
, it may be desirable to avoid
inheriting a few standard Lisp symbols. Perhaps the user has defined a function
copy-list
, knowing that this symbol was not in global
, and then
a system function copy-list
was created as part of supporting Common
Lisp. Rather than changing the name in his program, he can shadow
copy-list
in the program’s package. Shadowing a symbol in a package
means putting a symbol in that package which hides any symbols with the
same name which could otherwise have been inherited there. The symbol
is explicitly marked as a shadowing symbol so that the name conflict
does not result in an error.
Shadowing of symbols and shadowing of bindings are quite distinct. The same word is used for them because they are both examples of the general abstract concept of shadowing, which is meaningful whenever there is inheritance.
Shadowing can be done in the definition of a package (see
defpackage-fun) or by calling the function shadow
. (shadow
"COPY-LIST")
creates a new symbol named copy-list
in the current
package, regardless of any symbols with that name already available
through inheritance. Once the new symbol is present directly in the
package and marked as a shadowing symbol, the potentially inherited
symbols are irrelevant.
*package*
) ¶Makes sure that shadowing symbols with the specified names exist in package. names is either a string or symbol or a list of such. If symbols are used, only their names matter; they are equivalent to strings. Each name specified is handled independently as follows:
If there is a symbol of that name present directly in package, it is marked as a shadowing symbol, to avoid any complaints about name conflicts.
Otherwise, a new symbol of that name is created and interned in package, and marked as a shadowing symbol.
Shadowing must be done before programs are loaded into the package, since if the programs are loaded without shadowing first they will contain pointers to the undesired inherited symbol. Merely shadowing the symbol at this point does not alter those pointers; only reloading the program and rebuilding its data structures from scratch can do that.
If it is necessary to refer to a shadowed symbol, it can be done
using a package prefix, as in global:copy-list
.
Shadowing is not only for symbols inherited from global
; it can be
used to reject inheritance of any symbol. Shadowing is the primary means
of resolving name conflicts in which there multiple symbols with the
same name are available, due to inheritance, in one package.
Name conflicts are not permitted to exist unless a resolution for the conflict has been stated in advance by specifying explicitly which symbol is actually to be seen in package. If no resolution has been specified, any command which would create a name conflict signals an error instead.
For example, a name conflict can be created by use-package
if it adds a new
used package with its own symbol foo
to a package which already has or inherits
a different symbol with the same name foo
. export
can cause a name conflict
if the symbol becoming external is now supposed to be inherited by another
package which already has a conflicting symbol. On either occasion, if shadowing
has not already been performed to control the outcome, an error is signaled
and the useage or exportation does not occur.
The conflict is resolved–in advance, always–by placing the preferred
choice of symbol in the package directly, and marking it as a shadowing
symbol. This can be done with the function shadowing-import
.
(Actually, you can proceed from the error and specify a resolution, but
this works by shadowing and retrying. From the point of view of the
retried operation, the resolution has been done in advance.)
*package*
) ¶Interns the specified symbols in package and marks them as shadowing symbols. symbols must be a list of symbols or a single symbol; strings are not allowed.
Each symbol specified is placed directly into package, after first removing any
symbol with the same name already interned in package. This is rather drastic,
so it is best to use shadowing-import
right after creating a package, when
it is still empty.
shadowing-import
is primarily useful for choosing one of several conflicting
external symbols present in packages to be used.
Once a package has a shadowing symbol named foo
in it, any other potentially
conflicting external symbols with name foo
can come and go in the inherited
packages with no effect. It is therefore possible to perform the
use-package
of another package containing another foo
, or to export
the foo
in one of the used packages, without getting an error.
In fact, shadow
also marks the symbol it creates as a shadowing
symbol. If it did not do so, it would be creating a name conflict and
would always get an error.
Returns the list of shadowing symbols of package. Each of these is a symbol present directly in package. When a symbol is present directly in more than one package, it can be a shadowing symbol in one and not in another.
The unsophisticated user need never be aware of the existence of
packages when writing his programs. His files are loaded into package
user
by default, and keyboard input is also read in user
by
default. Since all the functions that unsophisticated users are likely
to need are provided in the global
package, which user
inherits
from, they are all available without special effort. In this manual,
functions that are not in the global
package are documented with
colons in their names, and they are all external, so typing the name the way
it is documented does work in both traditional and Common Lisp syntax.
However, if you are writing a generally useful tool, you should
put it in some package other than user
, so that its internal
functions will not conflict with names other users use. If your program
contains more than a few files, it probably should have its own
package just on the chance that someone else will use it someday
along with other programs.
If your program is large, you can use multiple packages to help keep its modules independent. Use one package for each module, and export from it those of the module’s symbols which are reasonable for other modules to refer to. Each package can use the packages of other modules that it refers to frequently.
A package has one name, also called the primary name for extra clarity, and can have in addition any number of nicknames. All of these names are defined globally, and all must be unique. An attempt to define a package with a name or nickname that is already in use is an error.
Either the name of a package or one of its nicknames counts as a name for the package. All of the functions described below that accept a package as an argument also accept a name for a package (either as a string, or as a symbol whose print-name is the name). Arguments that are lists of packages may also contain names among the elements.
When the package object is printed, its primary name is used. The name is also used by default when printing package prefixes of symbols. However, when you create the package you can specify that one of the nicknames should be used instead for this purpose. The name to be used for this is called the prefix name.
Case is significant in package name lookup. Usually package names should be
all upper case. read
converts package prefixes to upper case except for quoted
characters, just as it does to symbol names, so the package prefix will match
the package name no matter what case you type it in, as long as the actual name
is upper case: TV:FOO
and tv:foo
refer to the same symbol.
|tv|:foo
is different from them, and normally erroneous since there is no
package initially whose name is ‘tv’ in lower case.
In the functions find-package
and pkg-find-package
, and others which accept
package names in place of packages, if you specify the name as a string you
must give it in the correct case:
(find-package "TV") => the tv
package
(find-package "tv") => nil
You can alternatively specify the name as a symbol; then the symbol’s pname is
used. Since read
converts the symbol’s name to upper case, you can type the
symbol in either upper or lower case:
(find-package 'TV) => thetv
package (find-package 'tv) => thetv
package
since both use the symbol whose pname is "TV"
.
Relevant functions:
Returns the name of package (as a string).
Returns the list of nicknames (strings) of package. This does not include the name itself.
Returns the name to be used for printing package prefixes that refer to package.
Makes new-name be the name for package, and makes
new-nicknames (a list of strings, possibly nil
) be its nicknames.
An error is signaled if the new name or any of the new nicknames is
already in use for some other package.
Returns the package which name is a name for, or nil
if there is none.
If use-local-names-package is non-nil
, the local nicknames of that package
are checked first. Otherwise only actual names and nicknames are accepted.
use-local-names-package should be supplied only when interpreting
package prefixes.
If name is a package, it is simply returned.
If a list is supplied as name, it is interpreted as a specification of a package name and how to create it. The list should look like
(name super-or-use size)
or
(name options)
If name names a package, it is returned. Otherwise a package is created by passing
name and the options to make-package
.
Invokes find-package
on name and returns the package that finds, if any.
Otherwise, a package may be created, depending on create-p and possibly
on how the user answers. These values of create-p are meaningful:
nil
An error is signaled if an existing package is not found.
t
A package is created, and returned.
:find
nil
is returned.
:ask
The user is asked whether to create a package.
If he answers Yes
, a package is created and returned.
If he answers No
, nil
is returned.
If a package is created, it is done by calling make-package
with name as the only argument.
This function is not quite for historical compatibility only, since certain values of create-p provide useful features.
sys:package-not-found
: (error
) ¶is signaled by pkg-find-package
with second argument
:error
, nil
or omitted, when the package does not exist.
The condition instance supports the operations :name
and
:relative-to
; these return whatever was passed as the first and
third arguments to pkg-find-package
(the package name, and the
package whose local nicknames should be searched).
The proceed types that may be available include
:retry
says to search again for the specified name in case it has become defined; if it is still undefined, the error occurs again.
:create-package
says to search again for the specified name, and create a package with that name (and default characteristics) if none exists yet.
:new-name
is accompanied by a name (a string) as an argument. That name is used instead, ignoring any local nicknames. If that name too is not found, another error occurs.
:no-action
(available on errors from within read
) says to continue with the
entire read
as well as is possible without having a valid package.
Suppose you wish to test new versions of the Chaosnet
and file access programs. You could create new packages test-chaos
and test-file-access
, and use them for loading the new versions of the programs.
Then the old, installed versions would not be affected; you could still
use them to edit and save the files of the new versions. But one problem
must be solved: when the new file access program says "chaos:connect
"
it must get test-chaos:connect
rather than the actual chaos:connect
.
This is accomplished by making "CHAOS"
a local nickname for
"TEST-CHAOS"
in the context of the package test-file-access
.
This means that the when a chaos:
prefix is encountered while
reading in package test-file-access
, it refers to test-chaos
rather than chaos
.
Local nicknames are allowed to conflict with global names and nicknames; in fact, they are rarely useful unless they conflict. The local nickname takes precedence over the global name.
It is necessary to have a way to override local nicknames. If you
(pkg-goto 'test-file-access)
, you may wish to call a function
in chaos
(to make use of the old, working Chaosnet program).
This can be done using #:
as the package prefix instead of just :
.
#:
inhibits the use of local nicknames when it is processed.
It always refers to the package which is globally the owner of
the name that is specified.
#:
prefixes are printed whenever the package name printed is
also a local nickname in the current package; that is, whenever
an ordinary colon prefix would be misunderstood when read back
These are the functions which manage local nicknames.
Defines name as a local nickname in in-pkg for for-pkg. in-pkg and for-pkg may be packages, symbols or strings.
Eliminates name as a local nickname in in-pkg.
Looking up local nicknames is done with find-package
, by
providing a non-nil
use-local-names-package argument.
Before any package can be referred to or made current, it must be defined.
This is done with the special form defpackage
, which tells the package system
all sorts of things, including the name of the package, what packages it should use,
its estimated size, and some of the symbols which belong in it. The defpackage
form is recognized by Zmacs as a definition of the package name.
Defines a package named name. The alternating keywords and values are passed, unevaluated, to make-package to specify the rest of the information about how to construct the package.
If a package named name already exists, it is modified insofar as this is possible to correspond to the new definition.
Here are the possible options and their meanings
A list of nicknames for the new package. The nicknames should be specified as strings.
A number; the new package is initially made large enough to hold at least this many symbols before a rehash is needed.
A list of packages or names for packages which the new package should
inherit from, or a single name or package. It defaults to just the
global
package.
Specifies the name to use for printing package prefixes that refer to this package. It must be equal to either the package name or one of the nicknames. The default is to use the name.
If non-nil
, means that this package should not be put on the list
*all-packages*
. As a result, find-package
will not find this
package, not by its name and not by any of its nicknames. You can make
normal use of the package in all other respects (passing it as the
second argument to intern
, passing it to use-package
to make
other packages inherit from it or it from others, and so on).
If any of these arguments is non-nil
, it is passed to the function
of the same name, to operate on the package.
Thus, if shadow is ("FOO" "BAR")
, then
(shadow this-package '("FOO" "BAR"))
is done.
You could accomplish as much by calling export
, import
,
shadow
or shadowing-import
yourself, but it is clearer to
specify all such things in one central place, the defpackage
.
If non-nil
, is a list containing a package (or package name)
followed by names of symbols to import from that package. Specifying
import-from as (chaos "CONNECT" "LISTEN")
is nearly the same as specifying
import as (chaos:connect chaos:listen)
, the difference being that with
import-from the symbols connect
and listen
are not looked up in the chaos
package until it is time to import them.
If non-nil
, should be a package or name to be the superpackage
of the new package. This means that the new package should inherit from
that package, and also from all the packages that package inherits from.
In addition, the superpackage is marked as autoexporting.
Superpackages are obsolete and are implemented for compatibility only.
An alist specifying the local nicknames to have in this
package for other packages. Each element looks like (localname package)
,
where package is a package or a name for one, and localname is the
desired local nickname.
An alist specifying local nicknames by which this
package can be referred to from other packages. Each element looks like
(package localname)
, where package is a package name and localname is
the name to refer to this package by from package.
For example, the system package eh
could have been defined this way:
(defpackage "EH" :size 1200 :use ("GLOBAL" "SYS") :nicknames ("DBG" "DEBUGGER") :shadow ("ARG"))
It has room initially for at least 1200 symbols,
nicknames dbg
and debugger
, uses system
as well as global
,
and contains a symbol named arg
which is not the same as the arg
in global
. You may note that the function eh:arg
is documented in
this manual (see eh-arg-fun), as is the function arg
(see arg-fun).
The packages of our inheritance example (pkg-inheritance-example) might have been defined by
(defpackage 'chaos :size 1000 :use '(sys global) :export ("CONNECT" "OPEN-STREAM" "LISTEN" ... "OPEN-STATE" "RFC-RECEIVED-STATE" ...)) (defpackage 'file-access :size 1500 :use '(chaos global) :export ("OPEN-FILE" "CLOSE-FILE" "DELETE-FILE" ...) :import (chaos:connect chaos:open-state)) (defpackage 'mypackage :size 400 :use '(file-access global))
It is usually best to put the package definition in a separate file,
which should be loaded into the user
package. (It cannot
be loaded into the package it is defining, and no other package has
any reason to be preferred.) Often the files to be loaded into the
package belong to one or a few systems; then it is often convenient
to put the system definitions in the same file (see system-system).
A package can also be defined by the package attribute in a file’s
-*-
line. Normally this specifies which (existing) package to
load, compile or edit the file in. But if the attribute value
is a list, as in
-*-Package: (foo :size 300 :use (global system)); ...-*-
then loading, compiling or editing the file automatically
creates package foo
, if necessary with the specified options (just like
defpackage
options). No defpackage
is needed.
It is wise to use this feature only when the package is used
for just a single file. For programs containing multiple files,
it is good to make a system for them, and then convenient to
put a defpackage
near the defsystem
.
Creates and returns new package with name name.
The meanings of the keyword arguments are described under defpackage
(defpackage-fun).
*package*
) (size #o 200
) ¶Creates a new package named name of size size with superpackage super. This function is obsolete.
Kills the package specified or named. It is removed from the list which is searched when package names are looked up.
package-declare
is an older way of defining a package, obsolete
but still used.
(package-declare name superpackage size nil option-1 option-2 ...)
creates a package named name with initial size size.
super specifies the superpackage to use for this package.
Superpackages were an old way of specifying inheritance; it was
transitive, all symbols were inherited, and only one inheritance path
could exist. If super is global
, nothing special needs to be
done; otherwise, the old superpackage facility is simulated using the
super argument to make-package
.
body is now allowed to contain only these types of elements:
(shadow names)
Passes the names to the function SHADOW
.
(intern names)
Converts each name to a string and interns it in the package.
(refname refname packagename)
Makes refname a local nickname in this package for the package named packagename.
(myrefname packagename refname)
Makes refname a local nickname in the package named packagename
for this package. If packagename is "GLOBAL"
, makes refname a
global nickname for this package.
(external names)
Does nothing. This controlled an old feature that no longer exists.
To find and operate on every symbol present or available in a package,
you can choose between iteration macros that resemble dolist
and
mapping functionals that resemble mapcar
.
Note that all constructs that include inherited symbols in the iteration
can process a symbol more than once. This is because a symbol can be
directly present in more than one package. If it is directly present in
the specified package and in one or more of the used packages, the
symbol is processed once each time it is encountered. It is also
possible for the iteration to include a symbol that is not actually
available in the specified package. If that package shadows symbols
present in the packages it uses, the shadowed symbols are processed
anyway. If this is a problem, you can explicitly use intern-soft
to
see if the symbol handed to you is really available in the package.
This test is not done by default because it is slow and rarely needed.
Executes body once for each symbol findable in package either directly or through inheritance. On each iteration, the variable var is bound to the next such symbol. Finally the result-form is executed and its values are returned.
Executes body once for each symbol present directly in package. Inherited symbols are not considered. On each iteration, the variable var is bound to the next such symbol. Finally the result-form is executed and its values are returned.
Executes body once for each external symbol findable in package either directly or through inheritance. On each iteration, the variable var is bound to the next such symbol. Finally the result-form is executed and its values are returned.
Executes body once for each external symbol present directly in package. Inherited symbols are not considered. On each iteration, the variable var is bound to the next such symbol. Finally the result-form is executed and its values are returned.
Executes body once for each symbol present in any package. On each iteration, the variable var is bound to the next such symbol. Finally the result-form is executed and its values are returned.
Since a symbol can be directly present in more than one package, it is possible for the same symbol to be processed more than once.
*package*
) (inherited-p t
) ¶function should be a function of one argument. mapatoms
applies
function to all of the symbols in package. If inherited-p is
non-nil
, then the function is applied to all symbols available in package,
including inherited symbols.
"GLOBAL"
) ¶function should be a function of one argument.
mapatoms-all
applies function to all of the symbols
in package and all other packages which use package.
It is used by such functions as apropos
and who-calls
(see apropos-fun)
Example:
(mapatoms-all #'(lambda (x) (and (alphalessp 'z x) (print x))))
A package is a conceptual name space; it is also a Lisp object which
serves to record the contents of that name space, and is passed to
functions such as intern
to identify a name space.
t
if object is a package.
The value is a list of all packages, except for invisible ones
(see the invisble argument to make-package
, make-package-fun).
A Common Lisp function which returns *all-packages*
.
Respectively, the packages named global
, system
and keyword
.
Prints everything there is to know about package, except for all the symbols interned in it. package can be specified as a package or as the name of one.
To see all the symbols interned in a package, do
(mapatoms 'print package)
Common Lisp does not have defpackage
or -*-
lines in files.
One is supposed to use the function in-package
to specify
which package a file is loaded in.
Creates a package named name, with specified nicknames and used packages, or modifies an existing package named name to have those nicknames and used packages.
Then *package*
is set to this package.
Writing a call to in-package
at the beginning of the file
causes *package*
to be set to that package for the rest of the file.
If you wish to use this technique for the sake of portability,
it is best to have a -*-
line with a package attribute also.
While in-package
does work for loading and compilation of the file,
Zmacs does not respond to it.
In Common Lisp, the first argument to intern
or find-symbol
is required to be a symbol.
This section describes how the package system is initialized when generating a new software release of the Lisp Machine system; none of this should affect users.
The cold load, which contains the irreduceable minimum of the Lisp
system needed for loading the rest, contains the code for packages, but
no packages. Before it begins to read from the keyboard, it creates all
the standard packages based on information in si:initial-packages
,
applying make-package
to each element of it. At first all of the
packages are empty. The symbols which belong in the packages global
and system
are recorded on lists which are made from the files
SYS: SYS2; GLOBAL LISP
and SYS: SYS2; SYSTEM LISP
. Symbols
referred to in the cold load which belong in packages other than si
have strings (package names) in their package slots; scanning through
the area which contains all the symbols, the package initializer puts
each such symbol into the package it specifies, and all the rest into
si
unless they are already in global
or system
.
The initially present packages include:
global
Contains advertised global functions.
user
The default current package for the user’s type-in.
sys or system
Contains internal global symbols used by various system programs.
Many system packages use system
.
si or system-internals
Contains subroutines of many advertised
system functions. Many files of the Lisp system are loaded in si
.
compiler
Contains the compiler. compiler
uses sys
.
fs or file-system
Contains the code that deals with pathnames and accessing files.
fs
uses sys
.
eh or dbg
Contains the error handler and the debugger. Uses sys
.
cc or cadr
Contains the program that is used for debugging another machine. Uses sys
.
chaos
Contains the Chaosnet controller. Uses sys
.
tv
Contains the window system. Uses sys
.
zwei
Contains the editor.
format
Contains the function format
and its associated subfunctions.
cli
(Common Lisp Incompatible) contains symbols such as cli:member
which
the same pname as symbols in global
but incompatible definitions.
There are quite a few others, but it would be pointless to list them all.
Packages that are used for special sorts of data:
fonts
Contains the names of all fonts.
format
Contains the keywords for format
, as well as the code.
keyword
Contains all keyword symbols, symbols always written with a plain colon as a prefix. These symbols are peculiar in that they are automatically given themselves as values.
Here is a picture depicting the initial package inheritance structure
global keyword | /-----------------------------------\ fonts | | | | | user zwei system format (etc) cli | /----------------------------------\ | | | | | | system-internals eh chaos cadr fs compiler
This isn’t finished yet, which is why we don’t say how to do any of this.
Suppose a maintainer of ZWEI (the Lisp Machine editor) has made some changes to ZWEI, and would like to debug them. He has a problem: if he reads in the new version, which presumably may be full of bugs, then he will not be able to do any editing! This would be annoying, since the editor is very useful.
We would like both the regular and the experimental versions
of the editor to both be loaded into the Lisp world. In order for two
definitions of each editor function to coexist, we need to load the
new version into a separate package, which must have a different name
(not named zwei
, like the package the original editor is in). If
the test version’s package is called test-zwei
, then the user can
try it by calling (test-zwei:ed)
, and edit it using (ed)
.
However, there is a problem to be faced. The editor redefines
a few entry-point functions (ed
, edprop
, etc) which reside in global
.
If the test editor redefined them, the whole point of the separate
package would be lost. So, the test-zwei
package must shadow
all these
symbols.
Further complications are needed to make it possible to test
one program using another instead of by hand. Suppose that there is a
program named random
residing in its own package, and containing a
function named number
. Suppose that we have a debugged program dp
(Dissociated Press) which uses random:number
. And now, we have
written a new version of random
and want to test it using dp
, without
installing it and breaking system tools which use random
. What we
want to do is to load in a test version of random
, test-random
, and
also a test-dp
which will refer to it, to test it with.
This can be done if we can make the test-dp
package
take references to random
as references to the test-random
package. All this takes is
an entry on test-dp
’s refname-alist, associating the name random
with the test-random
package. Then, when random:number
is seen in the
course of reading in the old dp
program into test-dp
,
test-random:number
will actually be used. Note that normally test-dp
wouldn’t have an entry on its own refname-alist for random
; it
would inherit the association from global
. We are actually
shadowing in test-dp
the definition of random
as a package refname
which is present in global
. Here is what we will get.
global [random -> random] | /-----------------------------------------------\ | | | | dp => random test-dp => test-random [random -> test-random]
(‘=>’ indicates who calls whom; ‘->’ indicates a refname).
So far, every package has had its own name as a refname for
itself. A test package, however, shouldn’t have its actual name as a
refname for itself, but the name its program expects: random
, not
test-random
. This is necessary to handle test packages with
subpackages right, together with shadowing. In fact every package has
a “program name” as well as a “name”. For ordinary packages, they are
the same, but for a test package, the program name is identical to
that of the original package.
Suppose we have the Macsyma program with all of its sub-packages as
described above. Further assume that the input
sub-program’s author
has his own symbol named simp
, and he calls macsyma:simp
in various places to get the
one in the macsyma
package. Now, say someone wants to load an
experimental macsyma
into the machine: he would name the new obarray
test-macsyma
or something. In order to assure that the reference to
macsyma:simp
is properly resolved, the refname-alist of test-macsyma
must contain test-macsyma
under the name macsyma
. This, finally,
is the reason why each package has a reference to itself on its refname-alist.
When a program gets large, it is often desirable to split it up into several files. One reason for this is to help keep the parts of the program organized, to make things easier to find. It’s also useful to have the program broken into small pieces that are more convenient to edit and compile. It is particularly important to avoid the need to recompile all of a large program every time any piece of it changes; if the program is broken up into many files, only the files that have changes in them need to be recompiled.
The apparent drawback to splitting up a program is that more commands are needed to manipulate it. To load the program, you now have to load several files separately, instead of just loading one file. To compile it, you have to figure out which files need compilation, by seeing which have been edited since they were last compiled, and then you have to compile those files.
What’s even more complicated is that files can have interdependencies.
You might have a file called DEFS
that contains some macro
definitions (or flavor or structure definitions), and functions in
other files might use those macros. This means that in order to
compile any of those other files, you must first load the file DEFS
into the Lisp environment so that the macros will be defined and can
be expanded at compile time. You have to remember this whenever you
compile any of those files. Furthermore, if DEFS
has changed, other
files of the program may need to be recompiled because the macros
may have changed and need to be re-expanded.
This chapter describes the system facility, which takes care of all
these things for you. The way it works is that you define a set of
files to be a system, using the defsystem
special form,
described below. This system definition says which files make up the
system, which ones depend on the presence of others, and so on. You
put this system definition into its own little file, and then all you
have to do is load that file and the Lisp environment will know about
your system and what files are in it. You can then use the
make-system
function (see make-system-fun) to load in all the
files of the system, recompile all the files that need compiling,
and so on.
The system facility is very general and extensible. This chapter explains how to use it and how to extend it. This chapter also explains the patch facility, which lets you conveniently update a large program with incremental changes.
Defines a system named name. The options selected by the keywords are explained in detail later. In general, they fall into two categories: properties of the system and transformations. A transformation is an operation such as compiling or loading that takes one or more files and does something to them. The simplest system is a set of files and a transformation to be performed on them.
Here are a few examples.
(defsystem mysys (:compile-load ("OZ:<GEORGE>PROG1.LISP" "OZ:<GEORGE2>PROG2.LISP"))) (defsystem zmail (:name "ZMail") (:pathname-default "SYS: ZMAIL;") (:package zwei) (:module defs "DEFS") (:module mult "MULT" :package tv) (:module main ("TOP" "COMNDS" "MAIL" "USER" "WINDOW" "FILTER" mult "COMETH")) (:compile-load defs) (:compile-load main (:fasload defs))) (defsystem bar (:module reader-macros "BAR:BAR;RDMAC") (:module other-macros "BAR:BAR;MACROS") (:module main-program "BAR:BAR;MAIN") (:compile-load reader-macros) (:compile-load other-macros (:fasload reader-macros)) (:compile-load main-program (:fasload reader-macros other-macros)))
The first example defines a new system called mysys
, which
consists of two files, stored on a Tops-20 host names OZ, both of which
are to be compiled and loaded. The second example is somewhat more
complicated. What all the options mean is described below, but the
primary difference is that there is a file DEFS
which must be loaded
before the rest of the files (main
) can be compiled. Also, the files
are stored on logical host SYS and directory ZMAIL.
The last example has two levels of dependency. reader-macros
must be
compiled and loaded before other-macros
can be compiled. Both
reader-macros
and other-macros
must then be loaded before
main-program
can be compiled. All the source files are stored on
host BAR, presumably a logical host defined specifically for this system.
It is desirable to use a logical host for the files of a system
if there is a chance that people at more than one site will be using it;
the logical host allows the identical defsystem
to be valid at all sites.
See logical-pathnames for more on logical hosts and logical pathnames.
Note that
The defsystem
options other than transformations are:
:name
Specifies a “pretty” version of the name for the system, for use in printing.
:short-name
Specified an abbreviated name used in constructing disk label comments and in patch file names for some file systems.
:component-systems
Specifies the names of other systems used to make up this system.
Performing an operation on a system with component systems is equivalent
to performing the same operation on all the individual systems. The format
is (:component-systems names...)
.
:package
Specifies the package in which transformations are performed. A package
specified here overrides one in the -*-
line of the file in question.
:pathname-default
Gives a local default within the definition of the system for strings to be parsed into pathnames. Typically this specifies the directory, when all the files of a system are on the same directory.
:warnings-pathname-default
Gives a default for the file to use to store compiler warnings in,
when make-system
is used with the :batch
option.
:patchable
Makes the system be a patchable system (see patch-facility). An optional
argument specifies the directory to put patch files in. The default is
the :pathname-default
of the system.
:initial-status
Specifies what the status of the system should be when make-system
is used
to create a new major version. The default is :experimental
. See
patch-system-status for further details.
:not-in-disk-label
Make a patchable system not appear in the disk label comment. This should probably never be specified for a user system. It is used by patchable systems internal to the main Lisp system, to avoid cluttering up the label.
:default-binary-file-type
Specifies the file type to use for compiled Lisp files. The value you
specify should be a string. If you do not specify this, the standard file
type :qfasl
is used.
:module
¶Allows assigning a name to a set of files within the system. This name
can then be used instead of repeating the filenames. The format is
(:module name files options...)
. files is usually
a list of filenames (strings). In general, it is a
module-specification, which can be any of the following:
This is a file name.
This is a module name. It stands for all of the files which are in that module of this system.
This is a list of the form (system-name module-names...)
,
to specify modules in another system. It stands for all of the files which
are in all of those modules.
A module component is any of the above, or the following:
This is used in the case where the names of the input and output files of a transformation are not related according to the standard naming conventions, for example when a QFASL file has a different name or resides on a different directory than the source file. The file names in the list are used from left to right, thus the first name is the source file. Each file name after the first in the list is defaulted from the previous one in the list.
To avoid syntactic ambiguity, this is allowed as a module component but not as a module specification.
The currently defined options for the :module
clause are
:package
Overrides any package specified for the whole system for transformations performed on just this module.
In the second defsystem
example above, there are three modules. Each of the
first two has only one file, and the third one (main
) is made
up both of files and another module. To take examples of the other
possibilities,
(:module prog (("SYS: GEORGE; PROG" "SYS: GEORG2; PROG"))) (:module foo (defs (zmail defs)))
The prog
module consists of one file, but it lives in two
directories, GEORGE
and GEORG2
. If this were a Lisp program,
that would mean that the file SYS: GEORGE; PROG LISP
would be compiled
into SYS: GEORG2; PROG QFASL
. The foo
module consists of two
other modules the defs
module in the same system, and the defs
module in the zmail
system. It is not generally useful to
compile files that belong to other systems; thus this foo
module
would not normally be the subject of a transformation.
However, dependencies (defined below) use modules and
need to be able to refer to (depend on) modules of other systems.
This function specifies which file contains the defsystem
for the
system system-name. filename can be a pathname object or a
string.
Sometimes it is useful to say where the definition of a system can be
found without taking time to load that file. If make-system
, or
require
(require-fun), is ever used on that system, the file
whose name has been specified will be loaded automatically.
Transformations are of two types, simple and complex. A simple transformation is a single operation on a file, such as compiling it or loading it. A complex transformation takes the output from one transformation and performs another transformation on it, such as loading the results of compilation.
The general format of a simple transformation is
(name input dependencies condition)
.
input is usually a module specification or another transformation whose output is used.
The transformation name is to be performed on all the files in the module, or
all the output files of the other transformation.
dependencies and condition are optional.
dependencies is a transformation specification, either a list
(transformation-name module-names...)
or a list of such lists.
A module-name is either a symbol that is the name of a module in the current system,
or a list (system-name module-names...)
. A dependency declares that
all of the indicated transformations must be performed on the indicated modules
before the current transformation itself can take place. Thus in
the zmail example above, the defs
module must have the :fasload
transformation performed on it before the :compile
transformation
can be performed on main
.
The dependency has to be a tranformation that is explicitly specified
as a transformation in the system definition, not just an action
that might be performed by anything. That is, if you have
a dependency (:fasload foo)
, it means that (fasload foo)
is
a tranformation of your system and you depend on that tranformation;
it does not simply mean that you depend on foo
’s being loaded.
Furthermore, it doesn’t work if (:fasload foo)
is an implicit
piece of another tranformation. For example, the following works:
(defsystem foo (:module foo "FOO") (:module bar "BAR") (:compile-load (foo bar)))
but this doesn’t work:
(defsystem foo (:module foo "FOO") (:module bar "BAR") (:module blort "BLORT") (:compile-load (foo bar)) (:compile-load blort (:fasload foo)))
because foo
’s :fasload
is not mentioned explicitly (i.e at
top level) but is only implicit in the (:compile-load (foo bar))
. One
must instead write:
(defsystem foo (:module foo "FOO") (:module bar "BAR") (:module blort "BLORT") (:compile-load foo) (:compile-load bar) (:compile-load blort (:fasload foo)))
condition is a predicate which specifies when the transformation should take place. Generally it defaults according to the type of the transformation. Conditions are discussed further on transformation-condition-discussion.
The defined simple transformations are:
:fasload
Calls the fasload
function to load the indicated files, which must
be QFASL files whose pathnames have canonical type :qfasl
(see
canonical-types). The condition defaults to
si:file-newer-than-installed-p
, which is t
if a newer version of
the file exists on the file computer than was read into the current
environment.
:readfile
Calls the readfile
function to read in the indicated files, whose
names must have canonical type :lisp
. Use this for files that are
not to be compiled. condition defaults to
si:file-newer-than-installed-p
.
:compile
Calls the compile-file
function to compile the indicated files, whose names
must have canonical type :lisp
. condition defaults to
si:file-newer-than-file-p
, which returns t
if the source file
has been written more recently than the binary file.
A special simple transformation is
:do-components
(:do-components dependencies)
inside a system with component
systems causes the dependencies to be done before anything in
the component systems. This is useful when you have a module of macro
files used by all of the component systems.
The defined complex transformations are
:compile-load
(:compile-load input compile-dependencies load-dependencies
compile-condition load-condition)
is the same as (:fasload (:compile
input compile-dependencies compile-condition) load-dependencies
load-condition)
. This is the most commonly-used transformation.
Everything after input is optional.
:compile-load-init
As was explained above, each filename in an input specification can
in fact be a list of strings when the source file of a program
differs from the binary file in more than just the file type. In fact, every
filename is treated as if it were an infinite list of filenames with
the last filename, or in the case of a single string the only filename,
repeated forever at the end. Each simple transformation takes some
number of input filename arguments and some number of output filename
arguments. As transformations are performed, these arguments are taken
from the front of the filename list. The input arguments are actually
removed and the output arguments left as input arguments to the next
higher transformation. To make this clearer, consider the prog
module above having the :compile-load
transformation performed on
it. This means that prog
is given as the input to the :compile
transformation and the output from this transformation is given as the
input to the :fasload
transformation. The :compile
transformation takes one input filename argument, the name of a Lisp
source file, and one output filename argument, the name of the QFASL
file. The :fasload
transformation takes one input filename
argument, the name of a QFASL file, and no output filename arguments.
So, for the first and only file in the prog
module, the filename
argument list looks like ("SYS: GEORGE; PROG" "SYS: GEORG2; PROG" "SYS:
GEORG2; PROG" ...)
. The :compile
transformation is given
arguments of "SYS: GEORGE; PROG"
and "SYS: GEORG2; PROG"
and the
filename argument list which it outputs as the input to the :fasload
transformation is ("SYS: GEORG2; PROG" "SYS: GEORG2; PROG" ...)
. The :fasload
transformation then is given its one argument of "SYS: GEORG2; PROG"
.
Note that dependencies are not transitive or inherited. For example, if
module a
depends on macros defined in module b
, and therefore needs
b
to be loaded in order to compile, and b
has a similar dependency
on c
, c
need not be loaded for compilation of a
. Transformations
with these dependencies would be written
(:compile-load a (:fasload b)) (:compile-load b (:fasload c))
To say that compilation of a
depends on both b
and c
, you
would instead write
(:compile-load a (:fasload b c)) (:compile-load b (:fasload c))
If in addition a
depended on c
(but not b
) during loading
(perhaps a
contains defvar
s whose initial values depend on functions
or special variables defined in c
) you would write the transformations
(:compile-load a (:fasload b c) (:fasload c)) (:compile-load b (:fasload c))
The make-system
function does the actual work of compiling and
loading. In the example above, if PROG1
and PROG2
have both
been compiled recently, then
(make-system 'mysys)
loads them as necessary. If either one might also need to be compiled, then
(make-system 'mysys :compile)
does that first as necessary.
The very first thing make-system
does is check whether the file
which contains the defsystem
for the specified system has changed
since it was loaded. If so, it offers to load the latest version, so
that the remainder of the make-system
can be done using the latest
system definition. (This only happens if the filetype of that file is
LISP
.) After loading this file or not, make-system
goes on to
process the files that compose the system.
If the system name is not recognized, make-system
attempts to load the file
SYS: SITE; system-name SYSTEM
, in the hope that that contains a system definition
or a call to si:set-system-source-file
.
make-system
lists what transformations it is going to perform on
what files, then asks the user for confirmation. If the user types S when
confirmation is requested, then make-system
asks about each file
individually so that the user can decide selectively which
transformations should be performed; then collective reconfirmation is
requested. This is like what happens if the :selective
keyword
is specified. If the user types Y, the transformations are performed.
Before each transformation a message is printed listing the
transformation being performed, the file it is being done to, and the
package. This behavior can be altered by keywords.
If the system being made is patchable, and if loading has not been inhibited,
then the system’s patches are loaded afterward. Loading of patches
is silent if the make-system
is, and requires confirmation if the
make-system
does.
These are the keywords recognized by the make-system
function and
what they do.
:noconfirm make-system
Assumes a yes answer for all questions that would otherwise be asked of the user.
:selective make-system
Asks the user whether or not to perform each transformation that appears to be needed for each file.
:silent make-system
Avoids printing out each transformation as it is performed.
:reload make-system
Bypasses the specified conditions for performing a transformation. Thus files are compiled even if they haven’t changed and loaded even if they aren’t newer than the installed version.
:noload make-system
Does not load any files except those required by dependencies. For use in
conjunction with the :compile
option.
:compile make-system
Compiles files also if need be. The default is to load but not compile.
:recompile make-system
This is equivalent to a combination of :compile
and :reload
:
it specifies compilation of all files, even those whose sources have
not changed since last compiled.
:no-increment-patch make-system
When given along with the :compile
option, disables the automatic
incrementing of the major system version that would otherwise take
place. See patch-facility.
:increment-patch make-system
Increments a patchable system’s major version without doing any compilations. See patch-facility.
:no-reload-system-declaration make-system
Turns off the check for whether the file containing the defsystem
has been changed. Then the file is loaded only if it has never been
loaded before.
:batch make-system
Allows a large compilation to be done unattended. It acts
like :noconfirm
with regard to questions, turns off more-processing and
fdefine-warnings (see inhibit-fdefine-warnings
,
inhibit-fdefine-warnings-var), and saves the compiler warnings in
an editor buffer and a file
(it asks you for the name).
:defaulted-batch make-system
This is like :batch
except that it uses the default for the pathname
to store warnings in and does not ask the user to type a pathname.
:print-only make-system
Just prints out what transformations would be performed; does not actually do any compiling or loading.
:noop make-system
Is ignored. This is useful mainly for programs that call make-system
,
so that such programs can include forms like
(make-system 'mysys (if compile-p :compile :noop))
make-system
keywords are defined as functions on the
si:make-system-keyword
property of the keyword. The functions are
called with no arguments. Some of the relevant variables they can use
are
The internal data structure that represents the system being made.
A list of forms that are evaluated before the transformations are performed.
A list of forms that are evaluated after the transformations have been performed. Transformations can push entries here too.
A list of forms that are evaluated by an unwind-protect
when the
body of make-system
is exited, whether it is completed or not.
Closing the batch warnings file is done here. Unlike the
si:*make-system-forms-to-be-evaled-after*
forms, these forms are
evaluated outside of the “compiler warnings context”.
Controls how questions are asked. Its normal value is :normal
.
:noconfirm
means ask no questions and :selective
means
asks a question for each individual file transformation.
If t
, no messages are printed out.
If t
, :batch
was specified.
If t
, all transformations are performed, regardless of the condition functions.
A list of the types of transformations that should be performed, such as
(:fasload :readfile)
. The contents of this list are controlled by
the keywords given to make-system
. This list then controls which
transformations are actually performed.
The actual function that gets called with the list of transformations that need to be
performed. The default is si:do-file-transformations
.
Causes variable to be bound to value during the body of the call to make-system
.
This allows you to define new variables similar to those listed above.
value is evaluated on entry to make-system
.
If defvar-p is specified as (or defaulted to) t
, variable
is defined with defvar
. It is not given an initial value.
If defvar-p is specified as nil,
variable belongs to some other program and is not defvar
’ed here.
The following simple example adds a new keyword to make-system
called :just-warn
, which means that fdefine
warnings (see
fdefine-fun) regarding functions being overwritten should be printed
out, but the user should not be queried.
(si:define-make-system-special-variable inhibit-fdefine-warnings inhibit-fdefine-warnings nil) (defun (:just-warn si:make-system-keyword) () (setq inhibit-fdefine-warnings :just-warn))
(See the description of the inhibit-fdefine-warnings
variable, on
inhibit-fdefine-warnings-var.)
make-system
keywords can do something directly when called, or they
can have their effect by pushing a form to be evaluated onto
si:*make-system-forms-to-be-evaled-after*
or one of the other two similar lists.
In general, the only
useful thing to do is to set some special variable defined by
si:define-make-system-special-variable
. In addition to the ones
mentioned above, user-defined transformations may have their behavior
controlled by new special variables, which can be set by new keywords.
If you want to get at the list of transformations to be performed, for
example, the right way is to set
si:*file-transformation-function*
to a new function, which then
can call si:do-file-transformations
with a possibly modified
list. That is how the :print-only
keyword works.
Options to defsystem
are defined as macros on the
si:defsystem-macro
property of the option keyword. Such a macro can
expand into an existing option or transformation, or it can have side effects
and return nil
. There are several variables they can use; the only one
of general interest is
The internal data structure that represents the system that is currently being constructed.
Causes value to be evaluated and variable to be bound to the
result during the expansion of the defsystem
special form. This
allows you to define new variables similar to the one listed above.
This is the most convenient way to define a new simple transformation. The form is
(si:define-simple-transformation name function default-condition input-file-types output-file-types pretty-names compile-like load-like)
For example,
(si:define-simple-transformation :compile si:qc-file-1 si:file-newer-than-file-p (:lisp) (:qfasl))
input-file-types and output-file-types are how a transformation
specifies how many input filenames and output filenames it should
receive as arguments, in this case one of each. They also, obviously, specify
the default file type for these pathnames.
The si:qc-file-1
function is mostly like compile-file
, except for its interface to
packages. It takes input-file and output-file arguments.
pretty-names, compile-like, and load-like are optional.
pretty-names specifies how messages printed for the user should print
the name of the transformation. It can be a list of the
imperative (“Compile”), the present participle (“Compiling”), and
the past participle (“compiled”). Note that the past participle is not
capitalized, because when used it does not come at the beginning of a sentence.
pretty-names can be just a string, which is taken to be the imperative,
and the system will conjugate the participles itself. If pretty-names
is omitted or nil
it defaults to the name of the transformation.
compile-like and load-like say when the transformation should be performed.
Compile-like transformations are performed when the :compile
keyword is given to make-system
.
Load-like transformations are performed unless the :noload
keyword is given to make-system
.
By default compile-like is t
but load-like is nil
.
Complex transformations are defined as normal macro expansions, for example,
(defmacro (:compile-load si:defsystem-macro) (input &optional com-dep load-dep com-cond load-cond) `(:fasload (:compile ,input ,com-dep ,com-cond) ,load-dep ,load-cond))
It is sometimes useful to specify a transformation upon which something
else can depend, but which is performed not by default, but rather only
when requested because of that dependency. The transformation
nevertheless occupies a specific place in the hierarchy. The :skip
defsystem
macro allows specifying a transformation of this type.
For example, suppose there is a special compiler for the read table
which is not ordinarily loaded into the system. The compiled version
should still be kept up to date, and it needs to be loaded if ever the
read table needs to be recompiled.
(defsystem reader (:pathname-default "SYS: IO;") (:package system-internals) (:module defs "RDDEFS") (:module reader "READ") (:module read-table-compiler "RTC") (:module read-table "RDTBL") (:compile-load defs) (:compile-load reader (:fasload defs)) (:skip :fasload (:compile read-table-compiler)) (:rtc-compile-load read-table (:fasload read-table-compiler)))
Assume that there is a complex transformation :rtc-compile-load
,
which is like :compile-load
except that is is built on a
transformation called something like :rtc-compile
, which uses the
read table compiler rather than the Lisp compiler. In the above
system, then, if the :rtc-compile
transformation is to be performed,
the :fasload
transformation must be done on read-table-compiler
first, that is the read table compiler must be loaded if the read table
is to be recompiled. If you say (make-system 'reader :compile)
,
then the :compile
transformation is done on the
read-table-compiler
module despite the :skip
, compiling the read table compiler if
need be. If you say (make-system 'reader)
, the reader and the
read table are loaded, but the :skip
keeps this from happening
to the read table compiler.
So far nothing has been said about what can be given as a condition
for a transformation except for the default functions, which check for
conditions such as a source file being newer than the binary. In
general, any function that takes the same arguments as the
transformation function (e.g compile-file
) and returns t
if the
transformation needs to be performed, can be in this place as a symbol,
including for example a closure. To take an example, suppose there is a
file that contains compile-flavor-methods
for a system and that
should therefore be recompiled if any of the flavor method definitions
change. In this case, the condition function for compiling that file
should return t
if either the source of that file itself or any of
the files that define the flavors have changed. This is what the
:compile-load-init
complex transformation is for. It is defined
like this:
(defmacro (:compile-load-init si:defsystem-macro) (input add-dep &optional com-dep load-dep &aux function) (setq function (let-closed ((*additional-dependent-modules* add-dep)) 'compile-load-init-condition)) `(:fasload (:compile ,input ,com-dep ,function) ,load-dep)) (defun compile-load-init-condition (source-file qfasl-file) (or (si:file-newer-than-file-p source-file qfasl-file) (local-declare ((special *additional-dependent-modules*)) (si:other-files-newer-than-file-p *additional-dependent-modules* qfasl-file))))
The condition function generated when this macro is used
returns t
either if si:file-newer-than-file-p
would with those
arguments, or if any of the other files in add-dep
, which presumably
is a module specification, are newer than the QFASL file. Thus
the file (or module) to which the :compile-load-init
transformation
applies will be compiled if it or any of the source files it depends on has
been changed, and will be loaded under the normal conditions. In most
(but not all cases), com-dep
is a :fasload
transformation
of the same files as add-dep
specifies, so that all the files this
one depends on will be loaded before compiling it.
In Common Lisp, a module is a name given to a group of files of code.
Modules are not like systems because nothing records what the “contents” of any
particular module may be. Instead, one of the files which defines the module
contains a provide
form which says, when that file is loaded, “Module foo
is now present.” Other files may say, using require
, “I want to use module foo
.”
Normally the require
form also specifies the files to load if
foo
has not been provide
’d already. This is where the
information of which files are in a module is stored. If the
require
does not have file names in it, the module name foo
is
used in an implementation-dependent manner to find files to load.
The Lisp Machine does this by using it as a system name in make-system
.
Adds module-name to the list *modules*
of modules already
loaded. module-name should be a string; case is significant.
If module module-name is not already loaded (on *modules*
), files are
loaded in order to make the module available.
module-name should be a string; case is significant.
The elements of files should be pathnames or namestrings.
If files is nil
, (make-system module-name :noconfirm)
is done.
Note, however, that case is not significant in the argument to make-system
.
A list of names (strings) of all modules provide
’d so far.
The patch facility allows a system maintainer to manage new releases of a large system and issue patches to correct bugs. It is designed to be used to maintain both the Lisp Machine system itself and applications systems that are large enough to be loaded up and saved on a disk partition.
When a system of programs is very large, it needs to be maintained. Often problems are found and need to be fixed, or other little changes need to be made. However, it takes a long time to load up all of the files that make up such a system, and so rather than having every user load up all the files every time he wants to use the system, usually the files just get loaded once into a Lisp world, which is then saved away on a disk partition. Users then use this disk partition, copies of which may appear on many machines. The problem is that since the users don’t load up the system every time they want to use it, they don’t get all the latest changes.
The purpose of the patch system is to solve this problem. A patch file is a little file that, when you load it, updates the old version of the system into the new version of the system. Most often, patch files just contain new function definitions; old functions are redefined to do their new thing. When you want to use a system, you first use the Lisp environment saved on the disk, and then you load all the latest patches. Patch files are very small, so loading them doesn’t take much time. You can even load the saved environment, load up the latest patches, and then save it away, to save future users the trouble of even loading the patches. (Of course, new patches may be made later, and then these will have to be loaded if you want to get the very latest version.)
For every system, there is a series of patches that have been made to that system. To get the latest version of the system, you load each patch file in the series, in order. Sooner or later, the maintainer of a system wants to stop building more and more patches, and recompile everything, starting afresh. A complete recompilation is also necessary when a system is changed in a far-reaching way, that can’t be done with a small patch; for example, if you completely reorganize a program, or change a lot of names or conventions, you might need to completely recompile it to make it work again. After a complete recompilation has been done, the old patch files are no longer suitable to use; loading them in might even break things.
The way all this is kept track of is by labelling each version of a
system with a two-part number. The two parts are called the major
version number and the minor version number. The minor version
number is increased every time a new patch is made; the patch is
identified by the major and minor version number together. The major
version number is increased when the program is completely recompiled,
and at that time the minor version number is reset to zero. A complete
system version is identified by the major version number, followed by
a dot, followed by the minor version number. Thus, patch 93.9
is for major version 93 and minor version 9; it is followed by patch
93.10
.
To clarify this, here is a typical scenario. A new system is created;
its initial version number is 1.0
. Then a patch file is created;
the version of the program that results from loading the first patch
file into version 1.0
is called 1.1
. Then another patch file
might be created, and loading that patch file into system 1.1
creates version 1.2
. Then the entire system is recompiled, creating
version 2.0
from scratch. Now the two patch files are irrelevant,
because they fix old software; the changes that they reflect are
integrated into system 2.0
.
Note that the second patch file should only be loaded into system
1.1
in order to create system 1.2
; you shouldn’t load it into
1.0
or any other system besides 1.1
. It is important that all
the patch files be loaded in the proper order, for two reasons. First,
it is very useful that any system numbered 1.1
be exactly the same
software as any other system numbered 1.1
, so that if somebody
reports a bug in version 1.1
, it is clear just which software is
being complained about. Secondly, one patch might patch another patch;
loading them in some other order might have the wrong effect.
The patch facility keeps track of all the patch files that exist, remembering which version each one creates. There is a separate numbered sequence of patch files for each major version of each system. All of them are stored in the file system, and the patch facility keeps track of where they all are. In addition to the patch files themselves, there are patch directory files that contain the patch facility’s data base by which it keeps track of what minor versions exist for a major version, and what the last major version of a system is. These files and how to make them are described below.
In order to use the patch facility, you must define your system with
defsystem
(see system-system) and declare it as patchable with the
:patchable
option. When you load your system (with make-system
,
see make-system-fun), it is added to the list of all systems present in
the world. The patch facility keeps track of which version of each
patchable system is present and where the data about that system reside in
the file system. This information can be used to update the Lisp world
automatically to the latest versions of all the systems it contains. Once
a system is present, you can ask for the latest patches to be loaded, ask
which patches are already loaded, and add new patches.
You can also load in patches or whole new systems and then save the entire Lisp environment away in a disk partition. This is explained on disk-partition.
When a Lisp Machine is booted, it prints out a line of information
for each patchable system present in the booted Lisp world, saying
which major and minor versions are loaded. This is done by
print-herald
(see print-herald-fun).
With no arguments, this lists all the systems present in this world and, for each system, all the patches that have been loaded into this world. For each patch it shows the major version number (which is always the same since a world can only contain one major version), the minor version number, and an explanation of what the patch does, as typed in by the person who made the patch.
If print-system-modifications
is called with arguments, only the
modifications to the systems named are listed.
Prints the names and loaded version numbers of all patchable systems loaded, and the microcode. Also printed are the number of the band you booted, the amount of physical and virtual memory you have, the host name of the machine, and its associated machine name. Example:
MIT System, band 7 of CADR-1. 640K physical memory, 16127K virtual memory. System 98.43 CADR 3.6 ZMail 53.10 MIT-Specific 22.0 Microcode 309 MIT Lisp Machine One, with associated machine OZ.
format-dest defaults to t
; if it is nil
the answer is
returned as a string rather than printed out. format-dest can also
be a stream to print on.
Returns two values, the major and minor version numbers of the version
of system currently loaded into the machine, or nil
if that
system is not present. system defaults to "System"
.
nil
) ¶Returns a string giving information about which systems and what versions of the systems are loaded into the machine, and what microcode version is running. A typical string for it to produce is:
"System 98.48, CADR 3.6, MIT-Specific 22.0, microcode 309"
If brief-p is t
, it uses short names, suppresses the microcode
version, any systems which should not appear in the disk label comment,
the name System
, and the commas:
"98.48"
In order to use the patch facility, you must declare your system as
patchable by giving the :patchable
option to defsystem
(see
system-system). The major version of your system in the file system
is incremented whenever make-system
is used to compile it.
Thus a major version is associated with a set of QFASL files.
The major version of your system that is remembered as having been loaded into the
Lisp environment is set to the major version in the file system
whenever make-system
is used to load your system and the
major version in the file system is greater than what you had loaded before.
After loading your system, you can save it with the disk-save
function (see disk-save-fun). disk-save
asks you for any
additional information you want printed as part of the greeting when the
machine is booted. This is in addition to the names and versions of all
the systems present in this world. If the system version does not fit
in the partition comment field allocated in the disk label, disk-save
asks you to type in an abbreviated form.
This function is used to bring the current world up to the latest minor
version of whichever major version it is, for all systems present, or
for certain specified systems. If there are any patches
available, load-patches
offers to read them in.
With no arguments, load-patches
updates all the systems present in
this world. If you do not specify the systems to operate on, load-patches
also reloads
the site files if they have changed (site-files), and reloads the files defining
logical host translations if they have changed (fs:make-logical-pathname-host-fun).
options is a list of keywords. Some keywords are followed by an argument. The following options are accepted:
:systems list
¶list is a list of names of systems to be brought up to date. If this option is not specified, all patchable systems loaded are processed.
:unreleased
Loads unreleased patches with no special querying. These patches should be loaded for experimental use if you wish the benefit of the latest bug fixes, but should not be loaded if you plan to save a band.
:site
Loads the latest site files if they have been changed since last loaded. This is the default if you do not specify explicitly which systems to process.
:nosite
Prevents loading of site files. This is the default when you specify the systems to process.
:hosts
Reloads the files defining logical host translations if they have been changed since last loaded. This is the default if you do not specify explicitly which systems to process.
:nohosts
Prevents loading of logical host translation files. This is the default when you specify the systems to process.
:verbose
Prints an explanation of what is being done. This is the default.
:selective
For each patch, says what it is and then ask the user whether or not to
load it. This is the default. If the user answers P
(for
‘Proceed’), selective mode is turned off for any remaining patches to
the current system.
:noselective
Turns off :selective
.
:silent
Turns off both :selective
and :verbose
. In :silent
mode all necessary
patches are loaded without printing anything and without querying the user.
:force-unfinished
Loads patches that have not been finished yet, if they have been compiled.
load-patches
returns t
if any patches were loaded.
When you load a patchable system with make-system
,
load-patches
is called automatically on that system.
"SYSTEM"
) ¶Returns t
if the changes in patch
major-version.minor-version of system system-name are
loaded. If major-version is the major version of that system which
is currently loaded, then the changes in that patch are loaded if the
current minor version is greater than or equal to minor-version. If
the currently loaded major version is greater than major-version
then it is assumed that the newer system version contains all the
improvements patched into earlier versions, so the value is t
.
There are two editor commands that are used to create patch files.
During a typical maintenance session on a system you will make several
edits to its source files. The patch system can be used to copy these
edits into a patch file so that they can be automatically incorporated
into the system to create a new minor version. Edits in a patch file
can be modified function definitions, new functions, modified
defvar
’s and defconst
’s, or arbitrary forms to be evaluated, even including
load
’s of new files.
The first step in making a patch is to start it. At this stage you
must specify which patchable system you are making a patch for. Then you add
one or more pieces of code from other source files to the patch.
Finally you finish the patch. This is when you fill in the description
of what the patch does; this description is what load-patches
prints
when it offers to load the patch. If you have any doubts about whether
the patch will load and work properly, you finish it unreleased;
then you can load it to test it but no bands can be saved containing the
patch until you explicitly release it later.
It is important that any change you patch should go in a patch for the patchable system to which the changed source file belongs. This makes sure that nobody loads the change into a Lisp world which does not contain the file you were changing–something that might cause trouble. Also, it ensures that you never patch changes to the same piece of code in two different patchable systems’ patches. This would lead to disaster because there is no constraint on the order in which patches to two different systems are loaded.
Starting a patch can be done with Meta-X Start Patch
. It reads the
name of the system to patch with the minibuffer. Meta-X Add Patch
can also start a patch, so an explicit Meta-X Start Patch
is needed
only infrequently.
Meta-X Add Patch
adds the region (if there is one) or the current
“defun” to the patch file currently being constructed. If you change a
function, you should recompile it, test it, then once it works use Add
Patch
to put it in the patch file. If no patch is being constructed,
one is started for you; you must type in the name of the system to patch.
A convenient way to add all your changes to a patch file is to use
Meta-X Add Patch Changed Sections
or Meta-X Add Patch Buffer
Changed Sections
. These commands ask you, for each changed function
(or each changed function in the current buffer), whether to add it to
the patch being constructed. If you use these commands more than once,
a function which has been added to the patch and has not been changed
since is considered “unchanged”.
The patch file being constructed is in an ordinary editor buffer. If
you mistakenly Add Patch
something that doesn’t work, you can select
the buffer containing the patch file and delete it. Then later you can
Add Patch
the corrected version.
While you are making your patch file, the minor version number that has been allocated for you is reserved so that nobody else can use it. This way if two people are patching a system at the same time, they do not both get the same minor version number.
After testing and patching all of your changes, use Meta-X Finish Patch
to
install the patch file so that other users can load it. This compiles
the patch file if you have not done so yourself (patches are always compiled).
It also asks you for a comment describing the reason for the patch; load-patches
and print-system-modifications
print these comments. If the patch is
complex or it has a good chance of causing new problems, you should not use
Meta-X Finish Patch
; instead, you should make an unreleased patch.
A finished patch can be released or unreleased. If a patch is unreleased, it can be loaded in the usual manner if the user says ‘yes’ to a special query, but once it has been loaded the user will be strongly discouraged from saving a band. Therefore, you still have a chance to edit the patch file and recompile it if there is something wrong with it. You can be sure that the old broken patch will not remain permanently in saved bands.
To finish a patch without releasing it, use the command Meta-X Finish
Patch Unreleased
. Then the patch can be tested by loading it.
After a sufficient period for testing, you can release the patch with
Meta-X Release Patch
. If you discover a bug in the patch after this
point, it is not sufficient to correct it in this patch file; you must
put the fix in a new patch to correct any bands already saved with the
broken version of this patch.
It is a good principle not to add any new features or fix any additional bugs in a patch once that patch is released; change it only to correct problems with that patch. New fixes to other bugs should go in new patches.
You can only be constructing one patch at any time. Meta-X Add Patch
automatically adds to the patch you are constructing. But you can start
constructing a different patch without finishing the first. If you use
the command Meta-X Start Patch
while constructing a patch, you are
given the option of starting a new patch. The old patch ceases to be
the one you are constructing but the patch file remains in its editor buffer.
Later, or in another session, you can go back to constructing the first
patch with the command Meta-X Resume Patch
. This commands asks for
both a patchable system name and the patch version to resume constructing.
You can simply save the editor buffer of a patch file and resume
constructing that patch in a later session. You can even resume constructing a finished
patch; though it rarely makes sense to do this unless the patch is
unreleased.
If you start to make a patch and change your mind, use the command
Meta-X Cancel Patch
. This deletes the record that says that
this patch is being worked on. It also tells the editor that you
are no longer constructing any patch. You can undo a finished (but unreleased)
patch by using Resume Patch
and then Cancel Patch
. If a patch
is released, you cannot remove it from saved bands, so it is not
reasonable to cancel it at that stage.
A private patch is a file of changes which is not installed to be loaded
automatically in sequence by all users. It is loaded only by explicit
request (using the function load
). A private patch is not
associated with any particular patchable system, and has no version
number.
To make a private patch, use the editor command Meta-X Start Private
Patch
. Instead of a patchable system name, you must specify a
filename to use for the patch file; since the patch is not to be
installed, there is no standard naming convention for it to follow. Add
text to the patch using Meta-X Add Patch
and finish it using
Meta-X Finish Patch
. There is no concept of release for private
patches so there is no point in using Meta-X Finish Patch
Unreleased
. There is also no data base recording all private patches,
so Meta-X Start Private Patch
will resume an existing patch, or even
a finished patch. In fact, finishing a private patch is merely a way
to write a comment into it and compile it.
Once the private patch file is made, you can load it like any other file.
The private patch facility is just an easy way to copy code from various
files into one new file with Patch-File: T
in its attribute list (to
prevent warnings about redefining functions defined in other files) and
compile that file.
The patch system has the concept of the status of a major version of a
system. A status keyword is recorded in the Lisp world for each
patchable system that is loaded. There is also a current status for
each major version of each system, recorded in the patch directory file
for that major version. Loading patches updates the status in the Lisp
world to match the current status stored in the patch directory. The
status in the patch directory is changed with si:set-system-status
.
The status is displayed when the system version is displayed, in places
such as the system greeting message (print-herald
) and the disk
partition comment.
The status is one of the following keywords:
:experimental
The system has been built but has not yet been fully debugged and released to users.
This is the default status when a new major version is created, unless it is
overridden with the :initial-status
option to defsystem
.
:released
The system is released for general use. This status produces no extra text in the system greeting and the disk partition comment.
:obsolete
The system is no longer supported.
:broken
This is like :experimental
, but is used when the system was thought incorrectly
to have been debugged, and hence was :released
for a while.
:inconsistent
Unreleased patches to this system have been loaded.
If any patchable system is in this status, disk-save
demands extra
confirmation, and the resulting saved band is identified as “Bad” in its
disk partition comment.
Changes the current status of a system, as recorded in the patch directory file. system is the name of the system. major-version is the number of the major version to be changed; if unsupplied it defaults to the version currently loaded into the Lisp world. status should be one of the keywords above.
Do not set the current system status to :inconsistent
. A status of
:inconsistent
is set up in the Lisp world when an unreleased patch
is loaded, and once set that way it never changes in that Lisp world.
The status recorded in the system’s patch directory file should describe
the situation where all currently released patches are loaded.
It should never be :inconsistent
.
The patch system maintains several different types of files in
the directory associated with your system. This directory is specified
to defsystem
via either the :patchable
option or the :pathname-default
option. These files are maintained automatically, but they are described here
so that you can know what they are and when they are obsolete and can be deleted.
If the :patchable
option to defsystem
had no argument, then the
patch data files are stored on the host, device and directory specified as
the system’s pathname default. The names and types of the filenames
are all standard and do not include the name of the system in any way.
If the :patchable
option to defsystem
is given an argument, this
argument is a file namestring specifying the host, device and directory
to use for storing the patch data files. In addition, the system’s short name
is used in constructing the names of the files. This allows you to store
the patch data files for several systems in the same directory.
There are three kinds of files that record patch information:
*
the system patch directoryThis file records the current major version number, so that when the system is recompiled a new number can be allocated.
On Tops-20, this file has, by default, a name like OZ:PS:<MYDIR>PATCH.DIRECTORY
,
where the host, device, and directory (OZ:PS:<MYDIR>
) come
from the system’s :pathname-default
as explained above.
If :patchable
is given an argument, this file for system FOO
has
a name like OZ:PS:<PATDIR>FOO.PATCH-DIRECTORY
, where the host, device and directory
come from :patchable
’s argument.
*
the patch directory of a major versionThere is a file of this kind for each major version of the system. It records the patches that have been made for that major version: the minor version, author, description and release status of each one.
The data in this file are in the form of a printed representation of a
Lisp list with two elements. The first is the system status of this
major version (:experimental
, :released
, :broken
or
:obsolete
). The second is another list with an element for each
patch. The element for a patch is a list of length four: the minor
version, the patch description (a string) or nil
for an unfinished
patch, the author’s name (a string), and a flag that is t
if the
patch is unreleased.
On a Tops-20, for major version 259, this file has, by default, a name like
OZ:PS:<MYDIR>PATCH-259.DIRECTORY
.
If :patchable
is given an argument, this file for system FOO
has a name like
OZ:PS:<PATDIR>FOO-259.PATCH-DIRECTORY
.
*
the individual patchFor each patch made, there is a Lisp source file and a QFASL file.
On a Tops-20, for version 259.12, these files have, by default, names like
OZ:PS:<MYDIR>PATCH-259-12.LISP
and OZ:PS:<MYDIR>PATCH-259-12.QFASL
.
If :patchable
is given an argument, this file for system FOO
has a name like
OZ:PS:<PATDIR>FOO-259-12.PATCH-DIRECTORY
.
On certain types of file systems, slightly different naming conventions are used to keep the names short enough to be legal.
The Lisp Machine supports multi-processing; several computations can be executed concurrently by placing each in a separate process. A process is like a processor, simulated by software. Each process has its own program counter, its own stack of function calls and its own special-variable binding environment in which to execute its computation. (This is implemented with stack groups; see stack-group.)
If all the processes are simply trying to compute, the machine allows them all to run an equal share of the time. This is not a particularly efficient mode of operation since dividing the finite memory and processor power of the machine among several processes certainly cannot increase the available power and in fact wastes some of it in overhead. The typical use for processes is that at any time only one or two are trying to run. The rest are either waiting for some event to occur or stopped and not allowed to compete for resources.
A process waits for an event by means of the process-wait
primitive,
which is given a predicate function which defines the event being waited
for. A module of the system called the process scheduler periodically
calls that function. If it returns nil
the process continues to wait;
if it returns t
the process is made runnable and its call to
process-wait
returns, allowing the computation to proceed.
A process may be active or stopped. Stopped processes are
never allowed to run; they are not considered by the scheduler, and so
can never become the current process until they are made active again.
The scheduler continually tests the waiting functions of all the active
processes, and those which return non-nil
values are allowed to run.
When you first create a process with make-process
, it is inactive.
The activity of a process is controlled by two sets of Lisp objects associated with it, called its run reasons and its arrest reasons. These sets are implemented as lists. Any kind of object can be in these sets; typically keyword symbols and active objects such as windows and other processes are found. A process is considered active when it has at least one run reason and no arrest reasons.
To get a computation to happen in another process, you must first create a process, then say what computation you want to happen in that process. The computation to be executed by a process is specified as an initial function and a list of arguments to that function. When the process starts up it applies the function to the arguments. In some cases the initial function is written so that it never returns, while in other cases it performs a certain computation and then returns, which stops the process.
To reset a process means to exit its entire computation nonlocally
using *unwind-stack
(see *unwind-stack-fun). Some processes are
temporary and die when reset. The other, permanent functions start
their computations over again when reset. Resetting a process clears
its waiting condition, so that if it is active it becomes runnable. To
preset a function is to set up its initial function (and arguments)
and then reset it. This is how you start up a computation in a process.
All processes in a Lisp Machine run in the same virtual address space,
sharing the same set of Lisp objects. Unlike other systems that have
special restricted mechanisms for inter-process communication, the
Lisp Machine allows processes to communicate in arbitrary ways through
shared Lisp objects. One process can inform another of an event simply
by changing the value of a global variable. Buffers containing messages
from one process to another can be implemented as lists or arrays.
The usual mechanisms of atomic operations, critical sections, and
interlocks are provided
(see store-conditional
[store-conditional-fun],
without-interrupts
[without-interrupts-fun],
and process-lock
[process-lock-fun]).
A process is a Lisp object, an instance of one of several flavors of process (see flavor). The remainder of this chapter describes the operations defined on processes, the functions you can apply to a process, and the functions and variables a program running in a process can use to manipulate its process.
At any time there is a set of active processes; as described above, these are all the processes that are not stopped. Each active process is either currently running, runnable (ready to run), or waiting for some condition to become true. The active processes are managed by a special stack group called the scheduler, which repeatedly examines each active process to determine whether it is waiting or ready to run. The scheduler then selects one process and starts it up.
The process chosen by the scheduler becomes the current process,
that is, the one process that is running on the machine. The scheduler
sets the variable current-process
to it. It remains the current
process and continues to run until either it decides to wait, or a
sequence break occurs. In either case, the scheduler stack group is
resumed. It then updates the process’s run time meters and chooses a
new process to run next. This way, each process that is ready to run
gets its share of time in which to execute.
Each process has a priority which is a number. Most processes have priority zero. Larger numbers give a process more priority. The scheduler only considers the highest priority runnable processes, so if there is one runnable process with priority 20 then no process with lesser priority can run.
The scheduler determines whether a process is runnable by applying the
process’s wait-function to its wait-argument-list. If the
wait-function returns a non-nil
value, then the process is ready to
run; otherwise, it is waiting.
A process can wait for some condition to become true by calling
process-wait
(see process-wait-fun). This function sets the
process’s wait-function and wait-argument-list as specified by the
caller, and resumes the scheduler stack group. A process can also wait
for just a moment by calling process-allow-schedule
(see
process-allow-schedule-fun), which resumes the scheduler stack group
but leaves the process runnable; it will run again as soon as all other
runnable processes have had a chance.
A sequence break is a kind of interrupt that is generated by the Lisp
system for any of a variety of reasons; when it occurs, the scheduler is
resumed. The function si:sb-on
(see si:sb-on-fun) can be used to
control when sequence breaks occur. The default is to sequence break
once a second. Thus even if a process never waits and is not stopped,
it is forced to return control to the scheduler once a second so that
any other runnable processes can get their turn.
The system does not generate a sequence break when a page fault occurs; thus time spent waiting for a page to come in from the disk is “charged” to a process the same as time spent computing, and cannot be used by other processes. It is done this way for the sake of simplicity; this allows the whole implementation of the process system to reside in ordinary virtual memory, so that it does not have to worry specially about paging. The performance penalty is small since Lisp Machines are personal computers, not multiplexed among a large number of processes. Usually only one process at a time is runnable.
A process’s wait function is free to touch any data structure it likes and to perform any computation it likes. Of course, wait functions should be kept simple, using only a small amount of time and touching only a small number of pages, or system performance will be impacted since the wait function will consume resources even when its process is not running.
If a wait function gets an error, the error occurs inside the scheduler.
If this enters the debugger, all scheduling comes to a halt until the
user proceeds or aborts. Aborting in the debugger inside the scheduler
“blasts” the current process by giving it a trivial wait function that
always returns nil
; this prevents recurrence of the same problem.
It is best to write wait functions that cannot get errors, by keeping
them simple and by arranging for any problems to be detected before the
scheduler sees the wait function. process-wait
calls the wait
function once before giving it to the scheduler, and this often exposes
an error before it can interfere with scheduling.
Note well that a process’s wait function is executed inside the
scheduler stack-group, not inside the process. This means that a
wait function may not access special variables bound in the process. It
is allowed to access global variables. It can access variables bound by
a process through the closure mechanism (closure). If the wait
function is defined lexically within the caller of process-wait
then
it can access local variables through the lexical scoping mechanism.
Most commonly any values needed by the wait function are passed to it as
arguments.
The value of current-process
is the process that is currently
executing, or nil
while the scheduler is running. When the
scheduler calls a process’s wait-function, it binds current-process
to the process so that the wait-function can access its process.
The body forms are evaluated with
inhibit-scheduling-flag
bound to t
. This is the recommended
way to lock out multi-processing over a small critical section of code
to prevent timing errors. In other words the body is an
atomic operation. The values of the last form in the body
are ultimately returned.
In this example, list
is presumed to be a global variable
referred to from two places in the code which different
processes will execute.
(without-interrupts (push item list)) (without-interrupts (cond ((memq item list) (setq list (delq item list)) t) (t nil)))
The value of inhibit-scheduling-flag
is normally nil
.
without-interrupts
binds it to t
, which prevents
process-switching until inhibit-scheduling-flag
becomes nil
again. It is cleaner to use without-interrupts
than to refer
directly to this variable.
This is the primitive for waiting. The current process waits until the
application of function to arguments returns non-nil
(at which time process-wait
returns). Note that function is applied
in the environment of the scheduler, not the environment of the process-wait
,
so special bindings in effect when process-wait
was called are not be
in effect when function is applied. Be careful when using any free
references in function. whostate is a string containing a brief
description of the reason for waiting. If the who-line at the bottom
of the screen is looking at this process, it will show whostate.
Example:
(process-wait "Buffer" #'(lambda (b) (not (zerop (buffer-n-things b)))) the-buffer)
Waits for interval sixtieths of a second, and then returns.
It uses process-wait
.
Waits seconds seconds and then returns.
seconds need not be an integer. This also uses process-wait
.
This is like process-wait
except that if interval sixtieths of a
second go by and the application of function to arguments is
still returning nil
, then process-wait-with-timeout
returns
anyway. The value returned is the value of applying function to
arguments; thus, it is non-nil
if the wait condition actually
occurred, nil
for a time-out.
If interval is nil
, there is no timeout, and this function is then
equivalent to process-wait
.
body is executed with a timeout in effect for interval sixtieths of a second. If body finishes before that much time elapses, the values of the last form in body are returned.
If after interval has elapsed body has not completed, its
execution is terminated with a throw
caught by the with-timeout
form. Then the timeout-forms are evaluated and the values of the
last one of them are returned.
For example,
(with-timeout ((* 60. 60.) (format *query-io* " ... Yes.") t) (y-or-n-p "Really do it? (Yes after one minute) "))
is a convenient way to ask a question and assume an answer if the user does not respond promptly. This is a good thing to do for queries likely to occur when the user has walked away from the terminal and expects an operation to finish without his attention.
Resumes the scheduler momentarily; all other processes will get a chance to run before the current process runs again.
This is the stack group in which the scheduler executes.
This is a list of functions to be called by the scheduler 60 times a second. Each function is passed one argument, the number of 60ths of a second since the last time that the functions on this list were called. These functions implement various system overhead operations such as blinking the blinking cursor on the screen. Note that these functions are called inside the scheduler, just as are the functions of simple processes (see simple-process). The scheduler calls these functions as often as possible, but never more often than 60 times a second. That is, if there are no processes ready to run, the scheduler calls the clock functions 60 times a second, assuming that, all together, they take less than 1/60 second to run. If there are processes continually ready to run, then the scheduler calls the clock functions as often as it can; usually this is once a second, since usually the scheduler gets control only once a second.
This is the scheduler’s data-structure. It is a list of lists, where
the car of each element is an active process or nil
and the cdr is information
about that process.
This is a list of all the processes in existence. It is mainly for debugging.
This is the process in which the system starts up when it is booted.
Controls what events cause a sequence break, i.e when rescheduling occurs. The following keywords are names of events which can cause a sequence break.
:clock
This event happens periodically based on a clock. The default period
is one second. See sys:%tv-clock-rate
, sys:%tv-clock-rate-meter.
:keyboard
Happens when a character is received from the keyboard.
:chaos
Happens when a packet is received from the Chaosnet, or transmission of a packet to the Chaosnet is completed.
Since the keyboard and Chaosnet are heavily buffered, there is no
particular advantage to enabling the :keyboard
and :chaos
events,
unless the :clock
event is disabled.
With no argument, si:sb-on
returns a list
of keywords for the currently enabled events.
With an argument, the set of enabled events is changed. The argument
can be a keyword, a list of keywords, nil
(which disables sequence
breaks entirely since it is the empty list), or a number, which is the
internal mask, not documented here.
A lock is a software construct used for synchronization of two processes. A lock is either held by some process, or is free. When a process tries to seize a lock, it waits until the lock is free, and then it becomes the process holding the lock. When it is finished, it unlocks the lock, allowing some other process to seize it. A lock protects some resource or data structure so that only one process at a time can use it.
In the Lisp Machine, a lock is a locative pointer to a cell.
If the lock is free, the cell contains nil
; otherwise it contains
the process that holds the lock. The process-lock
and process-unlock
functions are written in such a way as to guarantee that two processes
can never both think that they hold a certain lock; only one process
can ever hold a lock at one time.
current-process
) (whostate "Lock"
) timeout ¶This is used to seize the lock that locative points to.
If necessary, process-lock
waits until the lock becomes free.
When process-lock
returns, the lock has been seized. lock-value
is the object to store into the cell specified by locative, and
whostate is passed on to process-wait
.
If timeout is non-nil
, it should be a fixnum representing a time
interval in 60ths of a second. If it is necessary to wait more than that long,
an error with condition name sys:lock-timeout
is signaled.
current-process
) ¶This is used to unlock the lock that locative points to.
If the lock is free or was locked by some other process, an
error is signaled. Otherwise the lock is unlocked. lock-value
must have the same value as the lock-value parameter to the matching
call to process-lock
, or else an error is signaled.
sys:lock-timeout
: (error
) ¶This condition is signaled when process-lock
waits longer than the
specified timeout.
It is a good idea to use unwind-protect
to make sure that
you unlock any lock that you seize. For example, if you write
(unwind-protect (progn (process-lock lock-3) (function-1) (function-2)) (process-unlock lock-3))
then even if function-1
or function-2
does a throw
,
lock-3
will get unlocked correctly. Particular programs that use
locks often define special forms that package this unwind-protect
up into a convenient stylistic device.
A higher level locking construct is with-lock
:
Executes the body with lock locked.
lock should actually be an expression whose value would be the
status of the lock; it is used inside locf
to get a locative
pointer with which the locking and unlocking are done.
It is OK for one process to lock a lock multiple times, recursively,
using with-lock
, provided norecursive is not nil
.
norecursive should be literally t
or nil
; it is not
evaluated. If it is t
, this call to with-lock
signals
an error if the lock is already locked by the running process.
A lower level construct which can be used to implement atomic
operations, and is used in the implementation of process-lock
,
is store-conditional
.
This stores newvalue into location iff location currently
contains oldvalue. The value is t
iff the cell was changed.
If location is a list, the cdr of the list is tested and stored
in. This is in accord with the general principle of how to access the
contents of a locative properly, and makes
(store-conditional (locf (cdr x)) ...)
work.
An even lower-level construct is the subprimitive
%store-conditional
, which is like store-conditional
with no
error checking, but is faster.
A process queue is a kind of lock which can record several processes which are waiting for the lock and grant them the lock in the order that they requested it. The queue has a fixed size. If the number of processes waiting remains less than that size then they will all get the lock in the order of requests. If too many processes are waiting then the order of requesting is not remembered for the extra ones, but proper interlocking is still maintained.
Makes and returns a process queue object named name, able to record size processes. The count of size includes the process that owns the lock.
Attempts to lock process-queue on behalf of lock-value. If
lock-value is nil
then the locking is done on behalf of
current-process
.
If the queue is locked, then lock-value or the current process is
put on the queue. Then this function waits for that lock value to reach
the front of the queue. When it does so, the lock has been granted, and
the function returns. The lock is now locked in the name of lock-value
or the current process, until si:process-dequeue
is used to unlock it.
who-state appears in the who line during the wait. It defaults to
"Lock"
.
Unlocks process-queue
. lock-value (which defaults to the current process)
must be the value which now owns the lock on the queue, or an error occurs.
The next process or other object on the queue is granted the lock and its
call to si:process-enqueue
will therefore return.
Unlocks the queue and clears out the list of things waiting to lock it.
Returns the object in whose name the queue is currently locked,
or nil
if it is not now locked.
There are two ways of creating a process. One is to create a permanent process which you will hold on to and manipulate as desired. The other way is to say simply, “call this function on these arguments in another process, and don’t bother waiting for the result.” In the latter case you never actually use the process itself as an object.
Creates and returns a process named name. The process is not capable of running until it has been reset or preset in order to initialize the state of its computation.
Usually you do not need to specify any of the keyword arguments. The following keyword arguments are allowed:
:simple-p
Specifying t
here gives you a simple process (see simple-process).
:flavor
Specifies the flavor of process to be created. See process-flavors, for a list of all the flavors of process supplied by the system.
:stack-group
Specifies the stack group the process is to use. If this option is not specified, a stack group is created according to the relevant options below.
:warm-boot-action
What to do with the process when the machine is booted. See si:process-warm-boot-action-method.
:quantum
:priority
:run-reasons
Lets you supply an initial run reason. The default is nil
.
:arrest-reasons
Lets you supply an initial arrest reason. The default is nil
.
:sg-area
The area in which to create the stack group. The default is
the value of default-cons-area
.
:regular-pdl-area
:special-pdl-area make-process
:regular-pdl-size make-process
:special-pdl-size make-process
These are passed on to make-stack-group
, make-stack-group-fun.
:swap-sv-on-call-out
:swap-sv-of-sg-that-calls-me make-process
:trap-enable make-process
Specify those attributes of the stack group. You don’t want to use these.
If you specify :flavor
, there can be additional options provided
by that flavor.
The following functions allow you to call a function and have its execution happen asynchronously in another process. This can be used either as a simple way to start up a process that will run “forever”, or as a way to make something happen without having to wait for it to complete. When the function returns, the process is returned to a pool of free processes for reuse. The only difference between these three functions is in what happens if the machine is booted while the process is still active.
Normally the function to be run should not do any I/O to the terminal, as it does not have a window and terminal I/O will cause it to make a notification and wait for user attention. Refer to sg-terminal-io-issues for a discussion of the issues.
Creates a process, presets it to apply function to args, and starts it running. The value returned is the new process. The process is killed if function returns; by default, it is also killed if it is reset. Example:
(defun background-print (file) (process-run-function "Print" 'hardcopy-file file))
creates a background process that prints the specified file.
name-or-options can be either a string specifying a name for the process or a list of alternating keywords and values that can specify the name and various other parameters.
:name
This keyword should be followed by a string which specifies the name
of the process. The default is "Anonymous"
.
:restart-after-reset
This keyword says what to do to the process if it is reset. nil
means the process should be killed; anything else means the process
should be restarted. nil
is the default.
:warm-boot-action
What to do with the process when the machine is booted. See si:process-warm-boot-action-method.
:restart-after-boot
This is a simpler way of saying what to do with the process when the
machine is booted. If the :warm-boot-action
keyword is not
supplied or its value is nil
, then this keyword’s value is used
instead. nil
means the process should
be killed; anything else means the process should be restarted.
nil
is the default.
:quantum
:priority
This is the same as process-run-function
except that the default is that
the process will be restarted if reset or after a warm boot.
You can get the same effect by using process-run-function
with
appropriate keywords.
These are the operations that are defined on all flavors of process. Certain process flavors may define additional operations. Not all possible operations are listed here, only those of interest to the user.
si:process
: :name ¶Returns the name of the process, which was the first argument to make-process
or process-run-function
when the process was created. The name is
a string that appears in the printed-representation of the process, stands for
the process in the who-line and the peek
display, etc.
si:process
: :stack-group ¶Returns the stack group currently executing on behalf of this process. This can be different from the initial-stack-group if the process contains several stack groups that coroutine among themselves, or if the process is in the error-handler, which runs in its own stack group.
Note that the stack-group of a simple process (see simple-process) is not a stack group at all, but a function.
si:process
: :initial-stack-group ¶Returns the stack group the initial-function is called in when the process starts up or is reset.
si:process
: :initial-form ¶Returns the initial “form” of the process. This isn’t really a Lisp form; it is a cons whose car is the initial-function and whose cdr is the list of arguments to which that function is applied when the process starts up or is reset.
In a simple process (see simple-process), the initial form is a list of one element, the process’s function.
To change the initial form, use the :preset
operation (see si:process-preset-method).
si:process
: :wait-function ¶Returns the process’s current wait-function, which is the predicate used
by the scheduler to determine if the process is runnable. This is
#'true
if the process is running, and #'false
if the process has
no current computation (for instance, if it has just been created, its
initial function has returned) or if the program has decided to wait
indefinitely. The wait-function of a flushed process is si:flushed-process
,
a function equivalent to #'false
but recognizably distinct.
si:process
: :wait-argument-list ¶Returns the arguments to the process’s current wait-function. This is
frequently the &rest
argument to process-wait
in the
process’s stack. The system always uses it in
a safe manner, i.e it forgets about it before process-wait
returns.
si:process
: :whostate ¶Returns a string that is the state of the process to go in the who-line at
the bottom of the screen. This is "run"
if the process is running or
trying to run; otherwise, it is the reason why the process is waiting. If the
process is stopped, then this whostate string is ignored and the who-line
displays arrest
if the process is arrested or stop
if the process has
no run reasons.
si:process
: :quantum ¶si:process
: :set-quantum 60ths ¶Respectively return and change the number of 60ths of a second this process is allowed to run without waiting before the scheduler will run someone else. The quantum defaults to 1 second.
si:process
: :quantum-remaining ¶Returns the amount of time remaining for this process to run, in 60ths of a second.
si:process
: :priority ¶si:process
: :set-priority priority-number ¶Respectively return and change the priority of this process. The larger the number, the more this process gets to run. Within a priority level the scheduler runs all runnable processes in a round-robin fashion. Regardless of priority a process will not run for more than its quantum. The default priority is 0, and no normal process uses other than 0.
si:process
: :warm-boot-action ¶si:process
: :set-warm-boot-action action ¶Respectively return and change the process’s warm-boot-action, which controls what
happens if the machine is booted while this process is active.
(Contrary to the name, this applies to both cold and warm booting.) This
can be nil
or :flush
, which means to flush the process (see
flushed-process), or can be a function to call. The default is
si:process-warm-boot-delayed-restart
, which resets the process,
causing it to start over at its initial function. You can also use
si:process-warm-boot-reset
, which throws out of the process’
computation and kills the process, or si:process-warm-boot-restart
,
which is like the default but restarts the process at an earlier stage
of system reinitialization. This is used for processes like the
keyboard process and chaos background process, which are needed for
reinitialization itself.
si:process
: :simple-p ¶Returns nil
for a normal process, t
for a simple process.
See simple-process.
si:process
: :idle-time ¶Returns the time in seconds since this process last ran, or nil
if it has never run.
si:process
: :total-run-time ¶Returns the amount of time this process has run, in 60ths of a second. This includes cpu time and disk wait time.
si:process
: :disk-wait-time ¶Returns the amount of time this process has spent waiting for disk I/O, in 60ths of a second.
si:process
: :cpu-time ¶Returns the amount of time this process has spent actually executing instructions, in 60ths of a second.
si:process
: :percent-utilization ¶Returns the fraction of the machine’s time this process has been using recently, as a percentage (a number between 0 and 100.0). The value is a weighted average giving more weight to more recent history.
si:process
: :reset-meters ¶Resets the run-time counters of the process to zero.
si:process
: :run-reasons ¶Returns the list of run reasons, which are the reasons why this process should be active (allowed to run).
si:process
: :run-reason object ¶Adds object to the process’s run reasons. This can activate the process.
si:process
: :revoke-run-reason object ¶Removes object from the process’s run reasons. This can stop the process.
si:process
: :arrest-reasons ¶Returns the list of arrest reasons, which are the reasons why this process should be inactive (forbidden to run).
si:process
: :arrest-reason object ¶Adds object to the process’s arrest reasons. This can stop the process.
si:process
: :revoke-arrest-reason object ¶Removes object from the process’s arrest reasons. This can activate the process.
si:process
: :preset function &rest args ¶Sets the process’s initial function to function and initial arguments
to args. The process is then reset so that any computation occuring in it
is terminated and it begins anew by applying function to args.
A :preset
operation on a stopped process
returns immediately, but does not activate the process; hence the
process will not really apply function to args until it is activated later.
si:process
: :reset &optional no-unwind kill ¶Forces the process to throw out of its present computation and apply its initial function to its initial arguments, when it next runs. The throwing out is skipped if the process has no present computation (e.g it was just created), or if the no-unwind option so specifies. The possible values for no-unwind are:
:unless-current
nil
Unwind unless the stack group to be unwound is the one currently executing, or belongs to the current process.
:always
Unwind in all cases. This may cause the operation to throw through its caller instead of returning.
t
Never unwind.
If kill is t
, the process is to be killed after unwinding it.
This is for internal use by the :kill
operation only.
A :reset
operation on a stopped process returns immediately, but
does not activate the process; hence the process will not really get
reset until it is activated later.
si:process
: :flush ¶Forces the process to wait forever. A process may not :flush
itself.
Flushing a process is different from stopping it, in that it is still active
and hence if it is reset or preset it will start running again.
A flushed process can be recognized because its wait-function is
si:flushed-process
.
If a process belonging to a window is flushed, exposing or selecting the window
resets the process.
si:process
: :kill ¶Gets rid of the process. It is reset, stopped,
and removed from sys:all-processes
.
si:process
: :interrupt function &rest args ¶Forces the process to apply
function to args. When function returns,
the process continues the interrupted computation. If the process is waiting,
it wakes up, calls function, then waits again when function returns.
If the process is stopped it does not apply
function to args
immediately, but will later when it is activated. Normally the :interrupt
operation
returns immediately, but if the process’s stack group is in an unusual internal
state :interrupt
may have to wait for it to get out of that state.
These are the flavors of process provided by the system. It is possible for users to define additional flavors of their own.
: si:process ¶This is the standard default kind of process.
: si:simple-process ¶A simple process is not a process in the conventional sense. It has no stack group of its own; instead of having a stack group that gets resumed when it is time for the process to run, it has a function that gets called when it is time for the process to run. When the wait-function of a simple process becomes true, and the scheduler notices it, the simple process’s function is called in the scheduler’s own stack group. Since a simple process does not have any stack group of its own, it can’t save control state in between calls; any state that it saves must be saved in data structure.
The only advantage of simple processes over normal processes is that
they use up less system overhead, since they can be scheduled without
the cost of resuming stack-groups. They are intended as a special,
efficient mechanism for certain purposes. For example, packets received
from the Chaosnet are examined and distributed to the proper receiver by
a simple process that wakes up whenever there are any packets in the
input buffer. However, they are harder to use, because you can’t save
state information across scheduling. That is, when the simple process
is ready to wait again, it must return; it can’t call process-wait
and continue to do something else later. In fact, it is an error to
call process-wait
from inside a simple process. Another drawback to
simple processes is that if the function signals an error, the scheduler
itself is broken and multiprocessing stops; this situation can be
repaired only by aborting, which blasts the process. Also, when a
simple process is run, no other process is scheduled until it chooses to
return; so simple processes should never run for a long time without
returning.
Asking for the stack group of a simple process does not signal an error, but returns the process’s function instead.
Since a simple process cannot call process-wait
, it needs some other
way to specify its wait-function. To set the wait-function of a simple
process, use si:set-process-wait
(see below). So, when a simple
process wants to wait for a condition, it should call
si:set-process-wait
to specify the condition, then return.
Sets the wait-function and wait-argument-list of simple-process.
See the description of the si:simple-process
flavor (above) for
more information.
Activates process by revoking all its run and arrest reasons,
then giving it a run reason of :enable
.
Resets process, then enables it.
Stops process by revoking all its run reasons. Also revokes all its arrest reasons.
The remaining functions in this section are obsolete, since they simply
duplicate what can be done by sending a message. They are documented here
because their names are in the global
package.
Sends a :preset
message.
Sends a :reset
message.
Gets the name of a process, like the :name
operation.
Gets the current stack group of a process, like the :stack-group
operation.
Gets the initial stack group of a process, like the :initial-stack-group
operation.
Gets the initial form of a process, like the :initial-form
operation.
Gets the current wait-function of a process, like the :wait-function
operation.
Gets the arguments to the current wait-function of a process, like the
:wait-argument-list
operation.
Gets the current who-line state string of a process, like the :whostate
operation.
The first portion of this chapter explains how programs can handle errors, by means of condition handlers. It also explains how a program can signal an error if it detects something it doesn’t like.
The second explains how users can handle errors, by means of an interactive debugger; that is, it explains how to recover if you do something wrong. A new user of the Lisp Machine, or someone who just wants to know how to deal with errors and not how to cause them, should ignore the first sections and skip ahead to debugger.
The remaining sections describe some other debugging facilities. Anyone who is going to be writing programs for the Lisp Machine should familiarize himself with these.
The trace facility provides the ability to perform certain actions at the time a function is called or at the time it returns. The actions may be simple typeout, or more sophisticated debugging functions.
The advise facility is a somewhat similar facility for modifying the behavior of a function.
The breakon facility allows you to cause the debugger to be entered when a certain function is called. You can then use the debugger’s stepping commands to step to the next function call or return.
The step facility allows the evaluation of a form to be intercepted at every step so that the user may examine just what is happening throughout the execution of the form. Stepping works only on interpreted code.
The MAR facility provides the ability to cause a trap on any memory reference to a word (or a set of words) in memory. If something is getting clobbered by agents unknown, this can help track down the source of the clobberage.
Programmers often want to control what action is taken by their programs when errors or other exceptional situations occur. Usually different situations are handled in different ways, and in order to express what kind of handling each situation should have, each situation must have an associated name. In Zetalisp, noteworthy events are represented by objects called condition instances. When an event occurs, a condition instance is created; it is then signaled, and a handler for that condition may be invoked.
When a condition is signaled, the system (essentially) searches up the stack of nested function invocations looking for a handler established to handle that condition. The handler is a function that gets called to deal with the condition. The condition mechanism itself is just a convenient way for finding an appropriate handler function for a particular exceptional situation.
When a condition is signaled, a condition instance is created to represent the event and hold information about it. This information includes condition names then classify the condition and any other data that is likely to be of interest to condition handlers. A condition instance is immutable once it has been created. Some conditions are errors, which means that the debugger is invoked if they are signaled and not handled.
Condition instances are flavor instances. The flavor condition
is the
base flavor from which all flavors of condition are built. Several
operations that are defined on condition instances are described below.
The flavor error
, which is built on condition
, is the base flavor for all kinds of
conditions which are errors.
A condition name is a symbol then is used to identify a category of conditions.
Each condition instance possesses one or more condition names. Each condition
handler specifies one or more condition names that it should apply to. A
handler applies to a condition if they have any condition names in common.
This is the sole purpose of condition names: to match condition instances with
their handlers. The meaning of every condition name signaled by the system is
described in this manual. The condition name index is a directory for them.
Conditions that are errors possess the condition name error
.
In PL/I, CLU, ADA and most other systems that provide named conditions, each condition has only one name. That is to say, the categories identified by condition names are disjoint. In Zetalisp, each condition instance can have multiple condition names, which means that the categories identified by condition names can overlap and be subdivided.
For example, among the condition names defined by the system are condition
,
error
, sys:arithmetic-error
, sys:floating-exponent-underflow
and sys:divide-by-zero
.
condition
is a condition name that all condition instances possess. error
identifies the category of conditions that are considered errors.
sys:arithmetic-error
identifies the category of errors that pertain to arithmetic
operations. sys:floating-exponent-underflow
and sys:divide-by-zero
are the most specific level
of categorization. So, the condition signaled when you evaluate (* 1s-30 1s-30 1s-30 1s-30)
possesses condition names sys:floating-exponent-underflow
, sys:arithmetic-error
, error
and
condition
, while the one signaled if you evaluate (// 1 0)
possesses condition
names sys:divide-by-zero
, sys:arithmetic-error
, error
and condition
. In this
example, the categories fall into a strict hierarchy, but this does not need to be
the case.
Condition names are documented throughout the manual, with definitions like this:
sys:divide-by-zero
: (sys:arithmetic-error
error
) ¶The condition name sys:divide-by-zero
is always accompanied by
sys:arithmetic-error
and error
(that is, it categorizes a subset of those categories).
The presence of error
implies that all sys:divide-by-zero
conditions are errors.
The condition instance also records additional information about the
event. For example, the condition instance signaled by dividing by
zero handles the :function
operation by returning the function
that did the division (it might be truncate
, floor
,
ceiling
or round
, as well as //
). In general, for each
condition name there are conventions saying what additional
information is provided and what operations to use to obtain it.
The flavor of the condition instance is always one of the condition names, and so
are its component flavors (with a few exceptions; si:vanilla-flavor
and some
other flavor components are omitted, since they are not useful categories for
condition handlers to specify). In our example, the flavor of the condition is
sys:arithmetic-error
, and its components include error
and condition
.
Condition names require new flavors only when they require significantly
different handling by the error system; you will understand in detail after
finishing this section.
Returns t
if condition-instance possesses condition name condition-name.
condition-name can also be a combination of condition names using and
, or
and not
; then the condition tested for is a boolean combination of the
presence or absence of various condition names. Example:
(condition-typep error 'fs:file-not-found) (condition-typep error '(or fs:file-not-found fs:directory-not-found))
Returns t
if object is a condition instance and its flavor incorporates error
.
This is normally equivalent to (typep object 'error)
. Some functions such as
open
optionally return the condition instance rather than signaling it, if an error
occurs. errorp
is useful in testing the value returned.
condition
: :condition-names ¶Returns a list of all the condition names possesses by this condition instance.
A condition handler is a function that is associated with certain
condition names (categories of conditions). The variable
eh:condition-handlers
contains a list of the handlers that are current;
handlers are established using macros which bind this variable. When a condition is
signaled, this list is scanned and all the handlers which apply are called,
one by one, until one of the handlers either throws or returns non-nil
.
Since each new handler is pushed onto the front of eh:condition-handlers
, the
innermost-established handler gets the first chance to handle the condition.
When the handler is run, eh:condition-handlers
is bound so that the running
handler (and all the ones that were established farther in) are not in effect. This
avoids the danger of infinite recursion due to an error in a handler invoking the
same handler.
One thing a handler can do is throw to a tag. Often the catch
for this
tag is right next to the place where the handler is established, but this
does not have to be so. A simple handler that applies to all errors and just
throws to a tag is established using ignore-errors
.
An error within the execution of body causes control to return
from the ignore-errors
form. In this case, the values are
nil
, t
. If there is no error inside body, the first value
is that of the last form in the body and the second is nil
.
Errors whose condition instances return true for the :dangerous-condition-p
operation
are not handled. These include such things as running out of virtual memory.
A handler can also signal another condition. For example, signaling sys:abort
has the effect of pretending that the user typed the Abort
key. The following
function creates a handler which signals sys:abort
.
Evaluates form with a condition handler for many common error conditions such as
:wrong-type-argument
, :unbound-variable
and :unclaimed-message
.
The handler asks the user whether to allow the debugger to be entered.
If the user says ‘no’, the handler signals the sys:abort
condition. If the user
says ‘yes’, the handler does not handle the condition, allowing the debugger
to do so.
In some cases the handler attempts to determine whether the incorrect variable, operation, or argument appeared in form; if it did not, the debugger is always allowed to run. The assumption is that form was typed in by the user, and the intention is to distinguish trivial mistakes from program bugs.
The handler can also ask to proceed from the condition. This is done by
returning a non-nil
value. See the section on proceeding, proceeding, for
more information.
The handler can also decline to handle the condition, by returning nil
.
Then the next applicable handler is called, and so on until either some
handler does handle the condition or there are no more handlers.
The handler function is called in the environment where the condition was signaled, and in the same stack group. All special variables have the values they had at the place where the signaling was done, and all catch tags that were available at the point of signaling may be thrown to.
The handler receives the condition instance as its first argument. When establishing the handler, you can also provide additional arguments to pass to the handler when it is called. This allows the same function to be used in varying circumstances.
The fundamental means of establishing a condition handler is the macro
condition-bind
.
A condition-bind
form looks like this:
(condition-bind ((conditions handler-form additional-arg-forms...) (conditions handler-form additional-arg-forms...)) body...)
The purpose is to execute body with one or more condition handlers established.
Each list of conditions and handler-form establishes one handler.
conditions is a condition name or a list of condition names to which the
handler should apply. It is not evaluated. handler-form is evaluated to
produce the function that is the actual handler. The
additional-arg-forms are evaluated, on entry to the condition-bind
, to
produce additional arguments that are passed to the handler
function when it is called. The arguments to the handler function are
the condition instance being signaled, followed by the values of any
additional-arg-forms.
conditions can be nil
; then the handler applies to all conditions that
are signaled. In this case it is up to the handler function to decide whether to
do anything. It is important for the handler to refrain from handling
certain conditions that are used for debugging, such as break
and
eh:call-trap
. The :debugging-condition-p
operation on condition
instances returns non-nil
for these conditions. Certain other
conditions such as sys:virtual-memory-overflow
should be handled only
with great care. The :dangerous-condition-p
operation returns non-nil
for these conditions. Example:
(condition-bind ((nil 'myhandler "it happened here" 45)) (catch 'x ...)) (defun myhandler (condition string value) (unless (or (condition-typep condition 'fs:file-error) (send condition :dangerous-condition-p) (send condition :debugging-condition-p)) (format error-output "~&~A:~%~A~%" string condition) (throw 'x value)))
myhandler
declines to handle file errors, and all debugging conditions and
dangerous errors. For all other conditions, it prints the string specified
in the condition bind and throws to the tag x
the value specified there (45).
condition-bind-default
is like condition-bind
but establishes a default handler
instead of an ordinary handler. Default handlers work like ordinary handlers, but
they are tried in a different order: first all the applicable ordinary handlers are
given a chance to handle the condition, and then the default handlers get their
chance. A more flexible way of doing things like this is described under
signal-condition
(signal-condition-fun).
Condition handlers that simply throw to the function that established them are very common, so there are special constructs provided for defining them.
(condition-case (variable) body-form (condition-names forms...) (condition-names forms...) ...)
body-form is executed with a condition handler established that will
throw back to the condition-case
if any of the specified condition names
is signaled.
Each list starting with some condition names is a clause, and specifies what to do if one of those condition names is signaled. condition-names is either a condition name or a list of condition names; it is not evaluated.
Once the handler per se has done the throw, the clauses are tested in
order until one is found that applies. This is almost like a selectq
,
except that the signaled condition can have several condition names, so
the first clause that matches any of them gets to run. The forms in the
clause are executed with variable bound to the condition instance that
was signaled. The values of the last form in the clause are returned
from the condition-case
form.
If none of the specified conditions is signaled during the execution of
body-form (or if other handlers, established within body-form, handle
them) then the values of body-form are returned from the
condition-case
form.
variable may be omitted if it is not used.
It is also possible to have a clause starting with :no-error
in place of a
condition name. This clause is executed if body-form finishes normally.
Instead of just one variable there can be several variables; during the
execution of the :no-error
clause, these are bound to the values returned
by body-form. The values of the last form in the clause become the
values of the condition-case
form.
Here is an example:
(condition-case () (print foo) (error (format t " <<Error in printing>>")))
condition-call
is an extension of condition-case
that allows you to
give each clause an arbitrary conditional expression instead of just a list
of condition names. It looks like this:
(condition-call (variables...) body-form (test forms...) (test forms...) ...)
The difference between this and condition-case
is the test in
each clause. The clauses in a condition-call
resemble the clauses of a
cond
rather than those of a selectq
.
When a condition is signaled, each test is executed while still within the
environment of the signaling (that is, within the actual handler function). The
condition instance can be found in the first variable. If any test returns
non-nil
, then the handler throws to the condition-call
and the corresponding
clause’s forms are executed. If every test returns nil
, the condition is not
handled by this handler.
In fact, each test is computed a second time after the throw has
occurred in order to decide which clause to execute. The code for the
test is copied in two different places, once into the handler
function to decide whether to throw, and once in a cond
which follows
the catch.
The last clause can be a :no-error
clause just as in condition-case
.
It is executed if the body returns without error.
The values returned by the body are stored in the variables.
The values of the last form in the :no-error
clause are returned by the
condition-call
.
Only the first of variables is used if there is no :no-error
clause.
The variables may be omitted entirely in the unlikely event that none is used.
Example:
(condition-call (instance) (do-it) ((condition-typep instance '(and fs:file-error (not fs:no-more-room))) (compute-what-to-return)))
The condition name fs:no-more-room
is a subcategory of
fs:file-error
; therefore, this handles all file errors except for
fs:no-more-room
.
Each of the four condition handler establishing constructs has a conditional version that decides at run time whether to establish the handlers.
(condition-bind-if cond-form ((conditions handler-form additional-arg-forms...) (conditions handler-form additional-arg-forms...)) body...)
begins by executing cond-form. If it returns non-nil
, then all proceeds
as for a regular condition-bind
. If cond-form returns nil
, then the body
is still executed but without the condition handler.
(condition-case-if cond-form (variables...) body-form (condition-names forms...) (condition-names forms...) ...)
begins by executing cond-form. If it returns non-nil
, then all proceeds
as for a regular condition-case
. If cond-form returns nil
, then the
body-form is still executed but without the condition handler.
body-form’s values are returned, or, if there is a :no-error
clause, it is
executed and its values returned.
(condition-call-if cond-form (variables...) body-form (test forms...) (test forms...) ...)
begins by executing cond-form. If it returns non-nil
, then everything proceeds
as for a regular condition-call
. If cond-form returns nil
, then the
body-form is still executed but without the condition handler.
In that case, body-form’s values are returned, or, if there is a :no-error
clause, it is
executed and its values returned.
This is used just like condition-bind-if
, but establishes a default handler
instead of an ordinary handler.
This is the list of established condition handlers. Each element looks like this:
(condition-names function additional-arg-values...)
condition-names is a condition name or a list of condition names, or nil
which means all conditions.
function is the actual handler function.
additional-arg-values are additional arguments to be passed to the function when it is called. function’s first argument is always the condition instance.
Both the links of the value of eh:condition-handlers
and the elements
are usually created with with-stack-list
, so copy them if you want to
save them for any period of time.
This is the list of established default condition handlers. The data
format is the same as that of eh:condition-handlers
.
: condition ¶The flavor condition
is the base flavor of all conditions, and provides default
definitions for all the operations described in this chapter.
condition
incorporates si:property-list-mixin
, which defines operations
:get
and :plist
. Each property name on the property list is also an operation
name, so that sending the :foo
message is equivalent to
(send instance :get :foo)
. In addition, (send instance :set :foo value)
is equivalent
to (send instance :set :get :foo value)
.
condition
also provides two instance variables, eh:format-string
and eh:format-args
.
condition
’s method for the the :report
operation passes these to format
to print
the error message.
: error ¶The flavor error
makes a condition an error condition. errorp
returns t
for such
conditions, and the debugger is entered if they are signaled and not otherwise
handled.
: sys:no-action-mixin ¶This mixin provides a definition of the proceed type :no-action
.
: sys:proceed-with-value-mixin ¶This mixin provides a definition of the proceed type :new-value
.
: ferror ¶This flavor is a mixture of error
, sys:no-action-mixin
and
sys:proceed-with-value-mixin
. It is the flavor used by default by the functions
ferror
and cerror
, and is often convenient for users to instantiate.
: sys:warning ¶This flavor is a mixture of sys:no-action-mixin
and condition
.
: sys:bad-array-mixin ¶This mixin provides a definition of the proceed type :new-array
.
Every condition instance can be asked to print an error message which describes
the circumstances that led to the signaling of the condition. The easiest way
to print one is to print the condition instance without escaping (princ
, or
format
operation ~A
). This actually uses the :report
operation, which
implements the printing of an error message. When a condition instance is
printed with escaping, it uses the #leftHorseshoe
syntax so that it can be read back in.
This is done using si:print-readably-mixin
, si:print-readably-mixin-flavor.
condition
: :report stream ¶Prints on stream the condition’s error message, a description of the circumstances for which the condition instance was signaled. The output should neither start nor end with a carriage return.
If you are defining a new flavor of condition and wish to change the way the error message is printed, this is the operation to redefine. All others use this one.
condition
: :report-string ¶Returns a string containing the text that the :report
operation would
print.
Operations provided specifically for condition handlers to use:
condition
: :dangerous-condition-p ¶Returns t
if the condition instance is one of those that indicate events
that are considered extremely dangerous, such as running out of memory.
Handlers that normally handle all conditions might want to
make an exception for these.
condition
: :debugging-condition-p ¶Returns t
if the condition instance is one of those that are signaled as
part of debugging, such as break
, which is signaled when you type
Meta-Break
. Although these conditions normally enter the debugger,
they are not errors; this serves to prevent most condition
handlers from handling them. But any condition handler which is
written to handle all conditions should probably make a specific
exception for these.
See also the operations :proceed-types
and :proceed-type-p
, which have to do
with proceeding (proceeding).
Some operations are intended for the debugger to use. They are documented because some flavors of condition redefine them so as to cause the debugger to behave differently. This section is of interest only to advanced users.
condition
: :print-error-message stack-group brief-flag stream ¶This operation is used by the debugger to print a complete error message. This
is done primarily using the :report
operation.
Certain flavors of condition define a :after
:print-error-message
method which,
when brief-flag is nil
, prints additional helpful information which is not part of
the error message per se. Often this requires access to the stack group in
addition to the data in the condition instance. The method can assume that if
brief-flag is nil
then stack-group is not the one which is executing.
For example, the :print-error-message
method of the condition signaled when you call
an undefined function checks for the case of calling a function such as bind
that is meaningful only in compiled code; if that is what happened, it searches
the stack to look for the name of the function in which the call appears. This is
information that is not considered crucial to the error itself, and is therefore
not recorded in the condition instance.
condition
: :maybe-clear-input stream ¶This operation is used on entry to the debugger to discard input. Certain condition flavors, used by stepping redefine this operation to do nothing, so that input is not discarded.
condition
: :bug-report-recipient-system ¶The value returned by this operation is used to determine what address to mail
bug reports to, when the debugger Control-M
command is used.
By default, it returns "LISPM"
. The value is passed to the function bug
.
condition
: :bug-report-description stream &optional numeric-arg ¶This operation is used by the Control-M
command to print on stream the
information that should go in the bug report. numeric-arg is the numeric
argument, if any, that the user gave to the Control-M
command.
condition
: :find-current-frame stack-group ¶Returns the stack indices of the stack frames that the debugger should operate on.
The first value is the frame “at which the error occurred.” This is not the
innermost stack frame; it is outside the calls to such functions as ferror
and
signal-condition
which were used to signal the error.
The second value is the initial value for the debugger command loop’s current frame.
The third value is the innermost frame that the debugger should be willing to let the user see. By default this is the innermost active frame, but it is safe to use an open but not active frame within it.
The fourth value, if non-nil
, tells the debugger to consider the innermost frame
to be “interesting”. Normally, frames that are part of the interpreter (calls to
si:eval1
, si:apply-lambda
, prog
, cond
, etc.) are considered uninteresting.
This is a flavor operation so that certain flavors of condition can redefine it.
condition
: :debugger-command-loop stack-group &optional error-object ¶Enters the debugger command loop. The initial error message and backtrace have already been printed. This message is sent in an error handler stack group; stack-group is the stack group in which the condition was signaled. error-object is the condition object which was signaled; it defaults to the one the message is sent to.
This operation uses :or
method combination (see method-combination).
Some condition flavors add methods that perform some other sort of
processing or enter a different command loop. For example, unbound variable
errors look for look-alike symbols in other packages at this point. If the added
method returns nil
, the original method that enters the usual debugger
command loop is called.
Signaling a condition has two steps, creating a condition instance and signaling
the instance. There are convenience interface functions that combine the two
steps. You can also do them separately. If you just want to signal an error and
do not want to worry much about condition handling, the function ferror
is all
you need to know.
Creates a condition instance using make-condition
and then signals it
with signal-condition
, specifying no local proceed types, and with t
as the
use-debugger argument so the debugger is always entered if the condition is not
otherwise handled.
The first argument to ferror
is always a signal name (often nil
). The second
argument is usually a format string and the remaining arguments are additional
arguments for format
; but this is under the control of the definition of the
signal name. Example:
(ferror 'math:singular-matrix "The matrix ~S cannot be inverted." matrix)
For compatibility with the Symbolics system, if the first argument to ferror
is a
string, then a signal name of nil
is assumed. The arguments to ferror
are passed
on to make-condition
with an additional nil
preceding them.
If you prefer, you can use the formatted output functions
(format:outfmt-fun) to generate the error message. Here is an example,
though in a simple case like this using format
is easier:
(ferror 'math:singular-matrix (format:outfmt "The matrix " (prin1 matrix) " cannot be inverted.") number)
In this case, arguments past the second one are not used for printing the error message, but the signal name may still expect them to be present so it can put them in the condition instance.
Creates a condition instance, by passing the signal-name and
signal-name-arguments to make-condition
, and then signals it.
If proceed-type is non-nil
then it is provided to
signal-condition
as a proceed type. For compatibility with old
uses of cerror
, if proceed-type is t
, :new-value
is
provided as the proceed type. If proceed-type is :yes
,
:no-action
is provided as the proceed type.
The second argument to cerror
is not used and is present for historical
compatibility. It may be given a new meaning in the future.
If a condition handler or the debugger decides to proceed, the second value it
returns becomes the value of cerror
.
Common Lisp defines another calling sequence for this function:
(cerror continue-format-string error-format-string args...)
This signals an error of flavor eh:common-lisp-cerror
, which prints an
error message using error-format-string and args. It allows one proceed type,
whose documentation is continue-format-string, and which proceeds silently,
returning nil
from cerror
.
cerror
can tell which calling sequence has been used and behaves accordingly.
Prints a warning on *error-output*
by passing the args to format
,
starting on a fresh line, and then returns.
If *break-on-warnings*
is non-nil
, however, warn
signals a
procedable error, using the arguments to make an error message.
If the user proceeds, warn
simply returns.
If non-nil
, warn
signals an error rather than just printing a message.
Signals a correctable error if the value of place does not
fit the type type-spec. place is something that setf
can store in.
type-spec is a type specifier, a suitable second argument to typep
,
and is not evaluated (see type-specifiers). A simple example is:
(check-type foo (integer 0 10))
This signals an error unless (typep foo '(integer 0 10))
; that is, unless
foo
’s value is an integer between zero and ten, inclusive.
If an error is signaled, the error message contains the name of the variable or place where the erroneous value was found, and the erroneous value itself. An English description of the type of object that was wanted is computed automatically from the type specifier for use in the error message. For the commonly used type specifiers this computed description is adequate. If it is unsatisfactory in a particular case, you can specify description, which is used instead. In order to make the error message grammatical, description should start with an indefinite article.
The error signaled is of condition sys:wrong-type-argument
(see
sys:wrong-type-argument-condition). The proceed type :argument-value
is
provided. If a handler proceeds using this proceed type, it should specify one
additional argument; that value is stored into place with setf
. The new value is
then tested, and so on. check-type
returns when a value passes the test.
check-arg-type
is an older name for this macro.
check-arg
is an obsolete variant of check-type
.
predicate is either a symbol which is predicate (a function of one argument)
or a list which is a form. If it is a predicate, it is applied to the
value of var-name, which is valid if the predicate returns non-nil
.
If it is a form, it is evaluated, and the value is valid of the form
returns non-nil
. The form ought to make use of var-name, but
nothing checks this.
There is no way to compute an English description of valid values from predicate, so a description string must always be supplied.
type-symbol is a symbol that is used by condition handlers to determine what type
of argument was expected. If predicate is a symbol, you may omit type-symbol, and
predicate is used for that purpose as well. The use of the type-symbol is not really
well-defined, and check-type
, where a type specifier serves both purposes,
is superior to check-arg
for this reason.
Examples:
(check-arg foo stringp "a string") (check-arg h (or (stringp h) (typep h 'fs:host)) "a host name" fs:host)
Other functions that can be used to test for invalid values include
ecase
and ccase
(ecase-fun), which are error-checking versions of
selectq
, and etypecase
and ctypecase
(etypecase-fun), error-checking
versions of typecase
.
Signals an error if test-form evaluates to nil
. The rest of the assert
form is
relevant only if the error happens.
First of all, the places are forms that can be stored into with setf
, and which are used
(presumably) in test-form. The reason that the places are specified again
in the assert
is so that the expanded code can arrange for the user to
be able to specify a new value to be stored into any one of them when
he proceeds from the error. When the error is signaled, one proceed-type
is provided for each place that is given. The condition object has flavor
eh:failed-assertion
.
If the user does proceed with a new value in that fashion, the test-form is
evaluated again, and the error repeats until the test-form comes out non-nil
.
The string and args are used to print the error message. If they are omitted,
"Failed assertion"
is used. They are evaluated only when an error is signaled,
and are evaluated again each time an error is signaled. setf
’ing the places may
also involve evaluation, which happens each time the user proceeds and sets one.
Example:
(assert (neq (car a) (car b)) ((car a) (car b)) "The CARS of A and B are EQ: ~S and ~S" (car a) (car b))
The places here are (car a)
and (car b)
. The args happen to be the same
two forms, by not-exactly-coincidence; the current values of the places are
often useful in the error message.
The remaining signaling functions are provided for compatibility only.
error
exists for compatibility with Maclisp and the Symbolics version of Zetalisp.
It takes arguments in three patterns:
(error string object [interrupt])
which is used in Maclisp, and
(error condition-instance) (error flavor-name init-options...)
which are used by Symbolics. (In fact, the arguments to error
are simply passed
along to make-condition
if they do not appear to fit the Maclisp pattern).
If the Maclisp argument pattern is not used then there is no difference between
error
and ferror
.
The Common Lisp version of error
signals an uncorrectable error whose error message is printed by passing
format-string and args to format
.
This function is for Symbolics compatibility only, and is equivalent to
(cerror :no-action nil nil format-string format-args...)
The signal-name and remaining-make-condition-arguments are passed to
make-condition
, and the result is signaled with signal-condition
.
If the remaining-make-condition-arguments are keyword arguments and
:proceed-types
is one of the keywords, the associated value is used as the list of
proceed types. In particular, if signal-name is actually a condition instance, so
that the remaining arguments will be ignored by make-condition
, it works to
specify the proceed types this way.
If the proceed types are not specified, a list of all the proceed types that the condition instance knows how to prompt the user about is used by default.
Catches errors during the evaluation of form. If an error occurs, the usual
error message is printed unless flag is nil
. Then control is thrown and the
errset-form returns nil
. flag is evaluated first and is optional, defaulting to t
. If
no error occurs, the value of the errset-form is a list of one element, the value
of form.
errset
is an old, Maclisp construct, implemented much like condition-case
.
Many uses of errset
or errset
-like constructs really ought to be checking for
more specific conditions instead.
catch-error
is a variant of errset
. This construct catches errors during the
evaluation of form and returns two values. If form returns normally, the first value is
form’s first value and the second value is nil
. If an error occurs, the usual error message
is printed unless flag is nil
, and then control is thrown out of the catch-error
form, which returns two values, first nil
and second a non-nil
value that
indicates the occurrence of an error. flag is evaluated before form and is optional,
defaulting to t
.
If this variable is non-nil
, errset
forms are not allowed to trap errors.
The debugger is entered just as if there were no errset
. This is intended mainly
for debugging. The initial value of errset
is nil
.
This is for Maclisp compatibility only and should not be used.
(err)
is a dumb way to cause an error. If executed inside an errset
,
that errset
returns nil
, and no message is printed.
Otherwise an error is signaled with error message just "ERROR>>"
.
(err form)
evaluates form and causes the containing errset
to return the result. If executed when not inside an errset
, an error
is signaled with form’s value printed as the error message.
(err form flag)
, which exists in Maclisp, is not supported.
You can create a condition instance quite satisfactorily with make-instance
if
you know which instance variables to initialize. For example,
(make-instance 'ferror :condition-names '(foo) :format-string "~S loses." :format-args losing-object)
creates an instance of ferror
just like the one that would be signaled if you do
(ferror 'foo "~S loses." losing-object)
Note that the flavor name and its components’ names are added in automatically
to whatever you specify for the :condition-names
keyword.
Direct use of make-instance
is cumbersome, however, and it is usually handier
to define a signal name with defsignal
or defsignal-explicit
and then create the
instance with make-condition
.
A signal name is a sort of abbreviation for all the things that are always the same for a certain sort of condition: the flavor to use, the condition names, and what arguments are expected. In addition, it allows you to use a positional syntax for the arguments, which is usually more convenient than a keyword syntax in simple use.
Here is a typical defsignal
:
(defsignal series-not-convergent sys:arithmetic-error (series) "Signaled by limit extractor when SERIES does not converge.")
This defines a signal name series-not-convergent
, together with the name of the
flavor to use (sys:arithmetic-error
, whose meaning is being stretched a little),
an interpretation for the arguments (series
, which is explained below),
and a documentation string. The documentation string is not used in printing
the error message; it is documentation for the signal name. It becomes accessible
via (documentation 'series-not-convergent 'signal)
.
series-not-convergent
could then be used to signal an error, or just to create a
condition instance:
(ferror 'series-not-convergent "The series ~S went to infinity." myseries) (make-condition 'series-not-convergent "The series ~S went to infinity." myseries)
The list (series)
in the defsignal
is a list of implicit instance variable
names. They are matched against arguments to make-condition
following the
format string, and each implicit instance variable name becomes an operation
defined on the condition instance to return the corresponding argument. (You
can imagine that :gettable-instance-variables
is in effect for all the implicit
instance variables.) In this example, sending a :series
message to the condition
instance returns the value specified via myseries
when the condition was
signaled. The implicit instance variables are actually implemented using the
condition instance’s property list.
Thus, defsignal
spares you the need to create a new flavor merely in
order to remember a particular datum about the condition.
Defines signal-name to create an instance of flavor with condition names
condition-names, and implicit instance variable whose names are taken from the list
implicit-instance-variables and whose values are taken from the make-condition
arguments
following the format string.
Instead of a list (flavor
condition-names...)
there may appear just a flavor name.
This is equivalent to using signal-name as the sole condition name.
The extra-init-keyword-forms are forms to be evaluated to produce additional
keyword arguments to pass to make-instance
. These can be used to initialize
other instance variables that particular flavors may have. These expressions can
refer to the implicit-instance-variables.
documentation is a string which is recorded so that it can be accessed via
the function documentation
, as in (documentation signal-name 'signal)
.
Like defsignal
, defsignal-explicit
defines a signal name. This signal name is
used the same way, but the way it goes about creating the condition instance is
different.
First of all, there is no list of implicit instance variables. Instead, signal-arglist is
a lambda list which is matched up against all the arguments to make-condition
except for the signal-name itself. The variables bound by the lambda list can
be used in the init-keyword-forms, which are evaluated to get arguments to pass
to make-instance
. For example:
(defsignal-explicit mysignal-3 (my-error-flavor mysignal-3 my-signals-category) (format-string losing-object &rest format-args) "The third kind of thing I like to signal." :format-string format-string :format-args (cons losing-object (copylist format-args)) :losing-object-name (send losing-object :name))
Since implicit instance variables are really just properties on the property list of
the instance, you can create them by using init keyword :property-list
. The
contents of the property list determines what implicit instance variables exist
and their values.
make-condition
is the fundamental way that condition instances are created.
The signal-name says how to interpret the arguments and come up with a flavor
and values for its instance variables. The handling of the arguments is
entirely determined by the signal-name.
If signal-name is a condition instance, make-condition
returns it.
It is not useful to call make-condition
this way explicitly, but this allows
condition instances to be passed to the convenience functions error
and signal
which call make-condition
.
If the signal-name was defined with defsignal
or defsignal-explicit
, then that
definition specifies exactly how to interpret the arguments and create the
instance. In general, if the signal-name has an eh:make-condition-function
property (which is what defsignal
defines), this property is a function to which
the signal-name and arguments are passed, and it does the work.
Alternatively, the signal-name can be the name of a flavor. Then the arguments
are passed to make-instance
, which interprets them as init keywords and values.
This mode is not really recommended and exists for compatibility with
Symbolics software.
If the signal-name has no eh:make-condition-function
property and is not a
flavor name, then a trivial defsignal
is assumed as a default. It looks like this:
(defsignal signal-name ferror ())
So the value is an instance of ferror
, with the signal-name as a condition name,
and the arguments are interpreted as a format string and args for it.
The signal-name nil
actually has a definition of this form. nil
is frequently used
as a signal name in the function ferror
when there is no desire to use any
condition name in particular.
Once you have a condition instance, you are ready to invoke the condition handling mechanism by signaling it. A condition instance can be signaled any number of times, in any stack groups.
Invoke the condition handling mechanism on condition-instance.
The list of proceed-types says which proceed types (among those conventionally
defined for the type of condition you have signaled) you are prepared to
implement, should a condition handler return one (see “proceeding”).
These are in addition to any proceed types implemented nonlocally by
condition-resume
forms.
ucode-error-status is used for internal purposes in signaling errors detected by the microcode.
signal-condition
tries various possible handlers for the
condition. First eh:condition-handlers
is scanned for handlers
that are applicable (according to the condition names they specify) to
this condition instance. After this list is exhausted,
eh:condition-default-handlers
is scanned the same way. Each
handler that is tried can terminate the act of signaling by throwing
out of signal-condition
, or it can specify a way to proceed from
the signal. The handler can also return nil
to decline to handle the condition;
then the next possible handler is offered a chance.
If all handlers decline to handle the condition and
invoke-debugger is non-nil
, the debugger is the handler of
last resort. With the debugger, the user can ask to throw or to
proceed. The default value of invoke-debugger is non-nil
if
the condition-instance is an error.
If all handlers decline to act and invoke-debugger is nil
,
signal-condition
proceeds using the first proceed type on the list
of available ones, provided it is a nonlocal proceed type. If it is a
local proceed type, or if there are no proceed types,
signal-condition
just returns nil
. (It would be slightly
simpler to proceed using the first proceed type whether it is local or
not. But in the case of a local proceed type, this would just mean
returning the proceed type instead of nil
. It is considered
slightly more useful to return nil
, allowing the signaler to
distinguish the case of a condition not handled. The signaler knows
which proceed types it specified, and can if it wishes consider nil
as
equivalent to the first of them.)
Otherwise, by this stage, a proceed type has been chosen from the available list.
If the proceed type was among those specified by the caller of signal-condition
,
then proceeding consists simply of returning to that caller. The chosen proceed
type is the first value, and arguments (returned by the handler along with the
proceed type) may follow it. If the proceed type was implemented nonlocally
with condition-resume
(see condition-resume-fun), then the associated
proceed handler function on eh:condition-resume-handlers
is called.
If inhibit-resume-handlers is non-nil
, resume handlers are not invoked. If a
handler returns a nonlocal proceed type, signal-condition
just returns to its caller
as if the proceed type were local. If the condition is not handled,
signal-condition
returns nil
.
The purpose of condition-bind-default
is so that you can define a
handler that is allowed to handle a signal only if none of the callers’ handlers handle it.
A more flexible technique for doing this sort of thing is to make an ordinary
handler signal the same condition instance recursively by calling
signal-condition
, like this:
(multiple-value-list (signal-condition condition-instance eh:condition-proceed-types nil nil t))
This passes along the same list of proceed types specified by the original
signaler, prevents the debugger from being called, and prevents resume handlers
from being run. If the first value signal-condition
returns is non-nil
, one of
the outer handlers has handled the condition; your handler’s simplest option is to
return those same values so that the other handler has its way (but it could
also examine them and return modified values). Otherwise, you go on to handle
the condition in your default manner.
This variable may be set to a list of condition names to be
traced. Whenever a condition possessing a traced condition name
is signaled, an error is signaled to report the fact. (Tracing of
conditions is turned off while this error is signaled and handled).
Proceeding with proceed type :no-action
causes the signaling of
the original condition to continue.
If eh:trace-conditions
is t
, all conditions are traced.
Both condition handlers and the user (through the debugger) have the option of proceeding certain conditions.
Each condition name can define, as a convention, certain proceed types, which are
keywords that signify a certain conceptual way to proceed. For example,
condition name sys:wrong-type-argument
defines the proceed type
:argument-value
which means, “Here is a new value to use as the argument.”
Each signaler may or may not implement all the proceed types which are
meaningful in general for the condition names being signaled. For example, it is
futile to proceed from a sys:wrong-type-argument
error with :argument-value
unless the signaler knows how to take the associated value and store it into the
argument, or do something else that fits the conceptual specifications of
:argument-value
. For some signalers, it may not make sense to do this at all.
Therefore, one of the arguments to signal-condition
is a list of the proceed
types that this particular signaler knows how to handle.
In addition to the proceed types specified by the individual signaler, other proceed types can be provided nonlocally; they are implemented by a resume handler which is in effect through a dynamic scope. See below, nonlocal-proceed.
A condition handler can use the operations :proceed-types
and :proceed-type-p
on the condition instance to find out which proceed types are available. It can
request to proceed by returning one of the available proceed types as a value.
This value is returned from signal-condition
, and the condition’s signaler can
take action as appropriate.
If the handler returns more than one value, the remaining values are
considered arguments of the proceed type. The meaning of the
arguments to a proceed type, and what sort of arguments are expected,
are part of the conventions associated with the condition name that
gives the proceed type its meaning. For example, the :argument-value
proceed type for sys:wrong-type-argument
errors conventionally takes
one argument, which is the new value to use. All the values returned by
the handler are returned by signal-condition
to the signaler.
Here is an example of a condition handler that proceeds from
sys:wrong-type-argument
errors. It makes any atom effectively equivalent to
nil
when used in car
or any other function that expects a list. The handler uses
the :description
operation, which on sys:wrong-type-argument
condition
instances returns a keyword describing the data type that was desired.
(condition-bind ((sys:wrong-type-argument #'(lambda (condition) (if (eq (send condition :description) 'cons) (values :argument-value nil))))) body...)
Here the argument to the :argument-value
proceed type is nil
.
condition
: :proceed-types ¶Returns a list of the proceed types available for this condition instance.
This operation should be used only within the signaling of the condition
instance, as it refers to the special variable in which signal-condition
stores its second argument.
condition
: :proceed-type-p proceed-type ¶t
if proceed-type is one of the proceed types available for this condition instance.
This operation should be used only within the signaling of the condition
instance, as it refers to the special variable in which signal-condition
stores its second argument.
If the condition invokes the debugger, then the user has the
opportunity to proceed. When the
debugger is entered, the available proceed types are assigned
command characters starting with Super-A
. Each character becomes a
command to proceed using the corresponding proceed type.
Three additional facilities are required to make it convenient for the user to proceed using the debugger. Each is provided by methods defined on condition flavors. When you define a new condition flavor, you must provide methods to implement these facilities.
It must be possible to tell the user what each proceed type is for.
The user must be asked for the arguments for the proceed type. Each proceed type may have different arguments to ask for.
Usually the user can choose among the same set of proceed types that a handler can, but sometimes it is useful to provide the user with a few extra ones, or to suppress some of them for him.
These three facilities are provided by methods defined on condition flavors. Each proceed type that is provided by signalers should be accompanied by suitable methods. This means that you must normally define a new flavor if you wish to use a new proceed type.
The :document-proceed-type
operation is supposed to print
documentation of what a proceed type is for. For example, when sent to
a condition instance describing an unbound variable error, if the
proceed type specified is :new-value
, the text printed is something
like “Proceed, reading a value to use instead.”
condition
: :document-proceed-type proceed-type stream ¶Prints on stream a description of the purpose of proceed type proceed-type. This
operation uses :case
method combination (see method-combination), to
make it convenient to define the way to document an individual proceed type.
The string printed should start with an imperative verb form, capitalized,
and end with a period. Example:
This example is an :or
method so that it can consider any proceed type.
If it returns non-nil
, the system considers that it has handled the proceed type
and no other methods get a chance. eh:places
is an instance variable of
the flavor sys:failed-assertion
; its values are the proceed types this method
understands.
(defmethod (sys:failed-assertion :or :document-proceed-type) (proceed-type stream ignore) (when (memq proceed-type eh:places) (format stream "Try again, setting ~S.~ You type an expression for it." proceed-type) t))
As a last resort, if the condition instance has a :case
method for
:proceed-asking-user
with proceed-type as the suboperation, and this
method has a documentation string, it is printed. This is in fact the
usual way that a proceed type is documented.
The :proceed-asking-user
operation is supposed to ask for suitable
arguments to pass with the proceed type. Sending :proceed-asking-user
to an instance of sys:unbound-variable
with argument :new-value
would
read and evaluate one expression, prompting appropriately.
condition
: :proceed-asking-user proceed-type continuation read-object-fn ¶The method for :proceed-asking-user
embodies the knowledge of how to
prompt for and read the additional arguments that go with proceed-type.
:case
method combination is used (see method-combination), making it
possible to define the handling of each proceed type individually in a separate
function. The documentation string of the :case
method for a proceed type is
also used as the default for :document-proceed-type
on that proceed type.
The argument continuation is an internal function of the debugger which actually
proceeds from the signaled condition if the :proceed-asking-user
method calls
it. This is the only way to cause proceeding actually to happen. Call continuation with
funcall
, giving a proceed type and suitable arguments. The proceed type passed
to continuation need not be the same as the one given to :proceed-asking-user
; it should
be one of the proceed types available for handlers to use.
Alternatively, the :prompt-and-read
method can return without calling continuation; then
the debugger continues to read commands. The options which the
fs:no-more-room
condition offers in the debugger, to run Dired or expunge a
directory, work this way.
The argument read-object-fn is another internal function of the debugger whose
purpose is to read arguments from the user or request confirmation. If you wish
to do those things, you must funcall
read-object-function to do it. Use the calling
sequence documented for the function prompt-and-read
(see
prompt-and-read-fun). (The read-object-fn may or may not actually use
prompt-and-read
.)
Here is how sys:proceed-with-value-mixin
provides for the proceed type
:new-value
. Note the documentation string, which is automatically
use by :document-proceed-type
since no :case
method for that operation
is provided.
(defmethod (proceed-with-value-mixin :case :proceed-asking-user :new-value) (continuation read-object-function) "Return a value; the value of an expression you type." (funcall continuation :new-value (funcall read-object-function :eval-read "~&Form whose value to use instead: ")))
The :user-proceed-types
operation is given the list of proceed types
actually available and is supposed to return the list of proceed types to
offer to the user. By default, this operation returns its argument: all
proceed types are available to the user through the debugger.
For example, the condition name sys:unbound-variable
conventionally
defines the proceed types :new-value
and :no-action
. The first
specifies a new value; the second attempts to use the variable’s current
value and gets another error if the variable is still unbound. These are
clean operations for handlers to use. But it is more convenient for the
user to be offered only one choice, which will use the variable’s new
value if it is bound now, but otherwise ask for a new value. This is
implemented with a :user-proceed-types
method that replaces the two
proceed types with a single one.
Or, you might wish to offer the user two different proceed types that differ only in how they ask the user for additional information. For handlers, there would be only one proceed type.
Finally, there may be proceed types intended only for the debugger
which do not actually proceed; these should be inserted into the list
by the :user-proceed-types
method.
condition
: :user-proceed-types proceed-types ¶Assuming that proceed-types is the list of proceed types available for condition handlers to return, this operation returns the list of proceed types that the debugger should offer to the user.
Only the proceed types offered to the user need to be handled
by :document-proceed-type
and :proceed-asking-user
.
The flavor condition
itself defines this to return its argument.
Other condition flavors may redefine this to filter the argument
in some appropriate fashion.
:pass-on
method combination is used (see method-combination), so
that if multiple mixins define methods for :user-proceed-types
, each method
gets a chance to add or remove proceed types. The methods should not
actually modify the argument, but should cons up a new list in which certain
keywords are added or removed according to the other keywords that are there.
Elements should be removed only if they are specifically recognized. This is to say, the method should make sure that any unfamiliar elements present in the argument are also present in the value. Arranging to omit certain specific proceed types is legitimate; returning only the intersection with a constant list is not legitimate.
Here is an example of nontrivial use of :user-proceed-types
:
(defflavor my-error () (error)) (defmethod (my-error :user-proceed-types) (proceed-types) (if (memq :foo proceed-types) (cons :foo-two-args proceed-types) proceed-types)) (defmethod (my-error :case :proceed-asking-user :foo) (cont read-object-fn) "Proceeds, reading a value to foo with." (funcall cont :foo (funcall read-object-fn :eval-read "Value to foo with: "))) (defmethod (my-error :case :proceed-asking-user :foo-two-args) (cont read-object-fn) "Proceeds, reading two values to foo with." (funcall cont :foo (funcall read-object-fn :eval-read "Value to foo with: ") (funcall read-object-fn :eval-read "Value to foo some more with: ")))
In this example, if the signaler provides the proceed type :foo
, then it is
described for the user as “proceeds, reading a value to foo with”; and if
the user specifies that proceed type, he is asked for a single value,
which is used as the argument when proceeding. In addition, the
user is offered the proceed type :foo-two-args
, which has its own
documentation and which reads two values. But for condition handlers
there is really only one proceed type, :foo
. :foo-two-args
is just an
alternate interface for the user to proceed type :foo
, and this is why the
:user-proceed-types
method offers :foo-two-args
only if the signaler
is willing to accept :foo
.
Each condition name defines a conceptual meaning for certain
proceed types, but this does not mean that all of those proceed types
may be used every time the condition is signaled. The signaler must
specifically implement the proceed types in order to make them do what
they are conventionally supposed to do. For some signalers it may be
difficult to do, or may not even make sense. For example, it is no use
having a proceed type :store-new-value
if the signaler does not have a
suitable place to store, permanently, the argument the handler supplies.
Therefore, we require each signaler to specify just which proceed types it implements. Unless the signaler explicitly specifies proceed types one way or another, no proceed types are allowed (except for nonlocal ones, described in the following section).
One way to specify the proceed types allowed is to call signal-condition
and
pass the list of proceed types as the second argument.
Another way that is less general but more convenient is
signal-proceed-case
.
Signals a condition, providing proceed types and code to implement them. Each clause specifies a proceed type to provide, and also contains code to be run if a handler should proceed with that proceed type.
(signal-proceed-case ((argument-vars...) signal-name signal-name-arguments...) (proceed-type forms...) (proceed-type forms...) ...)
A condition-object is created with make-condition
using the
signal-name and signal-name-arguments; then it is signaled giving a list
of the proceed types from all the clauses as the list of proceed types
allowed.
The variables argument-vars are bound to the values
returned by signal-condition
, except for the first value, which is tested
against the proceed-type from each clause, using a selectq
. The clause that
matches is executed.
Example:
(defsignal my-wrong-type-arg (eh:wrong-type-argument-error sys:wrong-type-argument) (old-value arg-name description) "Wrong type argument from my own code.") (signal-proceed-case ((newarg) 'my-wrong-type-arg "The argument ~A was ~S, which is not a cons." 'foo foo 'cons) (:argument-value (car newarg)))
The signal name my-wrong-type-arg
creates errors with condition name
sys:wrong-type-argument
. The signal-proceed-case
shown signals such an
error, and handles the proceed type :argument-value
. If a handler proceeds
using that proceed type, the handler’s value is put in newarg
, and then its car is
returned from the signal-proceed-case
.
When the caller of signal-condition
specifies proceed types, these are called
local proceed types. They are implemented at the point of signaling. There are
also nonlocal proceed types, which are in effect for all conditions (with appropriate
condition names) signaled during the execution of the body of the establishing
macro. We say that the macro establishes a resume handler for the proceed type.
The most general construct for establishing a resume handler is condition-resume
.
For example, in
(condition-resume '(fs:file-error :retry-open t ("Proceeds, opening the file again.") (lambda (ignore) (throw 'tag nil))) (do-forever (catch 'tag (return (open pathname)))))
the proceed type :retry-open
is available for all fs:file-error
conditions signaled
within the call to open
.
Both execute body with a resume handler in effect for a nonlocal proceed type according to
the value of handler-form. For condition-resume-if
, the resume handler is in
effect only if cond-form’s value is non-nil
.
The value of the handler-form should be a list with at least five elements:
(condition-names proceed-type predicate format-string-and-args handler-function additional-args...)
condition-names is a condition name or a list of them. The resume handler applies to these conditions only.
proceed-type is the proceed type implemented by this resume handler.
predicate is either t
or a function that is applied to a condition instance and
determines whether the resume handler is in effect for that condition instance.
format-string-and-args is a list of a string and additional arguments that can be
passed to format
to print a description of what this proceed type is for.
These are needed only for anonymous proceed types.
handler-function is the function called to do the work of proceeding, once this proceed type has been returned by a condition handler or the debugger.
catch-error-restart-explicit-if
makes it easy to establish a particular
simple kind of resume handler.
Executes body with (if cond-form produces a non-nil
value) a resume handler for
proceed type proceed-type and condition(s) condition-names. condition-names
should be a symbol or a list of symbols; it is not evaluated. proceed-type should be
a symbol.
If proceeding is done using this resume handler, control returns from the
catch-error-restart-explicit-if
form. The first value is nil
and the second is
non-nil
.
format-string and the format-args, all of which are evaluated, are used by the
:document-proceed-type
operation to describe the proceed type, if it is
anonymous.
For condition handlers there is no distinction between local and nonlocal
proceed types. They are both included in the list of available proceed types
returned by the :proceed-types
operation (all the local proceed types come
first), and the condition handler selects one by returning the proceed type and
any conventionally associated arguments. The debugger’s :user-proceed-types
,
:document-proceed-type
and :proceed-asking-user
operations are also make
no distinction.
The difference comes after the handler or the debugger returns
to signal-condition
. If the proceed type is a local one (one of those in the
second argument to signal-condition
), signal-condition
simply returns.
If the proceed type is not among those the caller handles, signal-condition
looks for
a resume handler
associated with the proceed type, and calls its handler function. The arguments to the handler
function are the condition instance, the additional-args specified in the resume
handler, and any arguments returned by the condition handler in addition to
the proceed type. The handler function is supposed to do a throw. If it returns
to signal-condition
, an error is signaled.
You are allowed to use “anonymous” nonlocal proceed types, which have no
conventional meaning and are not specially known to the
:document-proceed-type
and :proceed-asking-user
operations. The anonymous
proceed type may be any Lisp object. The default definition of
:proceed-asking-user
handles an anonymous proceed type by simply calling the
continuation passed to it, reading no arguments. The default definition of
:document-proceed-type
handles anonymous proceed types by passing format
the format-string-and-args list found in the resume handler (this is what that list
is for).
Anonymous proceed types are often lists. Such proceed types are usually made by some variant
of error-restart
, and they are treated a little bit specially. For one
thing, they are all put at the end of the list returned by the :proceed-types
operation. For another, the debugger command Control-C
or Resume
never uses
a proceed type which is a list. If no atomic proceed type is available, Resume
or
Control-C
is not allowed.
All execute body with an anonymous resume handler for condition-names.
The proceed type for this resume handler is a list, so the Resume
key will not use it.
condition-names is either a single condition name or a list of them, or nil
meaning all conditions; it is not evaluated.
format-string and the format-args, all of which are evaluated, are used by the
:document-proceed-type
operation to describe the anonymous proceed type.
If the resume handler made by error-restart
is invoked by proceeding from a
signal, the automatically generated resume handler function does a throw back to
the error-restart
and the body is executed again from the beginning. If body
returns, the values of the last form in it are returned from the error-restart
form.
error-restart-loop
is like error-restart
except that it loops to the beginning of
body even if body completes normally. It is like enclosing an error-restart
in an
iteration.
catch-error-restart
is like error-restart
except that it never loops back to the
beginning. If the anonymous proceed type is used for proceeding, the
catch-error-restart
form returns with nil
as the first value and a non-nil
second
value.
catch-error-restart-if
is like catch-error-restart
except that the resume
handler is only in effect if the value of the cond-form is non-nil
.
All of these variants of error-restart
can be written in terms of
condition-resume-if
.
These forms are typically used by any sort of command loop, so that aborting
within the command loop returns to it and reads another command.
error-restart-loop
is often right for simple command loops. catch-error-restart
is useful when aborting should terminate execution rather than retry, or with an
explicit conditional to test whether a throw was done.
error-restart
forms often specify (error sys:abort)
as the condition-names.
The presence of error
causes them to be listed (and assigned command
characters) by the debugger, for all errors, and the presence of sys:abort
causes
the Abort
key to use them. If you would like a procede type to be offered as an option
by the debugger, but do not want the Abort
key to use it, specify just error
.
Invokes the innermost applicable resume handler for proceed-type.
Applicability of a resume handler is determined by matching its condition names
against those possessed by condition-instance and by applying its predicate, if not
t
, to condition-instance.
If proceed-type is nil
, the innermost applicable resume handler is invoked
regardless of its proceed type. However, in this case, the scan stops if t
is
encountered as an element of eh:condition-resume-handlers
.
The current list of resume handlers for nonlocal proceed types.
condition-resume
works by binding this variable. Elements are usually lists
that have the format described above under condition-resume
. The symbol t
is also meaningful as an element of this list. It terminates the scan for a resume
handler when it is made by signal-condition
for a condition that was not
handled. t
is pushed onto the list by break loops and the debugger to shield the
evaluation of your type-in from automatic invocation of resume handlers
established outside the break loop or the error.
The links of this list, and its elements, are often created using with-stack-list
.
so be careful if you try to save the value outside the context in which you
examine it.
sys:abort
: (condition
) ¶This condition is signaled by the Abort
key; it is how that key is implemented.
Most command loops use some version of error-restart
to set up a resume
handler for sys:abort
so that it will return to the innermost command loop if (as
is usually the case) no handler handles it. These resume handlers usually apply
to error
as well as sys:abort
, so that the debugger will offer a specific command
to return to the command loop even if it is not the innermost one.
When an error condition is signaled and no handlers decide to handle the error, an interactive debugger is entered to allow the user to look around and see what went wrong, and to help him continue the program or abort it. This section describes how to use the debugger.
There are two kinds of errors; those generated by the Lisp Machine’s
microcode, and those generated by Lisp programs (by using ferror
or
related functions). When there
is a microcode error, the debugger prints out a message such as the following:
>>TRAP 5543 (TRANS-TRAP) The symbol FOOBAR is unbound. While in the function LOSE-XCT leftArrow LOSE-COMMAND-LOOP leftArrow LOSE
The first line of this error message indicates entry to
the debugger and contains some mysterious internal microcode information:
the micro program address, the microcode trap name and parameters, and a microcode backtrace.
Users can ignore this line in most cases. The second line contains a description
of the error in English. The third line indicates where the error
happened by printing a very abbreviated “backtrace” of the stack (see
below); in the example, it is saying that the error was signaled inside the
function lose-xct
, which was called by lose-command-loop
.
Here is an example of an error from Lisp code:
>>ERROR: The argument X was 1, which is not a symbol, While in the function FOO leftArrow SI:EVAL1 leftArrow SI:LISP-TOP-LEVEL1
Here the first line contains the English description of the
error message, and the second line contains the abbreviated backtrace.
foo
signaled the error by calling ferror
; however, ferror
is censored out of the backtrace.
After the debugger’s initial message, it prints the function that
got the error and its arguments. Then it prints a list of commands you
can use to proceed from the error, or to abort to various command loops. The
possibilities depend on the kind of error and where it happened, so the
list is different each time; that is why the debugger prints it. The
commands in the list all start with Super-A
, Super-B
and continue as far
as is necessary.
If this is non-nil
, the list of Super
commands is not printed
when the debugger is entered. Type Help P
to see the list.
The debugger normally uses the stream *debug-io*
for all its input and output
(see debug-io-var). By default it is a synonym for *terminal-io*
.
The value of this variable in the stack group in which the error was
signaled is the one that counts.
If this is non-nil
, it is used by the debugger instead of the value
of *debug-io*
. The value in the stack group where the error was signaled
is the one that counts.
The debugger can be manually entered either by causing an error
(e.g by typing a ridiculous symbol name such as ahsdgf
at the Lisp
read-eval-print loop) or by typing the Break
key with the Meta
shift
held down while the program is reading from the terminal. Typing the Break
key with both Control
and Meta
held down forces the program
into the debugger immediately, even if it is running. If the Break
key is typed without Meta
, it puts you into a read-eval-print loop
using the break
function (see break-fun) rather than into the debugger.
Causes process to enter the debugger, and directs the debugger to
read its commands from the ambient value of *terminal-io*
, current
when you call eh
, rather than process’s own value of
*terminal-io*
which is what would be used if process got an error
in the usual way. The process in which you invoked eh
waits while
you are in the debugger, so there is no ambiguity about which process will
handle your keyboard input.
If process had already signaled an error and was waiting for
exposure of a window, then it enters the debugger to handle that error.
Otherwise, the break
condition is signaled in it (just like what
Control-Meta-Break
does) to force it into the debugger.
The Resume
command makes process resume execution. You can also
use other debugger commands such as Abort
, Control-R
, Control-Meta-R
and Control-T
to start it up again. Exiting the debugger in any way
causes eh
to return in its process.
process can also be a window, or any flavor instance which understands
the :process
operation and returns a process.
If process is not a process but a stack group, the current state of
the stack group is examined. In this case, the debugger runs in
“examine-only” mode, and executes in the process in which you invoked
eh
. You cannot resume execution of the debugged stack group, but
Resume
exits the debugger. It is your responsibility to ensure that
no one tries to execute in the stack group being debugged while the
debugger is looking at it.
If process is nil
, eh
finds all the processes waiting to enter
the debugger and asks you which one to use.
Once inside the debugger, the user may give a wide variety of commands. This section describes how to give the commands, then explains them in approximate order of usefulness. A summary is provided at the end of the listing.
When the debugger is waiting for a command, it prompts with an arrow:
rightArrow
If the error took place in the evaluation of an expression that you typed at the debugger, you are in a second level (or deeper) error. The number of arrows in the prompt indicates the depth.
The debugger also warns you about certain unusual circumstances that may
cause paradoxical results. For example, if default-cons-area
is
anything except working-storage-area
, a message to that effect is
printed. If *read-base*
and *print-base*
are not the same, a
message is printed.
At this point, you may type either a Lisp expression or a
command; a Control
or Meta
character is interpreted as a command,
whereas most normal characters are interpreted as the first character of
an expression. If you type the Help
key or the ?
key, you can
get some introductory help with the debugger.
If you type a Lisp expression, it is interpreted as a Lisp form
and evaluated in the context of the current frame.
That is, all dynamic bindings used for the evaluation are those
in effect in the current frame, with certain
exceptions explained below. The results of the evaluation are
printed, and the debugger prompts again with an arrow. If, during
the typing of the form, you change your mind and want to get back to the
debugger’s command level, type the Abort
key or a Control-G
; the debugger responds
with an arrow prompt. In fact, at any time that input is expected from
you, while you are in the debugger, you may type Abort
or Control-G
to cancel
any debugger command that is in progress and get back to command level.
Control-G
is useful because it can never exit from the debugger
as Abort
can.
This read-eval-print
loop maintains the values of +
, *
, and
-
almost like the Lisp listen loop. The difference is that some
single-character debugger commands such as C-M-A
also set *
and
+
in their own way.
If an error occurs in the evaluation of the Lisp expression you type,
you may enter a second invocation of the debugger, looking at the new
error. The prompt in this event is ‘rightArrowrightArrow
’ to make it clear which
level of error you are examining. You can abort the computation and get
back to the first debugger level by typing the Abort
key (see
below).
Various debugger commands ask for Lisp objects, such as an object to return or the name of a catch-tag. You must type a form to be evaluated; its value is the object that is actually used. This provides greater generality, since there are objects to which you might want to refer that cannot be typed in (such as arrays). If the form you type is non-trivial (not just a constant form), the debugger shows you the result of the evaluation and asks for confirmation before proceeding. If you answer negatively, or if you abort, the command is canceled and the debugger returns to command level. Once again, the special bindings in effect for evaluation of the form are those of the current frame you have selected.
The Meta-S
and Control-Meta-S
commands allow you to look at the
bindings in effect at the current frame. A few variables are rebound by
the debugger itself whenever a user-provided form is evaluated, so you
you must use Meta-S
to find the values they actually had in the
erring computation.
*terminal-io*
*terminal-io*
is rebound to the stream the debugger is using.
*standard-input*
*standard-output*
*standard-input*
and *standard-output*
are rebound to be synonymous with
*terminal-io*
.
+
, ++
, +++
*
, **
, ***
, *values*
+
and *
are rebound to the debugger’s previous form and previous
value. Commands for examining arguments and such, including C-M-A
,
C-M-L
and C-M-V
, leave *
set to the value examined and +
set to a locative to where the value was found. When the debugger is
first entered, +
is the last form typed, which is typically the one
that caused the error, and *
is the value of the previous form.
evalhook
applyhook
These variables (see evalhook-var) are rebound to nil
, turning off
the step
facility if it was in use when the error occurred.
eh:condition-handlers
eh:condition-default-handlers
These are rebound to nil
,
so that errors occurring within forms you type while in the debugger do not
magically resume execution of the erring program.
eh:condition-resume-handlers
To prevent resume handlers established outside the error from being invoked
automatically by deeper levels of error, this variable is rebound to a new value,
which has an element t
added in the front.
All debugger commands are single characters, usually with the Control
or
Meta
bits. The single most useful command is Abort
(or Control-Z
),
which exits from the debugger and throws out of the computation that got
the error. (This is the Abort
key, not a 5-letter command.) Often you are not
interested in using the debugger at all and just want to get back to
Lisp top level; so you can do this in one keystroke.
If the error happened while you were innocently using a system utility
such as the editor, then it represents a bug in the system. Report the
bug using the debugger command Control-M
. This gives you an editor
preinitialized with the error message and a backtrace. You should type
in a precise description of what you did that led up to the problem,
then send the message by typing End
. Be as complete as possible,
and always give the exact commands you typed, exact filenames, etc.
rather then general descriptions, as much as possible. The person who
investigates the bug report will have to try to make the problem happen
again; if he does not know where to find your file, he will have a
difficult time.
The Abort
command signals the sys:abort
condition, returning
control to the most recent command loop.
This can be Lisp top level, a break
, or the debugger command loop
associated with another error. Typing Abort
multiple times throws
back to successively older read-eval-print or command loops until top level
is reached. Typing Meta-Abort
, on the other hand, always throws
to top level. Meta-Abort
is not a debugger command, but a system
command that is always available no matter what program you are in.
Note that typing Abort
in the middle of typing a form to be evaluated
by the debugger aborts that form and returns to the debugger’s command level,
while typing Abort
as a debugger command returns out of the debugger
and the erring program, to the previous command level.
Typing Abort
after entering a numeric argument just discards the argument.
Self-documentation is provided by the Help
or ?
command,
which types out some documentation on the debugger commands, including any
special commands that apply to the particular error currently being handled.
Often you want to try to proceed from the error. When the debugger is
entered, it prints a table of commands you can use to proceed, or abort
to various levels. The commands are Super-A
, Super-B
, and so on. How
many there are and what they do is different each time there is an
error, but the table says what each one is for. If you want to see the
table again, type Help
followed by P
.
The Resume
(or Control-C
) command is often synonymous with
Super-A
. But Resume
only proceeds, never aborts. If there is no
way to proceed, just ways to abort, then Resume
does not do anything.
The debugger knows about a current stack frame, and there
are several commands that use it. The initially current stack frame
is the one which signaled the error, either the one which got the microcode-detected
error or the one which called ferror
, cerror
, or error
.
When the debugger starts it up it shows you this frame in the following format:
FOO: Arg 0 (X): 13 Arg 1 (Y): 1
and so on. This means that foo
was called
with two arguments, whose names (in the Lisp source code) are x
and y
.
The current values of x
and y
are 13
and 1
respectively. These
may not be the original arguments if foo
happens to setq
its argument variables.
The Clear-Screen
(or Control-L
) command clears the screen, retypes
the error message that was initially printed when the debugger was
entered, and prints out a description of the current frame, in the
above format.
Several commands are provided to allow you to examine the Lisp control
stack and to make frames current other than the one that got the error.
The control stack (or “regular pdl”) keeps a record of all functions currently
active. If you call foo
at Lisp’s top level, and it calls bar
,
which in turn calls baz
, and baz
gets an error, then a
backtrace (a backwards trace of the stack) would show all of this
information. The debugger has two backtrace commands. Control-B
simply prints out the names of the functions on the stack; in the above
example it would print
BAZ leftArrow BAR leftArrow FOO leftArrow SI:*EVAL leftArrow SI:LISP-TOP-LEVEL1 leftArrow SI:LISP-TOP-LEVEL
The arrows indicate the direction of calling. The Meta-B
command prints
a more extensive backtrace, indicating the names of the arguments to the functions
and their current values; for the example above it might look like:
BAZ: Arg 0 (X): 13 Arg 1 (Y): 1 BAR: Arg 0 (ADDEND): 13 FOO: Arg 0 (FROB): (A B C . D)
and so on. The backtrace commands all accept numeric arguments which say how many frames to describe, the default being to describe all the frames.
Moving around in the stack:
The Control-N
command makes the “next” older frame be current.
This is the frame which
called the one that was current at before. The new current frame’s
function and arguments are printed in the format shown immediately above.
Control-P
moves the current frame in the reverse direction.
If you use it immediately after getting an error it selects frames
that are part of the act of signaling.
Meta-<
selects the frame in which the error occurred, the same frame
that was selected when the debugger was entered. Meta->
selects the
outermost or initial stack frame. Control-S
asks you for a string
and searches down the stack (toward older frames) from the current frame
for a frame whose executing function’s name contains that string. That
frame becomes current and is printed out. These commands are easy to
remember since they are analogous to editor commands.
The Control-Meta-N
, Control-Meta-P
, and Control-Meta-B
commands are like the corresponding Control
commands but don’t
censor the stack to omit “uninteresting” functions. When looking at
interpreted code, the debugger usually tries to skip over frames that
belong to the functions composing the interpreter, such as eval
,
prog
, and cond
. Control-Meta-N
, Control-Meta-P
, and
Control-Meta-B
show everything. They also show frames that are not
yet active; that is, frames whose arguments are still being computed for
functions that are going to be called. The Control-Meta-U
command
goes down the stack (to older frames) to the next interesting function
and makes that the current frame.
Meta-L
prints out the current frame in “full screen” format, which shows
the arguments and their values, the local variables and their values,
and the machine code with an arrow pointing to the next instruction to
be executed. Refer to understanding-compiled-code for help in reading
this machine code.
Commands such as Control-N
and Control-P
, which are useful to
issue repeatedly, take a prefix numeric argument and repeat that many types.
The numeric argument is typed by using Control
or Meta
and the number
keys, as in the editor. Some other commands such as Control-M
also
use the numeric argument; refer to the table at the end of the section
for detailed information.
Resuming execution:
Meta-C
is similar to Control-C
, but in the case of an unbound
variable or undefined function, actually setq
s the variable or
defines the function, so that the error will not happen again.
Control-C
(or Resume
) provides a replacement value but does not
actually change the variable. Meta-C
proceeds using the proceed type
:store-new-value
, and is available only if that proceed type is
provided.
Control-R
is used to return a value or values from the current frame; the frame
that called that frame continues running as if the function of the current frame
had returned. This command prompts you for each value that the caller
expects; you can type either a form which evaluates to the desired value
or End
if you wish to return no more values.
The Control-T
command does a throw
to a given tag with a given value; you
are prompted for the tag and the value.
Control-Meta-R
reinvokes the current frame; it starts execution
at the beginning of the function, with the arguments currently present
in the stack frame. These are the same arguments the function was
originally called with unless either the function itself has changed them
with setq
or you have set them in the debugger. If the
function has been redefined in the meantime (perhaps you edited it and
fixed its bug) the new definition is used. Control-Meta-R
asks for
confirmation before resuming execution.
Meta-R
is similar to Control-Meta-R
but allows you to change the
arguments if you wish. You are prompted for the new arguments one by one;
you can type a form which evaluates to the desired argument, or Space
to leave that argument unchanged, or End
if you do not want any more
arguments. Space
is allowed only if this argument was previously passed,
and End
is not allowed for a required argument. Once you have finished
specifying the arguments, you must confirm before execution resumes.
Stepping through function calls and returns:
You can request a trap to the debugger on exit from a particular frame, or the next time a function is called.
Each stack frame has a “trap on exit” bit. The Control-X
command
toggles this bit. The Meta-X
command sets the bit to cause a trap
for the current frame and all outer frames. If a program is in an
infinite loop, this is a good way to find out how far back on the stack
the loop is taking place. This also enables you to see what values
are being returned. The Control-Meta-X
command clears the
trap-on-exit bit for the current frame and outer frames.
The Control-D
command proceeds like Control-C
but requests a
trap the next time a function is called. The Meta-D
command toggles
the trap-on-next-call bit for the erring stack group. It is useful if
you wish to set the bit and then resume execution with something other
than Control-C
. The function breakon
may be used to request a trap
on calling a particular function. Trapping on entry to a frame
automatically sets the trap-on-exit bit for that frame; use
Control-X
to clear it if you do not want another trap.
Transfering to other systems:
Control-E
puts you into the editor, looking at the source code for the
function in the current frame. This is useful when you have found the function
that caused the error and that needs to be fixed. The editor command Control-Z
will return to the debugger, if it is still there.
Control-M
puts you into the editor to mail a bug report. The error message
and a backtrace are put into the editor buffer for you. A numeric argument
says how many frames to include in the backtrace.
Control-Meta-W
calls the window debugger, a display-oriented
debugger. It is not documented in this manual, but should be usable
without further documentation.
Examining and setting the arguments, local variables, and values:
Control-Meta-A
takes a numeric argument, n, and prints out the
value of the nth argument of the current frame. It leaves *
set
to the value of the argument, so that you can use the Lisp
read-eval-print
loop to examine it. It also leaves +
set to a
locative pointing to the argument on the stack, so that you can change
that argument (by calling rplacd
on the locative).
Control-Meta-L
is similar, but refers to the nth local variable
of the frame. Control-Meta-V
refers to the nth value this frame
has returned (in a trap-on-exit). Control-Meta-F
refers to the
function executing in the frame; it ignores its numeric argument and
doesn’t allow you to change the function.
Another way to examine and set the arguments, locals and values of a
frame is with the functions eh-arg
, eh-loc
, eh-val
and
eh-fun
. Use these functions in expressions you evaluate inside
the debugger, and they refer to the arguments, locals, values and
function, respectively, of the debugger’s current frame.
The names eh:arg
, eh:val
, etc are for compatibility with
the Symbolics system.
When used in an expression evaluated in the debugger, eh-arg
returns the value of the specifed argument in the debugger’s
current frame. Argument names are compared ignoring packages; only
the pname of the symbol you supply is relevant. eh-arg
can appear
in setf
and locf
to set an argument or get its location.
Like eh-arg
but accesses the current frame’s
local variables instead of its arguments.
eh-val
is used in an expression evaluated in the debugger
when the current frame is returning multiple values, to examine those
values. This is only useful if the function has already begun to
return some values (as in a trap-on-exit), since otherwise they are
all nil
. If a name is specified, it is looked for in the function’s
values
or return-list
declaration, if any.
eh-val
can be used with setf
and locf
. You can make a
frame return a specific sequence of values by setting all but the last
value with eh-val
and doing Control-R
to return the last value.
eh-val
with no argument returns a list of all the
values this frame is returning.
Control-A
Prints argument list of function in current frame.
Control-Meta-A
Sets *
to the nth argument of the current frame.
Control-B
Prints brief backtrace.
Meta-B
Prints longer backtrace.
Control-Meta-B
Prints longer backtrace with no censoring of “uninteresting” functions.
Control-C or Resume
Attempts to continue, using the first proceed type on the list of available ones for this error.
Meta-C
Attempts to continue, setq
’ing the unbound variable or otherwise
“permanently” fixing the error. This uses the proceed type
:store-new-value
, and is available only if that proceed type is.
Control-D
Attempts to continue like Control-C
, but trap on the next function call.
Meta-D
Toggles the flag that causes a trap on the next function call after you continue or otherwise exit the debugger.
Control-E
Switches to Zmacs to edit the source code for the function in the current frame.
Control-Meta-F
Sets *
to the function in the current frame.
Control-G or Abort
Quits to command level. This is not a command, but something you can type to escape from typing in an argument of a command.
Control-Meta-H
Describes the condition handlers and resume handlers established by the current frame.
Control-L or Clear-Screen
Redisplays error message and current frame.
Meta-L
Displays the current frame, including local variables and compiled code.
Control-Meta-L
Sets *
to the value of local variable n of the current frame.
Control-M
Sends a bug report containing the error message and a backtrace of n frames (default is 3).
Control-N or Line
Moves to the next (older) frame. With argument, moves down n frames.
Meta-N
Moves to next frame and displays it like Meta-L
. With argument, move down n frames.
Control-Meta-N
Moves to next frame even if it is “uninteresting” or still accumulating arguments. With argument, moves down n frames.
Control-P or Return
Moves up to previous (newer) frame. With argument, moves up n frames.
Meta-P
Moves to previous frame and displays it like Meta-L
. With argument, moves up n frames.
Control-Meta-P
Moves to previous frame even if it is “uninteresting” or still accumulating arguments. With argument, moves up n frames.
Control-R
Returns a value or values from the current frame.
Meta-R
Reinvokes the function in the current frame (restart its execution at the beginning), optionally changing the arguments.
Control-Meta-R
Reinvokes the function in the current frame with the same arguments.
Control-S
Searches for a frame containing a specified function.
Meta-S
Reads the name of a special variable and returns that variable’s value
in the current frame. Instance variables of self
may also be
specified even if not special.
Control-Meta-S
Prints a list of special variables bound by the current frame and the
values they are bound to by the frame. If the frame binds self
, all
the instance variables of self
are listed even if they are not special.
Control-T
Throws a value to a tag.
Control-Meta-U
Moves down the stack to the previous “interesting” frame.
Control-X
Toggles the flag in the current frame that causes a trap on exit or throw through that frame.
Meta-X
Sets the flag causing a trap on exit or throw through the frame for the current frame and all the frames outside of it.
Control-Meta-X
Clears the flag causing a trap on exit or throw through the frame for the current frame and all the frames outside of it.
Control-Meta-V
Sets *
to the nth value being returned from the current frame.
This is non-nil
only in a trap on exit from the frame.
Control-Meta-W
Switches to the window-oriented debugger.
Control-Z or Abort
Aborts the computation and throw back to the most recent
break
or debugger, to the program’s command level,
or to Lisp top level.
? or Help
Prints debugger command self-documentation.
Meta-<
Moves to the frame in which the error was signaled, and makes it current once again.
Meta->
Moves to the outermost (oldest) stack frame.
Control-0 through Control-Meta-9
Numeric arguments to the following command are specified by typing a decimal number
with Control
and/or Meta
held down.
Super-A, etc.
The commands Super-A
, Super-B
, etc. are assigned to all the available
proceed types for this error. The assignments are different each time
the debugger is entered, so it prints a list of them when it starts up.
Help P
prints the list again.
If the debugger is entered in a window that is not exposed, a notification is used to inform you that it has happened.
In general, a
notification appears as a brief message printed inside square
brackets if the selected window can print it. Otherwise,
blinking text appears in the mouse documentation line telling
you that a notification is waiting; to see the notification,
type Terminal N
or select a window that can print it.
In either case, an audible beep is made.
In the case of a notification that the debugger is waiting to
use a deexposed window, you can select and expose the window
in which the error happened by typing Terminal 0 S
.
You can do this even if the notification has not been printed yet
because the selected window cannot print it. If you select
the waiting window, in this way or in any other way, the notification
is discarded since you already know what it was intended to tell you.
If the debugger is entered in a process that has no window or other suitable stream to
type out on, the window system assigns it a “background window”. Since this
window is initially not exposed, a notification is printed as above and you
must use Terminal 0 S
to see the window.
If an error happens in the scheduler stack group or the first level error handler stack group which are needed for processes to function, or in the keyboard or mouse process (both needed for the window system to function), the debugger uses the cold load stream, a primitive facility for terminal I/O which bypasses the window system.
If an error happens in another process but the window system is locked
so that the notification mechanism cannot function, the cold load stream
is used to ask what to do. You can tell the debugger to use the cold
load stream immediately, to forcibly clear the window system locks and
notify immediately as above, or to wait for the locks to become unlocked
and then notify as above. If you tell it to wait, you can resume
operation of the machine. Meanwhile, you can use the command Terminal
Control-Clear-Input
to forcibly unlock the locks, or Terminal Call
to tell the debugger to use the cold load stream. The latter command
normally enters a break-loop that uses the cold-load stream, but if
there are any background errors, it offers to enter the debugger to
handle them. You can also handle the errors in a Lisp listen loop
of your choice by means of the function eh
(eh-fun), assuming
you can select a functioning Lisp listen loop.
After a warm boot, the process that was running at the time of booting (or at the time the machine crashed prior to booting) may be debugged if you answer ‘no’ when the system asks whether to reset that process.
Invoke the debugger, like the function eh
(eh-fun),
on the process that was running as of the last warm boot
(assuming there was such a process).
On the CADR, the state you see in the debugger is not correct; some of the information dates from some period of time in advance of the boot or the crash.
On the Lambda, the state you see in the debugger will, in some system version, be accurate.
The trace facility allows the user to trace some functions. When a function is traced, certain special actions are taken when it is called and when it returns. The default tracing action is to print a message when the function is called, showing its name and arguments, and another message when the function returns, showing its name and value(s).
The trace facility is closely compatible with Maclisp. You invoke
it through the trace
and untrace
special forms, whose syntax is described
below. Alternatively, you can use the trace system by clicking Trace
in the system menu, or by using the Meta-X Trace
command in the editor.
This allows you to select the trace options from a menu instead of having
to remember the following syntax.
A trace
form looks like:
(trace spec-1 spec-2 ...)
Each spec can take any of the following forms:
This is a function name, with no options. The function is traced in the default way, printing a message each time it is called and each time it returns.
(function-name option-1 option-2 ...)
function-name is a symbol and the options control how it is to be traced. The various options are listed below. Some options take arguments, which should be given immediately following the option name.
(:function function-spec option-1 option-2 ...)
This is like the previous form except that function-spec need not be a symbol (see function-spec). It exists because if function-name was a list in the previous form, it would instead be interpreted as the following form:
((function-1 function-2...) option-1 option-2 ...)
All of the functions are traced with the same options. Each function can be either a symbol or a general function-spec.
The following trace
options exist:
:break pred
¶Causes a breakpoint to be entered after printing
the entry trace information but before applying the traced function to its
arguments, if and only if pred evaluates to non-nil
. During the
breakpoint, the symbol arglist
is bound to a list of the arguments
of the function.
:exitbreak pred
¶This is just like break
except that the
breakpoint is entered after the function has been executed and the exit trace information
has been printed, but before control returns. During the
breakpoint, the symbol arglist
is bound to a list of the arguments
of the function, and the symbol values
is bound to a list of
the values that the function is returning.
:error
¶Causes the error handler to be called when the function is entered. Use
Resume
(or Control-C
) to continue execution of the function. If this option
is specified, there is no printed trace output other than the error message
printed by the error handler. This is semi-obsolete, as breakon
is
more convenient and does more exactly the right thing.
:step
¶Causes the function to be single-stepped whenever it is called. See the documentation on the step facility, stepper-section.
:stepcond pred
¶Causes the function to be single-stepped
only if pred evaluates to non-nil
.
:entrycond pred
¶Causes trace information to be printed on function
entry only if pred evaluates to non-nil
.
:exitcond pred
¶Causes trace information to be printed on function
exit only if pred evaluates to non-nil
.
:cond pred
¶This specifies both :exitcond
and :entrycond
together.
:wherein function
¶Causes the function to be traced only when called, directly or indirectly,
from the specified function function. One can give several trace specs to
trace
, all specifying the same function but with different wherein
options, so that the function is traced in different ways when called from
different functions.
This is different from advise-within
, which only affects the function
being advised when it is called directly from the other function. The trace
:wherein
option means that when the traced function is called, the special
tracing actions occur if the other function is the caller of this function,
or its caller’s caller, or its caller’s caller’s caller, etc.
:argpdl pdl
¶Specifies a symbol pdl, whose value is
initially set to nil
by trace
. When the function is traced, a
list of the current recursion level for the function, the function’s
name, and a list of arguments is consed onto the pdl when the
function is entered, and cdr’ed back off when the function is exited.
The pdl can be inspected from within a breakpoint, for example, and
used to determine the very recent history of the function. This option
can be used with or without printed trace output. Each function can be
given its own pdl, or one pdl may serve several functions.
:entryprint form
¶The form is evaluated and the value is included in the trace message
for calls to the function. You can give this option multiple times,
and all the form’s thus specified are evaluated and printed.
\\
precedes the values to separate them from the arguments.
:exitprint form
¶The form is evaluated and the value is included in the trace message
for returns from the function. You can give this option multiple times,
and all the form’s thus specified are evaluated and printed.
\\
precedes the values to separate them from the returned values.
:print form
¶The form is evaluated and the value is included in the trace messages
for both calls to and returns from the function. Equivalent to
:exitprint
and :entryprint
at once.
:entry list
¶This specifies a list of arbitrary forms whose
values are to be printed along with the usual entry-trace. The list of
resultant values, when printed, is preceded by \\
to separate it
from the other information.
:exit list
¶This is similar to entry
, but specifies expressions
whose values are printed with the exit-trace. Again, the list of
values printed is preceded by \\
.
:arg :value :both nil
¶These specify which of the usual trace
printouts should be enabled. If :arg
is specified, then on function
entry the name of the function and the values of its arguments will be
printed. If :value
is specified, then on function exit the returned
value(s) of the function will be printed. If :both
is specified,
both of these will be printed. If nil
is specified, neither will
be printed. If none of these four options are specified the default is
to :both
. If any further options appear after one of these,
they are not treated as options! Rather, they are considered to
be arbitrary forms whose values are to be printed on entry and/or exit
to the function, along with the normal trace information. The values
printed will be preceded by a //
, and follow any values specified
by :entry
or :exit
.
Note that since these options “swallow” all following options, if one is given it should be the last option specified.
In the evaluation of the expression arguments to various trace
options
such as :cond
and :break
, the value of arglist
is
a list of the arguments given to the traced function. Thus
(trace (foo :break (null (car arglist))))
would cause a break in foo
if and only if the first argument to
foo
is nil
. If the :break
option is used, the variable
arglist
is valid inside the break-loop. If you setq
arglist
before actual function execution, the arguments seen by the function
will change.
In the evaluation of the expression arguments to various trace
options
such as :cond
and :break
on exit from the traced function,
the variable values
is bound to a
list of the resulting values of the traced function.
If the :exitbreak
option is used, the variables values
and arglist
are valid inside the break-loop. If you setq
values
, the values returned
by the function will change.
The trace specifications may be “factored”, as explained above. For example,
(trace ((foo bar) :break (bad-p arglist) :value))
is equivalent to
(trace (foo :break (bad-p arglist) :value)
(bar :break (bad-p arglist) :value))
Since a list as a function name is interpreted as a list of functions, non-atomic function names (see function-spec) are specified as follows:
(trace (:function (:method flavor :message) :break t))
trace
returns as its value a list of names of all functions it traced. If
called with no arguments, as just (trace)
, it returns a list of all the
functions currently being traced.
If you attempt to trace a function already being traced, trace
calls
untrace
before setting up the new trace.
Tracing is implemented with encapsulation (see encapsulate), so if the
function is redefined (e.g with defun
or by loading it from a QFASL file)
the tracing will be transferred from the old definition to the new definition.
Tracing output is printed on the stream that is the value of *trace-output*
.
This is synonymous with *terminal-io*
unless you change it.
Undoes the effects of trace
and restores functions to
their normal, untraced state. untrace
accepts multiple specifications,
e.g (untrace foo quux fuphoo)
. Calling untrace
with no arguments
will untrace all functions currently being traced.
If the value of trace-compile-flag
is non-nil
, the functions
created by trace
are compiled, allowing you to trace special
forms such as cond
without interfering with the execution of the
tracing functions. The default value of this flag is nil
.
See also the function compile-encapsulations
, compile-encapsulations-fun.
The function breakon
allows you to request that the debugger be
entered whenever a certain function is called.
Encapsulates the definition of function-spec so that a trap-on-call occurs when it is called. This enters the debugger. A trap-on-exit will occur when the stack frame is exited.
If condition-form is non-nil
, its value should be a form to be
evaluated each time function-spec is called. The trap occurs only if
condition-form evaluates to non-nil
. Omitting the
condition-form is equivalent to supplying t
. If breakon
is
called more than once for the same function-spec and different
condition-forms, the trap occurs if any of the conditions are true.
breakon
with no arguments returns a list of the functions that
are broken on.
Conditional breakons are useful for causing the trap to occur only in a certain stack group. This sometimes allows debugging of functions that are being used frequently in background processes.
(breakon 'foo `(eq current-stack-group ',current-stack-group))
If you wish to trap on calls to foo
when called from the execution of
bar
, you can use (si:function-active-p 'bar)
as the condition.
If you want to trap only calls made directly from bar
, the thing to
do is
(breakon '(:within bar foo))
rather than a conditional breakon.
To break only the n’th time foo
is called, do
(defvar i n) (breakon 'foo '(zerop (decf i)))
Another useful form of conditional breakon allows you to control trapping from the keyboard:
(breakon 'foo '(tv:key-state :mode-lock))
The trap occurs only when the Mode-Lock
key is down. This key
is not normally used for much else. With this technique, you can
successfully trap on functions used by the debugger!
Remove the breakon
set on function-spec. If
conditional-form is specified, remove only that condition. Breakons
with other conditions are not removed.
With no arguments, unbreakon
removes all breakons from all
functions.
To cause the encapsulation which implements the breakon to be compiled,
call compile-encapsulations
or set compile-encapsulations-flag
non-nil
. See compile-encapsulations-fun. This may eliminate
some of the problems that occur if you breakon a function such as
prog
that is used by the evaluator. (A conditional to trap only in
one stack group will help here also.)
To advise a function is to tell it to do something extra in addition to its
actual definition. It is done by means of the function advise
. The
something extra is called a piece of advice, and it can be done before, after,
or around the definition itself. The advice and the definition are independent,
in that changing either one does not interfere with the other. Each function
can be given any number of pieces of advice.
Advising is fairly similar to tracing, but its purpose is different. Tracing is intended for temporary changes to a function to give the user information about when and how the function is called and when and with what value it returns. Advising is intended for semi-permanent changes to what a function actually does. The differences between tracing and advising are motivated by this difference in goals.
Advice can be used for testing out a change to a function in a way
that is easy to retract. In this case, you would call advise
from
the terminal. It can also be used for customizing a
function that is part of a program written by someone else. In this
case you would be likely to put a call to advise
in one of your
source files or your login init file (see login-fun), rather than modifying the other
person’s source code.
Advising is implemented with encapsulation (see encapsulate), so if the
function is redefined (e.g with defun
or by loading it from a QFASL file)
the advice will be transferred from the old definition to the new definition.
A function is advised by the special form
(advise function class name position form1 form2...)
None of this is evaluated. function is the function to put the advice on.
It is usually a symbol, but any function spec is allowed (see function-spec).
The forms are the advice; they get evaluated when the function is called.
class should be either :before
, :after
, or :around
, and says
when to execute the advice (before, after, or around the execution of the
definition of the function). The meaning of :around
advice is explained a
couple of sections below.
name is used to keep track of multiple pieces of advice on the same
function. name is an arbitrary symbol that is remembered as the
name of this particular piece of advice. If you have no name in mind,
use nil
; then we say the piece of advice is anonymous. A given
function and class can have any number of pieces of anonymous advice,
but it can have only one piece of named advice for any one name. If
you try to define a second one, it replaces the first. Advice for
testing purposes is usually anonymous. Advice used for customizing
someone else’s program should usually be named so that multiple
customizations to one function have separate names. Then, if you
reload a customization that is already loaded, it does not get put on
twice.
position says where to put this piece of advice in relation to others of the same class already present on the same function. If position is nil, the new advice goes in the default position: it usually goes at the beginning (where it is executed before the other advice), but if it is replacing another piece of advice with the same name, it goes in the same place that the old piece of advice was in.
If you wish to specify the position, position can be the numerical index of which existing piece of advice to insert this one before. Zero means at the beginning; a very large number means at the end. Or, position can be the name of an existing piece of advice of the same class on the same function; the new advice is inserted before that one.
For example,
(advise factorial :before negative-arg-check nil (if (minusp (first arglist)) (ferror nil "factorial of negative argument")))
This modifies the (hypothetical) factorial function so that if it is called with a negative argument it signals an error instead of running forever.
advise
with no arguments returns a list of advised functions.
(unadvise function class position)
removes pieces of advice. None of its arguments are evaluated. function
and class have the same meaning as they do in the function advise
.
position specifies which piece of advice to remove. It can be the numeric
index (zero means the first one) or it can be the name of the piece of advice.
If some of the arguments
are missing or nil
, all pieces of advice which match the non-nil
arguments
are removed. Thus, if function is missing or nil
, all advice on all
functions which match the specified class and position are removed.
If position is missing or nil
, then all advice of the specified class
on the specified function is removed. If only function is non-nil
,
all advice on that function is removed.
The following are the primitive functions for adding and removing advice.
Unlike the above special forms, these are functions and can be conveniently
used by programs. advise
and unadvise
are actually macros that
expand into calls to these two.
Adds advice. The arguments have the same meaning as in advise
.
Note that the forms argument is not a &rest
argument.
Removes advice. If function or class or position is nil
or unspecified, advice is removed from all functions or all classes of
advice or advice at all positions are removed.
You can find out manually what advice a function has with grindef
, which
grinds the advice on the function as forms that are calls to
advise
. These are in addition to the definition of the function.
To cause the advice to be compiled, call compile-encapsulations
or
set compile-encapsulations-flag
non-nil
. See
compile-encapsulations-fun.
For advice to interact usefully with the definition and intended purpose of the function, it must be able to interface to the data flow and control flow through the function. We provide conventions for doing this.
The list of the arguments to the function can be found in the variable
arglist
. :before
advice can replace this list, or an element of it, to
change the arguments passed to the definition itself. If you replace
an element, it is wise to copy the whole list first with
(setq arglist (copylist arglist))
After the function’s definition has been executed, the list of the
values it returned can be found in the variable values
. :after
advice
can set this variable or replace its elements to cause different
values to be returned.
All the advice is executed within a block nil
so any piece of advice can
exit the entire function with return
. The arguments of the return
are returned as the values of the function and no further advice
is executed. If a piece of :before
advice does this then the
function’s definition is not even called.
A piece of :before
or :after
advice is executed entirely before or
entirely after the definition of the function. :around
advice is wrapped
around the definition; that is, the call to the original definition of
the function is done at a specified place inside the piece of :around
advice. You specify where by putting the symbol :do-it
in that place.
For example, (+ 5 :do-it)
as a piece of :around
advice would add 5
to
the value returned by the function. This could also be done by
(setq values (list (+ 5 (car values))))
as :after
advice.
When there is more than one piece of :around
advice, the pieces are stored
in a sequence just like :before
and :after
advice. Then, the first
piece of advice in the sequence is the one started first. The second
piece is substituted for :do-it
in the first one. The third one is
substituted for :do-it
in the second one. The original definition is
substituted for :do-it
in the last piece of advice.
:around
advice can access arglist
, but values
is not set up until the
outermost :around
advice returns. At that time, it is set to the
value returned by the :around
advice. It is reasonable for the advice to
receive the values of the :do-it
(e.g with multiple-value-list
) and
fool with them before returning them (e.g with values-list
).
:around
advice can return
from the block
at any time, whether the
original definition has been executed yet or not. It can also override
the original definition by failing to contain :do-it
. Containing two
instances of :do-it
may be useful under peculiar circumstances. If you
are careless, the original definition may be called twice, but
something like
(if (foo) (+ 5 :do-it) (* 2 :do-it))
will work reasonably.
It is possible to advise the function foo
only for when it is called
directly from a specific other function bar
. You do this by
advising the function specifier (:within bar foo)
. That works by
finding all occurrences of foo
in the definition of bar
and
replacing them with #:altered-foo-within-bar
. (Note that this is an
uninterned symbol.) This can be done even if bar
’s definition is
compiled code. The symbol #:altered-foo-within-bar
starts off with
the symbol foo
as its definition; then the symbol
#:altered-foo-within-bar
, rather than foo
itself, is advised.
The system remembers that foo
has been replaced inside bar
, so
that if you change the definition of bar
, or advise it, then the
replacement is propagated to the new definition or to the advice. If
you remove all the advice on (:within bar foo)
, so that its
definition becomes the symbol foo
again, then the replacement is
unmade and everything returns to its original state.
(grindef bar)
prints foo
where it originally appeared, rather than
#:altered-foo-within-bar
, so the replacement is not seen. Instead,
grindef
prints calls to advise
to describe all the advice that
has been put on foo
or anything else within bar
.
An alternate way of putting on this sort of advice is to use
advise-within
.
(advise-within within-function function-to-advise class name position forms...)
advises function-to-advise only when called directly from the function
within-function. The other arguments mean the same thing as with
advise
. None of them are evaluated.
To remove advice from (:within bar foo)
, you can use unadvise
on that
function specifier. Alternatively, you can use unadvise-within
.
(unadvise-within within-function function-to-advise class position)
removes advice
that has been placed on (:within within-function function-to-advise)
.
Any of the four arguments may be missing or nil
; then that argument is
unconstrained. All advice matching whichever arguments are non-nil
is
removed. For example, (unadvise-within foo nil :before)
removes
all :before
-advice from anything within foo
. (unadvise-within)
removes all advice placed on anything within anything. By contrast, (unadvise)
removes all advice, including advice placed on a function for all callers.
Advice placed
on a function not within another specific function is never removed by
unadvise-within
.
The function versions of advise-within
and unadvise-within
are
called si:advise-within-1
and si:unadvise-within-1
. advise-within
and
unadvise-within
are macros that expand into calls to the other two.
The Step facility gives you the ability to follow every step of the evaluation of a form, and examine what is going on. It is analogous to a single-step proceed facility often found in machine-language debuggers. If your program is doing something strange, and it isn’t obvious how it’s getting into its strange state, then the stepper is for you.
There are two ways to enter the stepper. One is by use of the
step
function.
This evaluates form with single stepping. It returns the value of form.
For example, if you have a function named foo
, and typical arguments
to it might be t
and 3
, you could say
(step '(foo t 3))
to evaluate the form (foo t 3)
with single stepping.
The other way to get into the stepper is to use the :step
option
of trace
(see trace-fun). If a function is traced with the :step
option, then
whenever that function is called it will be single stepped.
Note that any function to be stepped must be interpreted; that is, it must be a lambda-expression. Compiled code cannot be stepped by the stepper.
When evaluation is proceeding with single stepping, before any
form is evaluated, it is (partially) printed out, preceded by a forward
arrow (rightArrow
) character When a macro is expanded, the expansion is
printed out preceded by a double arrow (doubleArrow
) character. When a form
returns a value, the form and the values are printed out preceded by a
backwards arrow (leftArrow
) character; if there is more than one value
being returned, an and-sign (andSign
) character is printed between the
values. When the stepper has evaluated the args to a form and is about
to apply the function, it prints a lambda () because entering the
lambda is the next thing to be done.
Since the forms may be very long, the stepper does not print all of a form; it truncates the printed representation after a certain number of characters. Also, to show the recursion pattern of who calls whom in a graphic fashion, it indents each form proportionally to its level of recursion.
After the stepper prints any of these things, it waits for a command from the user. There are several commands to tell the stepper how to proceed, or to look at what is happening. The commands are:
Control-N
(Next)Steps to the Next event, then asks for another command. Events include beginning to evaluate a form at any level or finishing the evaluation of a form at any level.
Space
Steps to the next event at this level. In other words, continue to evaluate at this level, but don’t step anything at lower levels. This is a good way to skip over parts of the evaluation that don’t interest you.
Control-A
(Args)Skips over the evaluation of the arguments of this form, but pauses in the stepper before calling the function that is the car of the form.
Control-U
(Up)Continues evaluating until we go up one level. This is like the space command, only more so; it skips over anything on the current level as well as lower levels.
Control-X
(eXit)Exits; finishes evaluation without any more stepping.
Control-T
(Type)Retypes the current form in full (without truncation).
Control-G
(Grind)Grinds (i.e prettyprints) the current form.
Control-E
(Editor)Switches windows, to the editor.
Control-B
(Breakpoint)Enters a break
loop from which you can examine the values of
variables and other aspects of the current environment. From
within this loop, the following variables are available:
step-form
the current form.
step-values
the list of returned values.
step-value
the first returned value.
If you change the values of these variables, you will affect execution.
Control-L
Clears the screen and redisplays the last 10 pending forms (forms that are being evaluated).
Meta-L
Like Control-L, but doesn’t clear the screen.
Control-Meta-L
Like Control-L, but redisplays all pending forms.
?
or Help
Prints documentation on these commands.
It is strongly suggested that you write some little function and try the stepper on it. If you get a feel for what the stepper does and how it works, you will be able to tell when it is the right thing to use to find bugs.
The evalhook
facility provides a “hook” into the evaluator; it is a
way you can get a Lisp form of your choice to be executed whenever the
evaluator is called. The stepper uses evalhook
, and usually it is
the only thing that ever needs to. However, if you want to write your
own stepper or something similar, this is the primitive facility that
you can use to do so. The way this works is a bit hairy, but unless
you need to write your own stepper you don’t have to worry about it.
If the value of evalhook
is non-nil
, then special things happen
in the evaluator. Its value is called the hook function. When a
form (any form, even a number or a symbol) is to be evaluated, the hook
function is called instead. Whatever values the hook function returns
are taken to be the results of the evaluation. Both evalhook
and
applyhook
are bound to nil
before the hook function is actually
called.
The hook function receives two arguments: the form that was to be evaluated, and the lexical environment of evaluation. These two arguments allow the hook function to perform later, if it wishes, the very same evaluation that the hook was called instead of.
If the value of applyhook
is non-nil
, it is called the
next time the interpreter is about to apply a function to its
evaluated arguments. Whatever values the apply hook function
returns are taken to be the results of calling the other function.
Both evalhook
and applyhook
are bound to nil
before the
hook function is actually called.
The hook function receives three arguments: the function that was going to be called, the list of arguments it was going to receive, and the lexical environment of evaluation. These arguments allow the hook function to perform later, if it wishes, the very same evaluation that the hook was called instead of.
When either the evalhook or the applyhook is called, both variables are
bound to nil
. They are also rebound to nil
by break
and by
the debugger, and setq
’ed to nil
when errors are dismissed
by throwing to the Lisp top level loop. This provides the ability to
escape from this mode if something bad happens.
In order not to impair the efficiency of the Lisp interpreter,
several restrictions are imposed on the evalhook and applyhook.
They apply only to evaluation–whether in a read-eval-print loop,
internally in evaluating arguments in forms, or by explicit use
of the function eval
. They do not have any effect
on compiled function references, on use of the function apply
,
or on the mapping functions.
Evaluates form in the specified environment, with evalhook and applyhook in effect for all recursive evaluations of subforms of form. However, the evalhook is not called for the evaluation of form itself.
environment is a list which represents the lexical environment
to be in effect for the evaluation of form. nil
means an
empty lexical environment, in which no lexical bindings exist. This
is the environment used when eval
itself is called. Aside from
nil
, the only reasonable way to get a value to pass for
environment is to use the last argument passed to a hook
function. You must take care not to use it after the context in
which it was made is exited, because environments normally contain
stack lists which become garbage after their stack frames are
popped.
environment has no effect on the evaluation of a variable which is regarded as special. This is always done by examining the value cell. However, environment contains the record of the local special declarations currently in effect, so it does enter in the decision of whether a variable is special.
Here is an example of the use of evalhook
:
;; This function evaluates a form while printing debugging information. (defun hook (x) (terpri) (evalhook x 'hook-function nil)) ;; Notice how this function callsevalhook
to evaluate the formf
, ;; so as to hook the sub-forms. (defun hook-function (f env) (let ((v (multiple-value-list (evalhook f 'hook-function nil env)))) (format t "form: ~S~%values: ~S~%" f v) (values-list v)))
The following output might be seen from (hook '(cons (car '(a . b)) 'c))
:
form: (quote (a . b)) values: ((a . b)) form: (car (quote (a . b))) values: (a) form: (quote c) values: (c) (a . c)
Applies function to list-of-args in the specified environment, with evalhook
and applyhook in effect for all recursive evaluations of subforms of function’s body.
However, applyhook is not called for this application of function itself.
For more information, refer to the definition of evalhook
, immediately above.
The MAR facility allows any word or contiguous set of words to be monitored constantly, and can cause an error if the words are referenced in a specified manner. The name MAR is from the similar device on the ITS PDP-10’s; it is an acronym for ‘Memory Address Register’. The MAR checking is done by the Lisp Machine’s memory management hardware, so the speed of general execution is not significantly slowed down when the MAR is enabled. However, the speed of accessing pages of memory containing the locations being checked is slowed down somewhat, since every reference involves a microcode trap.
These are the functions that control the MAR:
Sets the MAR on n-words words, starting at location.
location may be any object. Often it will be a locative pointer
to a cell, probably created with the locf
special form.
n-words currently defaults to 1,
but eventually it may default to the size of the object.
cycle-type says under what conditions to trap. :read
means that
only reading the location should cause an error, :write
means that
only writing the location should, t
means that both should.
To set the MAR to detect setq
(and binding) of the variable foo
, use
(set-mar (variable-location foo) :write)
Turns off the MAR. Warm-booting the machine disables the
MAR but does not turn it off, i.e references to the MARed pages
are still slowed down. clear-mar
does not currently speed
things back up until the next time the pages are swapped out;
this may be fixed some day.
(mar-mode)
returns a symbol indicating the current state of
the MAR. It returns one of:
nil
The MAR is not set.
:read
The MAR will cause an error if there is a read.
:write
The MAR will cause an error if there is a write.
t
The MAR will cause an error if there is any reference.
Note that using the MAR makes the pages on which it is set somewhat slower to access, until the next time they are swapped out and back in again after the MAR is shut off. Also, use of the MAR currently breaks the read-only feature if those pages were read-only.
Proceeding from a MAR break allows the memory reference that got an error to take place, and continues the program with the MAR still effective. When proceeding from a write, you have the choice of whether to allow the write to take place or to inhibit it, leaving the location with its old contents.
sys:mar-break
: (condition
) ¶This is the condition, not an error, signaled by a MAR break.
The condition instance supports these operations:
:object
The object one of whose words was being referenced.
:offset
The offset within the object of the word being referenced.
:value
The value read, or to be written.
:direction
Either :read
or :write
.
The proceed type :no-action
simply proceeds, continuing with the
interrupted program as if the MAR had not been set. If the trap was due
to writing, the proceed type :proceed-no-write
is also provided, and
causes the program to proceed but does not store the value in the memory
location.
Most–but not all–write operations first do a read. setq
and
rplaca
both do. This means that if the MAR is in :read
mode it catches writes as well as reads; however, they trap
during the reading phase, and consequently the data to be written are
not yet known. This also means that setting the MAR to t
mode
causes most writes to trap twice, first for a read and then again for a
write. So when the MAR says that it trapped because of a read, this
means a read at the hardware level, which may not look like a read in
your program.
Sometimes it is useful to study the machine language code produced by the Lisp Machine’s compiler, usually in order to analyze an error, or sometimes to check for a suspected compiler problem. This chapter explains how the Lisp Machine’s instruction set works and how to understand what code written in that instruction set is doing. Fortunately, the translation between Lisp and this instruction set is very simple; after you get the hang of it, you can move back and forth between the two representations without much trouble. The following text does not assume any special knowledge about the Lisp Machine, although it sometimes assumes some general computer science background knowledge.
Nobody looks at machine language code by trying to interpret octal numbers by hand. Instead, there is a program called the Disassembler which converts the numeric representation of the instruction set into a more readable textual representation. It is called the Disassembler because it does the opposite of what an Assembler would do; however, there isn’t actually any assembler that accepts this input format, since there is never any need to manually write assembly language for the Lisp Machine.
The simplest way to invoke the Disassembler is with the Lisp function
disassemble
. Here is a simple example. Suppose we type:
(defun foo (x) (assq 'key (get x 'propname))) (compile 'foo) (disassemble 'foo)
This defines the function foo
, compiles it, and invokes the Disassembler
to print out the textual representation of the result of the compilation.
Here is what it looks like:
22 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;'KEY 23 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 24 MOVE D-PDL FEF|7 ;'PROPNAME 25 (MISC) GET D-PDL 26 (MISC) ASSQ D-RETURN
The Disassembler is also used by the Error Handler and the Inspector.
When you see stuff like the above while using one of these programs, it
is disassembled code, in the same format as the disassemble
function
uses. Inspecting a compiled code object shows the disassembled code.
Now, what does this mean? Before we get started, there is just a little bit of jargon to learn.
The acronym PDL stands for Push Down List, and means the same thing as Stack: a last-in first-out memory. The terms PDL and stack will be used interchangeably. The Lisp Machine’s architecture is rather typical of “stack machines”; there is a stack that most instructions deal with, and it is used to hold values being computed, arguments, and local variables, as well as flow-of-control information. An important use of the stack is to pass arguments to instructions, though not all instructions take their arguments from the stack.
The acronym ‘FEF’ stands for Function Entry Frame. A FEF is a compiled
code object produced by the compiler. After the defun
form above
was evaluated, the function cell of the symbol foo
contained a
lambda expression. Then we compiled the function foo
, and the
contents of the function cell were replaced by a FEF. The
printed representation of the FEF for foo
looks like this:
#<DTP-FEF-POINTER 11464337 FOO>
The FEF has three parts (this is a simplified explanation): a header
with various fixed-format fields; a part holding constants and invisible
pointers, and the main body, holding the machine language instructions.
The first part of the FEF, the header, is not very interesting and is
not documented here (you can look at it with describe
but it won’t
be easy to understand). The second part of the FEF holds various
constants referred to by the function; for example, our function foo
references two constants (the symbols key
and propname
), and so
(pointers to) those symbols are stored in the FEF. This part of the FEF
also holds invisible pointers to the value cells of all symbols that the
function uses as variables, and invisible pointers to the function cells
of all symbols that the function calls as functions. The third part of
the FEF holds the machine language code itself.
Now we can read the disassembled code. The first instruction looked like this:
22 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;'KEY
This instruction has several parts. The 22
is the address of this
instruction. The Disassembler prints out the address of each
instruction before it prints out the instruction, so that you can
interpret branching instructions when you see them (we haven’t seen one
of these yet, but we will later). The MOVE
is an opcode: this is a
MOVE
instruction, which moves a datum from one place to another. The
D-PDL
is a destination specification. The D
stands for
‘Destination’, and so D-PDL
means ‘Destination-PDL’: the destination
of the datum being moved is the PDL. This means that the
result will be pushed onto the PDL, rather than just moved to the top;
this instruction is pushing a datum onto the stack. The next field of
the instruction is FEF|6
. This is an address, and it specifies
where the datum is coming from. The vertical bar serves to separate the
two parts of the address. The part before the vertical bar can be
thought of as a base register, and the part after the bar can be
thought of as being an offset from that register. FEF
as a base
register means the address of the FEF that we are disassembling, and so
this address means the location six words into the FEF. So what this
instruction does is to take the datum located six words into the FEF,
and push it onto the PDL. The instruction is followed by a comment
field, which looks like ;'KEY
. This is not a comment that any person
wrote; the disassembler produces these to explain what is going on. The
semicolon just serves to start the comment, the way semicolons in Lisp
code do. In this case, the body of the comment, 'KEY
, is telling us
that the address field (FEF|6
) is addressing a constant (that is what
the single-quote in 'KEY
means), and that the printed representation
of that constant is KEY
. With the help of this comment we finally
get the real story about what this instruction is doing: it is pushing
(a pointer to) the symbol key
onto the stack.
The next instruction looks like this:
23 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X
This is a lot like the previous instruction; the only difference is that
a different “base register” is being used in the address. The ARG
base register is used for addressing your arguments: ARG|0
means
that the datum being addressed is the zeroth argument. Again, the
comment field explains what that means: the value of X (which was the
zeroth argument) is being pushed onto the stack.
The third instruction is just like the first and second ones; it pushes
the symbol propname
onto the stack.
The fourth instruction is something new:
25 (MISC) GET D-PDL
The first thing we see here is (MISC)
. This means that this is one of
the so-called miscellaneous instructions. There are quite a few of
these instructions. With some exceptions, each miscellaneous
instruction corresponds to a Lisp function and has the same name as that
Lisp function. If a Lisp function has a corresponding miscellaneous
instruction, then that function is hand-coded in Lisp Machine microcode.
Miscellaneous instructions only have a destination field; they don’t
have any address field. The inputs to the instruction come from the
stack: the top n elements on the stack are used as inputs to the
instruction and popped off the stack, where n is the number of arguments
taken by the function. The result of the function is stored wherever
the destination field says. In our case, the function being executed is
get
, a Lisp function of two arguments. The top two values will be
popped off the stack and used as the arguments to get
(the value
pushed first is the first argument, the value pushed second is the
second argument, and so on). The result of the call to get
will be
sent to the destination D-PDL
; that is, it will be pushed onto the stack.
(In case you were wondering about how we handle optional arguments and
multiple-value returns, the answer is very simple: functions that use
either of those features cannot be miscellaneous instructions! If you
are curious as to what functions are hand-microcoded and thus available
as miscellaneous instructions, you can look at the defmic
forms in the
file SYS: SYS; DEFMIC LISP
.)
The fifth and last instruction is similar to the fourth:
26 (MISC) ASSQ D-RETURN
What is new here is the new value of the destination field. This one is
called D-RETURN
, and it can be used anywhere destination
fields in general can be used (like in MOVE
instructions). Sending
something to “Destination-Return” means that this value should be the
returned value of the function, and that we should return from this
function. This is a bit unusual in instruction sets; rather than having
a “return” instruction, we have a destination that, when stored into,
returns from the function. What this instruction does, then, is to
invoke the Lisp function assq
on the top two elements of the stack
and return the result of assq
as the result of this function.
Now, let’s look at the program as a whole and see what it did:
22 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;'KEY 23 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 24 MOVE D-PDL FEF|7 ;'PROPNAME 25 (MISC) GET D-PDL 26 (MISC) ASSQ D-RETURN
First it pushes the symbol key
. Then it pushes the value of x
.
Then it pushes the symbol propname
. Then it invokes get
, which
pops the value of x
and the symbol propname
off the stack and
uses them as arguments, thus doing the equivalent of evaluating the form
(get x 'propname)
. The result is left on the stack; the stack now
contains the result of the get
on top, and the symbol key
underneath that. Next, it invokes assq
on these two values, thus
doing the equivalent of evaluating (assq 'key (get x 'propname))
.
Finally, it returns the value produced by assq
. Now, the original
Lisp program we compiled was:
(defun foo (x) (assq 'key (get x 'propname)))
We can see that the code produced by the compiler is correct: it will do the same thing as the function we defined will do.
In summary, we have seen two kinds of instructions so far: the MOVE
instruction, which takes a destination and an address, and two of the
large set of miscellaneous instructions, which take only a destination,
and implicitly get their inputs from the stack. We have seen two
destinations (D-PDL
and D-RETURN
), and two forms of address (FEF
addressing and ARG
addressing).
Here is a more complex Lisp function, demonstrating local variables, function calling, conditional branching, and some other new instructions.
(defun bar (y) (let ((z (car y))) (cond ((atom z) (setq z (cdr y)) (foo y)) (t nil))))
The disassembled code looks like this:
20 CAR D-PDL ARG|0 ;Y 21 POP LOCAL|0 ;Z 22 MOVE D-IGNORE LOCAL|0 ;Z 23 BR-NOT-ATOM 30 24 CDR D-PDL ARG|0 ;Y 25 POP LOCAL|0 ;Z 26 CALL D-RETURN FEF|6 ;#'FOO 27 MOVE D-LAST ARG|0 ;Y 30 MOVE D-RETURN 'NIL
The first instruction here is a CAR
instruction. It has the same
format as MOVE
: there is a destination and an address. The CAR
instruction reads the datum addressed by the address, takes the car of
it, and stores the result into the destination. In our example, the
first instruction addresses the zeroth argument, and so it computes
(car y)
; then it pushes the result onto the stack.
The next instruction is something new: the POP
instruction. It has an
address field, but it uses it as a destination rather than as a source.
The POP
instruction pops the top value off the stack, and stores that
value into the address specified by the address field. In our example,
the value on the top of the stack is popped off and stored into address
LOCAL|0
. This is a new form of address; it means the zeroth local
variable. The ordering of the local variables is chosen by the
compiler, and so it is not fully predictable, although it tends to be
by order of appearance in the code; fortunately you never have to look
at these numbers, because the comment field explains what is going on.
In this case, the variable being addressed is z
. So this instruction
pops the top value on the stack into the variable z
. The first two
instructions work together to take the car of y
and store it into
z
, which is indeed the first thing the function bar
ought to do.
(If you have two local variables with the same name, then the comment
field won’t tell you which of the two you’re talking about; you’ll have
to figure that out yourself. You can tell two local variables with
the same name apart by looking at the number in the address.)
The next instruction is a familiar MOVE
instruction, but it uses a
new destination: D-IGNORE
. This means that the datum being
addressed isn’t moved anywhere. If so, then why bother doing this
instruction? The reason is that there is conceptually a set of
indicator bits, as are found in most modern computers such as the
68000, the Vax, as well as in obsolete computers such as the 370. Every
instruction that moves or produces a datum sets the indicator bits from
that datum so that following instructions can test them. So the reason
that the MOVE
instruction is being done is so that someone can test
the indicators set up by the value that was moved, namely the value of
z
.
All instructions except the branch instructions set the indicator bits from the result produced and/or stored by that instruction.
The next instruction is a conditional branch; it changes the flow of
control, based on the values in the indicator bits, which in this case
reflect the value popped by the POP
instruction 21. The branch
instruction is BR-NOT-ATOM 27
, which means “Branch, if the quantity
was not an atom, to location 27; otherwise proceed with execution”. If
z
was an atom, the Lisp Machine branches to location 27, and
execution proceeds there. (As you can see by skipping ahead, location
27 just contains a MOVE
instruction, which will cause the function
to return nil
.)
If z
is not an atom, the program keeps going, and the CDR
instruction is next. This is just like the CAR
instruction except
that it takes the cdr; this instruction pushes the value of (cdr y)
onto the stack. The next one pops that value off into the variable z
.
There are just two more instructions left. These two instructions are our first example of how function calling is compiled. It is the only really tricky thing in the instruction set. Here is how it works in our example:
25 CALL D-RETURN FEF|6 ;#'FOO 26 MOVE D-LAST ARG|0 ;Y
The form being compiled here is (foo y)
. This means we are applying
the function which is in the function cell of the symbol foo
, and
passing it one argument, the value of y
. The way function calling
works is in the following three steps. First of all, there is a CALL
instruction that specifies the function object being applied to
arguments. This creates a new stack frame on the stack, and stores the
function object there. Secondly, all the arguments being passed except
the last one are pushed onto the stack. Thirdly and lastly, the last
argument is sent to a special destination, called D-LAST
,
meaning “this is the last argument”. Storing to this destination is
what actually calls the function, not the CALL
instruction itself.
There are two things you might wonder about this. First of all, when
the function returns, what happens to the returned value? Well, this is
what we use the destination field of the CALL
instruction for. The
destination of the CALL
is not stored into at the time the CALL
instruction is executed; instead, it is saved on the stack along with
the function operation (in the stack frame created by the CALL
instruction). Then, when the function actually returns, its result is
stored into that destination.
The other question is what happens when there isn’t any last argument;
that is, when there is a call with no arguments at all? This is handled
by a special instruction called CALL0
. The address of CALL0
addresses the function object to be called; the call takes place
immediately and the result is stored into the destination specified by
the destination field of the CALL0
instruction.
So, let’s look at the two-instruction sequence above. The first
instruction is a CALL
; the function object it specifies is at FEF|6
,
which the comment tells us is the contents of the function cell of foo
(the FEF contains an invisible pointer to that function cell). The
destination field of the CALL
is D-RETURN
, but we aren’t going to
store into it yet; we will save it away in the stack frame and use it
later. So the function doesn’t return at this point, even though it
says D-RETURN
in the instruction; this is the tricky part.
Next we have to push all the arguments except the last one. Well,
there’s only one argument, so nothing needs to be done here. Finally,
we move the last argument (that is, the only argument: the value of y
)
to D-LAST
, using the MOVE
instruction. Moving to D-LAST
is what
actually invokes the function, so at this point the function foo
is
invoked. When it returns, its result is sent to the destination stored
in the stack frame: D-RETURN
. Therefore, the value returned by the
call to foo
will be returned as the value of the function bar
. Sure
enough, this is what the original Lisp code says to do.
When the compiler pushes arguments to a function call, it sometimes does
it by sending the values to a destination called D-NEXT
(meaning the
“next” argument). This is exactly the same as D-PDL
when producing
a compiled function. The distinction is important when the compiler
output is passed to the microcompiler to generate microcode.
Here is another example to illustrate function calling. This Lisp function calls one function on the results of another function.
(defun a (x y) (b (c x y) y))
The disassembled code looks like this:
22 CALL D-RETURN FEF|6 ;#'B 23 CALL D-PDL FEF|7 ;#'C 24 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 25 MOVE D-LAST ARG|1 ;Y 26 MOVE D-LAST ARG|1 ;Y
The first instruction starts off the call to the function b
. The
destination field is saved for later: when this function returns, we
will return its result as a
’s result. Next, the call to c
is
started. Its destination field, too, is saved for later; when c
returns, its result should be pushed onto the stack, so that it will be
the next argument to b
. Next, the first and second arguments to
c
are passed; the second one is sent to D-LAST
and so the
function c
is called. Its result, as we said, will be pushed onto
the stack, and thus become the first argument to b
. Finally, the
second argument to b
is passed, by storing in D-LAST
; b
gets
called, and its result is sent to D-RETURN
and is returned from
a
.
Now that we’ve gotten some of the feel for what is going on, I will start enumerating the instructions in the instruction set. The instructions fall into four classes. Class I instructions have both a destination and an address. Class II instructions have an address, but no destination. Class III instructions are the branch instructions, which contain a branch address rather than a general base-and-offset address. Class IV instructions have a destination, but no address; these are the miscellaneous instructions.
We have already seen just about all the Class I instructions. There are
nine of them in all: MOVE
, CALL
, CALL0
, CAR
, CDR
, CAAR
,
CADR
, CDAR
, and CDDR
. MOVE
just moves a datum from an address
to a destination; the CxR
and CxxR
instructions are the same but
perform the function on the value before sending it to the destination;
CALL
starts off a call to a function with some arguments; CALL0
performs a call to a function with no arguments.
We’ve seen most of the possible forms of address. So far we have seen
the FEF
, ARG
, and LOCAL
base registers. There are two other
kinds of addresses. One uses a “constant” base register, which
addresses a set of standard constants: NIL
, T
, 0
, 1
, and
2
. The disassembler doesn’t even bother to print out
CONSTANT|n
, since the number n would not be even slightly
interesting; it just prints out 'NIL
or '1
or whatever. The
other kind of address is a special one printed as PDL-POP
, which
means that to read the value at this address, an object should be popped
off the top of the stack.
There are more Class II instructions. The only one we’ve
seen so far is POP
, which pops a value off the stack and stores it
into the specified address. Another, called MOVEM
(from the PDP-10 opcode name, meaning MOVE to Memory), stores the
top element of the stack into the specified address, but doesn’t pop it
off the stack.
Seven Class II instructions implement heavily-used
two-argument functions: +
, -
, *
, /
, LOGAND
, LOGXOR
, and
LOGIOR
. These instructions take the first argument from the top of
the stack (popping it off) and their second argument from the
specified address, and they push the result on the stack. Thus the
stack level does not change due to these instructions.
Here is a small function that shows some of these new things:
(defun foo (x y) (setq x (logxor y (- x 2))))
The disassembled code looks like this:
16 MOVE D-PDL ARG|1 ;Y 17 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 20 - '2 21 LOGXOR PDL-POP 22 MOVEM ARG|0 ;X 23 MOVE D-RETURN PDL-POP
Instructions 20 and 21 use two of the new Class II instructions: the -
and LOGXOR
instructions. Instructions 21 and 23 use the PDL-POP
address type, and instruction 20 uses the “constant” base register to
get to a fixnum 2
. Finally, instruction 22 uses the MOVEM
instruction; the compiler wants to use the top value of the stack to
store it into the value of x
, but it doesn’t want to pop it off the
stack because it has another use for it: to return it from the function.
Another four Class II instructions implement some commonly used
predicates: =
, >
, <
, and EQ
. The two arguments come from the
top of the stack and the specified address; the stack is popped, the
predicate is applied to the two objects, and the result is left in the
indicators so that a branch instruction can test it, and branch based
on the result of the comparison. These instructions remove the top
item on the stack and don’t put anything back, unlike the previous set,
which put their results back on the stack.
Next, there are four Class II instructions to read, modify, and write a
quantity in ways that are common in Lisp code. These instructions are
called SETE-CDR
, SETE-CDDR
, SETE-1+
, and SETE-1-
. The SETE-
means to set the addressed value to the result of applying the specified
one-argument function to the present value. For example, SETE-CDR
means to read the value addressed, apply cdr
to it, and store the
result back in the specified address. This is used when compiling
(setq x (cdr x))
, which commonly occurs in loops; the other functions
are used frequently in loops, too.
There are two instructions used to bind special variables. The first is
BIND-NIL
, which binds the cell addressed by the address field to
nil
; the second is BIND-POP
, which binds the cell to an object
popped off the stack rather than nil
. The latter instruction pops a
value off the stack; the former does not use the stack at all.
There are two instructions to store common values into addressed cells.
SET-NIL
stores nil
into the cell specified by the address field;
SET-ZERO
stores 0
. Neither instruction uses the stack at all.
Finally, the PUSH-E
instruction creates a locative pointer to the cell
addressed by the specified address, and pushes it onto the stack. This
is used in compiling (value-cell-location 'z)
where z
is an
argument or a local variable, rather than a symbol (special variable).
Those are all of the Class II instructions. Here is a contrived example that uses some of the ones we haven’t seen, just to show you what they look like:
(defun weird (x y) (cond ((= x y) (let ((*foo* nil) (*bar* 5)) (declare (special *foo* *bar*)) (setq x (cdr x))) nil) (t (setq x nil) (caar (variable-location y)))))
The disassembled code looks like this:
24 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 25 = ARG|1 ;Y 26 BR-NIL 35 27 BIND-NIL FEF|6 ;*FOO* 30 PUSH-NUMBER 5 31 BIND-POP FEF|7 ;*BAR* 32 SETE-CDR ARG|0 ;X 33 (MISC) UNBIND 2 bindings 34 MOVE D-RETURN 'NIL 35 SET-NIL ARG|0 ;X 36 PUSH-E ARG|1 ;Y 37 CAAR D-RETURN PDL-POP
Instruction 25 is an =
instruction; it numerically compares the top of the
stack, x
, with the addressed quantity, y
. The x
is
popped off the stack, and the indicators are set to the result of the
equality test. Instruction 26 checks the indicators, branching to 35 if
the result of the call to =
was nil
; that is, the machine will
branch to 35 if the two values were not equal. Instruction 27 binds
*foo*
to nil
; instructions 30 and 31 bind *bar*
to 5
.
Instruction 30 is a peculiar class IV instruction called PUSH-NUMBER
which pushes a constant integer on the stack. The integer must be in
the range of zero to 511 in order for PUSH-NUMBER
to be used.
Instruction 32 demonstrates the use of SETE-CDR
to compile (setq x
(cdr x))
, and instruction 35 demonstrates the use of SET-NIL
to
compile (setq x nil)
. Instruction 36 demonstrates the use of
PUSH-E
to compile (variable-location y)
.
The Class III instructions are for branching. These have neither addresses nor destinations of the usual sort. Instead, they have branch-addresses; they say where to branch, if the branch is going to happen. There are several instructions, differing in the conditions under which they branch and whether they pop the stack. Branch-addresses are stored internally as self-relative addresses, to make Lisp Machine code relocatable, but the disassembler does the addition for you and prints out FEF-relative addresses so that you can easily see where the branch is going to.
The branch instructions we have seen so far decide whether to branch on
the basis of the nil
-indicator, that is, whether the last value dealt
with was nil
or non-nil
. BR-NIL
branches if it was nil
, and
BR-NOT-NIL
branches if it was not nil
. There are two more
instructions that test the result of the atom
predicate on the last
value dealt with. BR-ATOM
branches if the value was an atom (that is,
if it was anything besides a cons). and BR-NOT-ATOM
branches if the
value was not an atom (that is, if it was a cons). The BR
instruction
is an unconditional branch (it always branches).
None of the above branching instructions deal with the stack. There are
two more instructions called BR-NIL-POP
and BR-NOT-NIL-POP
, which
are the same as BR-NIL
and BR-NOT-NIL
except that if the branch is
not done, the top value on the stack is popped off the stack. These are
used for compiling and
and or
special forms.
Finally, there are the Class IV instructions, most of which are
miscellaneous hand-microcoded Lisp functions. The file SYS: SYS;
DEFMIC LISP
has a list of all the miscellaneous instructions. Most
correspond to Lisp functions, including the subprimitives, although some
of these functions are very low level internals that may not be
documented anywhere (don’t be disappointed if you don’t understand all
of them). Please do not look at this file in hopes of finding obscure
functions that you think you can use to speed up your programs; in fact,
the compiler automatically uses these things when it can, and directly
calling weird internal functions will only serve to make your code hard
to read, without making it any faster. In fact, we don’t guarantee that
calling undocumented functions will continue to work in the future.
The DEFMIC
file can be useful for determining if a given function is in
microcode, although the only definitive way to tell is to compile some
code that uses it and look at the results, since sometimes the compiler
converts a documented function with one name into an undocumented one
with another name.
When a function is first entered in the Lisp Machine, interesting things can happen because of the features that are invoked by use of the various lambda-list keywords. The microcode performs various services when a function is entered, even before the first instruction of the function is executed. These services are called for by various fields of the header portion of the FEF, including a list called the Argument Descriptor List, or ADL. We won’t go into the detailed format of any of this, as it is complex and the details are not too interesting. Disassembling a function that makes use of the ADL prints a summary of what the ADL says to do, before the beginning of the code.
The function-entry services include the initialization of unsupplied
optional arguments and of &AUX
variables. The ADL
has a little instruction set of its own, and if the form that computes
the initial value is something simple, such as a constant or a
variable, then the ADL can handle things itself. However, if things get
too complicated, instructions are needed, and the compiler generates
some instructions at the front of the function to initialize the
unsupplied variables. In this case, the ADL specifies several different
starting addresses for the function, depending on which optional arguments
have been supplied and which have been omitted. If all the optional
arguments are supplied, then the ADL starts the function off after all
the instructions that would have initialized the optional arguments;
since the arguments were supplied, their values should not be set, and
so all these instructions are skipped over. Here’s an example:
(defvar *y*) (defun foo (&optional (x (car *y*)) (z (* x 3))) (cons x z))
The disassembled code looks like this:
Arg 0 (X) is optional, local, initialized by the code up to pc 32. Arg 1 (Z) is optional, local, initialized by the code up to pc 35. 30 CAR D-PDL FEF|6 ;*Y* 31 POP ARG|0 ;X 32 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 33 * '3 34 POP ARG|1 ;Z 35 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 36 MOVE D-PDL ARG|1 ;Z 37 (MISC) CONS D-RETURN
If no arguments are supplied, the function will be started at instruction 30; if only one argument is supplied, it will be started at instruction 32; if both arguments are supplied, it will be started at instruction 35.
The thing to keep in mind here is that when there is initialization of
variables, you may see it as code at the beginning of the function, or
you may not, depending upon whether it is too complex for the ADL to handle.
This is true of &aux
variables as well as unsupplied &optional
arguments.
When there is a &rest
argument, it is passed to the function as the
zeroth local variable, rather than as any of the arguments. This is not
really so confusing as it might seem, since a &rest
argument is not
an argument passed by the caller; rather it is a list of some of the
arguments, created by the function-entry microcode services. In any case
the comment tells you what is going on. In fact, one hardly ever
looks much at the address fields in disassembled code, since the
comment tells you the right thing anyway. Here is a silly example of the
use of a &rest
argument:
(defun prod (&rest values) (apply #'* values))
The disassembled code looks like this:
20 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;#'* 21 MOVE D-PDL LOCAL|0 ;VALUES 22 (MISC) APPLY D-RETURN
As can be seen, values
is referred to as LOCAL|0
.
Another thing the microcode does at function entry is to bind the
values of any arguments or &aux
variables that are special.
Thus, you won’t see any BIND
instructions for binding them.
We said earlier that most of the Class IV instructions are miscellaneous
hand-microcoded Lisp functions. However, a few of them are not Lisp
functions at all. There are two instructions that are printed as
UNBIND 3 bindings
or POP 7 values
; the number can be
anything up to 16 (these numbers are printed in decimal). These
instructions just do what they say, unbinding the last n values that
were bound or popping the top n values off the stack.
Another Class IV instruction is PUSH-NUMBER
. It pushes a constant
integer, in the range zero to 511. An example of it appeared on push-number-use.
The array referencing functions–aref
, aset
, and aloc
–take
a variable number of arguments, but they are handled differently
depending on how many there are. For one-, two-, and three-dimensional
arrays, these functions are turned into internal functions with names
ar-1
, as-1
, and ap-1
(with the number of dimensions
substituted for 1
). Again, there is no point in using these
functions yourself; it would only make your code harder to understand
but not any faster at all. When there are more than three dimensions,
the functions aref
, aset
and aloc
are called in the ordinary
manner.
(defun foo (y x i j &aux v) (setq v (aref x i j)) (setf (aref y i) v))
16 MOVE D-PDL ARG|1 ;X 17 MOVE D-PDL ARG|2 ;I 20 MOVE D-PDL ARG|3 ;J 21 (MISC) AR-2 D-PDL 22 POP LOCAL|0 ;V 23 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;Y 24 MOVE D-PDL ARG|2 ;I 25 MOVE D-PDL LOCAL|0 ;V 26 (MISC) SET-AR-1 D-RETURN
Reference to one-dimensional arrays with constant subscripts use special instructions which have the array index encoded instead of an address.
(defun foo (x) (+ (aref x 3) (array-leader x 2)) (setf (aref x 5) t))
FOO: 16 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 17 AR-1 (3) D-IGNORE 20 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 21 ARRAY-LEADER (2) D-IGNORE 22 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 23 MOVE D-PDL 'T 24 SET-AR-1 (5) D-RETURN
The AR-1
instruction is to be distinguished from the MISC AR-1
instruction. AR-1
pops an array off the stack and encodes the
subscript itself. The 3 in (3)
is the subscript. ARRAY-LEADER
is similar but refers to an array leader slot. SET-AR-1
pops an
array and then pops a value to store into it at the specified slot.
SET-AR-1
is analogous. There also exist %INSTANCE-REF
and
SET-%INSTANCE-REF
instructions.
When you call a function and expect to get more than one value back,
a slightly different kind of function calling is used. Here is an example
that uses multiple-value
to get two values back from a function call:
(defun foo (x) (let (y z) (multiple-value (y z) (bar 3)) (+ x y z)))
The disassembled code looks like this:
20 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;#'BAR 21 MOVE D-PDL '2 22 (MISC) %CALL-MULT-VALUE D-IGNORE 23 MOVE D-LAST '3 24 POP LOCAL|1 ;Z 25 POP LOCAL|0 ;Y 26 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 27 + LOCAL|0 ;Y 30 + LOCAL|1 ;Z 31 MOVE D-RETURN PDL-POP
A %CALL-MULT-VALUE
instruction is used instead of a CALL
instruction. The destination field of %CALL-MULT-VALUE
is unused and
will always be D-IGNORE
. %CALL-MULT-VALUE
takes two “arguments”,
which it finds on the stack; it pops both of them. The first one is the
function object to be applied; the second is the number of return values
that are expected. The rest of the call proceeds as usual, but when the
call returns, the returned values are left on the stack. The number of
objects left on the stack is always the same as the second “argument” to
%CALL-MULT-VALUE
. In our example, the two values returned are left
on the stack, and they are immediately popped off into z
and y
.
There is also a %CALL0-MULT-VALUE
instruction, for the same
reason CALL0
exists.
The multiple-value-bind
form works similarly; here is an
example:
(defun foo (x) (multiple-value-bind (y *foo* z) (bar 3) (declare (special *foo*)) (+ x y z)))
The disassembled code looks like this:
22 MOVE D-PDL FEF|7 ;#'BAR 23 MOVE D-PDL '3 24 (MISC) %CALL-MULT-VALUE D-IGNORE 25 MOVE D-LAST '3 26 POP LOCAL|1 ;Z 27 BIND-POP FEF|6 ;*FOO* 30 POP LOCAL|0 ;Y 31 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;X 32 + LOCAL|0 ;Y 33 + LOCAL|1 ;Z 34 MOVE D-RETURN PDL-POP
The %CALL-MULT-VALUE
instruction is still used, leaving the results
on the stack; these results are used to bind the variables.
Calls done with multiple-value-list
work with the %CALL-MULT-VALUE-LIST
instruction. It takes one “argument” on the stack: the function object
to apply. When the function returns, the list of values is left on the
top of the stack. Here is an example:
(defun foo (x y) (multiple-value-list (bar -7 y x)))
The disassembled code looks like this:
22 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;#'BAR 23 (MISC) %CALL-MULT-VALUE-LIST D-IGNORE 24 MOVE D-PDL FEF|7 ;'-7 25 MOVE D-PDL ARG|1 ;Y 26 MOVE D-LAST ARG|0 ;X 27 MOVE D-RETURN PDL-POP
Returning of more than one value from a function is handled
by special miscellaneous instructions. %RETURN-2
and %RETURN-3
are
used to return two or three values; these instructions take two
and three arguments, respectively, on the stack and return from the
current function just as storing to D-RETURN
would. If there are more
than three return values, they are all pushed, then the number
that there were is pushed, and then the %RETURN-N
instruction is
executed. None of these instructions use their destination field.
Note: the return-list
function is just an ordinary miscellaneous
instruction; it takes the list of values to return as an argument on the
stack and returns those values from the current function.
The function apply
is compiled using a special instruction called
%SPREAD
to iterate over the elements of its last argument, which
should be a list. %SPREAD
takes one argument (on the stack), which
is a list of values to be passed as arguments (pushed on the stack). If
the destination of %SPREAD
is D-PDL
(or D-NEXT
), then the
values are just pushed; if it is D-LAST
, then after the values are
pushed, the function is invoked. apply
with more than two arguments
will always compile using a %SPREAD
whose destination is D-LAST
.
Here is an example:
(defun foo (a b &rest c) (apply #'format t a c) b)
The disassembled code looks like this:
FOO: 20 CALL D-IGNORE FEF|6 ;#'FORMAT 21 MOVE D-PDL 'T 22 MOVE D-PDL ARG|0 ;A 23 MOVE D-PDL LOCAL|0 ;C 24 (MISC) %SPREAD D-LAST 25 MOVE D-RETURN ARG|1 ;B
Note that in instruction 23, the address LOCAL|0
is used to
access the &rest
argument.
The catch
special form is also handled specially by the compiler.
Here is a simple example of catch
:
(defun a () (catch 'foo (bar)))
The disassembled code looks like this:
24 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;'30 25 (MISC) %CATCH-OPEN D-RETURN 26 MOVE D-PDL FEF|7 ;'FOO 27 CALL0 D-RETURN FEF|8 ;#'BAR
The %CATCH-OPEN
instruction is like the CALL
instruction; it
starts a call to the catch
function. It takes one “argument” on
the stack, which is the location in the program that should be branched
to if this catch
is throw
n to. In addition to saving that
program location, the instruction saves the state of the stack and
of special-variable binding so that they can be restored in the event
of a throw
. So instructions 24 and 25
start a catch
block, and the rest of the function computes the
two arguments of the catch
. Note, however, that catch
is not actually called. The last form inside the catch
, in this case
(bar)
, is compiled so as to return its values directly out of the
function a
. The only way that the inactive stack frame for catch
matters is if a throw
is done during the execution of bar
.
This searches for a pending call to catch
and returns from that frame.
In this case, since the %CATCH-OPEN
instruction specifies
D-RETURN
, the values thrown are returned from a
.
You may have wondered why instruction 24 is there at all.
If the destination of a catch
is not D-RETURN
, it is necessary
for throw
to resume execution of the function containing the catch
.
Then it is necessary to specify what instruction to resume at.
For example:
(defun a () (catch 'foo (bar)) (print t))
The disassembled code looks like this:
26 MOVE D-PDL FEF|6 ;'32 27 (MISC) %CATCH-OPEN D-IGNORE 30 MOVE D-PDL FEF|7 ;'(BAR) 31 MOVE D-LAST FEF|8 ;'FOO 32 CALL D-RETURN FEF|9 ;#'PRINT 33 MOVE D-LAST 'T
The instruction 26 pushes 32, which is the number of instruction
at which execution should resume if there is a throw
.
To allow compilation of (multiple-value (...) (catch ...))
, there
is a special instruction called %CATCH-OPEN-MULT-VALUE
, which is a
cross between %CATCH-OPEN
and %CALL-MULT-VALUE
.
The following functions provide a convenient and consistent interface for
asking questions of the user. Questions are printed and the answers are
read on the stream *query-io*
, which normally is synonymous with
*terminal-io*
but can be rebound to another stream for special applications.
The macro with-timeout
(see with-timeout-fun) can be used with
the functions in this chapter to assume an answer if the user does
not respond in a fixed period of time.
We first describe two simple functions for yes-or-no questions, then the more general function on which all querying is built.
This is used for asking the user a question whose answer is either ‘y’ for ‘yes’
or ‘n’ for ‘no’. It prints a message by passing format-string and
format-args to format
, reads a one-character
answer, echoes it as ‘Yes
’ or ‘No
’, and returns t
if the
answer is ‘yes’ or nil
if the answer is ‘no’. The characters which
mean ‘yes’ are ‘Y’, ‘T’, Space
, and Hand-up
. The characters
which mean "no" are ‘N’, Rubout
, and Hand-down
. If any other
character is typed, the function beeps and demands a ‘Y or N’ answer.
You should include a question mark and a space at the end of the message.
y-or-n-p
does type ‘(Y or N)’ for you.
*query-io*
is used for all input and output.
y-or-n-p
should be used only for questions that the user knows are
coming. If the user is not going to be anticipating the question (e.g
if the question is “Do you really want to delete all of your files?” out
of the blue) then y-or-n-p
should not be used, because the user
might type ahead a ‘T’, ‘Y’, ‘N’, Space
, or Rubout
, and
therefore accidentally answer the question. In such cases, use
yes-or-no-p
.
This is used for asking the user a question whose answer is either
‘yes’ or ‘no’. It prints a message by passing format-string and
format-args to format
, beeps, and reads in a line
from *query-io*
. If the line is ‘yes’, it returns t
.
If the line is ‘no’, it returns nil
. (Case is ignored, as are
leading and trailing spaces and tabs.) If the input line is anything else,
yes-or-no-p
beeps and demands a ‘yes or no’ answer.
You should include a question mark and a space at the end of the message.
yes-or-no-p
does type ‘(Yes or No)’ for you.
*query-io*
is used for all input and output.
To allow the user to answer a yes-or-no question with a single
character, use y-or-n-p
. yes-or-no-p
should be
used for unanticipated or momentous questions; this is why it beeps
and why it requires several keystrokes to answer it.
Asks a question, printed by (format *query-io* format-string format-args...)
,
and returns the answer. fquery
takes care of checking for valid answers,
reprinting the question when the user clears the screen, giving help, and so
forth.
options is a list of alternating keywords and values, used to select among a variety of features. Most callers pass a constant list as the options (rather than consing up a list whose contents varies). The keywords allowed are:
:type
What type of answer is expected. The currently-defined types are
:tyi
(a single character), :readline
or
:mini-buffer-or-readline
(a line terminated by a carriage return).
:tyi
is the default. :mini-buffer-or-readline
is nearly
the same as :readline
, the only difference being that the former
uses a minibuffer if used inside the editor.
:choices
Defines the allowed answers. The allowed forms of choices are complicated and
explained below. The default is the same set of choices as the y-or-n-p
function (see above). Note that the :type
and :choices
options should
be consistent with each other.
:list-choices
If t
, the allowed choices are listed (in parentheses) after the question.
The default is t
; supplying nil
causes the choices not to be listed unless
the user tries to give an answer which is not one of the allowed choices.
:help-function
Specifies a function to be called if the user hits the Help
key.
The default help-function simply lists the available choices.
Specifying nil
disables special treatment of Help
.
Specifying a function of three arguments–the stream, the list of choices,
and the type-function–allows smarter help processing. The type-function
is the internal form of the :type
option and can usually be ignored.
:condition
If non-nil
, a signal name (see signal-name) to be signaled
before asking the question. A condition handler may handle the
condition, specifying an answer for fquery
to return, in which case
the user is not asked. The details are given below. The default
signal name is :fquery
, which signals condition name :fquery
.
:fresh-line
If t
, *query-io*
is advanced to a fresh line before asking the question.
If nil
, the question is printed wherever the cursor was left by previous typeout.
The default is t
.
:beep
If t
, fquery
beeps to attract the user’s attention to the question.
The default is nil
, which means not to beep unless the user tries to
give an answer which is not one of the allowed choices.
:stream
The value should be either an I/O stream or a symbol or expression
that will evaluate to one. fquery
uses the specified stream
instead of *query-io*
for all its input and output.
:clear-input
If t
, fquery
throws away type-ahead before reading the user’s response
to the question. Use this for unexpected questions. The default is nil
,
which means not to throw away type-ahead unless the user tries to
give an answer which is not one of the allowed choices. In that case, type-ahead
is discarded since the user probably wasn’t expecting the question.
:make-complete
If t
and *query-io*
is a typeout-window, the window is “made complete”
after the question has been answered. This tells the system that the contents
of the window are no longer useful. Refer to the window system documentation
for further explanation. The default is t
.
The argument to the :choices
option is a list each of whose elements is
a choice. The cdr of a choice is a list of the user inputs which correspond
to that choice. These should be characters for :type :tyi
or strings
for :type :readline
. The car of a choice is either a symbol which fquery
should return if the user answers with that choice, or a list whose first element
is such a symbol and whose second element is the string to be echoed when the
user selects the choice. In the former case nothing is echoed.
In most cases :type :readline
would use the first
format, since the user’s input has already been echoed, and :type :tyi
would
use the second format, since the input has not been echoed and furthermore is
a single character, which would not be mnemonic to see on the display.
A choice can also be the symbol :any
. If used, it must be the
last choice. It means that any input is allowed, and should simply be
returned as a string or character if it does not match any of the
other choices.
Perhaps this can be clarified by example. The yes-or-no-p
function uses
this list of choices:
((t "Yes") (nil "No"))
and the y-or-n-p
function uses this list:
(((t "Yes.") #\y #\t #\space #\hand-up) ((nil "No.") #\n #\rubout #\hand-down))
If a signal name is specified (or allowed to default to :fquery
),
before asking the question fquery
will signal it. (See condition
for information about conditions.) make-condition
will receive, in
addition to the signal name, all the arguments given to fquery
,
including the list of options, the format string, and all the format
arguments. fquery
provides one proceed type, :new-value
, and if
a condition handler proceeds, the argument it proceeds with is returned
by fquery
.
If you want to use the formatted output functions instead of format
to produce the
promting message, write
(fquery options (format:outfmt exp-or-string exp-or-string ...))
format:outfmt
puts the output into a list of a string, which makes format
print it exactly as is. There is no need to supply additional arguments to the
fquery
unless it signals a condition. In that case the arguments might be passed so
that the condition handler can see them. The condition handler will receive a list
containing one string, the message, as its third argument instead of just a string. If
this argument is passed along to format
, all the right things happen.
fquery
: (condition
) ¶This condition is signaled, by default, by fquery
.
The condition instance supports these operations:
:options
Returns the list of options given to fquery
.
:format-string
Returns the format string given to fquery
.
:format-args
Returns the list of additional args for format, given to fquery
.
One proceed type is provided, :new-value
. It should be used with a
single argument, which will be returned by fquery
in lieue of asking
the user.
A suitable list to pass as the first argument to fquery
to make
it behave like y-or-n-p
.
A suitable list to pass as the first argument to fquery
to make
it behave like yes-or-no-p
.
A list which y-or-n-p
uses as the value of the :choices
option.
There are a number of programs and facilities in the Lisp Machine that require that “initialization routines” be run either when the facility is first loaded, or when the system is booted, or both. These initialization routines may set up data structures, start processes running, open network connections, and so on.
It is easy to perform an action when a file is loaded: simply place an expression to perform the action in the file. But this causes the action to be repeated if the file is loaded a second time, and often that should not be done. Also, this does not provide a way to cause actions to be taken at other times, such as when the system is booted or when a garbage collection is started.
The initialization list facility serves these needs. An
initialization list is a symbol whose value is a list of
initializations, put on by various programs, all to be performed
when a certain event (such as a cold boot) happens. When the event
occurs, the system function in charge of handling the event
(si:lisp-reinitialize
, for cold boot) executes all the
initializations on the appropriate list, in the order they are present
on the list.
Each initialization has a name, a form to be evaluated, a flag saying
whether the form has yet been evaluated, and the source file of the
initialization, if any. The name is a string or a symbol and lies in
the car of an initialization; thus assoc
may be used on
initialization lists to find particular initializations.
System and user files place initializations on initialization lists
using the function add-initialization
. The name of the
initialization is specified so that the system can distinguish between
adding a new initialization and repeating or changing the definition of
an initialization already known: if there is already an initialization
with the specified name, this is a new definition of the same
initialization. One can specify that the initialization
be executed immediately if it is new but not if it is repeated.
User programs are free to create their own initialization lists to be run at their own times.
There are several initialization lists built into the system.
Each one is invoked by the system at a specific time, such as
immediately after a cold boot, or during disk-save
.
A user program can put initializations on these lists to cause
actions to be taken at those times as the program needs.
This avoids the need to modify system functions such as
lisp-reinitialize
or disk-save
in order to make them interact
properly with the user program.
The system initialization lists are generally identified by keywords
rather than by their actual names. We name them here by their keywords.
In each case, the actual initialization list symbol is in the si
package, and its name is the conventional keyword followed by
‘-initialization-list’. Thus, for :cold
, there is
si:cold-initialization-list
. This is just a convention.
Unless otherwise specified, an initialization added to a system list is not run when it is added, only when the appropriate event happens. A few system lists are exceptions and also run each initialization when it is added. Such exceptions are noted explicitly.
The :once
initialization list is used for initializations that
need to be done only once when the subsystem is loaded and must never be
done again. For example, there are some databases that need to be
initialized the first time the subsystem is loaded, but should not be
reinitialized every time a new version of the software is loaded into a
currently running system. This list is for that purpose. When
a new initialization is added to this list, it is executed immediately;
but when an initialization is redefined, it is not executed again.
The :cold
initialization list is used for things that must be
run once at cold-boot time. The initializations on this list are run
after the ones on :system
but before the ones on the :warm
list.
The :warm
initialization list is used for things which must be
run every time the machine is booted, including warm boots. The
function that prints the greeting, for example, is on this list. For cold
boots, the :cold
initializations are done before the :warm
ones.
The :system
initialization list is like the :warm
list but
its initializations are run before those of the :cold
list.
These are generally very fundamental system initializations that must be
done before the :cold
or :warm
initializations can work.
Initializing the process and window systems, the file system, and the
Chaosnet NCP falls in this category. By default, a new initialization
added to this list is run immediately also. In general, the system list
should not be touched by user subsystems, though there may be cases when
it is necessary to do so.
The :before-cold
initialization list is used for things to
be run by disk-save
. Thus they happen essentially at cold boot
time, but only once when the world is saved, not each time it is started
up.
The :site
initialization list is run every time a new site
table and host table are loaded by update-site-configuration-info
.
By default, adding an initialization
to this list runs the initialization immediately, even if the
initialization is not new.
The :site-option
initialization list is run every time the
site options may have changed; that is, when a new site tables are
loaded or after a cold boot (to see the per-machine options of the
machine being booted on). By default, adding an initialization
to this list runs the initialization immediately, even if the
initialization is not new.
The :full-gc
initialization list is run by the function
si:full-gc
just before garbage collecting. Initializations might be
put on this list to discard pointers to bulky objects, or to turn copy
lists into cdr-coded form so that they will remain permanently
localized.
The :after-flip
initialization list is run after every
garbage collection flip, at the beginning of scavenging. These initializations
can force various objects to be copied into new space near each other
simply by referencing them all consecutively.
The :after-full-gc
initialization list is run by the function
si:full-gc
just after a flip is done, but before scavenging.
The :login
and :logout
lists are run by the login
and
logout
functions (see login-fun) respectively. Note that disk-save
calls logout
. Also note that often people don’t call logout
; they
just cold-boot the machine.
Adds an initialization called name with the form form to the initialization list specified either by initialization-list-name or by keyword. If the initialization list already contains an initialization called name, it is redefined to execute form.
initialization-list-name, if specified, is a symbol that has as its
value the initialization list. If it is void, it is initialized (!)
to nil
, and is given a si:initialization-list
property of t
.
If a keyword specifies an initialization list,
initialization-list-name is ignored and should not be specified.
The keywords allowed in list-of-keywords are of two kinds. Most specify the initialization list to use; a list of such keywords makes up most of the previous section. Aside from them, four other keywords are allowed, which specify when to evaluate form. They are called the when-keywords. Here is what they mean:
:normal
¶Only place the form on the list. Do not evaluate it until the time comes to do
this kind of initialization. This is the default unless :system
, :once
,
:site
or :site-option
is specified.
:first
¶Evaluate the form now if it is not flagged as having been evaluated before.
This is the default if :system
or :once
is specified.
:now
¶Evaluate the form now unconditionally as well as adding it to the list.
:redo
¶Do not evaluate the form now, but set the flag to nil
even if the initialization
is already in the list and flagged t
.
Actually, the keywords are compared with string-equal
and may be in any
package. If both kinds of keywords are used, the list keyword should come
before the when-keyword in list-of-keywords; otherwise the list keyword
may override the when-keyword.
The add-initialization
function keeps each list ordered so that
initializations added first are at the front of the list. Therefore, by
controlling the order of execution of the additions, you can control
explicit dependencies on order of initialization. Typically, the order
of additions is controlled by the loading order of files. The system
list is the most critically ordered of the predefined
lists.
The add-initialization
keywords that specify an initialization list
are defined by a variable; you can add new keywords to it.
Each element on this list defines the keyword for one initialization
list. Each element is a list of two or three elements. The first is
the keyword symbol that names the initialization list. The second is a
special variable, whose value is the initialization list itself. The
third, if present, is a symbol defining the default “time” at which
initializations added to this list should be evaluated; it should be
si:normal
, si:now
, si:first
, or si:redo
. This third
element just acts as a default; if the list of keywords passed to
add-initialization
contains one of the keywords normal
, now
,
first
, or redo
, it overrides this default. If the third
element is not present, it is as if the third element were
si:normal
.
Removes the specified initialization from the specified initialization list.
Keywords may be any of the list options allowed by add-initialization
.
Performs the initializations in the specified list. redo-flag controls
whether initializations that have already been performed are re-performed;
nil
means no, non-nil
is yes, and the default is nil
. flag-value is the
value to be bashed into the flag slot of an entry. If it is unspecified, it
defaults to t
, meaning that the system should remember that the initialization
has been done. The reason that there is no convenient way for you to
specify one of the specially-known-about lists is that you shouldn’t
be calling initializations
on them. This is done by the system
when it is appropriate.
Bashes the flag of all entries in the specified list to nil
, thereby causing
them to get rerun the next time the function initializations
is called on
the initialization list.
The time
package contains a set of functions for manipulating dates and
times: finding the current time, reading and printing dates and times,
converting between formats, and other miscellany regarding peculiarities
of the calendar system. It also includes functions for accessing the
Lisp Machine’s microsecond timer.
Times are represented in two different formats by the functions in the
time
package. One way is to represent a time by many numbers,
indicating a year, a month, a date, an hour, a minute, and a second
(plus, sometimes, a day of the week and timezone). If a year less than
100 is specified, a multiple of 100 is added to it to bring it within
50 years of the present. Year numbers returned by the
time functions are greater than 1900. The month is 1 for January, 2 for
February, etc. The date is 1 for the first day of a month. The hour is
a number from 0 to 23. The minute and second are numbers from 0 to 59.
Days of the week are fixnums, where 0 means Monday, 1 means Tuesday, and
so on. A timezone is specified as the number of hours west of GMT; thus
in Massachusetts the timezone is 5. Any adjustment for daylight savings
time is separate from this.
This “decoded” format is convenient for printing out times into a readable notation, but it is inconvenient for programs to make sense of these numbers and pass them around as arguments (since there are so many of them). So there is a second representation, called Universal Time, which measures a time as the number of seconds since January 1, 1900, at midnight GMT. This “encoded” format is easy to deal with inside programs, although it doesn’t make much sense to look at (it looks like a huge integer). So both formats are provided; there are functions to convert between the two formats; and many functions exist in two versions, one for each format.
The Lisp Machine hardware includes a timer that counts once every microsecond. It is controlled by a crystal and so is fairly accurate. The absolute value of this timer doesn’t mean anything useful, since it is initialized randomly; what you do with the timer is to read it at the beginning and end of an interval, and subtract the two values to get the length of the interval in microseconds. These relative times allow you to time intervals of up to an hour (32 bits) with microsecond accuracy.
The Lisp Machine keeps track of the time of day by maintaining a
timebase, using the microsecond clock to count off the seconds.
On the CADR, when the machine first comes up, the timebase is
initialized by querying hosts on the Chaosnet to find out the
current time. The Lambda has a calendar clock which never stops,
so it normally does not need to do this. You can also set the
time base using time:set-local-time
, described below.
There is a similar timer that counts in 60ths of a second rather than microseconds; it is useful for measuring intervals of a few seconds or minutes with less accuracy. Periodic housekeeping functions of the system are scheduled based on this timer.
Gets the current time, in decoded form. Return seconds, minutes, hours, date, month, year, day-of-the-week, and daylight-savings-time-p, with the same
meanings as decode-universal-time
(see decode-universal-time-fun).
If the current time is not known, nil
is returned.
The name time:get-time
is obsolete.
Returns the current time in Universal Time form.
Sets the local time to new-time. If new-time is
supplied, it must be either a universal time or a suitable
argument to time:parse-universal-time
(see
time:parse-universal-time-fun). If it is not supplied, or if
there is an error parsing the argument, you are prompted for the
new time. Note that you will not normally need to call this
function; it is useful mainly when the timebase gets screwed up
for one reason or another.
The following functions deal with a different kind of time. These are not calendrical date/times, but simply elapsed time in 60ths of a second. These times are used for many internal purposes where the idea is to measure a small interval accurately, not to depend on the time of day or day of month.
Returns a number that increases by 1 every 60th of a second. The value
wraps around roughly once a day. Use the time-lessp
and
time-difference
functions to avoid getting in trouble due to the
wrap-around. time
is completely incompatible with the Maclisp
function of the same name.
Note that time
with an argument measures the length of time
required to evaluate a form. See time-fun-2.
Returns the total time in 60ths of a second since the last boot. This value does not wrap around. Eventually it becomes a bignum. The Lisp Machine does not distinguish between run time and real time.
According to Common Lisp, this is the ratio between a second and the
time unit used by values of get-internal-real-time
. On the Lisp
Machine, the value is 60. The value may be different in other Common
Lisp implementations.
t
if time1 is earlier than time2, compensating for
wrap-around, otherwise nil
.
Assuming time1 is later than time2, returns the number of 60ths of a second difference between them, compensating for wrap-around.
Increments time by interval, wrapping around if appropriate.
Returns the value of the microsecond timer, as a bignum. The values returned by this function wrap around back to zero about once per hour.
Returns as a fixnum the value of the low 23 bits of the microsecond timer.
This is like time:microsecond-time
, with the advantage that
it returns a value in the same format as the time
function, except
in microseconds rather than 60ths of a second. This means that you can
compare fixnum-microsecond-times with time-lessp
and
time-difference
. time:fixnum-microsecond-time
is also a bit
faster, but has the disadvantage that since you only see the low bits of
the clock, the value can wrap around more quickly (about every eight seconds).
Note that the Lisp Machine garbage collector is so designed that the
bignums produced by time:microsecond-time
are garbage-collected
quickly and efficiently, so the overhead for creating the bignums is
really not high.
The functions in this section create printed representations of times and
dates in various formats and send the characters to a stream. To any
of these functions, you may pass nil
as the stream parameter
and the function will return a string containing the printed representation
of the time, instead of printing the characters to any stream.
The three functions time:print-time
,
time:print-universal-time
,
time:print-brief-universal-time
and
time:print-current-time
accept an argument called
date-print-mode, whose purpose is to control how the date is
printed. It always defaults to the value of
time:*default-date-print-mode*
. Possible values include:
:dd//mm//yy
Print the date as in ‘3/16/53’.
:mm//dd//yy
Print as in ‘16/3/53’.
:dd-mm-yy
Print as in ‘16-3-53’.
:dd-mmm-yy
Print as in ‘16-Mar-53’.
:|dd mmm yy|
Print as in ‘16 Mar 53’.
:ddmmmyy
Print as in ‘16Mar53’.
:yymmdd
Print as in ‘530316’.
:yymmmdd
Print as in ‘53Mar16’.
*standard-output*
) ¶Prints the current time, formatted as in 11/25/80 14:50:02
, to
the specified stream. The date portion may be printed differently
according to the argument date-print-mode.
*standard-output*
) date-print-mode ¶Prints the specified time, formatted as in 11/25/80 14:50:02
, to
the specified stream. The date portion may be printed differently
according to the argument date-print-mode.
*standard-output*
) (timezone time:*timezone*
) date-print-mode ¶Prints the specified time, formatted as in 11/25/80 14:50:02
, to the specified stream. The date portion may be printed differently
according to the argument date-print-mode.
*standard-output*
) reference-time date-print-mode ¶This is like time:print-universal-time
except that it omits seconds and
only prints those parts of universal-time that differ from
reference-time, a universal time that defaults to the current time.
Thus the output is in one of the following three forms:
02:59 ;the same day 3/4 14:01 ;a different day in the same year 8/17/74 15:30 ;a different year
The date portion may be printed differently according to the argument date-print-mode.
Holds the default for the date-print-mode argument to each
of the functions above. Initially the value here is :mm//dd/yy
.
*standard-output*
) ¶Prints the current time, formatted as in Tuesday the twenty-fifth of
November, 1980; 3:50:41 pm
, to the specified stream.
*standard-output*
) ¶Prints the specified time, formatted as in Tuesday the twenty-fifth of
November, 1980; 3:50:41 pm
, to the specified stream.
*standard-output*
) (timezone time:*timezone*
) ¶Prints the specified time, formatted as in Tuesday the twenty-fifth of
November, 1980; 3:50:41 pm
, to the specified stream.
These functions accept most reasonable printed representations of date and time and convert them to the standard internal forms. The following are representative formats that are accepted by the parser. Note that slashes are escaped with additional slashes, as is necessary if these strings are input in traditional syntax.
"March 15, 1960" "3//15//60" "3//15//1960" "15 March 1960" "15//3//60" "15//3//1960" "March-15-60" "3-15-60" "3-15-1960" "15-March-60" "15-3-60" "15-3-1960" "15-Mar-60" "3-15" "15 March 60" "Fifteen March 60" "The Fifteenth of March, 1960;" "Friday, March 15, 1980" "1130." "11:30" "11:30:17" "11:30 pm" "11:30 AM" "1130" "113000" "11.30" "11.30.00" "11.3" "11 pm" "12 noon" "midnight" "m" "6:00 gmt" "3:00 pdt" any date format may be used with any time format "One minute after March 3, 1960" meaning one minute after midnight "Two days after March 3, 1960" "Three minutes after 23:59:59 Dec 31, 1959" "Now" "Today" "Yesterday" "five days ago" "two days after tomorrow" "the day after tomorrow" "one day before yesterday" "BOB@OZ's birthday"
0
) (end nil
) (futurep t
) base-time must-have-time date-must-have-year time-must-have-second (day-must-be-valid t
) ¶Interpret string as a date and/or time, and return seconds, minutes,
hours, date, month, year, day-of-the-week, daylight-savings-time-p, and relative-p.
start and end delimit a substring
of the string; if end is nil
, the end of the string is used.
must-have-time means that string must not be empty.
date-must-have-year means that a year must be explicitly specified.
time-must-have-second means that the second must be specified.
day-must-be-valid means that if a day of the week is given, then it
must actually be the day that corresponds to the date. base-time provides
the defaults for unspecified components; if it is nil
, the current time
is used. futurep means that the time should be interpreted as being
in the future; for example, if the base time is 5:00 and the string refers
to the time 3:00, that means the next day if futurep is non-nil
, but
it means two hours ago if futurep is nil
. The relative-p
returned value is t
if the string included a relative part, such
as ‘one minute after’ or ‘two days before’ or ‘tomorrow’ or ‘now’; otherwise,
it is nil
.
If the input is not valid, the error condition sys:parse-error
is signaled (see sys:parse-error-condition).
0
) (end nil
) (futurep t
) base-time must-have-time date-must-have-year time-must-have-second (day-must-be-valid t
) ¶This is the same as time:parse
except that it returns two
values: an integer, representing the time in Universal Time, and
the relative-p value.
In addition to the functions for reading and printing instants of time,
there are other functions specifically for printing time intervals. A
time interval is either a number (measured in seconds) or nil
,
meaning ‘never’. The printed representations used look like ‘3 minutes
23 seconds’ for actual intervals, or ‘Never’ for nil
(some other
synonyms and abbreviations for ‘never’ are accepted as input).
*standard-output*
) ¶interval should be a non-negative fixnum or nil
.
Its printed representation as a time interval is written onto
stream.
Converts string, a printed representation for a time interval, into a number or nil. start and end may be used to specify a portion of string to be used; the default is to use all of string. It is an error if the contents of string do not look like a reasonable time interval. Here are some examples of acceptable strings:
"4 seconds" "4 secs" "4 s" "5 mins 23 secs" "5 m 23 s" "23 SECONDS 5 M" "3 yrs 1 week 1 hr 2 mins 1 sec" "never" "not ever" "no" ""
Note that several abbreviations are understood, the components may be in
any order, and case (upper versus lower) is ignored. Also, “months” are
not recognized, since various months have different lengths and there is
no way to know which month is being spoken of. This function
always accepts anything that was produced by time:print-interval-or-never
;
furthermore, it returns exactly the same fixnum (or nil
) that
was printed.
*standard-input*
) ¶Reads a line of input from stream (using readline
) and
then calls time:parse-interval-or-never
on the resulting string.
time:*timezone*
) ¶Converts universal-time into its decoded representation. The following values are returned: seconds, minutes, hours, date, month, year, day-of-the-week, daylight-savings-time-p, and the timezone used. daylight-savings-time-p tells you whether or not daylight savings time is in effect; if so, the value of hour has been adjusted accordingly. You can specify timezone explicitly if you want to know the equivalent representation for this time in other parts of the world.
Converts the decoded time into Universal Time format, and return the Universal Time as an integer. If you don’t specify timezone, it defaults to the current timezone adjusted for daylight savings time; if you provide it explicitly, it is not adjusted for daylight savings time. If year is less than 100, it is shifted by centuries until it is within 50 years of the present.
The value of time:*timezone*
is the time zone in which this Lisp Machine
resides, expressed in terms of the number of hours west of GMT this time
zone is. This value does not change to reflect daylight savings time; it
tells you about standard time in your part of the world.
These functions provide support for those listed above. Some user programs may need to call them directly, so they are documented here.
Initializes the timebase by querying Chaosnet hosts to find out the
current time. This is called automatically during system initialization.
You may want to call it yourself to correct the time if it appears to be
inaccurate or downright wrong. See also time:set-local-time
,
time:set-local-time-fun.
Returns t
if daylight savings time is in effect for the specified
hour; otherwise, return nil
.
If year is less than 100, it is shifted by centuries until it is
within 50 years of the present.
Returns t
if daylight savings time is currently in effect; otherwise,
returns nil
.
Returns the number of days in the specified month; you must supply a year in case the month is February (which has a different length during leap years). If year is less than 100, it is shifted by centuries until it is within 50 years of the present.
Returns t
if year is a leap year; otherwise return nil
.
If year is less than 100, it is shifted by centuries until it is
within 50 years of the present.
If the day of the week of the date specified by date, month, and
year is the same as day-of-the-week, returns nil
; otherwise,
returns a string that contains a suitable error message.
If year is less than 100, it is shifted by centuries until it is
within 50 years of the present.
:long
) ¶Returns a string representing the day of the week. As usual, 0
means
Monday, 1
means Tuesday, and so on. Possible values of mode
are:
:long
Returns the full English name, such as "Monday"
, "Tuesday"
, etc. This
is the default.
:short
Returns a three-letter abbreviation, such as "Mon"
, "Tue"
, etc.
:medium
Returns a longer abbreviation, such as "Tues"
and "Thurs"
.
:french
Returns the French name, such as "Lundi"
, "Mardi"
, etc.
:german
Returns the German name, such as "Montag"
, "Dienstag"
, etc.
:italian
Returns the Italian name, such as "Lunedi"
, "Martedi"
, etc.
:long
) ¶Returns a string representing the month of the year. As usual, 1
means January,
2
means February, etc. Possible values of mode are:
:long
Returns the full English name, such as "January"
, "February"
, etc. This
is the default.
:short
Returns a three-letter abbreviation, such as "Jan"
, "Feb"
, etc.
:medium
Returns a longer abbreviation, such as "Sept"
, "Novem"
, and "Decem"
.
:roman
Returns the Roman numeral for month (this convention is used in Europe).
:french
Returns the French name, such as "Janvier"
, "Fevrier"
, etc.
:german
Returns the German name, such as "Januar"
, "Februar"
, etc.
:italian
Returns the Italian name, such as "Gennaio"
, "Febbraio"
, etc.
time:*timezone*
) (daylight-savings-p (time:daylight-savings-p)
) ¶Return the three-letter abbreviation for this time zone. For example, if
timezone is 5
, then either "EST"
(Eastern Standard Time) or "CDT"
(Central Daylight Time) is used, depending on daylight-savings-p.
This chapter describes a number of functions that don’t logically fit in anywhere else. Most of these functions are not normally used in programs, but are “commands”, i.e things that you type directly at Lisp.
Returns the documentation string of name in the role doc-type.
doc-type should be a symbol, but only its print-name matters.
function
as doc-type requests the documentation of name
as a function, variable
as doc-type requests the documentation of
name as a variable, and so on.
When doc-type is function
, name can be any function spec,
and the documentation string of its function definition is returned.
Otherwise, name must be a symbol, and doc-type may be anything.
However, only these values of doc-type are standardly used:
variable
Documentation of name as a special variable. Such documentation is
recorded automatically by defvar
, defconst
, defconstant
,
defparameter
(defvar-fun).
type
Documentation of name as a type for typep
. Recorded
automatically when a documentation string is given in a deftype
form (deftype-fun).
structure
Documentation of name as a defstruct
type.
Recorded automatically by a defstruct
for name (defstruct).
setf
Documentation on what it means to setf
a form
that starts with name.
Recorded when there is a documentation string in a defsetf
of name
(defsetf-fun).
flavor
Documentation of the flavor named name.
Put on by the :documentation
option in a defflavor
for name
(defflavor-fun).
resource
Documentation of the resource named name.
Put on when there is a documentation string in a defresource
of name
(defresource-fun).
signal
Documentation for name as a signal name.
Put on when there is a documentation string in a defsignal
or defsignal-explicit
for name (defsignal-fun).
Documentation strings for any doc-type can be added to name
by doing (setf (documentation name doc-type) string)
.
The command Control-Shift-D
in Zmacs and the rubout handler, used
within a call to a function, prints the documentation of that function.
Control-Shift-V
, within a symbol, prints the documentation of that
symbol as a variable.
The hardcopy functions allow you to specify the printer to use on each
call. The default is set up by the site files for your site, but can be
overridden for a particular machine in the LMLOCS
file or by a user
in his INIT file. Any kind of printer can be used, no matter how it is
actually driven, if it is hooked into the software properly as described below.
A printer-type is a keyword that has appropriate properties; a printer is either a printer-type or a list starting with one. The rest of the list can specify which printer of that type you want to use (perhaps with a host name or filename).
The printer types defined by the system are:
This printer type is used by itself as a printer, and refers to the Dover at MIT.
This printer type indicates a printer that is accessed by writing spool
files in MIT XGP format. A printer would be specified as a list,
(:xgp filename)
, specifying where to write the spool file.
This printer type is used in a list together with a file name, as in
(:press-file "OZ:<RMS>FOO.PRESS")
. Something is “printed” on such
a printer by being converted to a press file and written under that
name.
Print the file filename in hard copy on the specified printer or the
default printer. options is a list of keyword argument names and
values. There are only two keywords that are always meaningful:
:format
and :printer
. Everything else is up to the individual
printer to interpret. The list here is only a paradigm or suggestion.
:printer
The value is the printer to use. The default is the value of
si:*default-printer*
.
:format
The value is a keyword that specifies the format of file to be parsed.
The standard possibilities are :text
(an ordinary file of text),
:xgp
(a file of the sort once used by the XGP at MIT), :press
(a
Xerox-style press file) and :suds-plot
(a file produced by the
Stanford drawing program). However, each kind of printer may define its
own format keywords.
:font
:font-list hardcopy-file
The value of font is the name of a font to print the file in (a
string). Alternatively, you can give :font-list
and specify a list
of such font names, for use if the file contains font-change commands.
The interpretation of a font name is dependent on the printer being
used. There is no necessary relation to Lisp machine display fonts.
However, printers are encouraged to use, by default, fonts that are
similar in appearance to the Lisp machine fonts listed in the file’s
attribute list, if it is a text file.
:heading-font
The value is the name of the font for use in page headers, if there are any.
:vsp
The value is the extra spacing to use between lines, in over and beyond the height of the fonts.
:page-headings
If the value is non-nil
, a heading is added to each page.
:copies
The value is the number of copies to print.
:spool
If the printer provides optional spooling, this argument says whether to
spool (default is nil
). Some printers may intrinsically always
spool; others may have no way to spool.
Sets a default for option for printers of type printer-type. Any use of the hardcopy functions with a printer of that type and no value specified for option will use the value value. For example,
(set-printer-default-option :dover :spool t)
causes output to Dover printers to be spooled unless the
:spool
option is explicitly specified with value nil
.
Currently defaultable options are :font
, :font-list
,
:heading-font
, :page-headings
, :vsp
, :copies
, and
:spool
.
Like hardcopy-file
but uses the text read from stream rather
than opening a file. The :format
option is not allowed (since
implementing it requires the ability to open the file with unusual
open
options).
Print all or part of the bit-array array on the specified or default
printer. options is a list of keyword argument names and values;
the only standard option is :printer
, which specifies the printer to
use. The default printer is si:*default-bit-array-printer*
, or, if
that is nil
, si:*default-printer
.
left, top, right and bottom specify the subrectangle of the array to be printed. All four numbers measure from the top left corner (which is element 0, 0).
*standard-output*
) ¶Prints the status of printer, or the default printer. This should include if possible such things as whether the printer has paper and what is in the queue.
This is the default printer. It is set from the :default-printer
site option.
If non-nil
, this is the default printer for printing bit arrays,
overriding si:*default-printer*
. A separate default is provided for
bit arrays since some printers that can print files cannot print bit
arrays. This variable is set initially from the
:default-bit-array-printer
site option.
Defining a printer type:
A printer type is any keyword that has suitable functions on the appropriate properties.
To be used with the function hardcopy-file
, the printer type must
have a si:print-file
property. To be used with hardcopy-stream
,
the printer type must have a si:print-stream
property.
hardcopy-bit-array
uses the si:print-bit-array
property.
hardcopy-status
uses the si:print-status
property.
(The hardcopy functions’ names are not themselves used simply to avoid
using a symbol in the global package as a property name of a symbol
that might be in the global package as well).
Each property, to be used, should be a function whose first argument will be the printer and whose remaining arguments will fit the same pattern as those of the hardcopy function the user called. (They will not necessarily be the same arguments, as some additional keywords may be added to the list of keyword arguments; but they will fit the same description.)
For example,
(hardcopy-file "foo" :printer '(:press-file "bar.press"))
results in the execution of
(funcall (get :press-file 'si:print-file) '(:press-file "bar.press") "foo" :printer '(:press-file "bar.press"))
A printer type need not support operations that make no sense on it.
For example, there is no si:print-status
property on
:press-file
.
The metering system is a way of finding out what parts of your program
use up the most time. When you run your program with metering, every
function call and return is recorded, together with the time at which it
took place. Page faults are also recorded. Afterward, the metering
system analyzes the records and tells you how much time was spent
executing withain each function. Because the records are stored in the disk
partition called METR
, there is room for a lot of data.
Before you meter a program, you must enable metering in some or all
stack groups. meter:enable
is used for this. Then you evaluate one
or more forms with metering, perhaps by using meter:test
or
meter:run
. Finally, you use meter:analyze
to summarize and
print the metering data.
There are two parameters that control whether metering data are
recorded. First of all, the variable sys:%meter-microcode-enables
contains bits that enable recording of various kinds of events. Secondly,
each stack group has a flag that controls whether events are recorded
while running in that stack group.
Enables recording of metering data. Each bit controls recording of one kind of event.
1
This bit enables recording of page faults.
2
This bit enables recording of consing.
4
This bit enables recording of function entry and exit.
8
This bit enables recording of stack group switching.
The value is normally zero, which turns off all recording.
These are the functions used to control which stack groups do metering:
Enables metering in the stack groups specified by things.
Each thing in things may be a stack group, a process (which
specifies the process’s stack group), or a window (which specifies the
window’s process’s stack group). t
is also allowed. It enables
metering in all stack groups.
Disables metering in the stack groups specified by things.
The arguments allowed are the same as for meter:enable
.
(meter:disable t)
turns off (meter:enable t)
, but does not
disable stack groups enabled individually. (meter:disable)
disables
all stack groups no matter how you specified to enable them.
This is a list of all the things you have enabled with
meter:enable
and not disabled.
These are the functions to evaluate forms with metering:
Clears out the metering data and evaluates the forms with
sys:%meter-microcode-enables
bound to 14 octal (record function
entry and exit, and stack group switching). Any of the evaluation that
takes place in enabled stack groups will record metering data.
#o14
) ¶Clears out the metering data, enables metering for the current
stack group only, and evaluates form with
sys:%meter-microcode-enables
bound to enables.
This is how you print the results:
Analyzes the data recorded by metering.
analyzer is a keyword specifies a kind of analysis. :tree
is the default. Another useful alternative is :list-events
.
Particular analyzers handle other keyword arguments in addition
to those listed above.
The output is printed on stream, written to a file named
file, or put in an editor buffer named buffer (at most one of
these three arguments should be specified). The default is to print on
*standard-output*
.
Analyzing the metering data involves creating a large intermediate data
base. Normally this is created afresh each time meter:analyze
is
called. If you specify a non-nil
value for return, the
intermediate data structure is returned by meter:analyze
, and can be
passed in on another call as the info argument. This can save time.
But you can only do this if you use the same analyzer each time,
as different analyzers use different termporary data structures.
The default analyzer :tree
prints out the amount of run time and
real time spent executing each function that was called. The real time
includes time spend waiting and time spent writing metering data to disk;
for computational tasks, the latter makes the real time less useful
than the run time.
:tree
handles these additional keyword arguments to meter:analyze
:
:find-callers "meter:analyze"
The argument for this keyword is a function spec or a list of function specs. A list of who called the specified functions, and how often, is printed instead of the usual output.
:stack-group "meter:analyze"
The argument is a stack group or a list of them; only the activities in those stack groups are printed.
:sort-function "meter:analyze"
The argument is the name of a suitable sorting function that is used to
sort the items for the various functions that were called. Sorting
functions provided include meter:max-page-faults
,
meter:max-calls
, meter:max-run-time
(the default),
meter:max-real-time
, and meter:max-run-time-per-call
.
:summarize "meter:analyze"
The argument is a function spec or a list of function specs; only those functions’ statistics are printed.
:inclusive "meter:analyze"
If this is non-nil
, the times for each function include
the time spent in executing subroutines called from the function.
Note: if a function is called recursively, the time spent in the inner call(s) is counted twice (or more).
The analyzer :list-events
prints out one line about each event
recorded. The line contains the run time and real time (in
microseconds), the running count of page faults, the stack group name,
the function that was running, the stack depth, the type of event, and a
piece of data. For example:
0 0 0 ZMACS-WINDOWS METER:TEST 202 CALL SI:EVAL 115 43 0 ZMACS-WINDOWS METER:TEST 202 RET SI:EVAL 180 87 0 ZMACS-WINDOWS METER:TEST 202 RET CATCH real run pf stack-group function stack event data time time level type
:list-events
is often useful with recording of page faults
(sys:%meter-microcode-enables
set to 1).
Clears out all metering data.
Because metering records pointers to Lisp objects in a disk partition which is not part of the Lisp address space, garbage collection is inhibited (by arresting the gc process) when you turn on metering.
Allows garbage collection to continue (if it is already turned on) by unarresting it.
t
) (inherited t
) ¶x must be a symbol or a list of symbols.
who-calls
tries
to find all of the functions in the Lisp world
that call x as a function, use x as a variable,
or use x as a constant. (Constants which are lists
containing x are not found.) It tries to find all of the functions
by searching all of the function cells of
all of the symbols in package and packages that inherit
from package (unless inheritors is nil
) and packages
package inherits from (unless inherited is nil
).
package defaults to the global
package, which means that
all normal packages are checked.
If who-calls
encounters an interpreted function definition, it
simply tells you if x appears anywhere in the interpreted code.
who-calls
is smarter about compiled code, since it has been
nicely predigested by the compiler. Macros expanded in the compilation
of the code can be found because they are recorded in the caller’s
debugging info alist, even though they are not actually referred to
by the compiled code.
If x is a list of symbols, who-calls
does them all simultaneously,
which is faster than doing them one at a time.
who-uses
is an obsolete name for who-calls
.
The editor has a command, Meta-X List Callers
, which is similar to who-calls
.
The symbol :unbound-function
is treated specially by who-calls
.
(who-calls :unbound-function)
searches all the compiled
code for any calls through a symbol that is not currently
defined as a function. This is useful for finding errors such
as functions you misspelled the names of or forgot to write.
who-calls
prints one line of information for each caller it finds. It also
returns a list of the names of all the callers.
t
) (inherited t
) ¶Similar to who-calls
but returns a list of the pathnames of all the files
that contain functions that who-calls
would have printed out. This is useful
if you need to recompile and/or edit all of those files.
t
) inherited dont-print predicate boundp fboundp ¶(apropos substring)
tries to find all symbols whose print-names
contain substring as a substring. Whenever it finds a symbol, it
prints out the symbol’s name; if the symbol is defined as a function
and/or bound to a value, it tells you so and prints the names of the
arguments (if any) to the function.
If predicate is non-nil
, it should be a function; only symbols
on which the function returns non-nil
are counted. In addition, fboundp
non-nil
means only symbols with function definitions are considered,
and boundp non-nil
means that only symbols with values are considered.
apropos
looks for symbols on package, and all packages that use
package (unless inheritors is nil
). If inherited is
non-nil
, all packages used by package are searched as well.
package can be a package or a symbol or string naming a package. It
can also be a list of packages, symbols and strings; all of the packages
thus specified are searched. package defaults to a list of all
packages except invisible ones.
apropos
returns a list of all the symbols it finds.
If dont-print is non-nil
, that is all it does.
Finds all symbols in starting-list whose names contain
substring, and that satisfy predicate. If predicate is
nil
, the substring is the only condition. The symbols are printed
if dont-print is nil
. A list of the symbols found is returned,
in any case.
This function is most useful when applied to the value of *
, after
apropos
has returned a long list.
Prints the names of all packages that contain a symbol with the
print-name pname. If pname is a string it gets upper-cased.
The package package and all packages that inherit from it are
searched. package can be a package or the name of a package, or a
list of packages and names. It defaults to a list of all packages
except invisible ones. where-is
returns a list of all the symbols
it finds.
describe
tries to tell you all of the interesting information
about any object x (except for array contents). describe
knows
about arrays, symbols, floats, packages, stack groups, closures, and FEFs, and prints
out the attributes of each in human-readable form. Sometimes
objects found inside x are described also;
such recursive descriptions are indented appropriately. For instance,
describe
of a symbol also describes the symbol’s value,
its definition, and each of its properties. describe
of a float
(full-size or short) shows you its internal representation in a way
that is useful for tracking down roundoff errors and the like.
If x is a named-structure, describe
invokes the :describe
operation to print the description, if that is supported.
To understand this, you should read the section on named structures
(see named-structure). If the :describe
operation is not
supported, describe
looks on the named-structure symbol for information
that might have been left by defstruct
; this information would
tell it what the symbolic names for the entries in the structure are,
and describe
knows how to use the names to print out what each field’s
name and contents is.
describe
of an instance always invokes the :describe
operation.
All flavors support it, since si:vanilla-flavor
defines a method for it.
describe
always returns its argument, in case you want to do something else to it.
A window-oriented version of describe
. See the window system documentation
for details, or try it and type Help
.
Prints out a human-readable version of the macro-instructions in function. function should be a FEF, or a function spec whose definition is a FEF. The macro-code instruction set is explained in macro-code.
The grindef
function (see grindef-fun) may be used to display the definition
of a non-compiled function.
Prints a summary of memory usage.
The first line of output tells you the amount of physical memory on the machine, the amount of available virtual memory not yet filled with data (that is, the portion of the available virtual memory that has not yet been allocated to any region of any area), and the amount of wired physical memory (i.e memory not available for paging).
Following lines tell you how much room is left in some areas. For each area it tells you about, it prints out the name of the area, the number of regions that currently make up the area, the current size of the area in kilowords, and the amount of the area that has been allocated, also in kilowords. If the area cannot grow, the percentage that is free is displayed.
(room)
tells you about those areas that are in the list that is the value
of the variable room
. These are the most interesting ones.
(room area1 area2...)
tells you about those areas, which can
be either the names or the numbers.
(room t)
tells you about all the areas.
(room nil)
does not tell you about any areas; it only prints the
first line of output.
The value of room
is a list of area names and/or area numbers,
denoting the areas that the function room
should describe if given
no arguments. Its initial value is:
(working-storage-area macro-compiled-program)
ed
is the main function for getting into the editor, Zmacs.
The commands of Zmacs are very similar to those of Emacs.
(ed)
or (ed nil)
simply enters the editor, leaving you in the same
buffer as the last time you were in the editor. It has the same effect
as typing System E
.
(ed t)
puts you in a fresh buffer with a generated name (like BUFFER-4).
(ed pathname)
edits that file. pathname may be an actual pathname
or a string.
(ed 'foo)
tries hard to edit the definition of the foo
function.
It can find a buffer or file containing the source code for foo
and position the cursor at the beginning of the code. In general, foo
can be any function-spec (see function-spec).
(ed 'zwei:reload)
reinitializes the editor. It forgets about all
existing buffers, so use this only as a last resort.
This function is useful in emergencies in which you have modified material
in Zmacs buffers that needs to be saved, but the editor is partially broken.
This function does what the editor’s Save All Files
command does, but
it stays away from redisplay and other advanced facilities so that
it might work if other things are broken.
Puts up a window and edits the directory named by pathname, which
defaults to the last file opened. While editing a directory you may
view, edit, compare, hardcopy, and delete the files and subdirectories
it contains. While in the directory editor type the Help
key for
further information.
Sends the string text as mail to user. user should also be
a string, of the form "username
. Multiple
recipients separated by commas are also allowed.
@
hostname"
If you do not provide two arguments, mail
puts up an editor window
in which you may compose the mail. Type the End
key to send the
mail and return from the mail
function.
The window is also used if call-editor-anyway is non-nil
.
Reports a bug. topic is the name of the faulty program (a symbol or
a string). It defaults to lispm
(the Lisp Machine system itself).
text is a string which contains the information to report. If you
do not provide two arguments, or if call-editor-anyway is
non-nil
, a window is put up for you to compose the mail.
bug
is like mail
but includes information about the system version
and what machine you are on in the text of the message. This information is
important to the maintainers of the faulty program; it aids them in reproducing
the bug and in determining whether it is one that is already being worked on
or has already been fixed.
0
) to ¶Reprints any notifications that have been received. from
and to
are used to restrict which notifications are printed;
both count from the most recent notification as number 0. Thus,
(print-notifications 2 8)
prints six notifications after skipping
the two most recent.
The difference between notifications and sends is that sends come from
other users, while notifications are usually asynchronous messages from
the Lisp Machine system itself. However, the default way for the system
to inform you about a send is to make a notification! So
print-notifications
normally includes all sends as well.
Typing Terminal 1 N
pops up a window and calls print-notifications
to print on it.
Prints information about the half dozen most recent disk errors (since the last cold boot).
Selects the PEEK utility, which displays various information about the system, periodically updating it. PEEK has several modes, which are entered by typing a single key which is the name of the mode or by clicking on the menu at the top. The initial mode is selected by the argument, character. If no argument is given, PEEK starts out by explaining what its modes are.
Evaluates form and prints the length of time that the evaluation took. The values of form are returned.
Note that time
with no argument is a function to return
a time value counting in 60ths of a second; see time-fun-1. This unfortunate
collision is a consequence of Common Lisp.
These functions constitute the Lisp top level read-eval-print loop or listen loop and its associated functions.
This is the first function called in the initial Lisp environment.
It calls lisp-reinitialize
, clears the screen, and calls si:lisp-top-level1
.
This function does a wide variety of things, such as resetting the values of various global constants and initializing the error system.
This is the actual listen loop. Within it, *terminal-io*
is bound
to the argument supplied. This is the stream used for reading and printing
if *standard-input*
and *standard-output*
are synonyms for *terminal-io*
,
as they normally are.
The listen loop reads a form from *standard-input*
, evaluates it,
prints the result (with escaping) to *standard-output*
, and repeats
indefinitely. If several values are returned by the form all of them
are printed. Also the values of *
, +
, -
, //
, ++
,
**
, +++
, ***
and *values*
are maintained (see below).
Enters a breakpoint loop, which is similar
to a Lisp top level loop. format-string and the format-args
are passed to format
to print a message.
;Breakpoint message; Resume to continue, Abort to quit.
and then enters a loop reading, evaluating, and printing forms. A
difference between a break loop and the top level loop is that when
reading a form, break
checks for the following special cases: If the
Abort
key is typed, control is returned to the previous break or
error-handler, or to top-level if there is none. If the Resume
key is
typed, break
returns nil
. If the list (return form)
is typed,
break
evaluates form and returns the result, without ever
calling the function return
.
Inside the break
loop, the streams *standard-output*
,
*standard-input*
, and query-io
are bound to be synonymous
to *terminal-io*
; *terminal-io*
itself is not rebound. Several
other internal system variables are bound, and you can add your
own symbols to be bound by pushing elements onto the
value of the variable sys:*break-bindings*
(see sys:*break-bindings*-var).
break
used to be a special form whose first argument was a string
or symbol which was simply printed without evaluating it.
In order to facilitate conversion, break
really still is a special form.
If the call appears to use the old conventions, it behaves in the old way,
but the compiler issues a warning if it sees such code.
The value of this variable is normally nil
. If it is non-nil
,
then the read-eval-print loop uses its value instead of the
definition of prin1
to print the values returned by functions.
This hook lets you control how things are printed by all read-eval-print
loops–the Lisp top level, the break
function, and any utility
programs that include a read-eval-print loop. It does not affect output
from programs that call the prin1
function or any of its relatives such
as print
and format
; if you want to do that, read about
customizing the printer, on customizing-the-printer. If you
set prin1
to a new function, remember that the read-eval-print loop
expects the function to print the value but not to output a return
character or any other delimiters.
While a form is being evaluated by a read-eval-print loop,
-
is bound to the form itself.
While a form is being evaluated by a read-eval-print loop,
+
is bound to the previous form that was read by the loop.
While a form is being evaluated by a read-eval-print loop,
*
is set to the result printed the last time through
the loop. If there were several values printed (because
of a multiple-value return), *
is bound to the first
value. //
is bound to a list of all the values of the
previous form.
If evaluation of a form is aborted, *
and //
remain set to
the results of the last successfully completed form. If evaluation
is successful but printing is aborted, *
and //
are already
set for the following form.
Note that when using Common Lisp syntax you would type just /
.
++
holds the previous value of +
, that is, the form evaluated
two interactions ago.
+++
holds the previous value of ++
.
Hold the previous values of *
and //
, that is, the results of
the form evaluated two interactions ago. Only forms whose evaluation
is successful cause the values of *
and //
to move into
**
and ////
.
Note that when using Common Lisp syntax you would type just //
.
Hold the previous values of **
and ////
, that is, the results of
the form evaluated three interactions ago.
Note that when using Common Lisp syntax you would type just ///
.
*values*
holds a list of all lists of values produced by evaluation
in this Lisp listener. (car *values*)
is nearly equivalent to //
,
(cadr *values*)
to ////
, and so on. The difference is that
an element is pushed on *values*
for each form whose evaluation
is started. If evaluation is aborted, the element of *values*
is nil
.
When break
is called, it binds some special variables under control of
the list which is the value of sys:*break-bindings*
. Each element of the
list is a list of two elements: a variable and a form that is evaluated to
produce the value to bind it to. The bindings happen sequentially. Users may
push
things on this list (adding to the front of it), but should not replace
the list wholesale since several of the variable bindings on this list are
essential to the operation of break
.
The value of lisp-crash-list
is a list of forms.
lisp-reinitialize
sequentially evaluates these
forms, and then sets lisp-crash-list
to nil
.
In most cases, the initialization facility should be used rather than
lisp-crash-list
. Refer to initialization.
Turns automatic garbage collection on. Garbage collection will happen when and as needed. Automatic garbage collection is off by default.
Since garbage collection works by copying, you are asked for confirmation if there may not be enough space to complete a garbage collection even if it is started immediately.
Turns automatic garbage collection off.
t
when garbage collection is on, nil
when it is not.
You cannot control garbage collection by setting this variable;
it exists so you can examine it. In particular, you can tell
if the system found it necessary to turn off garbage collection
because it was close to running out of virtual memory.
Normally, automatic garbage collection happens in incremental mode; that is, scavenging happens in parallel with computation. Each consing operation scavenges or copies four words per word consed. In addition, scavenging goes on whenever the machine appears idle.
If this is non-nil
, scavenging is not done during idle time.
If you are running a noninteractive crunching program, the incremental nature of garbage collection may not be helpful. Then you can make garbage collection more efficient by making it a batch process.
If this variable is non-nil
,
automatic garbage collection is done as a batch operation:
when the garbage collection process decides that the time has come,
it copies all the useful data and discards the old address space,
running full blast. (It is still possible to use the machine while this is
going on, but it is slow.) More specifically, the
garbage collection process scavenges and reclaims oldspace immediately
right after a flip happens, using all of the machine’s
physical memory. This variable is only relevant if you have turned on
automatic garbage collection with (gc-on)
.
A batch garbage collection requires less free space than an incremental one. If there is not enough space to complete an incremental garbage collection, you may be able to win by selecting batch garbage collection instead.
If this variable is non-nil
, then automatic garbage collection is
done in batch mode if, when the flip is done, there does not seem to
be enough space left to do it incrementally. This variable’s value is
relevant only if si:gc-reclaim-immediately
is nil
.
This variable tells the garbage collector what fraction of the data it should expect to have to copy, after each flip. It should be a positive number no larger than one. By default, it is one. But if your program is consing considerable amounts of garbage, a value less than one may be safe. The garbage collector uses this variable to figure how much space it will need to copy all the living data, and therefore indirectly how often garbage collection must be done.
This value is used, when non-nil
, to control warnings about having
too little space to garbage collect. Its value is a positive number
no greater than one, just like that of si:gc-flip-ratio
. The
difference between the two is that si:gc-flip-ratio
controls when
garbage collection is recommended, whereas
si:gc-flip-minimum-ratio
controls when the system considers the
last possible time to do so. If si:gc-flip-minimum-ratio
is
nil
, si:gc-flip-ratio
serves both purposes.
Garbage collection is turned off if it appears to be about to run out of memory. You get a notification if this happens. You also get a notification when you are nearly at the point of not having enough space to guarantee garbage collecting successfully.
In addition to turning on automatic garbage collection, you can also
manually request one immediate complete collection with the function
si:full-gc
. The usual reason for doing this is to make a band smaller
before saving it. si:full-gc
also resets all temporary areas (see
si:reset-temporary-area
, si:reset-temporary-area-fun).
Performs a complete garbage collection immediately. This does not turn automatic garbage collection on or off; it performs the garbage collection in the process you call it in. A full gc of the standard system takes about 7 minutes, currently.
This is a more selective way of causing static areas to be garbage
collected once. The argument is the area number of a static area; that
particular area will be garbage collected the next time a garbage
collection is done (more precisely, it will be copied and discarded after the next
flip). If you then call si:full-gc
, it will happen then.
The function gc-status
prints information related to garbage
collection. When scavenging is in progress, it tells you how the task is
progressing. While scavenging is not in progress and
oldspace does not exist, it prints information about how soon a new flip
will be required.
While a garbage collection is not in progress, the output from
gc-status
looks like this:
Dynamic (new+copy) space 557,417, Old space 0, Static 3,707,242, Free space 10,453,032, with 10,055,355 needed for garbage collection assuming 100% live data (SI:GC-FLIP-RATIO = 1). If GC is turned on, a flip will happen in 397,677 words. Scavenging during cons Off, Idle scavenging On, Automatic garbage collection Off. GC Flip Ratio 1, GC Reclaim Immediately Off
or
Dynamic (new+copy) space 561,395, Old space 0, Static 3,707,242, Free space 10,453,032, with 10,058,670 needed for garbage collection assuming 100% live data (SI:GC-FLIP-RATIO = 1). A flip will happen in 394,362 words. Scavenging during cons On, Idle scavenging On, Automatic garbage collection On. GC Flip Ratio 1, GC Reclaim Immediately Off
The “dynamic space” figure is the amount of garbage collectable space and the “static” figure is the amount of static space used. There is no old space since an old space only exists during garbage collection.
The amount of space needed for garbage collection represents an estimate of how much space user programs will use up while scavenging is in progress. It includes a certain amount of padding. The difference between the free space and that amount is how much consing you can do before a garbage collection will begin (if automatic garbage collection is on).
The amount needed for a garbage collection depends on the value of
si:*gc-reclaim-immediately*
; more if it is nil
.
While a garbage collection is in progress, the output looks like this:
Incremental garbage collection now in progress. Dynamic (new+copy) space 45,137, Old space 972,514, Static 3,707,498, Between 3,701,440 and 4,629,998 words of scavenging left to do. Free space 9,289,795 (of which 928,558 might be needed for copying). Ratio scavenging work/free space = 0.55. Scavenging during cons On, Idle scavenging On, Automatic garbage collection On. GC Flip Ratio 1, GC Reclaim Immediately Off
Notice that most of the dynamic space has become old space and new space is small. Not much has been copied since the flip took place. The maximum and minimum estimates for the amount of scavenging are based on different limits for how much of old space may need to be copied; as scavenging progresses, the maximum decreases steadily, but the minimum may increase. The free space is smaller now, but it will get larger when scavenging is finished and old space is freed up. (The total amounts are not the same now because unused parts of regions may not be included in any of the figures.)
Incremental scavenging is restricted to a fixed amount of physical memory to reduce its interference with your other activities.
This function specifies the number of pages of memory that incremental garbage collection can use. 256 is a good value for a 256k machine. If the garbage collector gets very poor paging performance, use of this function may fix it.
Logging in tells the Lisp Machine who you are, so that other users can see who is logged in, you can receive messages, and your INIT file can be run. An INIT file is a Lisp program which gets loaded when you log in; it can be used to set up a personalized environment.
When you log out, it should be possible to undo any
personalizations you have made so that they do not affect the next user
of the machine. Therefore, anything done by an INIT file should be
undoable. In order to do this, for every form in the INIT file, a Lisp
form to undo its effects should be added to the list that is the value
of logout-list
. The login-forms
construct
helps make this easy; see below.
The value of user-id
is either the name of the logged in user, as a string,
or else an empty string if there is no user logged in.
It appears in the who-line.
The value of logout-list
is a list of forms to be evaluated
when the user logs out.
Sets your name (the variable user-id
) to name and logs in a file
server on host. host also becomes your default file host. The default
value of host depends on which Lisp Machine you use using; it is
called the associated machine (see si:associated-machine-var).
login
also runs the :login
initialization list (see
login-init-list).
If host requires passwords for logging in you are asked for a
password. Adding an asterisk at the front of your password enables any
special capabilities you may be authorized to use, by calling
fs:enable-capabilities
(fs:enable-capabilities-fun).
Unless inhibit-init-file is specified as non-nil
, login
loads
your init file if it exists. On ITS, your init file is name LISPM
on your home directory. On TOPS-20 your init file is LISPM.INIT
on your
directory. On VMS, it is LISPM.INI
. On Unix, it is lispm.init
.
If anyone is logged into the machine already, login
logs him out
before logging in name. (See logout
.) Init files should be
written using the login-forms
construct so that logout
can undo
them. Usually, however, you cold-boot the machine before logging in, to
remove any traces of the previous user. login
returns t
.
Like login
but the arguments are specified differently.
options is a list of keywords and values; the keywords
:host
and :init
specify the host to log in on and whether
to load the init file if any. Any other keywords are also allowed.
log1
itself ignores them, but the init file can act on them.
The purpose of log1
, as opposed to login
, is to enable you
to specify other keywords for your init file’s sake.
During the execution of the user’s init file, inside log1
,
this variable contains the arguments given to log1
.
Options not meaningful to log1
itself can be specified, so that
the init file can find them here and act on them.
First, logout
evaluates the forms on logout-list
.
Then it sets user-id
to an empty string and logout-list
to nil
. Then it runs the :logout
initialization list
(see login-init-list), and returns t
.
The body of a login-forms
is composed of forms to be evaluated,
whose effects are to be undone if you log out. For example,
(login-forms (setq fs:*defaults-are-per-host* t))
would set the variable immediately but arrange for its previous value to be restored if you log out.
login-forms
is not an AI program; it must be told how to undo each
function that will be used immediately inside it. This is done by
giving the function name (such as setq
) a :undo-function
property which is a function that takes a form as an argument and
returns a form to undo the original form. For setq
, this is done as
follows:
(defun (setq :undo-function) (form &aux results) (do ((l (cdr form) (cddr l))) ((null l)) (cond ((boundp (car l)) (push `(setq ,(car l) ',(symeval (car l))) results)) (t (push `(makunbound ',(car l)) results)))) `(progn . ,results))
Undo functions are standardly provided for the functions setq
,
pkg-goto-globally
, setq-globally
, add-initialization
,
deff
, defun
, defsubst
, macro
, advise
and
zwei:set-comtab
. Constructs which macroexpand into uses of those
functions are also supported.
Note that setting *read-base*
and *print-base*
should be done with setq-globally
rather than setq
, since those variables are likely to be bound by the
load
function while the init file is executed.
login-setq
is like setq
except that it puts
a setq
form on logout-list
to set the variables
to their previous values. login-setq
is obsolete; use login-forms
around a setq
instead.
login-eval
is used for functions that are “meant to be called”
from INIT files, such as zwei:set-comtab-return-undo
, which conveniently
return a form to undo what they did. login-eval
pushes
the result of the form x onto logout-list
. It is obsolete now
because login-forms
is a cleaner interface.
This is what login-forms
uses.
forms is a list of forms; they are evaluated and forms for
undoing their effects are pushed onto the value of the symbol
undo-list-name. If an element of forms has no known
way to be undone, a message is printed using the string complaint-string.
For login-forms
, the string supplied is "at logout"
.
With an argument, dribble
opens filename as a ‘dribble file’ (also
known as a ‘wallpaper file’) and then enters a Lisp listen loop
in which *standard-input*
and *standard-output*
are rebound to direct all the output and
echoing they do to the file as well as to the terminal.
Dribble output can be sent to an editor buffer by using a suitable pathname; see editor-hosts.
Calling dribble
with no arguments terminates dribbling; it throws to
the original call to dribble
, which closes the file and returns.
Like dribble
except that all input and
output goes to the dribble file, including break loops, queries,
warnings and sessions in the debugger. This works by binding
*terminal-io*
instead of *standard-output*
and *standard-input*
.
Common Lisp defines several standard ways of inquiring about the identity and capabilities of the Lisp system you are using.
A list of atoms which describe the software and hardware features of the Lisp implementation. By default, this is
(:loop :defstruct :lispm :cadr :mit :chaos :sort :fasload :string :newio :roman :trace :grindef :grind :common)
Most important is the symbol :lispm
; this indicates that the program
is executing on the Lisp Machine. :cadr
indicates the type of
hardware, :mit
which version of the Lisp Machine operating system,
and :chaos
that the Chaosnet protocol is available. :common
indicates that Common Lisp is supported.
Most of the other elements are for Maclisp compatibility. Common Lisp
defines the variable *features*
but does not define what should
appear in the list. The order of elements in the list has no
significance. Membership checks should use string-equal
so that
packages are not significant
The #+
and #-
read constructs (sharp-plus) check for the
presence of an element in this list. Thus, #+
lispm
when read by
a Lisp Machine causes the following expression to be significant,
because :lispm
is present in the features list.
The remaining standard means of inquiry are specified by Common Lisp to be functions rather than variables, for reasons that seem poorly thought out.
Returns a string saying what kind of Lisp implementation you are using.
On the Lisp Machine it is always "Zetalisp"
.
Returns a string saying the version numbers of the Lisp implementation. On the Lisp Machine it looks something like
"System 98.3, CADR 3.0, ZMAIL 52.2"
.
Returns a string describing the kind of hardware in use.
It is "CADR"
or "LAMBDA"
.
Returns a string describing the kind of hardware and microcode version.
It starts with the value of machine-type
.
It might be "CADR Microcode 309"
.
Returns a string giving the name of this machine. Do not be confused;
the value is a string, not an instance. Example: "CADR-18"
.
Returns a string describing the type of operating system software that Lisp
is working with. On the Lisp Machine, it is always "Zetalisp"
, since the
Lisp Machine Lisp software is the operating system.
Returns a string describing the version numbers of the operating system software
in use. This is the same as lisp-implementation-version
on the Lisp Machine
since the same software is being described.
Returns a string giving briefly the name of the site you are at.
A site is an institution which has a group of Lisp Machines.
The string you get is the value of the :short-site-name
site option
as given in SYS: SITE; SITE LISP
. See site-files for more
information. Example: "MIT AI Lab"
.
Returns a string giving a verbose name for the site you are at. This
string is specified by the site option :long-site-name
. Example:
"Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Artificial Intelligence
Laboratory"
.
A Lisp Machine disk is divided into several named partitions (also
called bands sometimes). Partitions can be used for many things.
Every disk has a partition named PAGE
, which is used to implement
the virtual memory of the Lisp Machine. When you run Lisp, this is
where the Lisp world actually resides. There are also partitions that
hold saved images of the Lisp Machine microcode, conventionally named
MCRn
(where n is a digit), and partitions that hold saved
images of Lisp worlds, conventionally named LODn
. A saved image
of a Lisp world is also called a virtual memory load or system load.
The microcode and system load are stored separately so that the
microcode can be changed without going through the time-consuming
process of generating a new system load.
The directory of partitions is in a special block on the disk called the
label. The label names one of the partitions as the current microcode
and one as the current system load. When you cold-boot, the contents
of the current microcode band are loaded into the microcode memory, and
then the contents of the current saved image of the Lisp world is copied
into the PAGE
partition. Then Lisp starts running. When you
warm-boot, the contents of the current microcode band are loaded, but
Lisp starts running using the data already in the PAGE
partition.
For each partition, the directory of partitions contains a brief textual
description of the contents of the partition. For microcode partitions,
a typical description might be "UCADR 310"
; this means that version
310
of the microcode is in the partition. For saved Lisp images, it
is a little more complicated. Ideally, the description would say which
versions of which systems are loaded into the band. Unfortunately,
there isn’t enough room for that in most cases. A typical description
is "99.4 Daed 5.1"
, meaning that this band contains version
99.4
of System
and version 5.1
of Daedalus
. The description
is created when a Lisp world is saved away by disk-save
(see below).
0
) (stream *standard-output*
) ¶Prints a description of the label of the disk specified by unit onto stream. The description starts with the name of the disk pack, various information about the disk that is generally uninteresting, and the names of the two current load partitions (microcode and saved Lisp image). This is followed by one line of description for each partition. Each one has a name, disk address, size, and textual comment. The current microcode partition and the current system load partition are marked with asterisks, each at the beginning of the line.
unit may be the unit number of the disk (most Lisp machines just
have one unit, number 0), or the host name of another Lisp Machine on
the Chaosnet, as a string (in which case the label of unit 0
on that
machine is printed, and the user of that machine is notified that you
are looking at his label), or, for CADRs only, the string "CC"
(which prints the label of unit 0 of the machine connected to this
machine’s debugging hardware).
Use of "CC"
as the unit is the way to examine or fix up
the label of a machine which cannot work because of problems with the
label. On a Lambda, this must be done through the SDU.
0
) ¶Sets the current saved Lisp image partition to be partition-name.
If partition-name is a number, the name LODn
is used.
unit can be a disk drive number, the host name of another Lisp
Machine, or the string "CC"
. See the comments under
print-disk-label
, above.
If the partition you specify goes with a version of microcode different
from the one that is current, this function offers to select the
an appropriate microcode partition as well. Normally you should
answer Y
.
0
) ¶Sets the current microcode partition to be partition-name.
If partition-name is a number, the name MCRn
is used.
unit can be a disk drive number, the host name of another Lisp
Machine, or the string "CC"
. See the comments under
print-disk-label
, above.
0
) ¶0
) ¶Return, respectively, the name of the current band and the current microload on the specified unit.
When using the functions to set the current load partitions, be extra
sure that you are specifying the correct partition. Having done it,
cold-booting the machine will reload from those partitions. Some
versions of the microcode will not work with some versions of the Lisp
system, and if you set the two current partitions incompatibly,
cold-booting the machine will fail. To fix this, on a CADR, use
another CADR’s debugging hardware, running
print-disk-label
and set-current-band
on the other CADR and
giving "CC"
as the unit argument. On a Lambda, this is done
via the SDU.
Runs an interactive label editor on the specified unit.
This editor allows you to change any field in the label. The
Help
key documents the commands. You have to be an expert
to need this and to understand what it does, so the commands
are not documented here. Ask someone if you need help.
You can screw yourself very badly with this function.
Allows booting from a band other than the current one. partition
may be the name or the number of a disk partition containing a
virtual-memory load, or nil
or omitted, meaning to use the current
partition. The specified partition is copied into the paging area of
the disk and then started.
Although you can use this to boot a different Lisp image than the installed
one, this does not provide a way to boot a different microcode image.
disk-restore
brings up the new band with the currently running microcode.
disk-restore
asks the user for confirmation before doing it.
Tells you various useful things about a partition; including where on disk the partition begins, and how long it is.
If you specify a saved Lisp system partition, such as LOD3
, it also
tells you important information about the contents of the partition: the
microcode version which the partition goes with, the size of the data in
the partition and the highest virtual address used. The size of the partition
tells how large a partition you need to make a copy of this one, and the
highest virtual address used (which is measured in units of disk
blocks) tells you how large a PAGE
partition you need in order to run
this partition.
Of all the procedures described in this section, the most common one is
to take a partition containing a Lisp image, update it to have all the
latest patches (see patch-facility), and save it away in a disk
partition. The function load-and-save-patches
does it all
conveniently for you.
Loads patches and saves a band, with a simple user interface. Run this
function immediately after cold booting, without logging in first; it
logs in automatically as LISPM
(or whatever is specified in the site files).
The first thing it does is print the list of disk partitions and ask you
which one to save in. Answer LODn
, using the name of a partition
from the printed list. You must then confirm. Then the patches are loaded
and the resulting world is saved with no further user interaction, as long
as no problem arises.
It is convenient to use this function just before you depart, allowing it to finish unattended.
If you wish to do something other than loading all and only the latest
patches, you must perform the steps by hand. Start by cold-booting the
machine, to get a fresh, empty system. Next, you must log in as
something whose INIT file does not affect the Lisp world noticably (so
that when you save away the Lisp image, the side-effects of the INIT
file won’t get saved too); on MIT-OZ, for example, you can log in as
LISPM
with password LISPM
. Now you can load in any new software
you want; usually you should also do (load-patches)
for good
measure. You may also want to call si:set-system-status
to change
the release status of the system.
When you’re done loading everything, do (print-disk-label)
to find
a band in which to save your new Lisp world. It is best not to reuse
the current band, since if something goes wrong during the saving of
the partition, while you have written, say, half of the band that is
current, it may be impossible to cold-boot the machine. Once you have
found the partition, you use the disk-save
function to save
everything into that partition.
Saves the current Lisp world in the designated partition.
partition-name may be a partition name (a string), or it may be a
number in which case the name LODn
is used.
The user is first asked for yes-or-no confirmation that he really wants to
reuse the named partition. A non-nil
value for no-query prevents
this question. This is only for callers that have already asked.
Next it is necessary to figure out what to put into the textual
description of the band, for the disk label. This starts with the brief
version of si:system-version-info
(see
si:system-version-info-fun). Then comes a string of additional
information; if no-query is nil
, the user is offered the chance
to provide a new string. The current value of this string is returned
by si:system-version-info
and printed by booting. The version info
and the string both go in the comment field of the disk label for this
band. If they don’t together fit into the fixed size available, the
user is asked to retype the whole thing (the version info as well as
your comment) in a compressed form that does fit.
The Lisp environment is then saved away into the designated partition, and then the equivalent of a cold-boot from that partition is done.
Once the patched system has been successfully saved and the system
comes back up, you can make it current with set-current-band
.
When you do a disk-save
, it may tell you that the band you wish to save
in is not big enough to hold all the data in your current world. It may be
possible for you to reduce the size of the data so that it will fit in that
band, by garbage collecting. Simply do (si:full-gc)
.
Try to avoid saving patched systems after running the editor or the compiler. This works, but it makes the saved system a lot bigger. In order to produce a clean saved environment, you should try to do as little as possible between the time you cold-boot and the time you save the partition.
The value of si:login-history
is a list of entries, one for each person who
has logged into this world since it was created. This makes it possible to
tell who disk-saved
a band with something broken in it. Each entry is
a list of the user ID, the host logged into, the Lisp Machine on which the
world was being executed, and the date and time.
If you have a large application system which takes a while to load, you may wish to save a band containing it.
To do this, boot a fresh band, log in without running your init file,
do make-system
to load the application system, and then invoke
disk-save
. When disk-save
asks for an additional comment,
give your name or the name of the application system you loaded,
and a date. This will tell other people who to ask whether the
band is still in use if they would like to save other things.
You can greatly reduce the amount of disk space needed for the saved band by making it an incremental band; that is, a band which contains the differences between the Lisp world you want to save and the system band you originally loaded. Since all the pages of the system which your application program did not change do not have to be saved, an incremental band is generally much smaller–perhaps by a factor of ten.
To make an incremental band, give a non-nil
third argument to
disk-save
, as in
(disk-save "lod4" nil t)
Figuring out which pages need to be saved in the incremental band takes a couple of extra minutes.
You can restore the incremental band with disk-restore
or boot it like
any other band. This works by first booting the original band and then
copying in the differences that the incremental band records. It takes
only a little longer than booting the original system band.
The original band to which an incremental band refers must be a complete load. When you update a standard system band (loading patches, for instance) you should always make a complete load, so that the previous system band is not needed for the new one to function.
The incremental band records the partition name of the original system
band. That original band must still exist, with the same contents, in
order for the incremental band to work properly. The incremental band
contains some error check data which is used to verify this. The error checking is
done by the microcode when the incremental band is booted, but it is
also done by set-current-band
, so that you are not permitted to select
an incremental band if it is not going to work.
When using incremental bands, it is important to preserve the system bands
that they depend on. Therefore, system bands should not be updated too
frequently. describe-partition
on an incremental band says which
full band it depends on; you can use this to determine which bands should
be kept for the sake of incremental bands that depend on them.
In order to realize the maximum savings in disk space possible because
of incremental bands, you must make the partition you saved in smaller
once the save is finished and you know how much space was actually used.
This is done with si:edit-disk-label
.
The excess space at the end of the partition can be used to make another
partition which is used for the next incremental band saved. Eventually
when some of the incremental bands are no longer needed the rest must
be shuffled so that the free space can be put together into larger partitions.
This can be done with si:copy-disk-partition
.
An easier technique is to divide a couple of the initial partitions into several equal-sized partitions of about 4000 pages, and use these for all incremental saving. You can easily provide room for 12 incremental bands this way in addition to a few system bands and file system.
You must not do a garbage collection to reduce the size of the world before you make an an incremental band. This is because garbage collection alters so many pages that an incremental band would be as big as a complete band.
The normal way to install new software on a machine is to copy the microcode and world load bands from another machine.
The first step is to find a machine that is not in use and has the
desired system. Let us call this the source machine. The machine
where the new system is to be installed is the target machine. You
can use finger
to see which machines are free, and use
print-disk-label
with an argument to examine the label of that
machine’s disk and see if it has the system you want.
Then you should do a (print-disk-label)
to find suitable
partitions to copy them into. It is advisable not to copy them
into the selected partitions; if you did that, and the machine
crashed in the middle, you would be unable to boot it.
Before copying a band from another machine, double-check the partition
names by printing the labels of both machines, and make sure no one is
using the other machine. Also double-check with
describe-partition
that the world load and microcode go together.
Then use this function:
Copies the partition on source-host’s partition named source-band onto the local machine’s partition named target-band. This takes about ten minutes. It types out the size of the partition in pages, and types a number every 100 pages telling how far it has gotten. It displays an entry in the who line on the remote machine saying what’s going on.
The subset-start and subset-size arguments can be used to transfer only part of a partition. They are measured in blocks. The default for the first is zero, and the default for the second is to continue to the end of the data in the band. These arguments are useful for restarting a transfer that was aborted due to network problems or a crash, based on the count of hundreds of blocks that was printed out before the crash.
To go the other direction, use si:transmit-band
.
This is just like si:receive-band
, except you use it on
the source machine instead of the target machine. It copies
the local machine’s partition named source-band onto
target-machine’s partition named target-band.
It is preferable to use si:receive-band
so that you are present
at the machine being written on.
After transferring the band, it is good practice to make sure that it really was copied successfully by comparing the original and the copy. All of the known reasons for errors during band transfer have (of course) been corrected, but peace of mind is valuable. If the copy was not perfectly faithful, you might not find out about it until a long time later, when you use whatever part of the system that had not been copied properly.
This is like si:receive-band
, except that it does not change anything.
It compares the two bands and complains about any differences.
Having gotten the current microcode load and system load copied into
partitions on your machine, you can make them current for booting using
set-current-band
.
recompile-world
is a rather ad-hoc tool for recompiling all
of the Lisp Machine system packages. It works by calling the pkg-load
facility.
It will find all files that need recompiling from any of the packages:
system-internals format compiler chaos supdup peek eine
keywords is a list of keywords; usually it is empty. The useful keywords are:
load
After compiling, load in any files which are not loaded.
noconfirm
Don’t ask for confirmation for each package.
selective
Ask for confirmation for each file.
Any of the other keywords accepted by pkg-load
will also work.
qld
is used to generate a new Lisp Machine system after
the cold-load is loaded in. If you don’t know how to use this,
you don’t need it. If restart-p
is non-nil
, then
it ignores that it has done anything, and starts from scratch.
The Lisp Machine system has options that are set at each site. These include the network addresses of other hosts, which hosts have file servers, which host to find the system source files and patch files on, where to send bug reports, what timezone the site is located in, and many other things.
The per-site information is defined by three files: SYS: SITE; SITE LISP
,
SYS: SITE; LMLOCS LISP
, and SYS: CHAOS; HOSTS TXT
.
SYS: CHAOS; HOSTS TXT
is the network host table. It gives the names
and addresses of all hosts that are to be known to the Lisp Machine for any
purposes. It also says what type of machine the host is, and what operating
system runs on it.
SYS: SITE; LMLOCS LISP
specifies various information about the Lisp
Machines at your site, including its name, where it is physically located,
and what the default machine for logging in should be.
SYS: SITE; SITE LISP
specifies all other site-specific information.
Primarily, this is contained in a call to the special form defsite
.
This special form defines the values of site-specific options, and also gives the name of the site. Each site-option is a symbol, normally in the keyword package, which is the name of some site option. value is the value for that option; it is evaluated. Here is a list of standardly defined site options:
:sys-host
The value is a string, the name of the host on which the system source
files are stored. This host becomes the translation of logical host SYS
.
:sys-host-translation-alist
The value is an alist mapping host names into translation-list variables.
Each translation list variable’s value should be an alist suitable for being
the third argument to fs:add-logical-pathname-host
(see
fs:add-logical-pathname-host-fun). The car of an element may be nil
instead of a host name; then this element applies to all hosts not
mentioned.
The normal place to find the system sources is on the host specified by the
:sys-host
keyword, in the directories specified by the translation list
variable found by looking that host up in the value of the
:sys-host-translation-alist
keyword. If you specify a different host
as the system host with si:set-sys-host
, that host is also looked
up in this alist to find out what directories to use there.
Here is what is used at MIT:
(defsite :mit ... (:sys-host-translation-alist '(("AI" . its-sys-pathname-translations) ("OZ" . oz-sys-pathname-translations) ("FS" . its-sys-pathname-translations) ("LM" . its-sys-pathname-translations) (nil . its-sys-pathname-translations))) ...)
(defconst oz-sys-pathname-translations '(("CC;" "<L.CC>") ("CHAOS;" "<L.CHAOS>") ("DEMO;" "<L.DEMO>") ... ("SITE;" "<L.SITE>") ("SYS;" "<L.SYS>") ("SYS2;" "<L.SYS2>") ... ("ZMAIL;" "<L.ZMAIL>") ("ZWEI;" "<L.ZWEI>") ))
:sys-login-name
:sys-login-password defsite
These specify the username and password to use to log in automatically to read system patch files, microcode symbol tables and error tables. The values should be strings.
:chaos
nil
if the site has no Chaosnet; otherwise, a string,
the name of the Chaosnet that the site is on. Names for Chaosnets
will eventually be used to permit communication between Chaosnets,
probably through special gateway servers. Except when multiple
sites are on a single Chaosnet, normally the Chaosnet name
should be the same as the site name (but as a string, not a symbol).
:standalone
The value should be t
for a Lisp Machine that is operated without
a network connection. This causes the Lisp Machine to not to try to
use the Chaosnet for getting the time. On the Lambda, the time will
obtained from the SDU’s clock. On the CADR, the time will be obtained
from the user.
:default-associated-machine
This should be a string which is the name of a host to use as the associated host for any Lisp Machine not mentioned in the LMLOCS file.
:usual-lm-name-prefix
This should be a string which is the typical beginning of host names of
Lisp Machines at your site. At MIT, it is "CADR-"
.
:chaos-file-server-hosts
This should be a list of names of hosts that have file servers, including Lisp Machines which other Lisp Machines should know about.
:lmfile-server-hosts
This should be a list of names of Lisp Machines that provide servers for the LMFILE file system. The entry for such a machine should be one of the nicknames of that machine. By virtue of its presence in this list, it becomes the name by which the LMFILE file system there can be accessed remotely.
:chaos-time-server-hosts
This should be a list of names of hosts that support TIME servers. These are hosts that the Lisp Machine can ask the time of day from when you boot.
:chaos-host-table-server-hosts
This should be a list of names of hosts that support host-table servers, which can be used to inquire about hosts on networks that the Lisp Machine does not know about in its own host table.
:chaos-mail-server-hosts
This should be a list of names of hosts that support mail servers which are capable of forwarding mail to any known host.
:timezone
This should be a number, the number of hours earlier than GMT of standard time in the timezone where this site is located.
:host-for-bug-reports
This should be a string, the name of the host at which bug-report mailboxes are located.
:local-mail-hosts
This should be a list of names of hosts that ZMail should consider “local” and omit from its summary display.
:spell-server-hosts
This should be a list of hosts that have spelling corrector servers.
:comsat
This should be t
if mail can be sent through the COMSAT mail demon.
This is true only at MIT.
:default-mail-mode
This should be the default mode for use in sending mail.
The options are :file
(use COMSAT), :chaos
(use one of the
:chaos-mail-server-hosts
), or :chaos-direct
(like :chaos
, but
go direct to the host that the mail is addressed to whenever possible).
:gmsgs
This should be t
if GMSGS servers are available.
:arpa-gateways
This should be a list of names of hosts that can be used as gateways to the
Arpanet. These hosts must provide a suitable Chaosnet server which will
make Arpanet connections. It should be nil
if your site does not have
an Arpanet connection.
:arpa-contact-name
If you have Arpanet gateways, this is the Chaosnet contact name to use.
Nowadays, it should be "TCP"
.
:dover
This should be t
if your site has a Dover printer.
:default-printer
This should be a keyword which describes
the default printer for hardcopy
commands and functions to use. Possible values include :dover
,
nil
, or any other printer type that you define (see hardcopy).
:default-bit-array-printer
Like :default-printer
, but this is the default for only hardcopy-bit-array
to use.
:esc-f-arg-alist
This says what various numeric arguments to the Terminal F
command
mean. It is a list of elements, one for each possible argument.
The car of an element is either a number or nil
(which applies to
Terminal F
with no argument). The cdr is either :login
(finger the login host), :lisp-machines
(finger all Lisp Machines at
this site), :read
(read some hosts from the keyboard), or a list of
host names.
:verify-lm-dumps
If the value is t
, Lisp Machine file system dump tapes are
verified.
Other site options are allowed, and your own software can look for them.
To update the site files, you must first recompile the sources. Do this by
(make-system 'site 'compile)
This also loads the site files.
To just load the site files, assuming they are compiled, do
(make-system 'site)
load-patches
does that automatically.
You should never load any site file directly. All the files must be loaded in the proper fashion and sequence, or the machine may stop working.
Programs examine the site options using these variables and functions:
The value of this variable is the name of the site you are running at, as
defined in the defsite
in the SITE
file. You can use this in run-time
conditionals for various sites.
Returns the value of the site option keyword.
The value is nil
if keyword is not mentioned in the SITE
file.
Defines a variable named variable whose value is always the same as
that of the site option keyword. When new site files are loaded,
the variable’s value is updated. documentation is the variable’s
documentation string, as in defvar
.
Defines a variable named variable whose value is a list of host objects
specified by the site option keyword. The value actually specified in
the SITE
file should be a list of host names. When new site files are
loaded, the variable’s value is updated. documentation is the
variable’s documentation string, as in defvar
.
The LMLOCS
file contains an entry for each Lisp Machine at your
site, and tells the system whatever it needs to know about the
particular machine it is running on. It contains one form, a
defconst
for the variable machine-location-alist
. The value
should have an element for each Lisp Machine, of this form:
("MIT-LISPM-1" "Lisp Machine One" "907 [Son of CONS] CADR1's Room x6765" (MIT-NE43 9) "OZ" ((:default-printer :dover)))
The general pattern is
(host-full-name pretty-name location-string (building floor) associated-machine site-options)
The host-full-name is the same as in the host table.
The pretty-name is simply for printing out for users on certain occasions.
The location-string should say where to find the machine’s console,
preferably with a telephone number. This is for the FINGER
server
to provide to other hosts.
The building and floor are a somewhat machine-understandable version of the location.
The associated-machine is the default file server host name for login on this Lisp Machine.
site-options is a list of site options, just like what goes in the
defsite
. These site options apply only to the particular machine,
overriding what is present in the SITE
file. In our example, the
site option :default-printer
is specified as being :dover
, on
this machine only.
The host object for the associated machine of this Lisp Machine.
This section describes the format in which objects are stored in the Lisp Machine.
This section describes the Lisp Machine’s interpreted order code, referred to below as "macrocode." The macrocode is designed to be highly bit-efficient, and well-suited to Lisp. The compilation of Lisp into macrocode is very straightforward, as will be shown in examples below.
This is a list of currently known errors and changes that differ from the sixth edition of the Lisp Machine manual. As I find more errors, I will document them here, and update the document with the correct information. Feel free to send suggestions, improvements, and errors to BUG-LISPM.
Jump to: | -
:
"
(
@
*
/
\
%
^
+
<
=
>
1
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
Jump to: | -
:
"
(
@
*
/
\
%
^
+
<
=
>
1
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
Jump to: | -
:
*
/
%
+
A B C D E F G I L M O P Q R S T U V W Z |
---|
Jump to: | -
:
*
/
%
+
A B C D E F G I L M O P Q R S T U V W Z |
---|